BRITISH STANDARD BS767ll.

2018

Requirements for
Electrical Installations

IET Wiring Regulations

Eighteenth Edition

Ef ",*".ixl.'fi t'iii$lff *,rfi ,:{*f,'r,oJi',li'i:8f,r,:f"*' bsi.

 Publication nformation I

Published by the lnstitution of Engineering and Technology. London, United Kingdom in agreement with BSL

The Institution olEngineering and Technology is registered as a Charity in England & Wales (no. 211014) and
Scotland (no. SC038698).

The Institution of Engineering and Technology is the institution formed in 2006 by the joining

I together of the IEE (the Institution of Electrical Engineers) and the IIE (the Institution of
Incorporated Engineers).

I O British Standards Institution is the independent national body responsible for preparing British
view on standards in Europe and at the intemational level. rt is
DSl. ilffffJilJ#ffiI:H.r.:
e 2008. 201 1, 20i3, 20i5, 2018 the Institution ofEngineering and Technology and BSI

This British Standard was published under the joint authority of the IET and of the Standards Policy and Strategy
Committee on 1 July 2018.
This publication is copyright under the Berne Convention and the Universal Copyright Convention. A11 rights
reserved. Aparl from any fair dealing for the purposes olresearch or private study, or criticism or review, as permitted
under the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 this publication may be reproduced, stored or transmitted. in
any form or by any means, only with the prior permission in writing of the publishers, or in the case of reprographic
reproduction in accordance with the terms of licences issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency. Enquiries
conceming reproduction outside those terms should be sent to the publishers at The lnstitution of Engineering and
Technoiogy, Michael Faraday House, Six Hills Way, Stevenage. SG1 2AY, United Kingdom

While the publisher and contributors believe that the infomation and guidance given in this work is correct, all
parties must rely upon their own skill and judgement when making use of it. The publisher and contributors do not
assume any liability to anyone for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission in the work, whether such
error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed.
The UK participation in its preparation was entrusted to Joint Technical Committee JPEL164 Electrical lnstallations.
A list of organizations represented on this committee can be obtained on request to its secretary.
Thrs publication does not purport to include all the necessary provisions of a contract. Users are responsible for its
correct application. Compliance with a British Standard cannot confer immunity from lega1 obligations.

The IET is taking the issues found with dangerous counterleits of its titles very seriously. The hologram
on the inside cover of this book provides an additional measure to help our cLrstomers identify counterfeit
versions. For more information on counterfeits, the hologram and how to identify genuine IET publications,
vi sit w'ww.thei et. org/counterfeit-re gs

It is the constant aim of the IET and BSI to improve the quality of our products and services. We should be grateful
if anyone finding an inaccuracy or ambiguity while using this British Standard would infonn the Secretary,
G D Cronshaw r,gcronshaw@theiet.org). The IET, Six Hills Way, Stevenage, SG1 2AY United Kingdom.

IET Standards & Compliance staff

as at June 20 1 8
JPEL164 Joint IET/BSI Technical Committee C D Cronshau CEng FIET
Electrical Installations
JPEL164,A Verification Eur Ing Leon Markwell MSc, BSc(Hons),
CEng. MIET. MCIBSE, LCGI
JPEL.64iB Thennal Effects Eur Ing Leon Marku,ell MSc, BSc(Hons).
CEng, MIET, MCIBSE, LCGI
JPELr64/C Shock Protection S G Devine MIET
JPEL/64rD Extemal lnfluences M Coles BEng(Hons) MIET
Associate secretary to al1 subcommittees G Gundry MIET

ISBN 978-1 -7 8561 -17 0-4 (paperback)

ISBN 978-l-7 8561-17 l-l (electronic)
Proofread by P E Donnachie BSc CEng FIE,T and Gary Gundr,v MIET

Trpg5gl in the L'K br the Institution of Er.rgineering and Tecl.rnologr. Ster ena_ee

'' ' r. r "' ..:' '- \ -::.

':.r..
1.. t. !1,.11. C R_l4) l\'\-

k bi_
 CONTENTS
-":. -.'..- :: 3S 1671 :20T8 4
PART 1 SCOPE. OBJECTAND FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES 't4
:-r:-:R 11 SCOPE 15
:-:P_ER 12 OBJECTAND EFFECTS 17
.-APTER13 FUNDAI\,IENTALPRINCIPLES 17
PART 2 DEFINITIONS 24
PART 3 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 44
CHAPTER 31 PURPOSES, SUPPLIESAND STRUCTURE 45
CHAPTER 32 CLASSIFICATION OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES 5o
CHAPTER33 COI\4PATIBILITY 5'1
CHAPTER 34 [4AINTAINABILITY 51
CHAPTER 35 SAFETY SERVICES 52
CIAPTER 36 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE 52
PART 4 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY 53
a-::-:R;' PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK 55
l-::-:R tr2 PROTECTION AGAINSTTHERMAL EFFECTS 79
^- :
=-: R :3 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT 86
:_::_:R i4 PROTECTIONAGAINSTVOLTAGE DISTURBANCESAND ELECTROI\IAGNETIC DISTURBANCES 95
:_::_=R.16 ISOLATIONAND SW]TCHING 121
PART 5 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT 124
--.;TER 51 COI\,lI\,4ON RULES
]TAPTER 52 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS 136
3IAPTER 53 PROTECT1ON, ISOLAIION, SWITCHING. CONTROL AND I\,4ONITORING 152
3..IAPTER 54 EARTHING ARRANGEI!1ENTS AND PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS 193
]-,IAPTER 55 OTHER EOUIPIVENT 244
:.IAPTER 56 SAFETY SERVICES
PART 6 INSPECTION AND TESTING 228
]HAPTER 61 NOT USED 229
CHAPTER 62 NOT USED 229
CHAPTER 63 NOT USED 229
CHAPTER 64 INITIAL VERIFICATION 230
CHAPTER 65 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING
PART 7 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS OR LOCATIONS 239
SECT]ON 7OO GENERAL 239
SECT]ON 701 LOCATIONS CONTAINING A BATH OR SHOWER 240
SECTION 702 SWII\,4I\,4ING POOLS AND OTHER BASINS 245
SECTION 703 ROOMSAND CABINS CONTAINING SAUNAHEAIERS
SECTION 704 CONSTRUCT]ON AND DEI\,4OLITION SITE INSTALLATIONS 256
SECTION 705 AGRICULTURAL AND HORTICULTURAL PREI\,4ISES 258
SECTION 706 CONDUCTING LOCATIONS WITH RESTRICTED I\,4OVEI\IENT 263
SECTION 708 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN CARAVAN / CAI\,4PING PARKS
AND SII\,1ILAR LOCATIONS 265
SECT ON 709 I\,4ARINAS AND SIIVILAR LOCATIONS 270
SECTION 710 ]\4EDICAL LOCATIONS
SECTION 711 EXHIBITIONS. SHOWS AND STANDS
SECTION 712 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWERSUPPLY SYSTEIVS 288
SECTION 714 OUTDOOR LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS 293
SECTION 715 EXTRA-LOWVOLTAGELIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
SECTION 717 I\,1OBILE OR TRANSPORTABLE UNITS 298
SECTJON 721 ELECTR]CAL INSTALLATIONS IN CARAVANSAND IVOTOR CARAVANS 306
SECTION 722 ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING INSTALLATJONS 316
SECTION 729 OPERATING AND ]!lAINTENANCE GANGWAYS 320
SECTION 730 ONSHORE UN]TS OF ELECTRICAL SHORE CONNECTIONS FOR INLAND NAVIGATION VESSELS 325
SECTION 740 TEI\4PORARY ELECTRICAL ]NSTALLATIONS FOR STRUCTURES. AI\,4USEMENT DEVICESAND BOOTHSAT FAIRGROUNDS
AI\,4USEMENT PARKS AND CIRCUSES
SECTION 753 HEATING CABLESAND EIVBEDDED HEATING SYSTEfulS 335
APPENDICES 339
1 (Normaiive) BRITISH STANDARDS TO WHTCH REFERENCE tS |\,4ADE tN THtS STANDARD ua
2 (lnformative) STATUTORY REGULATIONS AND ASSOCTATED t\,4EMORANDA 359
3 (INfOTMAIiVE) TII\,4E/CURRENT CHARACTERiSTICS OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND RCDS 362
4 (lnformatve) CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACTTYAND VOLTAGE DROp FOR CABLES
5 (lnformatlve) CLASSIFICATION OF EXTERNAL TNFLUENCES 445
6 (lnformatlve) IVODEL FORI\.4S FOR CERTtFtCAT|ON AND REPORTtNG 461
7 (lnformative) HARI\,4ONlZED CABLE CORE COLOURS 484
8 (INfOTMAIiVE) CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY AND VOLTAGE DROP FOR BUSBAR TRUNKiNG AND POWERTRACK SYSTEI\,4S 487
9 (lnformative) DEFINITIONS - MULTIPLE SOURCE, DC AND OTHER SYSTEt\,4S 489
10 (lnformative) PROTECTION OF CONDUCTORS tN PARALLELAGATNST OVERCURRENT 497
11 NOT USED 501
12 NOT USED 501
13 (lnformative) l\4ETHODS FOR l\,4EASURtNG THE TNSULATTON ... 502
14 (lnformatlve) DETERI\,4lNAT|ON OF PROSPECTIVE FAULT CURRENT 504
15 (lnformative) RING AND RADIAL FINAL CIRCUIT ARRANGET\,4ENTS, REGULATTON 433 1 505
16 (lnformative) DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST OVERVOLTAGE 507
17({nformative) ENERGYEFFICIENCY 513
TABLE OF FIGURES 518
TABLE OF TABLES 522
INDEX 525
 Foreword
This British Standard is published under the direction ol the British Electrotechnical Cornmittee (BEC) and the
Institution of Engineering and Technology (IET).

Following a full review, this Standard replaced the 17th EdrtLtn of the IEE Wiring Regr.rlations BS 7671:2008 as
amended. Copyright is held jointly by the IET and BSI.

Technical authority lor this Standard is vested in the .loint IET BSI Technical Comn.rittee IPEL164. This Joint
Technical Committee, which is responsible for the work pr.'r rously undertaken b1, the IEE Wiring Reguiations
Committee and the BSI Technical Committee PEL164. meets the constitutional and operational requirements of both
parent bodies. JPEL164 has the responsibility for the contenl t f thrs British Standald under the joint authority of the
IET and the BSI Standards Board.

All references in this text to the Wiring Regulations or the Regulation(s), where not otlieru,'ise specifically identified,
shall be taken to refer to BS 7671 :2018 Requirements lor E lectrical Installations.

Additions or alterations to the regulations owing to the issue of BS 7671:2018 ale rndicated by a side bar in the
margin.

lntroduction to BS 7671 .2018

BS 7671 :2018 Requirements for Electrical Installations u'as issued on 1st Julr l0l 8 and is intended to come into
effect on lst January 2019. Installations designed aftei 31st December 2018 are to comply with BS 7671:2018.

The Regulations apply to the design, erection and verification oi electrical installations. also additions and alterations
to existing installations. Existing installations that have been installed in accordance with earlier editions of the
Regulations may not comply with this edition in every respect. This does not necessarily mean that they are unsafe
for continued use or require upgrading.

A summary of the main changes is given below.

NOTE: This is not an exhaustive list.

Part 1 Scope, object and fundamental principles

Regulation 133.1.3 (Selection of equipment) has been modified and now requrres cer-tain usage of equipment to be
recorded on the appropriate electrical cerlification specified in Parr 6.

Part 2 Definitions

Definitions have been expanded and modified.

Chapter 41 Protection against electric shock

Section 41 1 contains a number of significant changes. Some of the main ones are lrentioned below.

Metallic pipes entering the building having an insulating section at their point of entn need not be connected to the
protective equipotential bonding (Regulation 411.3.1.2).

The maximum disconnection times stated in Table 41.1 nou.apply to final circtiits lated up to 63 Awitir one or
more socket-outlets and final circuits rated up to 32 A supplying only flxed connected current-using equipment
(Regulation 411.3.2.2).

Regulation 411.3.3 has been revised and now applies to socket-outlets riith a rated current not exceeding 32 A.
There is an exception to omit RCD protection where. other than for a du ellins. a documented risk assessment
determines that RCD protection is not necessary.

A ne'"v Regulation 411 .3.4 requires that, within domestrc {household) prer.nises. additional protection by an RCD
with a rated residual operating curent not exceedinS -10 rlA shall be plor ided for AC final circuits supplying
luminaires.

Regulation 411 .4.3 has an addition that states that no sri'itching or isolatrng der,ice shall be inserled in a PEN
conductor.

Regulations 411 .4.4 and 41 1.4.5 have been redrafted.

The regulations concerning IT systems (411.6) l.iare Lreen reorganized. Regulations 411.6.3.1 and411.6.3.2 have
been deleted and 4l 1 .6.4 redrafted and a neu. Reculalirrl .11 1.6.5 inserted.

t
 -. i ' P.3:,il.irtrr lrrr.rF ligrhas been Lnsened u.here autornatic disconnection according to Regulation 411.3.2 is
. .;-::,r-r'. such as r'i-clrtrnic equipr11E111 ri'rth limited short-ctrcuit current.

C'hapter -12 Protection against thermal effects

- :--:'.'' Regtiiation -12 L 1 .7 has been introduced recommending the installation of arc fault detection devices (AFDDs)
: r:tlil gate the risk of fire in AC final circuits of a fixed installation due to the effects of arc fault culrents.

R.e_iiilation +ll.l.1 has been redrafted. Reference to conditions BD2, BD3 and BD4 has been deleted. Anote has
reen added stating that cables need to satisfy the requirements of the CPR in respect of their reaction to lire and
naktng teftrence to Appendix 2, item 17. ReqLrirements have also been included for cables that are supplying safety
i rclttts.
''

Chapter 44 Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances

Section -143. u,hich deals rvith protection against overvoltages olatmospheric origin or due to switching, has been
redrafted.

The AQ criteria (conditions of external influence for lightning) for determining if protection against transient
or ert'oltages is needed are no longer included. lnstead, protection against transient oven-oltages has to be provided
n'here the consequence caused by overvoltage (see Regulation 443.4):
t

(i) could result in serious injury to, or loss of, human life, or i

(ii) could result in intenuption of public sericesior damage to and cultural heritage, or
l

(iii) could result in interruption of commercial or industrial activity, or

(iv) could aff-ect a large number of co-located individuals.

For all other cases, a risk assessment has to be perforred in order to determine if protection against transient
overvoltage is required.

There is an exception not to provide protection for single dwelling units in certain situations.

Chapter 46 Isolation and srvitching

A new Chapter 46 has been introduced. Thrs deals with non-automatic local and remote isolation and switching
measures for the prevention or removal of dangers associated with electrical installations or electrically powered
equipment. Also. switching for the control of circuits or equipment. Where electrically powered equipment is within
the scope of BS EN 60204. only the requirements of that standard apply.

Chapter 52 Selection and erection of rviring systems

Regulation 521 .10.202, which gives requirements fbr the methods of support of wiring systems, has replaced
Regulation 521.11.201. This is a significant change. Regulation 521 .10.202 requires cables to be adequately
supported against their premature collapse in the event of a fire and applies throughout the installation, not just in
escape routes as previously.

Regniation 521 .1.3 has also been modified, and a note added stating that cables also need to satisfy the requirements
of the CPR in respect of their reaction to fire.

Chapter 53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

This chapter has been completely revised and deals with general requirements for protection, isolation, switching.
I

control ar.rd monitoring and with the requirements for selection and erection of the devices provided to fuifil such
functions.

Section 534 Devices for protection against overvoltage

This section locuses mainly on the requirements for the selection and erection of SPDs for protection against
transient overvoltages where required by Section 143,the BS EN 62305 series, or as otherwise stated. Section 534
has been completely revised. The most significant technical change refers to the selection requirements for the
voltage protection 1evel.

Chapter 54 Earthing arrangements and protective conductors

Trvo new regulations (512.2.3 and 542.2.8) have been introduced conceming eafih electrodes.

Chapter 55 Other equipment

Regulation 550.1 introduces a new scope.

Ne'"v Regulation 559.10 refers to ground-recessed luminaires, the selection and erection of which shall take account
of the gr,ridance given in TableA.l of BS EN 60598-2-13.

Part 6 Inspection and testing

Part 6 has been completely restructured, including the regulation numbering to align with the CENELEC standard.
Chapters 61,62 and 63 have been deleted and their content now forms two new Chapters 64 and 65.

Section 704 Construction and demolition site installations

This section contains a number of small changes, including requirements for external influences (Regulation
104.512.2), and a nTodification to Regulation 704.410.3.6 to include the non-use of the protective measure of
electrical separation.

Section 708 Electrical installations in caravan/camping parks and similar locations

This section contains a number of changes including requirements fbr socket-outlets, RCD protection, and
operational conditions and exterlal influences.

Section 710 Medical locations

This section contains a number of sn,all changes including the removal of Table 710. and changes to Regulations
710.415.2.1 to 710.415.2.3 concerning equipotential bonding. ln addition. a new Regulationil0.42l .1.201 states
requirements regarding the installation of AFDDs.

Section 715 Extra-low voltage lighting installationS

This section contains only minor changes including modifications to Regulation 715.524.201 .

Section 721 Electrical installations in caravans and motor caravans

This section contains a number of changes to the requirernents concerling electrical separation, RCDs, proximity to
non-electrical sen'ices and protective bonding conductors.

Section 722 Electric vehicle charging installations

This section contains significant changes to Regulation 722.411.4.1 concen,ing the use of a PME supply. The
exception conceming reasonably practicable has been deleted. Changes have also been made to requirements for
erternal inflr,rences, RCDs, socket-outlets and connectors.

Section 730 Onshore units of electrical shore connections for inland navigation vessels

This is an entirely neu, sectiolr. Section 730 applies to onshore installations dedicated to the supply of inland
navigation vessels lbr commercial and administrative purposes, berthed in porls and berths. Most, if not all. of the
measures used to reduce the risks in marinas apply equally to electrical shore connections for inland navigation
vessels. One of the major differences betu,'een supplies to vessels in a typical marina and electrical shore connections
for inland navigation vessels is the size ofthe supply needed.

Section 753 Heating cables and embedded heating systems

This retitled section has been completely revised. The scope of Section 753 has been extended to apply to embedded
electric heating systelns for surlace heating. The requirements aiso apply to electric heating systems for de-icing,
frost prevention and similar applications, and cover both indoor and outdoor systems. Heating systems for industrial
and comr.nercial applications complying u,'ith BS EN 605 19, BS EN 62395 and BS EN 60079 are not covered.

Appendices

The follorving main changes have been made u,ithin the appendices:

Appendix I British Standards to vn hich reference is made in the Regulations has been updated, as necessary.

Appendix 3 Time/current characteristics of overcurrent protective devices and RCDs

The previous content of Appendix l4 conceming earth fault loop impedance has been moved into Appendix 3.

Appendir 6 Model forms for certiflcation and reporting

This appendix includes minor changes to the certificates. changes to the inspections (for new installation work
only) for domestic and similar premises with up to 100 A supply, and examples of items requiring inspection lor an
electrical installation condition report.
.\ppendix 8 Current-carrving capacity and voltage drop for busbar trunking and powertrack systems

Tni. appendix inciudes changes regarding rating lactors for curent-carrying capacity.

-\ppendix 14 Determination of prospective fault current

\s stated earlier, the content of Appendix 14 concerning earth far.rlt loop impedance has been moved into
.\ppendix 3. Appendix 1zl now contains infonnation on the determination of prospective fault curent.

.\ppendix 17 Energy efficiency

This is a new appendix that provides recommendations for the design and erection of electrical installations,
:rcluding installations having local production and storage of energy, for optimizing the overall efficient use ol
.'1 er-tri c it1z.

The recommendations within the scope of this appendix apply for new electrical installations and modification of
I
errsting electrical installations. Much of this appendix will not apply to domestic and similar installations.

It is intended that this appendix will be developed into Parl 8 of BS 1671 in a future amendment.
 Ed itions
The lollou ing editions hai e been published:
FIRST EDITiON Errtitled'Rules ancl Regulations for the Prevention ofFire Risks Arising from Electric Lightingl
Issued in 1 882.

SECOND EDITION Issued in 1888.

THIRD EDITION Entitlecl 'General Rules recommended for \Viring for the Supply of Electrical Energyl Issued in
1 897.

FOURTH EDITION Issued in 1903.

FIFTH EDITION Entitled'Wirir-rg Rulesl lssued in 1907.

SIXTH EDITION Issuedin 1911.
SEVENTH EDITION issued in 1916.

EIGHTH EDITION Entitled'Regulations for the Electrical Equipment ofBuildingsl issued in 1924.
NINTH EDITION Issued in 1927.

TE,NTH EDITION Issued in 1934.

ELEVENTH EDITION Issued in 1939.

Revised, issued in 19,13.
Reprinted rr.ith minor Amendments, 1945.
Supplement issued, 19.16.
Revised Section 8 issued, 1948.

TWELFTH ED]TION Issued in 1950.

Supplement issuecl, 1954.

THiRTEENTH EDITION Issued in 1955.

Reprinted 1958, 1961, 1962 and 1964.
FOURTEENTH EDITION Issued in 1966.
Reprinted rncorporating An-rendrr-rents, 1 968.
Reprinted incorporating Amendments, 1969.
Supplement on use in metric terms issued, 1969.
Amendments issued, I970.
Reprinted in metric units incorporating Amendments, 1970.
Reprinted i972.
Reprinted 1973.
Amendments issued, 197.1.
Reprinted incorporating Amendments, 197.1.
Amendments issuecl, 1976.
Reprinted incorporating Amendrr-rents, 1976.
FIFTEENTH EDITiON Entitled'Regulations for Electrical Installationsl
Issued in 1981. (Red Cover)
Amendments issued, 1 lanuarv 1983.
Reprinted incorporating Amendments, 1983. (Green Cover)
Arrendments issued, 1 N'1a1' 1984.
Reprinted incorporating Arlendments, 198,1. (Yellow Cover)
Amendments issued, 1 .lanuar,v 198-5.
Amendments issued, I .fanuary 1986.
Reprinted incorporating Amendments, 1986. (B1ue Cover)
Amendments issued, 12 lune 1987.
Reprinted incorporating Amendrnents, 1987. (Brou,n Cover)
Repnnted n,ith minor corrections, 1988. (Brorvn Cover)
SIXTEENTH EDITION Issued in 1991. (Red Cover)
Reprinted with minor corrections, 1992. (Red Cor.er)
Entitled and reprinted as'Requirements tbr Electrical Installations BS 7671:1992'. (Red Cor.er)
Amendment No 1 issued, December 1994.
Reprinted incorporirting Amendmcnt No 1, 199,1. (Green Cor.er)
Amendment No 2 issued, December 1997.
Reprinted incorporating Ar-nendment No 2, 1997. (Yellorv Cor.er)
Amendment No 3 issued, April 2000.
BS 7671:2001 issued, lune 2001. (Blue Cor.er)
Amendmer-rt No I issued, Februirry 2002.
Arnendment No 2 issued, NIarch 2004.
Reprinted incorporating Amendments 1 and 2, 2004. (Brolvn Cover)
SEVENTEENTH E,DITION BS 7671:2008 issued, Januirr,v 2008. (Red Cover)
Reprinted incorporating Anendment No I , 201 1 . (Creen Cover)
Amendment 2 issued, Aug 2013.
Reprinted incorporating Amendments 2 and 3, 201 5. (Yellorv Cover)
EIGHTEENTH EDITlON BS 7671:2018 issued, July 2018. (Blue Cover)
 Joint IET/BSI Technical Committee JPEL/64
CONSTITUTION as at June 2018

Eur Ing J T Bradley BSc CEng FIET FCIBSE (Chairrnan)

P Sayer CEng FIET GCGI (Deputy Chairman)

.for IET
Eur Ing G Kenyon BEng(Hons) CEng MIET TechIOSH

H R Lovegrove IEng FIET (Chair - JPEL/64/A)

D Wigley BEng(Hons) CEng FCIBSE. MIET

G G Willard DipEE CEng FIET JP (Chair JPEL/64/D)

G Digilio IEng FIEE ACIBSE MSLL

and

Eur Ing Dr K J Hawken DBA(Hons)CEng FIET FIAgTE MIoD MCGI (Agricultural Engineers Association)

S A MacConnacher B Sc CEng MIEE MlnstR (Association of Manufacturers of Domestic Appliances)

A Greer (Association of Manufacturers of Power Generating Systems)

C Marsland (Association of Manufacturers of Porver Generating Systems)

S Mason DipEE CEng MIET (British Approvals Service for Cables)

j M R Hagger BTech(Hons) AMIMMM (British Cables Association)

Eur Ing J Wright BEng CEng MIET (BEAMA Installation)

PNonjs MIET (BEAMA Ltd)

J Parsons MIET (BEAMA Ltd)

R Hanis (BEIS Department for Busiuess, Energy and Industrial Strategy)

I P Andrcws (BESA)

A SanTad Khan MEng (Hons) CEng MIET MIEEE (BSI liaison GEL 81' PEL 37/1)

G Winter (BT Technology Sen ice & Operations)

T Benstead MSc BEd MCIBSE MIET (Certsure LLP; Chair - JPEL/64/B)

M Darville BA(Hons) MIET (Certsure LLP)

Eur Ing J M Maltby-Smith BSc(Hons) PG Dip MBA Cerl Ed CEng MTET (Certsure LLP)

N Bird IEng MIET (Chair - JPEL/64/C)

DrA C M Sung BSc(Hons) MSc PhD CEng FIET FCIBSE STMIEEE MEI MHKIE(Ir) (CIBSE and EI)
K Sir.ir,varclhana BScEng (Hons), MSc. MBA, CEng. FIET. SMIEEE. MCIGRE (CIGRE-UK)

\l Doughton IEng MIET LCGI (City & Guilds of London Institute)

D hu.ir.r (DC Users Forulr.r)

K Spanor.v (EAL)

\l \\- Coates BEng (E R A Tcchnology Ltd)

R Giddings IEng MIET ACIBSE (ECA)

S \lartin MIET (ECA)

1 C .rirlcy IEng MIET (Elcctrical Contractors'Association of Scotiand t,/a SELECT)

I Fi,r'rester IEng MIET MInstLM (Electrical Contractors'Associatiou of Scotland t/a SELECT)

 NI Allen BEng(Hons ) CEn-e \IIET (Electrical Sat-et-v First)

D Spillett MIET MIOSH MIIRSM (Energy Networks Association)

R Wardak MIET (The GAMBICAAssociation Ltd)

G C T Pritchard BTech(Hons) CEng FILP MIET TechIOSH (HEA & ILP)

K J Morton BSc CEng FIET (Health and Safety Executive)

A Wells IEng MIET (Individual capacity Competent Persons Forum)

S Henry MICWCI EngTech TMIET (The Institute of Clerks of Works and Construction Inspectorate of GB)

Eur Ing p Harris BEng(Hons) FIHEEM MIEE MCIBSE (Institute of Healthcare Engineering and Estate Management)

R Jeffens (Intertek Cetification)

A Stone CEng MIET (Liaison - FSH/12)

M Cotterell (Liaison - GEL/82)

M Gilmore (Liaison - TCT/7)

L C BarHng (The Lighting Industry Association)

B A1lan BEng(Hons) CEng MIET (NAPIT)

F Berlie MIET (NAPIT)

I Storrar BSc CEng FCIBSE (NHS Scotland)

J Eade BEng(Hons) CEng MIET AMIMechE (Professional Lighting and Sound Association)

G Brindle BSc(Hons) CEng MIET CMILT (Railway Industry Association)

I Trueman CEng MSOE MBES MIET (Safety Assessment Federation - SAFed)

T Nicklin (Society of Motor Manufactr,rers and Traders Ltd)

C J Tanswell CEng MIEE MCIBSE (Society for Public Architecture, Construction, Engineering and Surveying
SPACES)

Secretorv

G D Cronshaw CEng FIET

10
 Preface
3S -r,-1:l0lg. Requirements tbr Electrical Installations, takes account of the technical substance of agreements

.:,;ie,l at CENELEC level in Harmonized Documents (HD). Where no CENELEC HD exists. IEC level documents
,:e taken rnto account. In particular, the technicai intent of the following CENELEC HDs and IEC documents is
:r;1uded:
Year Document reference BS 7671
HD or IEC
HD 60364-1 2008 Fundamental principles. assessment of ger-reral ..., definitions Parls l. 2, 3

2007 (20t7) Protcction against electric shock Chapter ,11

HD 6036,+-4-41 I

:lD 60364-4-42 2011 (201s) Protection against thermal eff-ects Chapterl2 I

2010 Protection against overcurrent Chapter 43

t{D 60364-4-43
IEC 6036,1-4-44 2007 (20 1 s) Introduction to voltage & elcctro disturbanccs Section 4,10 I

Protection of lorv voltage installations against temporatl oven'oltages " Section 442
HD 60364-4-442 2012
fD 60364-4-443 2016 Protection against overvoltages Section 443 I

Measures against elcctromagnetic disturbances Section 444

HD 60364-4-444 2012 I

Section 445
tEC 60364-4-41 2015 Protection against overvoltage I

Isolation and sr.i,itching Chapter 46

HD 60364-4-46 2016 I

2009 (2013) Selection and erectiott - Colnmon rules Chapter 51

HD 60364-5-51 I

HD 6036/t-5-52 201 1 Selection and ercction of wiring systems Chaptel52 I

HD 60364-5-53 2015 Protection. isolation, su'itching, control and monitoring 53

Cl.rapter I

Devices for protectiotl agail-rst overvoltage Section 534

HD 60364-5-534 201 6 I

201 l Earthing arrangements Chapter 54

HD 60364-5-54
HD 60364-5-551 2010 (2016) Low voltage gencrating sets 1
Section 55 I

Auxiliary circuits Section 557

HD 60364-5-557 201 3(20 l 6) I

2012 {2017) Outdoor li ghting installations Section 559

HD 60364-5-559 I

Initial verihcation Parl 6

HD 60364-6 20t6 I

Locations containing a bath or sho"ver Section 701

HD 60364-7-701 2007 (2011)
Swimming pools and other basins Section 702
HD 60364-7-702 2010
Sauna heaters Section 703
HD 60364-7-703 2005
Construction and demolition site installations Section 704
HD 60364-1-704 2007 (2008)
Agricultural and horticultural premises Section 705
.rD 60364-7-705 2007
Locations \\,ith restricted movement Section 706
tD 60361-1-706 2007
Caravan parks, camping parks and similar locations Section 708
FrrHD 60364-7-708 201'7

2010 (2012) Marinas artd sirrrilal locations Section 709

.{D 60364-7-709
2012 Medical locations Section 7I0
-D 60364-7-710
jD 2003 F.rhibitions" shou's and stands Section 71 1
-18,1.7.711 SI
':-D 200s Solar photovoltaic (PV) power supply systems Section 7I2
60364-1-'712
Section 7I4
:.) 60364-7 -1 14 20t2 Ouldoor liglrting installations
Extra-lorv voltage lighting installations Section 715
-) 60364-7-715 2012
Mobilc or tlatttpot'table units Section 7 17
-.D 60364-7-'717 2010 (2014)
Electrical installations in caravans and motor cal'avans Section 721
'::IEC 60364-7 -121 2017
Scction 722
..) 60361-7-722 2016 Supply of clectric vehicles
Section 729
.) 60361-7-129 2009 Operating and maintenance gangways
r) 60_164-7-730 2015 Onshore units of electncal shore conncctions for irrland navigatior-r Section 730
vessels
:) 2006 Temporary electrical installations for structures. amusement deviccs Section 7210
^{)361-7-740 and booths at lail'grounds. amllsemcnt parks and circuscs
Section 753
- l o0-164-7-753 2014 Heating cables and embedded heating systenls
Appx
:l "rt,164-5-5 1 200e (2013) Extemal influcnces 5

Appx
:l -:uE 52 200 1 Identification of cot'es, in cables and flexible colds 7

: lr rtt,16;1-8-1 2015 Energy elficienc1, Appx 17

- r Jittes inbrackets referto the year of issue of amendments to the doculnents'

11
 \\.here the aboYe documents contain UK special national conditions. those conditrons har.e been
incorporated

within BS 767 i . If BS 167 I is applied in other countries the above documents should be consulted
to confim the I

status of a particular regulation'

of new or al11ended
BS 7671 will continue to be amended from time to time to take account of the publication
has been taken to revise regulations that experience has shown
CENELEC and IEC standards. The opportunity
require clarification or to allow for new technology and methods'

Reference is made throughout BS 7671 to publications of the British Standards

Institution. both specifications and
codes of practice. eppendix 1 lists these publications and gives their full
titles whereas throughout BS 7671 they
are refered to only by their numbers.

Where reference is made in BS 7671 to a British Standard which takes account

ola CENELEC Harmonization
also relates to any European
Document, European Nonn (EN) or IEC standard, it is understood that the reference
I

needs to be taken of any

national standard similarly derived from the CENELEC standard, although account
national exemPtions.

12

tr, - ,r f,=_
 Note by the Health and Safety Executive
'etv Erecr.rtir.e
lHSE) welcomes the publication of BS 7671:2018, Requiirements for Electrical
tHSE
.. ::irrus. tET Wiiing Regulations 18th Edition. BS 7671 and the IET/IEE Wiring Regulations have been
r: ::\el' rettrred to in HSE guidance over the years. Installations which confotm to the standards iaid down
r> -(.-1:101g are regarded by HSE as likely to achieve conformity with the relevant parts of the Eiectricity at
.. Regulations 1989. Existing installations may have been designed and installed to conform to the standards
.,. -..,11i.. editions of BS 767 I or the IEE wiring Regulations. This does not mean that they will fail to achieve
:-.,-,:r.nin n'ith the relevant pans of the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989.

Notes on the plan of the 18th Edition

- ..s Edition is based on the plan agreed intemationally for the arangement of safety rules for electrical instailations'
-.: r.egr.rlation numbering follows the pattern and corresponding references of IEC 60364. The numbering does hot,
- ...1-*." necessarily follow sequentially. The numbering system used in Part 7 is explained in Section 700'

:' ,re numbering system used, the first digit signifies digit a Chapter, the third digit a Section and
a Par1, the second
-: .ubsequent digits the Regulation number. For example, Section number 413 is made up as follows:

PART 4 - PROTECTION FOR SAFETY

Chapter 41 (first chapter of Part 4) - PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

Section 413 (third section of Chapter4l) - PROTECTIVE MEASURE: ELECTRICAL SEPARATION

Part 1 sets out the scope, object and fundamental principles.

Part 2 defines the sense in which celtain terms are used throughout the Regulations, and provides
a of
symbols used and a list of abbreviations used in the Standard'

. ::: subjects of the subsequent pafis are as indicated below:

Part Subject
Part 3 Identification of the characteristics of the installation that will need to be taken into account in
choosing and applying the requirements of the subsequent Parts. These characteristics may vary
from one parl olan installation to another and should be assessed for each location to be served by
the installation.
Part 4 Description of the measures that are available for the protection of persons, livestock and property,
and against the hazards that may arise from the use of electricity.
Part 5 precautions to be taken in the selection and erection of the equipment of the installation.

Part 6 Inspection and testing.

ParlT Special installations or locations - particular requirements'

-':re sequence of the plan should be followed in considering the application

of any particular requirement of the
?:.:sulations.
-,r The general index provides a ready reference to particular regulations by subject, but in applying any
gulations should be bome in mind. Cross-references are provided, and
:-.e regulatiion the requirements of related regulations s

:-.: index is arranged to facilitate this.

-r 11any cases! a group of associated regulations is covered by a side heading which is identified
by a two-part
--.nrber, e.g. 544.i. Throughout the Regulations where reference is made to such a two-part number, that reference
: :o be taken to include uil th. indiuidual regulation numbers which are covered by that side heading and include
:r ,l tu'o-par1 number.

.:.. Regulations use the IEC decimal point numbering system to make it easier to embody future changes
and
.
,rl1rlo11s resulting from ongoing international standards work within IEC and CENELEC' In order to identify and
regulations carry either a 100 or 200 number where 100 numbers represent
:-.rrlnlrrodate future IEC changer some
-:\ELEC Harmonization Document reference numbers and 200 numbers represent UK-only regulations.
Some
'updated'to indicate 100 and 200 numbers; that will only be done when those regulations
::.rlarions have not been
'- -,-,ire a significant rewrite.

13
 PART 1

SCOPE, OBJECT AND FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

CONTENTS
CHAPTER I1 SCOPE
110.1 GENERAL
110.2 EXCLUSIONS FROM SCOPE
113 EQUIPMENT
't'14 RELATIONSHIP WITH STATUTORY REGULATIONS
115 INSTALLATIONS IN PREMISES SUBJECT TO LICENSING

CHAPTER 12 OBJECT AND EFFECTS

120 GENERAL

CHAPTER 13 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

13'l PROTECTION FOR SAFEW
131 .1 General
131.2 Protection against electric shock
131 .3 Protection against thermal effects
131.4 Protection against overcurrent
13't.5 Protection against fault current
131 .6 Protection against voltage disturbances and measures against electromagnetic
disturbances
131 .7 Protection against power supply interruption
132 DESIGN
132.1 General
132.2 Characteristics of available supply or supplies
I JZ,5 Nature of demand
132.4 Electrical supply syslems for safety services or standby electrical supply systems
132.5 Environmental conditions
I JZ.O Cross-sectional area of conductors
132.7 Type of wiring and method of installation
Protective equipment
132.9 Emergency control
132.10 Disconnecting devices
132.11 Prevention of mutual detrimental influence
132.12 Accessibility of electrical equipment
132.13 Documentation for the electrical installation
132.14 Protective devices and switches
132.15 lsolation and switching
132.16 Additions and alterations to an installation
'133 SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
133.1 General
133.2 Characteristics
IJJ.J Conditions of installation
Prevention of harmful effects
133.5 New materials and inventions
134 ERECTION AND INITIAL VERIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
134.1 Erection
lnitial verification
PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING

14
 PART 1

SCOPE, OBJECT AND FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

CHAPTER 11

SCOPE
110.1 GENERAL
110.1.1 The Regulations apply to the design, erection and verification ofelectrical installations such as those of:
(D residential premises
(ii) commercial premises
(iii) public premises
(iv) industrial premises
(") prefabricated buildings
(vi) low voltage generating sets
(vii) highway equipr.nent and street fumiture
(viii) locations containirg a bath or shower
(ix) swimming pools and other basins
(x) rooms and cabins containing sauna heaters
(xi) construction and demolition sites
(xii) aglicultural and horticultural premises
(xiii) corducting locations with restricted movement
(xiv) caravan / camping parks and similar locatious
(*.r) malinas and similar locations
(xvi) medical locations
(xvii) exhibitions. shows and stands
(xviii) solar photovoltaic (PV) power supply systems
(xix) outdoor lighting
(xx) extra-low voltage lighting
(xxi) mobile or transpoftable units
(rxii) caravans and motor caravans
(xxiii) electric vehicle charging
(xxiv) operating and maintenance gangways
irixv) tempomry installations for stmctures, amusement devices and booths at fairgrounds, a[.rusement parks and
circuses including professional stage and broadcast applications
(rxvi) floor and ceiling heating systems
(xxvii) onshore units of electrical shore connections for inland navigation vessels.
NOTE: "Premises" covers the land and all facilities including buildings belongirlg to it.

'l'10,1.2 The Regulations include requirements for:

(i) circuits supplied at nominal voltages up to and including 1000 V AC or 1500 V DC. For AC, the preferred
frequencies which are taken into account in this Standard are 50 Hz, 60 Hz and 400 Hz. The use of other
frequencies for special purposes is not excluded
(ii) circuits, other than the intemal wiring ofequipment, operating at voltages exceeding 1000 V and derived
from an installation having a voltage not exceeding 1000 V AC, e.g. discharge lighting, electrostatic
precipitators
tiii) wiring systems and cables not speciflcally covered by the standards for appliances
(i\,) all consumer installations extemal to buildings
(\) fixed wiring for information and communication technology, signalling, control and the like (excluding
internal wiring of equipment)
tr i) additions and alterations to installations and also parts ofthe existing installation affected by an addition or
alteration.

-.l 15
 '110.1.3 The Regulations are intended to be applied to electrical installations generally but, in certain cases.
they may need to be supplemented by the requirements or recommendations of other Bdtish or Harmonized
Standards or by the requirements ofthe person ordering the work.

Such cases include the following:

(i) Electric signs and high voltage luminous discharge tube installations - BS 559 and BS EN 50107
(ii) Emergency lighting - BS 5266 and BS EN 1838
(iii) Explosive atmospheres - BS EN 60079
(iv) Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust - BS EN 50281 and BS EN 60079
(v) Fire detection and fire alarm systems for buildings - BS 5839
(vi) TeJecommunications systems - BS 6701
(vii) Electric suface heating systems - BS EN 60335-2-96
(viii) Electrical installations for open-cast mines and quarries - BS 6907
(ix) Temporary electrical systems for events, entertainment and related purposes - BS 7909
(x) Life safety and firefighting applications - BS 8519 and BS 9999.
110,2 EXCLUSIONS FROM SCOPE
The Regulations do not apply to the following installations:
(i) Systems for the distribution of electriciq, to the public
(ii) Railway traction equipment, rolling stock and signalling equipment
(iii) Equipment ofmotor vehicles, except those to which the requirements ofthe Regulations conceming caravans
or mobile units are applicable
(iv) Equipment on board ships covered by BS 8450, BS EN 60092-507, BS EN ISO 13297 or BS EN ISO 10133
(v) Equipment ofmobile and fixed offshore installations
(vi) Equipmentofaircraft
(vii) Those aspects ofmines specifically covered by Statutory Regulations
(viii) Radio iuterlerence suppression equipment, except so far as it affects safety ofthe elecfiical installation
(ix) Lightning protection systems for buildings and structures covered by BS EN 62305
(x) Those aspects of lift installations covered by relevant parls of BS 5655 and BS EN 81 and those aspects ol
escalator or moving walk installations covered by relevant parts of BS 5656 and BS EN I 15
(xi) Electrical equipment of machines covered by BS EN 60204
(xii) Electric fences covered by BS EN 60335-2-76
(xiii) The DC side of cathodic protection systems complying with the relevant part(s) of BS EN ISO 12696,
BS EN 12954, BS EN ISO 13174, BS EN 13636 and BS EN 14505.

111 /Vot used

112 Nof used

't't3 EQUIPMENT

'113.1 The Regulations apply to items ofelectrical equipment only so far as selection and application ofthe
equipment in the installation are concemed. The Regulations do not deal with requirements for the constuction ol
assemblies ofelectrical equipment, which are required to comply with appropriate standards.

114 RELATIONSHIP WITH STATUTORY REGULATIONS

114.1 The Regulations are non-statutory They may, however, be used in a court oflaw in evidence to claim
compliance with a statutory requirement. The relevant statutory provisions are listed in Appendix 2 and include Acts
ofParliament and Regulations made thereunder. In some cases statutory Regulations may be accompanied by Codes
of Practice approved under Section l6 of the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act 1974. The legal status of these
Codes is explained in Section 17 ofthe 1974 Act.

For a supply given in accordance with the Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations, it shall be deemed I

that the connection with Ealth of the neutral of the supply is permanent. Outside England, Scotland, Wales and I

Northem Ireland, confimatiol shall be sought from the distributor that the supply conforms to requirements
conesponding to those of the Electdcity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations (ESQCR), in this respect. I

Where the ESQCR does not apply, equipment for isolation and switching shall be selected accordingly as specified
in Chapte$ 46 and 53. I

16
115 INSTALLATIONS IN PREMISES SUBJECT TO LICENSING
115.1 For installations in premises overwhich a licensing or other authority exercises a statutory control, the
requirements ofthat authority shall be ascertaired and complied with in the design and execution ofthe installation.

CHAPTER 12
OBJECT AND EFFECTS
120 GENERAL
120.1 This Standard contains the rules for the design, erection and verification ofelectrical installations so
es to provide for safety and proper functioning for the intended use.

120.2 Chapter 13 states the fundamental principles. It does not include detailed technical requirements.
shich may be subject to modification because oftechnical developments.

120.3 This Standard sets out technical requirements to enable electrical installations to conform with the
i'undamental principles ofChapter 13, as follows:

Part 3 Assessment of geneml characteristics

Part 4 Protectiol for safety
Part 5 Selectio1,I and erectiol] ol equipmelt
Part 6 Inspection and testing
Part 7 Special installations or locations.

:-::i inte[ded deparlure from these Parls requires special consideration by the designel olthe installation and shall
-. recordcd on thc appropriatc clcehical cefiification specified in PaIt 6. The resulting degree of safety ofthe I

:.:.illation shall be not less than that obtained by compliance with the Regulations. I

CHAPTER 13
FU N DAMENTAL PRINCIPLES
.31 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY

'31,1 General
-- : ri.rlrirernents ol this chapter are intended to provide for the safety of penons, livestock and propefty against
. and damage which lray arise in the reasonable use of electrical installations. The requirements to provide
--:.
' : -: !31'etv of livestock are applicable in locations intended for them.
-. . -::: cal irstallatiol1s, risk of injury may result from:
::lLjCk CUlTentS
:ri.essi\ e temperatures likely to cause bums, fires and other injurious effects
r:r jtion ol a potentially explosive atmosphere
---.ccn oltages. overvoltages and electromagnetic disturbances likely to cause or result in injury or damage
:;hanical movement ofelect cally actuated equipment, in so far as such injury is intended to be prevented
:. ;l;ctrical emelgency switching or by electrical switching for mechanical maintenance of non-electrical
: r: : rri such equipment

tto . rr suppl) interruptions and/or interruption of safety services

t) :--..-.: or bun'ril1g. Iikely to cause blinding effects, excessive pressure and/or toxic gases.

17
 131.2 Protection against electric shock
131.2.1 Basicprotection
NOTE: For low voltage installations, systems and equipment, 'basic protection' generally corresponds to protection agaiosr
'direct contact'.

Persons and livestock shall be protected against dangers that may arise from contact with live parts ofthe installation.

This protection can be achieved by one ofthe lollowing methods:

(i) Preventing a curent from passing through the body of any person or any livestock
(ii) Limiting the curent which can pass through a body to a non-hazardous value.

131.2.2 Faultprotection
NOTE: For low voltage installations, systems and equipment, 'fault protectiofl' genemlly corresponds to protection agaiDst
'indirect contact', mainly with regard to failure ofbasic insulation.

Persons and livestock shall be protected against dangers that may arise ftom contact with exposed-conductive-parts
during a fault.

This protection can be achieved by one ofthe following methods:

(i) Preventing a curent resulting from a fault from passing tkough the body ofany person or any livestock
(ii) Limiting the rnagnitude ofa curent resulting from a fault, which can pass through a body, to a non-hazardous
value
(iii) Limiting the dumtion of a curent resulting from a fault, which car pass through a body, to a non-hazardous
time period.

In connection with fault protection, the application ofthe method ofprotective equipotential bonding is one ofthe
impodant principles for safety.

131.3 Protection against thermal effects

1 31 .3.1 The electrical installation shall be so ananged that the dsk of ignition of flammable materials due to
high temperature or electric arc is minimized. In addition, during nomal operation ofthe electrical equipment, there
shall be minimal lisk ofbums to persons or livestock.

'13'|.3'2 Persons, livestock, fixed equipmeut and fixed materials adjacent to electrical equipment shall be
protected against hannful effects ofheat or thermal radiation emitted by electrical equipment, and in pafiicular the
following:
(i) Combustion, ignition, or degradation ofmatedals
(ii) Risk olbums
(iii) Impaiment of the safe function of installed equipment.

Electrical equipment shall not present a fire hazard to adjacent materials.

131.4 Protection against overcurrent

Persons and livestock shall be protected against injury, and property shall be protected against damage, due to
excessive temperatures or electromechanical stresses caused by any overcurrents likely to arise in live conductor-s.
NOTE: Protection can be achieved by limitiDg the overcurrent to a sale value and/ol duration.

131.5 Protection against fault current

Conductors other than live conductors, and any other parls intended to carry a fault current, shall be capable of
carrying that current without attaining an excessive temperature. Electrical equipment, including conductors, shall
be provided with mechanical protection against electromechanical stresses of fault curents as necessary to prevent
injury or damage to persons, livestock or property.

131.6 Protection against voltage disturbances and measures against electromagnetic

disturbances
131.6.1 Persons and livestock shall be protected against injury and property shall be protected against any
harmful effects, as a consequence ofa lault between live parts ofcircuits supplied at different voltages, in accordance
with Section 442.

1B
131.6.2 P.:..:.::l :.:':::;1 :itill be prOrected .rgain.l rnjury. and propetn shal1 be protected ayain'r
_: :--::a. ,..s i] aot]si,i..t.-ua i i i Ll\ 3n rrliages such as those or iginatiDg t'l om atmospl'lelic e\ enls or 1}om s$ itchiLlu. in
. -:-..nce \\ irh Section -l-+].

\OTE: tor protectio[ against ]ightning strikes' refer to the BS EN 62305 series'

Persol1s and ]ivestock shall be protected against iniury. and property shall be
protected agajnst
131,6.3
voltage lecovery, in accordancc with Scction'145-
-::: -:gi. as a consequence ofunden'oltage and any subsequent
so
.i
31.6.4 The installation shall have an adequate level of irlmunity agairst electlornagrletic dLsturbances
in accordance with Section 444. The installation design shall
. : I iilnclion correctly in the specified environment,
',,: ilrto consideration the anticipated electromagnetic emissions, generated by the installation o[
the installed
which shall be suitable lor the currenlusing equipment used with, or conlected to' the irstallation'
- -,-i:ment.
131.7 Protection against power supply interruption
ploYisions shall be nrade in
,. rere danger or danrage is expected to arise due to an intenuption of supply, suitable
: : il'rstallation or installed equipment.
132 DESIGN

132.1 General

The electrical installation shall be designed by one or more skilled persons to

provide for: I

(i) the protection ofpersons, livestock and property in accordance with Section l3 [
tii) the proper functioning ofthe electrical installation for the intended use'

The information required as a basis for design is stated in Regulations 132.2 to 5. The
lequilements with which the
cesign shall comply are stated in Regulations 132.6 to 16

132.2 Characteristics of available supply or supplies

i.tbnnation onthe characteristics ofthe available supply or supplies shall be determined by calculation, tlreasurement'

:nquiry ot inspection.
132 13 to show
ilre following characteristics shatl be included in the documentation referred to iI] Regulation
:ontbrmity with the Regulations:
(i) Nature of curent; AC and/orDC
(ii) Purpose and number ofconductors:
for AC line conductor(s)
neutml conductor

Protective conductor
PEN conductor
, for DC conductors equivalent to those listed above (outer/uricldlc/earthcd livc coilduetds. l)rolcttr\e
colductor, PEN conductor)

(iii) Values and tolerunces:

norninal r oltage and voltage tolerances
nominal frequency and frequency tolerances
maximum curent allowable
prospective fault current
extemal earth fault loop impedance
(iv) Protective measures inherent in the supply, e.g. earthed neutral or mid-wire
(v) Particular requirements of the distributor

lfthe dist butor changes the characteristics ofthe power supply this may affect the safety ofthe irstallation
HOTE:

19
 132.3 Nature of demand
Thenumberandtypeolcircuitsrequiredforlightirg,heating,power'control'signalling'communicationand
information technology" etc. shall be determined ftom knowledge of:
(i) location ofpoints ofpowet demand
(ii) loads to be expected on the va ous circuits
(iii) daily and yearly variation ofdemand
(iv) any special conditions, such as hannonics
(v) requiremetts ior control, signalling, communication and infotmation technology' etc'

(vi) anticipated futurc demand, ifspecified'

supply systems
132.4 Electrical supply systems for safety services or standby electrical
is specifiedthe following shall be detemined:
Where a supply for safety services or standby electdcal supply systems
(i) Characteristics ofthe suPPlY
(ii) Circuits to be supplied by the safety source'

132.5 Environmental conditions

The dcsign ofthe electlical installation Shall take into account the
envilonmental conditions to which
132.5,,|
it will be subjected.

132.5.?Equipmentlnsuffotlndingssusceptibletoriskoffireorexplosionslrallbesoconstructedorplotected.
and such other spicial precautions shall be taken, as to prevent danger'

132.6 Cross-sectional area of conductors

operating conditions and' r"here
The cross-sectional atea of conductors shall be determined for both normal
appropriate, fot fault conditions according to:
(i) the adl.rissibJe r]laxinluln tcmperature
(ii) the adnrissible voltage drop
(iii) the clectromechalical strcsses likely to occur clue to short-circuit and eafth fault cun'ents
(iv) other n.rcchanical sttesses to rvhich the conductors are likely to be exposcd
(v) thc naximurl in.rpedarcc lor correct operation o f shotl-cit'cuit and carth fault protectior
(vi) the [rethod of installatiorl
(\,ij) harmonics
(viii) therualinsulation
132.7 Type of wiring and method of installation
shall include consideration ofthe following:
The choice olthe type of wiring system and the firethod of installation
(i) The rature ofthe location
(ii) The uature ofthe stmcture supporting the wi ng
(iii) Accessibility of wiring to persons and livestock
(iv) Voltage
and earth fault culTents
(v) The electromechanical stresses likely to occur due to shoft-circuit
(vi) Electromagneticinteference
(vii)otherexternalinfluences(e.g'nreclranical.thermaland'thoseassociatedwithfirc)towhichthewiringis
Iikely to be exposed during the erection ofthe electrical installation or in service'

132-8 Protective equiPment

The charactedstics ofprotective equipment shall be detennined
with respect to theil function, including plotection
against the effects of:
(i) overload
(ii) lault curent
(iii) over.roltage
1ir ; underroltage attd no-roltage.
and time which are suitably related to the
The protective devices shall opemte at values of current, voltage
characteristics oftbe circuits and to the possibilities ofdanger'

2A
 132.9 EmergencY control
rapidly
device shall be installed in Such a way that
it can be easily recogrrize<1 and eflectively and
An intelpting intenuption ofthe supply
operated where, in tf.r" of aungt',if'"t"it *"tt'ity for immediate
"u,t "
132.10 Disconnectingdevices
DisconnectilgdevicesshallbeprovidedSoaStopermitSwitchingand/orisolationoftheelectricalinstallatiotl,
inspection. testing, fault detectjon' tlaintenalce
circuits or individuat iterrs orequipmJiiu,
,.qrrir"i rol op.ration,
ald tepait.

132.11 Prevention of mutual detrimental influence

will occur between
The electrical i,stallation shall be ananged
i, such a way that no mutual detrimental influence
.i".t.i.ul lt',rtuttutions and non-electrical installations'
into account
Electromagnetic interference shall be taken

132.12 Accessibility of electrical equipment

provide:
Electdcal equipment shall be ara11ged to
(i)sufficientspacefortheinitialinstallationandlatelreplacementofindividualitemsofelectricalequipnrent
fault detection' lnaintenance and repair
(ii) accessibility for operatlon, inspection' testing'

132.13 Documentation for the electrical installation

Frervelectricalinstallationshallbeprovidedwithappropriatedocumentation.includilgthatrequiredbyRegulations
:rj.i. sr+.s, 536.5, Part 6 and, where applicable' Parl 7'
132.14 Protective devices and switches
be inserled in the line conductor only'
132.14.1 A single-pole fuse, switch or circuit-breaker shall

132.14.2Noswitchorcircuit-breaker'exceptwherelinked'orfuse'shallbeinsertedinanearthedneutral shall b(r arrallged to

-ur.ur.", i,rr"rted in an eafihed neutral corlductor
;onductor. Any linkeo s*ltct, n, tirLlo-"ir"ui
rreak all the related line conductors'

132.15 lsolation and switching

lg2.l5,2olEffectlvemeans,Suitablyplacedforreadyop^eration.shallbeprovicledsothatallvoltagemaybecut
equipment, as may be necessary to
p'event or
:l r-lom every installation, ft"rrl ;#.il;;rr"r""i -a'r-. all
:::love danger.
132.15.?OZEveryfixedelectricmotorshallbeprovidedwithanemcientmeansofswitchirlgoff'readily
:';t,b;, easily operated and so placed as to prevent danger
132.16 Additions and alterations to an installation
\: adrlition or alteration, temporary or pernarent'
ur
shall.be made
l:-1',:if:ll"*-'lT:?'51*;ln',[l1titl:
4.] !^rouu6 -"*''"---
::.fi[T#,"Ji:'iJl[."ls',i'J'J#,l]il';i;;.-i'i,"g.q"tp-.i'rtrl1'::":Y:"11",1*:l::i:I]il,i:
-ceriained that the mtlng
ano [ne conurlrur
Furthemorc' the eafthing andtr Lndrrg arlngements,
if necessary for the
l:Juate for the altered circumstances hF adequate'
^-. ^r+^-^I;,\6 shall be
'- ,.:;it. ;;;t; for the safety of the addition or altemtion "L.ll ^rlenrrrfe
"pplied
133 SELECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

133.1 General
Standard llthe
the appropriate Bdtish or Hannonized
133.1.1 Every item of equipment shall cornply \\' ith
Ji*ff l" t"O"io tttt intt'nutio'at (IEC) standard or the approp ate
.--.ince ofsuch a stunAu,O, "pp'op'iute
'"f""'"t
i--rJard of another country'
be selected by special
the item of equipment concerned shall
133.1 .2 Where there are no applicable standards'
rhe installation and the ln5taller'
-=-,..n..tbetueen the person specilying
':3 1.3 where equipment to be used is not in accordanc' 'it']"11*1111::.)],i;l,l"T.ii,1#X]',',1; ll]:
-. or otI'-r PeLSwr r!rPv! J -'- -.- -r
- : i1s stal1dard, the desrgner Such use I

co,Iilia,rce nuith the Regulatiors.

sju1P.rc,t -l deg'*
PrurrulJat least the same
.**i,r.t,,-pr"t:ia.t ",f '{:. l:T::::",:5,:tr^* .
specified in Parl 6'
I
I

*rr1l be recorded on the approprlate 'eleitrical certidcation

.- 21
 I

133.2 Characteristics
Eren iren ol elecrrical equip[reni selected shall hale suitabie characteristics applopriate to the values and
is based and shal1. in palticular'' fllfi1
conditions on $tich the desigrl ol the electrical installation (see section 132)
the requirenterts ofRegulations 133.2.1 to 4.

'.|33.2.1 Voltage

Electrical equipr-nent shatl be suitable with respect to the maximum steady-state

voltage (ms value for AC) likely I

to be app)ied, as well as ovenoltages likely to occur'

voltage likely to occur'
NOTE: For cer-tairl equipment, it may also be necessary to take account ofthe lowest

133.2,2 Current
current (nns value-fol AC) which it has
Electrical equip[rent shall be selected with lespect to the maximun'I steady
I

in abnormal conditions and the period

to carry i[ normal ser-vice and with respect to the curlelt likely to be
car-rietl
to flow'
(e.g. operating time olprotective devices, if any) during which it may be expected

133.2.3 FrequencY
Equipment shall be suitable for the frequencies likely to occur in the circuit

133.2.4 Power
for the duty demanded
Elect cal equipment which is selected on the basis ofits powel characteristics shall be suitable
ofthe equipmcnt, taking into account the load factor and the normal sewice conditions'

133,3 Conditions of installation

the environmental conditions
Electlical equipment shall be selected so as ro withstand safely the stresses'
does not by design have
(see Regulatior 132.5) and the characteristics of its location. An item of equipment which
tl].p,op-"ni.."or,.Spondingtoitslocationmaybeusedwhereadequatefufiherplotectionispl.ovidedaspartofthe
conrpleted electrical installation.

133.4 Prevention of harmful effects

equipment or impail the
A11 electrical equipment shall be selected so that it will not cause harmful effects on othel
supply during nonnal service, including switching operations
NOTE: Examples of characteristics which are likely to have hannful effects ale given h Chapter 33

133.5 New materials and inventions

the resulting degree ofsalety
Where the use ofa new matedal or invention leads to depaftures from the Regulations,
obtained by complianae with the Regulations Suchuse sl.tall ber"co|ded I
olthe installation shallbenot less than that
on the appropriate electrical certilication specifled in Par16 I

134 ERECTION AND INITIAL VERIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS I

'134.1 Erection
proper mater ials shall be used i[
j34.1 ,1 Good workmanship by one or more skilled or instructed persons and I

shall take account ofmanufacturers'

the erection ofthe electrical instaliatiln. The installation ofelectdcal equipment
instructions.

The characteristics ofthe electrical equipment, as determined in accoldance

$ith Section tSl shall
134.'1.2
not be impaired by the process of erectiott.
oftenrlnals is
114,1.3 Conductors shall be identified in accordance witl, Section 514. \\:here id.-ntification
recessary, tlley shalt be identified in accordance with Section 514'

134-1.4 Evely electdcal joint and connection shall be of proper construclirrn as regards conductance'
insulation. mcchanir4l strength and protection.

l34,l,5ElectricalequlpmentshallbeinstalledinSuchamannelthatthedesigntempemtuesar.]0iexceeded.
Electrical equipment likely to cause high temperatures or elecinc ercs shall be
place; :: guarded so
134,1.6
as to minimize the risk of ignition of flammable materials

22
 Where the temparaturc of an cxposcd part of cicctrical cquipmcnt is likcly kr causc injury to persons or liveslock
that part shall be so located or guarded as to prevent accidertal contact therewith.

134.1.7 Where necessary for safety purposes, suitable waming signs and/or notices shall be provided.

134.2 lnitial verification

134.2.1 Dudng erection and on completion of an installation or an addition or alteration to an installation,
and before it is put into seryice, appropriate inspection and testing shall be carried out by skilled pesons competent
to verify that the requirements ofthis Standard have been met.

Appropriate certiflcation shall be issued in accordance with Chapter 64. I

134.2.2 The designer of the installatior.r shall make a recommendation for the interval to the fir.st periodic
inspection and test as detailed in Chapter 64. I

NOTE: The requirements ofChapter 34 (maintainabilily) should be taken into consideration.

13s PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING

135.1 It is recommended that every electrical installation is subjected to periodic inspection and testing, in
accordance with Chapter 65.

,'2.,,-:,-.;if-;\
!:)" ' !"
;]'
,:i ,1.:
q)

j rwrrr'nv $

.=.- _
 PART 2

DEFINITIONS
For the puposes of the Regulations, the following definitions shall apply. As far as practicable the definitions
align with the Intemational Electrotechnical Vocabulary and BS 4727 - 'Glossary of electrotechnical, power,
telecommunicatiol, electronics, lighting and colour terms'.
NOTE: Whcre a section nunber is listed, e.g. {444}, the deflnition only applies within that section.

8/20 Current impulse, {534}. A curent impulse with a virtual fi-ont time of 8 [s and a time to half-value of20 ps
where:
(i) the ftort timc is delined as 1.25(teo - tro), where teg and tro are the 90% and 10% points o1 the leading edge
ofthe wavefom
(ii) the time to half-value is defined as the time between the virtual origin and the 50% point on the tail. The
vitual origin is the point where a straight line drawn through the 90% and 10% points on the leading edge
ofthe wavefor-m intersects the I : 0 line.

Accessory. A device, other than curent-using equipment, associated with such equipment or with the wiring olan
installation.

Agricultural and horticultural premises. Rooms, locations or areas where:

livestock are kept, or
feed, 1'eltilizers, vegetable and animal products are produced, stored, prepared or processed, or
plants are glown, such as greenhouses.

Ambient temperature. The temperature ofthe air or other medium where the equipment is to be used.

Amusement device. Ride, stand, textile or membrane building, side statl, side show, tent, booth or gmndstand
intended for the entefiaiflrent ofthe public.

Appliance. An item ofcurent-using equipment other than a luminaire or an independent motor.

Arm's reach. A zone ofaccessibility to touch, extending from any point on a surface where persons usually stand or
move about to the limits which a person can reach with a hand in any direction without assistance. (See Figure 417.)

Arrangements for livestock keeping. Buildings and rooms (housing for animals), cages, runs or other containers
used for continuous accommodation of livestock.

Auxiliary circuit. CircrLit for transmission ofsignals intended for control, detection, supervision or measulement of
the frLnctrunrlstatus ofa llrain circuit.
Back-up protection, Protection of a device by overcurent co-ordination between that device and an overcurent
protective device (OCPD) in series with it, generally but not necessarily on the supply side. This prevents ary
I

ercessir e slress on the electrical devicc. I

NOTE: In this standard. back-up protection is not ihe same as combined shoft-circuit protectiorl.
I

Barrier. A pat providing a dcfined degree ofprotection against contact with live parts from any usual direction of
access.

Basic insulation. Insulation applied to live parls to provide basic protection and which does not necessarily include
insulation used exclusively for functional purposes.

Basic protection. Protection against electric shock under fault-free conditions.

NOTE: For low voltage installations. systerns and equipnlent. basic protection generally conesponds to protection against
dircct contact. that is "contact ofpersons or livestock with livc pafts".

Basin of fountain. A basin not intended to be occupied by persons and which cannot be accessed (reached by
persons) without the use ofladders or similar means. For basins offountains which may be occupied by persolls, the
requirements for swimrring pools apply.

Bonding conductor. A protective conductor providing equipotential bonding.

Bonding network (BN), {444}. A set of interconnected conductive parts that provide a path for currents at
frequencies from direct cunent (DC) to radio frequency (RF) intended to divert. block or impede the passage of
electronagnetic energy.
Bonding ring conductor (BRC)! {444}. Abus eathing conductor in the form ofa closed ring.
NOTE: Normaily the bonding dng conductor, as paft of the bonding network, has multiple con[ections to the common
bonding network (CBN) that improves its performance.

Booth. Non-stationary unit, intended to accommodate equipment generally for pleasure or demonstration purposes.

Building void, accessible, A space within the structure or the components of a building accessible only at certain
points. Such voids include the space within partitions, suspended floors, ceilings and cefiain types ofwindow frame,
door frame and architrave.

Building void, non-accessible. A space within the structure or the components of a building which has no ready
rleans of access.

Bunched. Cables are said to be bunched when two or more are contained within a single conduit, duct, ducting. or
trunking o1 ifnot enclosed, are not sepamted from each other by a specified distance.

Busbar trunking system. A type-tested assembly, in the form of an enclosed conductor system comprising solid
conductors separated by insulating material. The assembly may consist ofunits such as:
- busbar trunking units, with or without tap-off facilities
- tap-off units where applicable
- phase-tmnsposition, expansion, building-movement, flexible, end-feedir anrl adaptor units
NOTE: Othcr systern components may include tap-offunits.

Bypass bonding conductor, {444}. Bonding conductor connected in parallel with the screens ofcables.

Cable channel. An enclosure situated above or in the ground, ventilated or closed, and having dimensions which do
not pemit the access of pemons but allow access to the conduits and/or cables throughout their length during and
after installation. A cable channel may or may not form part ofthe building construction'

Cable cleat. A component of a support system, which consists of elements spaced at intervals along tl.re length of
the cable or conduit and which mechanically retains the cable or conduit.

Cabte coupler. A means of enabling the comection or disconnection, at will, of two flexible cables. lt consists of a

connector and a plug.

Cable ducting. An enclosure of metal or insulating material, other than conduit or cable trurking, intended for the
protection of cables which are drawn in after ercction ofthe ducting,

Cable ladder. A cable support consisting of a series of transverse supporting elements rigidly fixed to main
longitudinal supporting membels.

Cable tray. A cable support consisting ofa continuous base with raised edges and no covering. A cable tray may or
may not be perforated.

Cable trunking. A closed enclosure normally of rectangular cross-section, of which one side is removable or
hilged, used for the protection ofcables and for the accommodation ofother electlical equipment.

Cable tunnel. A coridor aontaining supporting structures for cables and joints and/or other elements of wiring
systems and whose dimensions allow pe$ons to pass freely throughout the entire lergth'

Caravan. A trailer leisure accornmodation vehicle, used for touring, designed to meet the requirements for the
colstruction and use ofroad vehicles (see also definitjons of Motor caravan and Leisure accot.ulodation vehicle).

Caravan park / camping park. Area ofland that contains two oI mole calavan pitchcs and/ol tents.

Caravan pitch. Plot of ground intended to be occupied by a leisure accommodation vehicle'

Caravan pitch electrical supply equipment. Equipment that provides means of connecting and disconnectilg
supply cables from leisure accommodation vehicles or tents with a mains electrical supply

Cartridge fuse link. A device comprising a fuse elernent or two oI more fuse elements connected in parallel
(see fuse link).
encloseJin a cartridge usually filled with arc-extinguishing medium and connected to temrinations

central power supply system. A system supplying the required emergency powel to essertial safety equipmert.

Central power supply system (low power output). Central power supply system with a liriritation of the power
output ofthe system at 500 W for 3 h or I 500 W for t h
NOTE: A low power suppiy system nonnaily cornprises a mailtenancc-frec battety and a chal€ing and tcsting Lrnit.
Circuit, An assembl), of electrical equipment supplied from the same origin and protected agatnsi or ercurrenr b!
the same plotective device(s).

Circuit-breaker. A device capable of n.raking, carrying and breaking notmal load currents and also making and
automatically breaking, under predetermined conditions. abnomal curents such as short-circuit currents. It is
usually required to operate inftequently although some tlpes are suitable for frequent operation'

Circuit-breaker, Instantaneous trip (ICB). Circuit-breaker which only fulfils the short-circuit pofiion of
overcurrent protection.

Circuit-breaker, linked. A circuit-breaker the contacts of which are so aranged as to make or break all poles
simultaneously or in a definite sequence.

Circuit protective conductor (cpc). A protective conductor connecting exposed-conductive-parts of equipment to

the main eathing termilal.

Class I equipment. Equipment in which protection against electdc shock does not rely on basic insulation on1y, but
which includes ryreans for the connection ol exposed-conductive-parts to a protective conductor in the fixed wiring
ofthe installation (see BS EN 61140).

Class II equipment. Equipment in which protection against electdc shock does not rely on basic insulation only, but
in which additional safity precautions such as supplementary insulation are provided, there being no provision for
the connection ofexposed metalwork ofthe equipment to a plotective conductor, and no reliance upon plecautions
to be taken ir the fixed wiring ofthe installation (see BS EN 61140).

Ctass III equipment. Equipment in which protection against electric shock relies on supply at SELV and in which
voltages higher than those of SELV are not genemted (see BS EN 61 140).

Cold tail. The interface between the fixed installation and a heating unit

Combined short-circuit current capability. Maximum shofi-circuit cu-rent which can be handled by two shot-
circuit protective devices in series.

Combined short-circuit protection. Overcufient co-ordination, in short-circuit conditions, of two OCPDS in

series, resulting in a combined shoft-circuit curent capability higher than one OCPD alone' rl
common equipotential bonding system, common bonding netrvork (CBN), {444}. Equipotential bonding
system providing both protective equipotential bonding and functional equipotential bonding'

Complementary floor heating, Direct heating system integrated into the ffoor constructiol, for example, in the
border zones close 1o outer walls, which complements the heat dissipation ofa thermal storage floor heating system.

Conditional short-circuit current, Prospective current that a circuit or a switching device, protected by a specified
short-circuit protective device, can satisfactodly withstand for the total operating time ofthat device under specified
conditions ofuse and behaviour,

Conducting location with restricted movement.Alocation comprisedmainly ofmetallic or conductive surrounding

par.ts, within which it is likely that a person will come into contact through a substantial portion of their body with
ihe conductive surounding parts and where the possibility ofpreventing this contact is limited.

Conduit. A pafi of a closed wiring system for cables in electrical installations, allowing them to be drawn in and/
or replaced, but not inserted laterally.

Connector. The part of a cable coupler or of an appliance coupler which is provided with female contacts and is
intended to be attached to the end ofthe flexible cable remote frorn the supply.

Consumer unit (may also be known as a consumer control unit or electricity control unit). A parlicular type
of distribution board comprising a type-tested co-ordinated assembly for the control and distdbution of electrical
energy, principally in domestic premises, incorporating manual means of double-pole isolation on the incoming
.ircrr-it1rl unO an usembly ofone or more fuses, circuit-breakers, residual current operated devices or signalling and
other devices proven dudng the type{est ofthe assembly as suitable for such use

Continuity of service. The extent to which the operation of an electrical system approaches the intended state of
freedom from supply inteffuplion.

continuous operating voltage (U.), {534}. Maximum ms voltage which may be continuously applied to an sPD's
mode ofprotection. This is equal to the rated voltage
 Control and protective srvitching device (CPS deyice). Switching device (or equipment) capable of operation
other than by hand, but with or without local manual operating means. A CPS device provides both functions of
contactor and OCPD.

Conlrolgear /see .Swir, hgeart.

Conventional impulse withstand voltage, The peak value olan impulse test voltage at which insulation does not
show any disruptive discharge when subjected to a specified numbel ofapplications ofimpulses ofthis value, under
specified conditions.

Co-ordination of electrical equipment. Coffect way ofselecting electrical devices in series to provide safety and
continuity of service ofthe installation, taking into account shoft-circuit protection and/or overload protection and/
or selectivity.

Current-carrying capacity of a conductor. The maximum curent which can be carried by a conductor under
specified conditions without its steady-state tempemture exceeding a specified value.

Current-using equipment. Equipment which convefis electdcal energy into another form of energy, such as light,
heat or motive power.
I
Danger. Risk ofinjury to persons (and livestock where expected to be present) ftom:
(i) fire, electric shock, burns, arcing and explosion arising from the use ofelectrical energy, and
(ii) mechanical movement of electrically controlled equipment, in so far as such danger is intended to be
prevented by electrical emergency switching or by elect cal switching for mechanical maintenance ofnon-
electdcal parls of such equipment.

DC system - see Appendix 9.

Departure. Deliberate decision not to comply fully with the requirements ofthis Standard, for which the designer
must declare that the resultant degree of safety is not less than that achievable by full colt.tpliance.

Design current (ofa circuit). The magnitude ofthe cunent (rms value forAC) to be caffied by the circuit in notmal
setvice.

Device for connecting a luminaire (DCL). Sys'tem comprising an outlet and a connector provicling a fixed lumillaire
with electrical connection to and disconnection from a fixed installation but not providing mechanical suppoft for
a luminaire.

Ditect contqct (see Basic protectioll).

Direct heating system. Heating system which generates heat from electrical energy and dissipates it to the room to
be heated with a response time being as low as possible.

Disconnector. A mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the rcquirements specified
for the isolating function.
NOTE 1: A disconnector is otherwise known as an isolator.
NOTE 2: A disconaecto. is capable ofopening and closing a circuit when either a negligible curent is broken or made" or when

oo signillcant change in the voltage across the tenninals ofeach pole ofthe discomector occurs. lt is also capable of
caflJing cunents under norrnal cilcuit conditions and carrying for a specified time current under abnonnal conditions
such as those of short-circuit.

Di scrimin qtiotl (s ee Sel ect iv i t!)

Distribution board. An assembly containing switching or protective devices (e.g. fuses, circuit-breakers, residual I
cun'ent operated devices) associated with one or more outgoing circuits fed frorn ore or more incoming circuits,
together with teminals for the neutral and circuit protective conductors. It may also include signalling and other
control devices. Means ofisolation may be included in the board or may be provided separately.

Distribution circuit. A circuit supplying a distribution board or switchgear.

A distribution circuit may also connect the origin of an installation to an outlyirg building or separate installation,
rr hen it is somelunes called a
'ub-rrain.
Distributor. A person who distributes electricity to consumers using elect cal lines and equipment that he/she owus
Lrr operates.

Double insulation. Insulation comprising both basic insulation and supplementaly insulatiofl.

--. 27
L
Duct, Ducting free Coble ductittg).

Earth. The conductive mass ofthe Earth, whose electric potential at any point is conventionally taken as zero.

Earth electrode. Conductive paft, which may be embedded in the soil or in a specilic conductive medium, e.g.
concrete or coke, in electrical contact with the Eat1h.

Earth electrode network, {444}. Parr of an earthing arangement comprising only the earth electodes and their
intercol]uections.

Earth electrode resistance. The resistance of an eafih electrode to Eafih.

Earth fault current. A currelt resulting from a fault of negligible impedance between a line conductor and an
exposed-conductive-part or a protective conductor

Earth fault loop impedance. The impedance ofthe earth fault cuffent loop starting and ending at the point ofeanh
fault. This impedance is denoted by the symbol 2..
I
The earth fault loop comprises the lollowing, starting at the point offault:
- the circuit protective conductor, alld
- the consumer's earthilg teminal and eafihing conductor, and
- for TN systems, the metallic rctum path, and
- lor TT and lT systens, the Earth retum path, and
- the path tkough the earthed neutml point ofthe transfonner, and
- the tmnsfomier winding, and
- the line conductor fi'om the transfomer to the point of fault.

Earth leakage curre\t (.\ee Protective conductor arrrent).

Earthed concentric wiring. Awiring system in which one or more insulated conductors are completely surrounded
throughout their length by a conductor, for example a metallic sheath, which acts as a PEN conductor'.

Earthing. Connection of the exposed-conductive-parts of an installation to the main earthing teminal of that
installation.

Earthing conductor. A protective coflductor coulecting the main earthing terminal of an installation to an earth
electrode ol to other means of eafihing.

Electric shock. A dangerous physiologicaJ effect resulting from the passing ofan electric cufient through a human
body or livestock.

Electric vehicle (EV), U22). Any vehicle propelled by an electric motor drawing curent from a rechargeable
stomge battery or frour other portable energy storage devices (rechargeable, using energy from a source off the
vehicle ;uch as a residential or public electricity service), which is manufactured primarily for use on public streets,
roads or highways.

. Charging equipment. An assembly including one or more charging points.

Electric yehicle charging point. The point where the electric vehicle is connected to the fixed installation.

NOTE: Thc charging point is a socket-olLtlet where the charging cable belongs to the vehicle. oI a connector. where
the charging cable is a fixed pafi ofthe electric vehicle supply equipment.

Mode 1 charging. Connection of the EV to the AC supply network utilizing standardized socket-outlets I

not exceeding l6 A and not exceeding 250 V AC single-phase or 480 V AC three-phase, at the supply side, I

and utilizing the power and protective earth conductors (according to BS EN 61851- 1).

Mode 2 charging. Connection of the EV to the AC supply network utilizing standardized socket-outlets I

not exceeding 32 A and not exceeding 250 V AC single-phase or 480 VAC three-phase, at the supply side, I

and utilizing the power ald prctective eafih conductom together with a control pilot function and system ol
personnel prctection against electric shock (RCD) between the EV and the plug or as pafi of the in-cable
control box.

Mode 3 charging. Connection of the EV to the AC supply network utilizing dedicated elect c vehicle
supply equipment where the control pilot function extends to control equipment in the electric vehicle
supply equipment, pen'r]anently connected to the AC supply netwolk. I
 Mode 4 charging, Connection of the EV to the AC supply netu,ork utilizing an olf-board cliatgcr where I

the control pilot function extends to equipmelt permanently conr.rected to the AC supply. I

Vehicle connector. Pafi ofa vehicle coupler integral with. or intended to be attached to, the flexjble cable
connected to the AC supply network (mains).

Vehicle coupler. Means ofenabling the manual connection of a flexible cable to an EV for the purpose of
charging.
NOTE: A vehicle coupler consists of two pafts: a vehicle connector and a l'ehicle inlet.

Electrical circuit for safety seryices. Electrical circuit intended to be used as part of an electrical supply system
for safety services.

Electrical equipment (abbr: Equipment), Any item for such puposes as gelemtion, conve$ion, transmission,
dist bution or utilization of electrical energy, such as machines, transfonners, apparatus, measuling instruments,
protective devices, wi ng systems, accessories, appliances and luminaires.

Electrical installation (abbr: Installation). An assembly ol associated electrical equipment having co-ordinated
charactedstics to fulfil specific purposes.
Electrical source for safety services. Electrical source intended to be used as paft of an elect cal supply system
for safety senrices.

Electrical supply system for safety services. A supply system intended to maintail the opemtion ofessentiaI pafis
ofan elechical installation and equipment:
(i) for the health and safety of persons and livestock, and
(ii) to avoid damage to the environment and to other equipment.
NOTE: The supply system includes the source and the circuit(s) up to the teminals ofthe elecl cal equipmcnt.

Electrically independent earth electrodes. Eafih electrodes located at such a distance ftom one another that the
maximum curaent likely to flow through one ofthem does not significanlly afl'ect the potential ofthe other(s).

Electrode boiler (or electrode water heater). Equipment for the electrical heatirg of water or electrolyte by the
passage ofau electric cuflent between electrodes immersed in the water or electrolyte.

Electronic convertor (static convertor). A convertor having no movil.Ig parts and notably using semiconductol'
rectifiers.

Emergency stopping. Emergency switching intended to stop an operation.

Emergency switching. An operation intended to remove, as quickly as possible, danger, which may have occumed
unexpectedly.

Enclosure. A part providing protection of equipment against ceflail extemal influences and in alty direction
providing basic protection.

Energy Efficiency. (Appendix l7)

Efficiency measures (EM). Level of implementation of measrues to improve eoergy efficie[cy of an electical
installation.

Load shedding. Approach where the elect cal loads are switched otf for variable periods of time to optimiTe
demand.

Metering. Applying a device measudng energy or other consumption.

Equipment (see E/ectrical equipment).

Equipotential bonding. Electrical connecrion maintainlng various exposed-conductive-pafis and ertraneous-

colductive-pafts at substantially the same potential. (See also P7?/eclive ecltripotential bonding)

Escape route, Path to follow for access to a safe area in the event ofan emelgency.

Exhibition. Event intended for the purpose of displaying and/or selling products etc., which can take place in any
suitable location, either a room, building or temporary structure

Exposed-conductiye-part. Conductive part ofequiprrent which can be touched and which is not normally Jive. but
which can become live under fault conditions.

29
 External influence. Any influence extemal to an electrical installation which affects the design and safe operation
ofthat installation.
Extralow voltage (see Voltage, noninal).
Extraneous-conductive-part. A conductive part liable to introduce a potential, generally Earth poteltial, and not
lorrning part ofthe eiectrical insrallation.

Fairground. Area where one or more stands, amusement devices or booths are erected for leisure use.

Fault. A circuit condition in which current flows through an abnormal or unintended path. This may result frorr an
insulation failure or a bridging ofinsulation.
NOTE: Conventionally. the impedance between live conductors or between live conductors and exposed- or extlaneous-
conductivc parts at the fault position is considered negligible.

Fault current, A clrrent resulting from a fault.

Fault protection. Protection against electric shock uuder single fault conditions.
NOTE: For low voltage installations, systems and equipment, fault protection generally corresponds to protectiol against
inditect contact, mainly with regard to failure ofbasic insulation. lndircct contact is "contact of pelsons or livestock
with exposed,conductive-parts which have become live under fault conditions,,.

Final circuit. A circrtit connected directly to current-using equipment, or to a socket-outlet or socket-outlets or other
outlet points for the connection ofsuch equipment.

Fixed equipment. Equipment designed to be fastened to a support or otherwise secured in a specific location.

Flexible cable. A cahle whose structure and materials make it suitable to be flexed while in service.

Flexible sheet heating element. Heating element consisting of sheets of electrical insulation laminated with
electrical resistance material, or a base material on which electrically insulated heating wires are fixed.

Flexible wiring system. A wiring system designed to provide mechanical flexibility in use without degradation of
the electrical components.

Follow current interrupt rating, {534} 1/f, Prospective shofi-circuit current that an SPD is able to interxpt without
operation ofthe OCPD.

Functional bonding conductor! {444}. Conductor provided for functional equipotential bonding.

Functional earth. Earthing ofa point or points in a system or in an installation or in equipment, lor putposes other
than electrical safety, such as for proper functioning ofelectrical equipment.

Functional extra-low volfage (FELV). An extralow voltage system in which not all ofthe protective measures
requircd for SELV or PELV have been applied,

Functional switching. An operation intended to switch 'on'or 'off'or vary the supply ofelectdcal energy to all or
paft ofan installation for normal operating purposes.

Fuse. A device which, by the melting ofone or more ofits specially designed and proportioned components, opens
the circuit in which it is insefied by breaking the curent when this exceeds a given yalue for a sufficient time. The
fuse comprises all the pafis that lorm the complete device.

Fuse carrier. The movable part ofa fuse designed to carry a fuse link.

Fuse element. A parl ofa fuse designed to melt when the fuse operates.
Fuse link. A pafi of a fuse, including the fuse element(s), which requires replacement by a rew or renewable fuse
link after the fuse has operated and before the fuse is put back into service.

Fused connection unit. A device associated with the fixed wiring of an installation by which appliances tray be
connected, and having provision for a replaceable cartridge fuse link.

Gas installation pipe. Auy pipe, not being a sewice pipe (other than any part of a sewice pipe comprised in a
p mary meter installation) or a pipe comprised in a gas appliance, for conveying gas for a particular consumer and
including any associated yalve or other gas fitting.

Harmonized Standard. A standard which has been drawn up by common agreemenr between national standards
bodies notified to the European Commission by all member states and published under national procedues.

Hazardous-live-part. A Jive part which can give, under cefiain conditions of extemal influence, an electric shock.
Heating cable. Cable with or without a shield or a metallic sheath, intended to give offheat for heating purposes.

Heating-free area. Unheated floor or ceiling area which is completely covered when placing pieces of flrrniture or
kept free for built-in furniture.

Heating unit. Heating cable or flexible sheet heating element with rigidly fixed cold tails or teminal fittings which
are connected to the terminals ofthe electrical installation.
High-density livestock rearing. Breeding and rearing of livestock for which the use of automatic systems for life
support is necessary
NOTE: Examples ofautomatic life support systems are those for ventilation, feeding ard air conditioning.

High \oltage /se. lolrage. naminal).

Highway. A highway means any way (other than a waterway) over which there is public passage and includes the
highway verge and any bridge over which, or tunnel through which, the highway passes.

Highway distribution board. Afixed shucture orunderground chamber, located on a highway, used as a distribution
point, for connecting more than one highway distribution circuit to a common odgin. Street fumiture which supplies
more than one circuit is defined as a highway distribution board. The connection of a single temporary load to an
item of street fumitue shall not in itself make that item of street fumitwe into a highway distlibution board.

Highway distribution circuit. A Band ll circuit connecting the origin of the installation to a remote highway
distribution board or items ofstreet fumiture. It may also connect a highway distribution board to street fumiture.

Highway power supply. An electdcal installation comprising an assembly of associated highway distribution
circuits, highway distribution boards and street fumitule, supplied from a commol origin.

Ilouseboat. Floating decked structue which is designed or adapted for use as a place of permanent residence often
kept in one place on inland water.

Impulse current (Ii-p), {534}. Aparameter used for the classification test for SPDs; it is defined by tfuee elements,
a cu-rent peak value, a charge Q and a specific energy WR.
Impulse withstand voltage, {534}. The highest peak value of impulse voltage of prescribed fotm and poladty
which does not cause breakdown ofinsulation under specified conditions.

Indirect contact (see Faull protection). I

Inspection. Examination ofan electrical installation using all the senses as appropriate.

Installation (see Electrical installation). I

Instructed person (electricallD. Person adequately advised or supervised by a skilled person (as defined) to enable
that pe$on to perceive risks and to avoid hazards which electdcity can create.
NOTE 1: The term "(electrically)" is assumed to be present where the tenn 'iNtructed person' is used throughout BS 7671.
NOTE 2: Regulation 16 ofthe Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 requires persons to be competent to prevent danger and
injury. The HSE publication HSR25 provides guidance on this.

Insulation. Suitable non-conductive material enclosing, surounding or supporting a conductor.

Insulation co-ordination, {534}. The selection of the electric strength of equipment in relation to the voltages
which can appear on the system for which the equipment is intended, taking into account the service environment
and the charactedstics ofthe available protective devices.
lsolation. Function intended to make dead for reasons ofsafety all or a discrete section ofthe electrical installation I

by separating the electrical installation, or section thereof, from every source ofelechical energy.

Isolator. A mechanical switching device which, in the open position, complies with the requirernents specified for
ihe isolating function. An isolator is otherwise known as a disconnector.

Lad.der (see Cable ladder).

Leakage current. Electdc current in an unwanted conductive path under nomal operating conditions.

Leisure accommodation vehicle. Unit of living accommodation for temporary or seasonal occupation which may
meet requirements for construction and use ofroad vehicles.

Lightning protection zone (LPZ), {534}. Zone where the lightning electromagnetic environment is defined.

31
 than a neutral
transmissioo of electrical energy other
I

Line conductor. A conductor of al

j.j
AC system for the
-
co ductor of a DC
ir't i"'* the equivalent
utto ,,'"uot I

conductor, a pfotective conduclor "^;^';;;;'

,Vrt"a ,nL..t o,fl.,*ise specified in the Regulations
l

LiYe conductor (see Lite Part)'

use' including a neutal conductor but'
pafi intended to be energized in normal
Live part. Aconductor or conductive
h\ con\ enlion, nol a PE\'l conductor'

Low voltage lsee Voltage, nontinal)'

devices
or more low voltage switching
assemblll Combinal'.",.1^"1*"
Low voltage switchgear and controlgear wilh all the intemal
signalling protective "gututlng equipment'
toselher \ ith associared control' mea-suring' t*
pans rsee BS
"l::i;i::,
;;;:;r;,i.'r i*'"*""ii"n '"i "i"*ut '-143e-r)'

Luminaire.Equipmentwhichdistributes.filtersortransformsthelighttransmittedfromoneormorelampsand themselves'
n*-g p^rotecting the lamps, but not the lamps
which includes all tt pun, ,r"...ruriio, .rpf"nirg, "nd supply'
" *iir' tr" ti'eans for connecting them to the
and rvhere necessary, ci'c'it uu^itiu'1"'"i"g""i"t
emitting diodes'
NOTE: Lamps includes devices such as Iight
an LSC comector' providing
A means' comprising an LSC outlet and
Luminaire supporting coupler (LSC)' ftom afixedwiring installation'
mechanicat suppofi fo,
olola't;;;;*";i;:;iion"to unddircon
at minutre "ction

Mainearthingterminal.TheterminalorbarprovidedfoJthe,connectionofprotectiveconductors,including
of earthing'
#;;;";; fJ; i'nctional earthing' if anv' to the means
protective bonding conductors,

Maintenance.Combinationofalltechrricalandadministrativeactions,includingsupervisionactions,intendedto
can perfotm a required function.
in, or,.,to," lt to, u ,tut" in which it
retain an item

Marina.Facilityfolmooringandseruicingofpleasurecraftwithfixedwhar.ues.jetties,pie$olpontoonallangernents
pleasure craft'
capable ofbelthing one or more
and non-electdcal parts of
maintenance. The replacement, refurbishment or cleaning of lamps
Mechanical
equipolent, Plant and machinery'

Medicallocation,{710}.Locationintendedforpurposesofdiagnosis.tleatmenlinclrrdingcosmeticheatlTent'
n.ronitoring and care ofpatients'

.Applietlpart.Pafiofmedicalelecfuicalequipmentthatinnomalusenecessarilycomesintophysicalcontact
ul
with the patient for ot un Mf syst"m to petfom its function'
"ffit"'t discontinuity (failure)
applied pafis are irtended to be used and where
. Group 0. Medical location where no
ofthe supply cannot cause danger to life'
threat to the safety
(failure) ofthe supply does not represent
a
. Group 1. Merlical location where discontinuity
*O parts are intended to be used:
"-itrri"p"ii""t "pplied
. extemallY
. where Group 2 applies'
invasive\ to any pafi ofthe body except
discontinuit; {failure) of
pan" are intended Io be used' and where
Grouo 2. Medical locarion where applied
such as:
;.;o'; .rn.uur. dungtt to lile' in applicarions
. intracardiacProcedures
. \ ilal treatlnellls and surgical operation"'
placed within the heart of a
whereby an electrical conductor is
NOTE: An intracardiac procedure is a procedule the patient's
patienr or is likely 10 c"In" i"a i".,"i -Un
ii"'f,iun,.u"fI .ooarctor being accessible outside or
pacing electrodes
includes insulated wires such as cardiac
body ln this context'"" "ft"in*l ""ta'"t"r fluid'
tubes fllled with conducting
intracardiac ECG electrodes' or insulated
pafi or transferring
Electdcal equipmen^t having an applied
Medical electricat equipment (ME equipment)' to or from the patient and which is
t""tgy transfer
energy to or from the patienr or detlai"rig"utf'
parlicular supply mains' and
(a) provided with not more than one connection to a
intended by the manufacturer to be
used
(b)
of a patient' or
' in the diagnosis, fteatment or monitoring
injury or disability'
' for compensation or alleviation ofdisease' manufactuler that are necessary to
enable the
those accessories as defined by the
NOTE: ME eqlipmelt includes
nomal r.rse of the ME equipment'
 ][edical electrical slstem r\IE slstem). Combination. as specified b] rhe manut'ac rer. of irems of
equipment. ai ieasi ..,1e oi,-. h:ch is medical electrical equiprnent to be interconnected b.v functional connectiot'l
rrr b) use ofa muhiple socket-outlet.
NOTE: The svsten, includes those accesso es which are needed for operating the system and are specified by the
manufacturer.

\Iedical IT system. IT electrical system fi.rlfilling specific requirements for r.nedical applications.
NOTE: These supplies are also known as isolated power supply systems.

Patient. Living being (person or animal) undergoing a medical, surgical or dental procedure.
NOTE: A person under treatment lor cosmetic purposes may be considered a patient.

Patient enyironment. Any volume in which intentional or unintentional contact can occur between a patient
ar]d pafis of the medical electrical equipment or medical elechical system or between a patient and other
persons touching pal1s ofthe medical electrical equipment or medical electrical system.
NOTE 1: For illustration see Figure 710.1.
NOTE 2: This applies when the patient's position is predetennined; ifnot, all possible patient positions should be
consideled.

\leshed bonding netyiork (MESII-BN), 1444\. Bonding network in \xhlch al\ assaciated equipment frames, racks
a\d rasl\e\s a\( us\a\\) $eDC !o'we\ \e!.I\\ cod\c\or are \onde{ toget\er 6s \Ne\\ as a\ 1\\\i1!\e Do\1ts \o i\e
CBN and may have the form of a mesh.
NOTE: A MESH-BN improves the pedonnance ofa comnton bonding [etwork.

-Vinimum illuminance. Illuminance lor emergency lighting at the end of the rated opemting time
Minor works. Additions and alterations to an installation that do not extend to the provision ofa new circuit.
NOTE: Examples include the addition ofsocket-outlets or lighting points to an existing circuit, the relocation ofa light switch etc.

Mobile and offshore installations. Installations used for the exploration or development of liquid or gaseous
hydrocarbon resources.

Mobile equipment (portable equipment (deprecated)). Electrical equipment which is moved while in operation or
which can easily be moved ftom otre place to another while connected to the supply.

Mobile home. A transportable leisure accommodation vehicle which includes means for mobility but does not meet
the requirements for construction and use ofroad vehicles.

Motor caravan. Self-propelled leisure accommodation vehicle, used for toudng, that meets the requiremenls for the
constluction and use ofroad vehicles.
NOTE: It is either adapted from a series production vehicle, or designed and built on an existing chassis, with or without the
driving cab, the accommodation being either fixed or dismountable.

Neutral conductor. A conductor connected to the neutral point of a system and contributing to the transmission of
electrical energy. The term also means the equivalent conductor of an IT or DC system unless otherwise specified
in the Regulations and also identilies either the mid-wire ol a three-wire DC circuit or the earthed conductor of a
two-wire earthed DC circuit.

Nominal discharge current (In.pd), {534}. A parameter used for the classification test for Class I SPDs and fot
preconditioning of an SPD for Class I and Class II tests; it is defined by the crest value of cunent through an SPD,
having a current waveform of 8/20.
Nominal yoltage (see Voltage, noninal).
Non-compliance. A non-conformity that may give rise to danger

Non-flame propagating. Liable to ignite as a result of an applied flame but, after the flame is rertoved, does not
propagate flifiher and extinguishes itself within a limited time.

Obstacle. A part preventing unintentional contact with live pafis but not preventing deliberate contact.

Open-circuit voltage under standard test conditions Uo" src. Voltage under standard test conditions across an
unloaded (open) generator or on the DC side ofthe convertor.

Operating and maintenance gangway, {729}. Gangway providing access to facilitate operations such as switching,
controlling, setting, observation and maintenance of electdcal equipment.

33
Ordinary person. Person who is neither a skilled person nor an instucted pe$on'

The position at which electrical energy is delivered to an electrical

installation'
origin of an installation.
originofatemporaryelectricalinstallation.Pointonthepermanentinstallationolothelsoulceofsupplyfrom
whifh electrical energy is delivered to the tempomry electrical installation
the lated value is the curent-carying capaciry
oyercurrent. A curent exceeding the mted value. For conducto$
overcurrentdetection.AmethodofestablishingthattheValueofcurrentinacircuitexceedsapredetermined
value for a specifled length of time.
an electric circuit in case the conductol
overcurrent protective device (ocPD). Device provided to interrupt
cunent in the electric circuit exceeds a predetermined value for a specified duration'

NoTE:TableA53.lprovidesinlbrmationregardingthediffelentdevicescorespondingtothemaingenericfunction'
oyerload current. An overcunent occuring in a circuit which is electrically sound.
PartialselectiYity.Selectivityuptoagivenovelcurentlowelthanthebleakingcapacityofthedownstrcamdevice'
PEL.Aconductorcombiningthetirnctionsofbothaplotectiveearthingconductolandalineconductol'
which is not electrically sepamted from Earth'
PELV (protectiye extra-low yoltage). An extra-low voltage system
but which otherwise satisfies all the requirements for SELV

PEM.Aconductorcombiningthefunctionsofbothaprotectiveearthingconductorandamidpointconductor
protective conductor and neutral conductor'
PEN conductor. A conductor combining the functions ofboth

Persot (see Skilled, lnstructed' Ordinat!)

Phase conductor /.s ee Line cond ctot).

or other floating craft used exclusively for spolt
Pleasure craft. Any boat, vessel, yacht, motor launch, houseboat
or leisure.
a socket-outlet' and incorporating means for
Plug. Accessory having pins designed to engage with the contacts-of
the Electrical connection and mechanical retention of a flexible
cable'

point (in wiring). A temination ofthe fixed wifirg intended fol the connection ofcurent-using equipment

Portable equipment (see Mobile equipment)

powertrack. A system component, which is generally a linear assembly ofspaced and supported busbars, ploviding
electrical connection olaccessories'

Powertracksystem(PTsystem).Anassembl}of\yStemcomponentsincludingapowemackbywhichaccessories
the powedrack.
-o." poi"ts (predetermined or otherwise) along
may be connected to ur, ara"t.iaul ,uppry ui on'" o,
NOTE: The maximum current mting ofa powertrack system is 63A

Prefabricatedwiringsystem.WiringsyStemconsiStingofwiringsectionsincolpolatingthemeansofinterconnection
a giren system, and incorporating installation couple$
designed to allow sections to be c;;;ct"d tog.th", to"fo.,.,
confoming to BS EN 61535.
'fhe value of overcunent at a given point in a circuit resulting from a fault of
Prospective fault current (Ip).
,"grigiuL.impedancebetweenti,"coodu"to,shuuingadifferenceofpotentialundernormaloperatingconditions.
orLat*""n u iiua and an exposed-conductive-pafi'
"onductor
Protectivebondingconductor.Protectiveconductorprovidedforprotectiveequipotentialbonding.

Protectiveconductor(PE).Aconductorusedforsomemeasulesofplotectionagainstelecfficshockandintended
fo1 connecting together any ofthe following palls:

1i,) Erposed-conducti\e-Parts
(ii) Extraneous-conductive-parts
(iii) The main earthing terminal
(iv) tanh electrode(s)
(v) The earlhed point ofthe source, or an artiflcial neutral'
conductor' such as leakage curent or
Protective conductor current. Electric current appearing in a protective
electric curent resulting from an insulation lault'
 ProtectiYe earthing, Earthing ofa point or points in a system or in an installation or in equipment for the purposes
-.i jafety.

Protective equipotential bonding. Equipotential bonding for the pulposes of safety.

Protectiye multiple earthing (PME). An eafthing arangement, found in TN-c-s systems, in which the supply
r3utral conductor is used to corulect the eafihing conductor of an installation with Eafth, in accordance with the
:.ectricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations (ESeCR) (see also Figure 3.9).
Protective separation. Separation olone electric circuit from another by means ol
ti) double insulation. or
t iil basic insulation and electrically protective screening (shielding), or
, iii) reinforced insulation.

P\. {712}, Solar photovoltaic.

' PV AC module. Integrated module/convertor assembly where the electrical inteface teminals are AC only. I

\o access is provided to the DC side.

I

' P\ array. Mechanically and electrically integrated assembly ofPV modules, and other necessary components, to
:.rn- a DC power supply unit.

. PV array cable. Output cable ofa PV array.

'P\-arrayjunctionbox.EnclosurewherePVstringsofanyPVarayareelectdcallyconnectedandwheredevices
.'an be located.

' PY cell. Basic PV device which can generate electricity when exposed to light such as solar radiation.
. PY convertor. Device which converts DC voltage and DC curent into AC voltage and AC current.
I

' PV DC main cable. Cable connecting the PV gererator junction box to the DC temrinals of the PV convertor
I

. PY generator. Assembly of PV arays.

' PV generator junction box. Enclosure wherc PV arrays are electrically connected and where devices can be
located.

. P\r installation. Erected equipment ofa PV power supply system.

. PV module, Smallest completely environmentally protected assembly of interconnected pV cells.

' PV string. Circuit in which PV modules are connected in series, in order for a PV anay to generate the required
output yoltage.

. PV string cable. Cable connecting PV modules to fo1m a pV stdng.

' PV supply cable. Cable connecting the AC tenninals of the PV convertor to a distribution circuit of the
electrical installation.

Rated current. Value of curent used for specification purposes, established for a specified set of operating
.ondrlions ofa component. de\ ice. equipmenl or system.

Rated impulse withstand voltage level (U,,.), {534}. The level of impulse withstand voltage assigned by the
manufacturer to the equipment, or to part of it, characterizing the specified withstand capability of its insulation
against overuoltages.
NOTE: For the purposes ofBS 7671, only withstand voltage between live conductors and Eafth is considered.

Reduced low voltage system. A system in which the nominal line-toline voltage does not exceed 110 volts and the
nominal line to Earth voltage does not exceed 63.5 volts.

Reinforced insulation. Single insulation applied to live parls, which provides a degree ofprotection against electdc
shock equivalent to double insulation under the conditions specified in the relevant standard. The term 'single
insulation'does not imply that the insulation must be one homogeneous piece. It may compdse two or more layers
\\ hich cannot be tested singly as supplementary or basic insulation.

Reporting. Communicating the results ofperiodic inspection and testing of an electrical installation to the pe6on
ordering the work.

---
t Residences and other locations belonging to agricultural and horticultural premises. Residences and orher
iocations which have a conductive connection to the agricultural and horticulturai premises by either protecrir e
conduclols of the same installation or by extraneous-conductive-parts.
NOTE: Examples ofother locations include offices, social rooms, machine halls, u,orkrooms. gar-ages and shops.

Residential park home. A factoq/ produced relocatable dwelling designed for pennanent residence which may be
used for leisure purposes.

Residual current. Algebraic sum of the cuffents in the live conductors of a circuit at a point in the electical
installation.

Residual current device (RCD). Mechanical switching device designed to make, cary and break curents ulder
norlnal service conditions and to cause the opening ofthe contacts when the residual curent attains a given value
under specifi ed cotditions.
NOTE 1: A residual cunent device can be a combination of various scparate eiements designed to detect and evaluate the
r'esidual crincnt ald to make and break currclt.
NOTE 2: RCD includes devices such as RCCB. RCBO. CBR and MRCD.
NOTE 3: MRCD is a modular residual cunent device.

Residual current operated circuit-breaker with integral overcurrent protection (RCBO). A residual curent
operated switching device designed to perlorm the functions of prctection against oyerload and/or shon-circuit.

Residual current operated circuit-breaker lyithout integral overcurrent protection (RCCB). Aresidual cuffent
operated switching device not designed to perfonn the functions ofprotection agaiust overload and/or short-cir-.cuit.

Residual operating current. Residual cunent which causes the RCD to operate under specified conditions.

Resistance area (for an earth electrode only). The surface area ofground (around an earth electode) on which a
signilicant voltage gradiert may exist.

Response time. The time that elapses between the failure ofthe normal power supply and the ability ofthe auxiliary
power supply to energize the equipment.

Restrictive conductiye location (see Co dtlctitlg locatiofi uith restricted fioyement).

Ring final circuit. A linal circuit arranged in the form ofa ring and comected to a single point of supply.

Safety service. An electdcal system for electuical equipment provided to protect or walr persons in the event of a
hazard. or essential to their evacuation ftom a location.

Sauna. A room or location in which air is heated, in service, to high temperatures where the relative humidity is
normally low, rising only for a shofi period of time when water is poured over the heater.

SELV (separated extralow voltage). An extra-low voltage system which is electrically separated fio[r Earth and
from other systems in such a way that a single fault cannot give rise to the risk ofelectric shock.

Selectivit). Co-ordination of the operating characteristics of two or more protective devices such that, on the
incidence ofan overcurrellt ol lesidual cufient within stated limits, the device intended to opemte within these limits
does so, while the other(s) does (do) not.
NOTE: Fundamentally. selectivity is the ability ofa plotective device to opemie in prelerence to anolher protective delice in
selies.
Partial: Selectivity llp to a given ovelculrent lower than the breaking capacity ofthe downstream device.
Total: Selectivity for all overcurents up to the value ofthe breaking capacity ofthe dowNtrean device.

Shock (see Electric shock).

Shock current, A current passing through the body of a person or livestock such as to cause electric shock and
having characteristics Iikely to cause dangerous effects.

Short-circuit current. An overcun'ent resulting fi'om a fault of negligible in.rpedance between live conductol's
having a difference in potential under normal operating conditions.

Short-circuit current rating 1.aa*, {534}. Maximum prospective shofi-circuit cu[ent ftom the power system for
which the SPD, in conjulction with the OCPD specified, is mted.

Short-circuit current under standard test conditions Isc STC, {712}. Shot-circuit current of a PV module, PV I

string, PV array or PV gererator under standard test conditions.

36

I
Short-circuit protective device (SCPD). Device intended to protect a circuit or parl ofa circuit agairst shoft-circuit
currents by intelTupting them.
NOTE: Table 453.1 provides information regarding the different devices corrcsponding to the nain generic function.

Show Display or presentation in any suitable location, either a roon1, building or tempomry structure.

Simple separation. Separation betweell cjrcuits or between a circuit and Earth by lneans ofbasic insulatiorl.

Simultaneously accessible parts. Conductors or colductive pal1s which can be touched simultaneously by a person
or. in locations specifically intended for them, by livestock
NOTE: Simultaneously accessible parts may be: live pafts, exposed-conductive-palts. exttaneous-conduclive-parts, protective
conducrors or eanh electrodes.

Skilled person (electricalty). Person who possesses, as appropriate to the nature of the electrical work to be
undertaken, adequate education, training and practical skills, and who is able to perceive risks and avoid hazards
rvhich electricity can create.
NOTE 1; The te1m "(electrically)" is assumed to be present where the teflr 'skilled person' is used throtlglrout BS 7671.
NOTE 2: Regulatjon 16 of the Electricity at Work RegulatioDs 1989 requires peNons to be competent to prevent danger and
injury. The HSE publication HSR25 provides guidance on this.

Socket-outlet. A device, provided with female contacts, which is intended to be installed with the fixed wiring, and
intended to receive a plug. A luminaile track system is not regaded as a socket-outlet system.

SPD disconnector. Device for disconnecting an SPD, or part ofan SPD, from the power systen. I

NOTE: This disconnectjng device js not required to have isolating capability for safety purposes. lt is to prevelt a peNistelt
fault on the system and is used to give an indication of an SPD'S failure. Disconnectors can be irtemal (built i]1)
or extcmal (required by the manufacturer). There may be more than ore discollnector function. for example an
overcurrent protection function and a thennal plotection fuoction. These functions nlay be in separate u ts

Spur. A branch from a ring or radial final circuit.

Stand. Arca or temponry structure used for display, nTarketing or sales.

Standard test conditions (STC). Test conditions specified in BS EN 60904-3 for PV cells and PV modules.

Standby electrical source. Elect cal source intended to maintain, for reasons other than safety, the supply to an

electrical installation or a palt or pafis thereof, in case ofintenuption of the normal supply.

Standby electrical supply system. Supply system intendedto [raintain, forreasons otherthan safety, the functioning
of an elect cal installation or a part or pafts thereoi in case of inteffuption of the nonnal supply.

Static convertor. A convefior having no moving parts and notably using semiconductol fectifiel.S.

Stationary equipment. Electrical equipn,ent which is either fixed or which has a n]ass exceeding 18 kg and is not
provided with a canying handle.

Street furniture. Fixed equipn.rent located on a highway.

Supplementary insulation. Independent insulation applied in addition to basic insulation fol far'rlt protection.

S\pplier (see Di s tri brtor ).

Surge current, {534}. A transient wave appearing as a[ ovefcufient caused by a lightning electromagnetic impu]Se.

Surge protective device (SPD), {534}. A device that is intended to limit transient oYervoltages ard divefi sutge
cu[ents. It contains at least one non-linear component.

Srvitch, linked. A switch the contacts ofwhich are so arranged as to make or break all poles simultaneously or in a

definite sequence.

Switch-disconnector. A switch which, in the open position, satisfies the isolating requirements sPecified for a

disconnector
NOTE; A switch-disconnector is otherwise known as an isolating switch.

Sn itchboard, An assembly ofswitchgear with or without instruments, but the term does not apply to gtoups oflocal
in final circuit>.
'rritches
srritchgear. An assetnbly of mai[ and auxiliary switchillg equipmeut for operation, Iegulation, plotection or oll]el
corrtrol of an electdcal installation.

37
 System. An electrical system colsisting ofa single source or multiple sources ruming in parallel ofelectrical energy
and an installation. See Part 3. For cefiain purposes of the Regulations, types of system are identified as follows,
depending upon the relationship ofthe source, and of exposed-conductive-pafis ofthe installation. to Earth:

- TN system. A system having one or more points of the source of energy directiy earthed, the exposed-
conductive-pafis ofthe installation being connected to that point by protective conducton.

- TN-C system. A system in which neutral and protective functions are combired in a single conductor
throughout the system.

- TN-S system. A system having separate neutral and protective conductors throughout the system
(see Figure 3.8).

- TN-C-S system. A system in which neutral and protective functions are combined in a single conductor
ir paft ofthe system (see Figure 3.9).

- TT system. A system having one poirt of the source of energy directly earthed, the exposed-conductive-
palls of the installation being connected to eafih electrodes electrically independent of the eartb
electodes olthe source (see Figure 3.10).

- IT system. A system having no direct connection between live pats and Earlh, the exposed-conductive-
parts ofthe electrical installation being eathed (see Appendix 9 Figure 9C).

- Multiple source and DC systems - see Appendix 9.

Temporary electrical installation. Electrical instal[ation erected for a particular purpose and dismantled u,hen no
longer required lor that puryose.

Temporary overvoltage (U1e1,), {534}. A fundamental frequency overvoltage occuring on the netrvork at a given
location, of relatively long duration.
NOTE 1: TOVs may be caused by 1'aults inside the LV system (Urovlv) or inside rhe HV system (U1e1, s1,)
NOTE 2: Temporary over,/oltages. typically lasting up to several seconds, usually originate from switching opcrations or faults
(for example, sudden load rejection, single phase faults, etc.) and/or from non-linearity (feiroresonance effects.
harmonics, etc.)

Temporary structure. A unit or paft of a unit, including mobile po able units, situated indool.S or outdoors,
designed and intended to be assembled and dismantled.

Temporary supply unit. An enclosure containing equipment for the purpose oftaking a temporary elect cal supply
safely from an item of street fumiture.

Testing. Implementation of measures to assess an electrical installation by means of which its effectiveness is
proved. This includes ascertaining values by means of appropdate measuring instruments, where measured values
are not detectable by inspection.

Thermal storage floor heating system. Heating system in which, due to a limited charging period, a restricted
availability of electrical energy is converted into heat and dissipated mainly through the surface ofthe floor to the
room to be heated with an intended time delay.

Total selectivity. Selectivity for all overcurrents up to the value ofthe breaking capacity ofthe downstream device,

Triplen harmonics. The odd multiples ofthe 3'd harmonic ofthe fundamental frequency (e.g. 3.d,9'1,, 15,h,21")

Trunking lsee Cable trunking).

Verification. All measures by means ofwhich compliance ofthe electdcal installation with the relevant requirements
ofBS 7671 are checked, comprising inspection, testing and cefiification.

Voltage, nominal. Voltage by which an installation (or part of an installation) is designated. The lollowing ranges
of nominal voltage (rms values for AC) are defined: I

- Extra-low. Not exceeding 50 V AC or 120 V ripple-free DC, whether between conducton or to Earth. I

- Low. Exceeding extra-low voltage but not exceeding 1000 V AC or 1500 V DC between conductors, or
600 V AC or 900 V DC between conductors and Earth.

- High. Noulally exceeding low voltage.

NOTE:

r
The actuaLvoltage ofthe installation may differ fronr the nomioal value by a quantity withill normal tolerances. see
Appendix 2.

38

,
\bltage, reduced (see Reduced low voltqge s!-stem).

Voltage band

Band I
Band I covers:
- installations where protection against electric shock is provided under certain conditions by the value
ofvoltage;
- irstallations where the voltage is limited for operational reasons (e.g. telecommunications, signalling,
bell, control and alam installations).

Extra-low voltage (ELV) will nonnally fall within voltage Band I-

Band II
Band contains the voltages for supplies to household and most commercial and industrial installations.
II
Low voltage (LV) will notmally fall within voltage Band II.
NOTE: Band lI voltages do not exceed 1000 VAC rms or 1500 V DC

\bltage protection level (Uo), {534}. A parameter that chamcterizes the performance of an SPD in limiting the
voltag-e across its terminals, which is selected fiom a list ofpreferred values; this value is greater than the highest
value ofthe treasured lin.riting voltages.

Wiring system, An assembly made up of cable or busbars and pafis which secute and, if necessary enclose the
cahle or busbars.

Fig 2.1 - lllustration of earthing and protective conductor terms (see ChaPter 54)

1,2,3,1 Protectlve conductors

1 ckcult prolective conductor
2 main protective bonding conductor
3
4 supple;entary prol€ctive bonding conductors {where requned)
B main earthlng terminal
exposed-conductive-parl
c extEneous.conductlve-Part
main metallic water pipe {extraneous'conductive_Part)
T earth €lectrode Gr and lT systems)
E othar means ofearthing (TN systoms)

39
 SYMBOLS USED IN THE STANDARD

Symbol Nleaning Eranple Symbol Meaning fxample

C rating factor - general Appx 4 sec 3 part ofthe eath fault curent
IE
ii the high voltage system that
CRL calculated risk lelei used to 441.5 flows rhough the earthing
deternine if protcction againsi arrangement of the transfonner
ft ansienr overvoltages of substation
almospheric origin is rcquired.

CA
rating factor for ambient Appx ,l scc 3 the fault cLment that 142.1.2
Ih
flows through thc earthirg
rating facior for circuits budcd Appx 4 sec 3 armngemeflt of the exposcd-
CC
ir the ground conductive parts ofthe
equipment ofthe low voltagc
rating factor for depth ofburial Appx 4 sec 3
Cd installation during a period
when there is a high voltage
mting factor for semi-enclosed Appx 4 sec 3
Cf fault and a first fault in lhe low
fuse to BS Jf)J6
voltage installation
C" rating factor for groupirg Appx 4 sec 3
lm ntb hannonic cunent Appx ,l scc 5.6

Ch rating factor for higher Appx 4 sec 5.6

selection ofSPDS with rcgard to 53,1.4.4.,1
hannonic currents in line limp
impulse discharge currenl
ratcd current or cuncnl setting Table 41.1
Eting factor for conductors Appx 4 sec 3 Itr
Ci ofprotective device
cmbedded in themal insulation
Ia, rated residual operating curren! 4lL.5.l
Cmnr
Ininilnum voltagc factor 4I 1.4.5
ofRCD, in ampercs
CS
ratiig factor for thcrmal Appx 4 sec l ttu\ The nted curent (A) of 516.4.202
resistivity ofsoil an asserrbly which is the
rating factor for operating Appx 4 sec 6.1 marimum load current that
Ct it is designed to manage and
teInperalure of conductor
distribute
battery capacity A721.525

INC The rated cuffent (A) ofa 536.,{.202

DE cxternal cable diameter Appx 4. Table 4A2
circuit as statcd by the assembly
rnanufacturer, lakirg into
consideration the ratings ofthe
IIzk ihe sun ofthe continuous Appx l0 sec 2 devices within the circuits, thcir
cu 'entcanying capacities ofm disposition and application
conduclors in parallel
rated culTenl ofthc protectile Appx l0 scc 2
hk
device for conductor k
f frequency in cycles per second Hz Appx 6 selectron ofSPDS widl regard to 534.4.4.4
discharge curent
an environmental factor,
443.5
selected according according to Ilr prospective fault cunent Appx 6
Table 443.1
Ipk rated peak withstand current 536.4.201
class'gG' utilization category 4l1.4.201
offuscs to 85 88 2'general use
ISCCR selection ofSPD5 with regad to 534.4.4.6
gM class gM' utilization category 411.4.201
the shon-circuit cwent rating
of tuses to,BS 88--2 motor
circuil application TSc STC
sho -circuii current uDdcr 712.,131.I
standard test conditions
culTent (gcncml lenn)
tabulated culTeot-canying Appx 4 sec 3
Il
cunent causing opemtion of 411.4.5 capacity ola cable
Ia
the protective dcvicc witlrin tlre cufent-carrying capacity of a 433.1.l
IZ
specjfied time.
cable for continuous ser"r'icc
desigD current of circr.rit 433.1.1 under the particular iflstallatjon
lb
conditions conccmed
Ibh design cun€nt iicluding the Appx 4 sec 5.5.2
the continuous current-carrying Appx 10 sec 2
cffecl ofthid hannonic cunens Izk
capaciiy ofconductor k
Ibk design current for conductor k Appx 10 sec 2
energy let through raiing of 431.5.2
I1
neuiral cunent duc to third App 4 sec 5.5.2 device
It,
harmonic currenis currcnt causing effective 433.r.1
l2
charging cunent A',721.525 opcration of fie ovcrload
Ic
protective device
mted conditional shot- circuit 536.4.201
thel]nal conductiviiy 523.9
l
rared shori-timc !vithstand .134.5.3 material factor laken from 131.5.2
lc.' k
Tdbles 13.1, 51.2 to 51.6
fault cunenr offirst fault 4[ 62 k:ST energy withstand of cablc 434.5.2
(IT systern)

40

=:,. -.--
 llc.riry E\ampl€ Svmbol lleaning Erampl€
6e risk assessment lengrh 0sn) ]1i.5 t time (secoDds) 414.5.1

maxrmum permitted .C
of high voltage ,143.5 lp
nonnal operatirg conductor-

:::;:: Lrr of 1ow voltage 441.5

U voltagc betwcen lines ,ll1.6.4

:. ::::1h rkrn) ofhigh voltage 441.5 UC continuous opcrating voitage. 534.4..1.i

-:::::rnuDd .ablc 1534)
: j :r_rh (km) of low voltagc 443.5 Uf power frequ."ncy fauJt voltage 142.1.2
-::rrround cable that appcars in the lorv voltage
system bet!veen exposed-
: -::. drop per anperc pcr mVA m' Appx 4 scc 6 conduclivc-parrs and earrh for
thc duration ofthe lauli
r:.:.i:\ e \ oltagc drop per nrVArln Appx.l sec 6
_::3r: per nretre Uo" open circuit vohage Tablc l6A Dote 3

-::,::r\ e \ oltaqe drof pef lnVA'mr Appx 4 Uoc sTC open-circril !oltage xnder 712.41:l.l.l
sec 6
:::::jrL'per Drctr.e
standard test coDditions

-:r:dancc \ oltagc op pcr vollagc protectjon level ofSPD. -l,l.l. -1.l

dr Up a

r::1r!r. per lIe! e i5t4l

-:::i.cr ol circuits ur a group Appx ,{ sec 2.3.3.I uTov lemporary orelaohagc. r/j-i4,, Paf I IOV

ground flash densjry mted impulsc \lithstand \olragc Tab,c:u3.-l

=:r:ring 443.5
'::rrnt 1lr thc location of lcvel. r,-tJ4/'
: rouer lhe and connccted Ur volragc al tcst elecn'odc to larth App\ ll scc 2
($hen lncasuring insulatioll
-:rrrtance of srpplemenraly rcsisiance offloors and walls)
415.2.2
. .Jnr! conductor U0 nonrinul AC rrDs or rq?/. /,.,r liblc,lLI
DC liDc \oltagc to Eal1h
r: rcsponsc vahrc ofthe IMD 538. t.1
.. .reic bcd in BS EN 61557-8 Ul poucr iiequencl st|css volrauc ,1.11.l.l
iuln ofthc reslstances of belueeo the ii c conduclor and
.rr: o 411.5.3
ihc cxposcd-conducli \ c-pa11s
:.: :3rrh electrode and the
:-.:J.Ir\ c conduclor connccing
olthc lo\L vollagc equiflrrent
of th€ tfanslonn.r subsralion
.r rhc exposed-conductivc-
dLrirg the laull

: in -":
poYer lrequcncy stress \ oltrgc ,l.ll. r.l
delined as the "rcsislance 442.1.2
bctt'ern thc linc corductor und
. :ie earthrng anangcment of
the cxposcd-condLLctive-paft s
::,'\posed-conductive pa s
: :]e .quipnenl oflhe low
oflhc cquipmcnl olrhc low
voltage inslallation during the
::irse installalion"
fhult
:!:mnce ofrhe earthing 412 t.2 Z the irnpcdaDcc bctivccn thc lor, +Q.t.7
.-.:.lr.rrent oIlhe lo\\' voltage
. :ienl ncLLlral, for low voltage \oltage system and an eafihing
, i:rmi ir $,hich the earlhirg
:-rn!emcnts ol the lranslormcr ll thc inrpcd.rrcc oipa llcl Appr l0 sec l
:..:rnalion aDd offie low coDdlrcror I
:::Jlc s\sleD neutlal arc
, r.ilicall) rrdcpendun(
/.t lhLrr t)lr1oi rhc.x h l:ull l(n)l .t ti I
rnlpedrl,!a \',ll1.h li !\t.irr.il tr)
:.:nance ollhe earthing 442.t.2 thc installtltion
-r::rr,:cr]1enl of the faDslol.mer i
Zk the pedance ofconducror k o Appx l0 sec 2

:: insulation rcsistance 538.t.1 ZN thc impedance of parallel o Appx l0 sec:

r::11.ef dre rystcrr to \rh'ch
: : .onneded aDd either ZS earth lhult loop inpedance o 4l1.,1.5
:.aflh.
the PE conncction
:r :nother rci'erence poinl z\ i]npedance olfloor insulation o Appx li scc 2
' : l]lolcctivc equipotenrial
: i :Jing Z', neutral-eaIth loop inipedance o 41r.6.1
(tT sysiems \l'ith disrributed
_:irninac of Iinc conductor
ofa Appx 6 Geneic DeutraloDly)
:.rrbution or final circuit schedule oftesl po$er factor (sirusoidal) Appx,l sec 6.2

i.inancc of circuit protecri\.e Appx 6 Generic

: rliuctor (cpc)ofa drsrdbution schedlLlc of test
::nal cflcuit. results
. r: rnorlinal cross sectiolal 543.1.3

:-.ri-scctional area o1'parallcl Appx l0 sec 2

::.rii-sectional arca of Appx l0 sec:

::nducior k

41

\
 -:

ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE STANDARD

Abbreviation Meaning Example
Abbreviation Meaning Example

Device for connecting a 41r.7 .5

Assembly for 104.537.2.2 DCL
ACS luminaire
Construction Sites

CIBSE Chartered Institution of 424.1

AFDD Arc fault detection 421.1.7
Building Services
devices
Engineers
Distribution network 560.6.9
Part 2 DNO
BN Bonding network note 1
operator

ELV Extra-low voltage PartZ

Bonding ring conductor A444.1.4
BRC

Electromagnetic 332.1
l0.l .3 EMC
RS British Standard 1
compatibility

110.1.3 EMI Electromagnetic

BS EN British Standard Euro
intederence
Norm (BSI Published
version of EuroPean
harmonized standard) Appx
A72\.55.2.6 EN European Notm 1

RS EN ISO A BS EN which has the

core text of an ISO
standard
Energy Networks 560.6.9
BSI Rritish Standards note 1
Association
Institution /.L) )
523.3 EPR Earth potential
BSI IEC British Standards
rise - stress voltage
Institution lnternational
Electrotechnical
Commission. A BSI IEC
means the UK has
adopted an IEC
standard that has not
been Put through from
adoption in EuroPe
ElectricitY SafetY, 114.I
444.5.2 ESQCR
CBN Comrnon bonding
Quality and ContinuitY
network
Regulations
111 \11 I
EV Electric vehicle
CBR Circuit-breaker 411'4'4
incorporating residual
curent protection not
suitable for use bY
ordinary Persons .7
Preface FELV Functional extra-low 41.1
CENELEC EuropeanCommittee
voltage
for Electrotechnical
Standardization Preface
HD Hamonization
cfl compact fluorescent 444'6'2
Document
lamp 414.2
PD Published Document
CLCITS European C ommifiee 534 '

OEC)
lor Electrotechnical
Standardization,
Technical SPecifi cation
 \bbreviation Meaning Example Abbreviation Meaning Example

-:l circuit protective Part 2 PE Protective conductor Fig 3.8

conductor

High fiequency Appx 5 PELV Protectiveextra-low 410.3.3

concise list voltage

Health and Safety PEN Protective and neutral Fig 3.9

Executive conductor (combined)

Health Technical 710.1 note 5 PME Protective multiple Fig 3.9

Memorandum earlhing

High voltage 442.2 PV Photovoltaic 712.1

Intemational 133.1 . I PVC Polyvinyl chloride 709.521.1.4

Electrotechnical
Commission
International 706.1 RCBO Residual current Table 41.3
Electrotechnical circuit-breaker with
Commission Technical integral overcurrent
Speciflcation plotection
Institution of RCCB Residual curent Appx I
Engineering and circuit-brcakcr without
Technology integral overcurent
pl otection
Insulation monitoring 411.6.3 RCD Residual current device
device (RCCB or RCBO)

Intemational Protection 412.2.2.3 Residual current monitor 4l L6.3

Code

Intemational Standards 4721.533.1.6 IIns root mean square 133.2.1

Organisation

SELV Separated extra-low 410.3.3

voltage
Liquefied petroleum gas 717.528.3.4 SPD Surge protective device 443.1.1

Lightning protection 534.1 TSE Transfer Switching 536.4.2.3

zone Equipment

Luminaire supporting 4fi.7 .5

coupler

Low voltage

Overcurrentprotective 534.2.3.5
device

--5- 43
 PART 3

ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 30 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

301 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

CHAPTER 3,I PURPOSES, SUPPLIES AND STRUCTURE

311 MAXIMUM DEMAND AND DIVERSITY
312 CONDUCTOR ARRANGEMENT AND SYSTEM EARTHING
312.1 General
312.2 Types of system earthing
312.4 lT, multiple source, DC and other systems
313 SUPPLIES
31 3.1 General
Supplies for safety services and standby systems
314 DIVISION OF INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 32 CLASSIFICATION OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES

CHAPTER 33 COMPATIBILITY
331 COMPATIBILITY OF CHARACTERISTICS
332 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

CHAPTER 34 MAINTAINABILITY
341 GENERAL

CHAPTER 35 SAFETY SERVICES

351 GENERAL
352 CLASSIFICATION

CHAPTER 36 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE

361 GENERAL

::
 PART 3

ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

GHAPTER 30
301 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
An assessment shall be made of the following characteristics of the installation in accordance with
301.1
the chapters indicated:
(i) The puryose(s) for which the installation is intended to be used, its genelal structure and its supplies
(Chapter 3l)
(ii) The extemal influences to which it is to be exposed (Chapter 32)
(iii) The compatibility ofits equipment (Chapter 33)
(iv) Its maintainability (Chapter 34)
(v) Recognized safety setvices (Chapter 35)
(yi) Assessment for contiruiiy olselvice (Chapter 36).

CHAPTER 31

PURPOSES, SUPPLIES AND STRUCTURE

311 MAXIMUM DEMAND AND DIVERSITY
311.1 For economic and reliable design of an installation within thermal Iimits and admissible voltage
part
drop. the maximum dcnand shall be dctcnined. In determining the maxintum detnand of an installation or
thereof. diversity may be taken into accouirt

312 CONDUCTOR ARRANGEMENT AND SYSTEM EARTHING

The following characteristics shall be assessed:

(i) Afiangement of current-canJing conductoN under [onnal operating conditions
(ii) T1.pe ofsystem earthing.

312.1 General
The following a[angements of curent-carying conductors under nonnal opelating conditions are taken
inro
account in this Standard.
3'12.1.1 Current-carrying conductors in AC circuits I

r-:
Fig 3.1 - Single-phase 2-wire

45
 Fig 3.2 - Single-phase 3-wire

Llt

L2.
Phase angle 0"
* Numbering of conductors optional

Fig 3.3 - Two-phase 3-wire

11. L'l* L1*

N L2. N

l-2" N L2*

Phase angle 180' Phase angle 90' Phase angle 1 20"

* Numbering of conductors optional

Fig 3.4 - Three-phase 3-wire

EI.
__/1ll\_ rr
I-/ranr- rz
l-..r- -r- ra

Star connection Delia connection

Fig 3.5 - Three-phase 4-wire

L1

L2

L3
N or PEN

Three-phase, 4-wire with neutml conductor or PEN conductor. By definition, the PEN conductor is not a live
conductor bul a corrdrrctot'carrying an operating cutrent.
NOTE 1: In the case of a singlc-phase 2-wire arangement which is derived from a three-phase 4-wire anangement, the two
conductoN are either two line conductors or a line conductor and a neufual conductor or a line conductor and a PEN
conductor.
NOTE 2: In installations with all loads connected betrveen lines, the installation ofthe neutral conductor may not be necessary
312.1.2 Current-carrying conductors in DC circuits

Fig 3.6 - 2'wire Fig 3.7 - 3-wire

L+ L+

M or PEM

L- or PEL

NOTE: PEL and PEM conductors are not live conductoN although they canJ operating curent. Therefole, the designation
2-wire afangement or 3-wire arrangement applies.

312.2 Types of system earthing

The following t5pes ofsystem eafihirg are taken into account in this Standard.
NOTE 1 : Figures 3.8 to l0 show examples of commonly used three-phase systerns. For lT, mtlltiple source, DC and other
systems see Appendix 9.

NOTE 2: For private systems, the source and/or the dist bution system may be considered aspaftofthe installation within the
meaning of this standard.

NOTE 3: The code. used hare the folloning meanings:

First letter - Relationship of the power system to Earth:

T = direct connection ofone point to Eadh
| = all live parts isolated fiom Earth, or one point connected to Earth through a high irnpedance.

Second letter - Relationship of the exposed-conductive'parts of the installation to Earth:

direct elecl cal connection ofexposed condlrclive-par1s to Earth, indcpcndenlly olthc eafthing ofan,v
point ofthe po\\,er system
direct electrical conneclion of the cxposed-conductive-parts to the eafthed point of the power system
(in AC systelrs. the eafthed poilit ofthe power system is normally the neulral point or, ifa neutral point
is not available, a line conduclor).

Subsequent letter(s) (if any) - Arrangement of neutral and protective conductors:

S : prctective functiol provided by a conductor separate ftom the neutral conductor or fiom the eafihed
li1te (of in AC systems, eafihed phase) conductor

neutral and protective functions combined in a single conductor (PEN conductor).

47
 312.2.1 TN systems

312.2.1.1 Single-sourcesystems
TN systcms have onc point dircctly earthed at the soulcc, the exposed-conductive pafis of the installation(s)
bcing corlnectcd to that point by protective conductorc. Two types ol TN system are considered according to the
affangetrenl of neutral and protective conducto$, as follows:

Fig 3.8 - TN-S system

source of energy
L1
L2
L3
N
protective
consumers'\ conductor (PE)
/
installations
la \
r l--
source earth

exposed-conductive-parts

Separate neutraJ and protective conductors throughout the systern.

The proiective conductor (PE) is the metal ic covering of the cable supplying the installations or a separate conductor.

All exposed conduclive,parts of an insta lation are connected to this protective conductor via the ma n earthing terminal of the
installat on.

Fig 3.9 - TN-C-S (PME) system

source ot energy
L1
L2
L3
combined
protective and
consumers'
neutral conductor

_1_ \ ,/ installations \
additional
PEN

source earth
source earth
I

I
equipment in
in sta llat io n
I I

exPosed-conductive'Parts

Neutral and protective functions combined in a single conductor (PEN) in a part ofthe system'

'lhis type of distribution is known also as protective multiple eadhing (PIvlE).

-l'he ea(hed attwo or more points and an earth electrode may be necessary ator near a consumer's
supply system PEN conductor is
instalation.

All exposed-conductive-parts of an installation are connected to the PEN conductor via the main earthing terminal and the neutral
terminal, these term;nals being llnked togethe.

48
 312.2.2 TT system

312.2.2.'l Single-source system

A TT system has only one point directly eafthed at the source, the
exposed-conductive-parts of the i^tallatlon(s)
being connected to earth electrodes electrically independent
olihe earth electrode olthe supply sys,.* 1,lr" rou.""
eafih).

Fig 3.10 - TT system

source of energy

L1
L2
L3
N

. consumers'
,/ installations \
-/\
source earth I I l

I I I

I I I

I installation > I

I
I

l
installation exposed-conductive-parts installation
earth earth
electrode electrode

All exposed-conductive-parts of an installation are connected to an eatth electrode which is

electrically independent of the source
earth.

Separate neutral and protective conductors throuqhout the svstem.

NOTE: Additional eaxthing ofthe pE in the installation may be provided.

312.3 Not used

C"'""4.oJ
/d-
$ uremnv ;
312.4 lT, multiple source, DC and other systems

See Appendix 9.

313 SUPPLIES
313.1 General
The following charactedstics of the suppty or suppries, liom lvhatever
source, and the normal range of those
characteristics where appropriate, shatt be determined by calculation, measurement,
enquiry or inspection:
(i) The nominal voltage(s) and its characteristics including harmonic
distofiion
(ii) The nature ofthe current and frequency
(iii) The prospective shot-circuit curent at the origin of the installation
(iv) The earth fault loop impedance ofthat part ofthe system extemal to the installation, Ze
(v) The suitability lor the requirements of the insta[ation, incruding the maximum demand
(vi) The tlpe and rating ofthe overcurent protective device(s) acting at the origin ofthe installation.
These characteristics shall be ascertained for an extemal supply
and shall be determined for a private source. These
requirements are equally applicable to main supplies and
to saiety services and standby supplies.
NOTE: The above information should be provided by distributors on request (see
Appendix 2 sec 2).

49
313.2 Supplies for safety services and standby systems
Wheretheprovisionofsafetysewicesisrequired,folexample,bytheautholitiesconcemedwithfireplecautions is
and other conditions tbr emergency oithe pre-ir"s, and/or where the provision of standby supplies
"uu.uu,ion sources of supply for safety
,.qrJ"J UV the pe*on ,pe"iqiing ihe installation, the characteristics of the source or
have adequate capacity, reliability
,".r,"", unalo, u-dby systems shall be separately assessed. Such supplies shall
and rating and appropdate changeover time for the operation specified'
Chapter 35 hereafter and Chapter 56
NOTE 1: For firfiher requiremerts for supplies for safety services, see
in these Regulations'
NOTE 2: For standby systems, there are no pafiicular requirements

314 DIVISION OF INSTALLATION

314.1 Every installation shall be divided into circuits, as necessary to:

(i) avoid danger and minimize inconvenience in the event ofa fault
46 and Section 537)
(ii) facilitate safe inspection, testing and maintenance (see also Chapter
(iii) take account ofhazards that may arise from the failure ofa single
circuit such as a lighting circuit
(PE) currents not
(iv) reduce the possibility ofunwanted tripping ofRCDs due to excessive protective conductol
due to a fault
(v) mitigate tbe effects of electromagnetic distubances (see also Chapter 44)
(vi) prevent the indirect energizing of a circuit intended to be isolated'
3,14.2separatecircuitsshallbeprovidedforpartsoftheinstallationwhichneedtobesepalatelyContlolled, shall be taken of
in such a way that tt ose ar" not'atrected by the failure of other circuits, and due account
"ircrit,
ofthe operation ofany single protective device'
the consequences
circuit, shall
314.3 offinal circuits required, and the number of points supplied by any final
The number
for overcurent protection' Chapter 46 and
be such as to facilitate complian." *ith th" ,aq'i'"tents ofChapter
43
current-carrying capacities of conductors
iection 537 for isolation and switching and Chapter 52 as regards
Sl4,4WhereaninstallationcompSesmolethanonefinalcircuit,eachflnalcircuitshallbecorurectedtoa
separale liom that ofevery
be elect cally
i.purut" *uy in u Aistdbution board. The wiring ofeach final circuit shall
oti_rer final circuit, so as to prevent the indirect energizing of a final circuit intended to be isolated.

GHAPTER 32

CLASSIFICATION OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES

Refer to Chapter 51 and APPendix 5
 CHAPTER 33
COMPATIBILITY
331 COMPATIBILITY OF CHARACTERISTICS

331.1 An assessment shall be made of any charactedstics of equipment likely to have harmful effects
upon other electrical equipment or other sewices or likely to impair the supply, for example, for co-ordination with
concemed parties e.g. petrol stations, kiosks and shops within shops. Those characteristics include, for example:
(i) trarsient ovewoltages
(ii) undervoltage
(iii) unbalanced loads
(iv) rapidly fluctuating loads
(v) starling currents
(vi) harmonic cun:ents
(vii) earth leakage curent
(viii) excessive PE conductor current not due to a fault
(ix) DC feedback
(x) high-frequencyoscillations
(xi) necessity for additional connections to Earth
(xii) power factor
For an extemal source ofenergy the distributor sha1l be consulted regarding any equipment ofthe installation having
a charactedstic likely to have significant influence on the supply.

332 ELECTROMAGNETIG COMPATIBILITY

332.1 All electrical cquipmcnt forming paft of an clcctlical instailatioll shali meet the appropriate
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements and shall be in accordance with the relevant EMC standard.

332.2 Consideration shall be given by the designer of the electrical installation to measures reducing the
effect ofinduced voltage disturbances and electromagnetic interferences (EMI). Measures arc given in Chapter 44.

CHAPTER 34
MAINTAINABILITY
34',1 GENERAL
34',t.1 An assessment shall be made of the frequency and quality of maintenance the installation can
reasonably be expected to receive during its intended life. The person or body responsible for the operation and/or
maintenance ofthe ilstallation shall be consulted. Those characte stics are to be taken into account in applying the
requirements ofParts 4 to 7 so that, having regard to the ftequency and quality ofmaintenance expected:
(i) any periodic inspection and testing, maintenance and repairs likely to be necessary during the intended life
can be readily and safely canied out, and
(ii) the effectiveness ofthe protective measures for safety during the intended life shall not diminish, and
(iii) the reliability of equipment for proper functioning ofthe installation is appropriate to the intended life.
NOTE: There may be padicular statuiory requirements relating to maintenance.
 CHAPTER 35
SAFETY SERVICES
351 GENERAL
have
NOTE 1 : The need for safety services and their nature are frequently regulated by statutory aulhoities whose requirements
to be obseNed.
installations for fire
NOTE 2: Examples of safety services are: emergency escape lighting, fiIe detection and fiIe alalm systems,
pumps, frrefighters lifls, smoke and heat exlraction equipment.

351.1 The following electrical sources for safety services are recognized:
(i) Storage battedes
(ii) Primary cells
(iii) Generator sets independent of the normal supply
A separate feeder ofthe supply netwolk that is effectively independent ofthe nomal feeder
(see Regulation
(iv)
560.6.5).

352 CLASSIFICATION

Refer to Regulation 560.4.

CHAPTER 36
CONTINUIry OF SERVICE
361 GENERAL
361.1 An assessment shall be made for each circuit of any need for continuity of service considered
shall
necessary during thc intended life ofthe installation, e.g. life-support systems The following characteristics
be considered:
(i) Seleclion ofrhc s)slem eanhing
(ii) Selection ofthe protective device in order to achieve selectivity
(iii) Number of circuits
(iv) Multiple power supplies
(v) Use ofmonitoring devices.
 PART 4

PROTECTION FOR SAFETY

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 41 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

410 INTRODUCTION
411 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY

412 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: DOUBLE OR REINFORCED INSULATION

413 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: ELECTRICAL SEPARATION

OR PELV
414 PRoTECTIVE MEASURE: EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE PRoVIDED BY SELV
415 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION
416 PROVISIONS FOR BASIC PROTECTION
417 OBSTACLES AND PLACING OUT OF REACH
4IaPRoTEGTIVEMEASURESFoRAPPLICATIoNoNLYWHERETHEINSTALLATIoN
OR INSTRUCTED
IS CONTROLLED OC UIOEN THE SUPERVISION OF SKILLED
PERSONS
4lgPRovlSIoNSWHEREAuToMATlcDlScoNNEcTloNAccoRDlNGToREGULATIoN
4'I'1.3.2 IS NOT FEASIBLE

CHAPTER 42 PROTECTION AGAINST THERMAL EFFECTS

42'.1 PROTEGTION AGAINST FIRE CAUSED BY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
422 PRECAUTIONS WHERE PARTICULAR RISKS OF FIRE EXIST
423 PROTECTION AGAINST BURNS
424 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING

I
CHAPTER 43 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT
430 INTRODUCTION
AND THE
431 PROTECTION AGCORDING TO THE NATURE OF THE CIRCUITS
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
432 NATURE OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
433 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERLOAD CURRENT
434 PROTECTION AGAINST FAULT CURRENT
PROTECTION
435 CO-ORDINATION OF OVERLOAD CURRENT AND FAULT CURRENT
THE SUPPLY
436 LIMITATION OF OVERCURRENT BY THE CHARACTERISTICS OF

AND
CHAPTER 44 PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES
ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES

440 INTRODUCTION
441 NOT USED
TEMPORARY
442 PROTECTION OF LOW VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS AGAINST
OVERVOLTAGES DUE TO EARTH FAULTS."
ATMOSPHERIC ORIGIN OR
443 PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGES OF
DUE TO SWITCHING

444 MEASURES AGAINST ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES'

445 PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE
CHAPTER 46 ISOLATION AND SWITCHING

460 scoPE
46't GENERAL
462 ISOLATION

463 FUNCTIONAL swlTCHlNG (CONTROL)

MAINTENANCE
464 SWITCHING OFF FOR MECHANICAL

465 EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF

 CHAPTER 41

PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

CONTENTS
410 INTRODUCTION
410.',| Scope
410.2 Nof used
410.3 General requirements
411 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY
411 .1 General
411 .2 Requirements for basic protection
411.3 Requirements for fault protection
411.4 TN system
411.5 TT system
411.6 lT system
411.7 Functional extra-low voltage (FELV)
411.8 Reduced low voltage systems
412 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: DOUBLE OR REINFORCED INSULATION
412.1 General
4',t2.2 Requirements for basic protection and fault protection
413 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: ELECTRICAL SEPARATION
413.1 General
413.2 Requirements for basic protection
413.3 Requirements for fault protection
414 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE PROVIDED BY SELV OR PELV
414.1 General
414.2 Requirements for basic protection and fault protection
414.3 Sources for SELV and PELV
414.4 Requiremenls for SELV and PELV circuits
415 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION
415.1 Additional protection: RCDs
415.2 Additional protection: supplementary protective equipotential bonding
4'16 PROVISIONS FOR BASIC PROTECTION
416.1 Basic insulation of live Parts
416.2 Barriers or enclosures
417 OBSTACLES AND PLACING OUT OF REACH
417 .1 Application
4'17 .2 Obstacles
417 .3 Placing out of reach
4',t8 PROTECTIVE MEASURES FOR APPLICATION ONLY WHERE THE INSTALLATION
is Cournor-leo oR uNDER THE suPERVlsloN oF SKILLED oR INSTRUcTED
PERSONS
418.1 Non-conducting location
418.2 Protection by earth-free local equipotential bonding
418.3 Electrical separation for the supply to more than one item of current-using equipment
4',t9 PROVISIONS WHERE AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION ACCORDING TO REGULATION
41'1.3.2 IS NOT FEASIBLE

55
 CHAPTER 41

PROTEGTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK

410 INTRODUCTION

This chapter deals with protection against electric shock as applied to electrical installations. It is based on
BS EN 6 i140, which is a basic safety standard that applies to the protection ofpersons and
livestock. BS EN 6l 140 is
give ftmdamental principles and requirements that are common to electrical installations and equipment
intended to
or are necessary for their co-ordination.
is that hazaldous-live-pafis
The fundamental rule ofprotection against electdc shock, accolding to BS EN 61140,
not hazardous-live, both under normal conditions
shall not be accessible and accessible conductive parts shall be
and under single fault conditions.
plotective pfolisions
According to 4.2 of BS EN 6l140, protection under normal conditions is provided by basic
and protection under single fault conditions is provided by fault protective provisions

provision, which provides

Altemativety, protection against electlic shock is provided by an enhanced protective
protection under normal conditions and under single fault conditions

410.1 Scope

Chapter 41 specifies essential requirements regarding plotection against electric shock,

including basic protection and
requirements
fauliprotection ofpe$ons ard livestock. It deals also with the application and co-ordination ofthese
in relation to extemal influences.

Requirements are given for the application of additional protection in certain cases'

410.2 Not used

410.3 General requirements

410.3.1 1n this Standard the following specification of voltages is intended unless stated otherwise: I

- AC voltages are rms I

- DC voltages are ripPle-free. I

Ripple-free is conventionally defined as an rms ripple voltage ofnot mole than 10 % ofthe DC
component I

410,3.2 Aprotective measure shall consist of:

(i) an appropriate combination of a provision for basic protection and an independent provision for fault
protection, or
(ii) an enhanced protective provision which provides both basic prctection and fault
plotection.

Additional protection is specified as part ofa protective measule under certain conditions of extemal influence and
in cerlain special locations (see the coresponding sections of Part 7)'
permitted (see Regulations 410 3 5
NOTE 1: For special applications, protective measures which do not follow this concept are
and 410.3.6).

NOTE 2: An example ofan enhanced protective measure is rcinforced insulation'

ofthe
410.3.3 In each part ofan installation one or more plotective measures shall be applied, taking account
conditions of extemal influence.

The following protective measures generally are permitted:

(i) automatic disconnection of supply (Section 411) I

(ii) double or reinforced insulation (Section 412) I

(iii) electrical separation for the supply to one item of curert-using equipment (Section 413) I

(iv) extra-low voltage (SELV and PELV) (Section 414)' I

and erection of equipment'

The protective measures applied in the instaltation shall be considered in the selection

For particular installalions see Regulations 410.3.4 to 410.3 9'

ofsupply
NOTE: In electical installations the most commonly used protective measue is automatic disconnection

56
 410.3.4 For special installations or locations, the pafiicular protective measures specified in the corresponding
section ofPafi 7 shall be applied.

410.3.5 The protective measures specified in Section 417, i. e. the use of obstacles and placing out of reach,
shall only be used in installations restdcted to:
(i) skilled persons, or
(ii) instructed persons under the supervision of skilled persons.
41 0.3.6 The protective measures specified in Section 4l 8. i.e.
(i) non-conductinglocation
(ii) earth-free local equipotential bonding
(iii) elect cal separation for the supply of more than one item ol current-using equipment
shall be applied only where the installation is under the supervision of skilled or instructed persons so that
unauthorized changes cannot be made.

41,0.3.7 Il certain conditions of a protective measure camot be met, supplementary provisions shall be
applied so that the protective provisions together achieve the same degree ofsafery
NOTE: An example of the application ofthis regulation is given in Reguiation 411.7 (FELV).

410.3.8 Different protective measures applied to the same installation or par1 of an installation or within
equipment shall have no influence on each other such that failure ofo[e protective measure could impair the other
protective rneasure or measures.

410.3.9 The provision for fault protection may be omitted for the following equipment:
(i) metal suppofis of overhead line insulators which are attached to the building and are placed out of arm,s
I
reach
(ii) steel reinlorced concrete poles of overhead lines in which the steel reinforcement is not accessible
I

(iii) exposed-conductiYe-parts which, owing to their reduced dimensions (approximate maximum of 50 mm x

I
50 mm) or their disposition camot be gripped or come into significant contact with a part of the human
body and provided that corulection with a protective conductor could only be made with diffrculty or would
be unreliable
NOTE: This exemption applies, for example, to bolts, rivets, nameplates, cable clips, screws and other fixings.
(iv) metal enclosures protecting equipment in accordance with Section 412
(v) unearthed street fumiture supplied from an overhead line and inaccessible in normal use.

411 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: AUTOMATTC DTSCONNECTTON OF SUppLy

411.1 General
Automatic discoluection ofsupply is a protective measure in which:
(i) basic protection is provided by basic insulatiou ol live parts or by bardem or enclosures, in accordance with
Section 416, and
(ii) fault protection is provided by protective earthing, protective equipotential bonding and automatic discon
nection in case ofa fault, in accordance with Regulations 411.3 to 411.6.

Where this protective measure is applied, Class II equipment may also be used.

Where specified, additional protection is provided by an RCD with mted residual operating current not exceeding
I
30 mA, in accordance with Regulation 415.1.
I

NOTE: Residual Current Monitors (RCMs) are not protective devices but they may be used to monitor residual currents in
I
an electrical installation. RCMs produce an audible or audible and visual signal when a preselected value
ofresidual I
current is reached.

411.2 Requirements for basic protection

Al1 electrical equipment shall corrlply with one ofthe provisions lor basic protection described in Section 416 o1
where appropriate, Section 417.

/6ictRtDl(
/o+
/o+ g\
fi r-remnv 3
 411.3 Requirements lor fault protection

4',t1.3.1 Protective earthing and protective equipotential bonding

41'1.3.'1.1 Protective earthing

Exposed-conductive-pafis shall be connected to a protective conductor under the speciflc conditions for each type
ofsystem eafihing as specified in Regulations 411.4 to 411.6.

Simultaneously accessible exposed-conductive-parts shall be colnected to the sarne earthing system individually,
in groups or collectively.

Conductors for protective earthing shall comply with Chapter 54.

A circuit protective conductor shall be run to and teminated at each poir]t in wiring and at each accessory except a
lampholdel having no exposed-corductive-parts and suspended from such a point.

411.3.1.2 Protective equipotential bonding

In each installation main protective bonding conductors complying with Chapter 54 shall connect to the rnain
earlhing terminal extraneous-conductive-parts including the following:
(i) Water installation pipes
(ii) Gas installation pipes
(iii) Other installation pipework and ducting
(iv) Central heating and air conditioning systems
(v) Exposed metallic structuml parts ofthe building.

Metallic pipes entering the building having an insulating section at thefu point of entry need not be connected to the
protective equipotential bonding.

Connection of a lightning protection system to the protective equipotential bonding shall be made in accordance
with BS EN 62305.

Where an installation ser-ves more than one building the above requjrement shall be applied to each building.

To comply with the requireurents ofthese Regulations it is also necessary to apply equipotential bondingto anymetallic
sheath of a telecommunication cable. However, the consent ofthe owner or operator ofthe cable shall be obtained.

4'11.3.2 Automatic disconnection in case of a fault

41'1.3.2.'l Except as provided by Regulation 411.3.2.5, a protective device shall automatically interupt the
supply to the line conductor of a circuit or equipment in the event of a fault of negligible impedance between the
line conductor and an exposed-conductive-par1 or a protective conductor in the circuit or equipment within the
disconnection time required by Regulation 411.3.2.2, 411.3.2.3 or 411.3.2.4.

The protective device shall be suitable for isolation ofat least the line conductor.
NOTE: For IT systems, automatic disconnection is not necessarily required on the occurence ofa l st fault (see Regulatio[
41 I .6.1). For the requil ements for disconnectiol in the event of a second fault, occudng on a different live conductor',
see Regulalion 411.6.5.

411.3.2.2 Maximum disconnection times stated in Table 41.1 shall be applied to final circuits with a rated
current not exceeding:
(i) 63 A with one or more sockeGoutlets, and
(ii) 32 A supptying only fixed connected curent-using equipment.

58
 TABLE 41,1 _
Maximum disconnection times
50V<U6<120V l20V<Ug<230'V 230VcUg<400V Ug>400V
Svstem (s) (s) (s) (s)

AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC
TN 0.8 NOTE 1 0.4 1 0.2 0.4 0.1 0.1

TT 0.3 NOTE I 0.2 0.4 0.07 0.2 0.04 0.1

Where in TT systems the disconnection is achieved by an overcunent protective device and the protective equipotential
bonding is comected with all extmneous-conductive-par1s within the installation in accordance with Regulation 411.3.1 2,
the maximum discomection times applicable to TN systems may be used.

U0 nominal AC nns or ripple-fiee DC line voltage to Earth

Where compliance with this regulation is provided by an RCD, the disconnection limes in accordance with Table 41.1
relate to prospective residual fault curents significantly higher than the rated residual operating cunent ofthe RCD.

Disconnection is not required for protection against electric shock but may be required for other reasons, such as
protection against thermal effects.
NOTE 2: Where disconnection is provided by an RCD, see Note 2 to Regulation '111.4.4, Note 1 to Regulation 411 5.3 and
\ore 4 to Regulation 4l 1.6.5.

411,3.2.3 In a TN system, a disconnection time not exceeding 5 s is permitted for a distribution circuit and for
a circuit not covered by Regulation 41 1.3.2.2.

4'l'1.3.2.4 In a TT system, a disconnection time not exceeding 1 s is permitted for a distribution circuit and for
a circuit not covercd by Regulation 411.3.2.2.

411.3.2.5 Where it is not feasible for an overcurrent protective deyice to interrupt the supply in accordance
with Regulation 411.3.2 or the use of an RCD for this purpose is not appropriate, see Seclion 419. However,
disconnection rlay be required for rcasons other than protection against electric shock.

411.3.3 Additional requirements for socket-outlets and for the supply of mobile equipment
for use outdoors
In AC systems, additional protection by means of an RCD with a rated residual operating current not exceeding
30 mA shall be provided for:
(i) socket-outlets with a mted curent not exceeding 32A, and
(ii) mobile equipment with a rated current not exceeding 32A for use outdoors.

An exception to (i) is permitted where, other than for an installation in a dwelling, a documented risk assessment
determines that RCD protection is not necessary.

The requirements of Regulation 4t1.3.3 do not apply to FELV systems according to Regulation 411.7 or reduced
lorv voltage systems according to Regulation 41 1.8.
NOTE 1 : See also Regulations 3 14.1(iv) and 531.3.2 conceming the avoidance of unwanted tripping.
NOTE 2: See Appendix 2, item 11 in respect ofisk assessment.

NOTE 3: A lighring distribution unit complying with BS 5733, luminaire tnck system, installation coupler, LSC or DCL is not
regarded as a socket-outlet lor the puryoses ofthis regulation.

411,3,4 Additional requirements for circuits with luminaires

Within domestic (household) premises, additional protection by an RCD with a rated residual operating cunent not
exceeding 30 mA shall be provided for AC final circuits supplying luminaires

411.4 TN system

411.4.1 In a TN system, the integrity ofthe eathing ofthe installation depends on the reliable and effective I

connection of the PEN or PE conducto$ to Earth. Where the earthing is provided from a public or other supply
sr stem. compliance with the necessary conditions extemal to the installation is the responsibility ofthe distributor. I

411-4.2 The neutral poi[t or the fridpoint ofthe power supply system shall be earthed. lfa neutral point or
midpoint is not available or not accessible, a line conductor shall be earthed.

59
 Exposed-conductive-parts of the installation shall be connected by a protective conductor to the main earthing I
tenninal ofthe installation, which shall be connected to the earthed point ofthe power supply syslem. I

NOTE: The PE and PEN conductors may additionally be connected to Eafih, such as at the point of entry into the
building. I

411.4.3 In a fixed installation, a single conductor may serve both as a protectiye conductor and as a neutral I
conductor (PEN conductor) provided that the requirements of Regulation 543.4 are satisfled. No switching or
isolating device shall be inseted in the PEN conductor.
NOTE: Regulation 8(4) of the Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations prohibits the use ofPEN conductors in I

consumers' installations.

411.4.4 The characteristics of the protective devices (see Regulation 411.4.5) and the circuit impedances I

shall fulfiI the following requirement:

ZsxlaSUoxCnin
where:

Zs is the impedance in ohms (O) ofthe fault loop comprising:

- the souce
- the line conductor up to the point of the fault, and
- the protective conductor between the point of the fault and the source

la is the current in amperes (A) causing the automatic operation olthe disconnecting device within the
time specified in Regulation 411.3.2.2, or Regulation 411.3.2.3. When an RCD is used this current is
the residual operating current providing discomection in the time specifled in Regulation 411.3.2.2,
or Regulation 41 1.3.2.3
uo nominal AC rms or ripple-free DC line voltage to Earth
is the minimum voltage factor to take account of voltage variations depending on time and place, changing of
Cmin
transformer taps and other considerations-
NOTE: For a 1ow voltage supply given in accordance with the Electricity Safery, Quality and Continuity
Regulations , Cmin is given the value 0.95.

NOTE 1 : Where compliance with this regulation is provided by an RCD, the disconnection times in accordance with Table 41.1
relate to prospective residual fault currents significantly higher than the rated residual operating curent ofthe RCD.
NOTE 2: In TN systems the residual fault currents are signiflcantly higher than 5 IAn. Therefore, the disconnecting times in
accordance with Table 41.1 are fulfilled where an RCD according to BS EN 61008, BS EN 61009 or BS EN 62423 is
used. A CBR according 1(r BS EN 60947-2 can be used, provided the time delay is adjusted to afford compliance with
Table 41.1.

4'11.4.5 The following rypes ofprotective device may be used for fault protection:
i ) Ar or ercurrent prolecli\ e de\ ice
r

(i0 An RCD.
Where an RCD is used for fault protection the circuit shall also incorporate an overcurent protective device in
accordance with Chapter 43.

An RCD shall not be used in a TN-C system.

Where an RCD is used in a TN-C-S system, a PEN conductor shal1 not be used on the load side. The connection of
the protective conductor to the PEN conductor shall be made on the source side ofthe RCD.
NOTE: Where selectivity between RCDS is necessary see Regulation 536.4.1.6.

411.4.201 Where a fuse is used to satisfy the requirements ol Regulation 41 1.3.2.2, maximum values of earth
fault loop impedance (Zs) conesponding to a disconnection time of 0.,1 s are stated in Table 41.2 for a nominal
voltage (Uo) of 230 Y For types and mted curents of general purpose (gG) and motor circuit application (gM)
fuses other than those mentioned in Table 41.2, reference should be made to the appropriate British or Harmonized
Standard to determine the value ofla for compliance with Regulation 411.4.4.

_60
 TABLE 41.2 -
Maximum earth fault loop impedance for fuses, for 0.4 s disconnection time with Uoof 230 V
(Zs)
(see Regulation 4'11.4.201)

(a) General purpose (gG) and motor circuit application (gM) fuses to BS 88-2 - fuse systems E (bolted) and G
(clip-in)
Rating 10 l6 20 25 40 50 63
(amperes)

Z. (ohms) 33.1 15.6 7.80 2.43 1.68 1.29 0.99 0.75 0.57 0.44

(b) Fuses to BS 88-3 fuse system C

Rating 16 20 32 45 I

(amperes)

Z, (ohms) 9.93 2.30 1.93 0.91 0.57 0.36 I

(c) Fuses to BS 3036 (d) Fuses to BS 1362

Rating 15 20 45 60 Rating 13 I

(amperes) (amperes)

Z" (ohms) 9.10 2.43 1.68 0.56 0.40 Z. (ohms) 15.6 2.30 I

NOTE l: The circuit loop impedances have been determined using a value for factor Cmin of0.95.

NOTE 2; The circuit loop impedances given in the table should not be exceeded when:
(i) the line conductors are at the appropriate maximum pemitted operating temperature, as given in Table 52. 1, and
(ii) the circuit protective conductom are at the approp ate assumed initial temperature, as given jn Tables 54.2 to
54 5.

lf the conductors arc at a different temperatue when tested, the reading should be adjusted accordingly.
See Appendix 3.
NOTE 3: Where the line conductor insulation is ofa qpe for which Table 52.1 gives a maximum permitted openting temperature
exceeding 70 "C, such as thermosetting, but the conductor has been sized in accordalce with Regulation 512.1.5:
(i) the maximum permitted operating temperatre for the purpose ofNote 2(i) is 70 "C, and
(ii) the assumed initial temperature for the purpose ofNote 2(i) is that given in Tables 54.2 to 54.4 coresponding to
an insulation material of 70 'C thermoplastic.

411.4.202 Where a circuit-breaker is used to satisry the requirements of Regulation 411.3.2.2 or Regulation I

411.3.2.3, the maximum value of earth lault loop impedance (2,) shall be determined by the fonnula in Regulation
411.4.4. Altematively, for a nominal voltage (U6) of 230 V and a disconnection time of 0.4 s in accordance with I

Regulation 411.3.2.2 or 5 s in accordance with Regulation 41 1.3.2.3, the values specified in Table 41.3 for the types
and ratings ofovercunent devices listed may be used instead ofcalculation.

[g6"'"'ri
ureenev
,fl,

61
L^
 TABLE 41.3 -
Maximumearthfaultloopimpedance(2")forcircuit.ureakerswithUoof230Yforoperation
giving compliance *iiit ttt" O'l disconne-ction time of
+1-t.1.2'i;;; " time of Regulation
disconnection
5 4'11'3'2'3
negutati6n
"
(for RCBOs see also Regulation 4'l1'4'2041

Rating ffizz 40 so 63 80 1oo r25 In

230 x
7.28 2.73 1.7 5
Z- (ohms) 0.87 0.55
' r 4.57 4.37 2.19 1.37 0.9sl(5In)
BS EN 61009-1
c circuit_breakers to BS EN al50898 the overcu.rent characteristics of RCBos to

Rating 6 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

(amperes)
0.55 0.35 0.22 230 x
1.37 0.87
Z. (ohms)
2.19 1.09 0.68 0.44 0.27 0 17 o.gsl(roIn)

D circuit-breakers to fS nN OOscs
Rating ffi 40 so 63 80 1oo 12s

230 x
0.68 0.44
Z, (ohms)
1.82
1.09 0.55 0.34 0.22 0.14 o 09 o.ssl(zor")
0.4 sec
0.3s 0.22 230 x
(ohms) --
''"= ,.rn 1.37
3.64 0.87 0.5 5
017 o.sslitoIn;
Z. 1.09 0.68 0.44 0.27
using a value for factor Cmin of 0 95'
NOTE 1: The cilcr.lit loop irnpedances have been detennined
table should not be exceeded when:
NOTE 2: The circuit loop impedances gilen in the
operating temperature' as given in Table 52 1 and
(i) the line conductors are at ti" approptiate maximum pemitted
as giver in Tables 54.2 to 54 5'
(ii) the circnit protecti". u,,he appropriate assurned initial temperature,
"oro,,o,oir'u."
should be adjusted accordingly'
lf rhe conductoE are at a different tempelature when tested, the reading
See APPendix 3.
temperature
the line conductor insularion is ofa type for which
rable 52. i gives a maxirnurn pelrnitted operating
NorE 3: where with Regulation 512.1 5:
exceeding 70 "c, such ,n"..o."r,i,1g, tri,t,e collductor has been sized in accoldance
(i) ^
the maxinum perm'tted opetatin'g temperature
for the purpose.ofNote 2(i) is 70 'C' and
to
(ii) the assumed initi' i- *"
purpose ofNote 21i1 is that given in Tables 54 2 to 54 4 coresponding
"t"p"'""t""
matelial of 70 'C themoplastic'
an insulation
I

4ll.4.2osWhereafuseisusedforadistributioncircuitorafinalcircuitinaccordancewithRegulation4ll.3.2.3,
time ol5 s are stated in Table
(Zs) coresponding to a disconnection
maxin,um values ofeath fault loop impedance (gG) and motor circuit
io. und iated currents of general purpose
v
41.4 for a nominal voltage (uo) or z}i typ",
to the appropriate British
in fuUtt a t 4' reference silould be u.rade
application (gM) fur., ott t1'u,, tnJ''t ,ot"io'"d 4 4'
", Ia for compliance with Regulation 41 1 I
or Hannonized Standa.d to det","t".te the value of
 TABLE 41.4 -
Maximum earth fault loop impedance (2") for fuses, for 5 s disconnection time with U0of 230 V
(see Regulation 411.4.203J-

(a) General purpose (gG) and motor circuit application (gM) fuses to BS 88-2 - fuse systems E (bolted)
and G (clip in)
Rating 4 6 10 16 20 25 32
(amperes)

Z. (ohms) 44 2t 12 6.8 4.0 2.8 2.2 t.7

continued
Rating 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
(amperes)
Z. (ohms) 0.99 0.78 0.42 0.27 0.r8
(b) Fuses to BS 88-3 fuse
Rating 20 63 80 100

Z, (ohms) 3.2 0.68 0.5r 0.38

(c) Fuses to BS 3036

Rating 15 20 30 45 60 r00
(amperes)
Z. (ohms) 16.8 s.08 3.64 2.5r 1.51 t.07 0.51

(d) Fuses to BS 1362

Rating 13
(amperes)

Z, (ohms) 22.0 3.64

NOTE 1: The circuit loop impedances have been determined using a value for factor Cmin of0.95.
NOTE 2: The circuit loop impedances given in the table should not be exceeded when:
(i) the line conductors are at the appropriate maximum pemitted operatiog temperature, as given in Table 52.1, and
(ii) the circuit protective conductors are at ihe appropriate assumed initial temperature. as given in Tables 54.2 to
54.4.

If the conductors are at a differert temperatue when tested, the reading should be adjusted accordingly.
See Appendix 3.
NOTE 3: Where the line conductor insulation is of a type for which Table 52.1 gives a maximum pe1.I tted operating
temperature exceeding 70 oC, such as thennosetting, but the conductor has been sized in accordance with
Regulation 512.1.5:
(i) the maximum pennitted operating temperature for the pulpose ofNote 2(i) is 70 "C, and
(ii) the assumed initial temperatule for the purpose ofNote 2(i) is that given in Tables 54.2 to 54.5. coresponding
to an insulation material of 70 'C themoplastic.
NOTE 4: Data for fuses ofrating exceeding 200 A should be obtained from the manufacturer'

41'1.4.204 Where an RCD is used to satisfy the requirements of Regulation 411.3 .2.2, 411.3.2.3 or 411.3.2.4
the maximum values of eanh fault loop impedance in Table 41.5 may be applied for non-delayed RCDs to
BS EN 61008-1 and BS EN 61009-1 for a nolrinal voltage Uo of 230 V In such cases, an overcurrent protective
device shall provide protection against overload current and fault cunent in accordance with Chapter 43.

411.5 TT system

411.5.'l Every exposed-conductive-pafi which is to be protected by a single protective device shall be

connected, via the main earthing teminal, to a common earth electrode. However, if two or more protective devices
are in series, the exposed-conductive-parts may be connected to separate earth electrodes con-esponding to each
protective device.

The neutral point or the midpoint ofthe power supply system shall be eathed. Ifa neutral point or midpoint is not
available or not accessible. a line conductor shall be earlhed.

63
4ll.S.2oneormoreofthefollowingtypesofprotectivedeviceshallbeused,theformerbeingpreferred:
(i) An RCD
(ii) An overcurrent proteciive device'
NoTEI:AnappropriateovelcurrentplotectivedevjcemaybeusedfolfaultprotectionprovidedaSuitablylowvalueofZ.is
Permanently and reliably
assured'
in
should also incorporate an overcurrent protective device
NOTE 2: Where an RCD is used lbr fault prctection the circuit
accordance with Chapter 43'
be fu1filled:
411,5.3 Where an RCD is used for fault protection' the following conditions shall
(i) The disconnection time shall be that required by Regul ation 411 3 2 2 or 411 3 2 4'
and

(ii) Rr x IAn S 50 V
where:
RAisthesumoftheresistancesoftheealthelectlodeandtheplotectiveconductolconnectingittothe
exposed-conductive-parts (in ohms)
Ion is the mted residual operating curent ofthe RCD'

if the eadh fault loop impedance of the cilcuit protected by the RCD
The requirements of this regulation are met
meets the requirements ofTable 41 5'
to Regulation 536 4 1'4'
NOTE 1: Where selectivity between RCDs is necessary refer also
NOTE 2: Where RA is not known, it may be replaced by Zs'

TABLE 41.5 -
Maximum earth fault loop impedance (2") for non-delay,e-d and time delayed'S'Type RCDs to
BS EN 61008-1 eH oioo'gt for uo of 230 V (see Regulation 411.5.3)
""J-ds
Rated residual Ma-'rimum earth fault
operating Ioop impedance Z"
current (mA)

Disconnection shall be within the times stated in Table 41 1

NoTEI:FiguresforzsresultfromtheapplicationofRegulation4ll.5.3(i)and(ii).
* The resistance ofthe installation earth electrode should be as low as practicable. A value exceeding 200 ohms
NOTE 2:
may not be stable Refer to Regulation 542 2 4'

4'll.5.4Whereanovercurrentprotectivedeviceisusedthefollowingconditionshallbefulfilled:
ZsxIalUoxCmin
where:

Zs is the impedance in ohms (Q) of the earth fault loop comprising:

- the source
the line conductor up to the point of the fault
the protective conductor from the exposed-conductive-parts
the earthing conductor
the eafih elecftode ofthe installation and
I

- the eadh electrode ofthe source

I

operation olthe disconnecting device within the

is the current in amperes (A) causing the automatic
I

Ia
time specified in Regulation 411 .3.2.2 or 411 3 2'4
I

nominal AC ms or ripple-free DC line voltage to Eafth

I

Uo
depending on time and place'
Cmnr is ihe minimum voitage factor to take account ofvoltage variations
changing oftransformer taps and other considerations'
NOTEIForalowvoltagesupplygiveninaccordancewiththeElectricitySafety'QualityandContinuiiyRegulationsas
amended. C*:, is given the value 0 95'
 4',t't.6 lT system

41',t.6.1 In an [T system, live parts shall be insulated from Earlh or comected to Earth through a sullciently
high impedance. This connection may be made either at the neutral point or midpoint ofthe system or at an artificial
neutal point. The latter may be connected directly to Eafih if the resulting impedance to Earth is sufficiently high
at the system frequency. Where no neutml point or midpoint exists, a line conductor may be connected to Eafih
through a high impedance.

Where the above conditions apply, the fault current is then low in the event ofa single fault to an exposed-conductive- I

pafi or to Earth,so that automatic disconnection in accordance with Regulation 41 1.3.2 is not imperative provided I

that the condition in Regulation 41 1.6.2 is fulfllled. Precautions shall be taken, however, to avoid the risk ofharmful I

effects on a person in contact with simultaneo,rsly accessible exposed-conductive-parts in the event of two faults
existing simultaneously.
I

NOTE 1: It is strongly recommended that [T systems with distributed neutrals should not be employed. I

NOTE 2: To reduce oveNoltage or to damp voltage oscillation, it may be necessary to provide earthing through impedances or
afiificial neufral points, and the characte stics ofthese should be appropriate to the rcquirements ofthe instailation.

41'1.6.2 Exposed-conductive-parts shall be eafihed individually, in groups, or collectively.

In AC systems the following condition shall be fulfilled to limit the touch voltage to:

RAxId<50v

where:
RA is the sum ofthe resistances in ohms ofthe earlh electrode and protective conductor for the exposed-
conductive-parts.

is the fault cuffent in amperes (A) ofthe first lault ofnegligible impedance between a line corductor and
an exposed-conductive-part. The value ofld takes account ofleakage currents and the total eafihing
impedance of the electrical installation.

No touch voltage limitation is considered iD DC systems as the value ofld can be considered to be negligibly low.

41't .6.3 The following monitoring devices and protective devices may be used:
(i) insulation monitoring devices (IMDs) I

(ii) residual current monitoring devices (RCMs) I

(iii) insulation fault location systems (IFLS)

(iv) overcurrent protective devices (OCPD)
(v) residual curent devices (RCDs).
NOTE 1: Where an RCD is used, t pping ofthe RCD in the event ofa first fault cauot be excluded, due to capacitive leakage
curents.
NOTE 2: In case offaults ill tu,o differcnt Class I cuaent-using devices supplied by different line conductors, the operation ofan
RCD is only likely to be achieved if every single item ofcurent-using equipment is protected by an individual RCD.
In such a qase, the use ofan overcurent prctective device is more suitable.

411.6.4 Where an IT system is designed not to disconnect in the event ola first fault, the occurence ofthe
first fault shall be indicated by either;
(i) an insulation monitoring device (IMD), which may be combined with an insulation fault location system
(IFLS), or
(ii) a residual curent monitor (RCM), provided the residual current is suf6ciently high to be detected.
NOTE: RCMs are not able to detect symmetrical insuladon faults.

I The device shall initiate an audible and/ol visual signal which shall continue as long as the fault persists. The signal
I can be initiated via a relay contact output, an electronic switching output or a communication protocol.
I A visual and/or an audible alam system shall be aranged at a suitable place, so that it is perceived by responsible
I persons.
I

Ifthere are both audible and visible signals, it is pemissible for the audible signal to be cancelled.

65
 61557-9 may be provided to indicate the location
In addition, an insulation fault location system according to B S EN
another refercnce point'
ofa first fault from a live part to exposei-conductive-pads or Earth or

411'6'sAfteltheoccurenceofafiIstfault,conditionsforautomaticdiscorurectionofsupplyintheeventof
a second fault occurring on a different live conductor shall be as follows:

(i)Whereexposed.conductive-pafisaleintelconnectedbyaplotectiveconductolcollectivelyearthedtothesame
earthingsystem,theconditions,i-ifu"oaTNsyttetapplyandthefollowingconditionsshallbef[lfilled
and in DC syslems where the midpoint conductor
where the neutral conOr"to, i. not Ai.t iUuted in Ab systems
is not distributed:

TlxC
L,=__T_
olwheletheneutlalconductololmidpointconductorrespectivelyisdistributed:

Uo t C,o-
-, -------
L;=

where:
is the nominal AC or DC voltage, in volts, between line
conductors
U
and neutml conductor or
Uo is the nominal AC or DC voltage, in volts, between line conductor
midpoint conductor. as appropriate
is the impedance in ohms ofthe fault loop comprising the
line conductor and the protective
Z"
conductor of the circuit
neutral conductor and the protective
Zt, is the impedance in ohms of the fault loop comprising the
conductor of the circuit
I"isthecurentinamperes(A)causingoperationoftheplotectivedevicewithinthetimelequhedin
Regulation 41 1.3 2.2 for TN systems or Regulation 411 3 2
3

is the minimum voltage factor to take account ofvoltage

variations depending on time and place'
C.i"
changing oftransformer taps and other considerations

the TN system is applicable to IT systems with a distributed

NOTE 1: The time stated in Table 41.1 of Regulation 411.3.2.2 for
or non-distributed neutral conductor or midpoint conductor'
the event of the simultaneous occufence of two faults' the
NOTE 2: The factor 2 in both fbrmulae takes into account that in
fauits may exist in different circuits'
NoTE3:Forfaultloopimpedance,themostseverecaseshouldbetakenintoaccount.e.g.afauitonthelirleconductolatd]e
source and simultaneously another fault or the neutral conductor
considered
ofcurrent-using equiprnent ofthe circuir

(ii)Wheretheexposed-conductive-pafisaleearthedingroupsorindividually,thefollowingconditionapplies:
Re.xIa!50V
where:
RAisthesumoftheresistances,inohms,oftheearthelectrodeandtheprotectiveconductortotheexposed-
cooductive-Parts
the disconnection device in a time complying
1" is the current in amperes causing automatic disconnection-of
a time complying with Regulation
with that for TT sys,"^, i, iuui" + r. r of Regulation 411.3.2.2 or in I
411.3.2.4.

an RCD' compliance with the disconnection times required

for
NOTE 4: Ifcompliance to the requirements of(ii) is provided by
TTsystemsinTable4l,tmayrequi,eresidualctmentssignificantlyhigherthantheratedresidualoperatingclrlTent
i
l^n ofthe RCD applied (typically 5 t^n)'
41',t.7 Functional extra-low voltage (FELV)
411.7 .1 General

Where, for flrnctional rcasons, a nominal voltage not exceeding 50 V AC or 120 V DC is used but not all the
requiremeflts ofSection 414 relating to SELV or to PELV are fulfilled, and where SELV or PELV is not necessary, the
supplementaD, provisions described in Regulation 41 1.7.2 and 411.7.3 shatl be applied to provide basic protecrion
and fault protection.

This combination ofprovisions is known as FELV

NOTE: Such conditions may, for example, be encountered where the circuit contains equipment (such as transformers, relays,
remote-conftol switches, contactors) insLrfficiently insulated with respect to circuits at higher voltage.

411.7.2 Requirements for basic protection

Basic protection shall be provided by either:

(i) basic insulation according to Regulation 416.1 coresponding to the nominal voltage ofthe primary circuit
ofthe source, or
(ii) barriers or enclosures in accordance with Regulation 416.2.

411.7 .3 Requirements for fault protection

The exposed-conductive-pafis ofthe equipment ofthe FELV circuit shall be connected to the protective conductor of
the primary circuit ofthe source, provided that the primary circuit is subject to protection by automatic disconnectiou
of supply as described in Regulations 411.3 to 41 I .6.

411.7 .4 Sources
The source of the FELV system shail either be a transfomer with at least simplc scparation bctuccn windings or
sha)l comply with Regulalion 414.3.

If al extra-low voltage systcm is supplied frorn a higher voltage system by equipment which does not provide
at least simple sepamtion between that system and the extE-low voltagc system. such as an autofansfonrer. a
potentiomet or a scmiconcluctor device, the output circuit is not pan of a FELV syste;n and is deemed to be an
extension ofthe input circuit and shall be protectcd by thc protcctive measure applied to the input circuit.
NOTE: This does not preclude connecting a conductor oftbe FELV circuit to the protective conductor ofthe primarJ crrcuir.

4'l'1.7.5 Plugs, socket-outlets, LSCs, DCLs and cable couplers

Every plug, socket-outlet, luminaire supporting coupler (LSC), device for connecting a luminaire (DCL) and cable
couplel in a FELV system shall have a protective conductor contact and shall not be dimensionally compatible with
those used for any other system in use i[ the same premises.

4'11.8 Reduced low voltage systems

411.8.1 General

411 .8.1 .1 Where, for functional reasons, the use ofextmlow voltage is impracticable and there is no requirement
for the use of SELV or PELV, a reduced low voltage system may be used, for which the provisiol'rs described in
Regulations 411.8.2 to 5 shall be made to provide basic protection and fault protection.

411 .8.1 .2 The nominal voltage of the reduced low voltage circuits shall not exceed I l0 V AC rms between
Iines (three-phase 63.5 V to earthed neutral, single-phase 55 V to earthed midpoino.

4'11.8.2 Requirements for basic protection

Basic protection shall be provided by either:
(i) basic insulation according to Regulation 416.1 corresponding to the maximum nominal voltage of the
reduced low voltage system given in Regulation 411 .8.1 .2, or
(ii) bariers or enclosures in accordance widr Regulation 416.2.
411.8.3 Requirements for fault protection

Faurr prorecrion by auromaric

o,::":lTlJ.:lo':l,o.iljll:::xj:Ii:1,:'"1:T[:{iJ.:J::'Ji:ll.!:":;:i:';
',ti
der ice in each line conductor
or b1 p( of ,rltiration. including socket-outlet"-
at every
ffi il;;;""d ; Eafih rhe earth fault loop impedance
5 s'
,'fr"ii i" ,t"fr,rr" ,f-re disconnection time does not exceed (Z') shall be determined by the
is used lhe maximum ralue ofeanh lault loop imoedance of calculation
Where a circuit-breaker to*'ntai'-r"r'it'+r'o ma} be used instead
rormula in Resulation o" o o o"t'"i"iiti'"t#"j*t therein
for the nominal voltages
(U0) tit q';"";'J '"i"g' oio""ott"nt device listed
"rra
V and 61 5 V
Whereafuseisused,themaximumvaluesofearthfaulttoopimpedance(Zs)conespondingtoadisconnectiontime
nominal volrages (Uo) of 55
of 5 s are stated in Table 41 6 tbr
For qpes and e*.",T.:t::l_1":l;l*;ln.m n'il:i;|,:"Ji:'tl:i;iiiilll':i["X],:,ffi,[i';"1;i:
cnnrnnriate British or Harmontzec
orrt'' nominal roltage tUo)
::#5,fi;;;';ffip'iate 'atu'
exceed 50
roop impedance in ohnls sha1l
not v
whelefaultprotectionisprovidedbyanRCD,theploduct.of^theratedresidualoperatingcurrent(Iln)inamperes
."nfi"ri'
^.lilr"
TABLE 41.6
Us of 55 V
-
(z:)-lo'- ?'""9:tonnection time and
Maximum earth fault loop impedance
i"jl gi;fp-h"""r "n.i'os's ch*'il1?
v
411'8'1'2 and 41'l'8'3)
iseJ Regutations
BS EN 60898 and the
General PurPose (gG)
F',ffii]6.*rl*tt," to fuses to BS 88-2
nrer.u.r"nt char"cteristics of RCBOs fuse systems E and G
BS EN 61009-1 -

Uo (Volts)
Rating Zs ohms

4.02 t.'7 4 2.01

3 3.48
1.01 2.90 3.35
1.',74 2.01 0.87
6 1.89
0.60 1.63
1.05 t.21 0.52
10

0,95 I .10
0.3 3 0.3 8
16 0.65 0.7 5
0.6'7 0.'7'7
0.60 0.26 0.30
20 0.52
0.24 0.52 0.60
0.42 0.48 0.21
25

0.19 0.42 0.48

0.33 0.3 8 0.16
32

0.15 0.31 0.35

0.26 0.30 0.13
40 0.2'7
0.10 0.12 0.24
50 0.21 0.24
0.10 0.19 0.22
0.17 0.19 0.08
63 0.15
0.07 0.08 0.13
80 0.13 0.15
0.06 0.12 0.14
0.10 0.12 0.05
100 0.09
0.04 0.0s 0.08
125 0.08 0.10

uffiila uting a value for factor cmrn of 0 95'

Horg t, ,t," ,*-Ir-au-,"*,*t-iln-
"ir,',rfrp table shouldnor3"::"rt*Jlii;
;;; ,, ;;" ;, loop impedances giver rn the
(ir the rine conductor: *. .t ,1" :ll_':ll';jjila};#ffi;Ji"iiiu] ,"^p",u*'", u. siven in rables s4.2 to
i:,"*1li::11ffi,:T:::il:il:Jili::TH:::"::::*:**X*::^r,:',:H::';ffi'13:i:;'.',1fl:
ar(
tii) the circuit protecli\e conductors
5'16.
accodingl)''
reading should be adjusted
at a dillerent telnpeLature when tested the
li the condllctors arc
See Appcndix 3.
 =-I
NorE 3: $here the line conductor insulation is ofa t)?e for which
rable gi'es a maximum permitted oper ating temperaftue
5-2.1
exceeding 70 oC, such as thennosetting, but the
conductor has been'sized in accordance with Regulation 512.1.5:
(i) the maximum permitted operaling temperature for
rhe purpose ofNote 2(i) is 70 oC, and
(ii) the assumed initial temperature for the pu,po."
orNot" uiil
is thar given ir Tables 54.2 to 54.4 conesponding
to an insulation rnaterial of70 "C themtoplastic. I

NOTE 4: Data for fuses ofrating exceeding 200 A

should be obtained from the ma,,ufacturer.

411.8.4 Sources

411.8.4.1 The source ofsupply to a reduced low voltage circuit

shall be one ofthe following:
(i) A double-wound isorating transfomer comprying with BS EN
61558-1 andBSEN6r558-2-23
(ii) A motor-generator set having windings providing isolation equivalent
to that provided by the windings of
an isolating transformer
(iii) A source independent olother supplies, e.g. an engine_driven generator

4'11'8'4'2 The neutral (star) point ofthe secondary windings

^ - secondary
midpoint ofthe
ofthree-phase transformers and generators. or the
windings ofsingle-phase transfo..i. unJ-g"n"ru,ors,
shall be connected to Eafth.
411,8.5 Requirements for circuits

Every plug, socket-outlet, luminaire supporting coupler (LSC),

device for connecting a luminaire (DCL) and cable
coupler of a reduced low voltage system shall have a prot"ctiu"
coni*tor and shall not be dimensionally
compatible with those used for any other system in use
in the same premises."ontu"t

412 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: DOUBLE OR RETNFORGED

|NSULATtoN
412.1 General
412.'t.1 Double or reinforced insulation is a protective measure
in which:
(i) basic protection is provided by basic insulation
and fault protection is provided by supplementary insulation,
or
(ii) basic and fault protection is provided by reinforced insulation between
live pafts and accessible pats.
NorE: This protective measure is intended to prevent the appearance ofa dangerous
voltage o,, the accessible parts of
elect cal equipment through a fault in the basic insulation

The protective measure ofdouble or^reinfo_rced insulation

is applicable in al1 situations, unless some lifiritations are
given in the coresponding section ofpart 7.

4't2.1.2 where this protective measure is to be used as the sole protective

measure (i.e. where a whole
ii:i"lill3i,"T;:fii:l'"fl:l*11:::Tnt ent"af or'quffi;;ff;;; ffi;;:;:::"ffi;lTi#:l:
1;::*,1:]::T imgarr the efiectwen",, ortn. p,ot..t*.;;;il:il;;;;;;;;,;;ffi;,il#:;:1JJ:ii:;;:1
.:"T:::i$i'L",'i:T"::::1'"',::,::,"Yo'''pr",,.o.r"t-o;,r";;j,h-;;';",,h#ffi".,,ffi#iJ:HHl"J
for con-nectins a ruminaiie iocrt .,."ii"'".";l;;;;#ffi;;'#ff;"r,.:il:?
il;ll;*?jlj:::ce
equipment lvithout authodzation.

4'12.2 Requirements for basic protection and fault protection

412.2.1 Electricalequipment

where the protective measure double or reinforced insulation

is used for the complete installation or pafi there ot,
electrical equipment shall comply with one olthe followine
:
(i) Regulation 412.2.1.1. or
(ii) Regul ations 4 I 2.2.t .2 and 412.2.2, or
(iii) Regulations 412.2.t.3 and 412.2.2.
f"*%g\
/9=
f urenanv !
.^- 69
 and marked to the rclevant standards:
412.2.1.1 Electrical equipment shall be ofthe following types' t)lle-tested
(Class II equipment)
(i) electrical equipment having double or reinforced insulation
I

I
(ii)electricalequipmentdeclaredinthelelevantploductStandardasequivalenttoClassll,suchasassemblies
''-' oi"t""tri"ui having total insulation (see BS EN 61439 series)' I

"quipment ll equipment
This equipment is identilied by the symbol rcfer to BS EN 60417: Class I
NOTE: @
supplementary insulation applied in
4'12.2.1.2 Electdcal equipment having basic insulation only shall have
equivalent to electrical equipment
a;. ;;;t of erecting the'ellctrical insta-llation, providing a degree of safety
412 2 2 'l to 412 2'2'3'
accordins to Regulation 412.2.1.1 and complying with Regulations
I

arrd interior ofthe enclosure

HOfg: ile srirtol @ shor-rld be lixed in a visible position both on the exterior
I

4l2,2.l.3Electdcalequlpmenthavinguninsulatedlivepaltsshallhavereinforcedinsulationappliedinthe
in'tuffion, froviaing a d"g"e of safety equivalent to elect cal
equipment
process of erecting the insulation
"f".t,i.ur and 4l|2.2 2 3. Such is
according ro Regutarion 4 t 2.2. L I ;;;.;;plying wirh"Regut;r
ions 412.2.2.2 I

insulation'
."-il;d -lv;"here constructional features prevent the application of double
and interior of the enclosure'
should be iixed in a lisible position botb on the exterior
I
NOTE: the symbol Q
412.2.2 Enclosures

4l2.2.2.lTheelectricalequipmentbeingreadyforoperation,allcorrductivepafisseparatedfromlivepartsby
affording at least the degree ofprotection IPXXB
basic insulation only, st.,ult U" contulneJin un-inrrtutlng .n"losure
or IP2X.

412.2.2.2 The following requirements apply as specified:

(i)theinsulatingenclosureshallnotbetraversedbyconductivepartslikelytotlansmitapotential;and
material which
(ii) the insulating enclosure shall not contain any screws or other flxing means of insulating
installation and maintenance and whose
might need to be removed,;; are likety to b" '"''ou"d' during
repiacement by metallic screws or other fixing means could
impair the enclosure's insulation'

joints or connections (e g for operating handles

where the insulating enclosure must be traversed by mechanical
protection against shock in case ofa fault is not
ofbuilt-in equipment), these shoutdbe ananged in such a way thai
impaired.

4l2.2.2.sWherealidordoolintheinsulatingenclosulecanbeopenedwithouttheuseofatoolorkey,all
parts which ur" u"""*ltt" ii,t lid orioor is open shall be
behind an insulating barrier (providing a
;;;",* " ftom coming unintentionally into contact
o.gr." pi"*"i"n not less than lpxxB or Ip2X) preventing persons use of a tool or key'
"r
ri?t ihor" parts. This insulating banier shall be removable only by the
"onOr.tive
412.2.2.4Conductivepaltsenclosedintheinsulatingenclosureshallnotbeconnectedtoaplotectiveconductol'
which necessarily run through the enclosure
However, provision -uy U" -uaa tJao*e"ting p'ot""tle "onductors
*lor" through the enclosure lnside
supply circuit also runs
in order to serve other items
"f "l;;;';rrpri.r,
any such conductor. urd tt eit t".minats bi insulated as though they were live parts' and their
shal1
the enclosure,
terminals shall be narked as protective conductor (PE) terminals'
to a protective conductor unless specific
No exposed-conductive-parts or intermediate palt shall be connected
proui.ion fot tt i, it madi in the specification for the equipment concemed'
protected in this way'
412.2.2.5 The enclosure shall not adversely affect the operation ofthe equipment
412.2.3 lnstallation
(fixlrle' connection of conducton'
412.2,3.1 The installation of equipment mentioned in Regulation 4122'1
prof,ction afforded in compliance with the equipment
etc.) shall be effected ln..r"r., u *ui''u', not to impair the
specification.

412.2.3,2 Except where Regulation 412 12applies,acircuitsupplyingofleormoreitemsofClassI1equipment

point in wiring and at each accessory'
shall have a circuit protective conJuctor run to and terminated at each
NoTE:ThiSrequirementisiutendedtotakeaccountofthereplacementbytheuselofClassllequipme[tbyclassl
equip1nent.
412.2.4 Wiring systems

412.2.4.1 Wiring systems installed in accordance with Chapter 52 are considered to meet the requirements of
Regulation 412.2 if:
(i) the rated voltage ofthe cable(s) is not less than the nominal voltage ofthe system and at least 300/500 V, and
(ii) adequate mechanical protection ofthe basic insulation is provided by one or more ofthe following:
(a) The non-metallic sheath ofthe cable
(b) Non-metallic trunking or ducting complying with the BS EN 50085 series olstandards, or non-metallic
conduit complying with the BS EN 61386 series ofstandards.
NOTE Cable product stardards do not specify impulse withstand capability. Howeveq it is considered that the insulation of
the cabling system is at least equivalent to the requirement 111 BS EN 61140 for reinforced insulation.
NOTE 2: A wiring system shonld not be identif,ed by the symbol @ or by the symbol P .

413 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: ELECTRICAL SEPARATION

413.1 General
413.1.1 Electrical separation is a protective measure in which:
(1) basic protection is provided by basic insulation of live parts or by bariers or enclosures in accordance with
Section 416. and
(ii) fault protection is provided by sin.rple separation of the separated circuit from other circuits and from Ear1h.
413,1 .2 Except as permitted by Regulation 413. .3, this protective measure shall be limited to the supply of
1

one item ofcufient-using equipment supplied from one unearthed source with simple separation.
NOTE: When this protective measure is used, it is particularly impofiant that the basic insulation complies with the relevant
product standard.

413,1,3 Where more than one item of curent-using equipment is supplied from an unearthed source with
simple separation, the requirements ofRegulation 418.3 shall be met.

413.2 Requirements for basic protection

AII electdcal equipment shall be subject to one ofthe basic protective proyisions in Section 416 or to the protecrive
measures in Section 412.

413.3 Requirements for fault protection

413.3.1 Protection by electrical separation shall comply with Regulations 413.3.2 to 413.3.6.

4't3.3.2 The separated circuit shall be supplied through a source with at least simple separatior, ard the
voltage ofthe separated circuit shall not exceed 500 V

413.3.3 Live parts ofthe separated circuit shall not be connected at any point to another circuit or to Eafth or
to a protective conductor.

For electrical separation, anangements shall be such that basic insulation is achieved between circuits in compliance
rvith Regulatiou 416. 1.

413.3.4 Flexible cables shall be visible throughout any part oftheir length liable to mechanical damage. I

413.3,5 For separated circuits the use of separate wiring systems is recommended. If separated circuits and I

otl]er circuits are in the same wiring system, multi-conductor cables without metallic covering, insulated conductors I

in insulating conduit, insulating ducting or insulating trunking shall be used, provided that: I

(i) the rated voltage is not less than the highest nominal voltage, and
(ii) each circuit is protected against overcunent.
413.3.6 The exposed-conductive-pafis ofthe separated circuit shall not be connected either to the protective I

conductor or exposed-conductive-parts ofother circuits, or to Eaflh. I

NOTE: lf the exposed-conductive-parts of the separated circuit are liable to come into contact, either i[tentionally or
fo uitously, with the exposed-conductive-parts of other circuits, protection against electric shock no longer depends
solely on protection by electrical separation but also on the prctective provisrons ro which the larter e\posed-
conductive-parts arc subject.

71
 BY SELV OR PELV
414 PROTECTIVE MEASURE: EXTRA'LOW VOLTAGE PROVIDED

4'14.1 General

4l4,l.lPlotectionbyextlalowvoltageisaplotectivemeasurewhichconsistsofeitheloftwodiffelent
extralow voltage systems:
(i) SELV or
(ii) PELV
requires:
Protection by extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV
I' 50 V AC or 120 V
(iii) limitation of voltage in the SELV or PELV system to the upper limit ofvoltage Band
DC ((ee BS EN bll40). and
(iv)plotectiveSeparationoftheSELVoIPELVSystemftomallcilcuitsothelthanSELVandPELVcircuits,and
between th; 5ELV or
pElvsystem and other sELV or PELV systems, and
basic insulation
and Earth'
(v) for SELV systems only, basic insulation between the SELV system

414.1.2 TheuseolsELVorPELVaccoldingtosection4l4isconsideredaSaprctectivemeasureinallsituations.
a value lower than 50 v AC or 120 V DC'
NOTE: In certair cases Part 7 limits the value ofthe extra-low voltage to

414.2 Requirements for basic protection and fault protection

provided where:
Both basic protection and fault protection are deemed to be
(i) the nominal voltage cannot exceed the upper limit ofvoltage Band 1' and
(ii) the supply is from one ofthe sources listed in Regulation 414 3' and
(iii) the conditions of Regulation 4 1 4 4 are fulfilled'
NoTEI:IfthesystemissuppliedliomahighervoltagesystembyequipmentwhichprovidesatleastSimpleseparationbetween
and PELV sources
meet the requirements for SELV
that system and the extra_low voltge system but which does not
be app)icable' see Regulation 411'7'
in Regulation 414.3, the requirements for FELV may

NoTE2:DCvoltagesforELVcircuitsgeneratedbyasemiconductorconveltol(seeBSEN60146-2)tequireanintemalAC
exceeds the DC voltage The internal AC circuit
voltage circuit to supply the reitifier stack This iltemal AC voltage
iSnottobeconsideredasahighervoltagecircuitwithinthemeaningofthisregulation,Betweenintemalcircuitsand
extemal higher voltage circuits, protective sepamtion is required'
I
NoTE3:lnDCsystemswithbatteries,thebatterychalgingandfloatingvoltagesexceedthebatterynominalvoltage,depending
provisions in addition to those specified in this regulation.
on the type ofbattery. This does not reiuire any protective
V AC or 150 V DC as appropriate according to the I
The charging voltage should not exceed a marimum value of 75
environmental situation as given in Table 1 ofPD 6536 (IEC 61201)'

414.3 Sources for SELV and PELV

Tbe following sources may be used for SELV and PELV systems:
(i) A safety isolating transfotmer in accordance with BS EN 61558-2-6 or BS EN 61558-2-8
specified
(ii) A source ofcurrent providing a degree ofsafety equivalent to.thal.ofthe safety isolating fansformer
in (i) (e.g. motor-genemtor with windings providing equivalent isolation)
circuit (e g a
(iii) An electrochemical source (e.g. a battery) oI another source independent of a higher voltage
diesel-ddven generator)
(iv) Cefiain electrcnic devices complving with appropdate sta:rdards' Yh"i: ryl]:t:'-l111:"t"t:.t*:li*
;:l:ffii'';;.I*;;iilffi?;i;,-,i,'"'""i'"e" at the outgoins termt"il'
:T:'-:l:::ljTJ::"::
are' howe]-I:f':111i"I1""]j;I
*lltil.," iiilri"ioJili.i.;'sh..;oto!", u,,ti" o"goinsterminats
:ffi;;"",';il"lit" p"n "r li,rr" .veniof a fautt beiveen a live pafi and^an "]p:ttd-::ld"::i)";1"1:
thevoltageattheouputterminalsisimmediatelyleducedtothevaluespecifiedinRegulation4l4.l.lor
1ess.
and monitoring devices'
NOTE 1: Examples ofsuch devices include insulatior testing eqripment
NOTE2:Wherehigh".uot,ug","ti"u'tl"outgoingterminals'compliancewiththisregulationmaybeassumedifthewiih
the limits specifled in Regulation 4!4 1 1 when rneasured
a
voltage at the outgoing tenninals is within
voltmeter having an internal resistance ofat least 3 000 ohrns'

Amobilesourcesuppliedatlowvoltage,egasafetyisolatinghaosformeroramotor-generator'shallbeselected
double or reinforced insulation (see
in accordance with the reiiieients for protection by the use of
and erected
Section 412).
414.4 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits
414.4.1 SELV and PELV circuits shall have:
(i) basic insulation between live pafts and other SELV or PELV circuits, and
(ii) protective separation from live parts of circuits rot being SELV or PELV, provided by double or reinforced
I

insulation or by basic insulation and protective screening for the highest voltage present.

SELV circuits shall have basic insulation between live pafis and Ear1h. I

The PELV circuits and./or exposed-conductive-parts ofequipment supplied by the PELV circuits may be earthed.
NOTE 1: In particular, protective separation is necessary between the live paits of electrical eqllipment such as relays,
contactors and auxiliary switches, and any part ofa higher voltage circuit or a FELV circuit.
NOTE 2; The earthing ofPELV circuits may be achieved by a connection to Earth or to an ealthed protective conductor within
the source itself.

414.4.2 Protective separation ofwiring systems ofSELV or PELV circuits from the live parts olother circuits,
which have at least basic insulation, shall be achieved by one ofthe following arrangements;
(i) SELV and PELV circuit conductors enclosed in a non-metallic sheath or insulating enclosure in additioll to
basic insulation
(ii) SELV and PELV circuit conductors separated from conductors of circuits at voltages higher than Band I by
an earthed metallic sheath or earthed metallic screen
(iii) Circuit conductors at voltages higher than Band I may be contained in a multi-conductor cable or other
grouping ofconducto$ ifthe SELV and PELV conducton are insulated for the highest voltage present
(iv) The wiring systems ofother circuits are in compliance with Regulation 412.2.4.1
(v) Physicatseparation.
414.4,3 Every socket-outlet and luminaire supporting coupler in a SELV or PELV system shall require the
use of a plug which is not dimensionally compatible with those used for any other system in use in the same
premises.

Plugs and socket-outlets in a SELV system shall not have a protective conductor contact.

414.4.4 Exposed-conductive-parts of SELV circuits shall not be connected to Earth, or to prorecrive

conductors or exposed-conductive-parts of another circuit.
NOTE: If the exposed-conductive-parts of SELV circuits are liable to come into contact, either fortuitously or intentionally,
with the exposed conductive-parts of other circuits, protection against electric shock no longer depends solely on
protectiol by SELY but also on the protective provisions to which the latter exposed-conductive-pa(s are subjecr.

414.4.5 Ifthe nominal voltage exceeds 25 V AC or 60 V DC or ifthe equipment is immersed, basic protection I

shall be provided for SELV and PELV circuits by:

(i) insulation in accordance with Regulation 416.1
I

(ii) barriers or enclosures in accordance with Regulation 416.2.

Basic protection is generally unnecessary in normal dry conditions for:

(i) SELV circuits where the non.fnal voltage does not exceed 25 V AC or 60 V DC I

(ii) PELV circuits where the nominal voltage does not exceed 25 V AC or 60 V DC and exposed-conductive- I

parts and/or the live parts are comected by a protective conductor to the main earthing terminal.

In all other cases, basic protection is not required if the nominal voltage of the SELV or PELV system does not
exceed 12 VAC or 30 V DC.

415 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION

NOTE: Additional ptotection in accordance with Section 415 may be specifled with the protective measure. In particular,
additional protection may be required with the protective measure under cerlain conditions ofexternal influence and
in cedail special locations (see the corresponding section of Part 7).

41s.1 Additional protection: RCDs I

4'15.1.1 The use of RCDs with a mted rcsidual operating curent not exceeding 30 mA is recognized in I

AC systems as addilional protection in the er ent of failure of the provision lor ba:ic protect ion and or the provision
I
for fault protection or carelessness by users.

73
 The use of RCDs is not recognized as a sole means of plotection and does not obviate the need
to
415.1,2
apply one ofthe protective measures specified in Sections 411 to 414.

415.2 Additional protection: supplementary protective equipotential bonding I

NOTE 1: Supplementary protective equipotential bonding is considered as an addition to fault pfotection. I

does not exclude the fleed to disconnect the supply for othel leasons. for
NOTE 2: The use ofsupplementary plotective bo[ding I

example protection agaimt fire, thennal stresses in equipment, etc'

NOTE 3: Supplementary protective bonding may involve the entire instailatioq a paft of the installation, an jtem of I

equiplnent, or a location.
of Pafi 7), or for othcr
NOTE 4: Additional requirements llray be necessary for special locations (sce the corresponding section
teasolls.
exposed-
415,2.1 Supplementary protective equipotential bonding shall include all simultaneously accessible
including where practicable the main metallic
conductive-parts oifixed equipment and exiraneous-conductive-parts
bonding system shall be connected to the
reinforcement of constructional reinforced concrete. The equipotentiat
protective conductors ofall equipment including those of socket-outlets'

415-2.2 The resistance R between simultaneously accessible exposed-conductive-pafs and extaneous-

conductive-parts shall fulfil the following condition:
V/Ia in AC systems
Ri 50

R: 120 v/Ia in DC systems

where Ia is the operating current in amperes (A) ofthe protective device or:
(D for RCDs. Im
(ii) for overcurrent devices, the 5 s operating cutrent'

416 PROVISIONS FOR BASIC PROTECTION

as a part
NOTE: Provisions for basic protection provide protection under normal conditions and are applied where specifled
of the chosen Protective measure.

416.1 Basic insulation of live parts

Live pa s shall be completely covered with insulation which can only be removed by destruction. FoI equipment,
the iniulation shall comply with the relevant standard for such electrical equipment'
aIe generally
NOTE: The insulation is intended to prevent cottact with live parts. Paint, varnish, lacquel oI similal products
not considered to provide adequatc inslllation for basic protection in normal service'
I

416.2 Barriers or enclosures

NOTE: Baniers or enclosures are intelded to prevent contact with live pafis

4,16.2.1 Live parts shall be inside enclosures or behind baniers providing at least the degree of protection
IpXXB orlP2X exceptthat, where largeropenings occurduring the leplacement ofpalts, such as cefiain lampholders
to the
or fuses, or where larger openings aie ,"""ttury to allow the proper functioning of equipment according
relevant requirements for the equipment:
(i) suitable precautions shall be taken to prcvent percons or livestock from unintentionally
touching live pafis,
and
as far as is reasonably practicable, persons will be aware that live pa s can be touched
(ii) through the opening
and should not be touched intentionally, and
for
(iii) the opening shall be as small as is consistent with the lequilement for proper functioning and
replacement ofa Paft.

416.2.2 A horizontal top sudace of a barier or enclosure which is readily accessible shall provide a degree

ofprotection of at least TPXXD or IP4X.

416.2.3 A barrier or enclosure shall be firmly secured ir place and have sufficient stability and durability to
maintain the required degree of protection and appropdate separation from live pafis in the
known conditions of
normal service, taking account ofrelevant extemal influences'
416,2'4 Where it is necessary to remove a barrier or open an enclosure or remove parts of enclosures, this
shall be possible only:
(i) by the use ofa key or tool, or
(ii) after disconnection of the supply to live parts against which the barriers or enclosures afford protection,
restoration ofthe supply being possible only after replacement or reclosure ofthe barrier or enclosur-e. or
(iii) where an intennediate barrier providing a degree ofprotection ofat least IPXXB or IP2X prevents contact
with live parts, by the use of a key or.tool to remove the intemediate barrier
NOTE: This regulation does not apply to:
a ceiling rose complying with BS 67
a cord operated switch complying with BS EN 60669-1
a bayonet lampholder complying with BS EN 61184
an Edison screw lampholder complying with BS EN 60238.

416.2.5 If, behind a banier or in an enclosure, an item of equipment such as a capacitor is installed which
may retain a dangerous electrical charge after it has been switched off, a waming label shall be provided. Small
capacitors such as those used for arc extinction and lor delaying the response ofrelays, etc shall not be considered
dangerous.
NOTE: Unintentional contact is not considered dangerous ifthe voltage resulting from static char€e falls below 120 V DC in
less than 5 s after disconnection from the power supply.

417 OBSTACLES AND PLACING OUT OF REACH

417 .1 Application
The protective measures ofobstacles and placing out ofreach provide basic protection only. They are for application
in installations, with or without fault protection, that are controlled or supervised by skilled persons.

The conditions ofsupervision under which the basic protective provisions of Section 417 may be applied as part of
the protective measure are given in Regulation 410.3.5.

417.2 Obstacles
NOTE: Obstacles are intended to prevent unintentional contact with live parts but not intentional contact by deliberate
circum\ ention ol lhe obslacle

417.2.1 Obstacles shall preyent:

(i) unintentional bodily appr.oach to live pafis, and
(ii) unintentional contact with live parts during the operation of live equipment in nonnal service.
417 .2.2 An obstacle may be removed without the use of a key or tool but shall be secured so as to prevent
unintentional remoyal.

417.3 Placing out of reach

NOTE: Protection by placing out ofreach is intended only to prevent unintentional contact with live pafis.

A bare or insulated overhead line for distribution between buildings and structures shall be installed to the standard
required by the Electdcity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations.

417.3.1 Simultaneously accessible pafts at different potentials shall not be within arm's reach.

A bare live part other than an overhead line shall not be within ann's reach or within 2.5 rr ofthe followins:
tit An erpo:ed-conducli\ e-parl
(ii) An extraneous-conductive-pat
(iii) Abare live part ofany other circuit.
NOTE: Two parts are deemed to be simultaneously accessible if they are not more than 2.50 m apart (see Figure 417).

417.3.2 Ifa notmally occupied position is restricted in the horizontal direction by an obstacle (e.g. handrail,
mesh screen) affording a degree ofprotection less than IPXXB or IP2X, arm's leach shall extend from that obstacle.
In the overhead direction, arm's reach is 2.50 m from the surface, S, not taking into account any intennediate
providing a degree ofprotection less than IPXXB.
".bstacle
NOTE: The values ofann's reach apply to contact directly with bare hands wrthour assisrance (e.g. rools or lcdder).

75
 Fig 417 - Arm's reach

S= surface expected lo be occupied by persons

limil of arm's reach

The values refer to bare hands

without any assistance, e.g.
from tools or a ladder.

handted' the distances Lequired by

4lT.3.S ln places where bulky or lorg conductive objects are-notmalll
t"tti"g u"count olthe relevant dimensions ofthose objects
Regulations 4l T.3 l and + r;.: z slail tre int'-"u"A'

WHERE-THE INSTALLATION
418 PROTECTIVE MEASURES FOR APPLICATION ONLY
ist<iHinor-r-eo oR rHi supenvtstot't oF SKILLED oR INSTRUcTED
uNDER
PERSONS
protectjve provisions ofscclion 418 may bc applied as par ofthe
NorE: The conditioN of supeNision under which the fault
protective measule are given in Regulation 410 3 6'

418.1 Non-conducting location

application'
This method ofprotection is not recognized for general
NoTE:Thisprotectivemeasweisintendedtopreventsimultaneouscontactwithpartswhichmaybeatdifferentpotefltials
through failure ofthe basic insulation oflive parts'

4,18',l,lAllelectricalequlpmentshallcomplywithoneoftheprovisionsforbasicprotectiondescribedin
Section 416.

418.,l.2Exposed-conductive-partsshallbearrangedsothatundelordinarycircumstancespersonswillnot
come into simultaneous contact with:
(i) twoexposed-conductive-parts,or
(ii) an exposed-conductive-part and any extraneous-conductive-part
failure of the basic insulation of a live pafi'
ifthese parts are liable to be at different potentials through
conductor'
418.1.3 ln a non-conducting location there shall be no protective
 -l
418.1.4 Regulation 418.1.2 is fulfilled ifthe location has an insulating floor and walls and one or more ofthe
following arrangements applies:
(i) Relative spacing of exposed-conductive-pafis and of extraneous-conductive-parts as well as spacing of
exposed-conductive-parts

This spacing is sufficient if the distance between two pafis is not less than 2.5 m; this distance may be
reduced to 1.25 m outside the zone of arm's reach.
(ii) Interyosition ofeffective obstacles between exposed-conductive-parts and extmneous-conductive-parts

Such obstacles are sumciently effective ifthey extend the distances to be surmounted to the values stated in
point (i) above. They shall not be corulected to Earth or to exposed-conductive-parts; as far as possible they
shall be ofinsulating material.
(iii) lnsulation or insulating arrangements of extraneous-conductive-pafis.

The insulation sha11 be of sufncient mechanical strength and be able to withstand a test voltage of at least
2 000 V Leakage curent shall not exceed 1 mA in normal conditions ofuse.

418.1.5 The resistance of insulating floors and walls at every point of measurement under the conditions
specified in Part 6 shall be not less than:
(i) 50 kQ, where the nominal voltage ofthe installation does not exceed 500 V, or
(ii) 100 kO, where the nominal voltage of the installation exceeds 500 V
NOTE: If at any point the rcsistance is less than the specified value, the floors and walls are deemed to be extraneous-
conductive-parts for the pur?oses ofprotection against elect c shock.

418.1 '6 The affargements made shall be pemanent and it shall not be possible to make them ineffective. The
arrangements shall also provide protection where the use of mobile equipment is envisaged.
NOTE 1: Attention is drawn to the risk that, where elect cal installations are not under effective supervision, further conductive
parts may be introduced ata later date (e.g. mobile Class I equipment! or extraneous-conductive-parts such as metallic
water pipes), which may invalidate compliance wirh Regulation 418.1.6.
NOTE 2: It is essential that the iNulation offloor and walls cannor be affected by humidity.
I

418'1.7 Precautions shall be taken so that extraneous-conductive-parts cannot cause a potential to appear I

extemal to the location concemed.

418.2 Protection by earth-free local equipotential bonding

This method ofprotection shall be used only in special circumstances.
NOTE: Earth-free local equipotential bonding is intended to prevent the appearance ofa dangerous touch voltage.

4'18.2,1 A11 electrical equipment shall comply with one of the provisions for basic protection described in
Section 416.

418.2.2 Protective bonding conductors shall interconnect every simultaneously accessible exposed-
conductive-part and extraneous-conductive-palt.

418,2,3 The local protective bonding conductors shall neither be in electrical contact with Earth directly, nor
through exposed-conductive-parts, nor through extraneous-conductive-parts.
NOTE: Where this requirement camot be fulfiIled, protection by automatic disconnection ofsupply is applicable (see Section 411).

418.2.4 Precautions shall be taken so that persons entering the equipotential location cannot be exposed to
a dangerous potential difference, in particular, where a conductive floor insulated from Ealth is connected to the
eaflh-ftee protective bonding conductors.

418.2.5 Where this measure is applied, a waming notice complying with Regulation 514.13.2 shall be fixed
in a prominent position adjacent to every point ofaccess to the location concemed.

418.3 Electrical separation for the supply to more than one item of current-using
equipment
Where the measure is used to supply two or more items of equipment from a single source, a waming notice
complying with Regulation 514.13.2 shall be fixed in a prominent position adjacent to every point ofaccess to the
location concemed.
NOTE: Electdcal separation of an individual circuit is intended to prevent shock curents thlough contact with exposed-
conductive-parts that may be energized by a fault il1 the basic insulation ofthe circuit.

77
4lS.3.lAllelectricalequipmentshallcomplywithoneoftheprovisionsfolbasicplotectiondescribedin
Section 416.

4ls.3.2Plotectionbyelecticalseparationforthesupplytomolethanoneitemofequipmentshallbeachieved
r,y.o',priun."*itr,alltherequirementsofSection+t:e*ceptRegulation4l3.l.2.at:dwiththerequirementsiD
Regulations 418.3.3 to 8.

4ls.3.3PlecautionsshallbetakentoplotecttheSepalatedcircuitfromdamageandinsulationfailure.
418.3.4Theexposed-conductive-paftsoftheseparatedcilcuit.shallbeconnectedtogethelbyinsulated, or
shall not be connected to the protective conductor
non_eafibed protectir" bonoirg condr"iJrr. iu"t., aora,r"tors
of aiy other circuit or to any extraneous-conductive-pafis'
"^pJ-"ori"oit"-parts
Note to Regulation 413 3'6'
NOTE: See

418,3,5EverySocket-outletshallbeprovidedwithaplotectiveconductolcontactwhicbshallbeconnected
4'
with Regulation 418 3
to the equipotentialionding system provided in accordance

418.3.6 Except where supplying equipment with double -, *l'f:*:1

11',19::::,;tl|1i*11:tl"J.,'1""
i; i,J", a protective bonding conductor in accordance with Regulation 418.3.4
"".i""ii " *r.li,r.1;il;"; fed by conductors of
418.3.7 lf two faults affectlng two exposed-conductive-pafis occur and these are
,r* supply in a disconnection time confondng with Table 4 1 1 '
ifr"U Or*""t
""i
4lS.3.STheproductofthenominalvoltageofthecircuitinvoltsandlengthofthewiringSysteminmetles
500 m'
100 000 Vm, and the length ofthe wiring system shall
not exceed
,t.ruit rot
"^.""4
ACCORDING TO REGULATION
419 PROVISIONS WHERE AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION
411,3,2 IS NOT FEASIBLE
where:
419.1 Where automatic disconnection is not feasible in circumstances
installed' or
(i) electronic equipment with limited short-circuit curent is
a protective device
(ii) the required disconnection times cannot be achieved by

the provisions of Regulations 419.2 and 419 3 are applicable'

voltage U0 greatel than 50 V AC or
419.2 For iNtallations with power electronic convertors with nominal
the output voltage ofthe source shall.be reduced to
120 v DC and where automatic drscinnection is not feasible, or Earth
50 V AC or 120 V DC or less in t},. ofu fuult Uetween a Iive conductor and the protective conductor
"""nt as appropriate (see BS EN 62471 -l)'
in u tlrrr" u. giu.n i,., Regulation 41 1.3.2.2,411.3.2.3 or 41 1.3.2.4,
manufacturcr gives adequate methods for the initial
The power electronic convertor shall be one for which the
veridcation and periodic inspection and testing ofthe installation

4'19.3 Except wherc Regulation 419 2 applies, if automatic disconnection

*P bt the time
::ll:]tl^in
proteclive equipotential
required by Regulation 45.3.2.2,i t.2 z I ot ir.l.l.q
u, appropriate, supplementaly
*iit n"g.,tutio, +ls.iandihe voltage between simultaneously accessible
bo,ding shall be prorided in accordanc. 120 v DC'
.^p"r.i-"""4*,it"-pafis extraneous-coniuctive-parts shall not exceed 50 V AC or
and/or
 CHAPTER 42
PROTECTION AGAINST THERMAL EFFECTS

CONTENTS
420.1 Scope
421 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE CAUSED BY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
421.1 General requirements
422 PRECAUTIONS WHERE PARTICULAR RISKS OF FIRE EXIST
422.1 General
422.2 Conditions for evacuation in an emergency
422.3 Locations with risks of fire due to the nature of processed or stored materials
422.4 Combustible constructional materials
422.5 Fire propagating structures
422.6 Selection and erection of installations in locations of national, commercial, industrial or
public significance
423 PROTECTION AGAINST BURNS
424 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING
424.1 Forced air heating systems, appliances producing hot water or steam, and space heating
appliances

CHAPTER 42
420.'l Scope
This chapter applies to electrical installations and equipment with regard to measures for the protection ofpersons,
livestock and property agai st:
(i) the harmful effects ofheat or thermal radiation developed by electrical equipment
(ii) the ignition, combustion or degradation ofmaterials
(iii) flames and smoke where a fire hazard could be propagated ftom an electrical installation to other nearby flre
comparhnents, and
(iv) safety services beilg cut offby the failure ofelectrical equipment.
NOTE 1: Fol protection against thermal effects and fire, statutory requirements may be applicable. Refer to Appendix 2.
NOTE 2: Protection against overcurent is dealt with in Chapter 43 ofthese Regulations.

421 PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE CAUSED BY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

421.1 Generalrequirements
121.1.1 Persons, livestock and property shall be protected against harmful effects ofheat or fire which may
r3 generated or propagated in electrical installations.

\farufacturers' instructions shall be taken into account in addition to the requirements of BS 7671.
NOTE 1: Harmful effects ofheat or fire may be caused by:
- heat accumulation, heat radiation, hot components or equipment
- failure ofelectrical equipment such as protective devices, switchgeat themostats, temperature limiters, seals of
cable penerralions and u iring cyslems
- overcunent
- insulation faults or arcs. sparks and high temperatre particles
- harmo c crurents
- extemal influences such as lightning surge
- inappropriate selection or erection ofequipment.
\:-E 2l Lightning strikes and oveNoltages are covered in BS EN 62305 and Section 443 ofthese Regulatiors.

Fixed electrical equipment shall be selected and erected such that its temperature in nolmal operation

79
 by additional protective measures
will not cause a fire. This shall be achieved by the construction ofthe equipment or
taken during erection
material or to
The heat generated by electrical equipment shall
not cause danger or harmful effects to adjacent fixed
*at"rial .it i"h -ay ioreseeably be in proximity to such equipment'
Wherefixedequipmentmayattainsurfacetemperatureswhichcouldcauseafirehazardtoadjacentmaterials'ore
The equipment shall:
ilr" r"rr"wing initallation methods slall be adopted.
"r."r. "i
(i)bemountedonasuppotwhichhaslowthermalconductanceolwithinanenclosurewhichwillwithstand.
tempemtures as may be generated' or
with [rinimal risk of tire or harmful thermal effect' such
(ii)bescreenedbymatedalsoflowthermalconductancewhichcanwithstand.withmininlalriskoffileor
' ' harmful therm'al effect, the heat emitted by the elecffical
equipment' or

(iii)bemountedSoaStoallowsafedissipationofheatandatasutEcientdistancefromadjacentnraterialon
which such tempemtures r,*. deletedous effects. Any means of suppofi shall be of lorv themal
"ouio
conductance.

zljl.SWherearcs,spalksorpafiiclesathightemperatuemaybeemitted-byfixedequipmentinnomal
requirenrents ltshallbe:
,"rria", *" aqrip-ent shall meet one tr more ofthe following
(i) totally enclosed in arc-resistant matedal
upon which the emissions could have harmflil
effects
(ii) screened by arc-resistant material from materials
.iii)mountedsoastoallowsafeextinctionoftheemissionsataSufficientdistanceflommaterialsuponwhich
the emissions could have harmful ellects
(iv) in compliance with its standard'
shall be non-ignitable, of low thermal conductiYity
and of
Arc_resistant material used for this prctective measure
adequate thickness to provide mechanical stabiliry

42l.,l.4Fixedequlpmentcausingaconcentrationandfocusingofheatshallbeatasu{ficientdistanceflom
a dangerous temperature in
any fixed object or building ,rrui ir,. object or element is not subjected to
"r"rr"ii-ri
normal conditions.

42l.,l"5Wheleelectricalequipmentinastnglelocationcontainsflamn,ubleliquidinsignificantquantity,
products ofcombustion'
tut"i.'-ii fttvent the sireaa of tiquid' flarre and the
adequate precaution, ,nuff U"
NOTE 1: Exarrples ofsuch precautions are:
and provide extinction in the event of fire
(a) a retention pit of sufncieDt size to collect any leakage of liquirl
provision of sills or othel means
(b) iNtallarion ofthe in o .rrur"ter of adequateire-resistance and the
"quip-.ni chambel being ventilated solely to
ofpreventing burnin!-il'or,a'ro."uo.* a other palts
ofthe building, such a

the exterial atmosPhere'

quantity is 25 litres'
NOTE 2: The generally accepted lower limit for a signiicant
NOTE3:Forquantitieslessthan25litles,itissufncienttotakeprecautionslopreventtheescapeofliquid'
to be smoke and gas-
NOTE 4: Products of combr-rstion ofliquid are considercd

421.1,20,|Withindomestic(household)premises,consumerunitsandsimilarswitchgearassembliesshall
comply with BS EN 61439-3 and shall:
(i) have their enclosure manufactured from non-combustible material' or
co,rplying withRegulation
(ii) be enclosed in a cabinet or enclosure constructed ofnon-combustible material and
132.12.
e.g steel, is deemed to be an example ofa non-comhustible material'
NOTE: Ferrous metal,

42l.l.6Matedalsusedtbltheconstructionofenclosuresofelectricalequipmentshallcomplywiththe
,oiatura"tot.,"utundfirerequirementsinanappropdateproductstandard'
enclosure shall withstand the highest temperature
likely to be
where no product standard exists, the materials ofan
produced by the electdcal equipment in nomal use'

42l,l.TArcfaultdetectiondevicesconformingtoBSEN62606arerecommendedasameansofproviding
in AC final circuits'
additional protection against fire caused by arc faults
If used, an AIDD shall be placed at the origin ofthe circuit to be protected.
NOTE: Examples ofwhere such devices can be used include:
premises with sleeping accommodation
locations u.ith a risk offire due to the nature ofprocessed or stored materials, i.e. BE2 locations (e.g. bams
woodworking shops, stores of combustible materials)
locations with combustible constructional materials, i.e. CA2 locations (e-g. wooden buildings)
fire propagating strucrures. i.e. C82 locations
locations with endangering of ireplaceable goods.

422 PRECAUTIONS WHERE PARTICULAR RISKS OF FIRE EXIST

422.',| General
The requirements ofthis regulation shall be applied in addition to those of Section 421 for installations in locations
wherc any olthe conditions of extemal influence described in Regulations 422.2 to 6 exist.

422.1.1 Except for wiring systems meeting the requirements of Regulation ,122.3.5. electrical equipment
shall be restricted to that recessary to the use ofthe locations given in Regulation 422.1.

422,1,2 Electrical equipment shall be so selected and erected that its nonnal temperature rise and foreseeable
temperatur e rise dudng a fault cannot cause a fire. This shall be achieved by the constmction ofthe equipment or by
additional protective measures taken during erection.

Special ureasures are not necessary where the temperature of surfaces is unlikely to cause combustion ol nearby
substarces.

422.1.3 A temperature cut-out device shall have manual reset only.

422.2 Conditions for evacuation in an emergency

The following regulations refer to corditions:
BD2: Low density occupation, difficult conditions ofevacuation
BD3: High density occupation, easy conditions ofevacuation
BD4: High density occupation, difficult conditions of evacuation.

(Refer to Appendix 5.)

NOTE: Authorities such as those responsible fol building construction, public gatherings, fire prevention. hospitals, etc. may
specify whicir BD condition is applicable.

422,2,1 Cables shall not encroach on escape routes unless they meet the recommended requirements ofthe
relevant pafi ofBS EN 60332-3 series and achieve at least 60 % light tansmittance when tested in accordance with
BS EN 61034-2. Cables in escape routes shall be as shofi as practicable. Cables encroaching on escape routes shall
not be installed within arm's reach unless they are provided with protection against mechanical damage likely to
occur during an evacuation.

Where used, cable rnanagement systems shall be one or nrore ofthe following types: l

(i) conduit systems classified as non-flame propagatirg according to BS EN 61386 I

(ii) cable trunking systems afld cable ductirg systems classified as non-flame propagating according to BS EN
50085
(iii) cable tray and cable ladder systems classified as non-flame propagating according to BS EN 61537, or I

(iv) powetrack systems meeting the requirements olBS EN 6153,1. I

NOTE: Cabies need to satisfy the requirements ofthe CPR in respect oftheir reaction to lire. See Appendix 2. item l7- I

Cables that are supplying safety circuits shall have a resistance to fire rating of either the time authorized by
regulations for building elements or Blitish Standards for the circuits or one hour in the absence of such a regulation
or standard.

422.2.2 In conditions BD2, BD3 or BD4, switchgear or conrolgear shall be accessrble only to authodzed
persons. If switchgear or controlgear is placed in an escape route, it shall be enclosed in a cabinet or an enclosure
constructed of non-combustible or not readily combustible material. I

These requirements do not apply to items ofswitchgear or controlgear installed to facilitate evacuation, such as fire
alam call points.

81
 equipment contarmng
escape routes where conditions
BD3 or BD4 exist' the use of electrical
422.2.3 ln
flammable liquids is not permitted' in
in equipn.rent' such as a capacitor installed
to individual capacitors incolporated
This requirement does not apply
stalter'
a discharge luminaire or a motor
materials
the nature of processed or stored
422.3 Locations with risks of fire due to

Therequirementsofthislegulationshallbeappliedinadditiontothoseofsection42linlocationswheleBE2
conditions exist.

Thisregulationdoesnotapplytoselectiooanderectionofinstallationsinlocationswithexplosionrisks'
t.. eS [fn 000'q- l4 and BS t N 6l 241 - l4
NoTEI:BE2conditionsexiSt$'herethereisariskoffireduetothenanufacfure,processiogorstorageofflanrmablen,raterials
(see Appendix 5)'
ircluding the preserce ofdust of dust alld fibres)'
bams (dre to the accumulation
2: Examples of locations presenting BE2 conditions include ofcombustible materials)'
iJr" . *e storage and processins
NOTE
woodwo*ing facilitier, r"o"J]iii iio"*ti"i""i"r".
NoTE3:QuantitiesofflammablematerialsoltheSulfaceolvolumeofthelocationmayberegulatedbynationalauthorities'
specifies requirements' a luminaire
which an appropdate product standard
422.3.1 Except for equipment for *,rfrr"itil .ri.ri.ls. U n less otherw ise recotnrnended
b1 the manu facturer'
,ha ll be kept at an adeq uare d isrance'floil from combustible materia]s:
a small spotlight or p'ojt"to'
iJln*ii"J"t it-I" i"lt"*ing niini1nu'; di'tunce
'r.'u[
(i) Rating uP to 100 W 0.5 m

Over 100 and uP to 300 W

0'8 m
(ii)
Over 300 and uP to 500 W
10 m'
(iii)
mechanical 5ts55gs Such
of luminaires shall be protected against foreseeable in
Lamos and other components
r"'* it"gtal part of the luminate or are fltted
nrotective means shall not be fixed tlriHil""lder;;'1;J "v "'
ions
I..ordrna. *i'f,t the mattufacntrer's instrucl
AluminaireWithalampthatcouldeiectflammablematelialsincaseoffailureshallbeconstructedwithasafety
manulacturer's insrructions'
u irh the
;;;.:i'-.'.r,;i; ;,it.'t tn'p in uttoiountt
422.3'2MeasulesshallbetakeltopreventanenclosureofelectricalequipmentSuchaSaheaterollesistol
from exceeding the following temperaturcs:
(i) 90'C under normal conditions' and
(ii) 115 "C under fault conditions

ahove'
*t tntto'u" fro'n t*cteding the temperatures staled
Wherematerials.uchaSduslorhbressullcienrrocauseafirehazardcouldaccumulaieonanenclosureofelectrical
*"u""' 'hull'it'*li"i" 0"""t
-' adequata
equiprnent.
have limited surface temperature
,f#, I-r.*t'"t marked p in comnliance with BS EN 60598-2-24
unless:
be installed outside the location
4?2.3.3 Switchgear or controlgear shall
or dust'
or at least rP4x or' in the presence
ll lP5Xil['',':.'T']i
I,i.,
or' in the
lllil'J* *",.-g a degree t"l,T':::y
o"'Jti'it"iili'"i"t'i' a"'t' tet'x' except where Regulation
422 3 lI applies'

"t"ntt of BS EN 60332-1-2
422.3.4 A cable shall as a mirimum meet the tequirements
embedded in non-combustible ryt:yl^'Tl
* plaster or concrcte or otherwise Protected
A cable not completely
fromflreshallasaminimummeetthelequirementsofBsEN60332-1-2.
in BS EN 61386- 1'
under flre conditions specifled
A conduit system shall satisry the test

AcabletrunkingsystemolcableductingsystemslrallSatisfythetestundelfiIeconditionsspecifiedintheapplopdate
pan olthe BS EN 50085 series
specified in BS EN 61537'
satisfy the test under flrc conditions
A cable tray system or cable ladder shall part ofthe
propagation specified in the appropriate
the test for resistance to ffame
A powefirack system shall satisty
BS EN 61534 series'
lr

wiingsystemsshallbeselectedarrdinstalledtominimizQthepropagationofflame.
Whcrc the risk of flame propagation is high the cable shall nrect the reqLrilemcnts of the appropdate pafi of
BS EN 60332-3 serics.
NOTE 1: The risk offlarne plopagation can be high where cables ar-e bunchcd or installed in long vertical rLLns

NOTE 2: Cables manulactured for the above application also nccd to satisfy the requirements of the CPR in respect of their
'eactron to nre. See Appendl\ 2. itetn l'.

422.3.5 Awiling system which passes through the location but is not intended to supply electrical equipment
in the location shall:
(i) meet the requirements of Regulation 422.3.4, ar.d
(ii) have no connection orjoint within the location, unless the connection orjoint is installed within an eflclosure
that does l]ot adversely affect the flame propagation characteristics ofthe widng system, and
(iii) be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the requirements ofRegulation 422.3.10, and
(iv) not employ bare live conductors.
422.3.6 Not used

422.3.7 A motor.which is automatically or remotely cortrolled or which is not continuously superuised shall
be protected against excessive tenperatue by a protective device with manual reset. A motor shall be protected
against overtemperature in all operational modes.

422.3.8 Lrerylurninaire.hall:
(i) be appropriate for the location, and
(ii) be provided with an enclosure providing a degree ofprotection ofat least IP4X or, in the presence ofdust,
IP5X or, in the presence ofelectrically conductive dust, IP6X , and
(iii) have a limited surlace temperature in accordance with BS EN 60598-2-24, and
(iv) be ofa type that prevents lamp components from falling from the luminaire.
ln locations where there may be fire hazards due to dust or fibres, luminaires shall be installed so that dust or fib1es
cannot accumulate iu dangerous amounts.

422.3.9 Wiring sysrems, other than mineral insulated cables, busbar trunldng systems or poweftrack systems,
shall be protected against insulation faults:
(i) in a TN or TT system, by an RCD having a rated residual operating cun'ert (l^n) not exceeding 300 rLA
according with Regulation 531.3.2 and to relevant product standards

\\'here a resistive fault may cause a lire, e.g. for overhead heating with heating film elements, the rated residual
operating cunent shall not exceed 30 mA.
(ii) in an IT system, by an insulation monitoring device with audible and visual signals provided in accordance
with Regulation 538.1. Disconnection times in the event of a second fault are given in Chapter 4t.
Altematively, RCDs with a rated residual operating curent as specified in (i) rnay be used. In the event ofa
second fault, see Chapter 4l for disconnection times.

422.3.10 Circuits supplying or traversing Iocations where BE2 conditions exist shall be protected against
' erload and againsl fault cun ent by protecti\ e devices located outside and on the supply side of these locations.
.

Circuits originating inside these locations shall be protected against overcurrent by protective devices located at
:eeir origin.

422.3.11 Regardless ofthe nominal voltage ofa circuit supplied at extra-low voltage, live pafis shall be either:
(i) contained in enclosures affording a degree ofprotection ofat least IPXXB or lP2X, or
(ii) provided with insulation capable ofwithstanding a test voltage of500 V DC for 1 minute
These requirements are in addition to those ofSection 414.

422.3.12 A PEN conductor shall not be used. This requirement does not apply to a circuit traversing the location.

422.3.13 Except as pennitted by Regulation 461.2, every circuit shall be plovided with a means ofisolation
iom all Iive supply conductors by a linked switch or a linted circuit-breaker'
NOTE: Provision may be made for isolation ofa group ofcircuits by a comlnon means, if the service conditions allow this.

83
 following construction:
422,3.201 Flexible cables shall be ofthe
V' or
rating ofnot less than 450/750
(i) Heavy duty t1'pe havtng a voltage
,ultuUty prot"cted againsl mechanical
damage
iiij FN 50s65-1. I

(cooventional elastome c tlpes)

and
NoTEI:Descriptionsoflight,oldinaryaodhealrydutytypesarecivei:::.8N505651
ttry u" foooa in BS EN 50525-2-21
flexible heavy
'-- - -' Suitable
NOTE2: ""int "un types)'
gS UN tOt25-3-21 (low smoke' halogen-free
fixed'
422.3.202 A heating appliance shall be
dusts or fibres
a rype which prevents
the ignition of combustible
shall be of
422.g.2O3 A heat storage appliance
by the heat stodng core'

422.4 Combustibleconstructionalmaterials
Therequirementsofthisregulationshallbeappliedinadditiontothoseofsection42linlocationswhereCA2
(see
conditions exist' materials' such as wood
a building is mainly constructed of combustible
NOTE: CA2 collditions exist where
does not ignite walls''floors
orceilings ln I
'o electrical equipment
orr.o., X*j]'tions shall be taken so that * i'ing ty"t*' int;"ding utt;ttotitt' utt boxes and enclo:ures
u p"-l*ruttto
nrelabricated hollo\\' u alls contarni'.'! *url is liable to be dritled during
erectton'
.hull hur. a degree of protecttt" :if;1 ;il rpii'*ht" 'rtt
which an appropriate prodll1"'#Si;eT::'iil""'JJ;[ffi:t;;nl'f,lT:
422.4.2 Except ror equipmenl for ul':ilil.jff;..],"n,, i"'u"iiure
lrom combusr ibte materia'' materials;
,'il1ii.-0.r, - 'o;quare
distance
the follou ing m:nrr
l'",.ri .ri,utnt ", piojector shall be installed al
"t
0.5 m
(i) Rating uP to 100 W
0.8 m
(ir) Over 100 and uP to 300 W
W 1.0 m.
(iii) Over 300 and uP to 500
511s55s5 Such
againsr foreseeable mechanical
luminaires shall be prolecled
I amos and Other componenrs o[
are fitted in
be lixed ti'it'on"'ot" *'t'i fo* u" i""gi'i p'; "r 'he luminaire or
.,.,recLir e means shall nol 'hty
ins!ruclions'
ilo.Janie * ith tht 'nunuluct"er') be construcred u;tr a sarett
I

A ru ninaire with a ramp,that:.oliti:;:JTT;l[fi';:'Ji.:T;:il:l::'.*'' i

'J:i':]"-'j:::ff':iT:JJ-;:'tril*il;';";;;ins.,arionormounring"""::"llT:':'::i-"'
installed on or in a combustible
i

bo*t.11-*::):1:: boards'
e g installation
422.4.201 Electrical equipment'tt'ioard for enclosure tempemture
flse'
,

Iir'riln", ."-ot, *itt.' tt'" itit'*t be enclosed with a

Regularion 422.4201 shall
i
thal does nor compry wirh lrom electrical
i
422.4,202 Erecrrical equipmenr
nru,.r*i"on r-ttt itut ttittipution
I

rhicLness ot non-nur
.uitable
ru Ji.' ni.,..ri "rr*i "r,n.
it. l

equipment shall be taken

into account'
the requirements of BS EN 60332-1-2'
422.4,203 Cables shall comply with to fire see Appendix 2' item 17' I

ofthe cpR i,,, respect oftheir reaction

NorE: cabies also n"ed to.utisfy th"."quirements
accordance with BS L'N
61386-l and BS EN 50085-l
s)slems shall be in ,
422.4.204 Conduit and trunking standards'
respectir ely and shall meet
tf" t'"-'"ttiiuntt *sl: wilhin lhese
l

422.5 Fire propagating structures

oIthe appropriate
nigh rhe caure sia ;.iiit',. "quitttn"ntt
TherequiretnentsoIthisregulatron.hallbeappliedinaddiriontolhoseoIsection42Iinlocations$hereCB2
condirions er isr. $ here the rist< or$'ari or"r#i"" ',
I

pan ol'BS fN 00332-3 series and dimensrorl: \ hich

lacililale
^'4"^ '-'r ayict uhere a building ha' a shape
ffi;,:ru:y:;ilJ::[:xi[u:]?:l:Tjfl:ill1::;1il11*;:;";;'"dinghasarorcedvenilaron\vsem
tsee APpendix 5l'
I

''"'- -'"ri*ro"f
NoTE2:Firedetectolsmaybeprovidedtoactivatemeasuresforpreventingpropagationoffire,forexample'theclosing
or trunking'
shutters in ducts' troughs
 NOTE 3: Boxes and erclosures according to BS EN 60670-l and BS EN 61439 series for use in hollow walls can be used.
I

NOTE 4: Cables also need to satisly the requirements ofthe CPR in respect oftheir reaction to fire. See Appendix 2, item 17. I

422.5.1 In structures where the shape and dimensions are such as will facilitate the spread offire, precautions
shall be taken so that the electdcal installation does not propagate a fire (e.g. chimney effecr).

422.6 Selection and erection of installations in locations of national, commercial,

industrial or public significance
The requirements of Regulation 422.1 shall apply to locations that include buildings or rooms with assets of
significant value. Examples include national monumentsj museums and other public buildings. Buildings such
as railway stations and airports are generally considered to be ol public significance. Buildings or facilities such
as laboratories, computer centres and cefiain industrial and storage facilities can be of commercial or industrial
significance.

The following measures may be considered:

(i) Installation ofmineral insulated cables according to BS EN 60702
(ii) Installation of cables with improved fire-resisting characteristics in case of a fire hazard, such as those
complying with BS 7629-1, BS 7846 or BS 8573
(iii) Installation ofcables in non-combustible solid walls, ceilings and floors
(iv) lnstallation ofcables in areas with constructional partitions having a fire-resisting capability for a time of
30 minutes or 90 minutes, the latter in locations housing staircases and needed for an emergency escape.

Where these measures are not practicable improved fire protection may be possible by the use of reactive fire
protection systems.

423 PROTECTION AGAINST BURNS

423.1 Excepting equipment for which a Harmonized Standard specifies a limiting temperature, an accessible
:art offixed electrical equipment within am's reach shall not attain a temperatlLre jn cxccss ofthe approptiate Iimit
.tated in Table ,12.1 . Each such parl of tl']e fixed instaliation likcly to attain under normal load conditions, evcn tbr a
:hofi period, a temperature exceeding thc appropriate limit in Table .12.1 shall bc guardcd so as to prevent accideltal
:Lrrtact.

TABLE 42.1 _
Temperature limit under normal load conditions for an
accessible part of equipment within arm's reach
Accessible Material of accessible surfaces Maximum temperature ("C)
A hand-held pan Metallic 55
Non-metallic 65
L paft intended to be touched but not Metallic 70
hand-heid Non-metallic 80
A part which need not be touched for Metallic 80
nomal operation Non-metallic 90

124 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERHEATING

124.1 Forced air heating systems, appliances producing hot water or steam,
and space heating appliances
::::L)rls containing forced air heating systems, appliances producing hot water or steam, and space heating
:nces. rrLrst comply with the approp ate parts ofthe Buiiding Regulations.

---3-. 85
 CHAPTER 43

PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCU RRENT

CONTENTS

430 INTRODUCTION
430.1 Scope
430.2 Not used
430.3 General requirement
OF THE CIRCUITS AND THE
43',| PROTECTION ACCORDING TO THE NATURE
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
43',1.',1 Protection of line conductors
431.2 Protection of the neutral conductor
431.2.',1 TN or TT system
431.2.2 lT system
431.2-3 Harmonic currents
Gonductor
431.3 Disconnection and reconnection of the neutral

432 NATURE OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

current
432.1 Protection against both overload current and fault
432.2 Protection against overload current only
432.3 Protection against fault current only
432.4 Characteristics of protective devices

433 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERLOAP CURRENT

protective device
433.1 Co-ordination between conductor and overload
433.2 Position of devices for protection against overload
433"3 Omission of devlces for protection against overload
433.3.1 General
overload in lT systems
433.3.2 Position or omission of devices for protection against
for safety reasons
433.3.3 omission of devices for protection against overload
433.4 Overload protection of conductors in parallel
433.4.1 Equal current sharing between parallel conductors
433.4.2 Unequal current sharing between parallel conductors

434 PROTECTION AGAINST FAULT CURRENT

434.1 Determination of prospective fault current
434.2 Position of devices for protection against fault current
current
434.3 Omission of devices for protection against fault
conductors in parallel
434.4 Fault current protection of
434.5 Characteristics of a fault current protective device
CO-ORDINATION OF OVERLOAD CURRENT
AND FAULT CURRENT PROTECTION
43s
435.',| Protection afforded bY one device
435.2 Protection afforded by separate devices
OF THE SUPPLY
436 LIMITATION OF OVERCURRENT BY THE CHARACTERISTICS
 CHAPTER 43
PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCU RRENT
430 INTRODUCTION

430.1 Scope
This chapter provides requirements lor the protection of live conductors from the effects ofovercuaent.

This chapter describes how live conductors axe protected by one or more devices for the autornatic disconnection
of the supply in the event of overload current (Section 433) and fault current (Section 434), except in cases where
the overcurrent is limited in accordance with Section 436 or where the conditions described in Regulation 433.3
(omission ofdevices for protection against overload) or Regulation 434.3 (omission ofdevices for protectior against
fault cur.rent) are met. Co-ordination of overload curent protection and fault curert protection is also covered
(Section 435).
NOTE 1 : Live condLrctors protected against overload cullellt in accordance with Section 433 are also considered to be ptotected
against faults likely to cause overcuaents ofa magnitude similar to overload currents-
NOTE 2: The Iequirements ofthis chapter do not take account ofextemal i[fluences.
NOTE 3: Protection ofconductors according to these regulations does not necessarily protect the equipment connected to the
conductols.
NOTE 4: Disconnection does not necessadly mean isolation in this chapter.

430.2 /Vof used

430.3 General requirement

A protective device shall be provided to break any overcurrent in the circuit coltductors before such a current could
cause a danger due to thermal or mechanical effects detrimental to insulation, connections, joints, teminations or
the surroundings of the conductors.

The protection against overload current and the prctection against fault current shall be co-ordinated in accordance
with Section 435.
NOTE; An overcunent may be an overload current or a fault current.

431 PROTECTION ACCORDING TO THE NATURE OF THE CIRCUITS AND THE

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

431.1 Protection of line conductors

431.1.'l Except where Regulation 431.1.2 applies, detection of overcurent shall be provided for all llne
conductors and shall cause the disconnection ofthe conductor inwhich the overcurent is detected, but not necessarily
the disconnection of the other line conductors except where the disconnection of one line conductor could cause
damage or danger

If disconnection of a single line conductor may cause danger, for example in the case of a three-phase motor,
appropriate precautions shall be taken.

431.1.2 In a TN or TT system, for a circuit supplied between line conductors and in which the neutml
conductor is not distdbuted, overcurent detection need not be provided for one ofthe line conductors, provided that
both the following conditions are simultaneousty fulfilled:
(i) There exists, in the same circuit or on the supply side, differential protection intended to detect unbalanced
loads and cause disconnection ofall the line conductors. and
(ii) the neutal conductor is not distributed from an afiificial neutral point ofthe circuits situated on the load side
ofthe differential protective device mentioned in (i).

431.2 Protection ofthe neutral conductor

431.2:l TN or TT system

The neutral conductor sha1l be protected against short-circuit cunent.

Where the cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor is at least equivalent to that of the line conductors. and

87
 to plovide
the cufient in the neutral is not expected to exceed the value in the line conductols, it is not necessary
overcurent detection for the neutral collductor or a disconnecting device for that conductor'

where the cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor is less than that of the line conductors, it is necessary to
plovide overcurTent detection fol the neutlal conductol, appropriate to the cross-sectional area ol the conductol
The overcurent detection shall cause the disconnection of the line conductors, but not necessarily
of the neutral
conductor
conductol apply to PF'N
Except for discorutection complying with Regulation 461.2 the requirements fol a neutral
a

conductor.
reler to Regulation
Where the current in the neutral condLrctor is expected to exceed that in the line conductors
431.2.3.

431.2.2 IT system

The neutral conductor shall not be distributed unless one ofthe following is met:
(i) Overcurent detection is provided for the neutral conductor of every circuit The overcurent detection
the neutlal
shall cause the disconnection of al1 the live conductots of the coresponding circuit, including
conductor
(ii) The padicular neutral conductor is effectively protected against shofi-cilcuit by a
protective device installed
on the supply side, for example at the odgin ofthe installation, in accordance with Regulation 434 5
(lAn) not exceeding
(iii) The particular circuit is protected by an RCD with a rated residual operating current
0.2 times the currert_calrying capacity of the corresponding neutml coflductor. The RCD shall disconnect
circuit. including the neutral conductor The device shall have
all the live conductors of the coresponding
su{Iicient bteaking capacity for all poles.

431.2.3 Harmoniccurrents

ovcrcu-rent detcction shall be provided for thc ncutral conductol i[ a polyphase circuit whcle the
hamlonic content
cuflent in the leutral conductor nlay cxceecl ihe current-car'rying capacity ofthat
ofthe linc currents is such that the
contluctor. The ovcrcLL1.Ient detectio11 Shail causc cliscolnection ofthe ]ine concluctors
but not necessarily thc neutral
concluctol. Where the neutral is disconnectcd the rcquiremcnts of Regulation 43 1'3 arc applicable'

43'1.3 Disconnection and reconnection of the neutral conductor

where a switch is placed in a ncutral conductor, disconnection and reconnection shall be such that the
neutral
at the same time as or befbre
concluctor shall not be disconnected before the line concluctors ancl shall be reconnected
the line conductors.

432 NATURE OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A protective device shall be ofthe appropriate type indicated in Regulations 432 1 to 3'

432.1 Protection against both overload current and fault Gurrent

and fault current
Except as pemitted by Regulation 434.5.1, a device providing protection against both overload
the maximutn
shallie capable of breaking, and for a circuit-breaker rnaking, any overcurrent up to and including
prospective fault ctLrrent at the point wherc the device is installed'

432.2 Protection against overload current only

A clevice providing protection against overload curent is genemlly an invetse-time-lag plotective device
whose
plospective f'ault current at the point
r.ated shori-cir.cuit Lreaking capacity n.ray be below the value ofthe maximum
where the device is ilstalled. Such a device shall satisfy thc relevant requirements of section'133

432.3 Protection against fault current only

protection is achieved
A device pr.oviding protection against fault curert only shall be installed where overload
by other means o[ where Section 433 peruits overload protection to be dispensed with Except as permitted by
making, the fault cunent up to
Regulation 434.5. I , a device shall be capable of breaking, and for a circuilbreaker
Iequilements of section 434'
ancfincluding the prospective fault current. such a device shall satisty the relevant
NOTE: Such a dcvicc maY be:
(i) a circuit bieaker rvith a short-circuit rclease, or
(ii) a fuse.

8A
432.4 Gharacteristics of protective devices
The time/current chatacteristics of an overcurrent protectiye device shall comply with those specified ir BS 88
series, BS 3036, BS EN 60898, BS EN 60947 -2 ol BS EN 61009-L

The use ofanother device is not precluded provided that its time/curent characteristics provide a level ofprotectiol
not less thar that given by the devices listed above.

433 PROTECTION AGAINST OVERLOAD CURRENT

433.1 Go-ordination between conductor and overload protective device

Every cilcuit shall be designed so that a small overload oflong duration is uulikely to occur

433.1.1 The opelating charactedstics of a deYice protectiug a conductor agailst overload shall satisfy the
following conditions:
(i) The rated current or cuffent setting ofthe protective device (ln) is not less than the design curent (lb) ofthe
circuit, and
(ii) the rated current or current setting of the plotective device (In) does not exceed the lowest ofthe curent-
carrying capacities (1,) ofany ofthe conductors ofthe circuit, and
(iii) the curent (12) causing effective opemtion ofthe protectiye device does not exceed L45 times the lowest of
the culTent-carrying capacities (lz) ofany ofthe conductors ofthe circuit.

For adjustable protective devices, the rated cunent (In) is the current setting selected.

The cunent (I2) causing effective operation of the protective device is given in the product standard or may be
provided by the manufacturer.
NOTE 1; Where over load protection is plovided by BS 3036 firses, refer ro Regulation 433.1 .202.
NOTE 2: Protection in accordalce rvith tJris regulation rray not provide protection in aLl cases, for example. where sustaincd
overcurents less than 12 occur.

433.1.201 Where the protective device is a general-purpose type (gG) fuse to BS 88-2, a fuse to BS 88-3. a
circuit-breaker to BS EN 60898, a circuit-breaker to BS EN 60947-2 or a residual current circuit-breaker with
integral overcurent protection (RCBO) to BS EN 61009-1, conpliance with conditions (i) and (ii) also results in
compliance with condition (iii) ofRegulation 433.1.1.

433.1.202 Where the protective device is a semi-enclosed fuse to BS 3036 compliance with condition (iii) of
Regulation 433.1 . I is afforded if its rated current (In) does not exceed 0.725 times the current-carrying capacity (lz)

ofthe lowest rated conductor in the circuit protected.

433.1.203 For direct buried cables or cables in buried ducts where the tabulated current-carrying capaciry is
based on an ambient tempemture of 20 "C compliance with condition (iii) of Regulation 433.1.1 is afforded if the
rated current or current setting ofthe protective device (ln) does not exceed 0.9 times the cufient-cafl'ying capacity
(lz) ofthe lowest rated conductor in the circuit protected.

433.'1,204 Accessories to BS 1363 may be supplied thlough a ng final circuit, with or without unfused spurs,
protected by a 30 A or 32 Aprotective device complying with BS 88 se es, BS 3036, BS EN 60898, BS EN 60947-2
or BS EN 61009-l (RCBO). The cilcuit shall be wired with copper conductors having line and neutml conducto$
with a minimum cross-sectional area of 2.5 mmr except for two-core mineral insulated cables complying with
BS EN 60702-1, for which the mininurl cross-sectional area is 1.5 nrmr. Such circuits are deemed to meet the
lequircments of Regulation 433.1. t if the current-carrying capacity (tz) ofthe cable is not less than 20 A and if,
under the intended conditions ofuse, the load curent in any paft olthe circuit is unlikely to exceed lbl long periods
the curent-canling capacity (lz) ofthe cable.

433.2 Position of devices for protection against overload

433.2.1 Except where Regulation 433.2.2 or 433.3 applies, a device for protectior against overload shall be
ilstalled at the poilt rvhere a reduction occul's in the value ofthe cLtrrent-carrying capacity ofthe conductors ofthe
installation.
NOTE: A |eduction in cuffeot-caffying capacity l1lay be due to a charge in cross-sectional area, lnethod of installation. tlpe
ofcable or conductor. or i11 e[vironmental conditions.

I
8-o
I
43Z.Z,Z The device protecting a conductor against overload may be installed along the run ofthat conductor
if the part of the run betwein the point where a change occurs (in cross-sectional area, method of installation, type
has neither branch
of cabje or conductor, or in environmental conditions) and the position ofthe protective device
circuits nor outlets for connection of current-using equipment and fuIfils at least one ofthe following conditions;

(i) It is protected against fault curent in accordance with the requirements stated in Section 434
to a minimum.
(ii) Its length does not exceed 3 m, it is installed in such a mannel as to reduce the risk of fault
(see also
and it is installed in such a manner as to reduce to a minimum the risk offire or danger
to persons
Regulation 434.2.1).

433.3 Omission of devices for protection against overload

or risk ofexplosion or
This regulation shall not be applied to installations situated in locations plesenting a fire risk
where ihe lequirements for special installations and locations specily different
conditions'

433.3.1 General

A device for protection against overload need not be provided:

(i) for a conductor situated on the load side of the point where a reduction occurs in the value of current-
carrying capacity, where the conductor is effectively protected against overload by a protective
device

installed on the supply side of that point

(ii) for a conductor which, because ofthe chalacteristics ofthe load or the supply, is not
likely to carry overload
curTent,plovidedthattheconductoliSplotectedagainstfaultcurrentinaccordancewiththerequirerrrents
of Section 434
(iii) and aglees that it affolds
at the origin ofan installation where the distlibutol plovides an overload device
protectioi to the part of the installation between the origin and the main distribution point ofthe installation
where further overload protection is provided

433.3.2 Position or omission of devices for protection against overload in lT systems

The provisions in Regulations 433.2.2 arLd 433.3 for an altemative position or omission
of devices
433.3.2.1
protected against overload is
for protection against overload are nJt applicable to IT systems unless each circuit
not
protected by one ofthe following means:
(i) Use ofthe protective measures described in Regulation 413 2
(ii) An RCD that will operate immediately on the second fault
For pennanently superuised systems only, the use of an insulation monitoring device which
(iii) either:

(a) causes the disconnection of the circuit when the first fault occurs, or
the presence of a fault. The fault shall be corrected in accordance with
' ' gives a signal indicatingand
(b)
recognition of the consequences of a second fault'
iperationai lequirements
in
433.3.2,2 tn an IT sysrem without a neutml conductor it is permitted to omit the overload protective device
one ofthe line conductors if an RCD is installed in each circuit'

433.3.3 Omission of devices for protection against overload for safety reasons

The omission ofdevices for protection against overload is pemitted for circuits supplying
curent-using equipment
where unexpected disconnection ofthe circuit could cause danger or damage'

Examples of such circuits are:

(i) the exciter circuit ofa rotating machine
(ii) the supply circuit ofa lifting magnet
(iii) the secondary circuit ofa curent tansformet
(iv) a circuit supplying a fire extinguishing device
(v) a circuit supplying a safety service, such as a fire alarm or a gas alarm
(vi) a circuit supplying medical equipment used for life support in specific medical locations where an IT system
is incotporated.
NOTE: In such sitLrations consideration should be given to the provision ofan overload alann'

433.4 Overload protection of conductors in parallel

no branch circuits or
where a single protective device protects t\ro or more conductols in parallel there shall be
devices for isolation or switching ir the parallel conductors.

This regulation does not preclude the use ofring linal circuits with or without spur connecrions.
433.4.1 Equal current sharing between parallel conductors

Except for a ring final circuit, where spurs are pennitted, where a single device protects conductors in parallel and
the conductors are sharing cuffents equally, the value ollz to be used in Regulation 433.1.I is the sum ofthe curent-
carrying capacities of the parallel conductors.

It is deemed that curent sharirg is equal if the requirements ofthe llrst indent ofRegulation 523.7(i) are satisfied.
433.4.2 Unequal current sharing between parallel conductors

Where the use ofa single conductor is impmctical and the currents in the palallel conductors are unequal, the design
cunent and requirements for overload protection fol each conductor shall be considered individually.
NOTE: Currents in parallel conductors are considered to be unequal ifthe difference between the curents is lnore than 10 o;
ofthe design cufent fol each conductor Rel'er to paragraph 2 ofAppendix 10.

434 PROTECTION AGAINST FAULT CURRENT

This section only considem the case of a fault between conductors belonging to the sane cicuit.

434.1 Determination of prospective fault current

The prospective fault current shall be detemined at every relevant point of the installation. This shall be done by
calculation, measurement or enquiry.

434.2 Position of devices for protection against fault current

A device ploviding protcctiorl against laull cuncnt shall bc installed at the point whcrc a rcductiou ill thc cross-
sectional area or other change causes a reduction in the culrent-carrying capacity ofthe conductors, except rvhere
Regulation 43,1.2.1 . 434.2.2 or 43,1.3 applics.

The requirc:rcnts in Rcgulatiorls:t34.2.1 and 434.2.2 shall not be applied to installations situatcd in locatiuns
presentiflg a fire risk or risk of explosion or u'heIe speciai requiremerls for ceftain locatiols specify different
conditions.

434.2.1 Exccpt $,hcrc Rcgulation 434.2.2 or ri34.3 applies. a device fbr protection against tault curent ma.v
be installed other than as specified in Regulation 434.2, under the following conditions:

In the paft ofthe conductor between the point ofreduction of cross-sectional area or other change and the position
ofthe protective device there shall be no branch circuits or socket-outlets and that part ofthe conductor shall:
(i) not exceed 3 m in length, and
(ii) be instatled in such a manner as to reduce the risk olfault to a rninimurn, and
NOTE: This condition may be obtained. for cxan'rple, by reinforcing the protection ofthc wiring against extemal iDfluences.

(iii) be installed in such a manner as to reduce to a minimum the dsk offire or danger to persons.
434.2.2 The device protecting a conductor may be installed on the supply side ofthe point where a change
occum (in cross-sectional area, urethod of installation, type of cable or colductor, or in envirolmental conditions)
provided that it possesses an operating characteristic such that it protects the wiring situated on the load side against
fault cunent, ir accordalce with Regulation 434.5.2.

434.3 Omission of devices for protection against fault current

A device for protection against lault curent need not be provided for':
(i) aconductor connectilg a generator. transfonner, rectifier or an accumulator battery to the associated control
panel where the protective device is placed in the panel
(ii) a circuit where disconnection could cause danger for the opemtion of the installation concemed, such as
those quoted in Regulation 433.3.3
(iii) cetain measuring circuits
(iv) the origin ofan installation where the distributol installs one ol mole devices providing protection against
fault current and agrees that such a device affords protection to the pafi ofthe installation between the origin
and the main distribution point ofthe installation where further protection against lault current is provided,

91
 provided that both olthe lbllos ing conditions are simulraneousl-t fulfi1led:
(a) The wiring is carried or.rt in such a rvay as to reduce the risk offault to a minimum (see item (ii) ofRegulation
434.2.1), and
' (b) the wifing is installed in such a n.ranner as to reduce to a minimum the risk offire or danger to persons.
434.4 Fault current protection of conductors in parallel
A single protective device may protect conductors in parallel against the effects of fault curents provided that
the operating characteristic of the device results in its effective operation should a fault occur at the most onerous
position in one ofthe parallel conductols. Account shall be taken ofthe sharing ofthe fault currents between the
parallel conductors. A fault can be led from both ends ola parallel conductor

lf operation of a single protective device may not be effectiye then one or mole of the following measures shall be
taken:
(i) The wiring shall be installed in such a manner as to reduce to a minimum the risk ofa fault in any parallel
conductor, for example, by the provision ofplotection against mechanical damage. In addition, conductors
shall be installed in such a manner as to reduce to a minimum the risk offire or danger to persons
(ii) For two conductors in paral1el, a fault culrent protective device shall be provided at the supply end ofeach
paral1e1 conductor
(iii) Fol rnore than two conductors in parallel, a fault cunent protective device shall be provided at the supply
and load ends ofeach parallel conductor
NOTE: Further infomation is given in paragraph 3 ofAppendix 10.

434.5 Gharacteristics of a fault current protective device

Every fault current protective device shall meet the requirements ofthis regulation.

434.5.1 Except where the following paragraph applies, the rated short-circuit breaking capacity of each
device shall be not Iess than the maximum prospective fault curent at the point at which the device is installed.

A Iower breaking capacity is pemlitted if another protective device or devices having the necessary rated short-
cilcuit bleaking capacity is installed on the supply side. ln this situation, the characteristics ofthe devices shall be
co-ordinated so that the energy let{kough ofthese devices does not exceed that which can be withstood, without
damage, by the device(s) on the load side.
NOTE: Technical data for the selection ofprotective devices can be requested from the manufactuer

434.5.2 A fault occurring at any point in a circuit shall be intemrpted within a time such that the fault cunent
does not cause the pennitted limiting temperature ofany conductor or cable to be exceeded.

For a fault of very short duration (less than 0. I sec), for curent limiting devices k2S2 shall be greater than the value
ol let-through energy (lrt) quoted for the Class ofprotective device to BS EN 60898-1, BS EN 60898-2 or BS EN
61009- 1, or as quoted by the manufacturer.

The time, t, in which a given lault current will raise the live conducton ftom the highest permissible temperature in
nomal duty to the limiting temperatue, can, as an approximation, be calculated from the fomula;

.:-Fk2 s2

whele:
t is the duration in seconds

S is the cross-sectional alea ofconductor in mml

I effective fault current, in amperes, expressed lor AC
is the as the rms value, due account being taken ofthe
curent limiting effect olthe circuit impedances
k is a factor taking account of the resistivity, temperature coeffrcient and heat capacity of the conductor
mate al, and the appropfiate initial and llnal temperatwes. For comnon materials, the values of k are
shown in Table 43.l.

92
 TABLE 43.1 -
Values of k for common materials, for calculation of the effects of fault current
for disconnection times up to 5 seconds

Conductor insulation
Thermoplastic Thermosetting Mineral insulated
90 "c 70'c 90 'c 60 'c Thermoplastic Bare
sheath (unsheathed)
Conductor < 300 > 300 < 300 > 300
cross- mml mm2 mm2 mm2
sectional area
Initial 90 'c 70'c 90 'c 60 'c 70'c 105 "C
temperature
Final 160'C 140'C 160 "c 140'c 250'C 200 "c 160'c 250 "C

Copper k= 100 k=86 k= 115 k= 103 k= 143 k= 141 k= 115 135/ I 15.
conductor
Aluminium k=66 k=68 k=94 k=93
conductor
Tin soldered k= 100 k=86 k= 115 k= 103 k= 100 k= 122
joints in
copper
conductors

" This value shall be used for bare cables exposed to touch.
NOTE l: The rated current or curent settillg of the fault curent protective device may be greater than the curent-carrJ irlg
capacity of the cable.
NOTE 2: Other values ofk can be determined by reference to BS 7454.

434.5.3 For a busbar trunking system complying with BS EN 61439-6 or a powertrack system complying
with BS EN 61534, one ofthe following requirements shall apply:
(i) The mted short-time withstand current (Icw) and the rated peak withstand curent of a busbar trunking
system or powedrack system shall be not lower than the rms value ofthe prospective fault curent and the
prospective fault peak current value, respectively. The maximum time for which the Icw is defined for the
busbar trunking system shall be greater than the maximum operating time ofthe protective device
(ii) The rated conditional shofi-circuit curent of the busbar tmnking system or powefirack system associated
with a specific protective device shall be not lower than the prospective fault curent.

435 CO.ORDINATION OF OVERLOAD CURRENT AND FAULT CURRENT PROTECTION

435.1 Protection afforded by one device

A protective device providing protection against both overload curent and lault current shall fulfil the requirements
ofthe relevant regulations in Sections 433 aod 434.

Except as required by Regulation 434.4 or 434.5.2, where an overload protective device colrplying with Regulation
,133.1 is to provide lault current protection and has a rated shon-circuit breaking capacity not less than the value of
the maximum prospective fault cu-rent at its point of installation, it may be assumed that the requirements of this
section are satisfied as regards fault current protection ofthe conducto$ on the load side ofthat point.

The validity ofthe assu[.rption shall be checked, where there is doubt, for conductors in parallel and for ceftain types
of circuit-breaker e.g. non-currentJimiting types.

93
 435-2 Protection afforded by separate devices
The requiremelts ofSections 433 and 434 apply, respectively, to the overload curent plotective device and the
fault
culTent protective device.
protective
The characteristics ofthe devices shall be co-ordinated so that the energy let through by the fault current
device does not exceed that which can be withstood without damage by the overload protective device (see
in BS EN 60947-4-1 For
Regulation 536.J ). This requirement does not exclude the type ofco-ordination specified
type of co-ordination desc hed in
a circuit incotporating a motor stafier, this requirement does not precJude the
BS EN 60947-4-1, iniespect ofwhich the advice ofthe manufacturer ofthe staller shall be sought.

436 LIMITATION OF OVERCURRENT BY THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SUPPLY

they ale supplied liom a
Conductors are considered to be protected against overload current and fault current where
(e g certain bell
source incapable of supplying a curent excieding the current-carrying capacity ofthe conducto$
tansformeri, certain welding transfomels and cerlain types of thermoelectric genemting set)'

94
 CHAPTER 44
PROTEGTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANCES AND

ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES
CONTENTS

MO INTRODUCTION
440.1 Scope
440.2 General
441 NOT USED
M2 PROTECTION OF LOW VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS AGAINST TEMPORARY
OVERVOLTAGES DUE TO EARTH FAULTS IN THE HIGH VOLTAGE SYSTEM AND
DUE TO FAULTS IN THE LOW VOLTAGE
442.1 Scope and object
442.2 Overvoltages in low voltage (LV) systems during a high voltage (HV) earth fault
442.3 Power frequency stress voltage in the event of loss of the neutral conductor in TN or TT
system
442.4 Power frequency stress voltage in the event of an earth fault in a lT system with distributed
neutral
442.5 Power frequency slress voltage in the event of short-circuit between a line conductor and
the neutral conductor
443 PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGES OF ATMOSPHERIC ORIGIN
OR DUE TO SW|TCHING
443.1 Scope and object
443.4 Overvoltage control
443.5 Risk assessment method
443.6 Classification of rated impulse voltages (overvoltage categories)
Annex 4443
4443.1 Example 1 - Building in rural environment
4443.2 Example 2 - Building in rural environment supplied by HV
4443.3 Example 3 - Building in urban environmenl supplied by overhead lines
4443.4 Example 4 - Building in urban environment supplied by underground cables
Annex 8443
444 MEASURES AGAINST ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES
444.1 Scope
444.2 /Vot used
444.3 Nol used
444.4 Electromagnetic disturbances
444.5 Earthing and equipotential bonding
444.6 Segregation of circuits
444.6.1 General
444.6.2 Equipment
Annex 4444 (lnformative) l\4easures against electromagnetic disturbances
445 PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE
445.1 General requirements

95
I
 CHAPTER 44

PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE DISTURBANGES

440 INTRODUCTION

440.1 Scope
These requirements are intended to provide for the salety ofelect cal installations in the event ofvoltage disturbances
an<l electromagnetic disturbances gelerated due to different specified causes'

to powel generation
The requirements are not intended to apply to systems fol distribution ofenergy to the public, oI
and tr;smission for such systems, aithough such distubances may be conducted into or between electrical
iNtallations via these supply systems. The requirements of this chapter are in addition to those of Chapter 43'

440.2 General
Thjs chapter covers the protection of electrical installations and measures against voltage disturbances
and

electromignetic disturbances. The requirements are aranged into four sections as follows:
(1) Sectiou 442 Protection of low voltage installations against temporary overvoltages dtte to eafth faults
in the high voltage system and due to faults in the [o]" voltage system

(ii) Section 443 Protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin or due to switching
(iii) Section 444 Measures against electromagnetic disturbances
(iv) Section 445 Protection against undewoltage.

441 NOT USED

442 PROTECTION OF LOW VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS AGAINST TEMPORARY

oVERVoLTAGESDUEToEARTHFAULTSINTHEHIGHVoLTAGESYSTEMANDDUE
TO FAULTS IN THE LOW VOLTAGE

442.1 Scope and oblect

This regulation provides requirements fol the safety ofthe low voltage installation in the event of:
(i) a fault between the high voltage systelr and Earth in the transformer substation that supplies the low voltage
installation
(ii) loss ofthe supply neutral in the low voltage system
(iii) shoft-circuit between a line conductor and neutral in the low voltage installation
(iv) accidental eafthing ofa line conductor ofa low voltage IT system.
The requirements for the eafthing oftransformers that provide a supply frorn a system for distribution of electricity
in
NOTE:
accordance with the Electricity safety. Qua!i1y and cortinuity Regulations (ESQCR) are addressed in the Distribution
Code.

442.'l .'l General

Section 442 gives rules for the designer and installer of the substatior. It is necessary to haYe the following
information on the high voltage system:
(i) Quality ofthe system eafthing
(ii) Maximum level of earth fault current
(iii) Resistance ofthe eafihing arrangement.

The following regulations consider four situations which generally cause the most sevele temporary
overvoltages:

(iv) Fault betweer the high voltage system(s) and Eafih (see Regulation 442 2)
(v) Loss ofthe neutral in a low voltage system (see Regulation 442 3)
(vi) Accidental earthing ofa low voltage IT system (see Regulation 442 4)
(vii) Shoft-circuit in the Iow voltage installation (see Regulation 442 5)'
442.1.2 Symbols

in Sectioi 442 the lollowing symbols are used (see Figure 44.1):
IE pafi ofthe earth fault curent in the high voltage system that flows through the eafihing an angement of the
transformel substation
R! resistance ofthe earthing arangement ofthe transfomer substation
RA resistance ofthe earthing affangement ofthe exposed-conductive-parts ofthe equipment ofthe low voltage
installation
RB resistance of the eafihing arrangement of the Iow voltage system neutral, for low voltage systems in
which the eafihing arangements olthe tansfomer substation and ofthe low voltage system neutral are
electrically independent
uo in TN and TT systems: nominal AC rms lire voltage to Earth I

in IT systems: nominal AC rms voltage between line conductor and neutlal conductor or midpoint I

conductor, as approp ate

Uf power frequency fault voltage that appears in the low voltage system between exposed-conductive-parts
and Earth for the duration ofthe fault
ur power frequency stress voltage between the line conductor and the exposed-conductive-parts of the low
voltage equipment ofthe translormer substation dudng the fault
U, power frequency stress voltage between the line conductor and the exposed-conductive-parts of the
equipment ofthe low voltage installation during the fault.

NOTE 1: Ihe poq,er liequency stress voltages (U1 and U2) are the voltages that appear across the insulation of Iou voltage
equipmcnt and across sur€e protective devices connected to the low voltage systc[r.

The following additional symbols are used in respect of IT systems in which the exposed-conductive-pafts of the
cquipment ofthe low voltage installation are conncctecl to an earthing arangenlent that is elect cally independent
ofthe eafihilg arangcnlcnt ofthe translbtmer substation.

the fault curent that flows through the earthing arangement of the exposed-conductive-pafis of the
equipment ofthe low voltage installation during a period when there is a high voltage fault and a flrst fault
in the low voltage installation (see Table 44.1)
Id the fault cun'ellt, itr accordancc with Regulation 411.6.2, that florvs through thc carlhing afiangement of
the exposcd-conductive-pafis of the low voltagc installation duri[g the fint fault i[ a low voltage system
(see Table 44.1)

is the impedance (for example, the IMD intemal impedance or the artificial neuftal impedance) between the
low voltage system and an earlhing arrangement.

NOTE 2: An earthing anangement may be considered electrically independent of another earthing arangement if a rise of
potential with respect to Earth in one earthing anangement does not cause an unacceptable se of potential with
respect to Eafih in the other eadhing arangemcnt.

442.2 Overvoltages in low voltage (LV) systems during a high voltage (HV) earth fault
In case of a fault to Eath in the HV side of the substation the following types ol overvoltage may affect the LV
installation:
(i) Power frequency fault voltage (Ur)
(ii) Power fiequency stress voltages (Ur and U,).

Table 44.1 provides the relevant methods ofcalculation for the different types olovervoltage.

,r'""\
,f,,
**" ":
97
 and the LV
I '!' 44.1
Fiq I - Representative
' '-'ii"t"ttrtion
diagram for connections to Earth in the substation
--i ana irte occurring in case of faults
o'"*ottages

LV lnstallation
Substation

--?-

-------a I
.-.-..?.-
I
I

I
I
I I

I
I
U1

., [lH *u
I
il*^
I

I I
I
-!- _l

practices are presently used:

exist in proxirnity to each othel two
Where high and low voltage eafthing systems
-intelconnectionofallhighvoltage(Ru)andlowvoltage(RB)eafihingSyStemS
-separationofhighvoltage(R,)fromlowvoltage(R,)earthingsysteruS.
shall be interconnected
The high and low voltage eafthing systems
The peneral method used is interconoection by the high voltage earthing svstem (see
ila:ffi ffi;:r.i"*-i ,,i,rririirr"
i"i"[v'i""ir"a "r., "or"r"d
BS EN 50522).
are showr in Part I (TN' TT) and Appendix 9 (lT)
NOTE 1:
NLtIE r,(rdrLjriLofthe difftrent types of systern eafthing
l Details
ut t rnslbnncrslhatpro'"": *"1'l-fi::':::::::::::T::::::l;:H[Xil';
NOTE 2: Thc requirements lbrthc carthrDg are addressed in the DistributioD
n"e,iaiions (ESQCR)
Ii"',:::'::'ff'Til5T:;ffi:il;; A;;,;;;""i1"",*,nv
Code.
o"t"1"l"li:-:l:t1;1
Hore s, i;;N 50522, rable 2. gives rninin'tun requirements l" ::::.:::':Y:j: i::il:X"Til[:
l"'',i) iliii;'ll',i"i.ll',ii',, """.*;"* o*''o'u', " '.:'i:t:1^:1,:i:,::l:l;i T,';;lT,'I"",'1"*'"
vortage).
;:.":T,iT':1,'I,il:lt;:ffi.;;';i;;., "*.,",.Lr* eanh potenriarrise'(EpR-srress
TABLE 44.1 - Power frequency stress voltages
low voltage system
and power frequency fault voltage in the

Type of system of earth connections ur U, uf

earthing 0r'!
-Type
R. and R" cotnected uo RrixlE+ Uo
TT REXIE + Uo Uu* 0-
Ru and Ru seParated
uo Un* Rr* [r +*
R. and Rn connected
TN Tt * 0x
R, ard R, seParated REIE+Ulr :!-
uo REXIE + Uo 0x
Ru and Z connected
Rurlr + Un"\i3 Ro'In
RE and R. separated t Un"!3
u,, REXIE
R,, and Z connected uo
tT R. ancl Ro interconnected I Uo'i3 Un'!3 &*I.
RrxIE + Uo Uo* 0*
R, aud Z seParated
Un'i3 I R^'Io
R. and R^ seParated t
fault in the installation' -;tu+uu,13
"*irtirg "u.thneed be given
* No consideration
** See Regulation 442.2 1
equipment with regard
-with Uffifio,r, A".ign criteria for insulation of low voltage
NOTE 1: The requirements for.lJ, una
(see also Table '14 2)'
to temporary powei frequenc.v oven'oltage

98
NOTE 2: In a system whose neutral is connected to the earthing arrangemcnt of the transforoer substation, such temporar'y
powel frequency overvoliage is also to be expected across insulation which is not ill an earthed enclos re where the
equipment is outside a building.
NOTE 3: ln TT and TN systems the terms 'cotnected' and 'separated' refer to the electrical connection between R, and R". For
IT systems the telms refer to the electrical connection between RE and Z and the connection between RE and R..
442,2.1 Power frequency fault voltage
The fault voltage U1 as calculated in Table 44.1, which appears in the low voltage installation between exposed-
condllctive-parts and Eafih, shall not exceed a dangerous level.
NOTE l: In a TN system whcre RE al1d RB are connected together (see Table 44.l), their connectiorl to a ]ow voltage global
earlhing systern as described in BS EN 50522:2010, clause 3.4.19, can be considered to be a safety lneasure against
dangerous 1'ault vo)tages.
NOTE 2: A global earthing system is an eafthing system created by thc intcrconnection oflocal eafthing systems that provides.
by the proximity ofthese eafthiDg systens. that there are no dangerous touch voltages.

In installations outside a global earthing system, additional connection shall be made between the PEN conductor
and Earth.
442.2.2 Magnitude and duration of power frequency stress voltages
The magnitude and dumtion ofthe power frequency stress voltages (U1 and U2), where specified in Table 44.1, on
the equipment in the low voltage installation due to an eath fault in the high vottage system, shall not exceed the
requirements given in Table 44.2.

TABLE 44.2 - Permissible power frequency stress voltage

Permissible power frequency stress voltage on equipment

Duration ofthe earth lault in the high voltage system
in low voltage installations
t
U
>5s Uo+250V
l5s Uo + 1200 V
In systems without a neutral conductor, Uo shall be the line-toJine voltage.
NOTE 1 : Tbe lirst line of the table relates to high voltage systems haviug long disconnection tirnes, for example, isolated neutral
and resonant earthed high voltage systems. Thc second line relates to high voltage systems having short disconnectior
times, for example. low-impedance earlhed high voltage systems. Both lines together are relevant design criteria for
insulation of low voltage equipncnt with regard to temporary power frequency overvoltage, BS EN 60664-1.
NOTE 2: In a systern whose neutral is connected to the earthing atangement ofthe tmnsformer substation, such temporary power
frequency overvoltagc is also to be expected across insulation which is not in an earthed erclosure where the cquipLnent
is outside a building.

442.2.3 Requirements for calculation of limits

The requirements ofRegulations 442.2 .l and 442.2.2 are deemed to be fulfilled for installations receiving a supply
at low voltage from a system for distdbution of electricity to the public.

To fulfil the aboverequirements co-ordirlation betweenthe HV system operatorandthe LV system iostalleris necessary.
Compliance with the above requirements trainly falls into the responsibility of the substation installer/ownei
operator who needs also to fulfil requirements provided by BS EN 61936- 1. Therefore, the calculation for U,. U.
and Ul is nonnally not necessary for the LV system installer.

Possible measures to fu1fi1 the above lequirements are, for example:

(i) separation of HV and LV earthing arangerrents
(ii) change ofLV system earlhing
(iii) reduction ofearth resistance, RE.

442.3 Power frequency stress voltage in the event of

loss of the neutral conductor in TN or TT system
Consideration shall be given to the lact that, ifthe neutral conductor in a thrce-phase TN or TT system is intemrpted,
basic, double and reinforced insulation as well as cornponents mted for the voltage between line a1ld neutral
conductors call be temporarily stressed with the ]ine-toline voltage. The stress voltage can reach up to U : {3 U0.
 Power frequency stress voltage in the-event
of ..
442.4
i
t"lft i, lT system with distributed neutral
"" ""tttt
Considerationshallbegiventothefactthat,ifalineconductorofanlTSvstemisearthedaccidentally,insulationor the [ine-to-
components rated for tlr. ,ottug. u.il""n
ii* urd n"rt ul "orductors can be temporarily stressed with
uress voltage can reach up to U = ri3
uo
i#;;i;;. ih"
event of
442.5 Power frequency stress voltage in the
$;-"i;;iii;;i*een a line conductor and the neutral conductor
voltage installation between a line
that, if a Sbofi-circuit occurs in the low
Consideration shall be given to the fact and the neutral conductor can
conductor and the n"unul
u"*a-, trre other line conductors
"oraua,o.],'ha^""1"ga
45
L, lor a time up to 5s'
reach the value of 1
ORIGIN
OVERVOLTAGES OF ATMOSPHERIC
443 PROTECTION AGAINST TRANSIENT
OR DUE TO SWITCHING

443.1 Scope and object

443.1.',| This section deals with protection of electrical.install"i"lt ',Ci.lT:^^tl1':1"-t:.::::"::::-:',:j

ro rhe suppr) s)slem and
arllros*rErr! urrExL uq!,"!-"-- -'
"of.'"1;'1.,,. "#l;l'1fi'.Tl;;J;id;,,:Jil;tir::i'*::::,*',','"'i'"'o"
against switching overvoltagesgene uy ttt"
"quipment
within the installation'
'utto
due to direct or nearbY
This section does not specify requirements for protection against tmnsient overvoltages
lightning strokes on the structure'
NoTEI:Forriskmanagementtbrprctectionagainsttransientover'voltagesduetodirectornearbylightningstrokesonthe
structure, see BS EN 62305-2'

lngeneral.sr.ritchingo\ervoltageshaveloweramplitudetJrantransientovervoltagesofaimosphericoriginand
o'"tuoltaget of atmospheric origin normally
cover
therefore the requir"."nt, ,"gu'atng:
;;;;"il;;"i"nt i
protection against switching overvoltages'
against
of atmosphedc origin is installed' protection
If no transient ovewoltage protection against disturbances I
provided'
switching overvoltages may need to be I

NoTE2:overvoltagesduetoswitchingcanbelongelindurationandcancontainmoleenergythantransientovervoltagesof
atmospheric origin (see Regulation 443'4)' I

ofatmospheric origin depend on factors such

as:
NOTE 3: The characteistics oftraDsient overvoltages
(underground or overhead)
- the nature ofthe supply distribution system
;; ,;;,;." ;".*e protective device (SPD) upstream of the installation
- the possible exisren"" i
- the voltage level ofthe supply system'
I

downstream in
distribution system are not significantly attenuated
NOTE 4: Transient overvoltages transmitted by the supply I

most installations' I

(ICT)
Control and Telecommunications
I

This section does not cover overvoltages o-lTf:{-b] -IiPrmation'

,ystem,. i;;;iEN sotz+, ss EN 623-0s-4 and BS EN 61643-22'

NOTE5:Asregardstansjentoveoltagesofatmosphericorigin'nodistinctionismadebetweenearthedandunearthed I
systems.
I
whereplotectionagaiustovefloltagesiSbytheuseofSurgepfotectivedevices(SPDs)theyshallbeselectedand I

erected in accordance with Section 534'

Table 443 2' I
vaious rated impulse voltages arc given in
NOTE 6: Examples of equipment with
have protection levels lower than Category
I ofTable 443 2' I

NOTE 7: Some electonic equipment may

are: I
where the consequences of overvoltage
This section does not apply to installations I

(a) exPloiion I

(b1 chemical or radioactir e emis'ions I

NOTE8: BS EN 62305-2 applies for such high sk installations'

I

443.2 Not used

I

443.3 Not used

443.4 Overvoltage control
Protection against transient overvoltages shall be provided where the consequence caused by ovewoltage could:
(i) result in serious injury to, or loss of, human life, or
(ii) result in intemrption ofpublic sewices and/or damage to cultural heritage, or
(iii) result in interuption of commercial or industrial activity, or
(iv) affect a large number ofco-located individuals.

For all other cases, a risk assessment according to Regulation 443.5 shall be performed in order to determine if
protection againsttansient overvoltages is required. Ifthe risk assessment is notpeformed. the electrical installation
shall be provided with protection against tmnsient overvoltages, except for single dwelling units where the total
value ofthe installation and equipment therein does notjustily such protection.

Protection against switching overvoltages shall be considered in the case of equipment likely to produce switching
overvoltages or disturbances exceeding the values according to the overvoltage category of the installation, e.g.
where an LV generator supplies the installation or where inductive or capacitive loads (e.g. motors, transfomers,
capacitor banks), storage units or high-curent loads are installed.

443.5 Risk assessment method

Calculated risk level (CRL) is used to detemine ifprotection against tansient overvoltages of atmospheric origin
is required. The CRL is found by the following formula:
CRL :i",/(LpxNg)

f"", is an environmental factor selected according to Table 443.1

Ln is the dsk assessment length in km (see below)
Ne is the lightning ground flash density (flashes per km'?per year) relevant to the location ofthe power
line and connected structure (see Figure 44.2).

'1
01
-e
Figure 44.2 - Flash density map of UK

g"
F
F*
"B -t_

&,

LIGHTNING
FLASH
DENSITY Ng
#* =

(flashes/km'z/year) :=
KEY 4"{}= iliili
! Use 0.1 Ng

I Use 0.3 /vs

. Use 0.5 Ng

I Use 0.8 lvg

! Use t .o /vs

[iii$ use r.z rvs

! Use 1 .a Ng max
r_E 1
)
fu,''*; I
E.tri *.
L.+.f -lr-r

=e
Jffi-G&

r ,i
o^
 I

Table 443.1 - Calculation of f"",

Environment f.,,,
Rural and suburban environment 85

Urban el]Yircrlment 850

The risk assessment length Lp is calculated as follows:

Lf :2 L1AL + LfcL + 0.4 Lp",1+ 0.2 Lp6H (krrr)

where:
Lrot is the length (km) oflow voltage overhead line
L".. is the length (km) oflow voltage underground cable
Loo,t is the length (km) ofhigh voltage overhead line
Lr., is the length (km) ofhigh voltage underground cable.

The total length (LpaL + Lrc! + L|AH + Lp(.H) is limited to 1 km, or by the distance ftom the first overvoltage protective
device installed in the power network to the origin ofthe electdcal installation, whichever is the lesser

If the dist bution network lengths are totally or pafially unknown then Lpor shall be taken as equal to the
remaining distance to reach a total length of I km. For example, if only the distance of underground cable is known
(e.g. 100 m), the Lp11 shall be taken as equal to 900 m. An illustration of an installatiol1 showing the lengths to
consider is given in Figure 44.3.

Figure 44.3 - lllustration showing the lengths to consider for the calculation of Lp

This arrangement isfor illustrative purposes only

Lo., 1,,,

Key

1 sulge arestor (overuoltage protective device) on the overhead HV system

2 HV/LV fansformer
3 origin ofthe electrical installation

If CRL > I 000, protection against tarsient overuoltages ofatmospheric origin is not required.
If CRL < I 000, plotection against tmnsient overvoltages ofatmospheric origin is required.
NOTE: Examples ofcalculations ofCRL ale given inAnnex A443.

443.6 Classification of rated impulse voltages (overvoltage categories)

443.6.1 Purpose of classification of rated impulse voltages (overvoltage categories)

Overuoltage catego es are defined within electrical installations lor the purpose of insulation coordination and
related classification ofequipment with rated impulse voitages is provided (see Table 443.2).

The rated impulse voltage is used to classify equipment energized directly fi'on.r the low voltage electrical installation
into overvoltage categories.

l-^ 103
 voltage ale provided to distinguish diffet ent
Rated impulse voltages for equipment selected according to the nominal
an acceptable risk offailure
levels ofavailability ofequipment with regard to continuity ofservice and

rated inpulse voltage ofthe equiprnent

Inherent oveNoltage control for insulation coordination, based only on the
in accordance with BS EN 60664-1, is not sumcient lvhere:
-transieltovervoltagestmnsmittedviathesupplydistr.ibutionsystemalenotSignificantlyattehllated
downstream
NoTE:Insulationcoordioaiioncanbeachievedinthewholeinstallationbytransientovervo]tageprotectiolrofthe
eqLlipment colTesponding to the classi6ed mted impulse voltagc' thereby
reducing the risk of failure to an

accePtable level.

- surge curents and pafiiat lightnilg curents are distributed via underground cables
g power, telecol'nmunications and data lines'
- equipment is connected to multiple services, e
(see BS EN 60664-1) of the most sensitive equipmert to
It is necessary to consider the rated ilrpulse voltage uw
be protected in the systeur or., in cases where a te,rf,orary loss offunction
ofequipment is u[acceptable, the impulse
immunity voltage (see BS EN 61000-4-5).
443.6,2 Rated impulse voltages of equipment and overvoltage categories
installation, for
category Iv equipment is suitable for use at, or in the proximity of, the origin of the electlical
of category IV has a very high iu]pulse withstand
uprtreum of the main distribution board Equipment
"rafpte, shall have rated impulse voltage not less than the
capability providing the required high degree of retiabiliiy, and a

value specified in Table 443.2.

Category III equip[rent is suitable for use in the fixed installatior downstream
ofand including the main distribution
shall have rated impulse voltage not less than the value specified
t oari, proriaing u 1,igh degree ofavailability. and a

in Table 443.2.
ofavailability normally
categoly Il equipment is suitable for connection to the fixed installation, providing a degree
the value specified in
,.qui.d fo, curient_using equipment, and shall have a rated impulse voltage not less than
Table 443.2.
SPDs are installed outside the equipment
Category I equip[rent is only suitable fot use in the lixed installation where
voltage not less than the value
to liriit transient over-voltaaes to the specified level, an<1 shall have a rated impulse
specified in Table 443.2. Therefore, equipment with a rated impulse
voltage corespondirg to overvoltage category
I should, pret'erably, not be instalted at or near the origin ofthe installation'

104
 lable 443,2 - Required rated impulse voltage of equipment (Uw)
Nominal voltage Voltage line to Required rated impulse voltage ofequipmentb kV
ofthe installation ne[tral derived
from nominal
voltages AC or
DC up to and
including V
Overvoltage Overvoltage Overuoltage Overvoltage
category IV category III category II category I
(equipment with (equipment (equipment with (equipment
very high rated with high rated normal rated with reduced
impulse voltage) impulse voltage) impulse voltage) mted impulse
voltage)
For example, For example, For example, For example,
energy meter, dist bution dome stic sensitive
telecontrol boards, switches appliances, tools electronic
systems socket-outlets equipment
such as
alarm panels,
computers
and home
electronics
120/208 150 1 2.5 1.5 0.8
230/400. 300 6 4 2.5 1.5

277/480
400/690 600 8 6 4 2.5
I000 1000 12 8 6 4
1500 DC I 500 DC
a According to BS EN 60038:2009.
b This rated impulse voltage is applied between live conductors and PE.
c For IT systems operating at 220-240 y, the 230/400 row should be used, due to the voltage to earth at the
earth fault on one line.

ANNEX A443 (lnformative)

EXAMPLES OF CALCULATED RISK LEVEL CRL FOR THE USE
OF SPDs
4443.'l Example 1 - Building in rural environment
Ground flash density N"
Envilonmental factor f.,,. :85
Risk assessment length Lp = 2 LPAL + Lp(.I + 0.4 Lplu t 0.2 Lpcrr
: (2 x 0.4) + (0.4 x 0.6)
= 1.04

where:
Lrr. is the length (km) of low voltage overhead line - 0.4

Lrnn is thc length (km) ofhigh voltage overhead line = 0.6

Ln., is the length (km) oflow voltage underground cable =0
Lo., is the length (km) ofhigh voltage urrderground cable =0

CRf : f.,,, /(L,, x 5.1 :85/(1.04 x 1)

= 8t.7

105
 as the CRL is less than 1 000'
In this case, SPD protection shall be installed
supplied by HV
A443,2 Example 2 - Building in rural environment

densitY Nt = 0.3
Ground flash
f., =85
Environrnental factor
+ LPcr * 0 4 Lmrr * 0 2 Lpctr
Risk assessment length LP = 2 LPAL
=02x1
=02

where:
oflow voltage overhead line =0
Loo, is the length (km)
line =0
Lpaq is the length (km) ofhigh voltage overhead
cable =0
L.., is the length (km) of low voltage underground
cable
Lp6g is the length (km) ofhigh voltage underground

CRL=i,,"/(LpxNJ =85/(02x03)
=|4167
as the CRL is greater than I 000'
In this case, SPD protection is not a requirement

A443.3Example3-BuildinginurbanenvironmentSuppliedbyoverheadlines
Ground flash densitY Ns
f"". = 850
Environmental factor
Risk assessment Iength Lp = 2 Lr"rL + Lx:r
* 0 4 Lp'n + 0 2 LpcrI
=(2x0.4)+(0.4x06)
=104

rvlrere:
= 0.4
Lt^, is the length (km) oflow voltage overhead llne
length (km) ofhigh voltage overhead line = 0.6
L,.r, is the

is the length (km) of low voltage underground

cable =0
Lo.,
cable =0
Lpcn is the length (km) ofhigh voltage underground

CRL = f"." / (LP x Nr) = 850 / (1 04 x 1)

= 817

as the CRL is less than 1 000'

In this case, SPD protection shall be installed

A443.4Example4-BuildinginurbanenvironmentSuppliedbyundergroundcables
density Nt = 0.5
Ground flash
Environmental factor f".' = 850

Risk assessment length Lr = 2 Lpl + LpcL + 0 4 LPAH + 0 2 LPCH

-1

where:
length (km) oflow voltage overhead line =0
Lo-r, is the

is the length (km) ofhigh voltage overhead

line =0
Lon,
cable
LrcL. is the length (km) oflow voltage underground
ofhigh voltage underground cable =0
Lrc, is the length (km)

CRL=i,,/ (LP x N") = 8s0/ (1 x 0's)

=1700
as the CRL is grcater than I 000'
In ti'ris case. SPD protection is not a Iecluitemcnt
 ANNEX 8443 (lnformative)
GUIDANCE ON OVERVOLTAGE CONTROL BY
SPDs APPLIED TO OVERHEAD LINES
Where an installation is supplied by, or includes, an overhead line and SPDs are required according to Regulation
443.4, the protective control of the overr,,oltage level may be obtained either by installing surge protective devices
directly in the installation close to the origir ofthe installation or, with the consert ofthe network operator, in the
overhead lines ofthe supply distribution network.

As an example, the following measures may be applied:

(a) in the case ofoverhead supply distribution networks, overvoltage protection is erected at network junction
poilts and especially at the end of each feeder longer than 0.5 km. Surge protective devices should be
erccted at every 0.5 knr distance along the supply distribution lines. Nevertheless, the distance between
surge protective devices should in no case exceed I km
(b) ifa supply distribution network is erected partly as an overhead network and partly as an underground
retwork, overvoltage protection in the overhead lines should be applied in accordance with (a) at each
transition point from an overhead line to an underground cable
(c) in a TN distribution network supplying elect cal installations, where the protective measurc automatic
discomection ofsupply is applied, the eafthing conductors olthe surge protective devices connected to the
line conductors are connected to the PEN conductor or to the PE conductor
(d) in a TT distribution uetwork supplying electrical installations, where the protective measure automatic
disconnection ofsupply is applied, surge protective devices are provided for the line conductors and for the
neutral conductor. At the place where the neutml conductor ofthe supply network is effectively earthed, a
surge protective device for the neutral conductor is not necessaxy.

444 MEASURES AGAINST ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTURBANCES

444,1 Scope
This section provides basic requirements and recommendations to enable the avoidance and reduction of
electromagnetic disturbances.

Those involved in the design, installation and maintenance of, and alterations to, electrical installations shall give
due consideration to the measures described in this section.

Electromagnetic disturbances can disturb or damage infomation technology systems or information technology
equipment as well as equipment with electronic components or circuits. Currents due to lightning, switching
operations, short-circuits and other electromagnetic phenomena might cause overvoltages and electromagnetic
interference.

These effects are potentially more severe:

(i) where large metal loops exist
(ii) where different electrical wiring systems are installed in common routes, e.g. for power supply and for
signalling and/or data communication cables connecting information technology equipment within a
building.
The value ofthe iuduced voltage depends on the mte ofchange (dl/dt) ofthe interference curent and on the size of
the loop.

Power cables carrying large currents with a high rate ofchange of current (dl/dt) (e.g. the stafiing current oflifts or
curents controlled by rectifiers) can induce overvoltages in cables of information technology systems, which can
influence or damage infomation technology equipment or similar electrical equipment.
In or near tooms for medical use, electromagnetic disturbances associated with electrical installations can interfere
with medical electrical equipment.
The requirements and recommendations given in this section can have an influence on the overall design of the
building including its structural aspects.

The requirements ofthe following standards shall be applied where appropriate;

(iii) BS 6701: Telecommunications equipmert and telecommunications cabling. Specification for installation,
operation and maintenance
(iv) BS EN 50310: Application of equipotential bonding and earthing in buildings with information technology
equipment

107
 installation
(v) BS EN 50174 series: lnformation technology Cabling Instaltation and mitisation guidelines
Eatthing
(EMC)
(vi) BS lEC 61000-5-2: El""o"-;;;;;t'ltto't"
and cabling.

444.2 AIot used

444.3 I\tot used

444.4 Electromagnetic disturbances

444.4.'l Sourcesofelectromagneticdisturbances
relative to the positioning
electromagneti c disturbances
shall be given to the location ofthe sources of typically include:
consideration oirturbances within an installation
potential sources l?
ofother eqdpment. "i""t "."gr"ti.
(i) switching devices for inductive loads
(ii) electric motors
(iii) fluorescentlighting
(iv) welding machines
(v) rectifiers
(vi) choPPers (VSDs)
including Variable Speed Drives
t"iil f..o**, *nvertors/rcgulators
(viii) lifts
(ix) transfotmers
(x) switchgear
1ri.1 Puwer distribution busbars'
the BS EN 50i74 series ofstandards'
NOTE: For fr'rrther informatio[ refer to
444.4.2 Measures to reduce EMI
the effects of
measures shall be considered' wherc appropriate' in order to reduce
444.4.2.1 The following
*?ITil:::::::ffli!"u be taken to limit the fault curentliom
power
o, au,u.uur"s are used, care should
cy5lemsflowinglhr"'gnt;""';;;;cJresolsignat^cautt''o'ouiutuurtt'*hichareeanhedAddirional
seeFigure44 4
conductor for screen reinforcement'
conducton may be necessary e g a bypass

for s*Tffiill":i:t"Jt to provide a common equipotential

Fis 44.4 - Bvpass conductor

Bypass conductor for screen relnforcement

with regard to
protective devices and/or filteN to improve electromagnetic compatibility
(ii) The use of surge
;;d*; ;,;;ag,',"ti" p'eno^elX1ii.ffi ;.;"':;ffi
:111::::rT:.f:::;HilH[:i,
and any protectlve e
of power cables (i e tine' neutral
(iii) th" inrtuttutioo
areas
order to minimize cable looP
signal cables
(iv) The separation ofpower and
see Regulation 444 5 2'
(v) ,i" ,n.o,ru,., "i,n equipotential bonding network'

444.4.3 TN sYstem
be met'
the following requirements shall
To minimize electromagnetic distubances'
of the installation'
be used downsteam of the origin
444.4.3.1 A PEN conductor shall not Regulations (ESQCR) prohibits
the Lrse of PEN
Safety' Quality and Coltinuity
NOTE: Regulation 8(4) of the Electricity
conductors in consumers' installations.
 444.4.3,2 The installation shal1 have separate neutral and protective conducrors downstream ofthe origin ofthe
installation; see Figue 44.5.

Fig 44.5 - Avoidance of neutrar conductor currents in a bonded structure by using an

installation forming part of a T.N-c-s system from the origin of the pubric suppty upio ana
including the final circuit within a building
Bonding conductor,
if necessary,
see Annex A444.2

PE, N, L

Equipment I

Signal or data cable

PE, N, L

Public supply

,.

Key :

I Loops of limited area formed by signal or data cables.

444.4.3.3 Where the complete low voltage installation including the transformer is operated only by the usel
an installation foming part ofa TN-S system sha1l be installed; see Figure 44.6.

,:\ l

109
 structure by using an installation
'-
' 44,6
Fig - Avoidance of neutral conductor currents in a bonded private supply transformer
toiming part of a TN-S syste.m downstream of a consumer's

Key :

i Loops of Iimited area formed by signal or data cables'

Z it.
point ofn"otl.ut may be rnade at the tmnsfolmer or the main LV switchgear'
"arthing

444.4.4 TT system

InaninstallationfomingpartofaTTsystem,suchaSthatshowninFigure44.T,consideration.shallbegiven
where the extraneous-
io or"rrottugaa wrrich mlght exist between live parts and extraneous-conductive-parts
eafih electrodes'
.-orOr.tiu. p"u.t, of differeit buildings are connected to different
shall be considered'
The use of an isolating transfomer to provide a TN-S system
 Fig 44.7 - lnstallation forming part of a TT system within a building installation

Bonding conductor,
if necessary,
see Annex 4444.2

PE, N, L

Equipment 1

Signal or data cable

PE, N, L

Key :
1 Loops of limited area formed by signal or data cables.

Where screened signal cables or data cables are comrnon to several buildings supplied from an installation forming
part of a TT systen, the use of a bypass bonding conductor (see Figure 44.8) or single-point bonding shall be
:: l
considered. The bypass conductor shall have a minimum cross-sectional afea of l6 mrn] copper or equivalent, the
equivalent cross-sectional area being selected in accordance with Regulation 544.1.

Where the live conductorc ofthe supply into any ofthe buildings exceed 35 mmr in cross-sectional area the bypass
conductor shall have a minimum cross-sectional area in accordance with Table 54.8.

111
 part
conductor in an installation forming
Fig 44.8 - Example of a substitute or bypasstonding
of a TT system
L1

L2
L3

Screened slgna cable

cannot be obtained'
4I 1.3.1.2 (telecommunication cables)
Il conset accolding to the tast palagmph of Regolation the exclusion ofthose cables
t"U'" to avoid any danger due to
#ll"*i*
it is the rcsponsibility of tt.tt o*n"' "?t*
bonding'
irotrr-ifr" .onn".,io, to the nain equipotential

444.4.5 Not used

444.4.6 Multiple-source TN or TT power supplies

shall be earthed at one point only'
supplies to an installation' the system
For TN or TT multiple-source power
point of
througb the protective conductor' a single
F^r , TN svstem. to avoid having the Deutral curent flowing
shall be made as iltusffaled in figure
44'9'
"."*.tion'onfv earth
single connection between PEN and
Fig 44.9 - TN multiple-source power supply with

i(- sou."" r )i(- lnstallation ----->i<-sout"" z)i

,I
I
). -^Yi- i
I

I
I

illlrl
ri
Exposed_conductive-Parts

flow
star points of tl.le sourc€s ofsupply,is
applied. nctttral conductor cunents lnight
NorE ,l
: where rnultiple earthing of the as shown rn
but also via the protective conductor
back to rhe relevant sr", 0",.;, ;;J"l;-;;
th" n"ut,ut
"ondu"ro.. is no longer zero and a stray
Figule 44 10 fot ti"''*l of the partial currents flowing in the instailation
'}ti""u'on
similar to that of a single conductor cable
-lgnetic fleld is created,
NoTE2:lnthecaseofasingleconductorcablecalryingACcurrent,acirculalelectromagneticfieldiSgeneratedaloundthe
conductorthatmightintert.erewithelectronicequipment.Hanrrouiccurrentsptodtrcesimilarelectromagneticfields
cufient'
those produced by the fundamental
t]1ore rapidly tharl
tui,i", un"n'u*

6\
o'
cn
 Fig 44.'t0 - TN multiple-source power supply with unsuitable multiple connection between pEN
and earth

l*sou'"" I )lg- lnstallation ------)l+Sorr"" z9i

!l I

I I

I I

connection

444.4.7 Transfer of supply

In an installation foming part ofa TN system the transfer ftom one supply to an altemative supply shall be by means
of a multipole switching device which switches the line conductors and the neutral conductor, ifany.
NOTE: This rnethod prevelts electromagnetic fields due to stray cu[ents in the main suppiy system ofan instal]ation.

444.4.8 Not used

444.4.5 Separatebuildings
Where different buildings have separate equipotential bonding systems, metal-ftee optical fibre cables or other non-
conducting systems are prefeffed for signal and data translrission, e.g. microwave signal transfonner for isolation
in accordance with BS EN 61558-2-1. 2-1.2-6.2-15 and either BS EN 60950- I or BS EN 62368- 1.

444.4.10 lnsidebuildings
Within a building, the requirements and recommendations of the following standards shall be applied for control,
signalling and cornmuntcalion circuils:
(D BS EN 50174-1: Infonnation technology Cabling installation: Installation specification and quality
assulance
(iil BS EN 50174-2: Infonr.ntion technology Cabling installation: lnstallation planning and practices inside
buildings
(iii) BS EN 50310: Application ofequipotential bonding and earthing in buildings with information technology
equipment.

444.5 Earthing and equipotential bonding

444.5.1 lnterconnection of earth electrodes

444.5.1.1 Within a single building

All protective ard functional eathing conductors ol an installation within a building shall be connected to the
main earthing terminal, as required by Regulation 542.4.1, except where this is precluded by the requirements of
legislation or Part 7.

444.5.1.2 Betweenbuildings
For communication and data exchange between several buildings, the requirements ofRegulation 542.1.3.3 apply
to both the protective and functional earthing requirements.
NOTE: Where interconnection of the eafih electrodes is not possible or practicable. it is recontmended that separation of
cornmunications networks is applied, for example, by using optical or mdio links.

'1 13
 444,5.2 Equipotentialbondingnetworks
The structure selected for these conductors shall be appropriate
for the installation:

(i)Metalsheaths,Scleensoranrrouringofcablesshallbebondedtothecommonbondingnetwork(CBN)
unless such bonding is required to be omitted for safety reasons
(ii)wherescreenedsignalordatacablesareearthed,careshallbetakentolimitthefaultcurrentfrompower
' ' syst.-s flowirg thiough the screens and cores ofsignal cables or data cables
(iii) to cany functional eafih currents having high
The impedance ofequipotential bonding connections intended
'- ' frequ"ncy ,t uti u" as lo\v"as practicable and this should be achieved by the use
of multiple'
"o.pon.nt,
separated bolds that are as short as possible
NoTE:Wherebondsofuptolmetrelongareused,theilinductivereactanceandimpeclanceofloutecanbeleduced
bychoosingaconductivebraido-rabondingstrap/strip(withawidt}tothicknessratioofatleast5:landa
length to width ratio no greater than 5:1)'
be made to BS EN 62305'
(iv) Where a lightning protection system is installed, reference shall

444.5.3 Sizing and installation of copper bonding ring network conductors

dimensions:
Equipotentialbonding designed as a bonding ring network shall have the following minimum nominal
(i) Flat cross-section: 25 rrm x 3 mm
(ii) Round diameter; 8 mm.
and on their passage through walls'
Bare conducto$ shall be protected against cotrosion at their suppofis

444.5"3.1 Parts to be connected to the equipotential bonding network

network:
The following parts sha1l be comected to the equipotential bonding
(i)Metalliccontainment,conductivescreens,conductivesheathsoratmouringofdatatransmissioncablesor
of idonnation technology equipment
(ii) Functional eafihing conductors ofantenna systems
(iii) Conductors ofthe eafthed pole of a DC suppty for inforrnation
technology equipment

(iv) Functionalearthingconductors
(v) Protectivecorductom.

444.5-4 Not used

444.5.5 Not used

444.5.6 Not used

Earthing arrangements and equipotential bonding of information

technology
444.5.7
installations for f unctional purposes

444.5.7 .'l Earthing busbar

Wheleanearthingbusbarisrequiredforfunctionalpurposes,considerationshallbegiventoextendingthemain
ilformation technology
i"""ir"fif the uuilding uv usir4 on" o. Inor" "utthlng busbars. This enables
""nirirg
installations to be connected to tfr. i""in terminal by the shortest pmcticable loute from anf/ point in the
"'u.tfri"g
busbar is erected to;upport the equipotential bonding network
ofa significant amount
rrrj"ra-g. wfr.* ,fr. earthing
a building, consideration shall be given to the installation ofa bonding ring
of irfomation technotogy
"qrip-;niin
iest', ionding n"twork; see Annex 4444 Frgwe A444 2'
.orrdr",o, o,
"o*rrlon
earthing busbar throughout its length and to the
consideration shall be given to the need for accessibility of the
protect ion of bat'e conduclors to prer ent comosion'

444.5-7.2 Cross-sectional area ofthe earthing busbar

FoI installations connected to a suppty having a capacity of 200
A per phase or more' the cross+ectional atea
be selected in accordance with Regulation
of the earthing busbar shall b" ,;;i;; ttu. s"o ,r,nj "opp.r and shali
414.5.2(iti).

Folsupplieshavingacapacityoflessthan200Aperphasetheearlhingbusbarshaltbeselectedinaccordancewith
Table 54.8.

WlreretheearlhingbusbarisusedaspartofaDCretumculfentpath.itscloss-Sectionalareaslrallbl]selected
accordi[g to the expected DC retun'] currents'

- lLa
444.6 Segregation of circuits
444.6.1 General
Band I (exta-low voltage)
cables that are used at voltage Band II (low voltage) and cables that ate used at voltage
to the Iequilements
which share the same cable management system oI the same foute, shall be installed accolding
oI separation'
ofRegulations 528.1 and 528.2. Circuits oi the same voltage band might also require segregatior'r

oI sepalation Iequilements'
Electrical safety and eleckomagnetic compatibility might pfoduce different segregation
The design shall meet both rcquiements.

444.6.2 Equipment
and mercury vapour (or other
The minimum distance between information technology cables and discharge, neon
Iow energy lamps (cfl) are to be considered as gas
frig'h-ir|*riry a".harge) lamps shall be 130 mm. In this regard,
diicharge sources. Data wiring racks and electrical equipment shall always be separated'

'1 15
 AN N EX A444 (lnformative)
MEASURES AGAINST ELECTROMAGNETIC DISTU RBANCES
A444,1 Structures for the network of bonding conductors and earthing conductors
For dwellings, where normally a limited amount of elechonic equipment is in use, a protective conductor nefwork
in the folm of a star network might be acceptable.

For commercial and in{ustrial buildings and similar buildings containing multiple electonic applications, a

common equipotential bonding system is useful in order to comply with the EMC requirements of different types
of equipment.

The four basic structures described as follows might be used, depending on the impodance and vulnerability of
equipment.
NOTE: For fufiher infomation, the methodology refered to ir Bs EN 50310 (The application of equipotentiai bonding and
earthing in buildings with information technology equipment) is generally applicable'

A444.1.1 Protective conductors in a star network

commercial buildings,
This tlpe of network is applicable to small installations associated with dwellings, small
Figure A444 1'
froln u g.reral point of view to equipment that is not interconnected by signal cables; see
"t"., ^d
Fig A444,1- Example of protective conductors in star network

Dislribution

(r,1ET)

Eanhing conductor

- Proiective conductor

A444.1.2 Multiple meshed bonding star network

groups ofinterconnected comlnunicating
This tlpe ofnetwork is applicable to small installations with different small
Figure 4444 2'
It enables thelocal dispersion of curents caused by electromagnetic interference; see
"qripil*,.
Fig A444.2 - Example of multiple meshed bonding star network

Proiective condlctoE and/ortunctionaL earthing conduclors

Functiona bondng conductors. The ength oi these conducrors
- should be as shon as possible (ior inslan@ < 50 cm)
-

_ 116
A444.1.3 Common meshed bonding star network
This type ofnetwork is applicable to installations with a high densiry of communic.ri.i: ::-:r:nent corresponding to
critical applications; see iigure 4444.3. It is suitable forprotection ofpdvate auromaii-- r.::.-l- .\!-hange equipment
(PABX) and cenffalized data processing systems.

A meshed equipotential bonding network is enhanced by the existing metallic strucrrr:e oi rhe building lt is
supplemented by conducton foming the square mesh.

The mesh size depends on the selected level ofprotection against lightning, on the imlruniq 1er el ofthe equipment
and on the lrequencies used lor data transmission
be in accordance rvith
Mesh size should be adapted to the dimensions ofthe installation to be protected and should
be adapted ro the dime sions
the recommendations of BS EN 50310. Where concems exist, the mesh size should
of the installation to be protected, but should not exceed 2 m x 2 m in areas where equipment
susceptible to
electromagnetic environmental interferences is installed
the mesh.
NOTE: The mesh size refers to the dimensions of square spaces enclosed by the conductors fonning

In some cases, parts ofthis network may be meshed more closely in order to meet specific requirernents'

Fig A444.3 - Example of a common meshed bonding star network

Bonding conneclion

Current.using
equipment

Main
terminal(s)
(t\,4ET)

Functional bonding conduciors. The length of these

conductorc shou d be as short as possible (ior instance < 50 cm)

A444.1.4 Protective conductors connected to a bonding ring conductor

A444.4 onthe
An equipotential bonding network in the form ofa bonding ng conductol (BRC) is shown in Figure
preferably made of copper, bare or insulated, and installed in such a
top noo, oftt e ,mr.rrr"l Th. BRC should be
e.g. by mounting on a cable tray, in a metallic conduit (see BS EN
l1ranner that it remains accessible everywhere,
61386 series), employing a surface mounted method of installatioll oI cable trunking. All plotective and functional
earthing conductors may be connected to the BRC.

A444.2 Equipotential bonding networks in buildings with several floors

be installed:
Forbuildings with several floors, it is recommended that, on each floor, an equipotential bonding system
see Fig,.rre i444.4 for examples of bonding networks in common use; each floor
is a type of network The bonding
with
systeis ofthe different floors should be iiterconnected, at least twice, by conductors selected in accordance
the requirements olChapter 54.

(r-
6Sctnrc^ od\

LIBRARY E

117
 Fig A444.4 - Example of equipotential bonding networks in a structure without a lightning
protection system

Equipotential BRC
bonding network

Common meshed
bonding network

Multiple star/mesh
bonding network

Main earthing terminal(s)

star bonding network

Structural metalwork

A444.3 lnstallations containing a high density of interconnected equipment

In severe electomagnetic environments, it is Iecommended that the common meshed bonding star network described
in 4444.1.3 be adopted.

A444.4 Design guidelines for segregation of circuits

where both the specification of the information technology cable and its intended application is known, the
requirements ofBS EN 50174-2 and BS EN 50174-3 are appropriate.

BS EN 50174 sedes standards contain requirements and recommendations for the installation of infomtation
technology cabling which suppofi a range ofapplications delivering the following selices:
(i) ICT (informatioll communication technologies) e.g. local area networks
(ii) BCT (broadcast communication technologies) e.g. audio-visual, television
(iii) CCCB (command control and communications in buildings) e g building automation
(iv) pMCA (process monitorirg, control and automation) e.g. industrial networks (Fieldbus).
then the
Where the specification and/or intended application of the information technology cable is not available,
minimum of 200 mm
cable separation distance between the powir and information technology cables should be a
in free air.

This distance can be reduced ifa screened power cable, a metallic barier, or containmellt system iS used as described
in Table 4444.1.

118
 f ABLE 4444.1 - Summary of minimum separation distances where the specification and/or the
intended application of the information technology cable is not available

These recommendations of segrcgation are based upon the following assumptions:

(i) The electromagnetic environment complies with the levels defined in the BS EN 6 1000-6 series of standards
for conducted and radiated disturbances (e.g. mains power cabling)
(ii) The LV supply is non-defomed but has high-ftequency content consistent with the switching and operation of
connected equipment in accordance with the BS EN 61000-6 series olstandards
NOTE: "Deformed" LV power supplies and the use ofother equipment lie outside the scope ofthis standard and might
require additional enginee ng practices.
(iii) The total desigll current in the LV circuits does not exceed 600A
(iv) Bala[ced information technology/telecommunications cables have electromagnetic immunity performance in
accordance with BS EN 50288 series standards for Category 5 and above
(v) Coaxial information technology/telecommunications cables have electromagnetic immunity performance in
accordance with BS EN 50117-4-l standard for Category BCT-C
(vi) The applications supported by the cabling are designed to operate using the information technology cabling
installed or to be installed.
Containment applied to the mains power cabling
No containment or open metallic Perforated open metallic containment Solid metallic containment
containment Ar B' cr
200 mm 150 mm Note 4

NOTE 1: Screening pefomance (DC-100MHz) equivalent to welded mesh steel basket ofmesh size 50 mm x 100 rrm (excluding
laddels). This screening performance is also achieved with steel tray (duct without covo) of less than 1.0 mm wall
thickness and more than 20% equally distributed peforated area. No part ofthe cable within the containment should be
less than l0 mm below the top of the ba1fier.
NOTE 2: Screening performance (DC- 100 MHz) equivalent to steel tray (duct without cover) of l 0 mm wall thickness and no more
than 20% equally distributed pedorated area. This screening performance is also achieved with screened pou,er cables
that do not meet the perfon'nance defined in Note 1. No part ofthe cable within the containment should be less tban 10
mm below the top ofthe banier.
N OTE 3: Scrcening pcrfor mance (DC 100 MHz) cquivalcllt to a fully cncloscd stccl containmert system having a minimum * all
thickness of 1.5 mm. Separation specified is in additlon to that provided by any divider,/barrier.
NOTE 4: No physical separatior other than that provided by the containment.
NOTE: Zero segregation in the Table references additional segregation/separation for EMC over and above the requiremerts
for safety. Safety considerations must always take precedence over EMC requirements.

Where the above conditions do not apply, see Table A444.2.

TABLE A444.2 - Minimum separation between power and signal cables (m)

Power Cable Voltage (V) Minimum Separation Power Cable Current (A) Minimum Separation
between Power and Signal between Power and
Cables (m) Signal Cables (m)
115 0.25 5 0.24
240 0.45 15 0,3s
415 0. s8 50 0.5
3300 1.1 100 0.6
6600 1.25 300 0.85
11000 t.4 600 1.05

t I N OTE I : The values in Table A444.2 car be used specifically fol long parallel mns of cables.
NOTE 2: The uomrcase sepamtion based on voltage or curent should be used.
I I
Additional areas ofconcem are expressed in Regulat ion 444.4.1.
h* I
L. I
119
 The minimum separation between the information technology cables and mains powercables includes all allowances
for cable movement between their fixing points or other restraints (see example in Figure ,4444 5)'

Fig A444.5 - Example of cable separation distance

I
Separation I
v

The minimun separatiol requirement applies in three dimensions. However, where infolmation technology
be maintained then
cables and mains fower cables are required to cross and required minimum separation cannot
less than the
maintaining the angle of their crossing at 90 degrees on eithel side of the crossing for a distance no
applicabte irinimum separation requirement will minimize any electromagnetic disturbances.

A444.5 Conditions for zero segregation

See BS EN 50174 series.

445 PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE

445.',| General requirements

445.1.'l Suitable precautions shall be taken where a reduction in voltage, or loss and subsequent Iestoration
1 3'
ofvoltage, could caur. dung". Plovisions lor a circuit sr"rpplying a motor shall comply with Regulation 552
it is
where current-using equipment or any other pafi ofthe installation may be damaged by a drop in voltage and
verified that such dJmage-is unlikely to cause danger, one ofthe following arrangements shall be adopted:
(i) Suitable precautions against the damage foreseen shall be provided
(ii) lt shall be verified, in consultation with the person or body responsible for the operation and maintenance
of
the installation, that the damage foreseen is an acceptable fisk

A suitable time delay may be incorporated in the operation of an undewoltage protective device
if the
445.1 .2
operation ofthe equipment to whicir the protection relates allows without daDger a briefreduction or loss ofvoltage'

445.1 .g Ary delay in the opening or reclosing ofa contactor shall not impede instantaneous disconnection by
a control device or a protective devrce.

The characteristics ofan undervoltage protective device shall be comPatible with the requirements
for
445.1 .4
starting and use of the equipment to which the protiction relates, as stated h the appropdate
British or Harmonized
Standard.

445.1.5 Where the reclosure of a protective device is likely to cause danger, the reclosure shall not be
automatic.

120
 CHAPTER 46

ISOLATION AND SWITCHING

CONTENTS
460 SCOPE

461 GENERAL
462 ISOLATION

463 FUNCTIONAL swlrcHlNG (CONTROL)

463.1 General
463.2 Auxiliary circuits
463.3 Motor control

464 SWITCHING OFF FOR MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE

465 EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF

CHAPTER 46

ISOLATION AND SWITCHING

460 SCOPE

Chapter 46 deals with:

for the prevention or removal of dangers
(i) non-automatic local and remote isolation and switching measures
associatedwithelectricalinstallationsorelectricallypoweredequipment,and
(ii) switching for the control ofcircuits or equipment'

Where electrically powered equipment is within the scope

ofBS EN 60204' only the requirements ofthat standard
apply.

461 GENERAL

461.1 Accodingtotheintendedfunction(S),everydeviceplovidedforisolationorswitchingshallcomply
with the relevart requirements of Chapter 53'
shall not be isolated or switched'
461.2 In TN-C systems and TN-C-S systems, the PEN conductor
:\e
is rotrequired ifprotective equipotential
,Je. InTN-c-S andrN-S systems, isolation or switching ofthe neutal conductor
bonding is installed and either:
:by times of
(i) the neutual conductor is reliably connected to Earth by.i1"t.*"1tl"i:t to meet the disconnection
the protective devices according to the requirements
of Chapter 41' or
of the supply is reliably connected
:: iOf (ii) the distdbutor declares that either the PEN or the neutral conductor protective devices according to the
-zed of the
to Earth by a low resistance to meet the disconlection times
requirements of ChaPter 4l
.: be
462 ISOLATION

Each electuical installation shall have provisions for isolation

ftom each supply'
462.1

462,l.2olAmainlinkedswitchorlintedcircuit-br.eakershallbeprovidedasnearaspmcticabletotheorigin
ofJ""f iruuff",iot as a means of switching the supply on load and as a means ofisolation'

A]nainswitchintendedforoperationbyordinarypersons,e.g.ofahouselroldorsimilarinstallatiorr,Shallinterrupt
both live conductors of a single-phase supply'
live couductors' except as detailed in
462.2 Every circuit shall be provided with isolation means for all
Regulation 461.2.
by a common flIeans' ilthe sen'ice conditions allot'this
Provision may be made for isolating a group of cicuits

r
 462.3 Devices for isolation shall be designed and,/or installed so as to prcvent unintentional or inadvertent closure.

- Located within a lockable space or lockable enclosure

- Padlocking
- Located adjacent to the associated equipment.

462.4 Where residual electdcal energy is potentially present, suitable means shall beprovided for its discharge.

Where relevant, a waming label indicating the discharge time required before the enclosure can be safely opened
shall be provided.
NOTE: Storage units do not need to be discharged since they are considered to be supply sources.

463 FUNCTTONALSWTTCHTNG(CONTROL)

463.1 General
463.1.1 Functional switching shall be provided for each part ofa circuit which may require to be controlled
independently of other pafis of the installatiofl .

463,1,2 Functional switching devices need not necessarily switch off alt live conductors of a circuit.
A single-pole switching device shall not be placed in the neutral conductor except for the connection ofthe control
device for lighting circuits as shown in Figure 46.1.

Fig 46.1 - Lamp control circuit with switching in the neutral conductor

Key

I connection ofthe control device for lighting circuits

2 circuit supplying the lamps
3 control device.

Switching ofthe neutral shall be in compliance with Regulation 530.3.3.

463.1.3 Iu general, all curent-using equipment requi ng conkol shall be controlled by ar appropriate
functional switching device.

A single functional switching device may conhol seveml items of curent-using equipment interded to operate
simultaneousll.

463.1.4 Functional switching devices ensuring the changeover ofsupply lrom altemative sources shall switch
offa1llive conductors and shall not be capable ofputting the sources in parallel, unless the installation is specifically
designed for this condition.

l- t"^
463.2 Auxiliary circuits
Auxiliary circuits shall be designed, aranged and protected to limit dangers resulting from a fault in the auxiliary
circuit or an insulation fault between the auxiliary circuit and other conductive parts liable to cause malfunction (e.g.
inadvertent operation) ofthe controlled apparatus; see Section 557.

463.3 Motor control

463.3.1 Motor control circuits shall be designed so as to prevent any motor from restading autornatically
after a stoppage due to a fall in or loss ofvoltage, if such starting is liable to cause danger

Earth laults in colltlol circuits should not cause unintentional stafiing, potentially hazardous motjon, or prevent
stopping ofthe motor.

463.3.2 Where reverse-cunent braking of a motor is plovided, provision shall be made for the avoidance of
reversal ofthe direction ofrotation at the end ofbmking ifsuch reversal may cause danger.

463.3.3 Where safety depends on the direction of rotation of a motor, provision shall be made for the
prevention ofreverse operation due to a reversal ofphases.
NOTE: Attention is drawn to danger which may arise from the loss ofone phase.

464 SWITCHING OFF FOR MECHANICAL MAINTENANCE

464.1 Means for switching off shall be provided where mechanical maintenance may involve a risk of
physical injury.

The switching off shall cause the disconnection ofall live conductors, except as provided in Regulation 461.2, by a
device suitable for isolation.
NOTE 1: Electrically powered mechanical equipment may include rotating machines as well as heating elements and
electromagnetic equipment.
NOTE 2: Systems powered by other means. e.g. pneumatic, hydraulic or steam, are I1ot covered by these ]egulations. In such
cases, switching off any associated supply ofelectricity may not be a sufficient measure.

NOTE 3: Where electrically powered equipment is within the scope of BS EN 60204, the requirements for switching off for
mechanical maintcnance of thal standard apply.

464.2 Suitable means shall be provided to prevent electrically powered equipment from inadveftently or
unintentionally reactivating during mechanical maintenance, unless the means of switching off is cortinuously
under the control ofany person performing such maintenance.

465 EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF

465.1 Means shall be provided for emergency switching off ofany part of an installation where it may be
necessary to control the supply to remove an unexpected danger.

465.2 Where a risk ofelectdc shock or another risk of electrical origin is involved, the emergency srvitching
offshall cause the disconnection ofal1 live conductors, except as provided in Regulation 461.2, by a device suitable
for isolation.

465.3 Means for emergency switching off shall act as directly as possible on the appropriate supply
conductors.

The anangement for emergency switching offshall be such that one single action only will intenupt the appropriate
supply.

465.4 The armngement of the emergency switching shall be such that its operation does not introduce a
fui1her danger or interfere with the complete operation necessary to remove the danger.
NOTE: The operation ofthe switcling device is to be understood as switching offin case ofemergency and switching on to
re-energize the relevant circuit.

The emergency operation function shall not impair the effectiveness ofprotective devices or of devices with other
safety functiors.

123
 PART 5

SELECTION AND ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 51 COMMON RULES
510 INTRODUCTION
511 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
512 OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
513 ACCESSIBILITY
s14 IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES
515 PREVENTION OF MUTUAL DETRIMENTAL INFLUENCE

CHAPTER 52 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WRING SYSTEMS

520 INTRODUCTION
521 TYPES OF WIRING SYSTEM
522 SELEfiON AND EREGTION OF WRING SYSTEMS IN REI.ATION TO D$ERML INFLUENCES
523 CURRENT.CARRYING CAPACITIES OF CABLES
524 CROSS-SECTIONAL AREAS OF CONDUCTORS
525 VOLTAGE DROP IN CONSUMERS' INSTALLATIONS
526 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
527 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WRING SYSTEMS TO MINIMIZE THE SPREAD OF FIRE
528 PROXIMITY OF WIRING SYSTEMS TO OTHER SERVICES
529 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WRING SYSTEMS IN RELATION TO
MAINTAINABILITY INCLUDING CLEANING.

CHAPTER 53 PROTECTION, ISOLATION, SWITCHING, CONTROL AND MONITORING

530 INTRODUCTION
531 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK BYAUTOMATIC
DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY
534 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION-AGAINST OVERVOLTAGE
535 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE
536 CO.ORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PROTECTION, ISOLATION,
SWITCHING AND CONTROL
537 ISOLATION AND SWTCHING
538 MONITORING DEVICES

CHAPTER 54 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS AND PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

541 GENERAL
542 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS
543 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
544 PROTEGTIVE BONDING CONDUCTORS

CHAPTER 55 OTHER EQUIPMENT

551 LOW VOLTAGE GENERATING SETS
552 ROTATING MACHINES
555 TRANSFORMERS
557 AUXILIARY CIRCUITS
559 LUMINAIRES AND LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

CHAPTER 56 SAFEry SERVICES

560.1 SCOPE
560.4 CLASSIFICATION
560.5 GENERAL
560.6 ELECTRICAL SOURCES FOR SAFETY SERVICES
560.7 CIRCUITS OF SAFEW SERVICES
560.8 WlRING SYSTEMS
560.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS
560.10 FIRE DETECTION AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
560.'t1 LIFE SAFETY AND FIREFIGHTING APPLICATIONS

r"'"\
i,, urennnv '"

125
 CHAPTER 51
GOMMON RULES
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 5,I COMMON RULES
510 INTRODUCTION
510.'l General
510.2 /Vot used
511 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
5'.l2 OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
5',12.1 Operational conditions
512.1.1 Voltage
512.1.2 Current
512.',t.3 Frequency
512.1.4 Power
5',t2.1.5 Compatibility
512.1.6 lmpulse withstand voltage
512.2 External influences
513 ACCESSIBILITY
514 IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES
514.',| General
514.3 ldentification of conductors
5',14.4 ldentiflcation of conductors by colour
514.4.1 Neutral or midpoint conductor
s',t4.4.2 Protective conductor
514.4.3 PEN conductor
514.4.4 Other conductors
514,4.6 Bare conductors
5'14.5 ldentification of conductors by letters and/or numbers
514.5.2 Protective conductor
514.5.3 Alphanumeric
514.5.4 Numeric
514.6 Omission of identification by colour or marking
514.7 Not used
s14.8 ldentification of a protective device
514,9 Diagrams and documentation
514.10 Warning notice: voltage
514.11 Warning notice: isolation
514.12 Notices: periodic inspection and testing
5',t4.13 Warning notices: earthing and bonding connections
514.14 Warning notice: non-standard colours
514.15 Warning notice: alternative supplies
514.16 Notice: high protective conductor current
515 PREVENTION OF MUTUAL DETRIMENTAL INFLUENCE
515.1 Prevention of mutual detrimental influence

't26
 CHAPTER 51
COMMON RULES
510 INTRODUCTION

s10.1 General
This chapter deals with the selection of equipment and its erection. lt provides common rules for compliance with
measures of protection for safety, requirements for proper functioning lor il]tel]ded use of the installation, and
requirements appropriate to the extenlal influences.

510.2 /Vot used

s10.3 Every item ofequipment shall be selected and erected so as to allow compliance with the regulations
stated in this chapter and the relevant regulations in other parts ofBS 7671 and shall take account ofmanufacturers'
instructions.

511 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS

511.1 Every itetr of equipment shall comply with the relevant requirements of the applicable Blitish or
Harmonized Standard, appropdate to the intended use of the equipment. The edition of the standard shall be the
current edition, with those amendments pertaining at a date to be agreed by the paflies to the contract concerued
(see Appendix 1).

Altematively, ifequipment complying with a foreign national standard based on an IEC Standard is to be used, the
designer or other person responsible lor specifying the installation shall verify that any differences between that
stardard and the coffesponding British or Harmonized Standard will not result in a lesser degree of safety than that
afforded by compliance with the British or Hamonized Standard. Such use shall be recorded on the appropriate I

electrical cerlilication specified in Parl 6. I

511.2 Where equipment to be used is not covered by a British or Harmonized Standard or is to be used I

outside the scope ofits standard, the designer or other person responsible for specifying the installation shall conlinr]
that the equipment provides at leasl thc samc dcgrcc of safcty as that affordcd by compliancc u,ith thc Rcgulations.
Such use shall be noted and appended to the appropriate documertation specifled in Pal1 6.

512 OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND EXTERNAL INFLUENCES

512.1 Operational conditions

512.1.',| Voltage
Every item ofequipment shall be suitable for the nominal voltage (Uo) ofthe installation or the part ofthe installation
concemed, where necessary taking account ofthe highest and/or lowest voltage likely to occur in nonnal service. In
an IT system, equipment shall be insulated for the nominal voltage between lines.

512.1.2 Current
Every ite[r ofequipment shall be suitable for:
(i) the design cun'ent, taking into account any capacitive and inductive effects, and
(ii) the current tikely to flow in abnormal conditions for such periods of time as are determined by the
characteristics olthe protective devices concemed.

512.1.3 Frequency
If frequencyhas an influence on the characteristics of the equipment, the rated frequency of the equipment shall
conespond to the nominal frequency ofthe supply to the circuit concerned.

512.1.4 Power
Every item of equipment selected on the basis of its power chamctedstics shall be suitable for the duty demanded
oI the equipment.

^-. 127
512.1.5 Compatibility
Every ite[r ofequipment shall be selected and erected so that it will neither cause harmful effects to other equipment
nol il1rpair the supply during normal service including switching operations.

Switchgear, protective devices, accessories and other types of equipment shall not be connected to conducton
intended to operate at a temperature exceeding 70 'C at the ecluipment in normal service unless the equipment
rnanufacturer has confinned that the equipment is suitable for such conditions, or the co[ductor size shall be chosen
based on the cu-rent ratings for 70 'C cables ofa similar construction. See also Regulation 523.1 and Table 4A3.

The designer ofthe fixed installatiol shall veri& that the installed fixed equipment, where releiant, is designed and
manufactur-ed in accordance with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and, upon request, the responsible person for the
fixed installation shall provide the required documentation as specified by EMC Directive 2014/30/EU.
NOTE 1 : lnfomatioll on tl'lc para eters to be considered is given in Scction 4,14. The level of detail of the documeotation
may vary from very sinrple information to much more detailed documentation for complex irstallations involvilg
irDportant poterltial EMC aspects.

NOTE 2: Thc responsible person ret'elred to in tbis regulation is as defined in the relcvant national legislation implementing
EMC Directive 2014/3o/EU. In the UK, this is the Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016. The responsible
person is the installer.

NOTE 3: Where installations are cornposed solely ofCE-mar*ed equiprnent placed on the market in confonnity with the EMC
Directive, the responsible person satisfies the documentation requirements by being able to provide, on request, the
instructions for installation, use and rnaintenance plovided by the supplier ofeach item of equipmeltt.
NOTE 4: Where the current rating is to be based on 70 "C, cu(elt-carrying capacities given in Tables 4D1 to 4D5 or 4H I to
4H4 ofAppendix 4 rnay be used for 90 'C themosettirg insulated cables.

512.1.6 lmpulse withstand voltage

Equipment shall be selected so that its impulse withstand voltage is at least equal to the required minimum impulse
withstand voltage according to the overvoltage category at the point ofinstallation as defined in Section 443.

5'12.2 External influences

512.2.1 Equipment shall be of a design appropriate to the situatior in which it is to be used or its mode of
installation shall take account ofthe conditions likely to be encountered.

512,2.2 If
the equipment does not, by its construction, have the characteristics relevant to the extemal
influerces of its location, it may neveftheless be used on condition that it is provided with appropriate additional
protection in the erection ofthe installation. Such protection shall not adversely affect the operation ofthe equipment
thus protected.

512.2.3 Where different external influences occur simultaneously, they may have independent or mutual
effects and the degree ofprotection shall be provided accordingly.

512.2.4 The selection of equipment according to extemal influences is necessary not only for proper
functioning, but also for the reliability of the measures of protection for safety complying with these Regulations
generally. Measures ofprotection afforded by the construction ofequipment are valid only for the given conditions
of extemal influence if the coruesponding equipment speciflcation tests are made in these conditions of extemal
influence.
NOTE: For the purposc of these Reglrlations, the following classes of extemal influence are conventionally regardcd as
nonnal:

AA Ambient ternperature AA4

AB Atmosphcric humidity AB4
Other environrnental conditions xX I of each pammeter
(AC to AS)
Ulili./arion and consrruclion , xx I ofeach pararneler. exccpl
olbuildrrg. (B and C) I \X2 for rhe pararneter BC

513 ACCESSIBILITY
513.1 Except for a joint in cables where Section 526 allo$,s such a joint to be inaccessible, evety item of
equiprrent shall be aflanged so as to facilitate its opemtio[, inspection and mai]rtenal.Ice and access to each connection.
Such t'acility shall not be signillcantly impaired by mounting equipment in an elclosure or a comparlment.
514 IDENTIFICATION AND NOTICES

514.',1 General
514.',t .1 Except where tltere is no possibility ofconfusion, a label or othcr suitable nrea[s ofidentiflcation s]rall
be provided to indicate the purpose ofeach item ofswitchgear and controlgear'. Where the operator camot obsenr'e
the operation of su,itchgear and contrclgear and where this might lead to danger. a suitable indicator complying,
where applicable, widr BS EN 60073 and BS EN 60447, shall be Iixed in a position visible to the operator.

514,1,2 So far as is reasonabiy practicable, u,iring shall be so aranged or marked that it can be identified for
inspectiol, testing, repair or alteration ofthe installatiol.

514.1.3 Except where there is no possibility of confusion, unambiguous marking shall be provided at the
interface between conductors identified in accordance with these Regulations and conductors idefltified to previous
versions olthe Regulations.
NOTE: Appendix 7 gives guidance on how this can be achieved.

514.2 Not used

514,3 ldentificationofconductors
5'14.3,1 Except where identification is not requircd by Regulation 514.6, cores ofcables shall be identified by:
(i) colour as required by Regulation 514.4 and/or
(ii) letters and/or numbers as required by Regulation 51,1.5.
514.3,2 Every core of a cable shall be identifiable at its terminations and preferably throughout its length.
Binding and sleeves for identification purposes shall comply with BS 3858 whele appropliate.

514.4 ldentification of conductors by colour

514.4.'l Neutral or midpoint conductor
Where a circuit jncludes a neutral or midpoint conductor identified by colour, the colour used shall be blue.

514.4.2 Protectiveconductor
The bi-colour combination green-and-yellow shall be used exclusively for identification ol a protective conductor
and this combination shall not be used for any other pur?ose. In this combination one of the colours shall cover at
least 30 % and at most 70 % ofthe surlace being coloured, while the other colour shall cover the remainder ofthe
surface.

Single-core cables identified by green-and-yellow throughouttheir length shall only be used as a protective conductor
and shall not be ovennar*ed at their teflninations, except as permitted by Regulation 514.4.3.

A bare couductor ol busbar used as a protective conductor shall be identified, where necessary, by equal green-and-
yellow stlipes, each not less than l5 mm a[d not more than 100 mlr wide, close together. either throughout the
length ofthe conductor or in each compafiment and unit and at each accessible position.

514.4.3 PEN conductor

A PEN conductor shall, when insulated, be marked by one olthe lollowing methods:
(i) Green-and-yellow throughout its length with, in addition, blue markings at the teminatiolls
(ii) Blue throughout its lergth, with green-and-yellow ma*ings at the teminatjons.

514.4.4 Otherconductors
Other conductors shail be identified by colour in accordance with Table 51.

514.4.5 The single colour green shall not be used for the identification ol I

(i) live conductols in power circuits I

(ii) protectiveconductors I

(iii) functional ealthing and bonding conductors.

fFRIO,\
9l t"*oo ?
129
 514.4.6 Bareconductors

A bare conductor shall be identified, where necessary, by the application oftape, sleeve or disc of the appropriate
colour prescribed in Table 5l or by painting with such a colour.

514.5 ldentification of conductors by letters and/or numbers

514.5.1 The lettering or numbe ng system applies to identification ofindividual conductors and ofconductors
in a group. The identification shall be clearly legible and durable. A11 characterc shall be in strong contrast to
the colour of the insulation. The identification shall be given in letters and/or Arabic numerals. In order to avoid
confusion. unattached numemls 6 and 9 shall be underlined.

5'14.5.2 Protectiveconductor
Conductors with green-and-yellow colour identification shall not be numbered other than for the purpose of circuit
identification.

514.5.3 Alphanumeric
The prefened alphanurne c system is described in Table 51.

514.5.4 Numeric
Conductors may be identified by numbers, the number 0 being reserued lor the neutml or midpoint conductor.

514.6 Omission of identification by colour or marking

514.6.1 Identiflcation by colour or marking is not required for:
(i) concentric conductors of cables
(ii) metal sheath or armour of cables when used as a protective conductor
(iii) bare conductors where pemanent identification is not practicable
(iv) extraneous-conductive-pafis used as a protective conductor
(v) exposed-conductive-pafis used as a protective conductor.

130
 TABLE 51 - ldentification of conductors
Function
Proteclive conductors Green-and-yellow
Functional earthing conductor Cream

AC power circuit(r)
Line of single-phase circuit L Brown
Neutral ofsingle- or three-phase circuit N Blue
Line 1 oftluee-phase AC circuit LI Brcwn
Line 2 oftltee-phase AC circuit L2 Black
Line 3 ofthree-phase AC circuit L3 Clcy

Two-wire unearthed DC porver circuit

Positive of two-wire circuit Brown
Negative of two-wire circuit Grey

Trvo-rvire earthed DC potver circuit

Positive (of negative eanhed) circuit Brown
Negative (of negative eafihed) circuitrr) Blue
Positive (of positive eathed) circuitrr' BLue

Negative (of positive earthed) circuit Grcy

-Ihree-wire
DC power circuit
Outer positive of two-wire ctcuit derived fron
three-wire system
Outer negative of two-wire circuit derived from Grey
three-wire system
Positive of three-wire circuit Brcwn
Mid-wire of three-wire circuitrr)1r) Blue
Negative of three-wire circuit Grey

Control circuits, ELV and other applications

Line conductor Brown, Black, Red, Orange,
Yellow, Violet, Grey, White,
Pink or Turquoise
Neutral or mid-wireo) Blue

NOTE: (r'Power circuits include lighting circuits.

'rr M identifies either the mid-wire ofa three-wire DC circuit. or the eafthed conductor ofa two-wire eafthed DC circuit.
1r)Only the rniddle wire ofthree-wire circuits may be earthed.
1r)An earlhed PELV conductor is blue.

131
514.7 Not used

514.8 ldentification of a protective device

514.8.1 A protective device shall be aranged and identified so that the circuit protected may be easily
recognized.

514.9 Diagrams and documentation

514.9.1 A legible diagram, chart or table or equivalent form of information shall be provided indicating in
particular:
(i) the type and composition ofeach circuit (points ofutilization served, number and size ofconducto$, type
olwiring), and
(ii) the method used for compliance with Regulation 410.3.2, and
(iii) the infomation necessary for the identification of each device performing the functions of protection,
isolation and switching, and its location, and
(iv) any circuit or equipment vulnerable to the elect cal tests as required by Pafi 6.

For simple installations the foregoing information may be given in a schedule. A durable copy of the schedule
relating to a distribution board shall be provided within or adjacent to each distribution board.

Any slmbol used shall comply with IEC 60617.

514.'10 Warning notice: voltage

514.10.1 Every item ofequipment or enclosure within which a nominal voltage exceeding 230 volts to eafih
exjsts and where the presence of such a voltage would not normally be expected, shall be so arranged that before
access is gained to a live part, a waming ofthe maximum voltage to earth present is clearly visible.

514.11 Warning notice: isolation

514-1'1.1 A notice of such durable material as to be likety to remain easily legible throughout the life ofthe
installation shall be fixed in each position where there are live parts which are not capable of being isolated by
a single device. The location of each disconnector (isolator) shall be indicated unless there is no possibility of
confusion.

514.12 Notices: periodic inspection and testing

514.12.1 A notjce of such durable materjal as to be likely to remain easily legible throughout the life olthe
installation shall be fixed in a prominent position at or near the origin ofevery installation upon completion ofthe
work canied out in accordance with Chapter 64 or 65. The notice shall be inscribed in indelible characters not
smaller than those illustrated here and shall read as follows:

IMPORTANT

This installation should be periodically inspected and tested and

a report on its condition obtained, as prescribed in the IET
Wiring Regulations BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical
Installations.

Date of last inspection

Recommended date of next inspection

514.12.2 Where an installation incorpomtes an RCD a notice shall be fixed in a prominent position at or near
each RCD in the installation. The notice shall be inscribed in indelible characters not smaller thal those illustrated
here and shall read as follows:

This installation, or part of it, is protected by a device which

automatically switches off the supply if an earth fault develops.
Test six-monthly by pressing the button marked 'Test'. The 'T'or
device should switch off the supply and should then be switched
on to restore the supply. If the device does not switch off the
supply when the button is pressed, seek expert advice.

NOTE: Testing frequencies ofRCDs i1l temporary installations may need increasrng.

514.13 Warning notices: earthing and bonding connections

5'14.13.1 A durable label to BS 951 with the words 'Safety Elechical Connection - Do Not Remove' shall be
pemanently fixed in a visible position at or near:
(i) the point ofconnection of every earthing conductor to an eaflh electrode, and
(ii) the point of connection of every bonding conductor to an exhaneous-conductive-part, and
(iii) the main earthing terminal, where separate from main switchgear
514.13.2 Where Regulation 418.2.5 or 418.3 applies, the waming notice specilied shall be durably rrarked in
legible type not smaller than that illustmted here and shall read as follows:

The protective bonding conductors associated with the electrical

installation in this location MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO
EARTH.

Equipment having exposed-conductive-parts connected to earth

must not be brought into this location.

514,14 Warning notice: non-standard colours

5'14.14.'l Ifwiring additions or alterations are made to an installation such that some ofthe widng complies
with Regulation 514.4 but there is also wiring to a previous version ofthese Regulatioos, a waming notice shall be
af6xed at or near the appropriate distribution board with the following wording;

CAUTION
This installation has wiring colours to two versions of BS 7671.
Great care should be taken before undertaking extension,
alteration or repair that all conductors are correctly identified.

133
 514.15 Warning notice: alternative supplies
5'14.15'1 Where an installation includes altemative or additional sources of supply, waming notices shall be
aJnxed at the lollowing locations in the installation:
(i) At the origin ofthe installation
(ii) At the meterposition, ifremote from the origin
(iii) At the consumer unit or distribution board to which the altemative or additional sources are connected
(iv) At all points ofisolation ofall sources ofsupply.
The waming notice shall be durably marked in legible type not smaller than that illustrated here and shall read as
follows:

WARNING - MULTIPLE SUPPLIES

Isolate all electrical supplies before carrying out work.

Isolate the mains supply at

Isolate the alternative supplies at

514.16 Notice: high protective conductor current

See Regulation 543.7. 1.205.

515 PREVENTION OF MUTUAL DETRIMENTAL INFLUENCE

515.1 Prevention of mutual detrimental influence

Electrical equipment shall be selected and erected so as to avoid any hamful influence between the electrical
installation and any non-electrical installations envisaged.
NOTE: For EMC see Sections 332 and 444.

s',t5.2 Where equipment carying cuffent of different types or at different voltages is grouped in a common
assembly (such as a switchboard, a cubicle or a control desk or box), all the equipment belonging to any one type of
curent or any one voltage shall be effectively segregated wherever necessary to avoid mutual detdmental influence.

The immunity levels of equipment shall be chosen taking into account the electromagnetic disturbances that can
occur when connected and erected as for normal use, and taking into account the intended level of continuity of
service necessary for the application. See the specilic equipment standard or the relevant pafi ofBS EN 61000 series.

134
 CHAPTER 52
SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
520 INTRODUCTION
520.1 Scope
520.4 General
521 TYPES OF WRING SYSTEM
521.4 Busbar trunking systems and powertrack systems
521.5 AC circuits: electromagnetic effects
521 .5.1 Ferromagnetic enclosures: electromagnetic effects
521.5.201 Electromechanical stresses
521.6 Conduit, ducting, trunking, tray and ladder systems
521.7 Multicore cables: two or more circuits
521 .8 Circuit arrangements
521 .9 Use of flexible cables
521.10 lnstallation of cables
522 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS IN RELATION TO EXTERNAL
INFLUENCES
522.1 Ambient temperature (AA)
522.2 External heat sources
Presence of water (AD) or high humidity (AB)
522.4 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)
522.5 Presence of corrosive or polluting substances (AF)
522.6 lmpact (AG)
522.7 Vibration (AH)
522.8 Other mechanical stresses (AJ)
522.9 Presence of flora and/or mould growth (AK)
522.10 Presence of fauna (AL)
522.11 Solar radiation (AN) and ultraviolet radiation
522.12 Seismic effects (AP)
522.13 Movement of air (AR)
522.14 Nature of processed or stored materials (BE)
522.15 Building design (CB)
523 CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITIES OF CABLES
523.5 Groups containing more than one circuit
523.6 Number of loaded conductors
Conductors in parallel
523.8 Variation of installation conditions along a route
Era o Cables in thermal insulation
523.201 Armoured single-core cables
524 CROSS-SECTIONAL AREAS OF CONDUCTORS
524.2 Neutral conductors
525 VOLTAGE DROP IN CONSUMERS' INSTALLATIONS
526 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
526.9 Connection of multiwire, fine wire and very fine wire conductors
527 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WRING SYSTEMS TO MINIMIZE THE SPREAD OF FIRE
527.1 Precautions within a fi re-segregated compartment
527 .2 Sealing of wiring system penetrations
528 PROXIMITY OF WIRING SYSTEMS TO OTHER SERVICES
528.1 Proximity to electrical services
528.2 Proximity of communications cables
Proximity to non-electrical services
529 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS IN RELATION TO
MAINTAINABILITY INCLUDING CLEANING.

135
 CHAPTER 52
SELEGTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
520 INTRODUCTION

520.1 Scope
This chapter deals with the selection ard erection of wiring systems.
NOTE: These regulations also apply in geleral to protective conductors. Chapter 54 contains further rcquirements for those
conductols.

520.2 Not used

520.3 Not used

520.4 General
Considemtion shall be givel to the application ofthe funda[rental principles ofChapter 13 as it applies to:
(i) cables and conductors
(ii) their connections. teminations and/or jointing
(iii) their associated supports or suspensions, and
(iv) their enclosule or methods of protection against extemal influences.

521 TYPES OF WIRING SYSTEM

The requirelnents of Regulations 521.1 to 521.201 do not apply to busbar and powertrack systems covered by
Regulation 521.4.

521.1 Tl're rnstallation rncthocl ofa u,iring system in relation to the type ofconductor or cablc uscd shall be
in accorclancc with'Iable 4A1 ofAppendix,l, provided the extemal influcnccs arc taken into accoult accordit'tg to
Section 522.

521.2 Thc ir'rstallation rnetlrod ofa wiring systcm in relation to the situation concemed shail be in accordance
with Table 4A2 ofAppcndix 4. Othel methods of installation ofcables and conductols no1 included in Table 4A2 are
pen]]itted provided that they fullil the requirements of this chapter.

521.3 Exanrplcs of wiring systems. excluding systcms coveled by Regulation 521.4. are shown in
Table 4A2. Table 4A2 gives examples of installation methods of cables including reference method for obtaining
curent-canJing capacity rvhere it is considered that the same cuffenlcarryi[g capacities can safely be used. It is
not implied that such methods must be ernployed or that other methods are prohibited.

521.201 Prefabricatcd wiling systems intended lor permanent connection in fixed installations incorporating
installation couplers corforming to BS EN 61535, shall comply with BS 8488.

521.4 Busbar trunking systems and powedrack systems

A busbar truntilg systeln shall comply with BS EN 61439-6 and a powefirack system shall comply with the
approp ate part ofthe BS EN 61534 series. A busbar trunking system or a powefir'ack system shall be installed in
accordancc wilh the manufacturcr's instructions, taking accoult ofextemal influences. See also Appendix 8.

52'1.5 AC circuits: electromagnetic effects

521.5.'l Ferromagneticenclosures: electromagneticeffects

The conductols ofan AC circuit installed in a feron.ngnetic enclosure shall be aranged so that all line conductors
and the neutral conductor, ifany. and the appropdate protective conductor are contajled within the same enclosure.

Whcre such couductors eflter a ferrous cnclosure, they shall be affanged such that the conducton are only collectively
sunouuded by f'cno[']agnetic Inaterial.

These requirements do not preclude the use of an additional protective conductor in parallel with the steel wire
amouting of a cable wlrerc such is required to comply with the requirements of the appropriate regulations in
Chapters 4l and 54. It is pemitted for such an additional protective corductor to enter the ferrous enclosure
individually.

136
 521.5'2 Singie-core cables armoured with steel wire or steel tape shall nor be gsed lor an AC circuit.
NOTE: The steel wire or sleel tape atmour of a single-core cable is legarded as a iifomasneric enclosure. For single-core
armoured cables. the use ofalulrinium armour may be considered.

52'1.5.201 Electromechanical stresses

Every conductor or cable shall have adequate strength and be so installed as to Nitl'tstand the electromechanical
lorces that may be caused by any current, including fault current, it nlay ha\ e to carry in service.

52',t.6 Conduit, ducting, trunking, tray and ladder systems

Two or more circuits are ailowed in the same conduit, ducting or trunking system provided the requirements of
Section 528 are met.

Cable conduits shall comply with the appropriate pafi of the BS EN 61386 series, cable trunking or ducting shall
comply with the appropriate part of the BS EN 50085 series and cabJe tray and ladder systems shall co1nply with
BS EN 6I537.

521.7 Multicore cables: two or more circuits

Two or more circuits are allowed in the same cable provicled the requirements of Section 528 are met.

521.8 Circuitarrangements
521'8.'l Each part of a circuit shall be arrarged such that the conducton are not distributed over dillerent
multicore cables, conduits, ducting systems, hxnking systems or tray or ladder systems.

This requirement need not be met where a number of multicore cables, loming onc circuit, are installed in parallel.
Where multicore cables are installed in parallel each cable shall contain one conductor ofeach line.

52'l '8.2 The line and neutral conductors of each final circuit shall be elect cally separate fi om those of every
other final circuit, so as to prevent the i[direcl energizing ofa final circuit intelded to be isolated.

521.8.3 whe,e rrv. or more circuits arc ter inated in a singlc.iunctirin box this shall comply with
BS EN 60670-22.

52',t.9 Use of flexible cables

521.9.',1 A flexible cable shall be used lor fixed rviring only whcrc the relevant provisions ofthe Regulations
are met Flexible cables used for lixed wiring shall be of the heavy duty type unless the risk of darnagc during
installation and service, due to impact or other mechanical stresses, is low or has been minimized or pr-otecrion
against mechanical damage is provided.
NOTE: Descriptions oflight, ordinary and heavy dury t)?es are given in BS EN 50565-1.

521 .9.2 Equipment that is irtended to be moved in use shall be comected by flexiblc cables! except equipmenr
supplied by contact rails.

521.9.3 Stationary equipment which is movecl temporarily for the purposes of connecting. cleaning etc.,
e.g. cookers or flush-mounting units for installations in false floors, shall be connected with flexiblc cable. If the
equipment is not subject to vibration then non-flexible cables may be used.

521.10 lnstallation of cables

52'1.10.1 Non-sheathed cables for fixed wiring shall be enclosed in conduit, ducting or trunking. This
requirernent does not apply to a protective conductor complying with Section 543.

\on-sheathed cables are pelmitted if the cable trunking system provides at lcast the dcgree olprotectjon TPXXD or
IP,lX. and ifthe cover can only be removed by means ofa tool or a deliberate action.
NOTE: For a cable trunking system to meet IP.lX requirements. IP,IX ttunking and relatecl system components would need to
be inslalled. lfa systetn includes sile-fabricated j oints the installer must confirln thc conlpietcd itenr rnccts at least thc
degree of protection IPXXD.

521/10.201 A bare live conductor shall be installed or insulators.

137
 521.10.202 Widng systems shall be supported such that they will not be liable to premature collapse in the event
ofa fire.
NOTE 1: Wiring systems lranging across access or egress routes may hinder evacuation and firefighting activitics.
NOTE 2: Cables installed in or on steel cable containment systems are deemed to meet the rcquirements ofthis rcgulation.
NOTE 3: This regulation precludes, lor example, the use of non metallic cable clips or cable ties as the sole means of support
where cables are clipped direct to exposed surfaces or suspended under cable tra1,, and the use ofnon-metallic cable
trunking as the sole means of support ofthe cables therein.
NOTE 4: Suitably spaced steel or copper clips, saddles or ties are examples that will meet the requirements ofthis regulation.

522 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS IN RELATION TO EXTERNAL

INFLUENCES

The installation method selected shall be such that protection against the expected extemal influences is provided
in all appropriate parts ofthe widng systern. Particular care shall be taken at changes ir direction and where wiring
enters into equipmenl.
NOTE: The extemal influences categorized in Appendix 5 which are of signiflcance to wiring systems are included in this
section.

522.1 Ambient temperature (AA)

522.1.1 A wiring system shali be selected and erected so as to be suitable for the highest ard lowest local
ambient temperatures and so that the limiting temperature in normal opemtion (see Table 52.1) and the limiting
temperature in case of a fault (see Table 43. i ) will not be exceeded.

522.'1.2 Wirilg system components, including cables and wiring accessories, shall only be installed or
handled at tempemtures within the limits stated in the relevant product specification or as given by the manufactlrrer.

522.2 External heat sources

522.2.'l In order to avoid the effects ofheat from external sources, one or more of the following methods or
an equally effective method shall be used to protect a wiring system:
(i) Shielding
(ii) Placing sufliciently far from the source of heat
(iii) Selecting a system with due regard for the additional temperature se which may occur
(iv) Local reinforcement or substitution of insulating material.
NOTE: Heat from extemal sources may be radiated, conducted or convected, e.g.:
- fiom hot water systems
- from piant, appliances and luminaires
- from a manufacturing process
- through heat condrcting mate als
- ftom solar gain ofthe wiring system or its surrounding medium.

522.2.201 Parts of a cable within an accessory appliance or luminaire shall be suitable for the temperatures
Iikely to be encountered, as determined in accordance with Regulation 522.1.1, or sha11 be provided with additional
insulation suitable for those temperatures.

522.3 Presence of water (AD) or high humidity (AB)

522.3.1 A wir ing system shall be selected and erected so that no damage is caused by condensation or ingress
ofwater during installation, use and maintenance. The completed wiring system shall comply with the IP degree of
protection (see BS EN 60529) relevant to the pafticular location.
NOTE: Special considerations apply to wiring systems iiable to frequent splashilg. inlnersion or submersion.

522.3.2 Where water may collect or condensation may form in a wiring system, provision shall be made for
its escape,

522.3.3 Where a wiring system may be subjected to waves (AD6), protection against mechanical damage
shatl be afforded by one or more ofthe methods ofRegulations 522.6 to 8.

138
522.4 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)
522.4.1 Awiring system shall be selected and erected so as to minimize the danger adsing from the ingress of
solid foreign bodies. The completed wiring system shall comply with the IP degree olprorection (see BS EN 60529)
relevant to the particular location.

522,4,2 In a location where dust in significant quantib/ is present (AE4), additional precautions shall be taken
to prevent the accumulation of dust or other substances in quantities which could adr,ersely affect heat dissipation
from the wiring system.
NOTE: Awiring system which facilitates the removal ofdust may be necessary (see Secrion 529).

522.5 Presence of corrosive or polluting substances (AF)

522.5.1 Where the presence of corosive or polluting substances, including watel is likely to give se to
colrosion or detedoration, parts ofthe wiring system likely to be affected shall be suitably protected or manufactued
from a material resistant to such substances.
NOTE: Suitable protection for application during erection may include protective tapes, paints or grease.

522.5.2 Dissimilar metals liable to initiate electrol)'tic action shall not be placed in cortact with each other,
unless special arrangements axe made to avoid the consequences ofsuch contact.

522.5.3 Materials liable to cause mutual or individual detedoration or hazardous degradation shall rot be
placed in contact with each other.

522.6 lmpact (AG)

522.6.1 Wiring systems shall be selected and erected so as to minimize the damage arising fiom mechanical
stress, e.g. by impact, abrasion, penetration, tension or compression during installation, use or maintenance.

522.6.2 In a fixed installation where impacts of medium severity (AG2) or high severity (AG3) can occur
protection shall be afforded by:
(i) the mechanical characteristics ofthe wiring system, or
(ii) the location selected, or
(iii) the provision of additional local or general protection against mechanical damage, or
(iv) any combination ofthe above.
NOTE: Examples are areas where the floor is likely to be penetrated and areas used by forklifi trucks.

522.6,3 Not used

522,6,4 The degree ofprotection of electrical equipment shall be maintained after installation ofthe cables
and conducto$.

522.6.201 A cable installed under a floor or above a ceiling shall be run in such a position thar it is not liable to
be damaged by contact with the floor or ceiling or their fixings.

A cable passing through a joist within a floor or ceiling construction or through a ceiling suppoft (e.g. under
floorboards), shall:
(i) be installed at least 50 mm measured vertically from the top, or bottom as appropriate, ofthejoist or batten,
OI
(ii) comply with Regslatior, 522.6.204.

522,6,202 A cable installed in a wall or partition at a depth of less than 50 mm from a surface of the wall or
paltition shall:
(i) be installed in a zone
within 150 mm from the top of the wall orpartition or within 150 mm ofan angle formed
by two adjoining walls or partitions. Where the cable is comected to a point, accessory or switchgear on any
surface of the wall or pafiition, the cable may be installed in a zone either ho zontally or vefiically, to the
point, accessory or switchgear Where the location ofthe accessory point or switchgear can be detennined
from the reverse side, a zone formed on one side of a wall of 100 mm thickness or less or pa ition of
100 mm thickness ol less extends to the reverse side, or
(ii) comply with Re glJarion 522.6.204.

Where indent (i) but not indent (ii) applies, the cable shall be provided with additional protection by means of an
RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1.

139
 522.6.203 Inespective of its buried depth, a cable concealed in a wall or partition, the intemal construction of
which includes metallic parts, other than metallic fixings such as nails, screws and the like, shall:
(i) be provided with additional protection by means ofan RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation
415. l. 1, or
(ii) comply with Regulatior 522.6.204.

For a cable installed at a depth of less than 50 mm from the surface of a wall or partition the requirements of
Regulation 522.6.202(i) shall also apply.

522.6.204 For the purposes ofRegulation 522.6.201(ii), Regulation 522.6.202(ii) and Regulation 522.6.203(ii),
a cable shall:
(i) incorporate an eafihed metallic covering which complies with the requiremerts of these Regulations for
a protective conductor of the circuit concemed, the cable complying with BS 5467, BS 6724, BS 7846,
BS 8436 or BS EN 60702-1, or
(ii) be installed in eathed conduit complying with BS EN 61386-21 and satisfliing the requirements ofthese
Regulations for a protective conductor, or
(iii) be enclosed in eafihed hunking or ducting complyingwith BS EN 50085-2-l and satisfying the requirements
ofthese Regulations for a protective conductor, or
(iv) be provided with n.rechanical protection against damage sufncient to prevent penetration of the cable by
nails, screws and the like, or
(v) form part ol a SELV or PELV circuit meeting the requirements of Regulation 414.4.

522.7 Vibration (AH)

522.7.'l A widng system supported by or fixed to a structure or equipment subject to vibration of medium
severity (AH2) or high seve ty (AH3) shall be suitable for such conditions, pafticularly where cables and cable
connections are concemed.

522.7.2 For the fixed installation ofsuspended cuffent-using equipment, e.g. luminaires, connection shall be
made by cable with flexible cores. Where no vibration or movement can be expected, cable with non-flexible cores
may be used.

522.8 Other mechanical stresses (AJ)

522.8.1 A wiring system shall be selected and erected to avoid during installation, use or maintenance,
damage to the sheath or insulation of cables and their teminations. The use of any lubricants that can have a
det mental effect on the cable or wiring system are not permitted.
522.8-2 Wlere buried in the structure, a conduit system or cable ducting system, other than a pre-wired
conduit assembly speciflcally designed for the installation, shall be completely erected between access points before
any cable is drawn in.

522.8.3 The radius of every bend in a wiring system shall be such that conductors or cables do not suffer
damage and terminations are not stressed.

522.8.4 Where conducto$ or cables are not supported continuously due to the method of installation, they
shall be suppoted by suitable means at approp ate intervals h such a manner that the conductors or cables do not
suffer damage by their own weight.

522.8.5 Every cable or conductor shall be supported in such a way that it is not exposed to undue mechanical
strain and so that there is no appreciable mechanical stain on the teminations of the conductors, account being
taken ofmechanical strain imposed by the supported weight ofthe cable or conductor itself.
NOTE: Consumer unit meter tails are included in the requirements ofthis regulation.

522,8.6 A widng system intended for the drawing in or out ofconductors or cables shall have adequate means
ofaccess to allow this opemtion.

522.8.7 A wiring system buried in a floor shall be sufnciently protected to prevent damage caused by the
intended use ofthe floor.

522.8.8 Not used

522.8.9 Nor used

140
522.8.'10 Except where installed in a conduit or duct which provides equi\ alenr protection against mechanical
damage, a cable buried in the ground shall incorporate an earthed amour or metal sheath or both, suitable for use
as a protective conductor The location ofburied cables shall be marked by cable cor ers or a suitable marker tape.
Buried conduits and ducts shall be suitably identified. Buried cables, conduits and ducts shall be at a sufficient depth
to avoid being damaged by any reasonably foreseeable disturbance ofthe ground.
NOTE: BS EN 61386-24 is the standard for underground conduits.

522.8.11 Cable supports and enclosures shall not have sharp edges liable to damage the wiring system.

522.8.12 A cable or conductors shall not be damaged by the means offixing.

522.8.13 Cables, busbars and other electrical conductors which pass across expansion joints shall be so
selected or erected that anticipated movement does not cause damage to the electrical equipment.

522.8.14 No wiring system shall penetrate an element ofbuilding construction which is intended to be load
bearing unless the integrity ofthe load-bearing element can be assured after such penetration.

522.9 Presence of ,lora and/or mould growth (AK)

522,9.1 Where the conditions experienced or expected constitute a hazard (AK2), the wi ngsystem shallbe
selected accordingly or special protective measures shall be adopted.
NOTE 1: An installation method which facilitates the removal ofsuch growths may be necessary (see Section 529).
NOTE 2: Possible preventive measures are closed types ofinstallation (conduit or channel), maintaining distances to plants alrd
regular cleaning ofthe relevant wiring system.

522.10 Presence of fauna (AL)

522.10.1 Where conditions experienced or expected constitute a hazard (AL2). the wiring system shall be
selected accordingly or special protective measures shall be adopted, for example, by:
(i) the mechanical characte stics ofthe wiring system, or
(ii) the location selected, or
(iii) the provision of additional local or general protection against mechanical damage, or
(iv) any combination ofthe above.

522.11 Solar radiation (AN) and ultraviolet radiation

522.11.1 Where significant solar radiation (AN2) or ultraviolet radiation is experienced or expected, a wiring
system suitable for the conditions shall be selected and erected or adequate shielding shall be provided. Special
precautions may need to be taken for equipment subject to ionising radiation.
NOTE: See also Regulation 522.2.1 dealing with temperature rise.

522.12 Seismic effects (AP)

522,12.'l The wiring system shall be selected and erected with due regard to the seismic hazards ofthe location
ofthe installation.
522.122 Where the seismic hazards experienced are low seve ty (AP2) or higher, particular attention shall be
paid to the following:
(i) The fixing of wiring systems to the building structure
(ii) The connectiofls between the fixed winng and all items olessential equipment, e.g. safety services, shall be
selected for their flexible quatity.

522.13 Movement of air (AR)

522.',13.1 See Regulation 522.7, Mbration (AH), and Regulation 522.8, Other mechanical stresses (AJ).

522.14 Nature of processed or stored materials (BE)

522.14,1 See Section 527, Selection and erection of wiring systems to minimize the spread of fire and
Section 422, Precautions where particular risks offire exist.

522.15 Building design (CB)

522.15/l Where risks due to structural rlovement exist (CB3), the cabte support and protection systern
employed shall be capable of pennitting relati\,e movement so that conductors and cables are not subjected to
excessive mechanical stress.
 522.15.2 For a flexible structure or a structure intended to move (CB4), a flexible wiring system shall be used.

523 CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITIES OF CABLES

523.1 The cufient, including any hannonic current, to be carried by any conductor for sustained periods
during nomal operation shall be such that the appropriate temperature limit specified in Table 52.1 is not exceeded.
The value of cunent shall be selected in accordance with Regulation 523.2, or determined in accordance with
Regulation 523.3.

TABLE 52.1 - Maximum operating temperatures for types of cable insulation

Type ofinsulation limit'

Theflroplastic 70 oC at the conductor
Thel.1nosetting 90 'C at the conductorb
Mireral (The.moplastic covered or bare to touch) 70 "C at the sheath
Mineral (barc not exposed to touch and not in contact with combustjble 105 "C at the sheathb '
matcrial)
" Themaxirnurn pennissiblc coflductor temperatures given in Table 52.1 on which the tabulated current-carrying capacihes
given in Appendix 4 are based, have been taken from IEC 60502-1 and BS EN 60702-l and are shown on these tables in
Appendix 4.
6
Where a conductor operates at a temperature exceeding 70 'C it shall be ascetained that the equipment connected to the
conductor is srLitable for the .esultilg temperature at the connection.
' For ll1ireral insulated cables, higher operating temperatules may be permissible dependent upon the temperature rating of
the cable, its terminations, the environmental conditions and other extemal influences.

NOTE: For the telnperatrue linits for othe| types ofinsulation, refer to cable speciflcation or manufacturer

523.2 The requirement ol Regulatio[ 523. 1 is considered to be satisfied if tl']e curent fbr non-sheathcd and
sheathed cables does not exceed the appropriate values seleated from the tables of curent-canJing capacity given
in Appendix 4 with reference to Table 4A2, subject to any necessary mting factors.
NOTE: The curent-carying capacities given in the tables are provided for guidance. It is recognizcd that there will be some
tolerance in the current-calrying capacities depending on the environmental conditions and the precise construction of
the cables.

523.3 The applopliate value of curent-carrying capacity may also be detennined as described in BS 7769
series (some parts of the BS 7769 seies are now numbered BS IEC 60287 series, eventually all pats will be
renurbered). or by test. or by calculation usirg a recognized method, plovided that the method is stated. Where
appropriate. accolLnt shall be taken olthe characteristics ofthe load and, for buried cables, the eflective thermal
rcsistance ofthe soil.

523.4 The ambient temperature shall be considered to be the temperature ofthe surrounding medium when
the non-sheathed or sheathed cable(s) under consideration are not loaded.

523.5 Groups containing more than one circuit

The group rating factors, see Tables 4Cl to 4C6 ofAppendix 4, are applicable to groups ofnon-sheathed or sheathed
cables har ing the same ma"\imum operating temperarure.

For groups containing non-sheathed or sheathed cables having differ ent maximum operating temperatures, the
curent-canling capacity of all the non-sheathed or sheathed cables in the grcup shall be based on the lowest
maximum operating telrperature ofany cable in the group together with the appropdate group rating factol'.

Il,due to krown operating conditions, a non-sheathed or sheathed cable is expected to cary a current not greater
than 30 % of its grouped curent-caffyirg capacity, it may be ignored for the purpose of obtainirg the rating factor
for the rest ofthe group.

523.6 Number of loaded conductors

523.6.1 The number of conductors to be considered in a circuit are those carrying load cur:rent. Where
conducto$ in polyphase circuits carry balanced cuffents, the associated neutral conductor need not be taken into
consideratiou. Under these conditions a four-core cable is given the same cufient-carrying capacity as a three-
core cable having the same conductor cross-sectional area for each line conductor The neutral conductot shall
be considered as a loaded conductor in the case ofthe presence of third harmonic curent or multiples of the third
harmonic presenting a total hamonic distoftion greater than 15 % ofthe fundamental line curfent.

142

I
 523.6.2 Where the neutral conductor in a multicore cable carries curreni Li a result of an imbalance in the
line cunents, the temperature se due to the neutml current is offset bl ihe reduciion in rhe heat generated by one or
more ofthe line conductors. In this case the conductor size shall be chosen on the basis olthe highest line current.

In all cases the neutral conductor shall have a cross-sectional area adequate to afford compliance with Regulation
523.t.

523.6.3 Where the neutal conductor carries curent without a corresponding reduction in load of the line
conductors, the neutual conductor shall be taken into account in ascertaining the cunent-canying capacity of the
circuit. Such currents may be caused by a significant harmonic curent iII three-phase circuits. If the total harmonic
distortion due to third harmonic current or multiples olthe third harmonic is greater than 15 % ofthe flindamental
line crurent the neutral conductor shall not be smaller than the line conductors. Thermal effects due to the presence
ofthird harmonic or multiples ofthird harmonic curents and the corresponding rating factors for higher harmonic
cunents are given in Appendix 4, section 5.5.

523.6.4 Conductors which serve the purpose of protective conductors only are not to be taken into
consideration. PEN conductors shall be taken into consideration in the same way as neutral conductors.

523.6.201 The tabulated current-carrying capacities in Appendix 4 are based on the fundamertal frequency
only and do not take account ofthe effect ofharmonics.

523.7 Conductors in parallel

Where two or more live conductors or PEN conductors are connected in parallel in a system, either:
(i) measures shall be taken to achieve equal load current sharing between them

This requirement is considered to be fulIilled if the conductors are of the same material, have the same cross-
sectional area, are approximately the same length and have no branch circuits along their length, and either:
(a) the conductors in parallel are multicore cables or twisted single-core cables or non-sheathed cables, ot
(b) the conducton in parallel are non-twisted single-core cables or non-sheathed cables in trefoil or flat
formation and where the cross-sectional area is greater than 50 mmz in copper or 70 mnf in alun.rinium,
the special configuration necessary for such formations is adopted. These conigumtions consist ol
suitable groupings and spacings ofthe different lines or poles
or
(ii) special consideration shall be given to the load curent sha ng to meet the requirements of Regulation 523.1.

This regulation does not preclude the use of ring final circuits with or without spur connections.

Where adequate current sharing is not possible or where four or more conductors have to be connected in parallel
consideration shall be given to the use ofbusbar trunking.

523,8 Variation of installation conditions along a route

Where the heat dissipation differs from one part ofa route to another, the current-carrying capacity ofcables at each
pafi ofthe route shall be appropriate for that part ofthe route.

523.9 Cables in thermal insulation

!
A cable should preferably not be installed in a location where it is liable to be covered by themal insulation. Where
a cable is to be run in a space to which thermal insulation is likely to be applied it shall, wherever practicable, be
fixed in a position such that it will not be covered by the themal insulation. Where fixing in such a position is
impracticable the cross-sectional area ofthe cable shall be selected to meet the requirements ofChapter 43. Where
necessary, the nature ofthe load (e.g. cyclic) and diversity may be taken into account.

For a cable installed in a themally insulated wall or above a themally insulated ceiling. the cable being in contact
with a thermally conductive surface on one side, curent-carrying capacities are tabulated in Appendix 4.

For a single cable likely to be totally surounded by themally insulating mate al o\'er a length of 0.5 11 or more,
the current-carrying capacity shall be taken, in the absence of more precise infonration. as 0.5 times the cun'e[t-
canying capacity for that cable clipped direct to a surface and open (Reference Method C).

Where a cable is to be totally surounded by thermal insulation for less than 0.5 n] the currenGcanl,ing capacity of
the cable shall be reduced appropriately depending on the size of cable, length in insulation and thetmal propenies
of the insulation. The derating factors in Table 52.2 are appropriate to conductor size: up to 10 mmr in thermal
insulation having a theflnal conductivity ().) greater than 0.04 Wm 1K '.

143
 TABLE 52.2 - Cable surrounded by thermal insulation

Length in insulation (mm)

523.201 Armoured single-core cables

The metallic sheaths and/or non-magnetic aunour of single-core cables in the same circuit shall normally be
bonded together at both ends oftheir run (solid bonding). Alteruatively, the sheaths or amrour of such cables haviLrg
colductors of cross-sectional area exceeding 50 mmr and a non-conductilg outer sheath may be bonded together at
one poirt in thcir run (single point bonding) with suitable insulation at the unbonded ends. in which case the length
ofthe cables from the bonding point shall be limited so that voltages from sheaths and/or amour to Eafih:
(i) do not cause corosion when the cables are canying theil full load curent, for example by limiting the
voltage to 25 V, atd
(ii) do not cause danger or damage to property when the cables are carrying shofi-circuit cuffent.

524 CROSS.SECTIONAL AREAS OF CONDUCTORS

524.1 The cross-sectional area ofeach conductor in a circuit shall be not less than the values given in Table
52.3, except as prcvided for extralow voltage lighting installations according to Regulation 715.524.201

524.2 Neutral conductors

524.2.1 The neutral conductor, ifany, shall have a cross-sectional area not less than that ofthe line conductor:
(i) in single-phase, two-wire circuits, whatever the crcss-sectional area
(ii) in polyphase and single-phase three-wire circuits, where the size ofthe line conductots is less than or equal
to 16 mmr for copper, or 25 mm'? for aluminiun
(iii) in circuits where it is required according to Regulation 523.6.3.
524.2.2 the total hannonic cortent due to tripler hamonics is greater thau 33 % of the fundamental line
lf
cuffent. an increase in the cross-sectional area ofthe neutral conductor may be required (see Regulation 523.6.3 and
Appendix 4, section 5.5).

524,2.3 For a polyphase circuit where each line conductor has a cross-sectional arca greatel than l6 mmr for
copper or 25 mmr for aluminium, the ueutral conductor is permitted to have a smaller cross-sectional area than that
ofthe line corductors provided that the followilg conditions are simultaneously fullllled:
(i) The expected maximum current including harmonics, if any, in the neutml conductor duting normal service
is not greater than the current-canying capacity olthe reduced cross-sectional area ofthe neutral conductor,
and
NOTE: The load carried by the circLLit under normal service conditions should be practicaily equally
distributed between the lines.

(i1) the 11eutra] colductor is protected against overcurlents according to Regulation '131.2, and
(ii0 the size ofthe neutral conductor is at least equal to 16 mmr fol copper or 25 mmr for aluminium, account
being taken ofRegulation 523.6.3.

TABLE 52.3 - Minimum cross-sectional area of conductors

Conductor
T]'pe of iviring system Use of the circuit
Nlaterial Cross-sectional area mm'?

Non sheathed and sheathed Lightillg circuits Copper 1.0 (sce Note ,1) I

cables
Aluminiurn l6 (see Note 3) I

Pou,er cir-cuits Coppcr I.5

Aluminium l6 (see Note 3) I

Si nallins and control circuits Copper 0.5 (see Note 1)

 Conductor
Type of \r'iring system Use ofthe circuit
llaterial Cross-sectional area mm'?

Bare conductors Power circuits Coppel l0

Aiuminium l6 (see Note 3)

Signalling and control cilcuits Copper 1

Non-sheathed and sheathed For a specific appliarce Copper As specified in the product standard
flexible cables For any other application 0.75"

Extra-low voltage circuits for 0.75

special applications
(see Note 2)

NOTE l: ln infonnation technology, signalling and control circuits intended for electronic equipment a minimum cross-
sectional area ofo.l mmr is permitted
NOTE 2: For special requiremerts for ELV liShting see Section 715.
NOTE 3: Connectors used to tenninate aluminium conductoN shall be tested a[d approved for this specific use.
NOTE 4l For lighting circuits and associated small items ofcurrent-using equipmert, slrch as a bathroom extmctor fan
seven or inore cores. Note I

525 VOLTAGE DROP IN CONSUMERS' INSTALLATIONS

525.1 In the absence ofany other consideration, under normal service conditions the voltage at the terminals
of any fined curent-using equipment shall be greater than the lower limit corresponding to the product standard
rclevant to the equipment.

525.20,1 Where fixed curent-using equipment is not the subject ol a product standard the Yoltage at the
terminals shall be such as not to impair the safe functioning ofthat equipment.

525.202 The above requirements are deemed to be satisfied if the voltage drop between the origin of the
installation (usually the supply terminals) and a socketoutlet or the te[minals offixed curent-using equipment does
not exceed that stated in Appendix 4, section 6.4.

525.203 A greater voltage drop than stated in Apperdix 4, section 6.4 may be accepted for a notor dudng
stafiing periods and for other equipment with high inrush currents, provided that it is verified that the voltage
Yariations are within the limits specifled in the relevant product standard for the equipment ot, in the absence of a
product standard, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

526 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

526.'t Every connection betweel condllctors or between a conductor and other equipment shalI provide
durable electrical continuity atld adequate mechanical strength and protection.
NOTE: See Regulation 522-8 - Other mcchanical stuesses-

526.2 The selection ofthe means ofcoDnection shall take account of, as apprcp ate:
(t the material ofthe conductor and its insulation
(ii) the number and shape ofthe wires forming the conductor
- (iii) the cross-sectional area ofthe conductor
(iv) the number ofconductom to be connected together
(v) the temperature attained at the tenninals in normal service such that the effectiveness ofthe insulation ofthe
conducto$ colnected to them is not impaired
(\'i) the provision ofadequate locking arrangements in situations subject to vibration or thermal cycling
',i
here a soldered connection is used the design shall take account of creep, mechanical stress anci temperature rise
-:der fault conditions.
raOTE l: Applicable standards include BS EN 609'17-7, the BS EN 60998 series and BS EN 61535'
ITOTE 2: Terminals without rhe marking 'r'(only dgid conductor). 'f'(only flexible conductor), 's'or 'sol'(only solid conductor)
are suitable tbr the connection ofall tyPes ofconductors

:26.3 Every connection shallbe accessible for ir'rspection. testing andmaintenance, except for the following:
Ajoint designed to be buried in the ground
A cornpound-fi lled or encapsulatcdio,nt

--- 145
 (jii) A connection beflveen a cold rail and the heating element as in ceiling heating, floor heating or a trace
heating system
(iv) A joint made by welding, soldering, brazing or appropriate compression tool
(v) Joints ot'connections made in equipment by the manufacturer ofthe product and not intended to be inspected
or maintained
(vi) Equipment complying with BS 5733 for a maintenance-free accessory and marked with the symbol
and installed in accordance with the manufacturer,s instructions. @
526.4 Where necessary precautions shall be taken so that the temperature attained by a connection in
normal service shall not impair the effectiveness ofthe insulation ofthe conductors connected to it or any insulating
material used to support the connection. Where a cable is to be connected to a bare conductor or busbar its type of
insulation and/or sheath shall be suitable for the maximum operating temperature of the bare conductor or busbar

526.5 Evely termination and joint in a live conductor or a pEN conductor shall be made within one ofthe
fo1lowing or a combination thereof:
(i) A suitable accessory complying with the appropriate product standard
(ii) An equipment enclosure complying with the appropriate product standard
(iii) An enclosure partially formed or completed with building material which is non-combustible when tested to
BS 4'76-4.

526.6 There shall be no appreciable mechanical strain on the corulections ofconductors.

526.7 where a comection is made in an enclosure the enclosure shall provide adequate mechanical
protection and protection against relevant extemal influences.

526.8 Cores of sheathed cables from which the sheath has been removed and non-sheathed cables at the
tennination ofconduit, ducting or tluf<ing shall be enclosed as required by Regulation 526.5.

526.9 Connection of multiwire, fine wire and very fine wire conductors
526.9.1 ln order to avoid inappropriate separation or spreading of individual wires of multiwire, fine wire or
very fine wire conductors. suitable temlillals shall be used or the condlLctor ends shall be suitabiy treated.

526.9.2 Soldering (tinning) ofthe wholc conductor end of multiwire. fine wire and very fine wire conductors
is not permitted ifscrew terminals are used.

526.9.3 Soldered (tinned) conductor ends on line wire and very flne wire conducto$ are not permissible at
connection and junction points which are subject in seryice to a relative movement between the soldered and the
non-soldered part of the conductor.

527 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WRING SYSTEMS TO MINIMIZE THE SPREAD OF

FIRE

527 .1 Precautions within a fire-segregated compartment

527.1.',| The risk ofspread offire shall be minimized by the selection of appropriate materials and erection in
accordance with Section 527.
NOTE: A flre-segreSated compatment (fire cornpanment) is considered to be an enclosed space, which may be subdivided,
separated from adjoining spaces within a building by elements ofconstrxction having a specified fire resistance.

527 .'l .2 A wiling system shall be installed so that the general building structural perfomance and fire safety
are not reduced.

527.1.3 Cables complying with, at least, the requirements BS EN 60332-1-2 may be instalted without special
precautions.

Where the fire-segregated compafiment provides a means of evacuation in an emergency then the cable shall meet
the requirements ofthe appropdate part ofBS EN 60332-3 series.
NOTE: Cables nlanufactured for the above application also need to satisfy the requirements of the CPR in respect of their
reaction ro 1lre. See Appendix 2, item 17.

527.1.4 Cables not complling with the cable requirements of Regulation 527.1.3 shall be limited to short
lengths fol connection of appliances to the pemanent wiring systerl and shall not pass frorri one fire-segregated
compaft mer]t to another.

146
527.1.5 Products harins rhe necessa4 resistance to flame propagation as spccificd in the BS EN 61386
series, thc approprjate pan ol BS EN 50085 series. BS EN 61439-6, tsS EN 6lill scrics. BS EN 61537 or
BS EN 60570 may be installed rvithout special precautions. Other products corlrplvin-s * ith standards haviug similar
requirements lor resistance to flame propagation may be installed without special precaurions.

527 ,1.6 Pafis of wiring systerns other than cables which do nor compl1.. as a ninimum. with the flame
propagation requirements as specified in the BS EN 61386 selies, the appropriate parr of BS EN 50085 selies,
BS EN 61439-6, BS EN 6153,1 series or BS EN 61537 but which comply in all other respects with the requirements
of their respectivc product standard shall, if used, be completely enclosed in suitable non-combustible building
materials.

527.2 Sealing of wiring system penetrations

527.2.1 Whele a wiling system passes through elements ofbuilding construction such as floors. walls, roofs,
ceilings, patitions or cavity balriers, the openings remaining after passage of the wiring system shall be sealed
according 1o the degree of fire-resistance (if any) prescribed for the respective element of building colstruction
before penetration.

This requireme)rt is satisfied if the sealing of the wiring system concemed has passed a relevant type test meeting
the requirements of Regutation 527.2.3.

527.2.1.1 During the erection of a wiring system tenporary sealing arangements shall be provided as
approp at

527.2.1.2 During altemtion work, sealing which has been disturbed shall be reinstated as soon as practicable.

527.2.2 A wiring system such as a conduit systerr, cable ducting systen, cable trunking system, busbar or
busbar trunking system which penetmtes elements of building construction having specified fire-resistance shall
be internally sealed to the degree of fire-resistance of the respective element before penetration as well as being
ertemally sealed as required by Regulation 521 .2.1.

This requirement is satisfied if the sealing ofthe wiring system concemed has passed a relevant type test meeting
the requirements of Regulation 527.2.3.

527 ,2.3 A conduit system, cable tmnking systera or cable ducting systenl classilied as non-flame propagating
lccording to the relevant product standard and having a maximum intemal cross-sectional area of710 mmr need not
b.' intemally sealed provided that:
(i) the system satisfies the test olBS EN 60529 for IP33, and
(ii) any telnrination of the system in one of the compartments, separated by the building construction being
penetrated, satisfies the test olBS EN 60529 for 1P33.

527.2.4 Any sealing an-angement intended to satisfy Regulation 527.2.1 or 527.2.1.1 shall resist external
rfluences to the same degree as the wi ng system with which it is used and, in addition, it shall n.reet all olthe
r.11os,in g requirements :

li) It shall be resistant to the products ofcombustion to the same extent asthe elements ofbuilding construction
rvhich have been penetrated
t ii) It shall provide the same degree of protection from water penetration as that required for the building
constmction element in which it has been installed
ll I It shall be compatible with the matedal ofthe widng system with which it is in contact
It shall permit thermal movement ofthe wiring systern without reduction ofthe sealing quality
It shall be of adequate mechanical stability to withstand the stresses which nlay a se through damage to the
suppofi ofthe wiring system due to fire.

:- .:iil and the \!iring system shall be plotected tiol]r drippirg r,r,ater utich may travel along the wiring system or
: ,:: maY otherwise collcct around the seal unless the n.iaterials used in the seal are all resistant to nloisture $,her]
- . '. rssembled for use.
\ f,TE: This regulation ma), be sarisf,ed ifi
either cable cleats, cable ties or cable supports are installed rvithin 750 mm ofthe seal, and are able to withstand
thc mechanical loads expected following the collapse ofthe supports on the fire side ofthe seal to the extent that
no strain is hansferred to the seal or
the design ofthe sealing syste itselfpr-olides adequate suppol1.

147
 528 PROXIMITY OF WIRING SYSTEMS TO OTHER SERVICES

528.1 Proximity to electrical services

Except where one ofthe following methods is adopted, neither a voltage Band I nor a voltage Band II circuit
shall
be contained in the same wiring system as a circuit ofnominal voltage exceeding that of low: voltage, and a Band I
circuit shall not be contained in the same wiring system as a Band II circuit:
(i) Every cable or conductor is insulated for the highest voltage present
(ii) Each conductor of a multicore cable is insulated for the highest voltage present in the cable
(iii) The cables are insulated for their system voltage and installed in a separate compaftment of a cable ducting
or cable trunking system
(iv) The cables are installed on a cable tray system where physical separation is provided by a parrition
(v) A separate conduit, trunking or ducting system is employed
(vi) For a multicore cable, the cores ofthe Band I circuit are separated from the cores ofthe Band II circuit by an
earthed metal screen ofequivalent current-carrying capacity to that ofthe largest core ofa Band II cfu;it.

For SELV and PELV systems the requirements ofRegulation 414.4 shall apply.
NOTE 1: In the case of proximity of wiriflg systems and lightning prorection systems, BS EN 62305 should be considered.
NOTE 2; Recornmendations for separation and segregation in relation to safety ser,iices are given in BS 5266, BS 5g39 and
BS 8519.

528.2 Proximity of communications cables

In the event of crossing or proximity ofunderground telecommunication cables and underground power cables, a
minimum clearance of 100 mm shalt be maintained, or the requirements according to (i) or (ii) shali be fulfilled:
(i) A fire-retardant partition shall be provided between the cables, e.g. bricks, cable protecting caps (clay,
concrete), shaped blocks (concrete), protective cable conduit or troughs made offire-retardant mate als
(ii) For crossings, mechanical protection between the cables shall be provided, e.g. cable conduit, concrete cable
protecting caps or shaped blocks.
NOTE 1: Special considerations ofelectical intederence, both electromagfletic artd electrostatic, may apply to te]ecommunication
circuits, data transfer circuits and the like.
NOTE 2: Segregation requirements for communications services are given in BS 6701 and BS EN 50174 series.

528.3 Proximity to non-electrical services

528.3,1 A wiring system shall not be installed in the vicinity of services which produce heat, smoke or firmes
likely to be detrimental to the widng, unless it is protected from harmful effects by shielding ananged so as not to
affect the dissipation o[hear from the wiring.

In areas not specifically designed lor the installation of cables, e.g. service shafts and cavities, the cables shall be
laid so that they are not exposed to any harmful influence by the normal operation ofadjacent installations (e.g. gas,
water or steam [ines).

528.3.2 Where a wiring system is routed below services liable to cause condensation (such as water, steam
or gas services), precautions shall be taken to protect the wiring system from deleterious effects.

528.3.3 Where an electrical seryice is to be installed in proximity to one or more non-electrical services it
shall be so aranged that any foreseeable operation carried out on the other services will not cause damage to the
electrical service or the converse.
NOTE: This may be achieved by:
(i) suitable spaciflg between the services, or
(ii) the use of mechanical or themal shieldins.
528.3,4 Where an electrical service is located in close proximity to one or more non-electrical seruices, both
the following conditions shall be met:
(i) The wiring system shall be suitably protected against the hazards likely to arise fiom the presence ofthe
other services in nomal use
(ii) Fautt protection shall be afforded in accordance with the requirements of Section 4l 1 .

NOTE; The requirements for segregation between low pressure gas systems and electrical equipment are grven in BS 6891.

528.3.5 No cable shall be run in a lift or hoist well unless it forms part ofthe lift installation as defined in
BS EN 8l series.

_148 _
 SELECTION AND ERECTION OF WRING SYSTEMS IN RELATION TO
MAINTAINABILITY, INCLUDING CLEANING
529,1 With regard to maintainabiliry reference shall be made to Regulation 1i2.12.

529.2 Where it is necessary to remove any protective measure in order to carry out maintenance, provision
shall be made so that the protective measure can be reinstated without rcduction ofthe degree ofprotection originally
intended.

529.3 Provision shall be made for safe and adequate access to all parts of a wi ng system which may
requlre marntenance.
NOTE: In some situations, it may be necessary to provide permanent means ofaccess by ladders, walkways, etc.

149
 CHAPTER 53
PROTECTION, ISOLATION, SWITGHING, CONTROL

AND MONITORING
CONTENTS
530 INTRODUCTION
530.1 Scope
530.2 Not used
530.3 General and common requirements
530.4 Fixing of equipment
531 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK BYAUTOMATIC
DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY
cJt.t General
531 .2 Overcurrent protective devices
531.2.1 General
531 .2.2 TN systems
531.2.3 TT systems
531 .2.4 lT systems
531 .3 Residual current devices (RCDs)
531.3.1 General
531.3.2 Unwanted tripping
Types of RCD
531.3.4 Selection according to the accessibility to the installation
531.3.5 RCDs for fault protection
cJ t.J.o RCDs for additional protection
532 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST THE RISK OF FIRE
532.1 General
532.2 Residual current devices (RCDs) for protection against the risk of flre
Residual current monitoring devices (RC[,4s) for protection against the risk of fire in lT
systems
532.4 lnsulation monitoring devices (lMDs) for protection against the risk of fire in lT systems
532.5 lnternal arc fault protection in a switchgear and controlgear assembly
532.6 Arc fault detection devices (AFDDs)
533 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT
533.1 General requirements
533.1.1 Compliance with standards
533.1.2 Fuses
533.1.3 Circuit-breakers
533.2 Selection of devices for overload protection of wiring systems
533.2.2 Additional requirements for protection against overload when harmonic currents are present
533.3 Selection of devices for protection of wiring systems against fault current
534 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST OVERVOLTAGE
534.1 General
534.4 Selection and erection of SPDs
534.4.1 SPD types and location
534.4.2 Connection modes of SPDs
534.4.3 Connection types
534.4.4 Selection of SPDs
534.4.5 Protection of the SPD against overcurrent
534.4.6 Fault protection
534.4.7 SPD installation ln conjunciion with RCDS

150 _ ._
534.4.8 Connection of SPDs I

534.4.10 Connecting conductors of SPDs I

535 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE

536 CO-ORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PROTECTION, ISOLATION,
SWTCHING AND CONTROL
536.1 General
536.2 Electrical devices considered and function provided
536.3 Co-ordination requirements
536.4 Requirements for selectivity
536.4.1 General
536.4.2 Requirements for protection in case of short-circuit
536.4.3 Requirements for protection in case of overload
536.4.4 Requirements for selectivity betlveen OCPDs equipped with under voltage relay
536.4.5 Low voltage assemblies according to BS EN 61439 series
536.4.20',1 Fault current (short-circuit) ratings
536.4.202 Current ratings
536.4.203 lntegration of devices and components
536.5 Documentation
537 ISOLATION AND SWITCHING
537 .1 General
537.2 Devices for isolation
537.3 Devices for switching
537.3.1 Functional switching and control devices
537 .3.2 Devices for switching off for mechanical maintenance
537.3.3 Devices for emergency switching off
537 .4 Firefighter's switches

538 MONITORING DEVICES

538,1 lnsulation monitoring devices(lMDs) for lT systems
538.1 .1 General
538.1.2 lnstallation of insulation monitoring devices
538.1.3 Setting of the insulation monitoring device
538.2 Equipment for insulation fault location in lT systems
538.3 lilonitoring of offline circuits
538.4 Residual current monitors(RCMs)
538.4.1 General
538.4.2 RCMS installed in lT systems
 CHAPTER 53
PROTECTION, ISOLATION, SWITCHING, CONTROL

AND MONITORING
530 INTRODUCTION

530.1 Scope
This chapter deals with general requirements for protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring and with
the requirements for selection and erection ofthe devices provided to fulfil such functions.
NOTE: In Chapter 53, reference to short-circoit, where relevant, includes earth fault. Shoft-circuit Protective Device (SCPD),
where relevant, also means earth fauh curent protective device.

530.2 Nof used

s30.3 General and common requirements

530.3.1 Every item ofequipment shall be selected and erected so as to allow compliance with the requirements
stated in the following regulations.

530.3.2 The noving contacts of multipole switching devices marked for the connection of the neutral or
midpoint may close before and open alter the other contacts.

530.3.3 A switching device shall not be inserted in the neutal conductor alone.

530.3.4 Devices embodying more than one function, as defined in the following regulations, shall comply
with the relevant requirements of this chapter approp ate to each separate function.

530.3.5 Equipment irtended for protection only shall not be provided for functional switching olcircuits.

NOTE: See Table 537.4 - Guidance on the selection ofprotective. isolatior amd switching devices.

530.4 Fixing of equipment

530.4,1 Taking into account the rnanufacturer's instructions, if any, equipment shall be erected in such a
way that connections between wiring and equipment shall not be subject to undue stress or stmin resulting from the
nonnal use ofthe equiptnent.

530.4,2 Unelclosed equipnent shall be mounted in a suitable mounting box or enclosure in compliance with
the relevant part ofBS EN 60670, BS EN 62208 or other relevant standards such as BS EN 61439 series. Socket-
outlets, connectiol units, plate switches and similar accessories shall be fitted to a mounting box complying with
BS 4662 or BS 5733 and with the relevant pafi ofBS EN 60670.

530.4.3 Equipment such as circuit-bleakers, switches, socket-outlets, control equipment, etc. may be installed
on or in a cable tnlnking system complying with BS EN 50085 series. Wherever equipment is fixed on or in cable
trunkirg, skirting trunking or in mouldings it shall not be fixed on covers which can be removed inadvefiently.

531 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK BY AUTOMATIC

DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY

531.1 General
531.1.1 Devices for protection against clectric shock by automatic disconnection ofsupply shall be suitable
1br isolation in accordance with Chapter 46 ard Section 537.

Automatic reclosing of devices for protection against elect c slrock by automatic disconnection of supply shall
only be installed in the associated part of the installation where access is rest cted to instructed persons or skilled
person\ onlY.

Awarning notice shall be clearly displayed nearthe point ofaccess to the associated part ofthe installation controlled
by the auto-reclosing device, indicating its automatic reclose function must be disengaged prior to entry.
NOTE: Automatic Reclosing Devices are intended to reclose circuit-breakers, RCBOs and RCCBs after tripping, in order to
r(-<.ldl_li-h ionlrnLri(y ol'ser1 ice.
 diSconnection of supply
Requirements for the selection of devices fol plotection against electric shock b) automatic
are given in the regulations listed below.

Il TN, TT and IT systems the following protective devices may be used:

(i) overcufient protective devices, in accordance with Regulation 531'2
(ii) residual curent devices (RCDs), in accordance with Regulation 531 '3 '
shall not be used
Devices according to BS EN 60947-2 marked with the voltage value followed
by the symbol @
in IT systems for such voltage.
fault conditions:
In addition. in IT systems the following monitoring devices may be used to detect insulation
(iii) insulation monitoring devices (IMDS), in accordance with Regulation 538 1
(iv) equipment for insulation fault location, in accordance with Regulation 538 2
(v) residual cunent rnonitors (RCMs), in accordance with Regulation 538.4'

531.2 Overcurrentprotectivedevices
531.2.1 General
I automatic disconnection of
where ovefcuTent protective devices are used for protection against electric shock by
supply they shall be selected in accordance with Section 533'
I
531.2.2 TN systems

I In TN systems, ovefcurent protective devices when used as devices for

fault protection shall be selected and elected
*ith theiequirements specified in Chapter 4l (see in particular Regulation 4l L4.4).
in ord"i to
"o-pty
If.forceltahequipmentorforcertainparlsoftlreinstallation,themaximumdisconnectiontimesinTabl...ll,l
cannotbefulfilledbytheovercurrentprotectivedevices,thosepafisshallbeprotectedbyalRCDincompliance
with Regulation 53 1.3.5.2.

that the neutral conductor'

In TN-S systems, the neutralneed not be disconnected ifthe supply conrlitions are such
cau be considered to be reliably at earth potertial'

In TN-C systems, the PEN conductor shall not be disconnected'

Special installations oI locations (Pafi 7), there is no rcquirement under
overcurrent
531.2.?.201 Except in certain
conditions to disconnect/switch the neutral in TT or TN systems'

531.2.3 TT systems
plovided that a suitably low value of
In TT systems, overcurrent protective devices may be used for fault protection
Z" is permanently and reliably assured (see Regulation 4l L5.4) so that in case ofa fault, tdpping ofthe overcurrent
times js achieved'
protective device in compliance with the required disconnection

53',1 .2.4 lT systems

second fault, shall comply
overcurent protective devices, when used as devices for fault pfotection in the event ofa
with;
(i) Regulation 531.2.2, taking into account the requirements of Regulatiou 411.6 5(i), where exposed-
conductive-parts are interconnected, or
(ii) Regulation 531.2.3, taking into account the requirements of Regulation 411.6.5(ii), where exposed-

conductive-pafis are earthed in groups or individually'

InlTSystems,ifdisconnectionrequiredbyChapter4lintheeventofthesecondfaulttoearthcannotbeachieved
-o'. RCD'
by an overcurrent protective devici, on. o, used to provide the required fault protection within
'hul1be
the installation.
Refer.ence is also made to Regulation 419.3 where supplementary
protective equipotcrtial bo[ding is reqllired in those
NOTE:
cases where automatic disconnection accotdil1g to Regu]ation 41L3 2 I cannot be achieved'

Overcunent protective devices used in IT systems shall have line poles suitable
lor line-to-line voltage applications
and a neutrai pole, ilapplicable, suitable for the linelo-neutral voltage
for operation in case of a second insulation
fault.

153
 In IT systems, in the event of a second fault. the operation of the overcunent protective device shall result in the
disconnection of all coresponding live conductors, including the neutral conductor, if any (see also Regulation
43 t.2.2).

531 .3 Residual current devices (RCDs)

531.3.1 General

Except where Regulation 53I.3. L201 applies, an RCD shall disconnect all live conducto$ olthe circuit protected.

The protective conductor shall not pass through the sensor ofthe RCD except where this is unavoidable, e.g. in the
case of armoured cables. In such exceptional cases, the protective conductor alone has to be passed again through
the sensor but ir the reverse direction. The protective conductor shall be insulated and shall not be earthed either at
the first or at the second passing through the sensor

A protective conductor current shall not contribute to the measurement ofthe residual current.

531.3.1.201 For protection against electric shock, there is no requirement to discomect/switch the neuhal in
TT or TN systems.

531.3.1.202 It is not pennissible to irtroduce an extemal connection for the puryose of intentionally creating a
residual curent to trip an RCD.
NOTE 1: This does not preclude the use ofan RCD with a functional earth conneclion.
NOTE 2: This does not preclude the use ofa test instrument in accordance with part 6.

53'|,.3.2 Unwantedtripping
Residual curent protective devices shall be selected and erected such as to limit the risk ofunwanted tripping. The
following shall be considered:
(i) subdivision ofcircuits with individual associated RCDs. RCDs shall be selected and the circuits subdivided
in such a way that any eafih leakage current likely to occur during normal opemtion ofthe connected load
will not cause unwanted tuipping of the device. See also Section 314
(ii) in order to avoid unwanted tripping by protective conductor culrents and/or earth leakage cu[ents, the
accumulation of such curents downstream of the RCD shall be not more than 30 % of the rated residual
operating current
NOTE :1 This will also allow a better selection of the g?e of RCDs according to the nature of the circuit or the load.
NOTE 2: RCDs may operate at any value ofresidual current in excess of50 oZ
ofthe mted residual current.
(iii) use of short time-delayed RCDs, provided the applicable requirements of Chapter 4l are met
NOTE3: ln the case oftransient effects,l pping ofthe RCD may occurby charging ofbypass capacitors orby other
electromagnetic disturbances_
(iv) coordination of general type RCDs, selective type RCDs and time-delayed RCDs (cBRs according to
BS EN 60947-2) as covered in Section 536
NOTE 4: CBR is a circuit-breaker incorporating residual current protection.
(v) coordination olRCDs with surge protective deyices (SpD) according to Regulation 534.4.7.

531.3.3 Types of RGD

Different types ofRCD exist, depending on their behaviour in the presence ofDC components and frequencies. The
appropriate RCD shall be selected from the following:
(i) RCD Type AC: RCD tdpping on altemating sinusoidal residual current, suddenly applied or smoothly
increasing
(ii) RCD Type A: RCD tripping on altemating sinusoidal residual curent and on residual pulsating direct curent,
suddenly applied or smoothly increasing.
NOTE l: For RCD Type A, t pping is achieved for residual pulsating direct currents superimposed on a smooth direct
curent up to 6 mA.
(iii) RCD Type F: RCD for which tripping is achieved as for Type A and in addition:
(a) for composite residual curents, whether suddenly apptied or slowly rising, intended for circuit supplied
between line and neutral or line and earthed middle conductor
(b) for residual pulsating direct curents superimposed on smooth direct currenf.

154
 l
NoTE2:FoTRCDT}}eF.rippingisachievedlorresidualpulsatingdileclcu(ents;upenmposedonaSmoothdirect
cunent uP to l0 mA.
(iv) RCD Type B: RCD for rvhich tripping is achieved as for Type F and in addition:
(a) for residual sinusoidal altemating currents up to 1 kHz
(b) for residual altemating currents superin.lposed on a smooth direct curent

(c) for residual pulsating direct currents superimposed on a smooth direct curent
(d) for residual pulsating rectified direct curent which rcsults from two or more phases
(e)forresidualsmoothdilectcurents,whethersuddenlyappliedorslowlyincreased,independentof
polarity.
NoTE3:FolRCDTypeB,trippirlgisachievedfolresidualpulsating<lirectcurentssuperirnposedonasmoothdirectcurent
up to 0.4 dm;s the rated residual cunent (lr',) or l0 nr-A, whjchever is the hiShest value'

For general purposes, Type AC RCDS may be used

see PD IEC/TR 62350'
NOTE 4: For guidance on the correct use ofRCDs for household and similar use'
given in Annex A53' Figure A53 1'
NOTE 5: Some typical fault curents in circuits cornprising semiconducto$ are

531.3.4 Selection according to the accessibility to the installation

persons, the RCDs
531.3.4.1 In AC installations having RCDs that are intended to be operated by ordinary
shall comply with:
BS EN 61008 series for RCCBS, or
BS EN 61009 series for RCBOs, or
BS EN 62423 for Type F and Type B RCCBs and RCBOs
protection. RCBO is a Residual
RCCB is a Residual currcnt operated circuit-Breaker without integral overcunent
:rcuiFBrcaler :lh
Cunenr npcratcd ( u inlegral o\ ercLln cnl prolectlon

531.3.4.201 Where an RCD may be opcmted by an ordinary person. it shall be designed or installed so thar it is
residual oper-ating current (11',) oI tirre dclay
not possible to modify or adjust the setting or the calibration ofits rated
or a tooi and in a inclication of
n.eciranism without a clcliberatc act invol"ving the use ofcither a key
'esulting 'isible
its setting or calibration.
persors or skilled
531.3.4.2 I[ AC installations having RCDs that are intended to be opemted by instructed
persons, the RCDs shall con.rply with:
- BS F.N 61008 scdes fot RCCBs. or
- BS EN 61009 series for RCBOs. or
BS EN 62423 fol Type F and Type B RCCBs and RCBOs, or
BS EN 60947-2 for CBRs and MRCDs

531.3.5 RCDs for fault Protection

531.3.5.1 General
The use ofRCDs shall provide protection against faults in compliance with
Regulation 411 3'

531 3.5.2. 531.3.5 3 and 531 3 5 4),

The selection ofRCDS depends on the type ofeafihing system (see Regulations
the presence of DC componeuts and flequencies (Regulation 531 3 3)'

531.3.5.2 TN system
protected. The Iequilements for unwanted
RCDS shall be installed at the origin of that paft ofthe installation to be
tripping in accordance with Regulation 531.3.2 shall also be taken into account'
NoTE:Exceptwheleparticulalrestrictionforselectivityapplies,sevelalcircuitsn]aybeprotectedbythesamedevice'

The division of the PEN conductor into neutral conductol and protectiYe
conductol shall take place at the supply
! >ide olthe RCDs.
pemlitted'
, On the load side ofthe RCD, connection between the plotective and neufial conductors is not

\n RCD shall not be used in a TN-C system.

 531.3.5.3 TT system
531.3.5.3.1 LocationofRCDS
RCDs shall be erected at the origin ofthat pafi of the installation to be protected.
The requirements for unwanted
tripping, in accordance with Regulation 531.3.2, shall also be taken into account.
NOTE: Wrere there is more thafl one origin, this rcquirement applies to each origin.

531 .3.5.3.2 Selection of the rated residual operating current of the RCD

The rated residual operating curent value (16) of an RCD shall not exceed the Io"
corresponding to the maximum
value of the earth resistance RA to the exposed-conductive-parts, taking into account
the possible seasonal variations,
including soil lreezing and drying, ofthe part ofthe instaliation prote-cted by this device,
as shown in Tabte 53.1.
Rt is the sum of the resistances in ohms of the earth electode and the protectiye conductor
connecting it to the
exposed-conductive-parts.

Table 53.1 - Correlation between the maximum value of earth resistance RAand
the maximum rated residual operating current la.ofthe RCD
Maximum value of RA (O) Maximum Id" of the RCD
2.5 204
5 10A
l0 5A
t7 3A
50 1A
100 500 mA
t6'7 300 mA
500 100 m,A
t667 30 mA

531'3'5'3.2.201 For Class I enclosures in TT systems where RCD protection is used on

outgoing circuits, double
or reinforced insulation ofatl live conductors (incoming cables, extension terminals,
etc.y on ihe slupply sije ofthe
incoming device, e.g. main switch, shall be used. Insulated and non-metallic sheathed
cables are deemed to meet the
requirements of double or reinforced insulation.
NOTE 1; When selecting equipmeot, consideration should be given to the assembly manufacture/s
intemal lile interconnecting
cable links on the supply side ofan RCD being insulated and non-metallic sheathed, or haviflg
reinforced insulation
or equivalelt mechanical protection.
NorE 2: only the assembry manufacturer's approved intemal interconnecting cable rinks
should be used.

531.3.5.4 lT system

531.3.5.4.1 General

In IT systems, protection of the neutral conductor by RCD is permitted provided that the requirements of
Regulation 431.2.2 are fulfll1ed.

531'3'5'4'2 Case of second fault on another live conductor when exposed-conductive-parts are
interconnected

where RCD' are used according to Regulation 411.6.3(v), one RCD per circuit shall be
used.
The operating characte stics of this RCD shall be selected according to Table
41 .1 of chapter 41.

531'3'5'4'3 Case of second fault on another live conductor when exposed-conductive-parts are not
interconnected

Where, in an installation, alt exposed-conductive-parts are not interconnected,

one RCD shall protect each group of
intercotutected exposed-conductive-pafi s.

The conditions for detemining the characteristics ofthe RCD shall be those for TT systems
defined in Regulation
411.5:
- The rated residual operating curent IAn has to be selected according to Table 53.1.

156
 - The disconnection time has to comply with the values given in Regulation J I 1.i. I

In addition, fault protection for every circuit located downstream ofthis RCD shali be provided in accordance with
the requircments of Regulation 411.6.3(v). [n this case every final circuit shal1 be indi\'idual)y protected by an RCD.

531.3.6 RCDs for additional protection I

The use ofRCDs with a rated residual operating curert not exceeding 30 mA is recognized as additional protection
in compliance with Regulation 415.1. These RCDs shall be provided to comply u ith the requir ements ofRegulation
411.3.3.

RCDs for additional protection in AC installations shall comply with:

- BS EN 61008 series, or
- BS EN 61009 series. or
- BS EN 62423.

Where installed at the origin of a final circuit or a group offinal circuits, an RCD with a rated residual current not
exceeding 30 mA may provide fault protection and additional protection simultaneously.
NOTE: Consideration shall be given to the division ofthe installation (see Regulations 531.3.2 and 314.2).

532 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST THE RISK OF FIRE

532.1 General
In locations where, in accordance with Chapter 42, a particular risk of fire exists, preventive protection measures
against the risk of fire are required. This may also apply to other locations ofthe electrical installation, depending
on a risk analysis.
NOTE: A suitable evaluation ofthe risk should be carried out by one ormore persons competent infue sk assessments.

The selection ofprotective and monitoring devices shall take into account the nature ofthe load and the likelihood
ofthe device to operate, e.g. fault curents ofhigher frequencies, DC fault currents or increased leakage curents.
(See also Regulation 331.1.)

532.2 Residual current devices (RCDs) for protection against the risk of fire
RCDs shall comply with Regulations 531.3.1 to 53 1.3.4 and with the applicable requirements ofRegulation 531.3.5.

RCDs with a rated residual opelating curent not exceeding 300 mA shall be used. RCDs shall be installed at the
origin ofthe circuit to be protected.

532.3 Residual current monitoring devices (RGMs) for protection against the risk of fire in
lT systems
In lT systems, RCMs may be used as an altemative to RCDs in accordance with Regulation 532.2, provided that the
location is supervised by one or more skilled or inshucted person(s).

RCMs shall be in accordance with BS EN 62020 and operate in conjunction with switchgear suitable for isolation.

RCMs shall be installed at the origin offinal circuits. The mted residual operating current shall not exceed 300 mA.
Audible and visual signals shall be provided by the RCMs.

532.4 Insulation monitoring devices (lMDs) for protection against the risk of fire in lT
systems
Insulation monitoring devices applied in IT systems for protection against the risk of fire shall comply with the
requirements of Section 538.

A fault location system in accordance with the requirement ofRegulation 538.2 able to locate the faulty circuit, may
also he used.

s32.5 lnternal arc fault protection in a switchgear and controlgear assembly I

Where required for special applications, intemal arc fault protection (e.g. optical detection system) detecting a fault
arc together with a protection system can be selected in order to extinguish the arc.

Alternatively, an assembly with arc ignition protected zone(s) can be selected to minimise the risk ofan arcing fault.
(Arcing class I in accordance with PD IEC/TR 61641.)
NOTE: lntemal arc fault protection is typically associated \\ith a switchboard used in special applications. An asselnbly that

157
 has been subject to an intemal arcing faul! can require maintenance or replacemeni.

532.6 Arc fault detection devices (AFDDs)

Where specified, arc fault detection devices shall be installed:
(i) at the origin ofthe final circuits to be protected, and
(ii) in AC single-phase circuits not exceeding 230 V
AFDDs shall comply with BS EN 62606. Coordination ofAFDDs with overcurent protective devices, ifnecessary,
shall take account ofthe manufacnuer''s instluctions.

533 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST OVERCURRENT

533.1 General requirements

533.1.1 Compliance with standards

A device for protection against overcu[ent shall cornply with one or more ofthe following:
- BS 88 series
- BS 646
- BS 1362
- BS 3036
- BS EN 60898 series
- BS EN 60947 series
- BS EN 61009 se es

- BS EN 62423.

The use ofanother device is not precluded provided that its time/cu[ent characteristics provide a level ofprotection
not less than that given by the devices listed above.

The following protective devices shall be used only for protection against short-circuit currelrt:
- instantaneous trip circuit-br eakers (lCB) in accordance with Annex O ofBS EN 60947-2
- aM and aR type hnes in accordance with BS HD 60269-2 or BS HD 60269-3.

For evety fuse ard circuit-breaker there shall be provided on or adjacenl to it an indication of its intended mted
cLlrrent as appropriate to the circuit it protects. For a semi-enclosed fuse, the intended ftrted cun'ent to be indicated
is the value to be selected in accordance with Regulation 533.1.2.3.
533.1.2 Fuses

533.1.2.1 A fuse base shall be aranged so as to exclude the possibility of the fuse carier making contact
between conductive pafis belonging to two adjacent fuse bases.

A fuse base using screw-in flises shall be connectedso that the centre contact is connected to tlre conductor ftom the
supply and the shell contact is connected to the conductor to the load.

533.1.2.2 Fuses having fuse links likely to be rernoved or replaced by an ordinary person shall be ol a type
which complies withBs 88-3, BS 3036 or BS 1362. Such a fuse link shall either:
(i) have marked on or adjacent to it an indication of the type of luse link intended to be used, or
(ii) be of a type such that there is no possibility of inadvertent replacement by a fuse link having the intended
rated curent but a higher fusing factor than that intended.
NOTE: In polyphase systems additional measules may be needed, e.g. al all-pole switch on ihe supply side. in ordertoprevent
thc risk of uDintentional contact with live par.ts on the load side.

Fuses or combination units having fuse links likely to be removed and replaced only by skilled or irstructed
person(s) shall be installed in such a manner that the fuse links can be removed or replaced without unintentional
contact with live pafis.

533.1 .2.3 A fuse shall prefembly be of the cartridge type. Where a serri-enclosed fuse is selected, it shall be
fitted with an element in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. if any. In the absence of such instrucnons,

158

.-
 it shall be fitted with a single element of tinned copper wire of the appropriare diamerer specified in Table 533.1.

TABLE 533.1 - Sizes of tinned copper wire for use in semi-enclosed fuses

Rated cunent offuse element (A) Nominal diameter of \1ire (mn)

0.15
5 0.2
10 0.35
I5 0.i
2C) 0.6
25 0.75
30 0.85
45 1.25
60 1.53
EO 1.8
100 2.0

533.1.3 Circuit-breakers

Where a circuit-breaker may be operated by an ordinary person, it shall be designed or installed so that it is not
possible to modif, the setting or the calibration ofits overcurrent release without a deliberate act involviue the use
ofeither a key or a tool and resulting in a visible indication ofits setting or calibration.

Where a screw-in type circuit-breaker is used in a fuse base, the requirements ofRegulation 533.1.2.1 also apply.

According to the requirements ofAnnex H of BS EN 60947-2, devices marked with the voltage value followed by
the :1 mbol ffi .hall nor be uced in lT 5) slems lor such r oltage.
\a_y
533.2 Selection of devices for overload protection of wiring systems
533.2.1 The rated curent (or cufient setting) of the protective device shall be chosen in accordance with
Regulation 433.1.

In certain cases, to avoid unintentional opemtion, the peak current values of the loads may have to be taken ilrto
consideration.

In the case ofa cyclic load, the values of I. and I2 shall be chosen on the basis ofvalues ofl6 and I. for the thermally
equivalent constant load

where:
16 is the curent for which the circuit is designed
I. current-catrying capacity of a cable for continuous service under the particular installation conditions
concemed
I, is the mted curent or cu[ent setting ofthe protective deyice
I

Ir is the curent causing effective operation ofthe overload protective device within the conventional time as
I
,tared in the producr standard.

NOTE: The current causing effective operation in the conventional time of protective dcvices may also bc naned It (for
circuit-bteakers) or If (for fuSes) according to the product standards. Both It and Il are lnultiples of ln and attention
should be given to the correct representation ofvalues and indexes.

533,2,2 Additional requirements for protection against overload when harmonic currents are
present

When selecting an overload protective device to comply with Regulation 433. l, account shall be taken of hamonic
curents in accordance with Regulation 431.2.3.
NOTE: See also Appendix 4 for fudher details on harmonics.

533.3 Selection of devices for protection of wiring systems against fault current
The application of the regulations of Chapter ,13 shall take into account both the minin.nn and maximum lault
I
current conditions, so ftat the highest energt let-rl'trough is taken itto accounr.
I

159
 Where the standard covering a protective device specifies both a rated seruice short-circuit breaking capacity and
a rated ultimate short-circuit bleaking capacity, it is acceptable to select the protective device on the basis of the
ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity lor the maximum fault curent conditions. Operational circumstances may,
however, make it desimble to select the protective device on the seryice shoft-circuit breaking capacity, e.g. where
a protective device is placed at the origin ofthe installation.

Where the short-circuit breaking capacity of the protective device is lower than the maximum prospective short-
circuit or eath fault curent that is expected at its point olinstallation, it is necessary to comply with the requirements
ofthe last paragraph ofRegulation 536.1 and Regulation 536.5.
NOTE: To calculate the maximurn and mhimum faull cunents, see Technical Report PD CLC/TR 50480 'Determination of
cross-sectional area of conductors and selection ofprotective devices'. See also Appendix 4, paragraph 2.5.

534 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST OVERVOLTAGE

For furher information see Appendix 16.

534.1 General
This section contains provisions for the application olvoltage limitation in order to obtain insulation coordination
in the cases described in Section 443, BS EN 60664-1, BS EN 62305 series and BS EN 61643 series. This
section focuses mainly on the requirements lor the selection and erection of SPDs for protection against transient
ovenoltages where required by Section 443, the BS EN 62305 series, or as otherwise stated.

BS EN 62305-4 and BS EN 61643-12 series deal with the protection against the effects ofdirect lightning stokes
ol stuokes near to the supply system. Both documents desc be the selection and the application of suge protective
devices (SPDs) according to the Lightning Protection Zones (LPZ) concept. The LPZ concept descrii,es the
installation ofType 1, Type 2 and Type 3 SPDs. See Figr"rre 534.1 .

Fig 534.1 - Lightning Protection Zones (LPZ) concept

Cable for
data transmission

Low voliage
electr cal I\,4ast or
supply-cable railing

LPZ2
rm
ffi
Critical
equipment

Metallic water pipe

[.4etallic gas pipe

! SeO ut feZ Olt for lightning current protection

(D SPD at LPz 1/2 for overvoltage protection

@ toExtraneous-conductive-part
main earthing terminal
connected

. Boundary of LPZ 1 is an external Lightning

Protection System (LPS)
.. Boundary of LPZ 2 is a screened room to reduce ihe
effects of electromagnetic interference (El\,41)

'160
NOTE l: SPDs with more than one lype ofclassification are available, e.g. combined Tlle l l or combined Type 2+3.

Section 534 does not take into account:

- suge protective components incorporated in appliances connected to the installation
- portable surge protective devices (SPD).
NOTE 2: Further infomation can be found in DD CLC/TS 61643-12.

Section 534 applies toAC power circuits. As far as it is applicable, the requirements ofSection 534 may be followed
for DC power circuits.
NOTE 3: Overvoltages ofatmospheric origin and electrical switching events can affect metallic data. signal and telecommunication
ljnes. Protection measures for these systems are detailed within PD CLC/TS 61643-22.

534.2 Nof used

534.3 Not used

534.4 Selection and erection of SPDs

534.4.1 SPD types and location

534.4.1.1 Where SPDs are required:

(i) SPDs installed at the origin ofthe electrical installation shall be Type 1 or Tlpe 2
(ii) SPDS installed close to sensitive equipment to further protect against switching transients originating within
the building shalt be Type 2 or Type 3.
NOTE: Type 1 SPDS are offen referred to equipotential bonding SPDs and are fltted atthe origin ofthe electrical installation
as

to specifically prevent danger-ous sparking which could lead to fire or electric shock hazards. In accordance with
BS EN 62305-4, a lightning protection system which only employs equipotential bonding SPDS provides no effective
protection against failure of sensitive electrical and electonic systems. Further SPDS (TWe 2 and Type 3) are
required to protect sensitive and critical equipment (for example, hospital equipment and fire/secu ty alarm systems)
downstream ofthe origin ofthe electrical installation.

534.4-1.2 In accordance with the LPZ concept, where a cable crosses the zonal interface, further SPDs shall be
installed to preserue the zone integrity.

534.4.1.3 where the installation of SPDs is required by Section 443 and the sfixcture is equipped with an
extemal lightning protection system or protection against the effects of direct lightning, Type 1 SPDs shall be
installed as close as possible to the odgin ofthe electrical installation.

534.4.1.4 Where the installation ofSPDs is required by Section 443 and the structure is not equipped with an
extemal lightning protectiofl system or does not require protection against the effects of direct lightning, Type 2
SPDs shall be installed as close as possible to the origin ofthe electrical installation.

534.4.1.5 Type 2 or Type 3 SPDs sha1l be located in the fixed electrical installation, for example, in sub-
dist bution boards or close to the equipment to be protected, to achieve the required voltage protection level; see
Figure 534.2. These SPDs shall be coordinated with Type I and/or Type 2 SPDs being installed at the origin ofthe
electrical installation (see Regulation 534.4.4.5).

-,"\
f^'"iuRY E
fl
Io '***

161
 ryry T
Fig 534.2 - Example of insta ation of Type 1, Type 2 and Type 3 SpDs

Type 1 SPD Type 2 SPD Type 2 SPD

and/or or or
Type 2 SPD Type 3 SPD Type 3 SPD

534.4.1.6 Consideration shall be given to the provision of SPDs to protect from other sowces, such as:
(i) switching ovewoltages produced by curent-using equipment rocated withir the installation
(ii) ovel'voltages on other incoming services such as metallic telecommunication and signalling services
(iii) overwoltages on other seryices feeding other structures such as secondary buildings, extemal
installations/lighting, power lines feeding extemal sensors.

These SPDs shall be installed and located as close as possible to the origin of such events.
NOTE: For fufther inl-omation see BS EN 61643-12 series and BS EN 62305_4.
534'4'1 '7 The presence of SPDs installed downstream of a distribution board (e.g. in a socket-outlet)
shall be
permanently indicated (e.g. by a label) at or near the distdbution board.

534.4.2 Connection modes of SPDs

Protection against transient overvoltages shall be provided:

- between live conductors and pE (common mode protection), and,/or
between live conductors (differential mode protection).
NOTE; For further infomation see DD CLC/TS 61643-12.

534.4.3 Connection types

534.4.3.1 Connection Type CT1

Connection Type CTI (e.g. 4+0 configumtion):
- SPD assembly providing a mode ofprotection between each live conductor (line and neutral
conductors, if
availablet and PE.

An example ofconnection Type crl for application in a three-phase system is given in Figure 534.3.

162
 Fig 534.3 - Connection Type CT1 (4+0-configuration) for a three+hase system with neutral
Ll L2 L3 N

534.4.3.2 Connection Type CT2

Connection T1.pe CT2 (e.9. 3+ 1-configuration):

- SPD assembly providing a mode ofprotection between each line conductor and the neutral conductor, and
between the neutral conductor and PE.

An example ofconnection Type CT2 for application in a three-phase system is given in Figure 534.4.

Fig 534.4 - Connection Type CT2 (e.9. 3+1-configuration) for a three-phase system with neutral
L1 L2 L3 N

534.4.4 Selection of SPDS

534.4.4.1 General
The following parameters shall be considered for SPD protection:
- voltage protection level (Un) ofthe SPD and rated impulse withstand yoltage (U'v) ofthe equipment to be
protected (see Regulation 534.4.4.2)
- continuous operating voltage (U.) ofthe SPD, i.e. supply system (T! TN, IT) (see Regulatior 534.4.4.3)
- nominal discharge current (I".16) and/or impulse discharge curent (Ii,,p) ofthe SPD (see Regulation 534.4.4.4)
- SPD coordination (see Regulation 534.4.4.5)
- expected shofi-circuit current (Isccn). (see Regulation 534.4.4.6)
- follow curent interrupt mting (Ifi) (SPDs shall comply with the requirements ofBS EN 61643-11).
NOTE: Additional information rcgarding selection and application is given inDD CLC/TS 61643-12.AnnexD of DD CLC/
TS 61643-12 provides application examples ofselecting SPDS.
 534.4.4.2 Selection with regard to voltage protection level (Up)
The voltage protection level (Up) of SPDs shall be selected in accordance with impulse withstand voltage Category II
ofTable 443.2 and in no case exceed the required rated impulse voltage ofthe equipment.
NOTE 1: In some cases, for example where the continuous opeEtion of the equipment is c tical, the voltage protection level
(Up) of SPDS can be selected to be lower than the impulse immunity of equipment. The impulse immunity voltage
of equipment is lower than the impulse withstand of equipment and requires SPDs with lower voltage protectioo
level Up between live conductors (e.g. line to neutral) to avoid equipment malfunction, particularly against switching
transients. For further information see DD CLC/TS 61643-12.

In installations operatrtg at 230/400V, the voltage protection level ofthe instaltecl SPD assembly shall not exceed
2.5 kV, as the SPD's connecting leads have additional inductive voltage drop across them (see Regulation 534.4.8).
It may, therefore, be necessary to select an SPD with a lower voltage protection level.

Ifthe distance between the SPD and equipment to be protected (protective distance) is greater than l0 m, oscillations
could lead to a voltage at the equipment terminals ofup to twice the SPD'S voltage protection level. Consideration
shall be given to the provision of additional coordinated SPDs, closer to the equipment, or the selection of SpDs
with a lower voltage protection level.
NOTE 2: It is recommended that the voltage protection level provided by SPDS does not exceed a safety margin of 80 % ofthe
required rated impulse voltage for equipment according to Table 443.2 and conesponding to overvoltage category Il.

This safety margin is not necessary where one ofthe foltowing cases applies:
- where the equipment is connected directly to the SpD terminals
- where a protection scheme according to Figure 534.9 is already applied
- where the voltage drop across the overcuaeflt protection in the SPD branch circuit is already taken into account
for the voltage protection level Up
- where protection accordi[g to overvoltage category II is provided but only over.r'oltage category III or IV
equipmenl is installed at this locatio[.
NOTE 3: DD CLC/TS 61643-12 gives additional infomalion about the mted impulse voltage of equipment and the given Up
for rhe SPD.

Tqble 534.1 Not used

534.4.4.3 Selection of SPDS with regard to continuous operating voltage (Uc)

In AC installations, the maximum continuous operating voltage Uc ofSPDs shalt be equal to or higher than required
by Table 534.2.

Table 534.2 - Minimum required uc of the sPD dependent on the supply system configuration
SPD connected bctween System configuration of distribution network
(as applicable)
TN system TT system lT system
Line conductor and neutral 1.1 U l.1u 1.1 U
conductor
.i3 i3 !3
or (0.64 x U) or (0.64 x U) or (0.64 x U)

Line conductor and PE conductor 1.1 U 1.1U

r/: ri:
1.1 U
or (0.64 x U) or (0.64 x U)

Neutral and PE conductor U U 1.1U

J": .i,3 .i3

or (0.64 x U)
Line conductors 1.1U 1.1U 1.1U
NOTE: U is the lineto-line voltage ofthe low voltage system.
a These values are related to worst-case fault conditions, therefore, the tolerance of 10 o/o
is not taken into
account.

164
 impurse discharse
of spDs with resard to discharse currenr (r*oa) and
T *rr_ection
Atolneartheoriginoftheelectricalinstallation,SPDsshallcomplywithoneofthefollorvingcases.asapplicable:
-wherethebuildingisprotectedagainstdilectlightningstrike,SPDsattheoriginoftheelectricalinstallation
4 4 4 2 and Table 534 4
shall be selected according to Regulation 534
Regulatiot 534 4 4 4 l'
in other cases, SPDs shall be selected according to
also comply with the
near the oligin ofthe electrical installation shall
spDs installed downsfeam ofthe sPDs at oI
coordination requirements in Regulation 534 4
4'5 '

NorE:overvoltagesduetoswitchingcanbelorgerindurationandcancontainmoreenergythanthetransientovervoltages
discharge cuaent
origin. fnl, fri. io U. for the selection of SPDS with regard to nominal
of atmosphe c "oniidered
infomation DD CLC/TS 61643-12'
and impulse discharge cunent For tufiher
see

534.4.4.4.1 TlPe 2 SPDs

WhereType2SPDsarerequiredatornealtheodginoftheelecfficalinstallation,theilnominaldischargecurrent
(In.pa) shall be not less than that given in Table 534 3'

Table534'3-Nominaldischargecurrent(l""pd)dependingonsupplySystem
and connection TYPe

534.4.4.4.2 Type I SPDs

WhereTypelsPDsalelequiledatorneartheoriginoftheelectricaliastallation,oneofthefollowingcasesapplies:
(i)WherenoriskanalysisaccordingtoBsEN62305-2hasbeencarriedout'theimpulsedischargecurrent
(Ii,,p) shall be not less than as given in'fable 534 4'

I Table 534.4 - Selection of impulse discharge-current (li.J where

against direct lightning strike
the building is protected

NOTE
- Tht. r"f".,. t€htning prot""tion]t"1t (L!LI]lg:g IV
"b1"
be€n caried out' the impulse discharge current
(ii) Where the risk analysis according to BS Ef,61i91^1lis
{1,,"!l shall be detennined according to the BS
E\ 02105 series'

534.4.4.5 Coordination of two or more SPDs

the manufacturer's
provide coordination in operation by reference to
SpDs shall be selected and erected such as to
data.
current rating (lsccR)
534.4.4.6 Selection of SPDs with regard to the short-circuit
as statedby the manufacturer' shall not be lower than the
ln general, the short-circuit curent rcting I56sa ofan
SPD'
itr. points oi the SPD assemblv; sei Figure 534 5'
maximum prospective short-circuit Ju-nlni'ui "onn"",ion
 NOTE 1: The SPD alone, of as an assembly in conjunction with its discoturector and,/ol overcurenl protective device (OCpD),
is required to withstand the short-circuit curent raling ISCCR as stated by the manufacturer. This value is defined and
tested according to BS EN 61643-l l, in coajunction with the discorutector and_/or OCPD as statedby the marlufacturer.

NOTE 2: This requirement does not apply to SPDS connected between the neutral conductor and PE in TN or TT systems, fbr
which this is already covered by the product standard BS EN 61643-l l.

For SPDs connected between the neutral conductor and PE in IT systems, the shofi-circuit current rating I"ccn ofthe
SPD shall not be lower than the maximum prospective short-circuit current at the connection points oithis SpD in
case ofa second fault.

534.4,4.7 Selection of SPDS with regard to the follow current interrupt rating (h)
In general, the follow current interrupt rating Ifi ofthe SPD, ifdeclared by the manufacturer, shall not be lower than
the maximum prospective short-circuit curent at the connection points ofthe SPD assembly. See Figure 534.5.

For SPDS connected between the neutral conductor aIId PE in IT systems, the follow cuffent interupt rating 16 ofthe
SPD, ifdeclared by the manufacturer, shall not be lower than the maximum prospective short-circuit current at the
connection points ofthis SPD in case ofa second fault.

Fig 534.5 - Connection points of an SPD assembly

Key
OCPD 1 overcu[ent protective device in the installation
OCPD 2 overcurrent protective device specified by the
SPD manufacturer
SPD surge protective device
SPDA SPD assembly
A&B connection points of SPD assembly
EIT equipment or installation to be protected.

534.4.5 Protection of the SPD against overcurrent

534.4.5.1 General
SPD installations shall be protected against overcurent with respect to shorGcircuit curents.

This protection may be intemal and/or extemal to the SPD according to the manufacturer's instructions.

The ratings and chamcteristics ofextemal OCPDs for protecting the SPD assembly sha11 be selccted in accordance
with Section 434 and be the highest permissible rating to provide
a high surge curert capability for the complete
assembly whilst not exceeding the rutings and charactedstics as required in the SPD manufacturer's installation
instructions for the maximum overcurrent protection.

166
534.4.5.2 Arrangement of SPDs with relation to overcurrent protection
Incase of OCPD opemtion a sing from SPD failure, the continuit) of dre supph ro dre equipment is unaffected.
However, neither the installation nor the equipment is protected against pos:ible tunher over.,,oltages (see Figule
534.6). Il such an a[angement, the effective voltage protection ler el u ithin the insrallation is increased due to the
additional voltage drop at the extemal OCPD connected in series s ith the SPD.

Fig 534.6 - Example of overcurrent protection in the SPD branch by using a

dedicated external overcurrent protective device

K"y
OCPD overcurent protective device specified by the
SPD manufacturel
SPD suge protective device
SPDA SPD assembly
A&B connection points of SPD assembly
Efi equipment or installation to be protected.

534.4.5.3 SelectivitybetweenOCPDs
Where selectivity between OCPDs is necessary to prevent danger and where required for proper functioning ofthe
installation, the manufacturer's instructions shall be taken into accounl see Regulation 536.4.

534.4.6 Faultprotection

Fault protection, as defined in Chapter 4l, shall remain effective in the protected installation even in the event of
SPD failure.

In the case of automatic disconnectlon of supply:

in TN systems, this may generally be fulfilled by the OCPD on the supply side of the SPD (See
Figure l6.4l olAppendix 16);
in TT systems, this may be fulfilled by:
(a) the installation ofSPDs downstream (load side) ofan RCD (See Figure 1642 ofAppendix 16), or
(b) the installation ofSPDs upstream (supply side) ofthe main RCD. Owing to the possibility ofa failure of
an SPD connected between neufual conductor and PE, the conditions ofRegulation 411.4.1 shall be met
and the SPDs shall be installed in accordance with connection Type CT2 (See Figure I 6.43 ofAppendlr I 6).
in IT systems, no additional neasure is needed (See Figure 16A4 ofAppendix 16).
 Table 534.5
Supply system at the connection
point ofthe SPD assembly
TN svstem
TT system
IT system with neutral
IT system without neutral
NOTE 1:Y: applicable
NOTE 2: N/A: not applicable
- Connection of the SPD dependent on supply system
Connection Type
CTI CT2
Y Y
SPD only downstream ofRCD Y
Y N/A

NOTE; Additional requirements rnight apply for SPDs installed in the area of influence of applications such as railway
systems, HV power systems, mobile units, etc.

534.4.7 SPD installation in conjunction with RCDS

Where SPDs are installed in accordance with Regulation 534.4.1 and are on the load side of an RCD, an RCD
having an immunity to surge curents ofat least 3 kA 8/20 shall be used.
NOTE 1: Type S RCDs in accordance with BS EN 61008-1 and BS EN 61009-l satisly this requirement.

Installation ofTlpe 1 SPDs downstream ofan RCD is not reconmended.

NOTE 2: Ir the case of a surge curent higher than 3 liA 8/20. the RCD may trip causing interruption ofthe supply.

534.4.8 Connection of SPDs

All conductors and interconnections to the relevant line to be protected, together with the connections between the
SPD and any extemal OCPD, shall be kept as shorl and as straight as possible and any unnecessary cable loops shall
be avoided.

The length ofthe connecting conductors is defined as the sum ofthe path length ofconductors used from the live
conductor 10 the PE in between connection points A and B as shown in Figure 534.8 (for example, a + b + c).

Fig 531.7 Not used

168
 Fig 534.8 - Connection of the SPD

A Live conductor

Key
OCPD overculTent protective device
SPD surge protective device
PE conduqtor protective earthing conductor
A and B conlection points of SPD assembly.
NOTE: When the OCPD is not present, lergth b is cqual to 0.

Consideration shall be given to limit the total wiring length of conductors between connection points of the SPD
assembly, which should preferably not exceed 0.5 m and in no case exceed 1.0 m.

To meet these requirements, the main protective conductor shall be connected to the eafihing terminal located as
near as possible to the SPD by adding, if necessary, an intermediate earthing teminal (see Figure 534.9).

To determine the total lergth of the connecting conductors according to Figure 534.9, the lollowing conductor
rensths shall not be taken into account:
between the main eathing terminal and the intermediate earthing terminal
I
between the intermediate earthing terminal and the PE conductor.

The length (and therefore inductance) ofthe conductors betweer the SPDs and the main earthing teminal shall be
i.pt to a minimum. SPDS may be connected to the main eadhing tenninal or to the protective conductor via metallic
rafts. e.g. the metallic enclosures ofthe assembly (see Regulation 534.4.2), provided it is connected to PE and meets
--:r- requirements for a protective conductor in accordance with Chapter 54. Connection ofthe rclevant SPD(s) to the

:.ain earthing teminal, and in addition to the main protective conductor, may inprove the voltage protection level.

: ihe total wiring length (a +b +c) as defined in Figure 534.8 exceeds 0.5 m, at least one of the following options
be chosen:
':all
select an SPD with a lower voltage protection level U, (a I m length of rectilinear conductor carrying a
discharge curent of 10 kA (8/20) adds a voltage drop ofabout I 000 V)
install a second coordinated SPD ctose to the equipment to be protected so as to adapt the voltage protection
level U! to the rated impulse voltage ofthe equipment to be protected
rse the installation method as shown in Fisure 53,1.9.

169
 Fig 534.9 - Example of installation of an SPD in order to decrease lead length
of SPD supply conductors

Key
OCPD overcurrent protective device
SPD surge protective device
PE conductor protective earthing
Elt equipment/installation to be protected
1 main earthing terminal
2 intemediate eaft hing terminal
3 length c (to be considered)
4 cable lengh need not be considered
5 cable length need not be considered
AandB connection points of SPD assembly.

NOTE: For further irfomation see DD CLC/TS 6l643-12.

534.4.9 Not ttsed

534.4.10 Connecting conductors of SPDs

Conductors between SPDS and the main earthing terminal or the protective conductor shall have a cross-sectional
area not less than:
- 6 mrf copper or equivalent for Tlpe 2 SPDs installed at or near the origin of the installation
- 16mm2 copper or equivalent for Type I SPDs installed at or near the odgin ofthe installation.
Referring to Regulation 433.3.1(ii), conductoN connecting SPDS and the OCPDs to live conductors shall be rated
to withstand the prospective shod-circuit current to be expected and shall have a cross-sectional area not less than:
- 2.5 mm2 copper or equivalent for Type 2 SPDs installed at or near the origin ofthe installation
- 6 mm': copper or equivalent for Type 1 SPDS installed at or near the origin ofthe installation.

l.
535 DEVICES FOR PROTECTION AGAINST UNDERVOLTAGE
comply with the relevant requirements ol Section'l-15'
Devices for protection against undervoltage shall
for protection against undervoltage mal- be required'
For protection ofpeEons and propedy, devices
are selected as follows:
Protective devices against undenoltage
(i) direct operating undervoltage release:
Iower value ofthe relay operating voltage
higher value ofthe relay operating voltage
- time delaY (ifrequired)
(i,) indirect opemting undervoltage release:
- lower value ofthe operating voltage
- higher value ofthe opemting voltage
- time delaY (ifrequired)
(ii0 automatic reclosing when the voltage is restored:
with reclosing Prevention
without reclosing Prevention'

Thecharacteristicsoftheprotectivedevicesagainstundervoltage-shallbecoordinatedwiththerequifementsinthe
offof the electrical equipment'
(in:rurrl op*u,lon aid switching
relevant standards for switching on "r'."*l
FOR PROTECTION' ISOLATION'
536 CO-ORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
SWITCHING AND GONTROL

536.1 General

hissectiolcovelsco-ordinationinthecascofafaultandoverloadconditionsandalsotakesintoconsideration
as follows; deviccs
..p..it l"i..ti". L3 relevant to the co-ordination of electrical
- overculTcl.It protcctive device (OCPD)
(CPS)
control and protective switching device
- residual curent device (RCD)
- contactor and starter
- switch and disconnector'
\OTE 1: Co-ordination ofmonitoring devices is undel considemtion

\oTE2:Referencetothemeaningof.someoftheabbreviationsusedinthissectionmaybefoundinTableA53,linArrnexA53
located at the end ofthis chapter'
but provides requirements
the selection ofan electrical device alone'
-::.n 536 does not provide requireurents lor
' :'j,,:"
them'
co-ordilation between
selection ofelectrical devices to achieve electrical

. squilell]entsalsocoveraspectsofcontinuityofsupplyoftheinstallation'
provided
:.:6.2 Electrical devices considered and function
by different electrical devices'
\: -E: Table A53.I in Arnex A53 sho$'s the functions provided

:::3 Co-ordination requirements

between those
j , ..:.i.iing electrical devices as covered by the following regulations, the mutual interaction
ofthe installation'
,- -:. .hail be considered so that they do not adversely affect the safety
-: - -.rrdilation ofelectrical devices considers requiretnents in case
ol
- short-circuit
- olerload
- residual curents

:..r' co-oldinatiol oielectrical devices are:

- selectivity
- short-circuit Protection
- o\ erload Protectioll.

1-',
Electrical devices shall be selected taking into account the co-ordination characteristics as givenby the m anu facturers.

536.4 Requirementsforselectivity
536.4.1 General
Selectivity between OCPDs is defined in Regulation 536.4.1.2 for overload conditions and in Regulation 536.4.1.3
for short-circuit conditions. Selectivity between RCDS is defined in Regulation 536.4.1.4 and selectivity between
OCPD and RCD is defined in Regulation 536.4.1.5.

In this regulation, the OCPD could be replaced by an SCPD.

536.4.1.2 Selectivity under overload conditions between OCPDs

536.4.1.2.1 General requirements

Where selectivity is required, as shown in Figure 536.1, the design shall be verified either by:
- desk study, taking into account the relevant product standards and the manufacturer's literature, or
- appropriate software tools where inlormation is provided by the manufacturer for this specific use, or
- tests in accordance with the applicable product standard (in order to achieve the corect test performances
and reproducibility), or
- manufacturer's declaration.

In the case of a desk study, when time/current characteristics are used to veriry selectivity, account shall be taken
of the reference ambient temperature for which the tdpping curves are given and to load conditions before the
overcurTent.

Fig 536.1 - Selectivity between OCPDs

o
c
P
D
1

o o
C c
P P
D D
21 22

536.4.1.3 Selectivity under short-circuit conditions between OCPDs

536,4,1.3.1 General requirements

Where selectivity is required (see Figure 536.1), verification shall be made either by:
- desk study, taking into account the releyant product standard and the manufactuer's literature, or
- appropriate software tools where information is provided by the manufacturer for this specific use, or
- tests in accordance with the applicable product standard (in order to achieve the co[ect test perlormances
and reproducibility), or
- manufacturer's declaration.
 In the case ofa desk study, when energy limitation curves are used to verif selectiviry. account shall be taken ofthe
voltage for which the curves are given.

In cases given in .{53.7 and 453.10 in Annex A53, selectivity will be obtained for shot-circuit currents up to a
specific value, the selectivity limit current. The value ofthis limit wili be given by the manufacturer In a pafiicular
installation selectivity may be total or partial.
NOTE: Generally, manufacturers provide tables giving information on selectivity in case of short-c ircuit.

536.4.1.4 SelectivitybetweenRCDS
(i) General requirements

Where selectivity is required (see Figure 536.2), verification shall be made either by:
desk study, taking into account the relevant product standard and the manufacturer's literatue, or
appropriate software tools where information is provided by the manufacturer for this specific use, or
tests in accordance with the applicable product standard (in order to achieve the correct test performances
and reproducibility), or
manufactwer's declaration.
NOTE 1: Generally, manufactuers provide information specifying selectivity between RCDS.

(ii) Selectivity in case of residual currents

Selectivity in case ofresidual currents, as shown in Figure 536.2, is given under the following conditions:
the upsheam RCD is ofselective type (type S or time-delayed type with appropriate time delay setting), and
the mtio of the rated residual operating current of the upstream RCD to that of the downstream RCD is at
least 3:1,

In the case of RCDs with adjustable rated residual operating current and time delay, reference shall be made to
rnanufaclurer's in:.tructions lor selectivity.
NOTE2: RCD type S is in accordance with BS EN 61008 se esorBSEN61009series.
NOTE 3: A time-delay iype RCD ir accordance with BS EN 60947-2. Annex B or Annex M will be marked rvith thc symbol At
followed by the limiting non-actuating time in 1rrs or markcd with an [S]

Fig 536.2 - Selectivity between RCDS in case of residual current

I

NOTE 4: RCD1 is type S or time-delayed type.

536.4.1.5 Selectivity between OCPDs and RCDs

536.4.1 .5.1 Selectivity between RCD(s) and upstream OCPD
r the event of an earth fault, cuaent may reach a high value that could exceed the rnstantaneous tdpping current
:irhe upstream OCPD. Therefore, when selectivity between RCD(s) and upstrea[r OCPD is required, an RCBO or
- BR shall be used and the requirements of selectivity according to Regulation 536..1.1 .2 shall be applied.

L 173
 Fig 536.3 - Selectivity between OCPD and RCD using RCBOS

o
c
D
1

R R
c c
B a
o o
21 22

In Figure 536.3, ifRCCBs are used instead ofRCBOs, selectivity cannot be guaranteed. In this case, ifthere
are OCPDs downstrcam olthe RCCB, as shown in Figure 536.4, selectivity may be achieved provided that the
requirements ofRegulation 536,4.1.2 and Regulation 536.4.1.3 are fulfilled. In addition, the connection between
the RCCB and the downstream OCPD shall be selected and erected so as to minimize the risk of earth faults.
NOTE: ln orderto minimize the risk offaults between RCCB and downstream OCPD, specific wir-ing accessories may be used
(e.g. .pecifi c bu.bars).

Fig 536.4 - Selectivity between OCPD and RCD using RCCBs

o
C

D
1

R
c c
c C
B B
21 22

o o o
C C C

D D D
31 32

536.4.1.6 Selectivity between RCDs and downstream OCPDs

In the event of an earth fault, the earth fault curent may be lower than the instantaneous tuipping cunent of the
downstream OCPD. In this case, the upstream RCD will tlip and selectivity may not be achieved. Thereforc, when
selectivity between RCDs and downstream OCPD is required, RCBOs shall be used and selectivity requirements
according to Regulation 536.4.1.4 shall be applied.
 Fig 536.5 - Selectivity between upstream RCCB and RCBOs

R
c
c
B
I

R R
C C
B B
o o
21 22

NOTE: RCCB 1 is type S or time-delay type.

536,4.2 Requirements for protection in case of short-circuit

536,4,2,1 Combined short-circuit protection of OCPDS

In this regulation, the OCPD could be replaced by an SCPD.

This breaking technique allows the use of short-circuit protective devices with a lower breaking capacity than
required in Chapter 43. It is only applicable to short-circuit protective devices.

Fig 536.6 - Typical configuration for combined short-circuit protection of OCPDs

o
c
P
D
1

o
c
P
D
2

irc
_.31',1
'' Regulation 434.5.1 permits a device with a lower rated breaking capacity than the prospectiYe short-circuit curent
::l'lts
at its point of installation to be used in specific conditions.

When selecting two OCPDs for combined shod-circuit protection, reference shall be made ro rhe instmctions ofthe
manufacturer of the downsheam OCPD. These instructions are derived from tests peribrmed according to relelant
product standards, as applicable (e.g. BS EN 60947-2 andBS EN 60898-1). Where no iribrmatior is available from
the manufactruer, combined shofi-circuit protection of OCPDs shall not be used. and each OCPD shall har'e the
required short-circuit capabilily at the point ofinstallation.
 Ifdeclared by the manufacturer ofboth devices, the combined short-circuit capability ofOCPDl and OCPD2 may
be higher than the breaking capacity of either OCPD. In this case, the connection between the two devices has to
minimize the risk of short-circuits and there shall not be any shofi-circuit contdbutions by other active equipment
in parallel to oCPD1.
NOTE 1 : Co-ordination of an OCPD with a separate curent limiter to increase the shon-circuit breaking capacil), of arl OCPD
may be used according to the manufactuer's instructions.

NOTE 2: Combined short-circuit protection may be used for manual motor stafier having a short-circuit capabilit\, ifl combination
with OCPD. when declared in the manufacturer documentation.

536.4.2.2 Back-up protection of contactors or overload relays

In this regulation, the OCPD could be replaced by an SCPD.

Contactors complying with BS EN 60947-4-1 or BS EN 61095 do not provide protection against short-circuit, thus
they shall be protected by an upstream overcurent protective device (OCPD).
NOTE 1: Contlol and Protective Switching Devices (CPS) provide protection against short-circuir. and therefore provide
intinsic co-ordination.

Figure 536.7 gives a typical schematic for co-ordination ofa contactor with a short-circuit protective device (OCPD).

Fig 536.7 - Co-ordination between OCPD and contactor in case of short-circuit

Regutation 512.1.2 requires equipment to be selected for the design current which it has to carry in normal service
and the current likely to flow in abnormal conditions. In the event of shofi-circuit, the let-through energy and the
peak culTent may cause the contactor to open its contacts at a level of current beyond its making and breaking
capacity. Co-ordination ofthe contactor and the OCPD is needed to achieve safe operation in case ofshot-circuit.

Co-ordination between a contactor and an OCPD is verified by mandatory shod-circuit tests according to BS EN
60947-4-1or to BS EN 61095, as applicable.

Contactors shall be selected and erected in conjunction with the shorl-circuit protective device declared by the
manufactwer, such that the rated conditional shofi-circuit current is higher than the plospective short-circuit current
at the point ofinstallation.

The rated conditional shot-circuit curent can only be obtained by type-testing and thus the data for the selectiol'r
of the OCPD shall be obtained from the manufactuer of the contactot taking into account the rated operational
curent, rated operational voltage and the corresponding utilization category.
NOTE 2: This information is genemlly provided in co-ordination tables which summarize the combination ofdevices (OCPD.
contactor or motor starter) able to maintain a safe behaviour for a given rated conditional shofi-circuit.

In a motor circuit the overload curent protection may be provided by separate overload rclay electrically connected
with the contactor. In such a case protection ofthe overload relay shall also be achieved, since the overload relay
may be damaged by the letthrough energy (l':t) of the OCPD. This infomation is generally provided in the
manufactui'er's co-ordination tables.

176
536.4.2.3 Back-up protection of switches, Transfer Switching Equipment (TSE) or impulse
relays
Switches cornplying rvith BS EN 60947-l or BS EN 60669-2-4, Transi'er Sl irching Equipruent (TSE) corrplying
u'ith BS EN 60947-6-l and impulse telays complying with BS EN 60669-2-l are used to switch loads or circuirs
(e.g. distributior switchboard, lighting circuit, specific load). These devices do nor provide protection againsr shoft-
circuit. thus they shall be protected by an oyercun'ent protective device (OCPD).
NOTE: Fuse combinatior units to BS EN 60947-3 consist ofa sivitch and inte$ai liLse(s) and have a short-circuit capability
declared by thc nranut'actuler which does not lequile the use an upstrcaln OCPD.

Should a shot-circuit occur on the load side ol a switch, the curent will flou, through both devices (OCPD and
switch); therefore the let-through energy ancl the peak cuffent limited by the OCPD need to be compatible with the
shofi-circuit withstand ofthe switch, the TSE or the irrpulse relay.

Figure 536.9 gives a typical scllenatic for co-ordination of a switch with a short-circuit protective device (OCPD).

Figurc 536.8 Not used

Fig 536.9 - Co-ordination between OCPD and switch

The OCPD may also be situated downstleam of the switch, TSE or impulse relay provided that the connection
letweerl tbe switch and the downstream OCPD is selectcd alrd erected so as to minimize the risk ofeafth faults and
.hort-circuits.

Silitches, Transt'er Switching Equiprrent and imptLlse relays shall be selected and erected in conjunction with the
.hort-circuit prctective device declared by the manufacturer in order that their mted conditional shorl-circuit cuffent
.: equal to or higher tl]an thc plospective sltoft-circuit cuffent at the point ofinstallatiou.

The rated conditional shoft-circuit cuuent of the switch can only be obtained by typc-testing and thus the data fbr'
::'ie selection of the OCPD shall be obtained from the nlanufacturer of the switch, taking into account the l?ted
:perational current and the rated operatiotal voltage.

.rr switches according to BS EN 60947-3, where the OCPD is not specified by the switch nrarufacturer, an
..ienrative nlethod lor co-ordination between the OCPD and the switch is as follows:
the rated short-circuit making capacity of the switch is higher than the peak value ofthe prospective shofi-
circuil culrent at the point of i[stallation, and
the OCPD time-cunent charactedstic is within the limits oflcw ofthe switch. as stated by the manufhcturer,
OI
the mted slloft-ci[cuit making capacity is higher than the peak value ofthe prospective sllorlcircuit cu[ent
at the point of installation, and
tl're mted shot time withstand cuffent is higher than the prospective shoft-circuit cu[ent at the point
of installation and the coffespondirg withstand time is longer than the operatiru time of the SCPD. if
applicable, or
ifat the prospective shofi-circuit cLnreDt" the protective device has an energy lerthrough (lrt) and cut-ot'f
currelt not exceeding the values for d]e s$,itch provided by the manufactLLrer.

177

_--.--
 536.4.2.4 Back-up protection of RCCBS
In this regrilation. the OCPD cottld be replaced by an SCPD.

RCCBs complying u'irh BS EN 61008 serics are intended to protect persons against elect c shocks. They may
also be used to pl'o\, ide prolectiolr against fire hazards due to a persistent earth fault. These devices have a limited
siroft-circuit current rvithstand capability. thus they shall be protected by an upstream overcun ent protecti\ e device.

ShouLd a shorr-cilcuit occur. on the load side of a RCCB, the current will flow through both devices (OCPD and
RC CB): rheretbre tlrc lct,through energy and the peak curent limited by the OCPD need to be cornpatible with the
short-cil'cuit $ithstand capability of the RCCB.

Figure 536.10 gives a typical schenratic for co-ordination ofa RCCB with a short-circuit protective device.

Fig 536.10 - Co-ordination between OCPD and RCCB

RCCBs shall bc sclected and erected in conjunction with the OCPD declared by the manufacturer in order that their
rated conditional sltofi-circuit cu[ent is highcr than the prospective short-circuit cu-rent at the point ofinstallation.

Thc lated conditionai shoft-circuit curent of the RCCB with the OCPD, related to the relevant mted operational
cLrrrent and rated operational voltage. is given by the manufacturer based on tests results according to BS EN 61008
selies.

The OCPD rrlay also be situated downstream of the RCCB provided that the connection between RCCB and
dorvnstrearn OCPD is sclected and erected so as to minimize the risk ofcarlh faults and shofi-circuits.

536.4.3 Requirements for protection in case of overload

536.4.3.1 Overload protection of contactor or SCPDs

Corractors con.iplyiug with BS EN 6t)947-4-l or BS EN 61095 and SCPDS without integral overload protection.
such as ICBs couplying rvillt BS EN 60947-2. shall be protected by an overload protective device.

Devices for overload protection are selected for the protectiol of cables. For overload protection of contactors or
SCPDs. the lated curlcnt of thc OCPD shall be selectcd according to manufacturers' information.
In cases rvhere Regulation 433.3 permits omission ofoverload protection, co-ordination in case ofoverload does not
apply

536.4.3.2 Overload protection of RCCB, switch, Transfer Switching Equipment (TSE) or

impulse relay
Rcsidual current cir-cuit-brcakerc (RCCB) complying with BS EN 61008 selies are intended to protect pe$ons
against eiectric shock. S\\,itches cornplying with BS EN 609'+7-3 ol BS EN 60669-2-4, impulse relays conplying
rirh BS EN 60669-2-2 and TSEs conrplying with BS EN 60947-6-l are used to switch loads or circuits. None of
thcs!'devices provide plotection against overload. theretbre they shall be protected by an overcu[ent protective
clevice (OCPD).

178
 Regulation 43 3. I rcquires that devices for overload protection be selected lbr the proiection of cables. For overload
protection of RCCBs and switches, the rated cu-rent of the OCPD shall rake account of the manufaclurer's
information: in general, the OCPD is installed upstream olthe RCCB or the su itch.

The rated current ola switch or RCCB may also be based on the application ofdi\ ersity factors to the downstream
circuits according to Regulation 311.1, and the rated curent of the OCPD shall be selected according to the
manufacturer's instructions. See also Regulation 536.4.202.
NOTE: wllen usirg an RCBO instead of an RCCB, no f'ufiher consideration regarding orerload protection ofthe RCBO is
rleccssar].

Regulation 433.3 specifies conditions lor omission of overload protection. In such cases overload co-ordination
does not require verification.

536.4.4 Requirements for selectivity between OCPDs equipped with under voltage relay

lncase offault (short-circuit or eafth fault) a high fault cufient may generate a voltage drop through the installation.
Voltage drop may also occur i[ the installation for other reasons (for example, switchilg and reclosing of HV
switching device).

Wherc one undervoltage relay is installed in the OCPD on the supply side or elsewhere in the installation, possible
undewoltage rclay operation shall not impair selectivity achieved between OCPDs ard/or RCDs in series.

Fig 536.11 - Selectivity with OCPD and undervoltage relays

o
c
P
D
1

::_-ail: o o
C C
:: r)ll.
P P
:..l1al D D
r08 22

I .urcl

For selectivity, undervoltage rclay operation sha11 be time-delayed according to the maximum shoft-circuit or eartll
fault clearance time. ln all cases, instuctions plovided by the manufacturer shall be fulfilled in order not to irnpair'
the safety ofthc electrical iustallation.

536.4.5 Low voltage assemblies according to BS EN 61439 series

:,:ior
on.
Theinte'acecharacteristicsofanassemblyconlormingtoBSEN61439seriesshallbecorrpatiblewiththeratings
of the circuits to rvhich it is col1l]ected ard with the installation conditions. The characteristics of the assembly
.:. Titof
(
shall be declar-ed by the manufacturer, taking into account the interface characteristics ofthe relevant BS EN 61439
ploduct standard.
s not
536.4.201 Fault current (short-circuit) ratings
The relevant f'ault cunent (shoft-circuit) rating ofthe assembly should be equal to or exceedthe maximun prospective
fault current at the point ofconnection to tlte system.

:Srso11s The teflninology used to define the shofl-circuit rating ofan assenbly is given in the BS EN 61439 series as follows;
plyitg ratcd short-tilne withstand current. I.,,
..rne of
rated peak wilhstand curent. lur
t,-ctive
ratcd conditional sbort-circuit curent. I...

The assembly manut'actur-cr-'s ratings and instntctions shall be taken into accolul.

179
 For ao installation with a 230 V silgle-phase supply rated up to 100 A that is under the contlol of ordinary persons,
switchgear and controlgear assemblies shall either comply with BS EN 61439-3 having a suitable fault cunent
(shofi-circuit) rating for the maximum prospective fault current at the point of connection to the systen or be a
consllfiter unit incorporating components and protective devices specified by the manufacturer complying with
BS EN 61439-3, including the 16kA conditional short-circuit test described in Annex ZB of the standard.
NOTE: When the single-phase PSCC value of 19.6 kA is cited from Engineering Recommendatior P25, the l6 lcA conditional
rating described in Annex ZB of BS EN 61439-3, for incoming service equipment, will satisfy design requirements
where the servicc cable is at least 2 mctres in length.

536.4.202 Currentratings

The relevant design current shall not exceed the rated cu[ent of an assembly (1,,A) or rated cu[ent of a circuit (I,,.)
ofthe associated assembly, having taken any applicable diversity/loading factors into account.
The teminology used to define the rating of an assembly in relation to load/design cunent used in BS EN 6l4jS
can be summarized as follows:
- Tlte rated current of an assembly (I",q) (A)o is the maximum load current that it is designed to manage and
distribute.
- The rated curent ofa circuit (I..) (A) is stated by the assembly manufacturer, taking into consideration the
mtings ofthe devices within the circuits, their disposition and application.

The cunent rating(s) of an assembly circuit may be lower than the rated current(s) of the device(s) according to
their respective device standald, when installed in the assembly; therefore, the assembly manufacturer's ratings and
instructions shall be taken into account.

Rated divenity (loading factor) can be stated by the assembly manufacturer, e.g. for goups ofcircuits.

The rated curent of a switch or RCCB (I,,.r and I,,,) shall be based upon:
the sum of6nal circuit current demard after any applicable load divl]Isity factors, or
thc sum offinal circuit culTellt dernand alicr any applicable load diversity thctors togclhcr with allou'ances
fol diversity betu,ccn final cilcr.rits. or
the sum ofthe downstream OCPDsT'circuit ratcd curaent multiplied by a diversity factor.

Howevel overload protection shall not solely be based on the use ofdiyersity factom ofthe downstream circuits.
To achieve overload protection of RCCBs or switches, the rated current ofthe OCPD shall be selected according to
the manufactuer's instructions.

536.4.203 lntegration of devices and components

The relevart part ofthe BS EN 61439 series shall be applied to the integration ofmechanical and electrical devices
and components, e.g. circuit-brcakers, control devices, busbars into an empty ellclosure or existing low voltage
assembly.

In low voltage assemblies to ttre BS EN 61439 series, e.g. consumer units, distribution boards, incorporated devices
and conponents shall only be those declared suitable according to the assembly manufacturer's instructions or
litemture.
NOTE 1: The use of ildividual componeDts complying with their respective product standard(s) does not indicate their
conpatibility when installed with other components in a low voltage switchgear and conffolgear asscnbly.
NOTE 2: Incorpomted components inside the assclrbly can be from different manufacturers. lt is essential that all incorporated
components shouidhavelrad their compatibility forthelinal enclosedarrangernents verifledbythe original manufachrrer
of the asscmbly and be assembled in accordance with their instructions e.g. the consumer uDit. distribution board
manufacturer. The original rnanufacturer is the organization that carried out the oiginal design and the associated
verification ofthe low voltage switchgear and controlgear assenlbly to the relevant part ofthe BS EN 61439 series.
lf an assembly deviates froln its original manufacturer's inshuctions, or includes components not included in the
original ver.ification, thc person introducing the deviation becomes the original manufacturer with lhe corresponding
obligations.

536.5 Documentation
The infonnatiol mentioned in the previous regulations for co-ordination of electrical devices may be found in
manufacturers'documentation (e.g. catalogue, instuuction sheets, calculation software).

Whe[ the initial verification is made, the documentation conceming the selection ofdevices for co-ordination shall
be addcd to the design documentation in accordance with the requirements ofRegulation 132.13

180
 537 ISOLATION AND SWITCHING

537.1 General
::l This section provides requirements fbr:
(i) non-automatic local and temote isolation and switching neasurcs tbr the preventiolt or removal ofdangers
associated with electrical installations or electrically-powered equipment and machines, and
(ii) tunctional switching and control.

537 .1 .1 Any device foI isolation and switching accolding ro Sections 162 to 465 shall comply rvith the
lelevant requiremerrts included in this section.
i.) ln ceftain instances, additional requirefl]ents may be necessary lbr contbined functions.
NOTE 1: Tablc 517.,1 sLLmnlarizes the luDctions provided by the dcvices for isolation and s$itching, togcther with indicarion ol
'j9 rl,( r(lr\ anl product.ra ddrd*.
NOTE 2: Foi sorre applicatioDs such as nrotor contlol, the switcJ'ing device needs ro withstand the inrush curent.
lnd NOTE 3: Table 537.4 provides infonnation or sclection.

TABLE 537.4 - Guidance on the selection of protective, isolation

and switching devices

gto Device Standard Isolation(r) Emergency Furlctional

altd switchinglr srvitching(i)
Switching device BS EN 50428 No No Yes
BS EN 60669-l No Yes Yes
BS EN 60669-2-1 No No Yes
BS EN 60669-2-2 No Ycs Yes
BS EN 60669-2-3 No Yes
INCES
BS EN 60669-2-4 Yeslrr

BS EN 60947-3
BS EN 609,17-s-1 No Yes \ts
ruits. (i)rltactor BS EN 60947-4-l
ing to BS EN 61095 No No Yes
C ircuit-breaker' BS EN 60898 Yes
BS EN 609,17-2 Yes .3)

BS EN 61009- I Yes6l Ycs

ItCD BS EN 60947-2 Yes
BS EN 61008 series Yes \ts
BS EN 61009 series Yes';r
l:r ices Isolating switch BS EN 60669-2-4 Yes Its
ia1ls Or
BS EN 60947-3 Yes Yes
Plug ard socket-outlet
:.:: their BS EN 60309 Yesrrr No \es
(< 32 A)
Plug ard socket-outlet
::.rIated (> 32 A) BS EN 60309 No \o
Device for thc
board conrlection of luminaire
BS EN 61995-1 Yes'J, No \o
Control and protective switching BS EN 60947-6-1 Yesr l.r)
serles.
device lor equipment (L-PS) BS EN 60947-6-2 r)
Ye.tI Yes
in the
Fuse BS 88 selies No No
Device with BS EN 50428 No No Yes
semiconductols BS EN 60669-2- I No No
Luminaile Supporting Coupler BS 6972 No No
: |ind in PIug arld unsu itchcd socket-outlet BS 1363-l No Yes
BS 1363-2 No
.: -ro shall

181
 BS l36l-l
BS 1363-2

Yesdr(Relnoval
of fuse li k)

Cooker Control Unll switch

Yes -' Functior proYided" No -- Functioi not provided
(see BS EN 60617 identity number
rLr FLrnction plovided ifrhe dcvice is suitable and narked with tlre symbol for isolation
s00288)
-/F
'r' See Regulalion 517.i.3.6.
,r Device is suitable tbr on-load isolation. i e. disconnection whilst calrying load curent'
G, In an installatjon lil.lning paft ofa TT or IT system. isolation requires disconnection ofall the live conductors
See

Regulation 462.2.
(5)Circuit-breakcrs nnd RCDS are p marily cilcuit plotective devices and. as sr:ch. they arc not intended for frequent load
purposes ofisolation oI emergency switching
s\\,itching. Infrcquent switching of circuit-breakels on-load is admissible for the
ofoperations and load characte stics according to the manufactLuel's instructions shoLlld
FoI a mol.e liequent duty. the numbel
ftlnctional switching il] Table 537 4 should be
be taken into accol lt oL an altenlative device from tllose ]isted as suitable for
employecl.
ma*ed with the symbol fol on-load
NOTE : An entry of ( I,3 ) rreans that the devicc is suitabie for onJoad isolation only if it is
1

isolation ---lq-
and swjtching ale summarized, together with an
NOTE 2: Ir the abovs rable. the functions providcd by the devices fol isolation
indication o1' the rclc\ ant product standards.
10 more than
537 .,1 ,2 where at,] installation oI an iten of equjpment or enclosule contains live parts connected
that any person, before gaining access to live
one supply. a durable wanring notice shall be placei in such a position
the various supplies unless an interlocking arangement
ionr. i.iLiu. *u"r.d ofthe rieed ro isolate those parls from
is provided to isolate all the circuits concemed

Plugs ancl socket-outlets, connecto$ al1d devices for connection of luminaires

may be used for
537.1.3
providing the isolaiion and switching functions in accordance with Table 537 4'

plug from the outlet or conneclor

The isoiation and srvitching functions are provided by the disconnection of the
liom thc inlet. as aPPlicable.
537-1-4 Not u.;ed

Wherc an installation is supplied from more than one source of energy, one
of which requires a
537,1.5 provide that not more
means ofeatthing independent ofthe means ofearthing ofother sources and it is necessary to
than one means Jfeanili.g is applied at a,y time, a switching device may be inserted in the connection bet\'vee11the
neutml point and the ucatrs of earthing, provided that the device is:
(i)anrultipole.linkeds\\'itchillgdevicearrangedtodisconnectandconnecttheeafihingconductorforthe
''
nppropriut" ,ource at substantially the same time as the related live conductors' or
lelated live
(ii) a switchirg device iuterlocked with a multipole, linked switching device inserted in the
conductolssuchthattheearthingconductorfoltheapplopatesourceshallnotbeintenuptedbeforethe
the live conductols ale leconnected'
related live conductors al]cl shall-be re-established Ilot latel than when
of chapter 46 for a device
switching devices provided in accordance with (i) and (ii) shall meet the Iequilements
for isolation.

537 .2 Devices for isolation

537 .2.1 Devicesforisolationshallbeofatypeforwhichtheisolationfunctionisexplicitlyrecognizedbythe

relcvant product standard or as identified in Table 537 4

537.2.2 Serlricorlductor devices shall not be used as isolating devices'

18?
 537.2.3 Der.ices suitable tbr isolation shall be selected according to the requi:ei--:::. - :rri:r tr:3 r::.i t-]n the
overvoltage categories applicable at theil point ofinstallation.

Devices for isolation shall be designed for over voltage category III or lV except the plug ..; r p,ug and socket-outlet
cornbi[ation identilied in Table 537.4 as suitable for isolation
NOTE: Wher.e clectrically powcred equipment is witli[ the scope ol BS EN 6020.1. the requirem.nli l-or isolatiol of that
standard apply.

537.2,4 Devices lor isolation shall be selected and/or installed so as to pre\enl un\\anled or unintentional
closure (see Regulation 462.3).

This n.ray be achieved by locating the device in a lockable space or lockable enclosure or b}' padlocking or by other
suitable n'reans.

537.2.5 Provision strall be made for securing offJoad isolating devices agailrst un$'anted or uniutentional
opening.

This n]ay be achieved, for exanple, by locating the device ir a Iockable space or lockable enclosure ol by padlocking
Altematively. the off-load device may be interlocked with a load-breaking one.

537.2-6 Means ofisolation shall preferably be provided by a nrultipole switching device which disconnects
all applicable poles ofthe relevarrt supply but single-pole devices situated adjacert to each other are not excluded,
subject to the provisions ofRegulation 461.2.
oad
ing. 537.2.7 Each clevice userl fol isolation shall be cleally identified by position or durable marking to indicate
i\uld the installation or circuit it isolates.
dbell
537 .2.8 Where a link is inserted in the neutml conductor for isolating purposes, the link shall comply with the
following requilemerts:
- it cannot be removed without the use ofa tool, and
- it is accessible to one or more skilled persons only.

537.3 Devices for switching

:r1an 537.3.'1 Functional switching and control devices
.ir e
:.lllt .3.1.1 The devices for functional switching ard control shall be selected in accordance with Table 537.4.
537

537.3.1.2 Furlctional switching devices shall be suitable tbr the most onerous duty thcy ae irtended to Perform.
: lor The chamcteristic ofthe load to be switched shall be considered (e.g. utilization category).

537,3.1.3 Functional switching devices may control the current without necessarily opening the correspondilg
poles.
NOTE: Semicoiductor switching devices and some control auxiliaries are exantples of devices capable of intempting the
cLur-ent in the circuit but not opening the conesponding poles.

,.rcs a 537.3.2 Devices for switching off for mechanical maintenance

: i1lore
:31'l tlle 537 .3.2.1 Selection aDd erection ofdevices for switching off1br mechanical mailtenance shall be in accordance
rvith the following regulations and shall colrply with Regulation group 537 2.

:rr the NOTE: Wher.e elecflically powered cquipment is within the scope of BS EN 60204, the requircments for switching off for
mechanicai maintcnance ofthat standard apply

:: -i livc 537 .3.2.2 Devices for switchirg off for mechanical maintenance shall be inserled in the main supply circuit.
' ri the
','ited. Where a switclr is providcd 1br this purpose, it shall be capable of cutting off the full load current of the relevant
paft of the installation.
- -'rr ice
lnte[uption of a circnit tbr tl]e control of mechanical moverrent is permitted only where a condition equivalent to
the direct interruption olthe main supply is provided by one ofthe fo)lowing:
(i) Supplementary safeguards, such as mechanical retainers
' '\\ tbe (ii) Compliance with the requirements ofa British or Hamonized Standard specification for the cotttt'ol devices
used.
 NOTE: Switching offfor rnechanical maintenance may be achieved, for example, by orre ofthe following:
- multipole su'itch
- cilcuit-breaker
- control and protective switching device (CPS)
- control switch operating a contactol
- plug and socket-outlet.

537 -3.2-3 Devices for switching off lor mechanical maintenance or control switches for such devices shall
require manual operation.

The open position ofthe contacts ofthe device shall be visible or be clearly and reliably indicated.

The indication required by this regulation may be achieved by the use ofthe symbols 'O' and'I'to indicate the open
and closed positions respectively.

537.3.2.4 Devices for switching off for mechanical maintenance shall be clearly identi{ied by position or
durable marking so as to be identifiable for their intended use.

537.3.3 Devices for emergency switching off

NOTE: Etrergency switching off is an emergency operatio[ intended to switch offthe supply ofelectrical energy to all or part
ofan installation where a sk ofelectric shock or another isk ofelectrical origin is involved.

537,3.3.1 Selection and erection of devices for emergency switching off shall be in accordance with the
following regulations and shall comply with Regulation 537.2.
NOTE: Where electrically powered equipme]tt is within the scope ofBS EN 60204, the tequirements for enrergcncy s\vitching
offof that standard apply.

537.3.3.2 The devices for emergency switching off shall be capable of breaking the full load current of the
relevant parts ofthe installation taking into account stalled motor curents where appropriate.

537.3.3.3 Means lor emergency switching offmay consist of:

- one switching device capable ofdirectly cutting off the appropriate supply, or
- a combination ol devices activated by a single action for the purpose of cutting off the appropriate supply.

Plugs al1d socket-outlets shall not be provided for use as means for emergency switching off.

537.3.3.4 Devices for emergency switching off shall provide the switching of the main circuit.

Hand-operated switching devices for direct intenuption ofthe main circuit shall be selected where practicable.

Remote control switching of circuit-breakers, control and protective switching devices or residual cu[ent devices
(RCD) shall be opened by de-energization of coils, or other equivalent failure-to-safety techniques/actuato$.

537.3.3.5 The means of opcrating (handles, push-buttons, etc.) devices for emergency switching off shall be
clearly identified, preferably by colour. [f a colour is used for identification, this shall be RED with a contrasting
background (e.g. yellow).
NOTE: The contrasting background rnay or may not include text.

537.3,3,6 The means of oper ating shall be readily accessible at places where a danger might occur and, where
appropriate, at any additional remote position from which that danger can be removed.

Devices for emergency switching offshall be so placed as to be readily identifiable and convenient for their intended use.

537.3.3.7 The means of operation ofa device for emergency switching off shall be capable of latching in the
'OFF'position, unless both the tneans ofopemtion for emergency switching off and for re-energizing are under the
contlol ofthe same person.

The rclease of an emergency switching device opemted remotely shall not re-energize the relevant pan of the
installation.

The oper.ation ofthe emergency switching device shatl have priority over any other function relative to safety and
shall not be inhibited by any other operation ofthe installation.

537.4 Firefighter'sswitches
537.4.1 Firefighter's su itches shall comply rvith BS EN 60669-2-6 or BS EN 60947-3.

184
 537.4.2 A lirefighter's ss.itch sJrall be provided in rhe low volrage circuir .r;qi1 rng:
(i) outdool liglrting installatiorls operating at a voltage exceeding loir rcriiag;. rnd
(ii) indoor dischatge ligtrting installatiors operating ar a voltage exceedins lo\,. \ (rlrase.
'fhis requirtment does not apply to a portable discharge lighting hurinaire or to a sisn t irating not exceeding 100 W and
f'ed from an accessible socker-outlet
NOTE: Installations in certain prel)1ises subject to licensing conditioDs. such as perrrrl .raiion tbrecoufis, nray requir-e the
illstallation of a firelighter's switch.

537.4.2.1 Every outdool installation on each silgle premises should rvhererer practicable be controlled by a
sirgle lirefighter's switch. Sirnilarly, every intemal installation in each single prernises shoLrld be controlled by a
single firefighter's switch i[depcndent olthe switch for any outdoor installation.

537.4.2.2 Every firefightcr's switch should comply with the following requirements. r.r,here applicable:
(i) for an outdoor installation, the switch should be outside the building and adjacent ro the equipment, or
altematively a notice indicating the position ofthe switch should be placed adjacent to the equiprnent and a
notice should be fixed neat the switch so as to lendel it clearlv distinquishable
(ir) for an indoot installation. the switch should be in the main entrance to the building or in another position to
be agleed with the locai fire authority
(iii) the switch should be placed in a conspicuous position. reasonably accessible to firefighte$, at not more than
2.75 l.r fiorr the ground or the standirrg beneath the switch.

537.4.3 A lirefighte/s switch shall be easily visible, accessible and marked to indicate the installation or pafi
of the ilstallation u'hich it controls

537.4.4 The lbllowing infomation shall be distinctly and durably marked on the fireflghter's switch in a
position where it can be seen clearly by a person standing on the ground at tlte intended site. witl'rout openi[g the
enclosure and when the switch is installed;
'ON' and'OL-F' positiors" in lettels lrot less than 10 nrrr high:
letters reading 'I IREI- IGHTER'S SWITCH'or'L-IRE SWITCII' in letters nor less rhan 10 nm high.
Once installed, the handle offposition shall be up.
NOTE: The'ON'position nteans powered and dre 'OFF' position means unpower-ed.

538 MONITORING DEVICES

538.1 lnsulation monitoring devices (lMDs) for lT systems

538.'t.1 General
lMDs shall be in accordance with BS EN 61557-8.

An IMD is intended to permanently nronitor tlle iusulation resistance ofan lT system and provides an alam where
:- :.4 the insulation resistance R,.is below the response value R,.

Ra is the response value ofthe IMD as described in BS EN 61557-8.

R[is tl']e insulatiotr resistance between the system to which it is connected and either the eafih, the PE conr]ectiolr 01'
anothel reference point fot protective equipotential bonding.

Examples ofthese systeDs would bc an electrical installation, a mobile generator or a saf'ety service.

An IMD shall be installed in an lT systenl where selected to meet with the requirement of Regulation zll1.6.4.

IMDs shall be installed as close as practicable to the origin ofthe pafl ofthe installatio,r to be monirored.

lnstructions shall be provided indicating that when the iMD detects an insulatior fault to eanh. the ilsulation t'ault
shall be located and eliminated in order to restore normal operating conditions with dre shortest practicable delay.

Where the 1T systen is used for continuity of supply, the occuffence ofa first insulation thult shall be indicated at a
suitable locatior'r so it is audible and/or visible by instructed or skilled pe$on(s).
NOTE: This alaln may be relayed though a buLilding management system (BMS).

It is recommended to use an IMD that signals an intefuption of the ureasuremelr connections to the system
colducton and earth.
 538.1.2 lnstallation of insulation monitoring devices

Where a ncutr.al cotductor is clistlibuted, an insulation monitoring device (lMD) may be connected to the neutral
conduclor. In tltis case. no overcunent protective device shall be inserted in the conductor connecting the IMD to
the neutlai.

An IMD shall be corutected symmetrically or unipolar-iy between the live conductors and earth or the PE connection
ot alother ret'ereuce point ibt protective equipotential bondilg.

Where the neutral conductor is not diStributed. the 'line' tenninal of the IMD may be connected:
(i) either to an adificial neutral point with thc three impedances connected to line conductors' or
(ii) to a line conductol.

whcre. in a polyplrase system. the IMD is connected between one line conductor and eal1h, it shall be suitahle to
withstancl at least the linc-to-lil,]e voltage between its 'line'teminal and its 'eafih'teminal'
NOTE: This Iolrage appears across these two tenninals ir the case ofa single insulation fault oD another line conductot

For DC installations. rhe 'line' terminal(s) of the IMD shall be connected either directly to the midpoint, if any' or
to one or all of the supply conducto$.

The supply circuit of IMD shall be connected either to the installation on the same circuit ofthe connecting
point of
the 'line'terminal antl as close as possible to the origin ofthe systern, or to an auxiliary source'

Thc corDecting point to tl're installatior shall be selected in such a way that the IMD is able to monitor the
insulation
ofthe installatior in all operating conditions.
Where the inslallation is supplied from r11ore thar one power supply, connected in parallel, one IMD pel supply shatl
be used, provicled t)iey are iiterlocked in such a way that only one IMD remains connected to the system.
All other
IMDs nonitor thc diicolnected power supply, enabling the reconnection of this supply without any pre-existing
insulation fault.

lMDs shall be able to lncasure the insulation resistance of the system if DC components caused by electronic
eqrlipment. e.g. rectiflers ol collvertols, are contajned in the fault curent.

538.1.3 Setting of the insulation monitoring device

The IMD shall have a selection ofsetting values and be adjusted to suit the respective installation.

When operating nonnally with the maximum ofloads connected, the IMD shall be set to a lower value con espolding
to the ool.11-Ial insulaliol-I of tlle system.
NOTE: A r,alue ol 100 A/V (300 OIV for pre wamirg) ofthe mted system voltage is an example oftypical setting vallles.

Whcre IMDs arc installed in locations where ordinary persons have access to their use they shall be selected
and/or installecl in such a way that it shall be impossible to modify the settings except by the use of a key, a
tool or
a passuord.
538.2 Equipment for insulation fault location in lT systems

Equipment for insulation t'ault location shall be in accordance with BS EN 61557-9. Where an [T system has
been

sclec-ted for contiluity of service. it is recommended to combine the IMD with devices enabling the fault location
on load. Their lunction is to indicate the faulty circuit when the IMD has detected an insulation fau1t.

538.3 Monitoring of off-line circuits

The iusulation monitoring of circuits switched off may be carried out in TN, TT and IT systems with insulatiotr
oronitoring devices (IMDi) provided that the IMD is automatically deactivated whenever the safety equiptnent
is

activated. A prer.ccluisite tbr it is that tlte monitored electrical circuits are isolated fro[r all poles ofthe system.

NOTE: As an cxanrple. this can be applicabJe to a circuit comprising safety equipment which is nolnally de-energiTed such I

thrt the salily equipmcnt is allowed to lr'ork without intervention ofsupply du ng the emergency'

The reduction ofrhe insulation level shall be inrlicated locally by either a visual or an audible signal
with the optron I

of rcl'note indication.

Ilthe equipment from the installation during the off-load insulation measuring process, the insnlation
is disconnected
levcls ro be mcasurcd arc generally very high. The alam threshold should be above 300 kQ.

186
 538.4 Residual current monitors (RCMs)
538.4.1 General
RCMs shall comply with BS EN 62020.

An RCM peuna[ently monitors leakage and fault cunents to earth of the do\ nsream insi"]laiion or pan ihere of
and is iltended to infom the usel about the level ofthese currents ofthat part ofthe insiailation being merniterred.

RCMs are not intelded to provide protection agaimt electric shock.

Where an RCD is installed upstream of the RCM, it is recommended that the RCI\l be set to a residual actuatin-s
curent no higher than halfofthe rated residual operating current (I1") of the RCD.

It is recomnended that RCMs ale installed at the origin ofthe outgoing circuits.

RCMs shall initiate an audible and/or visual signal, which shall continue as long as the fault persists.

538.4.2 RCMS installed in lT systems I

In IT systerrs where interruption of the supply irr case ol a first insulation fault to earth is not required or not I

pemitted, RCMs rnay be installed to indicate the occurrence ofa first insulation fault from a live part to exposed- I

conductive-parts or to earth in accordance with Regulation 411.6.4.

Where used in IT systems, it is recommended to use directionally discriminating RCMs, in order to avoid unwanted
signalling of leakage cuffent w]ren high leakage capacitances are liable to exist downstream lrom the point of
installation ol the RCM.

€^o'\

f",*3

187
 Annex A53
(lnformative)
Device functions and coordination
Table A53.1 - Devices and associated functions

Devices FunctioIrs
Product OCPD(N SCPDA' RCDO) Standard Overload Short-circuit Residurl Switching
protection protection current only
protection
Circtit-breaker x BS EN 60947 2 Yes Yes No No

BS EN 60898 I

BS EN 60898-2

RCCB x BS EN 61008 series No No Yes No

BS EN 62423
RCBO x X BS EN 61009 series Yes Yes Ycs No

BS EN 62423
CBR x x BS EN 60947-2, Yes Yes Ycs No
Annex B

MRCDT x x BS EN 60947-2, Yes Yes Yes No

Annex M

ICB x BS EN 60947-2, No Yes No No

Annex O

Fusc * ith full x BS hN 60269 series Yes Ycs No No

rangc breaking
capacity
(e.g. gC. gM)ir)
Fuse with x BS EN 60269 series No Yes No No
partial range
brcaking
capacity
(e.g. aMlr)
CPS x BS EN 60947-6-2 Yes Yes Ntr No

Contactor BS EN 60947-4- l No No No Yes

BS EN 61095

Overload relay BS EN 60947-4-1 Yes No No No

Switch or BS EN 60947-3 No No No Yes
switch
-disconnector BS EN 60669-2-2

BS EN 60669-2-4

TSE BS EN 609,17-6-l No No No Yes

rr) fuse combination units according to BS EN 60947-3 are considered in this row
1r) generic abbreviations used in this docunent for devices
rr) when associated with a circuit-breaker

188
 A53.1 Basis of correct co-ordination
uJr.,:::.,-j .- i ,!.!ie1 e(ri]rbination oftheir'
The basjs ofthe co-oldiuation between e)ectrical ccluipment is to take
,.lectrical ,'ltat'uttet'i<lrr'. irl older llr\l 1,, ilnpllr:
the safety olan installation (i.e. to avoid equipment combustion due to an electrical iaull). Comblned shorr-
circuit pr.otection ofOCPDs and back-up plotection by an OCPD lelate to the sattn ofan instailation
the safety due to continuiry of service, ifneeded (i.e. to restrict discomrection to the taulty circuil in case of
overcurrent or thult to earlil).

Selectivity between electrical devices provides continuity of seNice and thus avoids dargers lilked to the loss of
supply of speciflc cilcuits.

As3.2 Parameters
The panleters lbr the corect co-ot'dination between electrical devices rtay be:
- design cufl'ent
prospective shoft-cit'cuit or l'ault current
operating timc of devices
system voltage
energy (tet-through lrt values)
peak let-through current.

In addition, lbr fuses, the fbllowing parameterc should be corsidered:

pre-arcing Irt and pre-arcing time
operating Irt and opemting ti1ne.
\,r Device co-ordination table

TabteA53.2 shows the types ofcombinatiot ofdevices and cells to show how various tnodes ofco-ordination can
aft'ect safety.

\o

\o

\o

\o
 Table 453.2 - Device co-ordination in a LV electrical installation

Rc!Ulition \lodes of co-ordinatioI1 Devices involved Impact on Impact or1 safely

safety of due to corltiruity of
installation service

536.4. t.2 Between OCPDs

536.4. L3

Selectivity
536.,1. r.1 Between RCDs Yes

Between OCPD and Yes

536..1.1.5
RCD

516.4 2.l Combined sholt-citcuit OCPDs Yes

protection
5i(,.,1.2.1 Between OCPD and Yes
contactors. overload
Cullent ol time relays
based conditiolls 5i6.4.2.1 Back-up protection ir case Bet$'een OCPD and
ofshort-circuit switched TSE or
impu)se relays

516,1.2.4 Betweerr OCPD and Yes

RCCB
5t6.,1.3.1 Bctuccn OCPD and Ycs
contactor or SCPD

516.4.1.2 Between OCPD and Yes

Protcclion in case ol switched TSE or
ovclload
inpulse relays
5i6.'+.3.2 Between OCPD and Yos
RCCB

Voltage based 516..14 SelcctiVity Bet\\,een OCPDs

conditions equipped rvith
undel-voltagc lclay

a53.3 Between circuit-breakers or circuit-breaker and cPS or circuit-breaker and overload

relay or circuit-breaker and motor starter

Sclcctivjty il1 casc ofoverload is vclificd by the con.rparison oftime/curert chamcteristics ofthe devices involved'
The naximum operating tirne of the device on the load side must be lower than the non{dpping tine
of the
in both the time and cunent axes provides
circuit-bteakel loi any ove oad currcnt. Separ-ation ofthe characteristics
seleclive opcraliol1 i0 this zonc.

A53.4 Between fuses

involved'
Selcctivity in case of ovetload is vclilled by the compalison of time/current chalacteristics of the fuses
Thc total operating time ofthe flrse on the load side must be lower than the pre-arcing time ofthe fuse on the_supply

sicle. Fuses to BS EN 60269-2 of the same utilization category (e.g. type gG) with rated curent
of l6 A and above
u.ill proviclc total selectivity ifthe ratio ofthe lated cunents is 1.6:1 or gleatel sepalation ofthe characteristics in
borh the time and current axes provides selective operation in this zone'

A53.5 Between circuit-breaker (upstream) and fuse (downstream)

Selectivity il case of overload is verificd by cotllparison of the time/cufent chamctefistics, taking into account
the tr-ip s;tting of the cilcuit-bteakel u,here applicable. When using published time-curent chalacte stics,
the
for device and the minimum operating time cuNe
olaximum opeiating titre cur\e must be taken the downstream
must be taken for the upstream device. Separation of the chamctelistics in both the time and
current axes provides
selqctive opcmtion in this zone.

453.6 Between fuse (upstream) and circuit-breaker (downstream)

into account the
Sclecti!ity in case oloverload is verified by comparison ofthe time/cuffent chamctefistics, taking
as given by
I ip setting of the cilcLiit-breaker \&ltere applicable. The nraximum operating tirne ofthe circuit-breaker
product
the nanutncturer lnust be lo\\,er tlran the ininimum pre-arcing tirne ofrhe fuse as given by the
standard.
in this zone'
Sepamtion of the chafacteristics in both the time and culrent axes prol'ides selective operation

190
 A53.7 Between circuit-breakers
Generally, reference should be n.rade to the manufacturers'docunentalion.

In principle, selectivity is assured up to the fault current level at which the peak current lerthough ofthe downstrean
ciriuit-bieaker is less than the peak value conesponding to the instantaneous tripping ler el ofthe upstream cjrcuit-
breaker. Where the upstream circuit-breaker has dedicated selective behai iour. lhe selectility lilrit might be higher.

A53.8 Between fuses

Selectivity ilr case of shofi-citcuit is verilied by comparison of thc I:t values. The maximrur operating Irt value of
the fuse on tlte load side should be lower than the minimum pre-arcing []t value ofthe t'use on the supply side. Fuses
to BS EN 60269-1 of the same utilization categoly (e.g. type gG) with rated curett of l6 A and above will provide
total selectivity if the mtio ofthl3 rated currents is 1.6:1 or greater.

A53.9 Between circuit-breaker (upstream) and fuse (downstream)

Ttre peak let-through cu[ent of t[']e fuse should be lower than the minimum instantaneous tripping curent of the
circuit-breaker'.

Data for peak values of fuses should be taken from the relevant standard or the manufacturers' documentation. If
data is taken 1ioru the lnanufactulet. this should be stated in the documentation olthe installation.

A53.'l O Between fuse (upstream) and circuit-breaker (downstream)

The minimuru pre-arcing lrt value ofthe fuse should be higher than the maximum let-through Irt Yalue ofthe circuit-
breakcr for any shofi-circuit cun'ent up to the maximum prospective shofi-circuit cuffent to be considered. Data for
I:t values of f'uses should be taken fiom the relevant standard/or the malufacturers' documentation lf data is taken
frorn the matrulacturer. this should be stated in the documentation ofthe installation. The maximum let-through I:t
value ofthe circuit-breaker should be obtained ftom the manufacturers' data.

Possible fault currents in systems with semiconductors

Io the diagrams of the following Figure 453.1, circuits with most likely fault cuffents in connection with
semiconductor devices are shown.

rd
 Figure A53.'l - Possible fault currents in systems with semiconductors

Circuii diagram with fauh Shape of oad cuffent /L Shape of earlh fau I c!rent /F

RCD lripp ng

1 AC, A, F. B

2 AC. A. F. B
L1
L2
L3

3 lingle

bridge A,F.B

Circuil diagram wilh iault Shape of oad .!(ent /L Shape of earih fau l curent /F

RCD t pp ng

5 Two pulse bridse, ha f conlrolled A,F,B

L
N

PE

6 Slngle-phase wilh smooth .g B

L1
L2
L3

N
PE

wo-Pu se brldge betvveen phases B

L1
t2
N
PE

8 B

L1
L2
L3

N
PE

9 B

L1
t2
L3
N
PE

192
 CHAPTER 54
EARTHING ARRANGEM ENTS AN D PROTECTIVE CON DUCTORS
CONTENTS

541 GENERAL
542 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS
542.1 General requiremenls
542.1.2 Supply arrangements
542.1.3 lnstallation earthing arrangements
542.2 Earth electrodes
542.3 Earthing conductors
542.4 Main earthing terminals or bars
543 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
543.1 Cross-sectional areas
543.2 Types of protective conductor
543.3 Preservation of electrical continuity of protective conductors
543.4 Combined protective and neutral (PEN) conductors
543.5 Earthing arrangements for combined protective and functional purposes
543.6 Earthing arrangements for protective purposes
543.7 Earthing requirements for the installation of equipment having high protective conductor
cuffents
543.7.'l General
543.7 .2 Socket-outlet final circuits
544 PROTECTIVE BONDING CONDUCTORS
544.1 Main protective bonding conductors
544.2 Supplementary bonding conductors

'193
 CHAPTER 54

EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS AND PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

541 GENERAL
541 .1 Every ]lteans ofeathing and every protective conductor shall be selected and erected so as to satisty
the lequircDents of the Regulations.

541 .2 Thc earthirg systern ofan installation may be subdivided, in which case each parl thus divided shall
conply with the reqLLitements ol tltis chapter
541 .3 Where there is also a lightning protection system, reference shall be made to BS EN 62305'

542 EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS

542.',| General requirements

542.1.1 The eafihing arrangements ntay be usedjointly or separately fol protective and functional put-poses,
according to the rcquirenents of the installation

S4Z-1.201 The maill eafthjng teminal sha]l be connected with Eatlh by one of the methods described in
Regulations 542. .2. I to 542.1 .2.3 , as appropriate to the type of system ol which the installation is to
1
fom a pafi
and in corrpliarce with Regulations 542. I .3. I and 542. I .3.2.
NOTE: Reter to Pafi 2 and Appcrdix 9 lbr dellnitions ofsysten]s
542.1.2 Supplyarrangements
542.1.2-,1 For a TN-S system, rneans shall be provided for the main eatlhing terninal ofthe installation to be
colnectecl to the eafihed poillt ol the source of energy. Pafi of the connectiol rnay be fotmed by the distributor's
lires alld equipmerl.

542.1.2-2 TN,C-S systerr, wherc prcrective multipie earthilrg is ptovided, means shall be providcd lbr the
For a
main eafthing terminal oltlre installation to be connected by the distributol to the neutral ofthe source ofenergy'

For.a TT or IT systenl, the main eafthing temiual shall be connected via an eafthing conductor to
an
542.1-2.3
earth electrode corrplying with Regulation 542.2

542.1.2.4 Whcr.e the supply to an ilstallation is at high voltage, protection against faults between the high
voltage supply and earth shall be provided in accordalce with Section 442
542.1-3 lnstallationearthingarrangements
542/1.3.1 The earthing arangements slla1L be such that:
(i) the value of impeclance from the consrnner''s main earthing terminal to the earthed poil1t ofthe suppty tbr TN
systens" or Earlh tbr TT and tT systens, is in accordance with the protective and functional requirements
1()

ofthe ilstallation. and cottsidered to be continuously effective, and

(ii) earth l'ault cul.lents a[d protective conductor cuffents which may occul are carried without dangel,
particularly fiom thertnal, thelnomechanical and electromechanical stresses, and
(iii) they are adequately robust or have additional mechanical protection appropriate to the assessed conditions
of cxternal inlluel ce.

S4Z-,1.3.2 plecautions shall be taken against the risk ofdamage to other rrctallic pafts through electlolysis.

542.1.3,3 Where a lumber of installations have separate eafthing arrangernents. any protective conducto$
to flow
conunou to aury of these installatiols shall eithel be capable of carrying the rnaxillnm fault cu[ent )ikely
through rhem or be ear.thecl withiD one installatiofl olly and insulated t'rom the eatlhilg an'angements of a1ly other
instaliation. I11 thc latter circumstances, if the plotective conductor fonls part ofa cable, the protective conductot
shall bc earthecl only in the installation containing the associated protectivc device

542.2 Earth electrodes

542.2.1 1'he design userl fbr, and the colstruction of, an eafth electrode shall be such as to rvithstand dautage
and to take account of possible increase in resistalce due to corrosiol't'
 542.2.2 Suitablc carth electrodes shall be used. The lbllou rni :..:r - : i:fih electr.odc are recosnized for the
purposcs of the Regulations:

(i) Earth rods or pipes

(ii) Earth tapes ol wires
(iii) Earth plates
(iv) Underground shxctural metalwork elrbedded in fourdations or other metal$ ork installed in the foundations
(v) Welded metal reinlorcernent ofconcrete (except pre-stressed concrete) embedded in the ground
(vi) Lead sheaths ard other netal coverings ofcables. where not precluded bl.Regulation 542.2.5
(vii) othcr suitable underground metalwork.
NOTE: Ftulher inlb ration on earlh electrodes can be found in BS 7.1i0.

542.2.3 Where foundation earth electrodcs are installed. the materials and dinrensions ofthe earlh electrodes
shall be selected to withstand corrosion and to have adequate mechanical strength.
NOTE: lfa lighhiDg protection system (LPS) is present. BS EN 62305-l applies.

542.2.4 The type and embedded depth ofan earrh electrode shall be such that soil drying and freezing will
not increase its resistance above the required value.

rl 542.2.5 The usc. as al eatl}t electrode, ofthe lead sheath or other metal covering ofa cable shall be subject
to all ofthe following conditions:
(i) Adequate precar.rtions shall be taken to prcvent excessive deterioration by corrosion
(ii) The sheath or covering shall be in cft'ective contact with Earth
(iii) The consent ofthe ouner ofthe cable shall be obtained
(iv) Auangements shall exist fot the owner ofthe electrical installation to be wamed ofany proposed change to
the cable which rnight aft'ect its suitability as an eartlr electrode.

542.2.6 A metallic pipe for gases or flan.rmable liquids shall not be used as an earth electrode. The metallic
pipe ofa water utility supply shall not be used as an earth electrode. Other rnetallic water supply pipework shall not
be used as an earth electrode unless precautions are taken against its removal and it has been considered for such a use.

542.2.7 Ar carth electrode shall not consist ofa metal object immersed in water
542.2.8 Wherc an eanh electrode consists ofparts that mustbe connected together, connections shall be made
by rveldiug, pressule connectoN, c]amps or other stlitable mechanical connectors.

542.3 Earthing conductors

542.3.1 Every earthing conductor shall comply with Section 543 and, where PME conditions apply, shall
meet the requirements of Regulation 544.1.1 for the cross-sectional area of a main protective bonding conductor.
:TN In additiou, where buried in the ground, the eafthing conductor shall have a cross-sectional axea not less than that
1:11ts stated in Table 54. l. For a tape or stdp conductor, the thickness shall be such as to withstand mechanical damage
and conosion.
:-:ieI. NOTE: For futther infunnation sce BS 7430.

::tol1s TABLE 54.1 -

Minimum cross-sectional area of a buried earthing conductor

Not protected against mechanical

damage
. .,tors
Protected against colrosion by a 2.5 mmr copper 16 mnrr copper
io* sheadr
- -,rheL l0 mmr steel 16 rnmr coated steel
:.atol' Not protected against coffosion 25 nrml copper'

50 mnl: steel

542.3.2 The connectiol'l of an earthing conductor to an earth electrode or otlret means of earthing shall
--:nlge be soundly rlade and be electrically and mechanically satisfactory. and labelled in accordance with Regulation
s14.13.1(i). It shrll be suitahlr protccted aeainsl corro\ior. li
I
 542.4 Main earthing terminals or bars
542.4.1 h eren installation a main earthi g rel.util1al shall be provided 10 connect the lbllowing to the
eafihing conductor:
(i) The cilcuit protective corlductols
(ii) The protective bonding conductols
(iii) Functionalearthingconductors(ifrequiled)
(iv) Lightnirg protection systern bondir)g cordLrclor. if any (see Rcguiatiorl 4l1.3.1.2).
542,4.2 To thcilitate rneasule[e|t oftlie fcsislancc ot the eafil]ing alrangements, nlealrs shall be provided in
an accessible position tbr alisconnecting the eafi[ring conductor'. Such means may conveniently be cornbined with
the main earthilg ternrinal or bar'. Any joint shall be capable of discorulection orrly by means ola tool.

543 PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

543.1 Cross-sectional areas

543.1.1 The cross-sectional area of evely protective corrductor, other thall a protective bonding conductor,
shall be:
(i) calculated in accordance with Regulation 543.1.3. or
( ii) selected in accordance witb Regulation 543.1.4.

Calculation in accoldance with Regulation 543. LJ is necessary iltlre choice olcross-sectional area olline conductors
has been dcteuined by consitlerations of shorrcircLrit cuu'ent and if the eath lhult cunent is expected to be less
thar the short-circr.rit curlelrt.

lf the protective conducfor':

(iii) is rot an integral part of a cable, or
(iv) is not formed by conduit, dlLcting or tlunkirlg. or
(v) is not cortaiued in an encloslre tbt.lrrcd by a wiring system,

the cross-sectional area shall be oot less than 2.5 [un] copper equivalent ifprotection agairst rnechanical damage
is provided, ard 4 Drrur copper equivalcnt il'nrcchanical p|oteclioI is not plovided (see also Regulation 54i.3.I ).

For a protective conductor Lruried in the ground Rcguiation 542.1.1 fbr earthing conductors also applies. The cross-
sectional area of a protective bot]dillg co[dLrctol sha]l cornply with Section 544.

543,1.2 Where a protective conductol is comrlon to two ol mole cilcLlits. its closs-sectional arca shall be:
(i) calculated i[ accordalce with RcgulatioD 5u13, 1.3 fbl the r)rost onerous of the values of 1aLilt cunent alld
operating time encountered in each of the valior-ts circuits. ot'
(ii) selected in accodance with Rcgulntion 543.1,4 so as to correspond to the closs-sectiolal area ofthe Iargest
lire cordirclor ol'the cir(uil:.
543,1.3 The cross-sectional alea. whete calculated, sliall be not less than tlre valuc dctcrnined by the
followirg lbnlrula or shall be obtained by rel'er:ence to tsS 7454r

S: il{k
NOTE: Tltis equatio[ is aD adiabatic cquatioo .rntl rs applicable fbr disconneciion times not exceeding 5s.

where:
S ofthe corductol in nrml
is the nominal cross-sectiooal area
I is the value in amperes (rus tbr AC) of fault culrert lbr a thult ol negligible impeda[ce, which can
flow through the associatecl protective device- due account being taken of the cufferrt ]inliting elTect
ofthe circuit ill1pedances and tlre linriting capabi]it] (lrt) olthat protective device
t ofthe protective device in seconds corresponding to the t'ault cu el'rt I anperes
is the operating tilr're
k is a factor taking accoult oftl]e resistivity. teurpelatule coeflicient and heat capacity olthc conductor
lnaterial, and the appropriate initial and linal lenrperatrLres.

196
 \hlues of k ior pr.rre.-rir e conductors in \ aliolls use or j-i.l
service are as given ln Tiibl.. 10 6. The vaiues are based
on d1c initial and final tempcralures indicated in each
table.
\\ here the applicatiotl ofthe formula produces a non-standard
size. a conrluclrrr harinr a larger. starldard closs-
iectionai area shall be used

TABLE 54.2 _
values of k for insulated protective conduclor not incorporated
in a cable and not bunched with cables,
or for seperate bare protective conductor in contact wiih
Jr" but not bunched with cables,
"ou"rinq
where the assumed initial temperature is 30 "C

Irsulatioll ofprotective conductor or cablc covcrir!:

\laterial ofconduclor
70 "c 90.c 90 "t'
thermoplasric thennoplastic themlosettins
( opper
143/133'k l43i13l* 176
Alurrinium 95/88* 95j883 lt6
Stecl 52 52 64
Assumed irlitial temperature 30 "c 30 "c 30 "c
Final temDemhn-. 160 "c/140 "c'N 160'C/1.10'C* 250 "C
{bove 300 urnrr

TABLE 54.3
Values of k for protective conductor incorporated in a
-
cable or bunched with cables,
where the assumed initial temperature is 70.C or greater

Insulation material
\latcrial ol conductor
70 "c 90 .c 90.(
thermoplastic tl'rel.lnoplastjc thcfirosetting
L opp.'r' i t5/103'l 100/86* i43
llunrinium 76t68* 66!57* 94
lisuurcd initial tcnlperaturc .c
"c
70 90.(' 90
: rnal lenrrT er'anrre
160.C/t40.c* 160'C/140.C* 250 .C
* \bove 300 mm-l

TABLE 54.4 -
Values of k for for the sheath or armour of a cable as the protective
conductor
Insulatiolt l'natc.ial
\hr!'r'ial of conduclor
70 "c 90 .(' 90 "c
thennoplastic the]]noplastic thelntosellinc
-{lumtnlum 9i 85 85
Sreel
5t 46 16
Lead )6 23 23
\ssumcd iuitial tclrperaturc 60.c 80'c 80 "c
Final tcrnperatur-c 200 .c 200 "c 200.c

TABLE 54.5 -
Values of k for steel conduit, ducting and trunking as the protective
conductor
Irsulation nlatcrial
laterial olprotcctivc conductor
70 'c 90 "c 90.c
thermopiastic thermoplastic 1l'r!'rnroseltinq
: :-. ronduit. du!^ling and tr 47 ,+.1
5S
. - .:neLl tnitial lentpc ltuae .c
50 "c 60 60.c
:Clllocrlhr|i: 160 "C t60.c 250.C
 TABLE 54.6 -
Values of k for bare conductor where there is
no risk of damage to any neighbouring material by the temperature indicated
NOTE: The telnpemtures indicated are valid only where they do not impair the quality ofthe connectioDs.
Conditiol1s
Material ofcotduclot Visible and in Normal conditions Fic risk
lcstl-ic1ed areas

Copper 159 I38

Aluminiun 125 105 9l
Stecl 82 58 50

AssLrnred initial tenlperature 30'cl l0'c l0 "c

Final ternperalure
Coppcr corlductor 500'c 200 "c 150'c
Alunri iun] conductor' 300.c 200 .c 150 "C
Steel conductor 500 "c 200 "c 150'c

543.1.4 Whele it is desired not to calculate the minimum cross-sectional area of a protective conductor in
accordance with Regulatir:n 543. L3, the cross-sectional area rnay be detennined in accordance with Table 54.7.

Where the application of Table 54.7 produces a non-standard size, a conductor having a larger standard cross-
sectional area shall be used.

. TABLE 54.7 -
Minimum cross-sectional area of protective conductor
in relation to the cross-sectional area of associated line conductor

lvlininrLnr cross sectional area ofthe corr-cspondinS pR)tective concluctor-

C ross ricclional alca oflirrc
colrductor lfthe plotective conductor is Ifthe protective corductor is
S
ofthe same material not ofthe sarne nraterial
as thc linc conductor as the line conductor
(1111nr) (rnmr)

s< 16

t6<s<35

s>35

where:
kl is the value of k lbr the line conductor, selected from Table 43.1 in Chapter 43 according to the
materials ofboth cor'rductor and insulation.
k, is the vaiue ofk lbl the protective conductor', selected fl'onr lables 54.2 to 54.6, as applicablc.

1qR
 543.2 Types of protective conductor
one or nlore of th' tbiilr$ ing:
543.2,1 A protective conductor ma"v col]sist of
(i) A single-cote cable
(ii) A corductot in a cable
\a-ith insulated live conductors
(iii) An insulated or bare conductor in a common ellclosurc
(iv) Aiixed bare or insulated conducto
or amotu ing of a cable
(v) A nletai coYering, tbr exanrple' tile sheath' screen continuous suppofi
other encloswe or electrically
(vi) A rnetai conduit' metaliic cable managei'nent systelr ol
sYstem for condLlctors
543 2 6
(vii) an extaneous-conductive-pafi complying rvith Regulation
or controlgear assembly or busbar
enclosute ot frame of a lorv voltage switchgear
543,2.2 Whete a metal
truoking systefl is r.,,"d u' u p'ottci'i
t-0"*t' ii shall satisfy the.following three requirements: such a way as
in
construction or by suitable connection'
(i) Its electrical continuity shall be assured' eitherorbyelectrochcmical deterioration
to bc plotectcd agai"tt t"tf.'u'itui "f''trlical
(ii)Itscross-sectionalateashailbeatleastequaltotlratresultingfromtheapplicationofRegulation543.l,or
series
*i,f., ifr. apiropriate part ofBS EN 61439
verified by test in a..orOun"" tap-offpoint'
irr protective conducto$ at eveq/ predetemined
(iii)It shall pemlit the connection ofother
wires or other flexible metallic
pafis' or
oil pipe' flexible ol ptiable conduit' support
.l 543.2.3 A gas pipe, an
iti ,r",r*r service, shall not be selected
as a protective conductor'
constructional parts ,uu1..t to nr.Jilunl.'ut^.ir*r
543 2 1 and of cross-
described in items (i) to (iv) of Regulation
543.2.4 A protective conductor of the type s
be ofcoppet'
sectional arca [0 mtnr or less' shall
of a cable' in particular the sheath of
a
sheath ffare
543.2.5 Thc metal covering including the 1111r,*1ated'
purposes and metal conduit, may be used as a protectlve
,nineral insulated caur", t*nting iJ
Jrrcti,ig fol
"le"tri"al (ii) of Regulation 543 2.2'
corductor fbr the asro"iur.a .o.uir.irl;,
,"ii!n", u*r,, *orirernents of items 1i) and
extlaneous-conductive-pafi may
be used as a
prohibited by Regulation 54323':n
543.2.6 Except as
the follorving requitemerts:
ii"l"",ir. .""ar""r'if it s;tisflcs all connection' in such a way as to
assured' cither by construction or by suit:ble
(i) Electrical contrnuity shall be
be protccted agalnst
t}'"tical or electrociremical dcterioration
'"tt.'initut'
(ii)Thecross-Sectionata,.a,hullb"utleastequaltothatresultillgflolntheapplicationofRegulation54].1.1
its removal
shall be taken againsl
(iii) Unless compelsatory measures aIe providecl' precautiolls
suitably adapted'
(iu) t, hu. b..n aotsidered for such a ttse and' iflecessary'
tntnking or ducting or the metal sheath
plotective conductor is lbrmed by metal conduit'
543.2.7 Where the
ol each accessory shall be connected by
a separate protectlve
tenniral
a'd,,or amor,rr of a cable. tlre ."rtr.,irg
in the lssociated box or other enclosure'
conductot to atl eartf i"g t"'-l'ittoi intoiorated

543.2.8 Not usecl

543.2.9 whele the cllcnrt

Except whele circLrit eorr
oro[eclrve cond*toi
protective -iy
11l:11"^1,::,"",T:Tl.:i::'i.li[:ii'jffi'.'ilXiTil:
543.2.9 ,,,g n"uf air.r,,t shall also be mn in the
*^o*i"r{ orofthe
urs ling' the circuit prgtecti\.:.con1::to]^::-tn
all 01 the conouctors rrrrE'l
"';."d ffi;;hing teminal at the ^.,"'".rthe cilcuit.
origin of the circuit'
",-i"i-ir*
lbmr ol a ring having both etrds conr
shall oot be used as a PEN conductor
543.2.',10 A separate lretal enclosure for cable
of protective conductors
543.3 Preservation of electrical continuity
chemical deteriol.ation and
protected against mechanical and
s43.3.1 Aprotective coudnctor shall be suitably
eiectrodynanric effccts'
except as
for inspection' testing and maintenance
543.3"2 Every connection ard joint shall be accessible
orovided by Regulation 526'3

I
 543.3.201 A protective conductor havrlg a cross-sectiorlal area Llp to and including 6 rnurr shall be protected
throughout by a cove|ing at leasl equivalcut to that plovided by the insulation of a single cole rron-sheathed cable
ofappropriate size having a voltage latirlg ofat least 450/750 \2. except lbr the lbllowing:
(i) A protectiv(] conductor forning parl of a nlultiool e cable
(ii) A netal couduit. metallic cable malagenrert systelD or other elclosure or electrically co[tir]uous supporl
systerr tbr conductols. rvlrere lsecl rs a protective conductol.

Whele the sheath of a cablc' incorporatilg alt rurirtsirlated prolcctive corlductor of cross-sectional alea up to atrd
including 6 urnr is reuroved adjacent to.joiuts and ternilations. the protective colductol shall be pr-otected by
insulating sleeving complying with BS EN 60684 selies.

543.3.3.101 No switchirg device shali be irseted i[ a protective conductor, except:

(i) as pemitted by Regulation 537.1.5
(ii) a multipole, linked switching in whjch the plotective corlductor cilcuit is not interupted before the live
conductors and is re-established lot later than wheu the liYe conductors are recornected
(iii) a switching device interlocked with a multipole. linked switching device i[serted in the live conducto$
such that the protective conductor circuit shall not be interrupted before the live couductors ald shall be
re-established lot later than when the live coodLicto$ are reconnected. or
(iv) amultipole plug-in device in which the plotective conductol circuit shall not be intenupted belble the live
conductors and shall be le-established not later thau whetr the live conductors are reconnected.

Switchilg devices provided in accordance with (i). (ii), (iii) and (iv) shall meet the requirerreuts olChapter 46 and
Section 537 fol a device tbr isolation.

Joints for test purposes that can be discoruected o11ly by the use ofa tool rray be insefied in a proteqtive conductor.

543"3,4 Where electrical eartll rnonitoring is used. rur dedicated devices (e.9. operatitrg sensors. coils) shall
be connected in series \\,ilh tlle protective cotductor (see BS 4444).

543.3.5 An exposed-conductive-part of eqLripment shall 1lot be used to lbrm a protectivc conductor fol other
equipment except as provided by Regulations 543.2.I . 543.2.2 and 543.2.5.

543.3.6 Eve$/joiut in nretallic couduit sha1l be mechanically and electrically continuous.

543.4 Combined protective and neutral (PEN) conductors

543.4.1 PEN corductor shall not be Lrsed witlriu au inslallation except as pemitted by Regulation 541.4.2.
NOTE: Rcgulation 8(4) ol dre Elcctricity Safity. Quality ancl Corrtinuity Regulations (ESQCR) prohibits thc usc of PEN
conductors irl corls lncrs' ilrstallations

543.4.2 The provisions ofRcgulations 543.4.3 to 54J..1.8 rlray bc applied only:

(i) whcre any necessary autllorization i'or us!'of a PEN conductor has been obtaincd and where the installation
complies with the cotditions lbr that authodzation. or
(ii) where the installation is supplied by a privately o\\,red transfolmer or conveftor in such a way that there is
11o metallic connection (except fbr the eanhing conllection) with the distributol's networ-k, cu
( iii) whele the supply is obtained flonl a plivale gerreratiug plant.
543.4.3 If, fi-orn any poillt ofthe instailation. the neut|al aDd protective functions are plovided by separate
conductors, those corlductols shall lrot thel1 be reco[rected together bcyond that point. At the point of sepalation.
separate tenninals ol bars shall be plovided 1br the protective and [eutral conductols. The PEN conductor shall
be connected to the te ninals or bar intended for d]e protective earthil'lg conductor and the neLLtrai conductor. The
corductarce ofthe teurinal link or bar shall be not less than that specilied in Regulation 543.4.5.

543,4,4 The outer conductor of a concentric cable shall rot be coluron to nrore than one cilcuit. This
requirernent does not preclude the use ola trviu or nulticr-rre cable to sel've a nu[]ber ofpoints contained withiu one
final circuit.

543.4.5 The conductance ofthe outer conductor ot a concentric cable (fleasuled at a ten]pelatue of20 "C) shall:
(i) for a single-corc cable. be not less thal that ofthe intenul conductor
(ii) fbr a multicore cable serving a r:urnber of points cortained withirr one linal circuit or having the intemal
conductors connected in parallel. bc no1 lcss than that ol the internal conductors connected in parallel.

200
 543.4.6 At er er.l ioint ir't tl'te outcr conductor ola conccntt:; - -::.: 'il a rcrmination. the continuiq of
'-:--
by'' a conductot additional
lhat.joint shall be su1'rpletnented to an\ r'11.',:-' .':.: :.rr sealing arrd clalrping tl]e oritel'
corlductor. The corductatrce ofthe additiorlal conductot shall be noi l:., : .; specilied in Regulatiott 543.4.5
tin thc outer colductol.
543.4.7 No means ofisolatiol.t or switching shall be inserted in the outer conductor of a concentric cable.

543.4.8 Excepting a cable to BS EN 60702-1 installed in accordance \\'ith th!' manuthctlrer's instructiol]s.
the pEN conductor olevery cable shall be insulated or have ar insulating cor cring .uitable ibr the highest voltage
to which it uray be subjected.
I
543.4.201 For a fixed installation. aconductor ofa cabte not subject to flexing and har ing a cross-sectional area
not less than l0 mrrr lor copper or l6 mmr for aluminium may serve as a PEN conductor pro\ ided thal the part of
the installation concemed is not supplied through an RCD.

543.5 Earthing arrangements for combined protective and functional purposes

543,5,1 Where earthing for combined plotective and filnctional puryoses is tequiled. tlte requirements firt'
protective mcasulcs shall take precedcnce

543.6 Earthing arrangements for protective purposes

543.6.1 where overcuffent protective devices are used for fault protectio1r. the protective conductor shall be
incel'pomtcd ill tl']e same wi ng system as the live conductors or in their immediate proximity'
I
543.7 Earthing requirements for the installation of equipment having high protective
conductor currents
543.7 .1 General

I 543,7.1.20'l Equipmcnt having a protective conductor curent exceeding 3.5 lllA bul l'Iot exceeding 10 mA- shall
bc L'ither penranently connected to the fixed wifitlg ofthe installation \\,itl']out the use ofa plug and socket-outlet
60309-2'
or
connccted by Ineans ofa plug and sockeloutlet complying with BS EN

543,7,1.202 Equiprrent having a plotcclivc conductol. current exceeding l0 rrA shall be collectcd to the supply
bl one olthc following tnethods:
(i) permal1ently corrnected to the wiring ofthe installation, with the protectivc colductor selected in accordancc
with Rcgulation 543.7.1 .203. The pemanent connection to the wiling lnay be by nrcans of a flexiblc cable
1ii) A flexible cablc wilh a plug and socket-outlet conplying with BS EN 60309-2. provided that either:
(a) the protective conductor ofthe associated flexible cable is ofa cross-sectional aleit not less than 2.5rrmr
for plugs rated at 16 A and llot less tllan 4 mmr fot plugs t'ated ah()vc l6 A- ot
(b) the protective conductor olthe associated flexible cable is of a cross-scctioltal area not less than that of
The lir're conductor
(iii) A protective conductor complying with Section 543 with an eadh lnonitoring system to BS 4444 installed
which, in the eYent ola continLrity 1ault occurring i1,] the plotective colductor. auto)natically disconnects d]e
supply to the equiPmert.

543.7.1.203 The rviring of every final circuit ard distribution circuit irtended to supply one or |nore items of
:quipment. such that the lotal protective conductor cunent is likely to excced l0 lnA. shall have a high inregrity
t' :iorective corlnection complying with o:re'or more ofthe lollowing:
(i) A sirgle protective condlLctol'having a cross-sectiolal area ofnot less tlran l0 tnn2. complying with the
requirerrents ofRegulations 543 2 and 543.3
i ii) A single copper protective conductol. having a ctoss-sectional area of not less than 4 tnmr. complyitlg
with ii,c r.equi.ements ofRegulations 543.2 and 543.3, the plotective conductor being enclosed to provide
additional protection against uechanical damage, for example. within a flexible conduit
iii) Two ildividual plotective conductols, each complying with the requiletnellts of section 543. The two
pr.otective conductors may bc ofditlerent types, e.g. a lnetal conduit togethel with an additional conductol'
of a cable enclosed in tlle same colduii.

.,.rire the two indivirtual protective conductors are both incoryorated in a uulticole cable. the total cross-sectioDal
l0 1nlr1r. One of the prote.'tivc
---'l of all the conducton including thc'live conductors shall be not less than
wire braid sclecn incorporatid in the const:uction of
- :,luctors may be fbrmed by th.,',',.tullia sheath, annour or
-. iable and couplying r,vith Regulation 5'13.2.5

201
 (iv) An eafih monitoling systelr to BS 4444 may be installed which, in theeventofa continuity fault occurring
ilt the protective couductol, automatically disconnects the supply to the equipment
(v) Connection ofthe equipDrert to the supply by means ofa double-wound transformer ol equivalent unit, such
as a motor-altenator set. the prctective conductor ofthe illcoming supply being connected to the exposed-
condlLctive-parts ofthe equiprnent and fo a point ofthe secondary winding ofthe h?nsfoflner ol equivalent
device. The protecrive conductor(s) between the equipmeflt and the tr-anstbrmer or equivalent device shall
comply with one ofrhe an'argemerts described in (i) to (iv) above.

543,7,1,204 Where two protective conductors are used in accordance with Regulation 543.7.1.203(iii), the ends
ofthe protective conductors shall be terminated independently ofeach other at all connection poillts throughout the
circuit. e.g. the distlibution board, julction boxes and socket-outlets. This requires an accessory to be provided with
two sepamte carth teminals.

543.7.1-205 At the distribution boald inibmation shall be provided indicating those circuits having a high
protcctive conductor curent. This informatjon shall be positioned so as to be visible to a person who is modifying
or extendiug the circuit.
543.7 .2 Socket-outlet final circuits
543.7.2.201 For a tinal circuit with a number of socket-outlets or connection units intended to supply two or
nore items ofequipment, where it is know1l or reasonably to be expected that the total plotective conductor current
in uonnal service will exceed l0 urA. the circuit shall be provided with a high integrity protective conductor
courrection con'rplying with the requirements ofRegulation 543.7.1. The ibllowing arangements ofthe final circuit
are acceptable:
(i) A rfug final circuit with a ring protective conductor Spurs, if provided, require high integrity protective
conductor corulectiots complying with the requirements of Regulation 543.7.1
1ii) A radial final circLdt with a single protective conductol':
(a) the protective corductor being connected as a ring, or
(b) a separate protective conductor being provided at the final socket-outlet by connectiot'r to the netal
conduit ol ducting. or
(c) where two or moLe sinilar radial circuits supply socket-outlets i[ adjacent areas and are fed fiom thc
same distribution board, have identical means of short-circuit and overcurrelt protection and circuit
protective conductoLs of the same cross-sectional area, then a second protective conductor may be
provided at the final socket-outlet on one circuit by comection to the plotective conductor ofthe adjacent
cilcuit
(iii) Other circuits complyirg raitJr dre requirements of Regulation 543.7.1.

544 PROTECTIVE BONDING CONDUCTORS

544.1 Main protective bonding conductors

544.1.'l Except where PME conditions apply, a main protective bonding conductor shall have a cross-
sectional alea tlot less than half the closs-sectional alea required for the earthing conductor of the installatiol al1d
not less thar 6 mmr. The uoss-sectiolal area need not exceed 25 mm] if the bonding conductor is of copper or a
closs-sectional area allbrding equivalent conductance in other metals.

Except tbl highway power supplies and street funiture, where PME conditions apply the main protective bonding
conductor shall be selected in accordance with the PEN conductor ofthe supply and Table 54.8.

Where an ilstallation has lnore than one source ofsupply to which PME conditions apply, a main protective bonding
conductol shall be selected accor-ding to the largest PEN conductor ofthe supply.

202
 TABLE 54.8 -
Minimum cross-sectional area of the main protectjve bonding conductor
in relation to the PEN conductor of the supply
Local distributor's lll]tlvork conditions may r-equie a largcr conducir,i
Copper equivalent cross-sectional ar.ea ofthe PEN Minimunr copper equir alent* cross-sectional area
conductor olthe main bonding conductor
35 mmr or less 10 mml
over 35 mmr up to 50 nrmr I 6 n.rm:
ovel 50 mnl] up to 95 mlnl 25 mrnl
over 95 mmr up to 150 mml 35 mn-rr
over 150 runl 50 mt'r:
* The l't'liniu'tuu copper equivalelt closs-sectional area is given by a copper bonding conductor ofthe tabulated
cross-scctioral arca or a bonding conductor ofanother metal affor.ding equivalent conductance.

544.'1.2 Tlre main protective bonding couection to any extraneous-conductive-paft such as gas, water or I
.:, othcr metallic pipework or service shall be rnade as near as practicable to the point of eDtry of that part into the
I
:_.1 premises. Where there is a meter, isoJation point or urion, the connection shall be made to the consumer's hard metal
I
!'f pipework and befote any branch pipework. Wherc pmcticable the connection shall be made within 600 mm ofthe
-.ll meter outlet union or at the point of enn), to the building ifthe meter is exterual.

544,2 Supplementarybondingconductors
544.2'1 A supplementary bonding conductor connecting two exposed-conductive-parts shalt have
a conductance, if sheathed ot otherwisc provided with mechanical protection, not less than that of the smaller
protective colductor connected to the exposed-conductive-parts. Ifmechanical protection is not provided, its cross-
sectional area shall be not less than ,1 mmr.
iiirl
544.2.2 A supplementaty bonding conductor connecting an exposed-conductive-pa1t to an exfaneous-
conductive-paft shall have a conductance, if sheathed or otherwise provided with mechanical protection, not less
ihe thal halfthat ofthe protective conductor conlrected to tlre exposcd-conductive-part. Ifmechanical protection is not
:;uit provided. its cross-sectional alea shall be uot less than 4 mmr.
: tre
raL'l]t 544.2.3 A supplelnentary bonding conductor connecting two extraneous-conductive-parts shall have a cross-
sectional area r'tot less tha[ 2.5 rnmr if sheathed or otherwise provided with mechanical protection or 4 nm, if
rrechanical protection is not provided, except that where one ofthe extraneous-conductive-pafts is connected to an
exposed-conductive-par1 ir colnpliance with Regulation 544.2.2. tl1at regulation shall apply also to the condrLctor
connecting the two c\ tra neous-conJ uc rive-pa m..

544.2.4 Except where Regr"rlation 544.2.5 applies, supplementary bonding shall be provided by a
supplementary cotlductor, a conductive part ofa pennalrent and reliable nature, or by a conrbination ofthese.
croSs-
n and 544'2.5 Where supplenrentary bonding is to be applied to a ilxed appliance which is supplied via a shorl
,.r or a length of flexible cable iiom an adjacent connection unit or other accessory, incorporating a flex outlet, the circuit
protective conductor within the flexible cablc shall be dcemed to provide the suppleme[tary bonding connection to
the exposed-conductive-pafis ofthe appliance. fiom the earthing terminal in the connection unit or other accessory.

L iLiing
 CHAPTER 55
OTHER EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
550.1 Scope
551 LOW VOLTAGE GENERATING SETS
551 .1 Scope
551 .2 General requirements
551.3 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV
c5 t .J. I Additional requirements for SELV and PELV
551.4 Fault protection
551.4.3 Protection by automatic disconnection of supply
551.4.4 Additional requirements for protection by automatic disconnection where
551.5 Protection against overcurreni
551.6 Additional requirements for installations where...
551 .7 Additional requirements for installations where...
551.8 Requirements for installations incorporaiing stationary batteries
552 ROTATING MACHINES
552.1 Rotating machines
553 ACCESSORIES
553.1 Plugs and socket-outlets
553.2 Cable couplers
554 CURRENT.USING EQUIPMENT
554.1 Electrode water heaters and boilers
554.2 Heaters for liquids or other substances having immersed heating elements
554.3 Water heaters having immersed and uninsulated heating elements
554.4 Heating conductors and cables
555 TRANSFORMERS
555.1 Autotransformers and step-up transformers
557 AUXILIARY CIRCUITS
557 .1 Scope
557 .3 Requirements for auxiliary circuits
557.3.1 General
557.3.201 Control circuits
557.3.2 Power supply for auxiliary circuits dependent on the main circuit
557.3.3 Auxiliary circuit supplied by an independent source
557.3.4 Auxiliary circuits with or without connection to earth
Power supplies for auxiliary circuits
557.3.6 Protective measures
557 .4 Characteristics of cables and conductors
557 .4.1 lvlinimum cross-sectional areas
Requirements for auxiliary circuits used for measurement
557.5.1 General
557.5.2 Auxiliary circuits for direct measurement of electrical quantiiies
557.5.3 Auxiliary circuits for measurement of electrical quantities via a transformer
557 .6 Functional considerations
557.6.1 Voltage supply
557 .6.2 Quality of signals depending on the cable characteristics
557.6.3 Measures to avoid the loss of functionality
557 .6.4 Current-limiting signal outputs
557.6.5 Connection to the main circuit

L-=-
557.6.6 Plug-in connections

559 LUMINAIRES AND LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

559.1 Scope
559.3 General requirements for installations
effects
559.4 Protection of the surroundings against thermal
559.4.1 General
559.5 Wiring systems
559.5.1 Connection to ihe fixed wiring
559.5.2 Fixing of luminaires
559.5.3 Through wiring
559.5.4 Devices for connection of luminaires to the supply
559.5.5 Groups of luminaires
within luminaires
559.5.6 Protection against heat and UV radiation effects
559.6 lndependent lamp controlgear, e g ballasts
559.7 Compensation caPacitors
for luminaires
559.8 Protection against electric shock for display stands
559.9 StroboscoPic effect
559.'10 Ground-recessed luminaires
 CHAPTER 55
OTHER EQUIPMENT
550.1 Scope
Chapter 55 specifies requirements and recommendations for the selection and erection of low voltage electrical
equipment not covered by other parts ofBS 7671 except Pafi 7, intended to be pan ofthe fixed installation.

551 LOWVOLTAGE GENERATING SETS

551.1 Scope
This scction applies to low voltage and extra-low vo)tage installations which incorporate generating sets i[tended to
supply, either continuously or occasionally, all or part ofthe installation. Reqr.rirements are included 1br installations
with the following supply affargernerlts:
(i) Supply to an installatiol which is not conltected to a system for dist bution ofelectlicity to the public
(ii) Supply to an iustallation as an altemative to a system for distribution ofelectricity to the public
(iii) Supply to ao instaliation in palallel with a system for distributiou ofeleotricity to the public
(iv) Appropriate conbirrations ofthe above.

This section does not apply to sell'-contained items of extralow voltage electrical equiprnent which incorporate
both the source of erergy aud the e[ergy-using load and for which a specific product standard exists that includes
thc lequrreurenl. lbl elcctrrtal saletl.
NOTE: Whcre a gcncratiDg set with an output not exceedirg l6 A is to be connected in parallelwith a system fot distribution
ol electiicity to the public. procedures for infoflning the electricity distributor are given in the Electricity Sattty,
Quality and Continuity Rcgulations (ESQCR). tn addition to the ESQCR requirements, where a gelerating set with
an outpui cxceeding 16 A is to be connected in parallel with a system for distribution of electricity to the public,
requir-eDrents of the electricity distributor should be ascertained beforc thc generating set is connected. Requirernents
ofthe dishibutor for thc conncction ofunits ratcd up to 16 A are given in BS EN 50,138.

551.1.1 Generating sets with the fbllowing power sources are considered:
(i) Cornbustiolengines
(ii) Turbines
(iii) Electric Dotors
(iv) Photovoltaiccells
(v) Electrochemicalaccurnulato$
(vi) Other suitable sources.
551.1,2 Generating sets with the following electdcal chamcteristics are considered:
(i) Mains-excited and separatcly excited synclnonous generators
(ii) Mains-excited and self-excited asynchronous generators
(iii) Mains-commutated and sell'-conmutated static convefiors with or without bypass facilities.
551.1.3 The use of generating sets for the following purposes is considered:
(i) Supply to penlanent installations
{iit Supply lo tcnrporaq installations
(iii) Supply to mobile equiplnent which is not cornected to a permanert fixed installation
(iv) Supply to mobile units (Section 717 also applies).
551.2 General requirements
55'1,2,1 The means ofexcitation and commutation shall be appropriate for the intended use ofthe generating
set and thc salety and proper functioning of other sources of supply shall not be impaired by the generating set.
-lhe
551,2.2 prospective shofi-circuit cuuent and prospective eadh fault curent shall be assessed for each
source ofsupply or coflrbinatiorr ofsources which can operate independently ofother soulces ol combinations. The
shot-circuit mting of protective devices within the installatior.r and, where appropriate, connepted to a systen fot'
distribution ol electdcity to the prrblic, shall not be exceeded for any of the intended nethods of operation of the
sources.

206
 551,2,3 Where the genercting set is intended to provide a suppl) Io an installaiion \\hich is not connected to
a systeln fordisi butiol of elcctt'icity to the public or to pl ovide a supp1l as a s"r :t;hed altemati\ e to such a system,
the capacity arld opemting characteristics of the generating set shall be .ucl ihri i:rger or darrage to equipment
cloes l-Iot arise aficr the couection or disconnectiolr of any intended load a. a re.u]i tiihe deriation ofthe voltage
or frequency frorn the intended operating range. Mears shall be prorided io automaiicall\ disconnect such pafts of
the installation as may be necessaly ifthe capacity ofthe generating sel i5 erceeded.
NOTE 1: Consicler.ation shoulcl be given to the intended duty cycle arld size ol indi\ iduai ;o:,r:cr:d loads as a proponion ofihe
capacity olthe generating set and to the startng cllamctelistics ofan\ conneci.d elsa:ic nlotors.
NOTE 2: Considelation slrould bc given to thc power f'actor speciied tbr protecti\ e de\ i..s ::r th. inslallation.
NOTE 3: The installalion ofa genemtil1g set rvithin an existing building or installation me. ;hange the conditioDs olextemal
inllucnce for-the installatior (see Part 3). for e\ample by the irltroduction ol Ino\ ing prni. parts at high te perature
or by the prescrce offlan rable fluids alrd noxious gascs. etc.

551 ,2,4 ision for isolation shall rneet tlre requir ernents of Chapter
Pr.ov .16 and Section 5 i 7 for each source or
combination of sources of supply.

551.3 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

551.3.1 Additional requirements for SELV and PELV where the installation
is supplied from more than one source

Whete a SELV or PELV system may be supplied by more than one source, the requirements of Regulation '114.3
shall apply to each source. wlrere one or rnore of the sources is earthed, the requirements for PELV systenls in
Regulation 414.4 shall apply.

t If one or more of the sources does t'tot meet the requirerrents of Regulation 414.3, the system shall be treated as a

I
FELV system ard thc requiremcnts ofRegulation 411.7 shall apply.
I
.ll I
551.3.2 Whcre it is necessary to lnaintain thc supply to an extralow voltage system following the loss of
one or mot.e soLrrces of supply. each source of supply or cornbination of sources of supply which can operate
a.

independently of other sources or combinations shall be capable of supplying the intended load of the extra-low
voltage systen'1. Provisions shall bc rradc so that loss ofthe low voltagc supply to an extra-low voltage soutce does
not lead to dangcr or damage to other cxtra-low voltagc cquipment.
NOTE: Such provisions may bc lecessary in supplies for safety seNices (see Chapter 56).

551.4 Fault protection

551.4.1 Fault protection shali be providcd for the irstallation in Iespect of each source of supply or
combination ofsources ofsupply that can operate indepeldently ofother sources or con]binations ofsources.

TIte t'ault protective provisions shall be selected or precautiors shall be taken so that where fault protective provisions
are achieved in different ways within the same installation or pafi ofa[ ilstallation according to the active sources
of supply. no iufluence shall occul ol condjtions a se that could impair the effectiveness of the fault protective
plovisions.
NOTE: This rnight.lbl. example. requile the use ofa lmnsfbnnerproviding electrical separation bet\\'een palls ofthe irrstallalion
usirlg diflerent earthing systerl]s.

551-4.2 The generating set shall be connected so that any provision withir the installalion for protection by
RCDs in accotdance witb Chapter 41 remains effective 1br every intelded combination ofsources ofsupply.
NOTE: Conrlecliorl 01'livc parts ofthe generator u'ith Eallh may affect the protective measule

551.4.3 Protection by automatic disconnection of supply

551 .4.3,1 Protection by automatic disconnection of supply shall be provided in accordance \ ith Section '11
I .

except as modified for particular cases by Regulation 551.4.3.2, 55 1.4.3.3 or 551 .4 4.

551.4.3.2 Additional requirements for installations where the generating set provides a
switched altemative to system for distribution ofelectricity to the public (standby systems)

551,4,3.2.1 Protectiol by autolnatic discornection of supply shall not rel] upon Ih. .-..nnection to tfie eanlI.d
point oftlte systenl lbr distr ibution ofelectricity to the public rvhen the gerlerator is optr:Irrg as e :$ itched aitenrriir e
:.. Tire to a TN systern. A suitable means ofearthing shall bc provided.
:.:l lot
: -.i tlre

,a
---
 551.4.3.3 Additional requirements for installations incorporating static convertors
551'4.3,3,'l Wherc lault protectiol fot palts of thc installatior supplied by the static converlor relies upon the
aLLtoll]atic closureof the bypass srvitch and the operation of prolective devices on the supply side of thc bypass
switclr is not within the time required by Section 4ll, supplernentary equiporenlial bonding shall be proviclecl
between simultaleor"Lsly accessible exposed-cordrLctive-parts and extmrleous-conduclive-pafis otr the ]oad side of
the static couveflor in accordance rvith Regulatittn 4l 5.2.

The resistance (R) of the supplerlcntary proteclivc bondirg condLrctor- required betwecn simultaneously accessible
cxposed-collductive-parts altd extrancorrs-collducti\.c,l]afis shall f'ulfil the lbllowing condition:

R < 50/t"

where:
I" is the maxilr]uln eafh tlult currelt which can be supplied by the static convertol whelt the
bypass switch is closed.

NOTE: Where such equiprlcnr is intendcd to operute ir parallel wiril a systcrr tbr clistribution ofelectlicity to rhc public. the
requiremenls ofReglLlation 551.7 also a|p1y.

551.4.9.3.2 PrecalLtions shall be taken ot ecluipureut shall be selectecl so that the conect operatiolt olplotective
devices is not impaired by DC cuu-ents gclterared by a static convcfior or by the ptesence of filtcr.s.

551.4.3.3.3 A means ofisolation shall be installed ort both sides ofa static cotrveftor. This requirement does not
apply on the power source side ofa slatic converLor wlrich is intcgrated in the saure enclosul'e as the power source.

551.4.4 Additional requirements for protection by automatic disconnection where

the installation and generating set are not permanently fixed

This regulation applies to poflable generatitg sets and to gel'rerating sets which are intended ro be tnoved to
unspecified locations 1br tempomry or sllort tcllll use. Such genelatilg sets rray be pafl of an ilstal]atiou which is
subject to sirrilar use. fhis regulation does not appl), to penltatlctll llxed itstallations.
NOTE: For suitablc conncctjon a -aogenenrs see IIS LN 60309
senes.

55'1.4.4.1 Between separate iterns of equrpnrent. protective conductols slrall be provided which are pan of a
suitable cable and which corrply with Table 54.7.

All protective conductors shali cornply wirh Chaptcr'54.

55'1.4.4'2 In a TN, TT or lT systerr, every lilal circuit shall be provided with additiolal prorcclion by rreans
ofan RCD having the characte stics specified il llegulation 415.1.
NOTE: ll1 an IT system. an RCD nray not operate nlcss one ot the catth ihults is on a part oftlte system on the slrpply side of
the device.

551.5 Protection against overcurrent

551.5.'t Where overcurrcnt plotectior ofthe ger)erating set is rccluiled, it shall be located as near as practicable
to the generator tenninals.
NOTE: The corltribution to the prospective sholt-cilcLritcullert by a gencrating set nray be rinlc-dcpendent and nuy be much
less than thc conlibution madc by a syst.ul lbl distributron ol electrici!y to thc public.

551.5,2 Where a generating set is iDtended to opelatc iu parallel rvith a system tbr distriburion of electricity
to the public, or wltere two or'nore gellcratilg sets ll1ay opctate in palallel, circulating harmonic curents shall be
linited so that the thennal rating ofconductors is rot exceeded.
The effects ofcirculating harmonic cuirents tnay be Iinited by one or morc ofthe fbllowing:
(i) The sclectiol ofgenerating sets with cornpensatcd wirdings
(ii) The provision ofa suirable irrpedance in thc connection to the generator star points
(iii) The plovisior oiswitches which inten'tipt the circulatory circuit but which are interlocked so rhat at all tinles
1'au1t protection is not intpaired
t
(ir flre p[ovisirrrr ol lill(rirc c,lllipr]re
(vt Othel srritable rncarr:.
NOTE: Consideration should bc given to the ntaximum voltase which may bc plodLrced across an irlpedance connected to
linlit circulaling hannonic curel]ls

248
 551.6 Additional requirements for installations where the generating set provides a supply
as a switched alternative to the system for distribution of electricity to the public
(standby systems)
551.6.1 Precautions cornplying with the relevant requirements of Chapter 46 and Section 537 for isolation
shall be taken so that the generator camot opemte in parallel with the sysiem for distribution of electricity to the
public. Suitable precautions may include one or more olthe following:
(i) An electrical, mechanical or electromechanical interlock between the operating urechanisms or control
circuits ofthe changeover switching devices
(ii) A system of locks with a single transferable key
(iii) A three-positiqn break-before-make changeover switch
(iv) An automatic changeover switching device with a suitable interlock
(v) Other means providing equivalent security of operation.
551.6.2 For a TN-S system where the neutral is not isolated, any RCD shall be positioned to avoid incorrect
operation due to the existence of any parallel neutral-eardr path.
NOTE: It may be desirable in a TN system to disconnect the neutml ofthe installation front the neutml or PEN ofthe system
for distribution of electricity to the public to avoid disturbances such as induced voltage surges caused by lightning.

551.7 Additional requirements for installations where the generating set may operate in
parallel with other sources including systems for distribution of electricity to the
public
I 551 .7 .1 When a generating set is used as an additional source of supply in pamllel with a[other source, both
olthe following conditions shall be tutfilled:
(i) Protection against thermal effccts in accordance with Chapter 42 and protection against overcurrent in
accordance with Chapter 43 shall remain effective in all situations
I :a
(ii) Where an RCD is providing additional protection in accordance with Regulation 415.1 for a cilcuit
connectilg the generator set to the installation, the RCD shall disconnect all live conductors, including the
neutral conductor.

551.7 .2 A genentirg set used as an additional source of supply in parallel with another source shall be installed;
on the supply side ofall the overcurrent protective devices for the final circuits ofthe installation, or
on the load side olall the overcurent protective devices for a firal circuit ofthe iNtallation, but in this case all the
following additional requirements shall be fullilled:
(i) The conductors ofthe firal circuit shall meet the following requirement:

I.>1,,+ls
where:
[, is the cuffent-carrying capacity ofthe final circuit conductors
I,, is the lated cuffent ofthe protective device ofthe final circuit
Ig is the rated output cufl'ent ofthe generating set
(ir) A generating set shall not be connected to a flnal circuit by mcans ofa plug and socket-outlet
(iii) The line and neutral conductors of the fina1 circuit and ofthe generating set shall not be connected to
Earth
Unless the device providing automatic disconnection ofthe final circuit in accordance with Regulation
411.3.2 disconnects the line and neutral conducto$. it shall be verified that the combination of the
disconnection time ofthe protective device for the final circuit and the time taken for the output voltage
of the generating set to reduce to 50 V or less is not greater than the disconnection time required by
Regulation 4l 1.1.2 lor the final circuit.
-::.'gulationdoesnotapplytoanunintenuptiblepowersupplyprovidedtosupplyspecificitemsofcunent-using
-, .. :ment within the final circuit to which it is connected.

:5'1 .7.3 h selecting and using a gereratirg set to mn in parallel with the systerr lor distibution ofelectricity
: 'e public. care shall be taken to aYoid ad|erse effects 10 that system and to other jnstallations in respect of
.,. ir l'actor, voltage changes, harmonic distotjon. unbalance. stafting, synchronizinu or voltage fluctualion effects.

' iere synchlonization is necessaqr. the use of an alrtolnatic synchronizilg system \\ticlt considers frequency.
- -,.e and voltage is to be prefered.
 551.7.4 Means ofautomatic switching shall be provided to disconnect the generating set from the system for
distribution ofelectdcity to the public in the event ofloss ofthat supply or deviation ofthe voltage or frequency at
the supply terminals from declared values.

For a genenting set with an output exceeding 16 A, the type of protection and the sensitivity and operating times
depend upon the protection ofthe system for distribution of electricity to the public and the number of generating
sets connected and sha1l be agreed by the distributor. For a generating set with an output not exceeding 16 A, the
settings shall conply with BS EN 50438.

In the case ol the presence of a static convefor, the meani of switching shall be provided on the load side of the
static convertor

551.7.5 Means shall be provided to prevent the connection ofa generating set to the system for distribution
of electricity to the public in the event of loss ofthat supply or deviation ofthe voltage or frequency at the supply
teminals from values required by Regulation 551.7.4.
NOTE: For a generating set with ail output not exceeding 16 A intended to opemte in parallel with a system for distributiorl of
electlicity to the public the requirements are given in BS EN 50438.

551.7.6 Means shall be provided to enable the generating set to be isolated from the system for distribution
of eleitricity to the public. For a generatingset with an output exceeding 16 A, the accessibility of this means of
isolation shall colnpty with national rules and distribution system operator requirements. For a generating set with
ar output not exceeding 16 A, the accessibility of this means of isolation shall comply with BS EN 50438.
551.7.7 Where a generating set may operate as a switched altemative to the system for distribution of
electricity to the public, the installation shall also comply with Regulation 551.6.

551.8 Requirements for installations incorporating stationary batteries

551.8.1 Stationary batteries shall be installed so that they are accessible only to skilled or instructed persons.
NOTE: This generally requires the batteiy to be installed in a secure location or, for smaller batteries, a secure enclosure.

The location or enclogure shall be adequately ventilated.

551-8.2 Batteryionnections shal) have basic protection by insulation or enclosutes or shall be arranged so that
two bare conductive pafis having between them a potentiat difference exceeding 120 volts cannot be inadvefiently
touched simultaneously.

552 ROTATING MACHINES

NOTE: See also Regulation ,163.3 Motor control.

552.1 Rotating machines

552.1.1 A1l equipment, including cable, ofevery circuit carrying the stafiing, accelerating and load curents
of a motor shall be suitable for a curent at least equal to the full-load current rating of the motor when rated in
accordance with the appropriate British or Harmonized Standard. Where the motor is intended for intermittent duty
and for {iequent stafiing and stopping, account shall be taken of any cun.tulative effects of the starting or bruking
cufients upon the ten'iperature se ofthe equipment ofthe circuit.

552.1.2 Every elect c motor having a rating exceeding 0.37 kW shall be provided with control equipment
incorporating means of protection against overload of the motor This requirement does not apply to a motor
ircorpomted in an item ofcunent-using equipment complying as a whole with an appropdate British or Harmonized
Standard.

552.1.3 Except where failule to startafterab ef intemrption would be likely to cause greater danger, eYery
motor shall be provided with means to prevent automatic rcstarting after a stoppage due to a drop in voltage or
failure of supply, where unexpected restafting ofthe motor might cause danger This requirement does not preclude
arangenents for starting a motor at intervals by an automatic control device, where other adequate precautions are
taken against danger from unexpected restarting.

210
 553 ACCESSORIES

553.1 Plugs and socket-outlets

553.1.1 Evely plug and socket-outlet shall comply with all the requirements of items (i) and (ii) betow and.
in addition, with the appropriate requirements ofRegulations 553.1.2 to 553.2.2:
(i) Except fbr SELV circuits, it shall not be possible for any pin of a plug to make contact with any live conract
ofits associated socket-outlet while any other pin ofthe plug is completely exposed
(ii) It shall not be possible for any piu of a plug to make contact with any live contact ofany socket-outlet within
the same installation other than the type of sockeGoutlet for which the plug is designed.

553.1.2 Except for SELV or a special circuit frorr Regulation 553.1 .5, every plug and socket-outlet shall be
ofthe non-reversible type, with prcvision for the connection of a protective conductor

553.1.3 Except where Regulation 553.1.5 applies, in a low voltage circuit every plug and socket-outlet shall
rrl confomr with the applicable British Standard listed in Table 55.1.

TABLE 55.1 -
!)1',l
Plugs and socket-outlets for low voltage circuits
..i
nh Type of plug and socket-outlet Applicable British Standard
Fused plugs and shuttcred socket-outlets, BS I363 (tuses to BS 1362)
of 2-po1e and earth, fol AC
Plugs, fused or non-fused, and 2, 5, 15,30 BS 546 (fuses, ifany, to BS 646)
socket-outlets, 2-pole and ealth
and socket-outlets industrial t6,32, 63, 12s BS EN 60309-2
!rns.
553.1.201 Every socket-outlet for household and similar use shall be of the shuttered type and, for an AC
installation, shall preferably be ofa tlpe complying with BS 1363.

553.1.5 A plug and socket-outlet not complying with BS 1363, BS 546 or BS EN 60309-2, may be used in
single-phase AC or two-wire DC circuits operating at a nominal voltage not exceeding 250 volts for:
r that
.3nti-v (i) the connection of an electric clock, provided that the plug and socket-outlet are designed specifically for that
purpose, and that each plug incorporates a fuse of rating not exceeding 3 amperes complying with BS 646
or BS 1362 as appropriate
(ii) the connection of an electric shaver, provided that the socket-outlet is either incorporated in a shaver supply
unit complying with BS EN 61558-2-5 or is a type complying with BS 4573
(iii) a circuit having special characteristics such that danger would otherwise arise or it is necessary to distinguish
the function ofthe circuit.
[rrents
ared in 553,1.6 A socket-outlet on a wall or similar strxcture shall be mounted at a height above the floor or any
rvorking surface to miniurize the risk of mechanical damage to the socket-outlet or to an associated plug and its
nt duty
braking
flexible cable which might be caused during inserlion, use or with&awal ofthe plug.

553.1.7 Where mobile equipment is likely to be used, provision shall be made so that the equipment can
dpment be fed fiom an adjacent and conveniently accessible socket-outlet, taking account of the length of flexible cable
a motor nonnally fitted to poftable appliances and luminaires.
monized 553.2 Cable couplers
553-2.1 Except for a SELV or a Class II circuit, a cable coupler shall comply where appropriate with
Fr. every BS 6991 , BS EN 61535, BS EN 60309-2 or BS EN 60320- l, shall be non-reversible and shall have provision for the
oltage or . orlnection of a prolecli\e conductor.
preclude
rions are 553.2.2 A cable coupler shall be ananged so that the connector ofthe coupler is fitted at the end ofthe cable
remote from the supply.

554 GURRENT.USING EQUIPMENT

554.1 Electrode water heaters and boilers

554.1.1 Every electrode water heater and electrode boilel shall be connected to an AC.systen.r only, and shall
be selected and erected in accordance with the applopriate lequiretnents ofthis section.

211
 554,'|,.2 The supplr te the clcctrodc watcr hcatcr or electrodc boiler shall bc controllcd by a linkcd
breaker ananged to disconnect the supply from all electrodes simultaneously and provided with an overcurrent
protective device in each conductor feeding an elecrode.

554.1.3 The earthing ofthe electrode water heater or electrode boiler shall comply with the requirements of
Chapter 54 and, in addition, the shell ofthe electrode water l'reater or electrode boiler shall be bonded to the metallic
sheath and armour, if any, ofthe incoming supply cable. The protective conductor shall be connected to the shell of
the electrode water heater or electrode boiler and shall comply with Regulation 543.1.1.

554.1.4 Where an electrode water heatel ot electrode boiler is iirectly connected to a supply at a voltage
exceeding low voltage, the installation shall include an RCD aranged to disconnect the supply tl'om the electodes
on the occurrence of a sustained earth leakage cuffent in excess of 10 % ofthe rated current ofthe electode water
heater or electrode boiler under normal conditions of operation. except that if in any instance a lrigher value is
essential for stability of operation of the electrode water heater or electrode boiler, the value may be increased to a
maximum of 15 %. A tirre delay may be incorporated in the device to prevent ulnecessary operation in the event of
imbalance of short duration.

554.1.5 Where an electrode water heater or electrode boiler is connected to a three-phase low voltage supply,
the shell ofthe electrode water heater or electrode boiler shall be connected to the neutral olthe supply as well as
to the earthing conductor. The current-carrying capacity of the neutral conductor shall be not less than that of the
largest line conductor connected to the equipment.

554.1 .6 Except as provided by Regulation 554. t.7. where the supply to an elechode water heater or electrode
boiler is single-phase and one electrode is connected to a neutral conductor earthed by the distributor, the shell of
the electrode water heater or elecffode boiler shall be connected to the neutral ofthe supply as well as 10 the earthing
conductor

554/1.7 Where the electrode water heater or electrode boiler is not piped to a water supply or in physical
contact with ar.ty earthed metal. and where the electrodes and the water in contact with the electrodes are so shielded
in insulating material that they cannot bc touched while the electrodes are live, a fuse in the Iine conductor may be
substituted for the circuit-breaker required under Regulation 554.1.2 and the shell of the electrode water heater or
electrode boiler need not be connected to the neutral olthe supply.

554.2 Heaters for liquids or other substances having immersed heating elements
554.2.1 Every heater for liquid or other substance shall incorporate or be provided with an aulomatic device
to prevent a dangerous se in temperature.

554.3 Water heaters having immersed and uninsulated heating elements

554.3.1 Every single-phase water heatcr or boiler having an uninsulated heating element immersed in the
water shall comply rvith the requirernents ofRegulations 554.3.2 and 554.3.3. This type ofwater heater or boiler is
deemed not to be an electrode water heater or electrode boiler.

554.3.2 All metal parts ofthe heater or boiler which are in contact with the water (other than cunenlcarying
pats) shall be solidly and rnetallically connected to a metal water pipe through which the water supply to the heater
or boiler is provided, and that water pipe shall be connected to the main eafihing teminal by means independent of
the circuit protective conductor.

554.3.3 The heater or boiler shall be pennanertly connected to the electdcity supply thr-ough a double-pole
Iinked switch which is either separate from and r,"ithin easy reach ofthe heater or boilel or is incorporated therein,
and the wiring from the heater or boiler shall be connected directly to that switch without the use of a plug and
socket-outlet.

554.3.4 Before a heater or boiler ofthe type relered to in Regulation 554.3.1 is connected, the installer shall
confinn that no single-pole switch, non-linked circuitbreaker or fuse is fitted in the neufal conductor in any patl of
the circuit between the heater or boiler and the origin ofthe irstallation.

554.4 Heating conductors and cables

NOTE: For electric floor and cejling heating systc[rs in buildings the require,nents of Section 753 must also be met.

554.4.1 Where a )reatirrg cablc is required to pass through, or be il close proximity to. tr.raterial which
prescnts a fire hazard, the cable shallbe enclosed in material having the ignitability charactedstic 'P'as specified in
BS,176-12 and shall be adequately protected from any rnechanical damage reasonably foreseeable during installation
and use.

212
 554.4.2 Aheating cable intended for laying directly in soil. concrete. cemenl screed or other material used for
road and buildirg construction shall be:
(i) capable olwithstanding mechanical damage under the conditions that can reasonably be expected to prevail
during its installation, and
ri (ii) constructed of mate al that will be resistant to damage from dampness and/or corosion under normal
i;
conditions of service.

554.4.3 A heating cable laid directly in soil, a road or the structure ofa building shall be installed so that it:
ae
(i) is co[ipletely embedded in the substance it is intended to heat, and
CS (ii) does not suffer damage in the event ofmovement nomally to be expected in it or the substance in whiclt it
:.7 is embedded. and
is (iii) complies in all respects with the manufacturer's instructions and recornmendations.
)a I

..f 554.4.4 The load of every floor-warming cable under operation shall be limited to a value such that the
tnanufacturer's stated colductor temperature is not exceeded. Other factors can limit the maximurn temperature at
rvhich the cable can be run, such as the tempemture rating ofany terminations or accessories, and any material with
,1)..
\\.hich it is in co[tact.
AS

e 555 TRANSFORMERS

555.1 Autotransformers and step-up transformers

555.1.1 Where an autotansfonner is connected to a circuit having a neutal conductor, the common ten'ninal
-.ithe winding shall be connected to thc neutral conductor.
555.1.2 A step-up autotransfonner shall not be connected to an IT system.
r,:lll 555.1.3 Where a step-up transforner is used, a linked switch shall be provided for disconnecting the
-;cel :ansformer from all live conductors ofthe supply.
:, he
l: L)L 556 /Vot used

557 AUXILIARY CIRCUITS

557.1 Scope
:' lce
-ltis scction applies to auxiliary circuits, except thosc covcred by specific product or systern staldards. c.g. thc
,.'nstruction ofassemblics ofclcctrical equipment to the approp ate pafl olthc BS EN 61439 series.

557.2 Nof used

:. rhe
r:ris 5 57.3 Requirements for auxiliary circuits
5 57.3.1 General

:., ing Tbe power supply, AC ot'DC, for an auxiliary circuit may be either dependent or independent ofthe main circuit
:..':ltef .rccording to its required flrnction. Ifthe status ofthe main circuit has to be signalled, then the signalling circuit shall
.::rt of be able to operate independently ofthat main circuit.

557.3.201 Control circuits

:-iio1e
-.:ie ilt. A control circuit shalt be designed, aranged and protected to limit dangers resulting lrom a fault between the
-: ud .ontrol circuit and other conductive pafts liable to cause malfunction (e.g. inadvertent operation) ofthe controlled
.quipment.

.hall
557.3.2 Power supply for auxiliary circuits dependent on the main circuit
of
557.3.2.'l General
-\uxiliaty circuits with a power supply dependent on the main AC circuit sha11 be connected to the main circuit:
ti) directll tsee Figure 55.11. or
(ii) via a rectilier (see Figure 55.2), or
ir hiclt (iii) via a transformer (see Figure 55.3).
in
on It is recommended that auxilialy circuits supplying primarily electronic equipment or systems should not be supplied
directly but at least via simple separation from the main circuit.

ZIJ
 Fig 55.1 - Auxiliary circuit supplied directly from the main circuit

L1
L2
L3
N

Terminals for the

auxrlrary ctrcuri

Fig 55.2 - Auxiliary circuit supplied from the main circuit via a rectifier

L1
L2
L3
N

Terminals for the

auxiliary circuit

Fig 55.3 -Auxiliary circuit supplied from the main circuit via a transformer

L1
L2
L3
N

Terminals for the

auxiliary circuit

NOTE: For an auxiliary circuit supplied from the main circuit. either directly or via a rectifier, the auxiliary circuit begins at
the connection point to the main circuit, see Figures 55.1 and 55.2. In the case ofa transformer supply, the auxiliary
circuit begins on the secondary side ofthe transfomer, see Figure 55.3.

557.3.2.2 Auxiliary circuit supplied from the main circuit via transformer
Where an auxiliary circuit is supplied by more than one transformel they shall be connected in pamllel both on the
pdmary and secondary sides.
557.3.3 Auxiliary circuit supplied by an independent source
Where an indcpendent source is used a loss of supply or undervoltage ofthe main circuit source shall be detected.
An independent auxilialy circuit shall not create a hazardous situation.
NOTE: Batteries and a power supply system independent ofthe mains are examples ofindependent sources.

214
557.3.4 Auxiliary circuits with or without connection to earth
557.3.4.1 General
An auxiliary circuit shall cornpll \\ith the .'arthing requirements ofBS 7671 except as modified by Regulation
55'7.3.4.2 or 551.3.4.3.
NOTE 1: lt depends on the requirements tbr an au:iilian circuit as to whether it is operated eathed or unearthed. For example,
in an earthed auxiliary circuit an eanh t'ault in a non-earthed conductor leads to disconnection ofthe power supply of
the auxiliary circuit; in an unearthed auxilian circuit. an canh fault in a conductor leads only to a signal from the IMD
(see Rcgr ation 557.3.4.3).

NOTE 2: The use of unearthed auxiliary circlrits should be considered \!here high reliability is required.

557.3.4.2 Earthed auxiliary circuit

An earthed auxiliary circuit supplied via a transfomrer shall be connected to earth only at one point on the secondary
side of the tmnsformer. The connection to eafih shall be situated close to the ffansfomer The connection shall be
easily accessible atrd capable ofbeing isolated for insulation [leasurement.

557.3.4.3 Unearthedauxiliarycircuit
Except in the case of a SELV or PELV circuit, if an auxiliary circuit is operated unearthed via a tmnsformcr,
an insulation monitoring device (IMD) according to BS EN 61557-8 shall be installed on the secondary side.
Consideration shall be given to the use ofdsk assessment to detennine whether the signal from the IMD is to initiate
an acoustic and/or a flash alam, or be transmitted to a monitodng system.

557.3,5 Power supplies for auxiliary circuits

557.3.5.1 General
The mted voltage ofan auxiliary circuit, and the components used in the circuit, shall be compatible with the supply
to that circuit.
NOTE 1: If the supply voltage is too low lbr the design of the circuit then the opemtion will not be reliable for the proper
fliirction ofrelays.

Account shall be taken of the effects ofvoltage drop on the electrical equipment ofthe auxiliary circuit, including
inrush and starting currents.
NOTE 2: Motors starting direct-on-1ire can draw a stafiing curent from the rnain circuit that will reduce the supply voltage to
an auxiliary cilcuit dependent on the main circuit, below the minimum operating yoltage ofthe associated switchgeaf.

557.3.5.2 Standby power supply or power supply for safety services

\\rhere a standby power supply or a power supply from a generating set is used to supply auxiliary circuits. the
fiequency variation shall be taken into account.

557.3.5.3 AC supply
The nominal voltage ofcontrol circuits shall preferably not exceed:
(i) 230 V for circuits with 50 Hz nominal frequency
(ii) 277 V for circuits with 60 Hz nominal frequency

respectively, taking into account voltage tolerances according to BS EN 60038.

NOTE: The dimelNio[ing of cable lcngth with rcspect to the conductor capacitances, e.g. connection to a limit switch,
necds to be coordilatcd with the selccted relays or solcnoid valves. The standing voltage caused by high conductor
capacitances may impair the switching offofrelays or solcnoid valves.

557.3.5.4 supply
DC
557.3"5.4.1 Supply by a power system
The nominal voltage of control circuits shall prefembly not exceed 220 V
557.3.5.4.2 Supply by batteries
Where batteries are used as a power supply for auxiliary circuits, the voltage fluctuation due to charging or
discharging shall not exceed voltage tolerances specified in BS EN 60038, untess the auxiliary circuit is specifically
designed to compensate for such voltage fluctuation.
 557.3.6 Protectivemeasures
557.3.6.1 Protection of wiring systems
NOTE 1: In the case ofcxtencled auxiliary circuits it is necessary to check that the requircd operating currenl ol the protective
device will bc achier ed also al thc far end ofthe respective cables or conductors' Regulation '1ll' l '

Single-phase eathedAC auxiliary circuits supplied on the secondary side ofthe trauFfonner for an auxiliary supply I

and earthed DC auxiliary circuits are pennitted to be protected by single-pole devices. The protcctile devices shall I

only be inserted in conductors whicl] are not connected directly to earth.

In uneafihed AC or DC auxiliary circuits, shof-circuit protection shall be provided for all line conductors.
NOTE 2: Thc use ofprotecti!e devjces which disconnect all lines ofan unearthed auxiliary circuit will aid lault dlagnosis and
maintenance activities.

If the short-circuit protective device on the primary side ofthe transformer for an auxiliary circuit is selected so that
it also protects against short-circuit current on the secondary side, a protective device on the secondary side ofthe
tmnsfonner nlay be omitted.
NOTE 3: For a fault or the transfonner secondary side. thc magnitude ofthc short-circuit curaent on the pimary side depends
also o11 the impedarce ofthe transformer.

557.3.6.2 Protection againstshort-circuit

Switching contacts of electrical switching devices ofthe auriliary circuit shall be protected against damage caused
by shorl-circuit cunents, according to the manufacturer's instmctions.

557 .4 Characteristics of cables and conductors

557.4.1 Minimum cross-sectional areas

I11order to provide adequatc mecharrical strength. thc lollowing minimum cross-sectional areas indicated in Tahle
55.2 shall be mct. Ifthere are special nrcchanical strength requirencnts for cables or contluctors, then a Iarger ctoss-
sectional area ofconductor, sclccted ilr accordance with Chaptet 52, may be rcquired.

TABLE 55.2 - Minimum cross-sectional area of copper conductors in mm'?

Type of cable
Application Single-core Two-core Multicore
Single-wire Strardcd Screened Unscreened Screenccl oI unscreeneal

ControlcircLrits" 0.s 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.1

Data transl'cr 0.1

" Othcr auxiliary circuits may teed a larget cross_sectional arcA ofcopper condr.tctor, e.g. for

NOTE; The cross-sectiotlal area ofcopper conductors is derived from Section 52'1'

557.5 Requirements for auxiliary circuits used for measurement

557.5.1 General
Measuring circuits are auxiliary cilcuits with dedicated requirements which are given in the following subclauses.
557.5.2 Auxiliary circuits for direct measurement of electrical quantities
An auxiliary circuit for direct measurement of elect cal quantities shall be protected against the effects of a fault by
one olthe following means:
(i) Provision ofa device for protection against fault current in accordance with Section 434. Where operation of
the device could cause danger, or lead to a hazardous situation, such operation shall also cause discomection
of the main circuit
(ii) Siurultaneous fulfilment ofconditions (a) and (b) ofRegulation 434.3.
557.5.3 Auxiliary circuits for measurement of electrical quantities via a transformer
557.5.3.1 Currenttransformer
Where a measuement device is connected to the mair circuit via a curent transfomer, the following requirements
shall be taken into account:
(i) The secondarl, side of thc transfbmrer in a low voltage installation shall not be earthed, except where the
measurement can onh be carried out wilh a connection to earth

216
 (ii) Protective de\.ices interrupling the circuit shall not be used on the secoudary side ofthe rransibrmer
(iii) Conducton on the secondary side of the transfonner shall be insulated for the highest r oltage ol anl lir e
parts or shall be installed such that their insulation cannot come into contact n ith other li\e pafis. e.g.
.1
contact with busbars
(iv) Teruinals for temporary measurements shall be provided.
)l The above requirements do not apply to summation cunent tmnsfomers where'hazardous voltages do not occur,
l1 I
e.g. equipment for insulation fault location accordirg to BS EN 61557-9.

557.5.3.2 Voltagetransformer
I

The secondary side ola voltage transformer shall be protected by a shofl-circuit protective device.

557.6 Functional considerations

l.1t
557.6"1 Voltage supply
Where loss olvoltage, i.e. voltage fluctuation, overvoltage or undervoltage, could cause the auxiliary circuit to be
unable to perfonn its intended function, means to secure the continued opelation of the auxiliary circuit shall be
ods
provided.

557.6.2 Quality of signals depending on the cable characteristics

The opemtion ofan auxiliary circuit shall not be adversely affected by the characteristics, including impedance and
..ed
length, ofthe cable between operational components.

The capacitance ofthe cable shall not impair the proper opemtion of an actuator in the auxiliary cilcuit. The cable
characteristics and length shall be taken into account for the selection of switchgear and controlgear or electronic
circuits.
NOTE: For an extensive auxiliary circuit. the use ofa DC power supply or bus-system is recommended.
eble
rOSS- 557.6.3 Measures to avoid the loss of functionality
An auxiliary circuit serving a special function where reliability is a concern will require additional design
considerations to lninimize the likelihood of wiring laults. These wiring faults could result in loss offunction and/
or loss of signal. Among the design considerations are:
(i) selection of appropriate installation methods for cables
(ii) selection of equipment where a fault from line to exposed-conductive-pafts is not possible, e.g. Class II
equipment
(iii) use of installation methods and equipment that are inherently short-circuit and earth fault proof.

For the design of installations and equipment that are inhelently short-circuit and earlh fault proof, the following
shall be considered:
(a) Arangemeflts ofsingle conductors with basic insulation, together with measures to prevent mutual contact
and contact with exposed-conductive-parts. This may be achieved by:
installation in (insulated) cable nunking systems, or
installation in (insulated) conduit
(b) Arrangements of:
siugle-core cables, or

-.ru1t bY - single-core, non-metallic-sheathed cables, or

rubber-insulated fl exible cables
, :rionof (c) Provision of prctection against mechanical damage and ol safe distance lrom flarnmable material for non-
,:lection metallic sheathed cables
(d) Arrangements ofron-metallic-sheathed cables with nominal voltage Uoru at least 0.6/1 kV (U0 = conductor
to Earth voltage, U: conductor to conductor voltage)
(e) Use ofcables with an insulation which is self-extinguishing ard flame-retardant
(0 Use of cables that are afforded physical protection by being buried, e.g. installation of cables in soil or
concrete.
--:fcments

.. here tlle
 557.6.4 Current-limitingsignaloutputs
In eafihed or uneallhed auxiliary circuits with current-limiting signal outputs or electronically controlled protection
against short-circuit conditions. respectively, the signal circuit shall be disconnected within 5 s if the respective
measure operates. In special cases. a shorter disconnection time may be required.

For cunent-li[riting signal outputs or electronically controlled protection olthe signal output, respectively, automatic
disconnection of supply may be omitted if a hazardous situatior is not likely to occur.

557.6.5 Connection to the main circuit

557.6.5.1 Auxiliary circuits without direct connection to the main circuit
Electrical actuators. e.g. actuating relays, contacto$, signalling lights, electromagnetic locking devices, shall be
connccted to the common conductor (see Figure 55.4):
(i) in earthed auxiliary circuits, at the earthed (common) conductor
(ii) in unearthed auxiliary circuits, at the comDlon conductor

Fig 55.4 - Configuration of an auxiliary circuit

Overcu rrent protective

device Switched conductor

Exception: Switching elements ofprotective relays, e.g. overcurent relays, may be installed between the eafihed or
the non-eaithed conductor and a coil, provided that:
(a) this co[rection is contained inside a comn]on enclosure, or
(b) it leads to
a simplification olextemal control devices, e.g. conductor bars, cable drums, multiple connectors,
and takes into account the requirements ofRegulation 557.3.6.2.

557.6.5.2 Auxiliary circuits with direct connection to the main circuit

Ifthe auxiliary circuit is:
(i) supplied between two lire conductors (e.g. Ll and L2 ofan IT system), two-pole switching contacts shall
be used
(ii) connected to the earthed reutral ofthe main circuit, the requirements ofChapter 43 apply.

557.6.6 Plug-inconnections
Interchangeability between multiple plug-in connections is permitted only where it will not result in mechanical
damage or introduce a fisk of fir'e, electric shock or injury to pe$ons.
NOTE 1: These plug-in connections fonn a palt ofthe auxiliary circuit(s) and nray conduct different signals.
NOTE 2: Plotection against interchangeability may be achieved by marking. polarization, design or electronic interlocking.

The connecto$ shall be secured by a means to prevent unintended disconnection.

558 A/ot used

559 LUMINAIRES AND LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

559.1 Scope
This section applics to the selection and erection of luminaires and lighting installations intended to be pafi of the
fixed installation.

218
 I
NOTE ,l: For outdoor lightilg insrallarions. exrra-lo\\ \ oltage lighting installalions and lighting inslalleiiLrn. i:r
j:F-.:.:- -N-:llLrns.

refer to Pat 7.

The requiements ofthis section do not apply to:

(i) high voltage signs supplied at low voltage (such as neon tubes)
(ii) signs and luminous discharge nrbe installations operating from a no-load rat;d output voltage exceeding
1 kV but not exceeding l0 kV (BS EN 50107)

(iii) temporary festoon lighting.

NOTE 2: The rcquirenlerts tbr high voltage signs are given in BS 559 and the BS EN 50107 serics'

559.2 Not used

559.3 General requirements for installations

NOTE: See Table 55.3 for ar explanatioll ofthe symbols used in luminailes, in controlgear for lLuninaires and in tle installation
ollu!ninaires.

559.3.1 Every luminaire shall comply with the relevant standard for manufacture and test of that luminaire
and shall be selected and erected to take account ofthe manufacturer's instructions'

559.3.2 For the pulposes of this section, luminaires without transfomels or convello$ but which are

iitted with extfa-low voltage lamps connected in series to a low voltage suppty shall be consideled as low voltage
iquipment not exha-low voltage equipment. These luminaires shall be either class I oI class II equipment.

559.3.3 Where a luminaire is installed in a pelmet, there shall be no adverse effects due to the presence or
operation ofcurtains or blinds.

559.3.4 Atrack system for luminaires shall comply with the requirements ofBS EN 60570'

559.4 Protection of the surroundings against thermal effect3

559.4.1 General
In rhe selection and erection ofa luminaire the therrnal effects ofradiant and convected energy on the suroundings
.hall be taken inlo account, including:
(i) the maximum permissible power dissipated by the lanps
iii) the fire-resistance of adjacent material
at the point ofinstallation, and

in tle thermallv affected areas

tiii) the rniniurun distance to combustible materials, including material in the path of a spotlight beam
(iv) the relevant markings on the luminaire.

559.5 Wiring systems

559.5.1 Connection to the fixed wiring

.1l each fixed lighting point one ofthe following shall be used for the tennination ofthe wiring system:
(i) A ceiling rose complying with BS 67
1ii) A lunrinaile supporting coupler (LSC) complying with BS 6972 or BS 7001
iii) A batten lampholder or a pendant set complying with BS EN 60598
r

ir ) A luminaire complying with BS EN 60598

r

r\ ) A sujtable socket-outlet complying with BS 1363-2, BS 546 or BS EN 60309-2

rr i) A plug-in tighting distdbution unit complying with BS 5733
\ ii) A connection unit complying with BS 1363-4
lii) Appropriate temrinals eucloscd in a box complying with the relevant part ofBS EN 60670 series or-BS 4662
-,

,ir) A device for counecting a luminaire (DCL) outlet complying with BS IEC 61995-1
r\) An installation coupler couplying with BS EN 61535.
{oTE: In suspe[ded ceilings one plug-ir lighiing distribution unit rnay be used for a number ofluminaires.
559.5.1.201 A ceiling rose or lampholder shall not be installed in any circuit opemting at a voltage normally
..;;eeding 250 volts.
 559.5.1.202 Aceilin-srose shall rlotbeused for the attachrnent ofmore than one outgoing flexible cable unless it
is specially designed for multiple pendants.

559.5.1.203 Luminaire supporting couplers and devices for the connection ofluminaires are designed specilically
for the elect cal connection of lulr]inaires and shall not be used for the connection of any other equipment.

559.5.1.204 Lighting circuits incolporating Bl5,822, E14, E27 or E40 lampholders shall be protected by an
overcurrent protective der.ice olrlaximum rating l6 A.

559.5.1.205 Bayonet lampholders 815 and 822 shall comply withBs EN 61184 and shall have the temperature
rating T2 desffibed in that standard.

559.5.1.206 In circuits ofa TN or TT system, except for E l4 and 827 lampholders complying with BS EN 60238,
the outer contact of every Edison screw or single centre bayonet cap type lampholder shall be comected to the
neutral conductor This regulation also applies to track mounted systems.

559.5"1.207 A lighting installation shall be appropriately controlled.

NOTE: See Table 537.4 fol guidance on the selection ofsuitable prctective, isolation and switching devices.

559.5.1.208 Considemtion shall be given to the provision of the neutral conductor, at each switch position, to
facilitate the installation of elechonic switching devices.

559.5.2 Fixing of luminaires

Adequate means to flx luminaires shall be provided.

The fixing means may be mecharical accessories (e.g. hooks or screws), boxes or enclosures which are able to
support luminaires or supporling devices for connecting a luminairc.

Irt places u,here the fixing means is intended to supporl a luminaire, the fixing means shall be capable of carrying a
nass ofnot less than 5 kg. Ifthe mass ofthe lurninaire is greater than 5 kg, a fixing means capable ofsupporting the
mass ofthe luminaire shall be installed.

The installation ofthe fixing neans shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

The weight of luminaires and their eventual accesso es, e.g. shades, shall be compatible with the mechanical
capability ofthe ceiling or suspended ceiling or suppoting structure where installed.

Any flexible cable between the fixing means and the luminaire shall be installed so that any expected stresses in
the conductors, terminals and teminations will not impair the safety of the installation. (See also Table 4F3A of
Appendir( 4.)

559,5.3 Through wiring

559.5.3.1 The installation of through wiring in a luminaire is only pemitted if the luminaire is designed for
such wiring.

559.5.3.2 A cable for through wiring shall be selected in accordance with the temperature infonnation on the
luminaire or on the manufacturer's instruction sheet, ifany, as follows:
(i) For a luminaire complying with BS EN 60598 but with temperature marking, cables suitable for the marked
temperature shall be used
(ii) Unless specified in the manufacturer's inshxctions, for a luminaire complying with BS EN 60598 but with
no tempemture marking. heat-resistant cables are not required
(iii) In the absence of information, heat-resistant cables and/or insulated conductors of type H05S-U, H05S-K,
H05SJ-K, H05SS-K (BS EN 50525 series) or equivalent shall be used.

559-5.4 Devices for connection of luminaires to the supply

Ifthe lurninaire does not provide a connecting device for connection to the supply, the connecting device shall be:
(i) terminals according to BS EN 60998, or
(ii) a device for connecting a lurninaire (DCL) plug accordirg to BS EN 61995, or
(iii) an installation coupler according to BS EN 61535, or
(iv) supporting coupler (LSC) plug accolding to BS 6972 or BS 7001, or
(v) a male comector (plug) of a plug-in lighting distribution unit accolding to BS 5713, or
(vi) another suitable a:rd appropriate connecting device.

220
 NOTE: For the installation of supply cables. see also Regulation 522.2.201.

559.5.5 Groups of luminaires

Groups of luminaires divided between the line conductors of a polyphase ci.cuit u,ith only otle common neutral
conductor shall be provided with at least one device disconnecting simultaneousl)- all line conductors.
NOTE: See also Section 537.

559.5.6 Protection against heat and UV radiation effects within luminaires

Extemal cables and cores ofcables comrected within a lurninaire or passing through shall be so selected and erected
that they will not suffer damage or deterioration due to heat and IJV radiation generated by the lurninaire or its lamps
(e.g. shielding ofthe cable fi'om heat andior UV by means of hearuv-resistant sleeving).

559.6 lndependent lamp controlgear, e.g. ballasts

Only independent lamp controlgear marked as suitable for independent use, according to the relevant standard, shall
be used extemal to a luninaire.

Only the following are pemitted to be mounted on a flammable surface:

(i) A 'class P' thermally protected ballast/transformer
(ii) A tempemture declared thermally protected ballast/transformer
NOTE: For an explanation ofsymbols used see Table 55.3.

559.7 Compensation capacitors

Ito
Cornpensation capacitors having a total capacitance exceeding 0.5 pF shall only be used in conjunction with
discharge resistors. Capacitols and their marking shall be in accordance with BS EN 61048.
nga
This requirement does not apply to capacitors foming paft ofthe equipment.
r tlle

559.8 Protection against electric shock for display stands for luminaires
Protection against electric shock lor circuits supplying display stands for luminaires shall be provided by either:
rIical (i) a SELV or PELV supply, or
(ii) a residual current deyice having a rated residual operating curent not exceeding 30 mA which provides
..'. in both automatic disconnection of supply according to Section 411 and additional protection according to
Regulatiolr 415.1.
l\trl
559.9 Stroboscopic effect
In the case of lighting for premises where machines with moving pafis are in operation, consideration shall be
given to sfoboscopic effects which can give a misleading impression ofmoving parts being stationary. Such effects
..r l'ot
may be avoided by selecting lLuninaires with suitable lamp controlgear, such as high frequency controlgear, or by
distributing lighting loads across all the phases ofa polyphase supply.
:r ille
559.10 Ground-recessedluminaires
::.:'k.-,'l For grould-recessed luminaires, the selection and erection shall take account ofthe guidance given in Table A.1 of
BS EN 60598-2- 13.
ri ith

bcl
 TABLE 55.3 - Explanation of symbols used in luminaires, in controlgear for luminaires and in
the installation of luminaires
BS EN 60s98-l:2008
Recessed lurninaire not suitabie for direct mouflting
on normally flarrmable surfaces

Surface mounted luminaire not suiiable for direct

mounting on normally flammable surfaces

Luminaire not suitable for covering with thermally

jnsulating material

Use ofheat resistant supply cables, Luminaire for use with

interconDecting cables, or extemal high plessure sodium

(t'c(<'
/---...?,4 widng (number of conductors ofcable
is optional)
lamps that require an
extemal ignitor

(BS EN 60598 series) (BS EN 60598 series)

Luminaire designed for use with bowl Luminaire lor use with
mirror lamps high pressure sodium
Iamps having an intemal
(BS EN 60598 series) stalting device

(BS EN 60598 series)

l{ated nraximum anlbient temperature Luminairc \!ith limitcd
oC surface tcmpemturc
ta.... (BS LN 60598 se es)
(BS EN 60s9lt-2-24)

Waming against the use of cool-beam Short-circuit proof

lan'rps (inherently or
OL
non-inherently) safety
AM (BS EN 60598 ser ies) isolating transformer

(BS EN 61558-2-6)

Minirnum distance Aom lighted objects Temperature declared

(mctres) thermally protected lamp

c---, i (BS EN 60598 series)

controlgear (... replaced
by temperatue)

(BS EN 61347- 1)
Rough serr'ice luminaire Electoric convefior for
an extra-low voltage
(BS EN 60598 series) lighting installation

W-ru Replace any cracked plotective screen

(BS EN 60598 series)

Themally protected lamp
contolgear (class P)

(BS EN 61347-r)

Lrrrrrira:re desicned lor use with sel{ Independent ballast

.lriclded rung:ren halotsen lamp. or sell
shiclded metal halidc lamps only BS EN 60417 sheet No.
513 8
(BS EN 60598 series)

222
 GHAPTER 56

SAFETY SERVICES
CONTENTS

560.1 SCOPE
560.4 CLASSIFICATION
560.5 GENERAL
560.6 ELECTRICAL SOURCES FOR SAFETY SERVICES
560.6.8 Special requirements for safety services having sources not capable of operation in
parallel
560.6.9 Special requirements for safety services having sources capable of operation in parallel
560.6.10 Central power supply sources
560.6.11 Low power supply sources
560.6.12 Uninterruptible power supply sources (UPS)
560.6.1 3 Generator sets for safety services
560.6.14 Monitoring of safety sources
560.7 CIRCUITS OF SAFETY SERVICES
560.8 WIRING SYSTEMS
s60.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEMS
s60.10 FIRE DETECTION AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
560.11 LIFE SAFETY AND FIREFIGHTING APPLICATIONS

CHAPTER 56
SAFETY SERVICES
:6 0.1 SCOPE

:. chaptcr covers gereral requirements for safety services, selection and erection ofelect cal supply systenrs for
-:::r sen,ices and electrical safety soulces. Standby electrical supply systems are outside the scope.

r: .haptel does l]ot apply to installations in hazardous areas (BE3), for which requirements are given in BS EN
. -9_ l.l.
\tTE: Examples ofsafety scryices include (this list is not exhaustive):
- Errergency lighting
- Fire purnps
Fire rescue service litts
Fire detection and alann systems
CO detection and alann systcms
Fire evacuation systems
Srnoke ventilation systems
Fire services communication systelns
Essential medical systems
Industrial safety systcms.

:.:.:2 /Vot used

i:-'3 Not used

,-
 560.4 CLASSIFICATION

560.4.1 An electrical safety service supply is either:

(i) a non-autornatic supply. thc stafting ofwhich is initiated by an operatol or
(ii) an automatic supply. the starting of which is independent ofan operator
An automatic supply is classified as follows, according to the maximum changeover time:
(a) No-break: ar automatic supply which produces a continuous supply within specifled conditions during the
period oftransition, for example as regards variations in voltage and frequency
(b) Very short break: ar automatic supply available within 0.15 s
(c) Short break: an automatic supply available within 0.5 s
(d) Normal break: an automatic supply available within 5 s
(e) Medium break: an aLrtomatic supply available within l5 s
(f) Long break: an automatic supply available in lrore than l5 s.
560.4.2 The esseltial equipment for safety services shall be compatible with the changeover time in order to
maintain the specified operation.

560.5 GENERAL
560.5.1 Safety services u.ny be reqr"rired to operate at all relevant times including during mains and local
supply failure and through fire conditions. To meet this rcquirement specilic sources, equipment, circuits and wiring
are necessary Some applications also have particular requirements, as in Regulations 560.5.2 and 560.5.3.

560.5.2 For safety services required to operate in fire conditions, the following two conditions shall be
fulfi11ed:
(i) An etectrical source for safety supply shall be so selected as to maintain a supply ofadequate dluation, and
(ii) all equipment ofsafety services shall be so provided, either by construction or by erection, with fire-resisting
proteclion ol adeqttate duration.
NOTE: The safety source is gencrally additional to the noflnal source. The normal source is, for example, the public supply
network.

560,5.3 Where automatic disconnection of supply is used as a protective measure against electdc shock,
non-disconnection on the first lault is preferred. ln lT systems, continuous insulation monitoring devices shall be
provided which give an audible and visual indication in the event ofa fint fault.

560.5.4 A failure in the control or bus system of a normal installation shall not adversely affect the function
of safety serices.

560.6 ELECTRICAL SOURCES FOR SAFETY SERVICES

560.6.1 The following electrical sources for safety seruices are recognized:
(i) Stomge battedes
(ii) Primary cells
(iii) Generator sets independent ofthe normal supply
(iv) A separate feeder of the supply network that is effectively independent of the notmal feeder '
560.6.2 Safety sources for safety sen,ices shall be installed as fixed equipment and in such a nlanner that they
cannot be adversely affected by failure ofthe normal source.

560.6.3 Safety sources shall be installed in a suitable location and be accessible only to skilled or instructed
pelsons (BA5 or BA4).

560.6,4 The location ofthe safety source shall be properly and adequately ventilated so that exhaust gases.
smoke or fumes from the safety sout'ce cannot penetrate areas occupied by one or more pemons.

560.6.5 Separated independent feeders from a dist butor's network shall not serve as electrical sources for
safety services unless assurance can be obtained that the two supplies are unlikely to fail concurrently.

560.6.6 The safety source shall have sulicient capability to supply its related safety service.

560.6.7 A safety source [ray, in addition, be used for purposes other than safety services, provided that the
availability for safety services is not thereby iurpaired. A fault occurring in a circuit for pruposes other than safet)
services shall not cause the iflten'uption olany circuit for saf'ety sen'ices.

224
-.I

560.6.8 Special requirements for safety services having sources not capable of operation in
parallel

560.6.8.1 Adequate precautions shall be taken to avoid the paralleling of sources.

NOTE: This may be achieved by mechanical inter'locking.

560"6.8.2 Shoft-circuit protection and fault protection shall be pror ided for each source.

E 560.6.9 Special requirements for safety services having sources capable of operation in
parallel

Shofi-circuit protection and fault protectior shall be effective inespective of uhether the installation is supplied
separately by either olthe two sources or by both in parallel.
NOTE 1 : The Damllcl operatio[ofa pri\'alc source with the public supply network is subject to authorization by the distribution
nctwork opelator (DNO). This oray lequire special devices, for example to prevent reverse power. Refer also to Section
551. rhe DCode (Distributioo Code oflicensed distribution operators) and ENA Engjneering Recomtrendations G83/2
and G59/3.

Precautions may be necessary to limit curent circulation in the connection between the neutral points ofthe sources,
rn panlcul.rr thc cfl'cct ol I11plen lrarnronrcs.

560.6.10 Gentral power supply sources

Batteries shall be of vented or valve-regu)ated maintenance-free t)pe and shall be of hear,y duty indr.rstrial design.
for example cells complying with BS EN 60623 or the approp atepafiof the BS EN 60896 serics.
oC
NOTE: The rnininurr design life ofthe batte es at 20 should be l0 yeals.

560.6.1'l Low power supply sources

.:xd The porver output ofa low power supply system is lirnited to 500 W for'3-hour duration and 1500 W for a 1-hour
:.lllg duration. Batteries shall be ofheavy duty industrial design, for example cells complying with tsS EN 60623 or the
appropriate pafl ofthe BS EN 60896 series are suitable.
oC
NOTE: The minirrum design life ofthe batteries at 20 should be 5 years.

560.6.12 Uninterruptible power supply sources (UPS)

t -,; k.
Where an uninterruptiblc power supply is used, it shall:
. Lr.
(i) be able to operate distribution circuit protective devices. and
(ii) be able to start the safety devices when it is operating in the emergency condition from the invcfter supplied
by the battery, and
(jii) comply with the rcquircments oiRegulation 560.6. t0, and
(iv) cornply with BS EN 62040-1 and BS EN 62040-3, as applicable.

560.6.13 Generator sets for safety services

Where a genemting set is used as a safety source, it shall comply with BS 7698-12.

560.6.14 Monitoring of safety sources

The condition ofthe source for safety services (ready for operation, under fault conditions, feeding from the source
r.,: lre\ for saf'ety services) shall be monitored.

560.7 CIRCUITS OF SAFETY SERVICES

-:a.aiec-
560.7.1 Except where the recomnendations of other safety standards apply. circuits of safety seryices shall
be indeperdent of other circuits.
gases- NOTE: This rneans that any electrical l'ault or any inteNention or modification in one systelr must Dot affect the correct
functioning olthe other This may neccssitate separatiol by fire lesistant materials or different ]outes or enclosures.

560.7.2 Cilcuits of safety services shall rot pass through locations exposed to fire dsk (BE2) unless they are
iire-resista[t. The circuits shall not, in any case, pass through zones exposed to explosion risk (BE3).
NOTE: Whele placticablc. the passage ofcircuits through locations presenting a fire risk should be avoidcd-

- : r.rl d'. 560.7.3 In accordance with Regulation 433.3.3, protection against ovelload tnay be omitted where the loss
_ : :.1lal\ ofsupply may cause a greater hazard. Where protection against overload is omitted. the occulrence ofan overload
:hall be rnonitoled.

225
 560,7,4 Overcurrent prorective devices shall be selected and erected so as to avoid an overcurrent in one
circuit impai ng the correct operation ofcircuits of safety services.

560.7.5 Switchgear and controlgear shall be clearly identified and grouped in locations accessible only to
skilled or instructed persons (B-\5 or BA4).

560.7.6 In equipmenr supplied by two different circuits, a fault occuring in one circuit shall not impair the
protection against elec!ic shock or the conect operation olthe other circuit. Such equipment shall be connected to
the protective conducto$ ofboth circuits, ifnecessary

560.7.7 Safety circuir cables, other than metallic screened, fire-resistant cables, shall be adequately and
reliably separated by distance or by barriers from other circuit cables, including other safety circuit cables.
NOTE: For battery cables. special lequirements may apply.

560,7.8 Circuits for safety services, with the exception ofwiring for fire and rescue selice lift supply cables
and wiring for Iifts with special requirements, shall not be installed in lift wells or other fluelike openings.
NOTE: while fre resistant cables rvill suwive most fires, if they are located in an unstopped vertical well the upward air
draught in a fire can generate cxcessive tempemtures above the capabilities ofthe cable so they should be avoided as
a route for safety systems.

560.7.9 In addition to a general schematic diagram, full details ofall electrical safety sources shall be given.
The inlbmation shall be maintair.red adjacent to the distribution board. A single-line diagram is sufficient.

560.7.10 A drawing or drawings of the electrical salety installations shall be available showing the exact
location of:
(i) all electrical equipment and distribution boards, with equipment designations
(ii) safety equiprnent with final circuit designation and particulars and pur?ose ofthe equipment
(iii) special switching and monitoring equipment for the safety power supply (e.g. area switches, visual or
acoustic w atr ing equipment).

560.7.11 A list ofall the cunent-using equipment permanently connected to the safety power supply, indicating
the nominal electrical power, rated nominal voltage, curent and starting cuffent, together with its duration, shall be
available.
NOTE: This information lnay be included in the circuit diagrams.

560.7.12 Operating instructions for safety equipment and electrical safety services shall be available. They
shall take into accor.mt all the particulars ofthe installation.

560.8 WIRING SYSTEMS

560.8.1 One or more olthe following wiring systems shall be utilised for safety services required to operate
in fire conditions:
(i) Mineral insulated cable systems complying with BS EN 60702-1 andBS EN 60702-2andBSEN 60332-1-2
(ii) Fire-resistant cables complying with IEC 60331- l, IEC 60331-2 or IEC 60331-3 and with BS EN 60332-l-2
(iii) Fire-resistant cables complying with test requirements ofBS EN 50200, BS 8434 or BS 8491, appropriate
for the cable size and with BS EN 60332-1-2
(iv) A wiring system maintaining the necessary fire and mechanical protection.

The wiring system selected shall tneet the requirements ofthe relevant code ofpractice appropdate to the application
aud shall be mounted and installed in such a way that the circuit integdty will not be impaired during a flre.

NOTE 1: BS 5266, BS 5839 and BS 8519 specify cables to BS EN 60702-1, BS 7629-1 and BS 7846 as being suitable
when appropridrel) sclccted tol the rpplication.

NOTE 2: Examples of a systern maintaining the necessary fire and mechanical protection could be:
(i) constructional enclosures to maintainflte and mechanical protection. or
(ii) wirirg systems in sepamte fire compatments.

560.8.2 Wiring lor cortrol and bus systems of safety services shall be in acaordance with the same
requirements as the wiring which is to be used for the safety services. This does not apply to circuits that do not
adversely aflect the operation ofthe safety equipment.

560.8.3 Reserved .for./itture use

560.8.4 Circuits for safety services which can be supplied by direct current shall be provided with two-pole
overcurent protection mechanistls.

226
 560.8.5 Srvitchgear and controlgeax used for both AC and DC supply- sources shall be suitable for both AC
and DC operation.

560.9 EMERGENGY LIGHTING SYSTEMS

Emergency lighting systems shall comply with the relevant pafis ofBS 5266 series and BS EN 1838.

560.10 FIRE DETECTION AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS

Fire detection and fire alam systems shall comply with the relevant parts ofBS 5839 series.

560.11 LIFE SAFETY AND FIREFIGHTING APPLICATIONS

The selection and installation ol power and control cable systems which are required to maintain their circuit
integrity for life safety and firefighting applications shall comply with the relevant parts of BS 8519.

-l-l
-l-2

j - :.!
 PART 6

INSPECTION AND TESTING

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 61
I
NOT USED
CHAPTER 62 NOT USED I

CHAPTER 63 NOT USED I

CHAPTER 64 INITIAL VERIFICATION I

641 GENERAL I

642 INSPECTION I

643 TESTING I

643.1 General I

643.2 Continuity of conductors I

643.3 lnsulation resistance I

643.4 Protection by SELV, PELV or by electrical separation I

643.4.1 Protection by SELV 1

643.4.2 Protection by PELV I

643.4.3 Protection by electrical separation I

643.5 lnsulation resistance/impedance of floors and walls I

643.6 Polarity I

643.7 Prolection by automatic disconnection of the supply I

643.7.1 General I

643.7.2 Earth electrode resistance I

tl4J. / .J Earth fault loop impedance I

643.8 Additional protection I

643.9 Check of phase sequence I

643.10 Functional testing I

643.11 Verification of voltage droP I

644 CERTIFICATION FOR INITIAL VERIFICATION I

CHAPTER 65 PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING

651 GENERAL
652 FREQUENCY OF PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING
653 REPORTING FOR PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING

228
 CHAPTER 61 NOT USED

CHAPTER 62 NOT USED

CHAPTER 63 NOT USED

fFI*rc'\
r*
*** ;

_^
 CHAPTER 64
INITIAL VERIFICATION
641 GENERAL
641.'l Every installation shall, du ng erection and on completion before being put into service, be
inspected and tested to verify, so far as is reasonably practicable, that the requirements of the Regulations have
been met.

641 .2 The result ofthe assessment ofthe fundameotal principles. Section l3l, the genelal characteristics
lequired by Sections 311 to 313, together with the information required by Regulation 514.9.1, shall be made
available to the person or persons can)ing out the inspection and testing.

641.3 The veriflcation shall ilclude comparison of the results with relevant criteria to conflrm that the
requirements ofthe Regulations have been met.

641.4 Precautions shall be taken to avoid danger to persons and livestock, and to avoid damage to property
and installed equipment, du ng inspection and testing.

641.5 For an addition or alteration to an existing ilstallation, it shall be ve fied that the addition or
alteration complies with the Regulations and does not impair the safety ofthe existing installation.

641.6 The verification shall be made by one or more skilled persons competent in such work.

641.7 On completion ofthe verification, according to Regulations 641.1 to 611.6, a certificate shall be
prepared.

642 INSPECTION

642.1 Inspection sha11 prcccdc tcsting and shall normally bc donc u,ith that part of the irstallatjon undcr
inspection disconnected liorr.r the supply.

642.2 The inspection shall be made to verify that the installed electrical equipment is:
(i) in compliance with the requirements of Section 5I I (this may be ascertained by n.urk or by certiflcation
furnished by the installer or the manufacturer), and
(ii) correctly selected and erected in accordance with the Regulations, taking into account manufacturcrs'
instructions. and
(iii) not visibly damaged or defective so as to impair safety.
642.3 The inspection shall include at least the checking ofthe following items where relevant:
(i) Connectionofcorductors
(ii) Identiflcationofconductors
(iii) Routing of cables in prescribed zones, or protection against mechanical damage, in compliance with
Section 522
(iv) Selection ofconductors for current-carrying capacity and voltage drop, in accordance with the design
(v) Connection of single-pole devices for protection or switching in line conductors only
(vi) Correct connection ofaccesso es and equipment
(vii) Presence offire barriers, suitable seals and protection against thermal effects
(viii) Methods ofprotection against electric shock
(a) both basic protection and fault protection, i.e.:
- SEI V
- PELV
- Double insulation
- Reinforced insulation
(b) basic protcctior (including measurement of distances, where appropriate), i.e.:
- protection by insulation of live parts
- protection by a balTier or an enclosure
 - protection by obstacles
- protection by placing out ofreach
(c) fault protection:
(i) presence ofadequate arangements for altemative sources(s), where applicable

(il) choice and setting ofprotective and monitoring devices

(iii) automatic disconnection ofsupply (including FELV)
(iv) selection and installation ofeafthing arrangements, protective conductors and their connections
confirmed for presence and sized in accordance with the design:
r eafihing conductor
r circuit protective conductors
r protective bonding conductors
r supplementary bonding conductors
r earthing affangements for combined protectiye and functional purposes
r exposed-conductive-pafis are connected to the earthing arangement

(v) non-conducting location (including measurement ofdistances, where appropriate)

absence of protective conductors

(vi) eafth-free local equipotential bonding

presence of eaflh-free protective bonding conductors
(vii) electrical separation
(d) additional protection
:.'r
(ix) Prevention of mutual detrimental influence
(x) Presence of appropriate devices for isolation and switching correctly located
(xi) Presence of undervoltage protective devices
Lrl'I
(xii) Labelling ofprotective devices, switches and terminals
i::'
(xiii) Selection of equipment and protective measures appropriate to extemal influences
(xiv) Adequacy of access to switchgear and equipment
(xv) Presence of danger notices and other waming signs
(xvi) Presence ofdiagrams, instructiors and similar information
(xvii) Selection and erection of wiring s;stems
(xviii) Erection methods

,,1r1'1
(xix) Selection and installation ofsuitable SPDs where required
(xx) Measures againstelectromagnetic disturbances.

The inspection shall include a1l parlicular requirements for special installations or locations (Part 7).

643 TESTING

643.1 General
The tests of Regulations 643.2 to 643.1l, where relevant, shall be carried out and the results compared with
relevant crite a.

Veasuring instruments and monitoring equipment and methods shall be chosen in accordance with the relevart
parts of BS EN 61557.If other measuring equipment is used, it shall provide no lesser degree of performance and
safety.

When undefiaking testing in a potentially explosive atmosphere, appropdate safety precautions in accordance with
BS EN 60079-17 are necessary

The tests of Regulations 643.2 to 643.6, where relevant, shall be carried out in that order before the installation
is energized. Where the installation incorporates an eaflh electrode, the test of Regulation 643.7.2 shall also be
caried out before the installation is enersized.

231
If any test indicates a failure to comply, that test and any preceding test, the results of which may have been
influenced by the fault indicated, shall be repeated after the fault has been rectifie<l.

643.2 Continuity of conductors

643.2,1 The continuity ofconductors arld connectiorls to exposed-conductive-pats and extraneous-
condlLctive-parts, ifany, shall be verilied by a measurenent ofresistance on:

(i) protective conductors, including protective bonding corductors, and

(ii) in the case ofring final circuits, Iive conductors.
643.3 lnsulation resistance

643.3.1 The insulation resistance shall be measured between live conductors and between live conductors
and the protective conductor connected to the eafihing arangement. Where appropriate during this measurement,
line and neutral conductors may be connected together

643.3.2 The insulation resistance measured with the test voltages irdicated in Table 64 shall be considered
satisfactory if
the main switchboard and each distribution circuit tested separately, with all its fll1al circuits
connected but with curent-using equipment disconnected, has an insulation resistance not less than the appropriate
value given in Table 64.
NOTE I : More specific requirements are applicable for the wiing of fire detection and flre alarm systems in buildings, see
BS 5839-1.

TABLE 64 -
Minimum values of insulation resistance

Circuit nominal voltage Test voltage DC Minimur insulation

resistance
(v) (Mo)
SELV and PELV 2s0 0.5
Up to and including 500 V with thc cxception 500 1.0
of thc above svstems
Above 500 V r 000 1.0

Table 64 shall be applied when verifting insulation resistance between non-eafihed protective conductors and
Earth.

FELV circuits shall be tested at the same test voltage as that applied to the p mary side ofthe source and shall meet
all Lhe test requiremenrs lor lou rolrage circuirs.

Where surge protective devices (SPDs) or other equipment are likely to influence the verification test, or be
damaged, such equipment shall be disconnected before canying out the insulation resistance test.Where it is
not reasonably practicable to disconnect such equipment (e.g. fixed socket-outlet incorporating an SPD), the test
voltage lor the pafiicular circuit may be reduced to 250 V DC, but the insulation resistance shall have a value of
at least I MQ.

Insulation resistance values are usually much higher than those ofTable 64. When measured values show evident
differences between circuits, further investigation to identify the reasons is required.
NOTE 2: Itr locations exposcd to fire hazard, a measulement ofthe insulation resistance between the live conductors should be
applied. In practice, it may be necessary to cany out this measurement du ng erection ofthe installation and before
connection of the equipment.

643.3.3 Where the circuit includes electronic devices which are likely to influence the results or be damaged,
only a measurement between the live conductors connected together and the eafthing arangemelt shall be made.
NOTE; Additional precautions, such as disconnection. may be necessary to avoid damage to elecfto1]ic dcviccs.

643.4 Protection by SELV, PELV or by electrical separation

It shall be ve fiedthatthe separation ofcircuits isin accordance with Regulation 643.4.1 in the case ofprotecrion
by SELV, Regulation 643.4.2 in the case ofprotection by PELV and Regulation 643.4.3 in the case ofprotection by
elect cal separation. The resistance values obtained in the tests ofRegulations 643.4.1lo 643.4.3 shall be at least
that ofthe circuit with the highest voltage present in accordance with Table 64.
 643.4.1 Protection by SELV
The sepalation of the live pafts liorn those ol other circuits and tiom Lanh. accirding to Section 414, shall be
conlimed by a measurement of the insulation resistance. Thc rcsistance r alues rrbtained shail be in accordance
* ith Table 64.

643.4.2 Protection by PELV

The separation ofthe live pafts from other circuits, according to Section 414. shall be confinned by a measurelrent
ofthe insr.rlation resistance. The resistance values obtained shall be in accordance rith Table 64.

643.4.3 Protection by electrical separation

The sepamtion of the live parts from those of other circuits and from Eath, according to Section 413. shall be
confimed by a nleasurement of the insr.rlation resistance. The resistance vah"res obtained shall be in accordance
rr ith Table 64. In the case of electrical separation with more than one item of cun'ent-usil'rg equipment, either
br measurcment or by calculation, it shall be ve lled that in case ol two coincidental faults with negligible
impedance between different line conductors and either the protective bonding conductor or exposed-conductive-
lafts connected to it, at least one of the faulty circuits shall be disconnected. The disconnection time shall be in
l!-cordance with that 1br the protective measure autontatic disconnection of supply in a TN systen.r.

643.5 lnsulation resistance/impedance of floors and walls

643.5.1 Where il is necessary to cornply with the requiremelts of Regulation 418.1, at least three
:ri-asufen]ents shall be made in the sarle location" one ofthese measurements being approximately I nr tronl
::r\ acccssiblc cxffancous-corlductivc-part in the location. The other two measurements shall be nade at greater
:.'tances. The measulement of resistancei ir]rpedarrce of insulating floors and walls is carried out u,ith the systern
-,ltagc to Eafth at nonrinal t'r'ecluclcy. The above series of rneasuLements shall be repeated 1br each relevant
...rf'acc of the location.
\OTE: Iru her i lbnralion on measLn-curerlt ofthc insulurtion rcsistancc,'irnpcdancc offloors and rvalls can bc fouud in
App!'ndix li.

643.5,201 A[y insulation or ius.rlaling arangclncnt of cxtrancous-concluctivc-pa]-ts intcndcd to satisfy

: :gulation (iii) shall:
418. I .4
1 i) when testcd at 500 V DC bc not lcss than I MO. and
ri) be able to rvithstand a test voltage of at least 2 kV AC rms^ and
rri) rot pass a le-akage currcnt cxcc!'ding lrnAinnomal conclitions of use.

443.6 Polarity
: j!'re lelevant, tire poladty ofthe supply at the origin ofthe installation shall be velified before the installation is
:- rrlrized. Where singlc-pole switching deviccs are not pemritted in the neutral coDdrrctor. a test shall be made to
i:ri'\ that all such devices ale connected in the line conductor(s) only.

- -: ing the polarity test. it shal1 be verilicd drat:

i) every f'use and single-pole control and protective device is corulected in the line conductor only. and
ri) except fbr El4 and E27 lanpholders to BS EN 60238, in circuits having an eafthed neutml conductol'.
celtre contact bayonet and Edison screw lampholders have the outer or screwed contacts connected to the
neutral conductor- and
:rt rviring has been conectly conr]ected throughout the installation.

4"13,7 Protection by automatic disconnection of the supply

-'rc RCDs are applied also for protcction against fire, the ve fication of the conditions fbr protection by
-: iDatic disconnection ofthe supply may be considered as satisfying the relevant requirements ofChapter 42.

:13,7.1 General
- . rcrification olthe etlectiveness ofthe measures for thult protection by autornatic disconnection ofsupply is
.-:rii!-d as follows:

: TN system

:::iiance with RegrLlation .111.4 shall be veri6ed by:

r]easurer]]ent oflhe earth t'ault loop impedance (see Regulation 6;13.7.i )

._^*---
 (2) vedfication of the characteristics and/or the effectiveness of the associated protective device. This
r erificarion shall be tnade:
- for overcurrent protective devices, by visual inspection or other appropriate methods (i.e. short-time or
instantaneous tripping setting for circuit-breakers, cunent rating and type for fuses)
- fbr RCDs, by visual inspection and testing.
test equipment
The effectiveness of automatic disconnection of supply by RCDs shall be verified using suitable
according to BS EN 61557-6 (see Regulation 643.1) to confim that the relevant Iequilements ofChaptel4l
are

met, taking into account the opemting characteristic ofthe device'

NOTE: See Table 3A in Appendix 3.

where the effectiveness of the protective measure has been confitmed at a point located downstream of an RCD,

the protection of the installation downstream from this point may be proved by confirmation of the continuity of
the protective conducto$.

b) TT system
Compliance with Regulation 411.5 shall be velified by:
(l) measurement ofthe resistance ofthe eafih electrode for exposed-conductive-parts ofthe installation (see
Regulation 643.7.2)
NOTE: Where a measurement ofRA is not practicable the measured value ofextemal eafih fault loop impedance
may be uLscd.

(2) verification ofthe chamcteristics and/or effectiveness ofthe associated protective device. This verification
shall be urade:
- for overcurrent protective devices, by visual inspection oI other applopriate methods (i.e. short-time oI
instantaneous lripping setting for circuit-breakers, current rating and type for trses)
- for RCDs, by visual inspection and lesting.
equipment
The effectiveness of automatic disconnection of supply by RCDs shall be verified using suitable test
(see Regulation confiming that the relevant lequirements of Chapter 41 are
according to BS EN 6l 55 7-6 643. I )
met, taking into account the operatilg characteristic ofthe device
NOTE: Sce Table 3A in APpendix 3.

Where the effectiveness of the protective measure has been confirmed at a point located downstream
of an RCD,
the protection of the installation downstream from this point may be ploved by confimation of
the continuity of
the protective conductors.

c) lT system
of the
Courpliance with the requirements of Regulation 411.6 shall be verified by calculation or measurement
curent 1a in case ofa flrst fault on a live conductor.
Plecautions
A measurement is [rade only if calculation is not possible because all the parameters are not known.
shall be takel while maki;rg the measurement in order to avoid the danger due to a double fault'
Whele
ln the case ofa double earth fault, the fault loop impedance shall be verifled by calculation or measurement
the condition is similar to that of a TT system (see Chapter 41), verification shall be made as for a TT system (see
of TN system (see Chapter 41), verification by
Regulation 643.7.1. item b)). Where conditions aIe similar to that a

measurement shall be made as follows:

(i) for.tT installations supplied from a local transformer, the earth fault loop impedance is measured by
insefiing a connection with negligible impedance between a live conductor and eadh at the origin of the
installaion. The eafih fault loop impedarice measurernent is made between a second live conductor and
protective earth at rhe end of the ciicuit. Verification is achieved if the measured value is < 50 % of ttre
maximum allorved looP imPedance
by verification ofthe
(ii) for IT systems connected to a public griil, the earth fault loop impedance is detemined
continuity ofthc protective concluctor and by measuring the loop impedance between two live conducton
ofthe maximum permitted
at the end ofthe circuit. Verification is achieved ifthe measured vatue 3
is 50 7o

loop in.rpedance. Ifverification is not achieved, more detailed measurements are necessary'

_234
 643.7.2 Earthelectroderesistance

Where the eafthing system incoryorates all earth electrode as paft of the installation, the electrode resistarce to
Earth shall be measured.
NOTE: Where a measurement ofRA is not pmcticable, the measured value ofextemal earth fault loop impedance may be
used.

643.7.3 Earth fault loop impedance

Where protective measures are used which require a knowledge of earth fault loop impedance, the relevant
impedances shall be measured, or determined by an altemative method.

-{n electrical continuity test shall be carried out according to Regulation 643.2 before carrying out the eafth fault
loop impedance measurement.

The measured earlh fault loop impedance shall comply with Chapter 4l.
\\ihere the requirements of this regulation are not satisfied and supplementary protective equipotential bonding
according to Chapter 4l is provided, the effectiveness ofthat bonding shall be verifled.
NOTE: Further information on measurement of earth fault loop impedance can be found inAppendix 3.

643.7.3.20'l Prospective fault current

The prospective short-circuit current andprospective earth fault current shall be measured, calculated or determined
c1 another method, at the o gin and at other relevant points in the installation.
643.8 Additional protection
- re verillcation ofthe effectiveness ofthe measures applied foradditional protection is fulfilled byvisual inspection
'rd tcsting. Where RCDs are required for additional protection, the effectiveness of automatic disconnection of
.-.pply by RCDs shall be verilied using suitable test equipment according to BS EN 61557-6 (see Regulation
i3. I ) to confim that the relevant requirements of Chapter 4l are met.
NOTE: Effectiveness is deemed to have been verilied where an RCD mccting thc rcquircmcnts of Regulation 415.1.1
disconnccts within 40 ms when tested at a current equal to or higher than five times its rated residual opertring
current.

l. 'i here additional protection is provided by supplementary protective equipotential bonding, the effectiveness of
-a ::t bonding shall be checked against thc rcquircments ofChapter 41.
6,43.9 Check of phase sequence

For polyphase circuits, it shall be verified that the phase sequence is maintained at all relevant points thmughout
-he installation.

643.10 Functionaltesting
aquipment shall be subjected to functional testing, as appropriate, to verilj/ that it is properly mounted, adjusted
:nd installed and operates correctly in accordance with the relevant requirements of this Standard. Examples of
:-'rch equipment are:
- switchgear and controlgear assemblies, drives, controls and interlocks
systems for emergency switching off and emergency stopping
insulation monitoring.
XOTE 1: This list is not exhaustive.

l:otective devices shall be submitted to a test oftheir function,

as necessary, to check that they are properly installed
adjusted. Where fault protection and/or additional protection is provided by an RCD, the effectiveness of any
=d
:.sr facility incorporated in the device shall be verified.

,\here an AFDD is installed the effectiveness olany manually operated test facility shall be verified in accordance
; 1th the manufacturers' recommendations.
HOTE 2: This functional test does not replace the functional test indicated by the relevant standards.

a4 3.1 1 Verification of voltage drop

'.
-ere required to verify compliance with Chapter 52, the voltage drop shall be elaluated by measurement or by
-..:ulation.

,l-. 235
 NOTE: Verification ofvoltage drop is notnonnally required during initial ve fication.

6M CERTIFICATION FOR INITIAL VERIFICATION

644.1 Except where Regu)ation 644.4.201 applies, upon completion of the verificatjon of a new
installation or an addition or altemtion to an existing installation, including the replacement ofa distribution board
or consLrrner lnit, an Electricat Installation Certificate based on the model given in Appendix 6 shall be issued to
the person ordering the work.

644,1,1 For a new installation, any defect or orrission revealed du ng the inspection and testing shall be
corected before the Certificate is issued.

644.1.2 For an addition and/or altemtion to an existing installation, any defect or omission that will affect
the safety ofthe addition or alteration that is levealed during inspection and testing shall be corrected before the
Certificate is issued.
NOTE: Sec Regulation 132.16.

The person responsible for the addition or altemtion, or a person autho zed to act on their behalf, shall record on
the Electrical lnstallation Certificate any other defects observed during the course ofthe works that may give dse
to danger.

644.2 Not used

644.3 The Certiflcate shall include details ofthe extent ofthe work covered, and:
- schedule(s) ofinspections, and
- schedule(s) oftest results.
The schedules shall be based on the models in Appendix 6.

644.4 The pcrson or peISons fesponsible 1br thc dcsign, colstructiol and veri6cation of the installation
shall issue the Certiflcate, which takes account of their respective responsibilities, to the person ordering the work,
together with the records mentioned ir Regulation 644.3.

The recommendation for the interval between initial verification and the flrst periodic inspection shall be recorded
on the Certificate.

644-4.201 Where electrical installatiou work does not include the provision ofa new circuit or replacement of
a distribution board or consumer unit. a Minor Electricat Installation Works Certificate, based on the model given
in Appendix 6, may be provided for each circuit that has been added to or altered as an altemative to an Electrical
Installation Certifi cate.

644.4.202 Electrical tnstallation Certificates and Minor Electlical Installation Works Certiflcates may be
produced in any wdtte[ or electronic fonn. Regardless ofthe media used for original cefiificates o[ their copies.
their authenticity and integdty shall be verified by a reliable process or method. The process or method shall also
vedfy that any copy is a true copy ofthe original.

644.5 Electrical tnstallation Cedificates and Minor Electrical Installation Works Ceftificates shall be
compiled and signed or otherwise authenticated by one or more skilled persols, competent to ve fy that the
requirements ofthis Standard have been met.

236
-l
CHAPTER 65
PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING
651 GENERAL
651.1 Where required, periodic inspection and testing of every electrical installatiol'l shall be carried out
in accordance with RegtLlations 651.2 to 651.5 il order to detennine, so far as is reasonably practicable, whethet
the installation is in a satisfactory conditior tbr continued service. Wherever possible. the documeltation arising
lrorr the initial cedification and any plevious periodic inspection and testing shall be taken into accoLlllt. Where no
previous documentation is available, investigation ofthe electlical installation shall be undertakell prior to carrying
out the periodic inspection and testilg.

651.2 Petiodic inspection shall becar ed out without dismantling, or with partial disnrantling. as required,
supplenented by appropriate tests and nleasurements fioln Chapter 64. to pl'ovide for:
(i) the sat'ety ofpersons and livestock against the effects ofelectr-ic shock and bunts
iil
(ii) protectior against damage to property by fire and heat arising from an electdcal installation delect
(iii) confirmation ofcorect rating and setting ofprotective devices required by Chapter 4l
(iv) colfimation ofcorect rating a]td setting of monitoring devices
(v) confirmation that the installation is not damaged or deteriorated so as to impair safety
(vi) the identification of installation defects and non-compliances with the requirements ofthe relevant palts of
BS 7671, that may give rise to darger.
NOTE 1: A genelic list ofexamples of items reqLriring inspection is given in Appendix 6.
NOTE 2; Existing installations may have been designed and installed to confonn to previous editiors of BS 767 I . applicable at
the timc oftheir design and erection. This does not ecessarily ,rean that they arc Lusafe
,:lon
.rk. \\/here a circuit is pem]arently tnonitored by an RCM or an IMD it is not necessary to lneasure the insulatrorr
resistance ifthe functioning ofthe RCM or IMD is coIrect.

The furctioling of the RCM or tMD shall be vcrified.

':ded
651.3 Pcriodic inspection and testing shall not cause danger to persons or livestock and shall not cause
danage to propcdy or equipment even ifthe cicuit is defective.
lir of
:l\ en \leasuring instruments and monitoring cquipment and methods shall be chosen in accordance with the releva[t parts
:::icai of BS EN 6 I 55 7. If other rneasuring cquipment is used, it shall provide no less a degree of perlbrmance and safety.

651.4 Details ofany darlage, deterioration, defects or dangerous conditions shall be recolded in a report.
:\ bc
,-
lies. 651.5 The periodic inspectior and testing shall be carried out by one or more skilled persons competent in
. llso such work.

652 FREQUENCY OF PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING

-..'.i1 be
652.1 The ti-eqr.rency ofperiodic inspection and testing ofan installation shatl be detemrined having regard
:,..I the
:!r rhe type ol installation and ecluipment, its use and operation, the frequency and quality of rnaintenance and the
:rrenal influences to which it may be subjected. The results and recommendations of previous certiflcates and
.ondition repofis shall also be takel into account.

652.2 ln the case of an installation under an effective management system fol plel entilti\ e lnajrrtenance ill
:onnai usc, periodic inspection and testing may be leplaced by an adequate regime ol continuous monitoring and
maintenance of tlte installation and all its constituent equipmelrt by olle or more skilled persons conpetent i11 such
* olk. Appropriate records shal1 be kept.

653 REPORTING FOR PERIODIC INSPECTION AND TESTING

65 3.'l upon completion of the periodic inspection and testing of an existing installation, an Electrical
I:rstallation Condition Repoft based or tlre model given in Appendix 6 shall be produced.

653.2 The Report shall include the following:

- details ofthose pafts oftbe installation that have been inspected and tested
- any limitatioos ofthe inspection and testing
- ally darnage. detcrioration, defects or dangercus conditions
- any non-co[rpliance with the requirements ofBS 7671 which firay give rise to darger

&-
 - schedules ofinspection as appropriate to those detailed in Section 642
- schedules ofresults ofthe apprcpriate tests detailed in Section 643

653.3 Not Ltsed

supported by an
The Repot shall indicate a recommended interyal until the next inspection'
cxplanatiol lor the recomm en.la t iott.

653.5TlreReponshallbecompiledandsigrredorotherwiseauthenticatedbyoneormoleSkilledpersons
competent in such work.

The Report shall be issued to the person ordering the inspection and
testing'

t
 PART 7

SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS OR LOCATIONS

CONTENTS

700 GENERAL
70'l LOCATIONS CONTAINING A BATH OR SHOWER
702 SWIMMING POOLS AND OTHER BASINS
703 ROOMS AND CABINS CONTAINING SAUNA HEATERS
704 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION SITE INSTALLATIONS
705 AGRICULTURAL AND HORTICULTURAL PREMISES
706 CONDUCTING LOCATIONS wlTH RESTRICTED MOVEMENT
708 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN CARAVAN / CAMPING PARKS AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
709 MARINAS AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
7',to MEDICAL LOCATIONS
7',t1 EXHIBITIONS, SHOWS AND STANDS
712 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
7',t4 OUTDOOR LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
715 EXTRA.LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
717 MOBILE OR TRANSPORTABLE UNITS
721 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN CARAVANS AND MOTOR CARAVANS
722 ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING INSTALLATIONS
729 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE GANGWAYS
730 ONSHORE UNITS OF ELECTRICAL SHORE CONNECTIONS FOR INLAND
NAVIGATION VESSELS
740 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR STRUCTURES
753 HEATING CABLES AND EMBEDDED HEATING SYSTEMS

SECTION 7OO

GENERAL
.. e particular requirements for each section (special installation or location) in Part 7 supplement or modify the
::reral rcquirements contained in other parts ofBS 7671.
- -',r absence ofreference to the exclusion of a pafi, a chapter, a section or a regulation means that the corresponding
::reral regulations are applicable.

- : number appearing after a section number generally refers to the corresponding chapter, section or regulation
, ::1in Parts I
to 6. The numbering does not, therefore, necessarily follow sequentially and new numbers have been
as required. Numbering offigures and tables takes the number ofthe section followed by a sequential number.
-:ed

239
 SECTION 701
LOCATIONS CONTAINING A BATH OR SHOWER
701.1 Scope
The pafticular requirements of this section apply to the electrical ilstallations i]1 locario:-: . ::;: ": , i\ed bath
(bath tub. birthing pool) o[ shower and to the sunounding zones as described lr] rhe:e r:-, -.
Thissectiondoesnotapplytoemeryencyfacjlitiessuchasemergencyshowersusedinir.:-..:
-:-:-, : jr(irarories.

701.3 Assessment of general characteristics

70'1.32 Classificationofexternalinfluences
701.32,1 General

When applying this sectior the zooes specified ir Regulations 701.32.2 ro,1 shall bi:-,::: :: .-- -:::. For fixed
prefabricatedbathorshowerunits,thezonesareappliedtothesituatiol\\'i']enrhr-.::: :: :.::..:r is in its
usable configuration(s).

Horizonlal or inclined ceilings, walls withor without windows, doors, floors ancl firec:.:::: : :r:. :.'irlken into
acCountwheret1reseel1'ectiVe1ylimitt1reextentof1ocationscontainingabathor.h.,,:.
Where the djmensions offixed partitions are smaller than the dimensions of the r;l:.::: ....: prirlitious
having a height lowerthan2.25 m,theminimurn distance in tlre horizontal and\errical d.::::: ::: : .... rj itken into
accourt (see Figures 701.1 and 701.2).

ForelectricalequipmentinpaftsofwallsorceilingslimitingthezonesspecifiedinRes:--:::-::.-.:l.lro4,but
being part ofthe surface ofthat u,all or ceiling, the r.equirements tbr the respective zone
:lpl..
701.32.2 Description of zone 0

Zonc 0 is the interior of1hc bath tub or shower basin (see Figurcs 701.1 and 2).

For showers without a basin. the height of zole 0 is 0. l0 m and its surlace extcnt has the sauta horizoltal exlcnt as
zone 1 (see Figure 701.2(fl).

701.32.3 Description of zone 1

Zonc 1 is limited by:

(i) the finished floor level ald the horizontal plane coresponding to the highest fised shern er l1ead or water
outlet or the ho zontal plane lying 2.25 rn above the finislred floor level. whicher.er is hieher
(ii) the vertical surface:
(a) circumscribing the barh tub or shower basin (see Figure 701.I )
(b) at a distalce of 1.20 m ftom the centre point ofthe fixed water outlet on the \.vall or ccilins 1br showers
without a basin (see Figure 701.1(e) and (f)).

Zone I does not include zone 0.

The space under the bath tub or shower basin is considered to be zone l. However, if the space uncler the bath fttb
or showcr basin is only accessible with a tool, it is considered to be outside the zones.

701.32,4 Description of zone 2

Zone 2 is linited by:

(i) the Iinished floor level and the horizontal plane corresponding to the highest fixeil shower head or water
outlet or the horizontal plare lying 2.25 m above the finished floor level, whichever is higher
(ii) the vetical surface at the boundary ofzone I and the parallel veftical surface at a distance 010.60 m from
the zone I border (see Figure 701.l ).

Fot shorvers without a basin, there is no zone 2 but an increased zone I is provided by the horjzontal dimension of
1 .20 m mentioned in Regulation 701.32.3(ii)(b) (see Figur e 701.1(e) and (t)).

240
 701.41 Protection for safety: protection against electric shock
701.410.3 Generalrequirements
701.410.3.5 The prorective measules of obstacles and placing out of reach (Section 417) shall not be used.
701.410.3.6 The protective measures of non conducting location (Regulation ,118.1) and earth-flee local
equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

701.411.3.3 Additional protection by RGDs

Additional protectior by the use of one or more RCDs having the charactedstics specifred in Regulation 415.1.1
shrll be pror ided lor lou roltage circuits:
(i) serving tlrc location
(ii) passing through zones 1 and/or 2 not serying the locatior.
NOTE: SeealsoRegulationsIl4.l(iv)and531.1 2 conceming the avoidance ofunwanted tippiDg'

1,:i 701.413 Protectivemeasure:Electricalseparation

Protection by elcctrical separation shall only be used for:
(i) circuits supplying one item ofcurent-using equipment, or
:l
(ii) one single socket-outlet.

For electric floor heatirg systems, see Regulation 701 753.

::r
701.414 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV
701 .4'14.4.5 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits

\\'hele SELV or PELV js used, whatever the nominal voltage, basic protection for equipment in zones 0, I and 2
.hall be provided by:
(i) basic insulatiot complying with Regulation 416.1, or
(ii) bauiers or enclosures cornplying rvith Regulation 416.2.

701.415 Additionalprotection
701.4'15.2 Supplementary protective equipotential bonding

Regulation 415.2 slrall be established corutecting

-Jcal supplementary protective equipotential bonding according to
: rsether the terminals of the protective conductor of each cit'cuit supplying Class I and Class II equipment
to the
,:.essible exkaneous-conductive-parts, within a room containing a bath or showcr, including the following:
(i) metallic pipes supplying services and netallic waste pipes (e.g. water, gas)
rii) metatlic central heating pipes and ait conditioning systems
rii) accessible rretallic stluctuml parts of the building (nietal]ic door architraves. wiudow fiames and sitnilar
pafis are not considerecl to be extraneous-conductive-pafis ulrless they are connected to metallic structural
parts ofthe building).

:,:plementary protcctive equipoterrtial bonding [ray be installed outside or inside rooms col]tail-Iing a bath or
- .rer. preferably close to the point of entry of extaneous-conductive-pafis into such tooms

jre the locatioll containilg a bath or showel is in a building with a protective equipotential bonding system in
-

-,,: idance with Regulation 4l 1.3.1.2, supplementary protective equipotential bonding may be omitted where all of
.-. -ollorving conditions are met:
. r All final circuits of the location comply with the requirements for automatic disconnection according to
Regulation 411.3.2
. r A11 final circuits of the location have additional protectior by means of an RCD in accotdalce with
Regulation 415.1.1
r, -{ll extmneous-conductive-pa s of the location are effectively connected to the protective equipoterltial
bonding according to Regulation 41 I.3.1 2

iCTE; The effcctiveness ofthe co tection ofexhancous conductivc-parts in the locatjon io lhe main earthing tenniDal ma\
be assessed, where necessary. by the applicatiorr ofReglrlation 415.2.2.
 701.5 Selection and erection of equipment
701.512.2 External influences
Installed electrical equipment shall have at least the following degrees ofprotection:
(i) h zone 0: IPXT
(ii) Il zones I and 2: IPX4.
This requirement does not apply to shaver supply units comptying with BS EN 61558-2-5 installed in zone 2 and
located where direct spmy from showers is unlikely.

Elect cal equipment exposed to waterjets, e.g. for cleaning pulposes, shall have a degree of protection ofat least
IPX5.

701.5'12.3 Erection of switchgear, controlgear and accessories according to external

influences
The following requirenents do not apply to switches and controls which are incorporated in fixed curenlusing
equipment suitabie for use in that zone or to insulating pul1 cords ofcord operated switches.

In zone 0:
switchgear or accessories shall not be installed.

In zone I :

only switches of SELV circuits supplied at a nominal voltage not exceeding l2 VAC lms or 30 V dpple-free
DC shall be installed, the safety source being installed outside zones 0, I and 2.

ln zone 2'.

switcl'rgea[, accessories incorporating switches or socket-outlets shall not be installed with the exception of:
(i) switches and sockeGoutiets of SELV circuits, the salety source being installed outside zones 0, 1 and 2,
and
(ii) shaver supply units complying with BS EN 61558-2-5.
Except for SELV socket-outlets complying with Section 414 and shaver supply units complying with
BS EN 61558-2-5, socket-outlets are prohibited within a distance of3 m hodzontally from the boundary ofzone l.
701.55 Current-usingequipment
ln zone 0, current-using equipment shall only be installed provided that all the following requirements are met:
(i) The equipment complies with the relevant standard and is suitable for use in that zone according to the
malufacturer's instructions for use and mounting
(ii) The equipment is fixed and permanently connected
(ili) The equipment is protected by SELV at a nominal voltage not exceeding l2 V AC rms or 30 V ripple-free
DC, the sat'ety source being installed outside zones 0, 1 and 2.

In zone l, only the lbllowing fixed and perrnanently connected current-using equipment shall be installed, provided
it is suitable for ilstallation in zone I according to the manufacturer's instructions:
(iv) Whirlpool units
(v) Electric showers
(vi) Shower pumps
(vii) Equipment protected by SELV or PELV at a nominal voltage not exceeding 25 VAC rms or 60 V ripple-free
DC, the sat'ety source being installed outside zones 0, I and 2
(viii) Ventilationequipment
(ix) Towel rails
(x) Water heating appliances
(xi) Luminaires.

242
 I

701.753 Electric floor heating systems

For electric floor hcating systelns, only heating cables accordins to rr-li, -,::: :':. :.-.': .rrndards ol thin shcet flexible
heating elements according to the relevant equipment standard shall be ere;:;; ::r'. :red tliat they havc either a metal
:heathorametalenr'losursorafinemeshrnetallicgrid.Thefinerneshmet;i:;=::;.r:r.'r.rl sheath or tnetal enclosule
shall be courected to the protective cotrductor of the supply circuit. Compli,rn;r .'. :ih thr latter require[rent is not
required ifthe protective measure SELV is provided for the floor healirlg s\ s{iu:

For electric floor heating systems the plotective measure 'protection by electli!'al sij.ilratlon' shall not be used.

Fig 701 .1 - Examples of zone dimensions (plan)

NOT TO SCALE (See Regulation 701.32 for definitions ofzones)
a) Bath tub b) Bath tub, wiih permanent fixed partition

c) Shower basin d) Shower basin with permanent fixed partit on

: .- ::.

s = thickness of partition

e) Shower, wlthout bas n 0 Shower, without basin, but with

permanenifixed partition

s = thickness of parttion
y = radial distance from ihe
fixed water outlet to the
nner corner of the paalition
 Fi9701.2- Examples of zone dimensions (elevation)
NOT TO SCALE (See Regulation 701.32 for deflnitions ofzones)

a) Bath tub

c)Shower basin

f) Shower without basin, but with permanent

fixed partition
Section x-x, see Fig 701.1f)
Ceiling
Ouls de zones

Outside zones

zare 2

2.25 m

zone 0 0

Permanent partition

* Zone 1 if the space is accessible without the use ofa tool.

Spaces under the bath accessible only with the use ofa tool are outside the zones.

244
 SECTION 702
SWIMMING POOLS AND OTHER BASINS
702.1 Scope, object and fundamental principles
702.11 Scope
The particular requirements of this section apply to the basins
ol swimming pools, the basins of fountai[s and the
basins ofpaddling pools. The paticular requirements also
apply to the surounding zoncs of these basins.
ln tllese areas, in nomal use, the risk ofelectric shock is increased
by a reduction in body resistance ard contacl ol
fie body with Earth potential. Swimming pools within the scope of an equipment
standaid are outside the scope of
these regulations.

E\cept for areas especially designed as swimming pools, the requirernents

of this section do not apply to naturai
saters, lakes in gravel pits, coastal areas and the like.

702.3 Assessment of general characteristics

702.32 Classification of external influences
These requirements are based on the dimensions ofthree zones (exampres
are given in Figures 702.1 to 4).
Zones I and 2 may be lin.rited by fixed partitions having a minirrum
height of 2.5 m.
(i) Zone 0

This zone is the interior ofthe basin ofthe switrming pool or fountain
including any recesses in its walls or
floors. basins for foot cleanirrg 6nd waterjets or waterfalls and the
space belorv them.
( ii) Zone I
This zone is limited by:
- zone 0
- a verlical plane 2 m from the rim of the basin
- the floor or surface expected to be occupied by persons
- the horizontal plate 2.5 n above the floor or the surface expected to be occupied by persons.
:re the swimming poor or fountain contains diving boards, springboards,
starting blocks, chutes or otrrer
-::ronentsexpectedtobeoccupiedbypersols,zonelcomprisesthezonelimitedby:
- a veftical plane situated 1.5 m rrom the periphery ofthe cliving
boards, sp ngboards, sradng blocks.
chutes and other colllponents such as accessibre icurptures, viewing
bays anJ decorative baJns
- the horizontal plane 2.5 tn above the highest surface expected
to be occupied by pe$o[s.
iiit Zone 2

This zone is linrited by:

- the vetical plane extenlal to zone I and a parallel plane 1.5 m f-rotn the fonaer
- the floor or sudhce expected to be occupied by persons
- the horizontal plane 2.5 m above the floor or suttace expected
to be occLrpied by persons.
There is no zone 2 for fountains.

Protection for safety

0.3 Generalrequirements
0.3.4 Application of protective measures against electric shock

.4.1 Zones 0 and 1

: rbuntains as stated in Reguration 702.1r0.3.r.2. in zonc 0 only prorecrior

br SELV lr r norninrl vortalre
'.;rng l2 v AC rns or 30 V ripplc-t'r'ee DC is pernittcd. the souice for SELv teing i,rr,"iiJ;.;;rl;;;;;:,
 Except for fountains as stated in Regulation 702.410.3.4.2, in zone 1 only protection by SELV at a nominal voltage
not exceeding 25 V AC mrs or 60 V ripple-free DC is permitted, the source for SELV being installed outside zones
0, I and 2.

Equipment loruse in the inte or ofbasins which is only intended to be in operation when people are not inside zone
0 shall be supplied by a circuit protected by:
(i) SELV (Section 414), the source for SELV being installed outside zones 0, 1and2. However, it is permitted
to install the source for SELV in zone 2 ifits supply circuit is protected by an RCD having the characteristics
specified in Regulation 415.1.1, or
(ii) Automatic discoruectior of supply (Section 4ll), using an RCD having the chamcteristics specified in
Regulation 41 5. 1 .1, or
(iii) Electrical separation (Section 413), the source for electrical separation supplying only one item ofcurrent-
using equipment and being installed outside zoues 0, 1 and 2. However, it is pemitted to install the source in
zone 2 if its supply circuit is protected by an RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1.

Thc sockeloutlet ofa circuit supplying such equipment and the control device of such equipment shall have a notice
in order to wam the user that this equipment shall be used only when the swimming pool is not occupied by persons.

702.410.3.4.2 Zones 0 and 1 of fountains

In zones 0 and 1, one or more ofthe following protective measures shall be employed:
(i) SELV (Section 414), the source for SELV being installed outside zones 0 and I
(ii) Automatic disconnection of supply (Section 411), using an RCD having the charactedstics specified in
Regulation 415.1.1
(iii) Electlical separation (Section 413), the source for electrical separation supplying only one item ofcurent-
using equipmcnt and being installed outside zones 0 and 1.

702.410.3.4.3 Zone 2
One or more ofthe tbllowing protective measures shall be employed:
(i) SELV (Section 414), the source for SELV being installed outside zones 0, 1 and 2. However, it is permitted
to install the source for SELV in zone 2 ifits supply circuit is protected by an RCD having the characteristics
specified in Regulation 415.1.1
(ii) Automatic disconnection of supply (Section 411), using an RCD having the characteristics specified in
Regulation 415.l.l
NOTE: Where a PME earlhing facility is used as the means ofearthing for the electrical installation of a swimming
pool ot other basiL it is recommended that an earth mat or earth electrode of suitably low resistance.
e.g. 20 ohms or less, be installed and connected to the supplementary protective equipolential bonding.
(iii) Electrical sepamtion (Section 413), the source for electrical separation supplying only one item of current-
using equipment and being installed outside zones 0, I and 2. Howeveq it is permitted to install the source in
zone 2 ifits supply circuit is protected by an RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1.

There is no zone 2 for fountains.

702-410.3.5 The protectivc measures of obstacles and placing out ofreach (Section 417) shall not be used.

702.410.3.6 The protective measures of ron-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and earth-free local
equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

702.4'14 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

702,414.4 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits

702,4'14,4,5 Where SELV is used, whatever the nominal voltage, basic protection shall be provided by:
(i) basic insulation cornplying with Regulation 416.1, or
( ii) bariers or enclosures complying with Regulation 416.2.

702.415 Additionalprotection

702,415.2 Additional protection: Supplementary protective equipotential bonding

All extraneous-conductive-parts in zones 0, I and 2 shall be connected by supplementary protective bondins
conductors to the protective conducton of exposed-conductive-parts of equipment situated in these zones. rr
accordance with Regulation 4l 5.2.

246
 NOTE: Theconnectionwilhlheprotectiveconductormaybeprolidedinrhcprorimii.,oflhclocarion,e.g.inanaccessorlor
in a local distribution board.

702.5 Selection and erection of equipment

702.51 Common rules
702.512 Operational conditions and external influences

702.512.2 External influences

Electrical equipment shall have at least the following degree ofprotection accordiDg to BS EN 60529:
(i) zone 0: lPX8
(ii) zonel:IPX4. IPX5 where waterjets are likely to occur for cleaning purposes
(iii) zone2: IPX2 for indoor locations, IPX4 for outdoor locations, IPX5 where water iets are likelyto occur for
cleaning putposes.

702.52 Wiring systems

702.520 General

The lollowing regulations apply to sudace wiring systems ard to wiring systems ernbedded i[ the walls, ceilings or
ilools at a depth not exceeding 50 mm.

702.522 Selection and erection in relation to external influences

702.522.21 Erection according to the zones

In zones 0, I and 2, any metallic sheath or metallic covering ofa wir ing system shall be connected to the supplementary
rrotective equipotential bonding.
NOTE: Cables should preferably be iDstalled in conduits made of iDsulating .laterial.

702.522.22 Limitation of wiring systems according to the zones

-: zones 0 and l, a wiring system shall be limited to that necessary to srLpply cquipment situated in these zones.

702.522.23 Additional requirements for the wiring of fountains

aor a fountain, the following additioflal requirenents shall be met:
ti) A cable for electrical equipment in zone 0 shall be installed as far outside the basin m as is reasonably
practicable and run to the electrical equipment inside zone 0 by the shoftest pmcticable route
, ii) In zone 1, a cable shall be selected, installed and provided with mechanical protection to medium severiry
(AG2) and the relevant submersion in water depth (AD8). The cabte type H07RN8-F (BS EN 50525-2-21)
is suitable up to a depth of 10 m ofwater. For depths olwater greater than 10 m the cable lranufacturer shall
be consulted.

- 02.522.24 Junction boxes

- --Lnctior box shall not be installed in zones 0 or l, except that fol SELV circuits it is pemritted to install j unction
-: ,-:s in zone 1.

Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

-,res 0 or I, switchgear or controlgear sirall not be installed.
res 0 or l, a socket-outlet shall not be installed.
' ri l. a socket-outlet or a switch is permitted only where tlre sLrpply circuit is protected by one ofthe lollowing
-- :.'tir'e lreasures:
SELV (Section 414), the source ofSELV being installed outside zones 0. L and 2. However, it is pemitted
10 install tl]e soutce ofSELV ir zone 2 ifits supply circuit is plotected by an RCD haviug the chalacreristics
specified in Regulation 415.1.1
\utomatic disconnection of supplv (Section 411). usi[g an RCD hurinc rhc- char:acteristics specified in
Resulation 415.1 .l

-.-,t--
 (iii) Electrical separation (Section 413), the source for eleclrical separatior supplying only one item ofcurent-
using equipment, or one socket-outlet. and being installed outside zones 0, 1 and 2. However, it is permitted
to install the source in zonc 2 if its supply circuit is plotected by an RCD having the characteristics specified
in Regulation 415.1.1.

For a swimming pool where it is not possible to locate a socket-outlet or switch outside zone l, a socket-outlet
or switch, preferably having a non-conductjve cover or coverplate, is pemritted in zone t if it is installed at least
1.25 m horizontally from the border ofzone 0. is placed at least 0.3 m above the floor, and is protected by:
(iv) SELV (Section 41.1), at a nominal voltage not exceeding 25 V AC rms or 60 V dpple-free DC. the source for
SELV being installed outside zones 0 and i . or
(v) Automatic disconnection of supply (Section 411). using an RCD having the characteristics specified in
Regulation 415.l. t, or
(vi) Electrical separatjon (Section 413) fbr a suppty to only one item ofcurrent-using equipment, the source for
electrical separation being installed outside zones 0 and l.

702.55 Other equipment

702.s5.1 Current-using equipment of swimming pools

In zones 0 and 1, it is only pennitted to instail fixed cunent-using equipment specifically designed lor use in a
swimming pool, in accordance with the lequircments of Regulatiols 702.55.2 and702.55.4.

Equipment which is intended to be in operation only when people are outside zone 0 may be used in all zones
provided that it is supplied by a circuit protected according to Regirlation 702.410.3.4.

It is permitted to install an electric heating unit embedded in the floor, provided that it:
(i) is protected by SELV (Section 414), the source of SELV being installed outside zones 0, 1 and 2. However,
it is pemitted to install the source of SELV io zone 2 if its supply circuit is protected by an RCD having the
characteristics specified in Regulation z[ 15.1.1. or
(ii) incorporates an earthed metallic sheath collnected to the supplementary protectiye equipotential bonding
specifled in Regulation 702.415.2 and its supply circuit is additionally protected by an RCD having the
characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1, or
(iii) is covered by an embeddcd caflhcd mctallic grid connected to the supplemenlary protective equipotential
bonding specified in Regulatior 702.415.2 and its supply cilcuit is additionally protected by an RCD having
the chamcledstics specified in Regulation 415.1.1.

702.55.2 Underwater luminaires for swimming pools

A luminaire for use in the water or in contact with the u,ater shall be fixed aud shall comply with BS EN 60598-2-t 8.

Undelwater lighting locatedbehind watertight poftholes, and sewiced from behind, shall comply with the appropriate
palt of BS EN 60598 and be installed in such a way that no intentional or unintentional conductive connection
between any exposed-conductive-par1 of the underwater luminaires ald any conductive parts of the poftholes can
occut

702.55.3 Electrical equipment of fountains

Electrical equipment in zones 0 or I shall be provided with rnechanical protection to mcdium seve ty (AG2),
e.g. by use of mesh glass or by grids which can only bc removed by the use ofa tool.

A luminaire installed in zones 0 or 1 shall be lixed and shall comply with BS EN 60598-2-18.

An electric pump shall comply with the requircnents of BS EN 60335-2-41 .

702.55.4 Special requirements for the installation of electrical equipment in zone 1 of

swimming pools and other basins

Fixed equipment designed for use in suilrrning pools and other basins (e.g. filtlation systems, jet stream pumps) and
supplied at low yoltage is pemitted in zone l, subject to all the following requirements being met:
(i) The equipment shall be located inside an insuJating enclosure providing at least Class II or equivalent
insulation and providing protection agajnst mechanical impact of medium severity (AG2)

248
tent- This regulation applies irespective olthe classification olthe equipmeni.
ined (ii) The equipment shall only be accessible via a hatch (or a door) b\ means ofa key or a tool. The opening ol
ified the hatch (or door) shall disconnect all live conductors. The suppll cable and the main disconnecting means
sha11 be installed in a way which provides protection ofClass II or equir alent insulation

'ut1et
(iii) The supply circuit ofthe equipment shall be protected by:
least SELV at a nominal voltage not exceeding 25 V AC ms or 60 \- ripple-free DC, the sour.ce of SELV
being installed outside zones 0, I and 2, or
re ibr I
an RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415. i.1. or

rd in - electrical separation (Section 413), the source for electrical separation supplying a single fixed item of
curent-using equipment and being installed outside zones 0, I and 2.

:e for Fot'swimming pools where there is no zone 2, lighting equipment supplied by othel than a SELV source at 12 V
AC rms or 30 V pple-ftee DC may be installed in zone I on a wall or on a ceiling. provided that the following
requirements are fulfi lled:
- The circuit is protected by automatic disconnection ofthe supply and additional protection is provided by
an RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 4l 5. I .1
- The height from the floor is at least 2 m above the lower limit of zone l.
rina
In addition, every luminaire shall have an enclosure providing Class Il or equivalert insulation and providing
protection against mechanical impact of mediuln severity.
zones

i a\'el'.
:j the

,:'.ling
:S the

::nlial
:-,r ing

f -l- 18.

i:r'int"-
". i,'ti1.)ll
:. C irtl

Gl ).
 I
l- c
I .e
I Qc{
I E' E i
o
oo
=C : o-
I >N E
o

L__ I

__Y _ o
o
I
t E
=
I
o
E f,
q o
o
N (.)
(!
o,
c
o I

6o I
N

EL
t)
l o- >N -t
!
o
f
=o
=
GI i! oo
>N
o
q)
E
Io
E
G
o
t; c
,q
l_i_ _ _ _
I

o L
o o
o" E
E
g)
'=
le o
.c,
F
'= l'-,|i- ilF
o - o
z
o
o IE
lu)
.9
o Ir-
.E
o)
L+-
tr
o
N
I

ot I
o
F-
.9 I
l!
I

E
q
N
I
I

i
r
I
I

E
;
I

l
I

T-
250
 t___
I
l- I

lc
lo
'I oN
' Eor
:Jc Lok
I ;*
;o
IE
lo)
Yc
,lL-
t:
----+

l(E
-c
l=
,/l It
,/l I

.C
qe
NQ
r(g
lo,
l.s
l(E
Yo
!- o.)
l
a
(E
0)
E
I
E
(E

c
,tr I .o
l<__; E
o
cli
I E
E
0)
-c
I
F
ilF
or
I
o
z
Eo:
:JC I

9R
'-r
I

E
IN

)--- E
R
v
I

-l-
I
ON E
E o-r

;o :
;N
I

__1 _

_._6fu*-
 o
o

'iLA + ++
E.
o u) au)
P ,.o, ,
o N ':c) ':' 'j'
.! rr rr rr rrrr

O 'rSf -+f

E
q
N
tl
(!
g
(E

.9
o
o
o
o
=
(!

o
x

=;
g
CL
c
o o
.9 =
I(!
o-
tr !
o o
.E .x
LL
o
o
N
o
o

(\,
x
lJl
I
a?
N
o
F-

lJ-
 '6
c
o
G
o
o
o
N
q,

o
.9
G 99
'E
o 6Q
o
o F6
-9
E E Ei5
x
uJ

$
I
,SE E36
N a- a \ i ;
o <;3 N

II
F.
'? =d
lt
n

F l--
t
 SECTION 703
ROOMS AND GABINS CONTAINING SAUNA HEATERS
703.1 Scope
The particular requirements ofthis section apply to:
(i) sauna cabins erected on site, e.g. in a location or in a room
(ii) the roorr where the sauna heater is, orthe sauna heating appliances are installed. In this case thewhole room
is considered as the sauna.

The requirements of this section do not apply to prefabdcated sauna cabins complying with a relevant equipment
standard.

Where lacilities such as showers etc. are installed, the requirements of Section 701 also apply.

703.3 Assessment of general characteristics

703.32 Classification of external influences
When applying these regulations, the zones specified in Regulations 103.32.1 to 3 shall be taken into account
(see also Figure 703).

703.32.'l Description of zone 1

Zone I is the volume containing the sauna heater, limited by the floo1 the cold side ofthe thermal insulation ofthe
ceiling and a vertical snrface circumscribing the sauna heater at a distance 0.5 m fiom the surface ofthe heater lfthe
sauna heater is located closer than 0.5 m to a wall, then zone I is limited by the cold side ofthe thermal insulation
ofthat wall.

703.32.2 Description of zone 2

Zone 2 is the volume outside zone l, limited by the floor, the cold side ofthe themal insulation ofthe walls and a
horizontal suface located 1.0 m above the floor.

703.32.3 Description of zone 3

Zone 3 is the volume outside zone 1, limited by the cold side ofthe thermal insulation ofthe ceiling and walls and
a horizontal surface located 1.0 m above the floor

703.41 Protection against electric shock

703.410.3 General requirements
703.410.3.5 The protective measures ofobstacles and placing out ofreach (Section 417) shall not be used.

703.410.3.6 The protecti!,e measures of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and earth-free local
equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

703.411.3.3 Additional protection by RCDS

Additional protection shall be provided for all circuits of the sauna, by the use of one or more RCDs having the
characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1. RCD protection need not be provided for the sauna heater unless
such protcction is recomrnended by the manufacturer.

703.4'14 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

703.414.4.5 Whcre SELV or PELV is used, whatever the nominal voltage, basic protection shall be provided by:
(i) basic insulation complying with Regulation 416.1, or
(ii) barriers or enclosures complying with Regulation 416.2.

703.51 Selection and erection of equipment: Common rules

703,512,2 External influences
The equipment shall hare a degree ofprotection ofat least IPX4.
 Where cleaning by use of water jets rnay be reasonably expected. electrical equipment shall have a degree of
protection ofat least lPX5.

Tlu-ee zones are defined as shown in Figure 703:

(i) In zone l: only the sauna heater and equipment belonging to the sauna heater shall be installed
(ii) In zone 2: there is no special requirement conceming lteat-resistance of equipment
(iii) tn zone 3: the equipment shall withstand a nrinimum tempelature of 125 "C and the irsulation and sheaths
of cables shall withstand a minimum temperature of 170 oC (see also Regulation 703.52 for wiring).

703,52 Selection and erection of equipment: Wiring systems

The wiring system should be preferably ilstalled outside the zones, i.e. on the cold side of the thermal insulation.
Where the wiring system is installed on the warm side of the thennal insulation in zones 1 or 3, it shall be heat-
resisting. Metallic sheaths and metallic conduits shall not be accessible in normal use.

703.53 Selection and erection of equipment: lsolation, switching, control and accessories
703.537,5 Switchgear and controlgear which forms palt of the sauna heater equipment or of other fixed
equipment installed in zone 2, may be installed within the sauna roour or cabin in accordance with the [ranufacturer's
instructions. Other switchgear and contolgear, e.g. for lighting, shall be placed outside the sauna room or cabin.
Socket-outlets shall not be installed within the location containing the sauna heater.

703.55 Other equipment

Sauna heating appliances shall con.rply withBS EN 60335-2-53 and be installed in accordance with the manufactwer's
::re i[structions.
:1ie
:Lr11
Fig 703 - zone dimensions for a sauna
ELEVATION

I
I
I Thermal
nda I
I
zone 3 zone insulation
I
I
I
I
I

i ald I
I
- 0.5 m
I 1
I zone 2 E ectrical
I
I
1m connect on
I
enc osure
I
I
I
I
local
PLAN

I
I
I
ing the I
I
unless I
I
I

iI zone 2 and
zone 3
I
..d bY: I
I
I
I
I
I

ll

I
I
 SECTION 704

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION SITE INSTALLATIONS

NOTE: Ifthe PME earthing facility is considered lor use. scc also BS 7375.

704.1 Scope
704,'1.1 The particular requirements of this section apply to tempoBry installations for construction and
demolition sites durirg the period of the construction or demoiition work, including. for example, the following:
(i) construction work ofnew buildings
(ii) repair, alteration, extension or demolition of existing buildings or pans of existing buildings
(iii) engineeringworks
(iv) earthworks
(v) work of similar nature.

The requirements apply to fixed and movabie instailatiotrs.

This section does not apply to installations in administrative locations ofconstruction sites (e.g. olflces, cloakrooms,
meeting rooms, canteens, restaruants. dormitories, toilets), where the general requirements of Pafis I to 6 apply.

704.'l .2 For special situations, further pafiicular requiremcnts apply, e.g. Section 706 for conducting locations
with resbicted movement.

704.31 Purposes, supplies and structure

704.313 Supplies
704.313.3 Equipment shall be identified with and be compatible with the particular supply liom which it is
energized and shall contain only conrponcnts connected to one and the same installation, except for control or
signalling circuits and inputs from standby supplies.
NOTE: A single comh'Llction sitc may be served by several sources ofsupply, e.g ptlblic supply and gencmting set.

704.4 Protection for safety

704-41 Protection against electric shock
704.410 lntroduction
704.410.3 General requirements
704.410.3.5 The protective measures ofobstacles and placing out ofreach (Section4l7) shall notbeused.

704.410.3.6 The protective measures of:

- non-conductinglocation,
- earth-ftee equipotentiai bonding, and
- electrical separation for the supply of more than one curent-using equipment as specified in
Regulation 418.3

shall not be used.

704.410.3.10 A circuit supplying a socket-outlet with a mted cuffent up to and including 32 A and any other circuit
supplying hand-held electrical equipment with r-ated current up to and including 32-A shall be protected by:
(i) Reduced low voltage (Regulatiorr ,11 L 8), or
(ii) automatic disconnection ofsupply (Section 411) with additional protection providedby an RCD having the
charactedstics specified in Regulation 415.1.1, or
(iii) electrical separation ofcircuits (Section4l3). each socket-outlet and item ofhand-held electriqal equipment
being supplied by an individual tralsfonrct ot by a separate winding ofa transformer, or
(iv) SELV or PELV (Section 414).

Where electrical separation is used, specjal attertion should be paid to the requirements of Regulation 413.3.4.
NOTE 1: The reduced low voltage system is stlongl.v prefcred for thc supply to porable handlamps fol-gercl al use and portable
hand tools and local lighting up to 2 kW.

NOTE 2: The SELV system is strongl! plefened for poltable handlan:rps in corfined ot damp locations.

_ 256
 704.4'11 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

704.411.3 Requirements for fault protection

704.4'11.3.'l A PME earthing facility shall not be used for the means ofeafihing for an installation falling within
thc scope ofthis section unless all extraneous-conductive-par1s are reliably connected to the main eafihing terminal
in accordance with Regulation 411.3.1 .2.
NOTEI llthe PME earthing facility is considered for use. see also BS 7375.

704.411.3.2 Automatic disconnection in case of a fault

I 704,4'l'1.3.2,1 For any circuit supplying one or firore socket-outlets with a rated current exceeding
32 A. Regulation 411.3.2.5 is not applicable. For any circuit supplying one or more socket-outlets with a rated
I
current exceeding 32 A. an RCD having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 500 mA shall be provided
I
to automaticall), intempt the supply to the line conductors of a circuit or equipment in the event of a fault of
I ncgligible impedance between a line conductor and an exposed-conductive-pafi or a protective conductol' in the
circuit or equipment within the disconnection tirne required i[ Regulation 4l I .3.2.3 or 4l L3.2.4 as appropriate.
704.414 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

704.414.4 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits

rrns
704.414.4.5 Inespective ofthe rominalvoltage, inAC and DC circuits, the requirement for basic protection shall
be provided by the foilowing:
(i) basic insulation complyirg with Regulation 4[6.1. or
(ii) barriers or enclosures complying with Regulation 416.2.

II IS
704.5 Selection and erection of equipment
,1 or 704.51 Common rules
704.511 Compliance with standards

704.511.1 All assemblies on constuuction and demolition sites for the distribution of electricity shall be in
conpliance r,ith the requirements oIBS EN 61439-4.

A piug or socket-outlet with a rated current equal to or greater than 16 A shall comply with the requirements of
BS EN 60309-2.

704.512 Operational conditions and external influences I

704.5'12.2 External influences I

Consideration shall be given to the risk of damage to electrical equipment by colTosive substances, movement of
structLres and vehicles. wear and tear, tension, flexing, impact. abrasion, severing and ingress of Iiquids or solids.

:d in 704.52 Wiring systems

704.522.8 Other mechanical stresses (AJ)
704.522.8.'10 Cable shall not be installed across a site road or a walkway unless adequate protection of the cable
against n'rechanical damage is provided.

704.5?2.8.'l'l For reduced low voltage systems, low temperature 3 182/3/4/54 thermoplastic cable (BS 6004) or
equivalent flexible cable shall be used. For applications exceeding reduced low voltage, llexible cable shall be
he the
I- H07RN-F (BS EN 50525-2-21) type or equivalent heavy duty flexible cable.

[o*.n, 704.522.8.101 Surface-run and ovelhead cables shall be protected against mechanical damage, takirg into
accoullt the environment and activitics ofa constructiol site.

704.53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

t.-1. 704.537 .2 Devices for isolation
poltable
Each Assembly tbr Construction Sites (ACS) shall incorporate suitable de\ ices tbr the su itching and isolation of
the incoming supply.

k
t
-.-
 fol securing in the offposition (see Regulali.ot 53T '2 4)'
A ilevjce for isolaring rhe ir]coming supply shalt be suitable
or by loiating the device inside a lockable enclosure
for example, by p'ovidirg a padlo.r.i,ig iufity o" tl.,e device
each ACS comprising:
Cu:rent-using equiprnert sllall be supplied by ACSs,
(i) overcurelt pl'otective devices, and
(ii) dcvices atfolrling fault protection, and
(iii) socket-outlets, ifrequiled
of the
means of devices aranged to prevent interconnectron
Safety anrl staldby supplies shall be connected by
difl'erent suPPlies

SECTION 705

AGRICULTU RAL AND HORTICU LTURAL PREMISES

705.1 Scope
to fixed electrical jnstallations]*:T:1*::t*:t:.tl
The pafiicular requircments of this sectiol applv lf::*H:l
ffifl:I1:l,1ii.,iiffiiil:il;;*';;;;ii';';.' p':-i:::yl::".jl1.lii"'::[T:T::':,,1]:,""#'''
lli,ffi:Tiffi'f i::il ;,,",n";;; ",ir,"''i,-.,r",*r
are arso applicable
":1T11":::'.".:1111:'"11:::':Ti:
:J,"i.H:,ffi',:il:: l;;,;",?;;;;.-", r*1a-g, ,r-,i. is stated in the
text of the relevant regulations
'
and silnilar are not covercd by this section
Rooms. locatiorN and areas for household applications
BS EN 60335-2-76'
NOTE: Sectior 705 cloes not cover electlic fence installations Referto
705.4'l Protection against electric shock

705.410.3 Generalrequirements
measures ofobstacles and placing out ofreach
(Section417) shallnotbeused'
705.410.3.5 The protective
705'4l0.3.6Theprotectlvenreasuresofnon-conductinglocation(Regulation4l8.l)andeafth-flgqlocal
equipotential bording (Regulation 4I8'2) shall notbe
used'

705.411 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

705.411.'l General

Incircuits"whatevelthetypeofealthingsystem,thefollowingdisconnectiondevicesshallbeprovided:
with l.ated curent not exceeding 32 A' an RCD having
the
(i) ln final circuits supplying socket-outlets
characteristics specified in Regulation 415 1 1
(ii)Infinalcil.cuitssupplyingsockeGoutletswithratedcurrentlnorethan32A.anRCDwitharatedresidual
opemting cunent flot exceeding 100 mA
cunent not exceedilg 300 mA'
(iii) In all othel circuits, RCDS with a rated residual opemting

705.411.4 TN system

ATN'CsystemshallDotbeused'Thislequilementappliesalsotoresidencesandotherlocationsbelongingto
of"Residences and other" premises" (see Part 2)'
agricultural or horti.rlturul pr"n,i.", u."oJing to tt," o.nrition

To5.4l4Protectivemeasure:Extra.lowvoltageprovidedbySELVorPELV
705.4'14.4 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits

705.414.4'SWhereSELVolPHLVisused'whateverthenominalvoltage'basicprotectiolshallbeprovidedby:
(i) 416' l' or
basic irsulation complying with Regulation
4t 6 2
(ii ) baniers or enclosures corr.tplying with Regulation
705.415.2.1 Additlonal proiection: Supplementary equipotential bonding
In locations intended lbr livestock, supplementary bonding shall connect all exposed-conductive-parls ald
extraneous-co[ductive-pafis that can be touched by livestock. Where a metal grid is laid in the floor, it shall be
included within the supplementary bonding of the Iocation (Figure 705 shows an example of this, other suitable
arrangements of a metal grid are not precluded).

Extaneous-conductive-parts in, or on, the flooq e.g. concrete reinforcement in general or reinforcement of cellars
for liquid manure. shall be connected to the supplementary equipotential bonding.

It is recomnrended that spaced floors made of prefabricated concrete elements be pafi of the supplementary
equipotential bonding. The supplementary equipotential bonding and the metal gdd, if any, shall be erected so that
it is dulably plotected against mechanical stresses and comosion.
NOTE: Unless a nretal grid is laid in the floor, the use of a PME earthing lacility as the means of earthing for the electrical
installation is not recomrnended.

705.42 Protection against thermal effects

705.422 Measures for protection against fire
705.422.6 Electrical heating appliances used for the breeding and rearing of livestock shall comply with
BS EN 60335-2 7l and shall be fixed so as to maintain an approp ate distance from livestock and combustible
material, to mininize any risks of bums to livestock and of fire. For radiant heaters the clearance shall be not less
than 0.5 rn or such other clearance as recommended by the manufacturer

705.422.7 For additional fire protection purposes in some circumstances, RCDs shall be installed with a rated
residual operaling cunent not exceeding 300 mA. RCDs shall disconnect all live conductors. Where improved
continuity ofservice is required, RCDs not protecting socket-outlets shall be olthe type S or have a time delay.

705.422.8 [n locations where a fire isk exists conductors of circuits supplied at extra-low voltage shall be
protected either by baffiers or enclosures affording a degree ofprotection ofIPXXD orIP4X or, in addition to their
basic insulation, by an enclosure ofinsulating material.
NOTE: For example. cables olthe lype H07RN-F (BS EN 50525-2-21) for outdoor use are in compliance with this requirement.

705.51 Selection and erection of equipment: Common rules

705.512 Operational conditions and external influences
705.512.2 External influences

In agdcultural or l'rorticultural premises, electrical equipment shall have a minimum degree olprotection of 1P44.
uhen used under normal conditions. Where equipment of IP44 rating is not available, it shall be placed in an
enclosure complying with IP44.

Socket-outlets shall be installed in a position where they are unlikely to come into contactwith combustible material.

Where therc are conditiors ofextemal influences >AD4, >AE3 and/or >AGl, socket-outlets shall be provided with
the appropriate p1 otection.

Protection may also be provided by the use ofadditional enclosures or by installation in building recesses.

These requircments do not apply to residential locations, o{frces, shops and locations with similar extemal influences
belonging to agricultutal and horticultural premises where, for socket-outlets, BS 1363-2 or BS 546 applies.

\\'here coffosive substances are present. e.g. in dairies or cattle sheds, the electrical equipment shall be adequately
protected.

705.513 Accessibility
705.513.2 Accessibilitybylivestock

:lectrical equipmeut generally shall be inaccessible to livestock. Equipment that is unavoidably accessible to
-ir estock such as equipment for feeding and basins for watering, shall be adequately constructed and installed to
:.roid darragc by. and to minimize the sk ofinjury to, liyestock.
 705.514 ldentification
705.514,9 Diagramsanddocumentation

705.514.9,3 The follo.*ing docurrentation shall be provided to the user ofthe installation:

(i) A plan irldicating the location of all electical equipment

(ii) The routing ofall concealed cables
(iii) A silgle-1ine distribution diagram
(iv) An equipotential bonding diaglam indicating locations ofbonding connections'

705.52 Selection and erection of equipment: Wiring systems

705's22Selectionanderectionofwiringsystemsinrelationtoexternalinfluences
that they ue inaccessible to
h locations accessible to, and enclosing, livestock, wiring systens shall be erected so
livestock or suitably protected against mechanical darlage

Overhead lines shall be insulated.

Inareas of agricultural premises where vehicles and mobile agricultural machines

are operated, the following
methods of installation shall be applied:
(i) Cables shall be buried in the ground at a depth of at least 0.6 m with added mechanical ptotection
(ii) Cables in arable or cultivaterl ground shall be buried at a depth ofat least 1 m
(iii) Sclf-supporling suspcnsion cables shall be installed at a height ofat least 6 m
rodents.
705.522.10 Special attention shall be given to the presence ofclifferent kinds offauna, e.g.
705.522.16 Conduit systems, cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems
shall have plotection
For locations wl]erc livestock is kept, extemal influences shall be classified AF4, and conduits
4 (high protection) outdools according to
against corosion of at least Class 2 (mediurri) fot indoor use and Class
BS EN 61386-21.
due to vehicles and mobile
For locations where the wirilg system n1ay be exposed to i[rpact and mechanical shock
agricultural machines, ctc. the external influences shall be classifled AG3 and:

(i)conduitsshallpr.ovideadegreeolplotectionagainstimpactof5JaccordingtoBSEN6l386-21
(ii) cable tmnking and ducting systems shall provide a degree ofprotectior against impact of5 J according to
BS EN 50085-2- 1.

705.53 Selection and erection of equipment: lsolation, switching and control

used'
Only electrical heating appliances with visual irdication ofthe operating position shall be

705,537 lsolation and switching

705.537 .2 lsolation
a single isolation device according
The electlical installation ofeach building or part ofa buildil]g shall be isolated by
to Chapter 46.
provided fbr circuits used
Means of isolation of all live conductors, including the neutml conductof, shall be
occasionally, e.g. during haryest time
to which they belong'
The isolatiol devices shall be clearly marked according to the parl ofthe installation

Devices for isolation and switching and devices for en.rergency stopping or emergency
switching shall not be erected
where they are accessible to livestock or in any position whete access may be impeded by livestock

705.54 Selection and erection of equipment: Earthing arrangements and protective

conduGtors

705,544 Protectivebondingconductors
705.544.2 Supplementary bonding conductors
protective bonding conductors shal1 be protected against mechanical damage and corosion, and shall be selected
to avoid electrolvtic eflects.

!+-
 For exarnple, the lbllorving may be used:
(i) Hot-dip galvanized steel strip rvith dimensions ofat least 30 mm x 3 mm
1ii) Hot-dip galvanized round steel ofat least 8 mm diameter
(iii) Coppel conductor having a minimuln cross-sectional area of4 mm:

Otber suitable rnaterials may be used.

705.55 Selection and erection of equipment: Other equipment

705.553.1 Socket-outlets
Socket-outlets of agricultural and horticultural premises shall comply with:
(i) BS EN 60309-1, or
(ii) BS EN 60309-2 where interchangeability is required, ot'
eIo (iii) BS 1363 or BS 546 provided the rated current does not exceed 20 A'

705.56 Safety services

, :.: 705.560.6 Automatic life support for high density livestock rearing
For high density Iivestock rearing, systems opemting for the life support oflivestock shall be taken into account as
iollorvs:
(i) Where the supply of food, water, air and/or lighting to livestock is not provided in the event of power
supply failuri, a secure source of supply shall be provided, such as an altemative or back-up supply
final circuits shall be
lsee also Section 551). For the supply of ventilation and lighting units separate
provided. Such circuits shall only supply electrical equipment necessary for the operation ofthe ventilation
and lighting
( ii) Selectivity ofthe main circuits supplying the ventilation shall be provided in case ofany overcurrent and/ot'
shorl-circuit to Earth
I Where electrically powered venlilation is necessary in an instaltation one ofthe following shall be provided:
a) A standby electrical source ensuring suflicient supply for ventilation equipment, or
NOTE: A notice should be placed adjacent to the staodby electrical source, iidicating that it should be tested
pcliodically accotding to the manufacturcl's instructiotrs:

b) temperature and supply voltage monitoring. This can be achieved by one or more monitoring devices
The device(s) shall provide a visual or audible signal that can be readily observed by the user and shall
opemte irdependently fi-om the nomlal supply.

ffiRrc'\
";
[**"
 Fig 705 - Example of supplementary equipotential bonding within a cattle shed

< X i o! o: o
Hfi?6EE.E;
D=!! !, P:!
C6EETEsE
E E=€E!37
o o ErX
9o
iE
;.=
:fiEE
Es lD (,) W'il\
eB aei l',,
EE
.9.9
+3
I
i.E -E

3
!
o
l!

@,il rtl11

ll' rH

;e
frf;gE TE
EO EP
9E
6q :Eb
:ei8f ota
o3 : OE :i!fE
E6E>o E6:6
o)
c E brY E i.
tyo E iG EI
>.o!
E EeE i e
!!e E gE E
oatiEO.o
E 3 e 3 e.3 5e9E FE E O l!-

262
 SECTION 706
CONDUCTING LOCATIONS WITH RESTRICTED MOVEMENT
706.1 Scope
The particular requirements ofthis section apply to:
(i) fixed equipment in conducting locations whele novement of persons is restricted by the location, and
(ii) to supplies for rnobile equipment for use in sucir locations.

A conducting location with restricted movement is comprised mainly of metallic or other conductive sunounding
parts, within which it is likely that a person will come into contact thlough a substantial portion of the body u,ith
the metallic or other conductive surounding parts and where the possibility of intempting this contact is limited.

The particular requirements of this section do not apply to locations which allow a person freedo[r of bodily
lnovement to work, enter and leave the location without physical constraint. For installation and use ofarc welding
equipment, see IEC 60974-9.

This section does not apply to elect cal systems as deflned in BS 7909 used in structures, sets, mobile units etc as
used for public or p vate events, toruing shows, theatdcal, radio, TV or'lilm productions and similar activities of
the entefi ainment industry.

706.4'l Protection against electric shock

706.410.3.5 The protective measures ofobstacles and placing or-rt ofreach (Section 417) shall not be used.

706.410.3.10In a conducting Iocation rvith rest cted nlovement the following protective measures apply to circuits
suppl) ine thc lollern ing current-rrsi g equiptnenr:
(i) For the supply to a hand-held tool or an item oflrobile equipmert:
(a) electrical separatior (Section 413), subject to only one item ofequipment being connected to a secondary
winding ofthe tran sfonner, or
NOTE: The transformer may have trvo or more secondary windings.
(b) SELV (SectioD 414).
tii) Fol thc srrppll ro lrandlamps:
(a) SELV (Section 414). It is permissible lor the SELV circuit to supply a fluorescent lurninaile with a
built-in step-up traoslormcr with electrically separated windings.
(iii) For the supply to fixed equipment:
(a) automatic disconnection of supply (Section 4ll) with supplementary protective equipotential
bonding (Regulation 415.2). The supplemettary protectiye equipotential bonding shall connect
exposed-conductiYe-parts olflxed equipment and the conductive pa s ofthe location, or
(b) by use of Class II equipment or equipment having equivalent insulation (Section 412), provided the
supply circuits have additional protection by the use of RCDs having the chamcteristics specified in
Regulation 4l5.l .l, or
(c) electrical sepamtion (Section 413), subject to only one item ofequipment being connected to a secondary
winding of the isolating transfomer, or
(d) SELV (Section 414), or
(e) PELV (Section 414), where supplementary protective equipotential bonding is provided benr een all
exposed-conductive-paI1s, al1 extraneous-conductive-parts inside the location, and the connection ofthe
PELV system to Eafth.

F .-,, ' 2Et

t
 706.4'11 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply
706.411.1 General

70g,4'11.1.1 Only circuits and the protective neasures for supplying equipnent iltdicated in
Regulation 706.410.3. t 0 are pemitted.

706.411.1.2 Ifa functional eath is required for certain equipment, for example measuring and control equipment.
supplementary protective equipotential bonding shall be provided between all exposed-conductive-pafis
and

extraneous-conductive-parts irlside the locatiolt and the functional earth.

706.413 Protectivemeasure:Electricalseparation
706.413.,1.2 The uneafihed source shall have simple separation and shall be situated outside the conducting
provided
location witlt restricted movement. unless the source is part ofthe fixed installation within the locatiot as
by item(iii) of Regulation 706.410.3. 10.

706,414 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

706,414.3 Sources for SELV and PELV

706.414.3(ii) A source for SELV or PELV shall be situated outside the conducting location with restricted
movemelt, unless it is part of the fixed installation within the location as provided by item
(iii) of
Regulation 706.41 0.3. 10.
706.414.4 Requirements for SELV and PELV circuits

706.414.4-5 Where SELV or pELV is used, whateve[ the nominal vottage, basic protection shall be provided by:
(i) basic insulation complying with Regu)ation 416.1, or
(ii) barriels or enclosures cott'tplying with Regulation 416.2

264
 SECTION 708
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN CARAVAN / CAMPING PARKS
AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
NoTE: In order not to D x requircments ou diffcrent subjects, such as thosc lor electrical
installations ofcaravan parks with
I
those for elcctrical installations inside caravans, rel.er to:
I
Section 708- which concems electrical installations in caravan parks. camping par.ks
and sil.Iri]ar locations and
-Section 721. which conccrns cleciicalinstallations in caravans and rrotor carar.ans
I

708.1 Scope
I he particular tequiiements contaired in this section apply orrly to circuits
intended to supply leisure acconrrnodation
. ihicles. tents or residential park homes in caravan parks, camping parks and similar locations.

This sectiol1 does not apply to the intel]ral electrical installations of leisure accommodatiou
vehicles or mobile or
:rlnsportable units.
NOTE 1: For installatiolls in caravans cnd lrotor caravans which are operated
at l2 v DC. BS EN l64g-l and 2 apply.
NoTE 2: Fo. installatiols in catavans and ntotor camvans which are opemted at voltages other than
l2 v DC. section 721 applies.
NoTE 3: Thc electrical installations of lcsidcntial par-k homes are covercd by the gencml rcqlrireme1is ofBS 7671, togcther
with the r.clcvant pafticular requirements ofpart 7.

708.3 A,ssessment of general characteristics

708.3't Purposes, supplies and structure
708.312 Conductor arrangement and system earthing
708.3'12.2 Types of system earthing

708.313 Suppties
ne nominal suppll' voltage of the installation tbr the supply of leisure accommodation
vehicles shall not exceed
i-r0 V AC single-phase or 400 VAC thr.ec-phase or 4g V DC

708.4 Protection for safety

708.41 Protection against electric shock
708.410.3 Generalrequirements
708 4'10'3 5 The protective measures ofobstacles andplacirg out ofreach (Section417)
shall not be r.rsed.
708410.3.6 The protective measutes of non-conducting locatiorl (Regulation 418.1) and
eafih-fl.ee local
:;uipetential bonding (Reg'ulation 418.2) shall not be used.

708.411.4 TN system

r:' Electricity Sat'ety' Quality and Continuity Regulations (ESQCR) prohibit the
cornection of a pME earthiflg
::Jilit), to any metalwork in a leisure acconmodation vehicle (includini a caravan;.

- ris cloes not preclude the use ofa PME eafthing facility as the means ofeafthing for other purposes, such as to the
r-lallations of pe nanent buildings.
NOTE: The requir.entents ofother sections ofpaft 7 may also apply.
 708.415 Additionalprotection
708.415.1 Residual current protective devices (RCDS)

Eyery socket-outlet shall be individually protected by anRCD having a ratedresidual opemting current not exceeding
30 mA. Devices selected shall disconnect all live conductol's.

A final circuit intended for the fixed connection of a supply to a mobile home or a residential park home shall be
individually protected by an RCD having a rated residual operating curent not exceeding 30 mA accessible to the
consutler. Devices selected shall disconnect all live conductors.
NOTE: This finai circuit will be liom the coDnection/mctering point to the consuner and not the distribution circuit to the
connection/rnetering point.

708.5 Selection and erection of equipment

708.512 Operational conditions and external influences
708.512.1.1 Presence of water (AD)

EquipDrent shall be selecteil with a degree of protection of at least IPX4 ill order to protect against water splashes
(AD4).

708.512.1.2 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)

Equipmerrt shall be selected or provided with a degree of protection of at least lP4X in order to protect against the
ingress of very small obJects (AE3).

708.512.2 External influences

NOTE: Ir par* or camping park, special consideration is given to the protection ofpeople, duc to the fact that
a camvan
the human body nray be i[ contact with earth potential, to the protection of wiring due to tent pegs or ground anchors and to the
novement ofheavy or high vehicles.

708.512.2.'1.3 lmpact (AG)

Equipment installed in a campsite shall be protected against mechanical {amage (impact of high severity AG3).
Prorection ofthe equipment shall be afforded by one or more ofthe following:
- the position or locatiol] shall be selected to avoid damage by any reasonably foreseeable impact
- Iocal or gcneral mechanical protection shall be provided
- equipment shall be imtalled that complies with a minimum degree ofprotection against extemal tlechanical
iupact of IK08 (see BS EN 62262).

708.521 Types of wiring system

708.521.7 Wiring systems in caravan parks

708.521.7.1 The pr.eferred method of supply for feeding the caravan pitch or tent pitch electdcal supply equiptnenr
is by means of underground distribution circuits.

708.521.7 .2 Underground cables

An underground distribution circuit shall, unless provided with additional mechanical protection, be buried at a

sufficieut depth to avoid being da[raged, e.g. by tent pegs or ground anchors or by the movement ofvehicles.
NOTE 1: A clepth of 0.6 rn is generally corsidered as a minimum depth to f'ulfilthis requirement. Altematively, the cable oay
be installed outside the pitch or other area \\'hele tent pegs or ground anchors may be dtiven.

NOTE 2: For conduit systenN buried underglound, sec BS EN 61386-2'1.

708.52'1.7.3 Overhead cables and overhead insulated conductors

Every overhead conductor shall be insulated.

Poles and other supports for overhead wiring shall be located or protected so that they arc unlikely to be da[raged
by any loreseeable movenent ofvehicles.

Every overheatl conductor shall be at a height above ground ofnot less than 6 m in all areas subject to the movement
ofvehicles and 3.5 m in all other areas.

266
T

708.53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

708.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent

Every sochet-outlct shall be individually protected by an overcrLrent protective device, in accotdance \: ' - .
requirements olChapter 43.

A fixed connection for a supply to a mobile home or residential park home shall be individually protected b) =
overcurrent protective device, in accordance with the requirements ofChapter 43
708.537 lsolation and switching

708"537.2 lsolation
708.537 .2.1 General

708.537.2,1.1 At least one means ofisolation shall be installed in each distribution enclosure. This device shall
disconnect all live conductot's.

708.55 Other equipment

r;hes 708.55.1 Socket-outlets
708.55.1.1 Every socket-outlet or cotnector shall cithet comply with:
- BS EN 60309-2 and shall be interlocked and classified to clause 6.1.5 of BS EN 60309-1 to prevent the
.:i the socket contacts being live when accessible, ot'
- be pafi of an interlocked self-contained product complying witb BS EN 60309-4 and classified to clauses
6.l.l0l and 6.1.102 of BS EN 60309-4 to prevent the socket cortacts being live when accessible.
708.55.1.2 Caravan pitch electrical supply equipment shall be located adjacent to the pitch and not more than 20
acr that il.i from the connection facility on the Ieisure accommodation vehicle or tent when on its pitch.
d 10 the
708.55.1.3 In order to avoid any hazard due to long connection cables, no more than 4 socket-outlets shall be
!.rouped togcther in any one enclosule.

708.55.'1.4 Every caravan pitch or tent pitch shall be supplied by at least one socket-outlet'
; \Gi).
708.55.1.5 The curent rating of socket-outlets shall bc not less than l6 A.

708.55.1 .6 The lowest paft of any socket-outlet shall be placed at a height between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the
the stated maximum height
.rou1d. In special cases of extrene environmental conditions, it is pemitted to exceed
:.a 1.5 rr.,. ln such cases, special measrLres shall be taken to allow the safe insertion and withdrawal olplugs
rhanical
NOTE: Thiscanbelecessaryifthecaravanparkorcampingparkisat sk ofbeingflooded or ifeither location is used during
winter after hea\,y snow falls.

708.55.1.7 Switchgear and controlgear assemblies used in caravan/tent pitch supplies shall comply with the
::quirements ofBS EN 61439-7.

:i -:ipl-I1enl 708.553.'l Plugsandsocket-outlets

708.553.1.8 Each socket-outlet and its enclosure loming part olthe caravan pitch electdcal supply equiprnent
.:r)l comply with BS EN 60309-2 and meet the degree ol protection of at least IP44 in accordance with
ls EN 60529.
I

708.553.1.14 Socket-outlet protective conducto$ shall not be cornected to a PME earthing facility. I

cable tnal

datraged

mo\ emeni
 Fig 708 - Example of a 2-pole and protective conductor supply system between the caravan
pitch supply equipment and the caravan or motor caravan

NOTE: S.. atroR.!.r -: r -:1.5-':.(,

Site supolv

Sockeroulet

L.e Neutra (N) (e s L1) (e.s. L1) conductor(N)

.ondu.lor condrcror
1us rr1 ff qr..r1

@/ @/

Vewoltermnals View ofcont cttubes Vew.i p ns Vlew ol term na s

Blue Brown Line Line Bown Line Blue

Neulral conduclor conductor conductor Neutra
coidldor (N) {e q. L]) (e.0. L1) (N) (N) (e.! L1) (e s Ll) coiduclor (N)

/oo\
v)a)
\:.,/-/

\olf
(e)
-<E
)tl
Ht_
Connection devlce

Caravan inlet

NOTE 1: Sec Rcgulation 708.55.1.1 for interlocking requirements.

NOTE 2: Typical requilements for cable extension sets.

268
l--_---
 The ureans ofconnection between the caravan pitch socket-outlet and the leisure acconrmodation vehicle shouid r.-
an assernbly ofthe follou.ing:
- a plug corrplying with BS EN 60309-2
- a flexiblc cable type to H05RN-F or H07RN-F (BS EN 50525-2-21) or equivalent. wirh a plotecri\e
conductor and having the following characteristics:
- continuous length 25 rn (t2 m)
- for cu[ent rating l6,4. minimum cross-sectional area: 2.5 mm2. For a higher curuent rating, the cross-
sectional area must be chosen so that secure t pping ofthe overcurent protective device is achieved at
the lowest fault current calculated at the end ofthe cable extensiotr set
- conductors to be identified in accordance with Table 51
a connector courplying with BS EN 60309-2.

.L.- 269
 SECTION 709

MARINAS AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS

709.1 Scope
pleasure craft or
The parlicu)ar requirenerts of this section are applicable only to circuits intended to supply
houseboats in tnarinas and similar locations.
NOTE 1: In this section 'marina' means 'marina and sitnilar locations'
if they are supplied directly lrom the public
The particular requirements do rot apply to the supply to houseboats
network.

The particular requiremerts do not apply to the intemal electrical installatiots

ofpleasure craft oI houseboats'

NOTE 2: For elcctrical installatiolls olpleasure cmft see BS EN 60092-507'

requirements ofthese Regulations together
The electrical installations ofhouseboats shall cornply with the general
with the relevant particular requirements ofPart 7.

of these
For the renainder ol the electrical installation of n.nrinas and similar locations the general requirements
Regulatiors together with the rclevant particular requirements of Part 7 apply'

709.3 Assessment of general characteristics

709.313 Supplies
houseboats shall be
709.313.1.2 The nominal supply voltage ofthe itstallation fot the supply to pleasure craft ot
230 V AC single-phase or 400 V AC three-phase.

709.41 Protection against electric shock

709.410.3 Generalrequirements
used'
709.410.3.5 Thc protective measures ot obstacles and placing out ofreach (sectioo 417) shall not be
arrd earth-free local
709.4,t0.3.6 The protectivc rrreasures of non-conductilg location (Regulation 418.1)
equipotential bonding (Rcgulation 418.2) shall not be used'

709.411.4 TN system
the connection of a PME earthing
The Elcctricity Safcty, Quality and Continuity Regulations (ESQCR) prohibit
facility to any metalwork in a boat

This does 1.Iot preclucle the use ofa PME earlhing facility as the means ofeafihing
foI other purposes, such as to the
inslallationq oI pem ranent bttildirlgs
NOTE: The requirements ofother secfions ofPart 7 ay also apply'

709.5 Selection and erection of equipment

70g.512 Operational conditions and external influences

709.512.2 External influences
For marinas, particular attelltion is given i[ this section to the likelihood of corrosive elements. movement of
structures, mechanical damage, presence of flammable fuel and the increased risk olelectric shock due to:
(i) presence of water
(ii) r'eduction in body resistance
(iii) contact ofthc body rvith Earth potential.

709.5'12.2.1,1 Presence of water (AD)

be selected as follows' according to
ln maritas, equipment installed on or above ajetty' whad, pier or pontoon shall
the extemal influences which may be present:
1i1 Water:plashcs lAD4l: lPX4
(ii) water jets (AD5); IPX5
(iii) Water waves (AD6): IPX6
 709.512.2.1.2 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)

Equipment installed on ol abovc a jetty. rvharf, pier or pontoon shall be selected with a degree ol protection oi ar
least IP3X in order to protect against the ingress of small objects (AEZ).

709.512.2.1.3 Presence of corrosive or polluting substances (AF)

Equipment installed on or above ajetty, wharf, pier or pontoon sl'nll be suitable for use in the presence ofatmospheric
corosive or polluting substances (AF2). lfhydrocarbons are presert, AF3 is appticable.

7 09.5'12.2.'1.4 lmpact (AG)

Equipment installed on or above a jetty, wharf, pier or pontoon shall be protected against mechanical damage
(impact of r.[ediurl sevefityAG2). Protection shall be afforded by one or more oftlre following:
(i) The position or location selected to avoid being dan.raged by any reasonably foreseeable impact
(ii) The provision oflocal or general mechanical protection

::.I
(iii) Installitg equipment complying with a minimum degree ofprotection for external mechanical impact IK08
(see BS EN 62262).

709.521 Types of wiring system

709.52'1.'l Wiring systems of marinas

709.52'1.1.4 The following wiring systems are suitable for distribution circuits ofmarinas:
(i) Undcrground cables
(ii) Overhead cables or overhead insulated conductots
(iii) Cablcs with copper conductors and thennoplastic or elastomeric insulation and sheath installed within an
appropdate cable management system taking into account extemal influences such as movement, impact,
conosion and ambient temperature
(iv) Mineral-insulated cables with a PVC prolective covering
(v) Cables wittr armouring and serving of thermoplastic or elastomedc matedal
(vi) Other cables and materjals that are no less suitable than those listed above.

709.521.1.5 The following wiring systems shall not be used onol above a jetty, wharf, pier or pontoon:
(i) Cables in free air suspended from or incorporating a support wire, e.g. as installation methods Nos. 35 and
36 in Table 4A2

:ling (ii) Non-sheathed cables in cable management systems

(iii) Cables with aluminium conductors
(iv) Mineral insulated cables.
:n the
709.521.1.6 Cables shall be selected ard installed so that mechanical damage due to tidal and other movement of
floating structures is prevented.

Cable managerrent systems shall be installed to allow the drainage ofwater by drainage holes and/or installation of
the equipment on an incline.

709.521,1.7 Underground cables

Underground distribution cables shall, unless provided with additional mechanical protection, be buried at a
oent of sufEcient depth to avoid being damaged, e.g. by heavy vehicle movement.
NOTE: A depth of0.5 m is generally considered as a minimum depth to frlfil this requirement.

709.521.1.8 Overhead cables or overhead insulated conductors

All overhead conductors shall be insulated.
Poles and other suppofls for overhead wiring shall be located or protected so that they are unlikely to be damaged
by any foreseeable vehicle movement.
:r-'-:rIg to
Overhead conductors shall be at a height above ground ofnot less than 6 m in all areas subjected to vehicle movement
and 3.5 rn i[ all other areas.

271
h --iE-
i
 709.531 Devices for fault protection by automatic disconnection of supply
709.531.2 RCDs

Socket-outlets shall be protected individually by an RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1.
Devices selected shall disconnect all poles, including the neutml.

Final cilcuits illtended 1br fixed connection for the suppiy to houseboats shall be protected individtnlly by an RCD
having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1 .1. The device selected shall disconnect all poLes, including
the neutral.

709.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent

Each socket-outlet shall be protected by an individual overcurrent protective device, in accordance with the
requirements olChapter 43.

A fixed comection for supply to each houseboat shall be protected individually by an overcunent protective de\,ice,
in accordance with the requirements ofChapter 43.

709.537 lsolation and switching

709.537.2 lsolation
709.537.2.1 General
709.537 .2.'l '1 At least one means of isolation shall be installed in each distribution cabinet. This switching
device shall disconnect all live conductors including the neutal conductol'. One isolating switching device for a
maximum offour socket-outlets shall be irrstalled.

709.55 Other equipment

709,553.1 Plugsandsocket-outlets
709.553.1.8 socket-outlets shall comply with BS EN 60309-l above 63 A and BS EN 60309-2 up to 63 A.
Every socket-outlet shall meet the degree of prctection of at least IP44 or such protecriol'r shall be provided by an
enclosure.

Where the codes AD5 orAD6 are applicable the degree ofprotection shall be at Ieasr either lPX 5 or lPXo respectively.

709.553'1.9 Every socket-outlet shall be located as close as practicable to the berth to be supplierl.

Socket-outlets shall be instatled in the distdbution board or irl separate enclosures.

709.553.1.10 In order to avoid any hazard due to long cornection cords, a maximum offour socket-outlets sha11 be
grouped together in one enclosure.
NOTE: Sce Fjgure 709.3 rcgarding the recommended illstruction notice to be placed in marinas adjacent to cach group of
socket-outlets-

709.553.1.11 One socket-outlet shall supply only one pleasure cralt or houseboat.

709.553.1.12In general, single-phase socket-outlets with raterl voltage 200 V 250 V and rated cunent l6Ashall
be provided.

where greatcr demands are envisaged socket-outlets with higher current ratings shall be provided.

709.553.1 .1 3 Socket-outlets shall be pJaced at a height of not less than I m above the highest water 1evel. In the
case of floating pontoolls or walkways only, this height may be reduced to 300 mm above the highest water level
provided that appropriate additional measures are taken to protect against the effects of splashing.

272

[--
 to a P\lE eafthing facility'
709.553.1 .14 Sockct-outlet protecti\ e condtictors shall not bc connected
in marinas
Figs 709.1 & 2 - Examples of methods of obtaining supply

Fig 709.'l - Connection to a single-phase mains supply with RGD

rl
Swltch
R;sidual current device
\
L

PE

To metal parts n electrical

contact with water surrounding
he pleasure craft

Fig 709.2 - Connection to a three-phase mains supply with RCD

t1:19
.: a I\rain switch

\
L1
L2
L3
N

rl -\.
:) all

To metal pads ln electrical

..-t. contacl wilh water surrounding

PE

hail be
Fig 709.3 - Example of an instruction notice to be placed in marinas
pleasure craft operator who wishes to connecl a pleasure
Soup of NoTE 1: It is recommended that the narina operator provides every
notice'
cmft to an electrical supply with an up{o date copy ofthis instruction
NOTE 2: The instruction notice should contain' at 1east, the following:

,t sirall

ln the
level

6.*'",%
"A
5""r,"*

zBl
 INSTRUCTIONS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
BERTHING INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONNECTION TO SHORE SUPPLY
This marina provides power for use on your pleasure craft with a direct connection to
the shore supply which is connected to Earth. Unless you have an isolating transformer
fitted on board to isolate the electrical system on your craft from the shore supply
system, corrosion through electrolysis could damage your craft or surrounding craft.
ON ARRIVAL
(i) Ensure the supply is switched off and disconnect all current-using equipment
on the craft, before inserting the craft plug. Connect the flexible cable firstly at
the pleasure-craft inlet socket and then at the marina socket-outlet.
(ii) *
The supply at this berth is * V, Hz. The socket-outlet will accommodate a
*
standard marina plug colour (technically described as BS EN 60309-2, position 6 h).
(iii) For safety reasons, your craft must not be connected to any other socket-
outlet than that allocated to you and the internal wiring on your craft must
comply with the appropriate standards.
(iv) Every effort must be made to prevent the connecting flexible cable from falling
into the water if it should become disengaged. For this purpose, securing hooks
are provided alongside socket-outlets for anchorage at a loop of tie cord
(v) For safety reasons, only one pleasure-craft connecting cable supplying one
pleasure craft may be connected to any one socket-outlet.
(vi) The connecting flexible cable must be in one length, without signs of damage,
and not contain joints or other means to increase its length.
(vii) The entry of moisture and salt into the pleasure-craft inlet socket may cause a
hazard. Examine carefully and clean the plug and socket before connecting
the supply.
(viii) lt is dangerous to attempt repairs or alterations. lf any difficulty arises, contact
the marina management.
BEFORE LEAVING
(i) Ensure that the supply is switched off and disconnect all current-using
equipment on the craft, before the connecting cable is disconnected and any tie
cord loops are unhooked.
(ii) The connecting flexible cable should be disconnected firstly from the marina
sockefoutlet and then from the pleasure-crafl inlet socket. Any cover that may
be provided to protect the inlet from weather should be securely replaced. The
connecting flexible cable should be coiled up and stored in a dry location
where it will not be da

* appropriate figures and colours to be inseded:

nominally 230 V 50 Hz blue - single-phase, and
nominally 400 V 50 Hz red - three-phase.

274
 SECTION 710

MEDICAL LOCATIONS
710.1 Scope
The parlicular requirements of this section apply to patient healthcare facilities, such as, hospitals, private clinics.
medical and dental practices, healthcare centres and dedicated medical rooms in the workplace to provide 1br the
safety ofpatients and medical staff.

In these areas the risk to patients is increased due to:

the reduction in body resistance, since the skin is often cut or broken, and
the threat ftom failure ofthe supply, especially to life suppofiing equipment.

This section also applies to electrical installations in Iocations designed for medical research on patients.

The requirements ofthis section do not apply to medical electrical (ME) equipment.

NOTE 1: The requirenents of other sections ofParl 7 may also apply.

NOTE 2: It may be necessary to modify the existing elect cal installation, in accordance with this Standard, when a change of
utilization ofthe location occurs. Special carc should be taken where intracardiac and/or life supporting procedures
are perfonned in existirlg imtallations.

NOTE 3: Where appJicable, this Standard can also be used in veterinary clinics.
NOTE 4: for ME equipment and ME systems, refer to the BS EN 60601 sedes.
NOTE 5: Care should be taken so that other installations do not compromise the level of safety provided by installations meeting
the requirements of this section.

NOTE 6: Supporting information about elect cal services supply and distribution in healthcare premise is given in Health I

Technical Memorandum (HTM) 06-01, published by the Department ofHealth. I

7'10.3 Assessment of general characteristics

ln order to determine the classification and Group number of a medical location, it is necessary that the relevant
medical stalfindicate which medical procedures will take place within the location. Based on the intended use, the
appropriate classification for the location shall be determined.
NOTE 'l: Classification of a medical location is related to the type of contact between applied parts and the patient, the threat
to the safety ofthe patient owirg to a discontinuity (failure) ofthe electrical supply, as well as the purpose for which
the locatiorl is used. (Guidance on the allocation of a Group number and classification of safety services for medical
locations is shown in Annex A710.)
NOTE 2: To provide protection of patients from possible electrical hazards, additional protective measures are applied in
medical locations. The type and description ofthese hazards can vary according to the treatme[t being adminislered.
The purpose for which a location is to be used may justify areas with different classifications (Group 0, I or 2) for
diffelent medical procedures.
NOTE 3: Applied parts are def,ned by the particular standards for ME equipment.
NOTE 4: Where a medical location may be used for diffelent medical procedures the requirements of the higher Group
classification should be applied: refer to Annex A710.

710.3'l Purposes, supplies and structure

710.312.2 Types of system earthing

PEN conductors shal1 not be used in medical locations and medical buildings downsteam ofthe main distribution
board.
NOTE: Regulation 8(4) of the Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations (ESQCR) prohibits the use of PEN
conductors in consumers' installations.

71 0.31 3 Supplies

710.313.1 General

-n medical locatiors, the distdbution system shall be designed and installed to facilitate the automatic changeoler
:ion1 the main distdbution network to the electrical safety source feeding essential loads, as required b1
Regulation 560.5.

275
i -*--
V
7',to.4 Protection for safety
710.41 Protection against electric shock
710.410.3 General requirements

71 0.41 0.3.5 The protective neasures ol obstacles and placing out of reach (Section 417) shall not be used.

710.410.3.6 The protective measures ofnon-conducting location (Regulation 418.1), eafih-tiee local equipotential
bording (Regulation 418.2) and electrical separation for the supply to more than one item ofcurent-using equipment
( Regulation 4l R.l ) 5hall nor be Lr.ed.

NOTE: A rnedical lT system does nol use electrical separation as the sole rneans ofprotection against elecrric shock.

710.411.3 Requirements for fault protection

710,411.3.2 Automatic disconnection in case of a fault
710,411.3.2.1 Care shall be taken so that simultaneous use ofmany items olequipment corrected to the same
circuit cannot cause unwanted trjpping ofthe residual cun'ent protective device (RCD).

In medical locations ofGloup I and Group 2, where RCDs are required, only Type A according to BS EN 61008 I

aud BS EN 61009 or Type B according to BS EN 62423 shall be selected, depending on the possible fault curent I

arising. Type AC RCDs shall lot be used.

710.411.3.2.5 In medical locations of Group I and Group 2, the voltage presented betlveen simultaneously
accessible exposed-conductive-pafts and/or extlaneous-conductive-parts shall l1ot exceed 25 V AC or 60 V DC.

710.411.4 TN system I

Additional protection by RCDs having the chamcteristics specified in Regulation 4l5.l.l shall be used:
(i) in final circuits ofGroup I with rated curent not exceeding 32 A and below, and
(ii) in final circuits of Group 2, except those of the medical IT system specified in Regulation 710.411.6.
NOTE: It is also permissible to Lrse RCDs above 32 A in Group I locations.

710.411.5 TT system

In medical locations ofGroup I and Group 2, RCDs shall be used as protective devices, except for circuits ofan IT
system specified in Regulatioo 710.41L6.

710.41'1.6 lT system

In Group 2 medical locations ofan lT system, including the measures ofRegulation 710.411.6.3.1, 710.411.6.3.2
and 710.512.1.1, shall be used for final circuits of ME equipment and ME systems intended for lile support and
surgical applications within the patient environnent, excluding:
(i) equipment with a rated power greater than skVA
(ii) X-ray equipment
(iii) the supply ofmovements offixed operating tables.

For each group ofrooms serying the same function, at least one medical IT system is necessary.
NOTE 1: The list of circuits in (i) to (iii) above is not exhausrive.
NOTE 2: For illustration of a typical theatue layout refel to Figure 710.2.
NOTE 3: A systen constructed to the requiremeDts ofReglrlation 710.41 1.6 js known as a medical IT system.

710,411.6.3.1 For each group ofrooms serving the same function, at least one medical IT system is necessary.
The IT systerr shall be equipped with an insulation monitoring device (MEDJMD) in accordance with Annex A
and Annex B ofBS EN 61557-8.

For each medical IT system. an audible and visual alam systen, incorporating the lollowing components, shall
be provided so that it can bc pennanently rronitored by the medical staffand any alarm reported to technical staff:
(i) A green signal lamp to indicate nonnal operatiou
(ii) A yellow signal laurp ri hich lights when the minimum value set for the insulation resistance is reached. [t
shalJ not be possib)e lor this light to be cancelled or djsconnected
 (iii) An audible alarm rvhich sounds when the minimum value set for the insulation resistance is reached. Th:.
audible alann may be silenced
(iv) The yellow signal shall extinguish on removal ofthe fault and when the normal condition is restored.

Documentation shall be easily readable in the medical location and it shall include:
(v) the meaning ofeach type ofsignal, and
(vi) the procedure to be followed in case of an alam at first fault.
iial
ent 710.411.6.3.2 Monitoring ofoverload and high temperature for the IT tmnsformer is required.

7'10.411.6.3.3 In addition to an insulation monitoring device, consideration shall be given to the installation of
fault location systems which localize insulation faults in any pafi ofthe medical lT system

The insulation lault location system shall be in accordance with BS EN 61557-9.

710,4'11.7 Functional extra-low voltage (FELV)

ame
In medical locations, functional extra-low voltage (FELV) shall not be used as a method of protection against
electric shock-
1008
rent 710.414 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

710.414.1 General
lusly When using SELV and/or PELV circuits in medical locations ofGroup I and Group 2, the nominal voltage applied
to current-using equipment shall not exceed 25 V AC rms or 60 V ripple-free DC. Protection by basic insulation
of live parls as required by Regulation 416. I or by barriers or enclosures as required by Regulation 416.2. sh all he
provided.

710.414.4.1 In medical locations of Group 2, where PELV is used, exposed-conductive-pafis of equipment.

e.g. operating theatre luminaires, shall be connected to the circuit protective conductor

710.415.1 Additional protection: RCDs

Where a medical IT system is used, additional protection by means ofan RCD is not required.

710.415.2 Additional protection: Supplementary protective equipotential bonding

lan IT
710.4'15.2.'l ln each medical location ofGroup 1 and Group 2, supplementary protective equipotential bonding
shall be installed and the supplementary bonding conductors shall be connected to the equipotential bonding busbar
for the purpose of equalizing potential differences between the following par1s, which are located or that ma) be
moved into the 'patient environment':
t.6.3.2 (i) Protectiveconductors
on and (ii) Extraneous-conductive-parts
(iii) Screening against electrical interference fields, ifinstalled
(iv) Connection to conductive floor grids, il installed
(v) Metal screens of isolating tuansfonners, via the shoftest route to the earthing conductor

Supplementary equipotentiat bonding connection points for the connection of ME equipment shall be available in
Group 2 and should also be considered in Group I medical locations.

The designerin consultation with the end user shall determine the appropriate number ofsupplementary equipotential
bonding connections.
NOTE 1: In a Group I medical location, a minimum of one supplementary equipotential bonding connection point per prtieni
:,.'iSary. location is recommended. In a Group 2 nedical location, a mininurn number of four supplernentary equipotential
::::1e\ A bonding conncction points but not less than 25 o/o ofthe total number ofindividual medical IT socket-outlets plovided
per patient location is recomrnended.

NOTE 2: Manufacturers of fixed conductive non electdcal patient supports such as operating theatre tables, physiotherapl
.. :hall
couches and dental chaiN may require the equipment to be connected to the equipotential bonding conductor.
-., .tatf:
710.415.2.2 ln medical locations of Group 1 and Group 2, the resistance of the protective conductors betNeen
the earth teminal of any socket-outlet (or fixed equipment) and any exposed-conductive-pafi and/or extraneous-
:.,: ',ed lt
conductive-part shall be such that the voltages given in 710.41 1.3.2.5 are not exceeded. and the measured resistance
between the eafih terminal of any socket-outlet (or fixed equipment) and any e\tral]eous-conductive-part shall noi
exceed 0.2 C).
 NOTE: In TN and TT sysrems. a lalue of 25 V AC or 60 V DC may be obtained by the provision of protective
equipotential bondlng in conjunction with circuit protective conductors for the particular circuit. In the case of
TT systems a satisfactory value ofRe will also be required

710.415.2.3 The equipotential bonding busbar shall be located in or near the medical location.

The equipotential bonding busbar sha1l be connected to the system eafihing using a protective conductor having
a cross-sectional area greater than or equal to the largest cross-sectional area of any conductor connected to the
equipotential bonding busbat.

Connections shall be so aranged that they are accessible, labelled, clearly visible and can be individually
disconnected.

NOTE: It is recomnrended that radial wiring patterns are used to avoid 'earth loops' that may exacerbate electromagnetic
disturbances.

710.421.1.201 ln medical locations of Group I and 2 Arc Fault Detection Devices (AFDDs) are not rcquired to
be installed. In medical locations of Group 0 Arc Fault Detection Devices (AFDDs) shall be used subject to a risk
assessment.

710,444 Measures againstelectromagnetic disturbances

Special considerations have to be made conceming elecfomagnetic interference (EMI) and electomagnetic
compatibility (EMC).

710.5 Selection and erection of equipment

7'10.51 Common rules
710.511.1 Distribution boards

Distribution boards shall meet the requirements ofBS EN 61439 series.

Distribution boards for Group 2 locations shall be installed in close proximity to the areas they serve and be clearly
labelled.
710.512 Operational conditions and external influences
710.512.1 Operational conditions
7'10.512.1.1 Transformers for medical lT systems
Transfonners shall be in accordance with BS EN 61558-2-15, installed in close proximity to the medical location
and with the lollowing additional requirements;
(i) The leakage current ofthe output winding to earth and the leakage current ofthe enclosure, when measured
in no-load condition and with the tmnsformer supplied at rated voltage and rated frequency, shall not exceed
0.5 mA
(ii) At least ofle single-phase transformer per room or functional group of rooms shall be used to form the
nedical IT sysrems lor nlobile and fixed equipment. The rated output shall be not less than 0 5 kVA and shall
not excced 10 kVA. Where several transformers are needed to supply equipment in one room, they shall not
be connected in parallel
(iii) Ifthe supply ofthree-phase loads via a medicat IT system is also required, a separate three-phase tmrslormer
shall be provided for this purpose.

For monitodng see Rcgulation 710.41 1.6.3.1.

Capacitors shall not be used in tmltsfolmers for medical IT systems.

710.512.1 .2 Power supply for medical locations of Group 2

ln case of a fault or a failur e of supply, a total loss of power in a Group 2 medical location sha[1 be prevented

NOTE: Suppoltirg infomration is given in HTM 06-01

710.512.2.1 Explosionrisk
Electrical devices, e.g. socket-outlets and switches, installed below any medical-gas outlets for oxidizing or
flamn.nble gases shall be located at a distance ofat least 0.2 m frolr the outlet (centue to centle), so as to minimize
the risk ofignition of flammable gases.

278
: NOTE: Requirernents tbr ME equipment for use in conjulction with flaltrmab]e
i BS EN 6060 I,

7'10.514.9 Diagrams and documentation

710.514.9,1 Plans ofthe electrical installation togetherwith records, drawings, wiring diagrams and modifications
relating to the medical location, shal1 be provided.

Information provided shall include but not be limited to:

(i) single-line ovewierv diagrams showing the distdbution system of the normal pow supply and power
supply for safety services in a single-line representation
(ii) distribution board block diagrams showing switchgear and controlgear and distribution boards in a single-
line representation
(iii) schematic diagrams of controls
. (i") the verification ofcompliance with the requirements of standards
.ir. (u) functional description for the operation ofthe safety power supply sewices and ofthe safety power supply
system.

710.52 Selection and erection of uriring systems

\ny wi ng system within Group 2 medical locations shall be exclusively for the use of equipment and accessorres
\\ itlin those locations.

710.53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

710.531.2 Overcurrent protective devices - protection of wiring systems in medical locations
of Group 2

Overload currenl protection shall not be used in either the primary or secondary circuit of the transformer of a
:nedical IT system.

O\ ercurent protection against overload and shofi-circuit curents is required for each final circuit.
NOTE 1: Overcurrent protective devices (e.g. fuses) may be used in the primary circlrit of the lraDsformer for short-circuit
protection only.
NOTE 2: Fig 710.3 shows a typical medical IT system anangement.

710.531 .3 RCDS

::::!1:' 710.531.3.2 Socket-outlets protected by RCDs

- or eachcircuit protected by an RCD having the characteristics specilied in Regulation 415.1.1, consideration shall
r:..:.-d :e given to reduce the possibility ofunwanted tripping of the RCD due to excessive protective conductor culTel]ts
,-..,:,- .j :roduced by equipment during normal operation.

_- -t->
710.537 lsolation and switching
:.:-.111
710.537.'l General
:. - r.t:
\uromatic chalgeover devices shall comply with BS EN 60947-6-l and shall be auanged so that safe separation
:etu,een supply lines is maintained.

7'10.55 Otherequipment
710.553.1 Socket-ou et circuits in the medical lT system for medical locations of Group 2

>!.,cket-outlets intended to supply ME equipment shall be unswitched.

.\i each patient's place oftreatmelt, e.g. bedheads, the configulation of Socket-outlets shall be as follows:
(i) Each socket-outlet supplied by an individually protected circuit, or
tii) several socket-outlets sepamtely supplied by a urinimum oftwo circuits.

Socket-outlets used on medical IT systems shall be coloured blue and be clearly and pemanently marked 'Medical
I qurpment Only'.
!{OTE: Supportirg infonnation is given ir HTM 06-01.

^L
 710.559 Luminairesandlightinginstallations

Ir medical Iocations ofGroup 1 and Group 2, at least two different sources of supply shalt be provided. One ofthe
sources shall be connected to the electdcal supply system for safety services.

710.56 Safety services

Apower supply for safety services is reqr"rired v'hich will n.raintain the supply lor continuous operation for a defined
period u ithin a pre-sel changeover rirne.

The safety power supply system shall automatically take over ifthe voltage ofone or more incoming live conductors,
at the main distribution board of the building, has dropped for more than 0.5 s and by more than l0 % in regard to
the nominal voltage.
NOTE: A list ofexarnples with suggested reinstatcment times is given in Table A7l0 ofAnflex A710.

710.560.4 Classification

Classificatiou of safety services is given in Regulation 560.4.1.

NOTE: Safety sen'iccs provided lor locations having differing classifications should meet that classillcation which gives the
highest security of supply.

710.560.5.5 General requirements for safety power supply sources of Group 1 and Group 2
Primary cells are not allowed as safety power sources.

An additioual main incoming power supply. flom the general power supply, is not regarded as a source ofthe salety
power supply.

The availabiiity (readiness for senice) ofsafety power sources shall be monitored and indicated at a suitable location.

710.560.5"6 In case ofa failure ofthe general power supply source, the power supply for safety services shall be
energized to feed the equipment stated inRegulations 710.560.6.1.1 to 3 with electrical energy for a defined period
of time and within a predetemined changeover period.

710.560.5'7 Where socket-outlets ale supplied fl'orn the safety power supply source they shall be readily
identifiable according to their salety services classification.
710.560.6 Electrical sources for safety services

710.560.6.1 Detailed requirements for safety power supply services

NOTE: Also refer to Regulation 710.560.5.5.

710.560.6.1.'l Power supply sources with a changeover period less than or equal to 0.5 s
In the event of a voltage failure on one or mol€ line conductors at the distribution board, a safety power supply
source shall be used al1d be capable ofproviding power for a period ofat least 3 h for the following:
(i) Luminaires oloperating theatre tables
(ii) ME equipment containing light sources being essential for the application ofthe equipment, e.g. endoscopes,
including associated essential equipnent, e.g. monitors
(iii) Life-supporting ME equipurent.

The duration of 3 h may be reduced to I h for items (ii) and (iii) if a power source meeting the requirements of
Regulation 710.560.6.1.2 is installed.

The nomral power supply shall be restored within a changeover period not exceeding 0.5 s.
NOTE: Supporting informatiol] relating to the autonomy of battery inverter units for theatre llrninaires is given in
HTM 06-01.

710.560.6.1 .2 Power supply sources with a changeover period less than or equal to 15 s
Equipment meeting the requirements of Regulations 710.560.9.1 and 710.560.1I shall be connected within l5 s to
a safety power supply source capable of naintaining it for a minimum period of24 h, when the voltage of one or
more live conducto$ at the main distribution board lor the safety senr'iaes has decreased by more than 10 % ofthe
nominal value of suppl1, voltage and for a duration greater than 3 s.

284
 710.560.6.1.3 Power supply sources with a changeover period greater than 15 s
Equipment, other than that covered by Regulations 710.560.6.1.1 and 710.560.6.1.2,
which is required for rhe
maintenance of healthcare installations, shall be connected either automatically
or manually to a safen po.,.er
supply source capable ofmaintaining it for a minimum period of24 h. This equipment
may include, lor example:
(i) Ste lization equipment
(ii) Technical building installations, in particular air conditioning, heating and ventilation
systems, buildins
services and waste disposal systems
(iii) Coolingequipment
(iY) Cateringequipment
(v) Storage battery chargers.

710.560.7 Circuits of safety services

The circuit which connects the power supply source for safety services to the [rain
distribution board shall be
considered a safety circuit.

710.560.9 Emergencylightingsystems
71 0.560.9.1 Safety lighting
In the event of mains power failure, the changeover period to the safety services
source shall not exceed l5 s. fhe
necessary minimum illuminance shall be provided for the following:
(i) Emergency lighting and exit signs
(ii) Locations for switchgear and controlgear for emergency generating sets, for main distribution
boards ofthe
normal power supply and for power supply for safety services
(iii) Rooms in which essential services are intended. In each such room at least one luminaire
shall be supplied
from the power source for safety services
( iv) Locations of centml fire alarm and monitodng systems
(v) Rooms ofGroup I medical locations; in each such room at least one luminaire
shall be supplied from the
power supply source for safety services
(vi) Rooms ofGroup 2 medical locations; a minimum of90 % ofthe lighting shall be
supplie6lrom the power
source for safety services.

The luminaires ofthe escape routes shall be arranged on alternate circuits,

710.560.11 Other services

other seryices which may require a safety seruice supply with a changeover period not exceeding
l5 s include, tbr
erample, the following:
(i) Firefighters 1ifts
(ii) Ventilation systems for smoke extraction
(iii) Paging/communication systems
(iv) ME equipment used in Group 2 medical locations which serves for surgical or other procedures
of vital
importance. Such equipment will be defined by responsible staff
(v) Electrical equipment of medical gas suppry including compressed air, vacuum supply and narcosis
(anaesthetics) exhaustion as well as their monitoring devices
(vi) Fire detection and fire alarms
(r,ii) Fire extinguishing systems.

710.6 lnspection and testing

NOTE: The testing of equipment connected to the electrical installation is or.rtside the scope of this document.
For ME
equipment refer to BS EN 62353.

710.64 lnitialverification
710,641 ceneral

fhe dates and results ofeach ve flcation shall be recorded.

-..*=-
-
 The tests specified below under items (i) to (iii), in addition to the requirements of Chapter 64, shall be caried out,
both prior to commissioning and after alteration or repairs and before re-commissioning:
(i) Complete functional tests of the insulation monitoring devices (IMDs) associated with the medical IT
system including insulation failure, transfomer high temperature, overload, discontinuity and the audible
and/or visual alams lirked to them
(ii) Measurements ofleakage curent ofthe output circuit and ofthe enclosure ofthe medical IT transformers in
noJoad condition, as specified by Regulation 710.512.1.1(i)
(iii) Measurements to verily that the resistance ofthe supplementary equipotential bonding is within the limits
stipulated by Regul ation 1 10.415.2.2.
NOTE: The tests specified lvithin HTM 06-01 may also be required as part ofclient requirements.

710.65 Periodic inspection and testing

710.651 General
NOTE I : In addition to the requirements of Chapter 65, the following procedures are recommended at the given i[ter.r'als:
(i) Annually Complete functional tests ol the insulation monitoring devices (IMDs) associated with the
medical lT system including insulation failure, transfomer high temperature, overload, discontinuity and
the audible/visual alarms linked to them
(ii) Annually Measurements to ve fy that the resistance ofthe supplementary protective equipotential bonding
is within the Iimits stipulated by Regulation 710.415.2.2.
(iii) Every 3 years Measurements ofleakage current ofthe output circuit and ofthe enclosure ofthe medical
IT transfonners in noload condition, as specified by Regulation 710.512.1.1(i)
NOTE 2: Supporring inlormation on periodic inspection and testing is given in HTM 06-01. Client or local Health Authority
requiements, if aly. may apply.

Fig 710.1 - Example of patient environment (BS EN 60601)

,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ 1,/ ,/ ,/ ,/ ,/,/ / / ,. ,/ /

NOTE: The dimensions in the figure shor,r' the minimurn extent ofthe patient environment in a free sunounding. This applies
where the patient's positiorl is predetemined; if not, all possible patient positions should be considered (see Patient
environment, Part 2. Defnitions).

282
 Fi!710.2 - Typical theatre layout

I
I

---F
I

I
.t
tl
tt
I

I ll I ll ,,", /
rlrrrr # t;_'
,,,, ,, Fl'iE:.'
'| , osl:l?ld
|
r Ir I r:: F - -"1 '.3a-,--,-- -
Irrr----tl----__
tt:::::::::::::
t____

Fig 710.3 - Typical medical lT system arrangement

[4EDICAL ISOLATING
TRANSFORMER
WITH
EARTHED SCREEN

SUPPLEI\,lENIARY EOUIPOTENTIAL
BONDING CONNECTION POINTS

N4EDICAL LOCAT]ON EOU POTENTIAL

ALARI\,4 PANEL BOND NG BUSBAR (EBB)

-&L_
 ANNEX A71O

MEDICAL LOCATIONS
services of medical locations
Examples for allocation of Group numbers and classification for safety

AdefirritivelistofrrredicallocationsshowingtheirassigrredGroupsisinrpracticable,asistheuse-to.which
provided as a guide only and should be read
locations (rooms) might be put. The acco,'pul'|;ng list ofe"amPles is
7 t 0.3 cannot be satisfied bv using this table
in cor.rjunction with Regulation 7 t{t.i. i1," ,"qrit.ir"ntt ot negi tation
alone.

TABLE A710 - List of examples

GlglP- Classificatiott
I 2 !0.5s >0.5s
Medical location 0
I 15 s

room x x x
1 Massage
x x
2 Bedrooms
x x. x
3 DeliveD/ room
x x
4 ECG, EEG, EHG roonl
5 Endoscopic loont
xb x
x x x
6 Examination or treatmellt roolr
xb X xb
7 Urology room
u4 therapy room x x x x
8 Radiological diagrostrc
x x
9 Hvdrotherapy room
x x
10 Physiotherapy room
x x. x
1l Anacslhetic area
x x. x
12 Opemting theafe
x x
l3 Operating preParation room
l4 Oneratins Dlaster room x x
x x" x
15 Operating recor ctY room
l6 Head catlteterization room
x X
x x
17 hteusive care roonl
x x" x
18 Argiographic examination room
x x
19 Haertodialysis roon.t
resonat',."1!9tlgll1ry!99g- x x x x
20 Magnetic
x x
2l Nuclear medicine
22 Premature babY roon]
x x" X
,1 r-+affia/liqra a,ie I Init IIMCI ll x x x
re quire a power suPPlY within 0.5 s and
a Specific luminaires. such as operating or procedure lights, that
within 0.5 s.
life-suppolt medical electrical equiptrrent that requires a Power slrppl)
b Not beirg an oPerating theatre.
 SECTION 711
EXHIBITIONS, SHOWS AND STANDS
711.1 Scope
The paticular requirements ofthis section apply to the temporary electrical installations in exhibitions, shos s and
stands (including mobile and portable displays and equipment) to protect users. Unless specilically stated. rhis

'l
I
section does not apply to exhibits for which requirements are given in the relevant standards.

This section does not apply to the fixed electrical installation ofthe building, ifany, in which the exhibition. shou
or stand may take place.

This section does not apply to electrical systems as defined in BS 7909 used in stmctures, sets, mobile units etc as
used for public or private events, tou ng shows, theatrical, radio, TV or film productions and similar activities of
the entefi ainment industry

The requirements ofother sections ofPart 7 may also apply.

711.3 Assessment of general characteristics

711.313 Supplies
The nominal supply voltage ofa temporary electrical installation in an exhibition, show or stand shall not exceed
230/400 VAC or 500 V DC.

711.32 Classification of external influences

The extemal influence conditions ofthe particular location where the temporary electrical installation is erected,
e.g. the presence ofwater or mechanical stresses, shall be taken into accou[t.

711,41 Protection against electric shock

711.410.3 General requirements
711.410.3.4 A cable intended to supply tempomry structures sl'rall be protected at its origin by an RCD whose
rated residual operating curent does not exceed 300 mA. This device shall provide a delay by using a device in
accordance with BS EN 60947-2, or be of the type S in accordance with BS EN 61008-l or BS EN 61009-1 for I
selectivity with RCDs protecting final circuits. I

NOTE: The rcquirernent for cable protection relates to the increased risk ofdanage to cables in temporary locations.

711.410.3.5 The protective measures ofobstacles and placing out ofreach (Section 417) shall notbeused.

711,410.3.6 The protective measures of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and earth-free local
equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

71'1.411 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

7'11,4'l'1.3.1.2 Protective equipotential bonding

Structural metallic parts which are accessible from within the stand, vehicle, wagon, caravan or container shali be
connected through the main protective bonding conductors to the main earthing terminal within the unit.

7 11.411.3.3 Additional protection

Each socket-outlet circuit not exceeding 32 A and all final circuits other than for emergency lighting shall be
protected by an RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1 .

711.411.4 TN system

Except for a paft of an installation within a building, a PME earthing facility shall not be used as the means of
earthing for an installation falling within the scope ofthis section except where:
(i) the installation is continuously under the supewision ofa skilled or instmcted person(s), and
(ii) the suitability and effectiveness of the means of eathing has been confirmed before the connection is
made.
 711.414 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV
711'414.4.5 Where SELV or PEl, s used, whatever the nominal voltage, basic protection shall be provided by:
(i) basic insulation con.rplying with Regulation 416.1, or
(ii) by baniers or enclosures complying with Regulation 416.2 and affording a degree ofprotection ofat least
IPXXD or IP.IX.

711.42 Protection against thermal effects

711.422 Protection against fire
7 11.422.4.2 Heat generation

Lighting equipment such as incandescent lamps, spotlights and small projectors, and other equipment or appliances
with high temperature surfaces, shall be suitably guarded, and instatled and located in accordaace with thi ielevant
standard.

Showcases and signs shall be constructed of material having adequate heat-resistance, mechanical strength,
electrical insulation and ventilatior, taking into account the combustibility of exhibits in relation to the heat
generation.

Stand installations coltaining a concentration of elect cal equipment, luminaires or lamps liable to generate
excessive heat shall not be installed unless adequate ventilation provisions are made, e.g. well ventilated ceiling
constructed of incombustible material.

In all cases. the manufacturer's instructions shall be taken in to account.

711.5 Selection and erection of equipment

711.51 Common rules
Switchgear and controlgear shall be placed in closed cabinets which can only be opened by the use of a key or a
tool, except for those pafts designed and intended to be operated by ordinary persons.

71'1.52 Wiring systems

Armouredcables orcables protected against mechanical damage shatl be used wherever there is a risk ofmechanical
danrage.

wiring cables shall be copper, have a minimum cross-sectional area of 1.5 mm2, and shall comply with a11
apptopriate British or Harmonized Standard for either thermoplastic or thermosetting insulated elechic cables.

Flexible cables shall not be laid in areas accessible to the public unless they are protected against mechanical
damage.

711.52'l Types of wiring system

Where no flre alalm system is installed in a building used for exhibitions etc. cable systems shall be either:
(i) flalne retardant to BS EN 60332-1-2 or to a releyant pafi ofthe BS EN 60332-3 series, and low smoke to
BS EN 61034-2. or
(ii) single-core or multicore unamoured cables enclosed in metallic or non-metallic conduit or trunking,
providing fire plotection in accordance with BS EN 61386 series or BS EN 50085 series and providing a
degree ofprotection ofat least IP4X.

711.526 Electricalconnections

711.526.1 Joints shall not be made in cables except where necessary as a connection into a circuit. Where
joints are rnade, these shall either use connectors in accordance with relevant standards or be in enclosures with a
degree ofprotectior ofat least IPXXD orIP4X.

Where stmin can be tmnsmitted to teminals the connection shall incorporate suitable cable anchorage(s).

286
_
 711.537 .2 Devices for isolation
711.537.2,3 Every separate temporary stmcture, such as a vehicle, stand or unit, intended to be occupied bv one
specific user and each distribution circuit supplying outdoor installations shall be provided with its own readill'
accessible and properly identifiable means of isolation. The means of isolation shall be selected and erected in
accordance with Section 462 and Regulation 537.2.

71'1.55 Otherequipment
711.55.4 Electricmotors
I
711.55.4.1 lsolation
Where an electdc motor might give rise to a hazard, the motor shall be provided with an effective means of
isolation on all poles and such means shalt be adjacent to the motor which it controls (see BS EN 60204-l).

7'l'1.55.6 ELV transformers and electronic convertors

A manual reset protective device shall protect the secondary circuit ofeach tmnsformer or electronic convertor.

Particular care shall be taken when instatling ELV transformefs, which shall be mounted out of arm's reach ofthe
public, e.g. in a panel or room with adequate ventilation that can only be ascessed by skilled or instructed pe$ons.
Such access shall be provided only to facilitate inspection, testing and maintenance.

Electlonic convefiols shall confom with BS EN 61347-1.

711.55.7 Socket-outlets
Where a floor mounted socket-outlet is installed, it shall be adequately protected from accidental ingress ofwater
and have sullcient strcngth to be able to withstand the expected trafnc load.

711,559 Luminairesandlightinginstallations
711.559.4.2 ELV lighting systems for filament lamps
Extralow voltage systems for filament lamps shall comply with BS EN 60598-2-23.

711.559.4.3 Lampholders
Insulation piercing lampholders shall not be used unless the cables and lampholders are compatible, and providing
the lampholders are non-removable once fltted to the cable.

7'11.559.4.4 Electric discharge lamp installations

lnstallations of any luminous tube, sign or lamp as an illuminated unit on a stand, or as an exhibit, with nominal
power supply voltage higher than 230/400 V AC, shall comply with Regulations 711.559 4.4.1 to 3.

711.559.4.4.'l Location
The sign or lamp shall be installed out of arm's reach or shall be adequately protected to reduce the risk ofinjury

711.559.4.4.2 lnstallation
Ihe facia or stand fitting material behind luminous tubes, signs or laurps shall be non-ignitable.
711.559.4.4.3 Emergency switching device
\ separare circuit shall be used to supply signs, lamps or exhibits, which shall be controlled by ar emergency
...i itch. The switch shall be easily visible, accessible and clearly marked.

711.559.5 Protection against thermal effects

(arm's reach) from floor level or otherwise accessible to accidental contact
-rminaires mounted below 2.5 m
.rall be firmly ancl adequately fixed, and so sited or guarded as to prevent sk of injury to persons or ignition of
::aterials.
NOTE: In the case ofoutdoor lighting installations, Section 71,1 also applies, and a degree ofprolection of at least IP33 may
be required.

711.6 lnspection and testing

1e temporary electrical installations of exhibitions, shows and stands shall be inspected and tested on sire in
::cordance with Chapter 64 after each assembl-v on site.

_"t
l
 SECTION 712
soLAR PHOTOVOLTATC (pV) POWER SUppLy SYSTEMS
712.1 Scope
The particular requirements of this section apply to the electrical installations of PV power supply systems
including sl sterns u irh AC module..
NOTE: Requirements for PV power supply systems which are intended for stand alone opemtion are under consideratioo.

712.3 Assessment of general characteristics

712.31 Purposes, supplies and structure
712.312 System earthing

7'12.3'12.2 Type of earthing arrangement

Earthing ofone ofthe live conductols ofthe DC side is pennitted, ifthere is at least simple separation between the
AC side and the DC side.
NOTE: Aly connections with Eafih on the DC side should be electrically connected so as to avoid co(osion
(see BS EN 13636 and BS EN 15112).

7'12.4 Protection for safety

712.41 Protection against electric shock
7'12.410.3 General requirements

PV equipment on the DC side shall be considered to be energized, even when the system is disconnected from the
AC side.

712.410.3.6 The prolective measures of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and eafih-free local
equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used on the DC side.

712.411 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

712.41'l,3.2,1 .1 On the AC side, the PV supply cable shall be connected to the supply side of the overcurrent
protective device for automatic disconnection ofcircuits supplying cuffelt-using equipment.

712.411.3.2.1.2 Where an electrical installation includes a PV power supply system without at least simple
separation between the AC side and the DC side, an RCD installed to provide either fault protection by automatic
discouection ofsupply or additional protection in accordance with Regulation 415.1.1, lor the PV supply cable,
shall be Type B according to BS EN 62423.

Where the PV convertor is, by construction. not able to feed DC fault currents into the elect cal installation, an
RCD of Type B according to BS EN 62423 is not required.

7'12.412 Protective measure: Double or reinforced insulation

Protection by the use ofClass ll or equivalent insulation shall preferably be adopted on the DC side.
712.414 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

712.414.1 General
712.414.1.1 For SELV and PELV systerns. Uoc STC replaces U0 and shall not exceed 120 V DC.

712.433 Protection against overload on the DC side

712.433.1 Overload protection may be ornitted to PV string and PV anay cables when the continuous cuffent-
canying capacity ofthe cable is eqLral to or greater than 1.25 times lsc STC at any location.

7'12.433.2 Overload protectiol rnay be omitted to the PV rnain cable if the continuous cunent-carrying
capacity is equal to or gleater dran 1.25 ti,nes Isc STC ofthe PV generator

288
NOTE: Therequiremer1tsolRegulatiom7l2.,l33.land712.433.2areonl)rele\antlorprotectionofthccables.sr::: :
manut'acturer's instructions for prctection of PV modules.

712.434 Protection against fault current

712.434.'l The PV supply cable on the AC side shall be protected against fault currer'rt b) an l-a\ ii!-:: i-:
protective device jnstalled at the connection to the AC mains.

712.444 Protection againstelectromagneticdisturbances

712.444.4.4 To urinirnize voltages induced by lightning, the area of all wiring loops shall be as smal1 asprr:sibie.

712.5 Selection and erection of equipment

712.51 Common rules
712.511 Compliance with standards
712.511.1 PV rnodules shall conply u,ith the requirements of tl're relevant eqLllrment standard. e.s.
3S EN 61215 tbr crystalline PV modulcs. PV modules ofCiass II construction or with equivalent insulation are
::conrmended if Un. src ofthe PV strings exceeds 120 V DC.

. re PV aray junction box, PV generator .junctioll box and switchgear assenrblies shall be in coupliance with
3S EN 6i439-1.

712.512 Operational conditions and external influences

712-512.1.1 Electrical equipment on the DC side shall be suitable for direct voltage and direct current.

-\ nrodules rnay be connected in series up to the maximum allowed operating voltage ofthe PV rrodules (Uoc src
ilre PV strings) and the PV convelk)r., r'vhichever is lower. Specifications fbr this equipment shall be obtailed
r.'m the equipl'nent rnanufacturer.

: :locking diodes are used, their levcrsc voltage shall be rated for 2 x Uoc sTC of the PV string. The blocking
- ,des shall be connectcd in scrics with thc PV strings.
-'12.512.2.'l As spccificd by thc rnanufacturer. the PV modules shall be installed in such a way that there is
,:3.luate heat dissipation undcr conditions of maximum solar mdiation lor the si1e.

-12.5'13 Accessibility
-12,513.1 Thc sclection and er-ectiol'r of equipment shall facilitate safe l'naintenance and shall not adversely
':;t provisions rnade by the manulacturer ol'the PV equipment to enable maintenance or service work to be
- - rccl out safeJy.
-12.52 Selection and erection of wiring systems
-12.522 Selection and erection of wiring systems in relation to external influences
-'2.522-8.1 PV string cables, PV arra), cables and PV DC main cables shall be selected ard erected so as to
- :rrize the sk ofearlh faults and short-circuits.
\CTE: This lna), be achieved. fol example, by reinforcing theprotection ofthe wiring against extemal irfluences by the use
of single-core sheathed cables complying with BS EN 50618.
-'2.522.8.3 Wirirg systens shall withstand the expected extemal influences such as wind. ice formatiot,
- -::.rature and solar radiation.

-'2,53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

-'2.537 lsolation and switching
-' 2.537 .2 Devices for isolation
-'2.537.2.1.'l To allow maintenalce of the PV convertor, rreans of isolating the PV convefior from the DC
. ..nd thc AC sidc shall be provided.
\lTE: Futher reqLrilenrents rvith regard to thc isoiation ofa PV i11stallation operatinc i para11e1 u,ith the public sLrppN
systen are eiven in Regulalion 551 .7.6.
 712.537.2.2.'l ln the selection and erection ofdevices for isolation and switching to be installed between the
PV installation and the public supply, the public supply shall be considered the source and the PV installation
shal1 be considered the load.

7'12.537 .2.2.5 A srvitch-disconnector shall be provided on the DC side of the PV convertor.

7'12.537.2.2.5.1 Alljunction boxes (PV generator and PV array boxes) shall carry a warning label indicating that
parts inside the boxes may still be live after isolation fiom the PV converlor.

712,54 Earthing arrangements and protective conductors

Where protective bonding conductors are installed, they shall be parallel to and in as close contact as possible with
DC cables and AC cables and accessories.

;90
--I

Fig712.1 - PV installation - General schematic - One array

I 9-
-g 6i
o

?-
EE
gq ,a
a*
.9
rg
9,E E
.9- L!
.9F
3(]
:E
dL
1? .\! ,3
er
qts
I EI
6,u.: >t
1
.4
B ..i "L
I

:- !
'6 e
E
E
,3
9E

,E

E
-
,+

=
E
;: p5

rflz_Jt " ""? Lz_r

p -.-+X-J L++-

,e

-q
 Fig 712.2 - PV installation . Example with two or more arrays

i'- - - _'- - r
I

I
I

:->
'E
i3 €

r'=

-'!---------- E
I

!q: ! |r- -|
.q
s

- -t- - - -

.:
\.- -;
3B-6!
o-PL
I

I
I
I I
I
I I
I
I
I !
q
I I
!
I
6 I
I I

,+ I I

I
,a
I ! I

I
5 I
I I

.q

292
-
SECTION 714
OUTDOOR LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
714.1 Scope
This section applies to outdoor lighting installations comprising one or more lutninaires. a wiring system and
accessories, and to highway power supplics and street fumiture.

The following ale included in outdoor lighting installations:

(i) Lighting installations such as those for roads, parks, car parks, gardens, places open to the public, sporting
areas. illumination of monurrents and floodlighting
(ii) Other lighting affangements in places such as telephone kiosks, bus shelters, advertising panels and town
plans
( iii) Road signs.

Thc following are excluded:

(iv) Temporary festoon lighting
(v) Luminaires fixed to the outside of a building and supplied directly from the intemal wiring of that building
(vi) Road tramc signal systems.
714.4 Protection for safety
714.41 Protection against electric shock
714.4'10.3 General requirements
714.4'10.g.6 The protective measures of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and earth-free local
equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

7'14.411 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

714.411.20'l Where the protective neasure automatic disconnection ofsupply is used. all live pafis ofelectrical
cquipment shall be protected by insulation or by bauiers or enclosrues providing basic protection. A door in street
t'urniture, used for access to electrical equipment, shall not be used as a barier or an enclosure.

7'14.411.202 A lraximuur disconnectiorl time of 5 s shall apply to all circuits feeding flxed equipment used in
highway power supplies for compliance with Regulation 41 I 3.2.3 (TN system) or 4l1.3.2.4 (TT system)

714.411.203 Where an earlh connection to a distdbuto/s PME network has been provided for a street electrical
fixtul.e, tlte earthing and bonding conductor of a street elect cal flxture shall have a minimum copper equivatent
cr.oss-sectional area of 6 nrmz for supply neutral conductors with copper equivalent cross-sectional areas up to
l0 mm:. For larger sized supply neuhal conducton the main bonding shall comply with Table 54.8.

714.411.2.201 Provisionsforbasic protection

For every accessible erclosure livc parts shall only be accessible with a key or a tool, unless the enclosule is in a

location where only skilled or instructcd person(s) have access.

A door giving access to electrical eqBipment and located less than 2.50 m above ground level shall be locked with
a key oi shall require the use of a tool for access. In addition, basic protectior shall be ptovided when the door is
open either by the use of equipment having at least a degree of protection IPXXB or IP2X by construction or by
installation. or by installing a banier or an enclosure giving the same degree ofprotection.

For a lullinaire at a height of less than 2.80 m above ground level, access to the light sou|ce shall only be possible
after removing a barrier or an enclosure requiring the use of a tool.

714.411,3.1 Protective earthing and protective equipotential bonding

7 1 4,4'l'1.3.1.2 Protective equipotential bonding

A metallic stmcture (such grid etc.). which is ir the proximity ofbut is not part olthe outdoor lighting
as a fence.
illsta]lation need l]ot be connected to the main eafihing terminal.

71 4.4'l'1.3.3 Additional protection

Lighting in places such as telephone kiosks. bus shelters, advertising panels and tou n plans shall be provided with
additional plotection by ar RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation II5'1 I

- 2gB
 7'14.5 Selection and erection of equipment
714.51 Common rules
714.512 Operational conditions and external influences
714.512.2 External influences
7'14.512.2,1 The following classes are generally recommended:
(i) Ambient temperature: AA2 and AA4 (from -40 "C to +40 'C)
(ii) Climatic conditions:AB2 andAB4 (relative humidity between 5 % and 100 %)'
I

a deglee ofplotection of at
714.512.2.105 Electrical equipment shall have, by constluction oI by installation,
least IP33. I

714.514.12 Notices

714,514.12.201 The requirements for notices for:

(i) periodic inspection and testing (Regulation 514 12 1) and
(ii) the testing ofRCDs (Regulation 514.12.2)
and testing procedure
need not be applied where the installation is subject to a plogrammed inspection
durable label stating the
714.514.12.202 On every temporary supply unit there shall be an extemally mounted
maximum sustained cunent to be supplied from that unit'

714.537 lsolation and switching

714.537.2 Devices for isolation

714.537.2.1 General

714.537.2.1.1 Every circuit shall be capable of being isolated individually from each of the
live supply
conductors, except as detailed in Regulati,on 461.2.
pe$ons
7'14.537.2.1.201 Where it is intended that isolation and switching is carried out only by instructed
precautions can be taken to prevent any equipment fiom being
and subject to suitable provisions being made so that
of switching the supply on load and the means
inadvertently or uninte,tionally energiied, for TN sysiems, the means
olisolation is permitted to be provided by a suitably rated fuse carrier
power
714.537 .2.1.202 Where the distributor's cut-out is used as the means of isolation of a highway
supply the approval olthe distributor shall be obtained'

r"'-'\
f; uramnv B
rO)

I .ata
I
I

I
 SECTION 715

EXTRA.LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

715.1 Scope
This section applies to extraJow voltage Iighting installations supplied from a source with a maximum mted voltage
of50 VAC or 120 V DC.
715.4 Protection for safety
7'15.41 Protection against electric shock
7'l 5.411.7 .20'l Fu nctional extra-low volta ge (FELV)
FELV shall not be used.

715.414 Protective measure: Extra'low voltage provided by SELV or PELV

An ertra-low voltage luminaire without provision for the connection of a protective conductor shall be installed
only as pat of a SEiV system. Where bare conductors are used, the nominal voltage shall not exceed 25 V AC or
60 V DC according to Regulation 414.4.5.

A safety isolating transformer for an extra-low voltage lighting installation shall comply with BS EN 61558-2-6 and
shall meet at least one of the requirements of Regulation 71 5 422.106.
NOTE I : For an explanation of symbols used see Table 5 5.3.

parallel operation of fansformers in the secondary circuit is allowed only ifthey are also paralleled in the primary
circuit and the transformers have identical electrical characteristics.

An electronic convertor for an extm-low voltage lighting installation shall comply rvith BS EN 61347 -2-2. Annex 7

for incandescent lamps ol BS EN 61347-2-13, Annex I for LEDs.

NOTE 2: For an explanation ofsymbols used see Table 55 3.

:!11)
Parallel operation ofconvefiors to BS EN 61347-2-2 or BS EN 61347-2-13 is not permitted'

llitrtlS
715.42 Protection against thermal effects
715.422.106 Fire risk of transformers
f_i:1t1S
Transfomers shall be either:
po\ref (i) protected on the primary side by a protective device complying with the requirements of Regulation
7 15.422.10',7 .2, or
(ii) short-circuit proof (both inherently and non-inherently).
NOTE: For an expJanation ofsymbols used see Table 55 3.

715,422.107Fne risk due to short-circuit

715.422.'107.1 where both the live circuit conductors are uninsulated, either:
(i) they shall be provided with a protective device complying with the requirem€nts ofRegulation 715.422.10'7.2'
OI
(ii) they shall be supplied from a transformer or converlor, the power ofwhich does not exceed 200 VA, or
(iii) the system shall comply with BS EN 60598-2-23.

715.422.107 .2 A device providing protection against the risk offire shall meet all the following requirements:
(i) The device shall continuously monitor the power demand olthe luminaires
(ii) The device shall autofratically disconnect the supply circuit within 0.3 s in the case of a short-cjrcuit or
failure which causes a power increase of more than 60 W
(iii) The device shall provide automatic disconnection while the supply circuit is operating with reduced
power
(for example, by gating control or a regulating process or a lamp failure) ifthere is a failure which causes a

power increase ofmorc than 60 W

The device shall provide automatic disconnection upon connection ofthe supply circuit ifthere is
a failure
(iv)
which causes a power increase olmore than 60 W
(v) The device shall be fail-safe.
NOTE: Account needs to be taken of staning culTents.

3-
 715.43 Protectionagainstovercurrent
715.430.104 Self-resetting overcurrent proteclive devices

The use of self-resetting overcuflent protective devices is pennitted only for transformers up to 50 VA.

715.5 Selection and erection of equipment

715.52 Wiring systems
715.521 Types of wiring system

715.521.1 The following wiring systems shall be used:

(i) lnsulated conducto$ in conduit systens according to BS EN 61386 series or cable trunking/ducting systems
according to BS Fl\ 50085 .eries
(ii) Rigid cables
(iii) Flexible cables
(iv) Systems for ELV lighting according toBS EN 60598-2-23
(v) Track systems according to BS EN 60570
(vi) Bare conductors (see Regulation 715.521.106).

Where parts ofthe ELV lighting installation are accessible, the requirements olSection 423 also apply.

Metallic stluctural parts of buildings, for example pjpe systems, or parts of fumiture, shall not be used as lir,e
conductors.

7 1 5.521,1 06 Bare conductors

Ifthe nominal voltage does not exceed 25 V AC or 60 V DC, bare conducton may be used provided that the extra-
low voltage lighting installation complies with all the following requirements:
(i) The lighting installation shall be designed, and installed or enclosed in such a way that the risk ofa shofi-
circuit is reduced to a minimum
(ii) The conductors used shall have a cross-sectional area according to Regulation 715.524
(iii) The conductors shall not be placed dilectly on combustible material.

For suspended bare conductors, at least one conductor and its terminals shall be insulated for that part ofthe cfucuit
between the transformer and the shoft-circuit protective device to prevelt a shofi-circuit.

7 1 5.521.1 07 Suspended systems

Suspension devices for extralow voltage luminaires, including supporting conductors, shal1 be capable of carrying
five times the mass ofthe luminaires (including their lamps) intended to be suppofied, but not less than 5 kg.

Tenninations and connections ol conductors shall be made by screw terminals or screwless clamping devices
complying with BS EN 60998-2-1 or BS EN 60998-2-2.

Safety ofthe installation due to expected stresses in the conductors shall be in accordance with Regulation 559.5.2.

Insulation piercing connectors and termination wires which rely on counterweights hung over suspended conducton
to maintain the elect cal connection shall not be used.

The suspended system shall be fixed to walls or ceilings by irsulated distance cleats and shall be continuously
accessible tkoughout the route.

715.524 Cross-sectional area of conductors

715.524,20'l The minimum cross-sectional area of the ELV conductors for connection to the output teminals or
terminations of tmnsfomers/convefiors sha1l be chosen according to the load current.

In the case of systems with luminaires suspended fi'om the conductors, the minimum cross-sectional area of the
ELV conductors for connection to the output teminals or terminations of transformerc/convertors shall be 4 mm:.
for mechanical reasons.

296
715.525 Voltage drop in consumers, installations
In ELV lighting installatiotts. if the r,oltage drop betu'een the transtbmrir ano ih: t'unhest lumina edoesnotexceed
5 % ofthe nominal voltage ofthe ELV installation it shall be deemed ro corrph * irh secrion 525.

7'15.53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

715.530.3 General and common requirements

715.530.3,104 Protective devices and SELV sources
Plotective devices may be located above false ceilings, w}rich are removable or easily accessible, provided that
infomation is given about the presence and location of such devices.
SELV sources, pl-otective devices or similar equipment mounted above false ceilings or in a sinilar place shall be
pennanently connected.

SELV sources and their protective devices shall be installed so as to:

(i)avoid mechanical stress on theil. electrical connections, and
(ii) be adequately supporled. and
(iii) avoid overheating ofthe equipnrent due to themal insulation.

715.537 Isolation and switching

715'537.1.1 Wher€ transformers are operated in parallel, the primary circuits shall be permanently connected to
a con.rmon isolaring device.
 SECTION 717
MOBILE OR TRANSPORTABLE UNITS
7'17.1 Scope
The particular requirements ofthis section apply to AC and DC installations for mobile or transpofiable units.

For the purposes ofthis section, the term 'unit' is intended to mean a vehicle and,/or mobile or transportable structue
in which all or part ofan electfical installation is contained.

IJnits are either:

(i) ofthe mobile type, e.g. vehicles (self-propelled or towed), or
(ii) ofthe transportable type, e.g. containers or cabins.

Examples of the units include technical and facilities vehicles for the entertainment industry, medical or health
screening services, welfare units, promotion & demonstration, firefighting, workshops, offices, transportable
catedng units etc.

The requirements are not applicable to:

(iii) generating sets
(iv) marinas and pleasure craft
(v) mobile machinery in accordance with BS EN 60204- 1

(vi) caravans to Section 721

(vii) traction equipment ofelectric vehicles
(viii) electrical equipment lequired by a vehicle to allow it to be driven safely or used on the highway.

Additional requirements shall be applied where necessary for units including showers, or for medical locations, etc.
NOTE: Guidance on temporary electrical systems for events, entertainment and relaied purposcs is given in BS 7909.

717.132 Design
The design of the installation within a mobile or transportable unit shall take into account the charactefistics of
the variety of supplies to which the unit might be connected and any limitation shall be clearly stated ir the user
documentation. See also Regulation 717.514.

7'17.313 Supplies
One or more ofthe following methods shall be used to supply a unit:
(i) Connection to a low voltage generating set, located inside the unit, in accordance with Section 551 (see
Figure 717.I )
(ii) Connection to a low voltage electrical supply extemal to the unit, in which the protective measures are
effective (see Figure 717.3), the supply derived from either a fixed electrical installation or a generating set
in accordance with Section 551
(iii) Connection to a 1ow voltage electrical supply external to the unit, and where intemal protective measures are
provided by the use of simple separation, in accordance with Section 413 (see Figures '717 .4,7l7 .5,717.6
and 717.7 showing altemative forms offault protection within the unit).
NOTE 1: tn cases (i), (ii) and (iii), an earth electrode may be provided where supplies are used extemal to the vehicle (see
Regulation 717.41 1.4).
NOTE 2: tn the case ofFigure 717.4, an earth electode may be necessary for protective pur?oses (see Regulatio n717 .411 .6.2(1i)).
NOTE 3: Simple separation or electrical separation is approp ate, for example, where information techno)ogy equipment is
used in the urit or where a reduction of electromagnetic disturbances is necessary or if high protective conductor
culTents are to be expected (use of frequency converto6), and/or if the srLpply to the unit comes florn altemarile
supply systems (as is the case in disaster management).

The sources, means ofconnection or separation may be within the unit.

NOTE 4: Where there is a potential hazard due to moving the unit whilst connected to ar extemal installation, it is recommended
that the unit is equipped $,ith a11 electrical interlock, waming, alarm or other appropriate means to reduce the sk.

NOTE 5: For the purpose ofthis sectior, power inverters or frequency convertors supplied frorn the unit's electical system or
an auxiliary systen dri\en by the unit's prime mover are also considered as generating sets.

298
Power inverters or frequency conveftors shall include electrical separation where both the DC supply and the AC
neutral point are earthed.

717.4 Protection for safety

717,41 Protection against electric shock
717.410.3 General requirements
717 .410.3.5 The protective measures of obstacles and placing out of reach (Section 417) sha1l not be used.

717.410.3.6 The protective measure of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) shall not be used.

The protective measure ofearth-free local equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) is not recommended.

717.411 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

717.411.1 General
For a supply in accordance with 717.3 l3(ii), automatic disconnectior of supply shall be provided by means of a
residual current protective device, with a rated residual operating cunent not exceeding 30 mA.

7 17.411.3.1.2 Protective equipotential bonding

Accessible conductive parts ofthe unit, such as the conductive structure ofthe unit, shall be connected through the
main protective bonding conductors to the main earthing terminal within the unit. The main protective bonding
conductors shall be finely stranded.
NOTE: Cable types H05V-K and H07V-K to BS EN 50525-2-31 are considered appropriate.

717.41'1.4 TN system
{ PME earthing facility shall not be used as the means ofearthing for an installation falling within the scope ofthis
section except where:
(i) the installation is continuously under the supervision of a skilled or instructed person(s), competent in such
work, and
(ii) the suitability and effectiveness ofthe means of earthing has been conflrmed before the connection is made.

717 .411.6 lT system

717.411.6,2 An IT system can be provided by:
(i) an isolating translomer or a low voltage genemtirlg set, with an insulation monitoring device or an
insulation fault location system, both without automatic disconnection olthe supply in case ofthe first fault
and without a need of connection to an earthing installation (see Figure 717.7); the second fault shall be
automatically disconnected by overcurrent protective devices according to Regulation 41 1.6.5, or
a transformer providing simple separation, e.g. ir accordance with BS EN 61558-1, with an RCD and
an earth electrode installed to provide automatic discolnection in the case of failure in the transformer
providing the si[rple separation (see Figvre7l7.4)
717.413 Protectivemeasure: Electricalseparation

: :ctrical separation can be provided by the use of a transformer providing simple separation, e.g. meeting the
:.::irements of BS EN 61558- 1, in accordance with Regulation 4t 3.1.3. It shall be used only where:
, i ) an insulation monitoring device is installed to provide automatic disconnection of supply in the case of a
flrst lault between live pafts and the conductive sixcture ofthe unit (see Figure 717.5), or
an RCD and an eafih electrode ale installed to provide automatic disconnection in the case of lailure in
the tmnsfomer providing the electrical separation (see Figr.rre 717.4). Each socket-outlet intended to
supply cu[ent-using equipmeut outside the unit shall be protected indilidually by an RCD having the
characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1.
-' 7.415 Additional protection

''1 415.1 Additional protection by an RCD having the characteristics specifi ed inRegulation 415.1 . 1 , shall be
-' :ied for every socket-outlet intended to supply current-using equiprnent oursjde the uni1, with the exception of
-..i:-outlets which are supplied fiom circuits with protection b),:

299
 (i) SEL\. or
(ii r PELV. or
liii) electrical separation, with an insulation monitoring device; see Regul atron 717 .413(i).

7'17,5 Selection and erection of equipment

717.51 Commonrequirements
717.514 ldentificationandnotices

A pemunent notice of such duable material as to be likely to remain easily legible throughout the life of the
installation. shall be fixed to the unit in a prominent position, preferably adjacent to each supply idet connector The
notice should state in clear and unambiguous tems the foliowing:
(i) The types ol supply which may be connected to the unit and any limitations on use imposed by the desigrer
(ii) The voltage rating ofthe unit
(iii) The number of supplies, phases and their configuration
(iv) The on-board earthing arangement
(v) The maximum power recluirement ofthe unit.

717.52 Wiring systems

717.52.1 Where the supply to the mobile or transportable unit is provided by means of a plug and socket-
outlet, flexible cables in accordance with H07RN-F (BS EN 50525-2-21), or cabtes of equivalent design, having a
minimum cross-sectional area of 2.5 mm: copper, shall be used for connecting the unit to the supply. The flexible
cable shall enter the unit by an insulating inlet in such a way as to minimize the possibility ofany insulation darnage
or fault which might energize the exposed-conductive,parts ofthe unit.

7'17.52.2 The wiring system shall be installed using one or more ofthe following:
(i) Unsheathed flexible cable with thermoplastic or themosetting insulation to BS EN 50525-2-31, -3-3 | or l
BS EN 50525-3-41 installed ir conduit in accordance with the appropdate part olBS EN 61386 series or in
trunking or ducting in accordance with the appropriate part ofBS EN 50085 series
(ii) Sheathed flexible cable with themoplastic or thermosetting insulation to BS EN 50525-2-1 l, -2-21, -3-ll
or -3-21, ifprecautionary measures are taken such that no mechanical damage is likely to occur due to any
sharp-edged parls or abrasion.

All cables shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements ofBS EN 60332-l-2.

Conduits shall comply with BS EN 61386-21, BS EN 61386-22 or BS EN 61386-23.

717.528,3 Proximity to non-electrical services

717.528.3,4 No electrical equipment, including wiring systems, except ELv equipment for gas supply control,
shall be installed in any gas cylinder storage compafiment.

ELV cables and elect cal equipment may only be installed within the LPG cylinder compartment ifthe installation
seNes the operation ofthe gas cylinder (e.g. indication ofempty gas cylinder) or is for use within the compartmert.
Such electrical installations and components shall be colstructed and installed so that they are not a potential source
ofignition.
Where cables have to run through such a compartment, they shall be protected against mechanical damage by
installation within a conduit system complying with the appropriate part of the BS EN 61386 series or within a
ducting system complying with the appropriate part ofthe BS EN 50085 series.

Where installed, this conduit or ducting system shall be able to withstand an impact equivalent to AG3 without
visible physical darnage.

717.55 Other equipment

717.55,1 Whele the meals ofconnection is a plug and socket-outlet, mounted, accessed or used outside the
unit and used to connect the unit to the supply, or supply other equipment, it shall comply wittr the appropriate parts
ofBS EN 60309-2 series and shall meet with the following requirements:
(i) Plugs shall have an enclosure of insulating material
(ii) Connecting devices, plugs and socket-outlets, with an enclosure as necessary shall afford a degree ol

300
 prctectiol ofat least IP44 when itr use or connected and protection ofat least IP55 when not connected. e.s.
when the unit is in transit
(\\) The \n\er \N\rh'n-ra\C contacts) sha\l be s\tuated on the unit.
717.55.2 Not u.sed
717.55.3 Generating sets able to pr-ocluce voltages other than SELV or PELV, rrounted in a mobile unit. shall
automatically be switched off in case of an accident to the unit (e.g. event causing the release of airbags). If t)ris
requirement is difficult to implement an ernergency switch, easily accessible, shall be installed.

717.551.6 Additional requirements for installations where the generating set provides a supply
as a switched alternative to the normal supply to the installation

Live conductors fronl differelt powel supplies shall not be interconnected.

Protective conductors. including functional earthing conducto$, from differ.ent earthing systems shall only be
interconnected where suitable precautions have been taken into account; see also Regulation 542.1.3.3.

Plugs and sockct-outlets shall comply with the approp ate pafis ofBS EN 60309 series, except those intended lor
special equipment, such as broadcasting equipment where combined connectors for infonnation signals and power
suppiy are used.

717.551.7.2 Additional requirements for installations where the generating set may operate in
parallel with other sources including systems for distribution of electiiciiy to the
public

A generating set rised as an additional source of supply in parallel with another source shall only be connected o[
the supply side ofall the protective devices for the final circuitsofthe installation.
Plotective conductors, including fllnctional earthing conductors, from different eafihing systems shall only be
intercomccted where suitable precautions have been taken into account; see also Reculalion 542. L3.3.

Fig 717 .1 - An example of a connection to a low voltage generating set located inside the unit,
with or without an earth electrode

L1

L2

L3

PE

6
i ltIIl:A.

-/E
 Fig 717.2 - ReseNed for future use

Fig 717.3 - An example of a connection to a low voltage electrical supply external to the unit
in which the protective measures are effective, the supply derived from either a fixed electrical
installation or a generating set, with or without an earth electrode at the unit

".:"..i,

,n I

",,"1

NOTE: Where a PME ealthirg facility is used, see Regulation 717.411.4.

Fig 717 .4 - An example of a connection to a low voltage electrical supply external to the unit,
derived from either a fixed electrical installation or a generating set with any type of earthing
arrangement using simple separation and an internal lT system, with an earth electrode

:rIslffi
r
-/-€r\

140
fl11-!------i=| L1

L2

L3

342
 Fig 717.5 - An example of a connection to a low voltage electrical supply external to the
unit,
-uiing and
simpte sep"r"tion and an internal lT system with an insulation monitoring device
autimatic disconnection of supply on the occurrence of a first fault, with earth electrode

6l
z-<3-")

14

Fig 717.6 - An example of a connection to a low voltage electrical supply external

to the unit,
iitn any type of earthing arrangement using an internal TN system with simple separation

e unit'
rrthing
'ode
 Fig717,7 - An example of a connection to a low voltage electrical supply external to the unit,
with any type of earthing arrangement using simple separation with an internal lT system with
automatic disconnection on the occurrence of a second fault

t-,a<r
,-r-<{l
3-ilfl

304
 Key to Figures 717.1 to7
1a Connectior ofthe unit to an extemal supply through an on board translbrmel with simple separation
1b Connection ofthe unit to a supply in which the protective measures are effective
lc Connection to an LV genemtor set in accordance with Section 551
2 Class II or equivalelt etrclosure up to the first protective der ice providilg automatic disconnection of
sLrpply
4 Conductive extemal staircase, if any
5 Connection ofthe neutlal poi[t (or, ifnot available, a line conductor) to the conductive sfucture ofthe unit
6 Socket-outlets for use exclusively witlrin the utrit
6a Socket-outlets for use exclusively withi[ the unit for reasons of coltinuity of supply in the event of 1]rsr
1'ault
6b Socket-outlets for general use ifexplicitly required (operation ofthe RCD in the event offlrst farLlt carnor
be excluded)
7 Protective equipotential bonding in accordance with Regul at\ot'r 717 .411.3.1.2
7a to an antenna pole, ifany
7b to the conductive external stairs, ifany, in contact with the ground
7c to a functional earth electrode, ifrequired
7d to the eonductire structule olthe unir
7e to an earth electrode for plotective purposes, ifrequired
8 Protective devices, ifrequired, for overcurrent and/or for protection by disconnection of supply in case of
a second fault
9 Protective devices for overcurent and lor automatic disconnection ofsupply in case ofa second fault
t0 Socket-outlets for cunent-using equipment for use outside the unit
l3 Current-using equipment for use exclusively within the unit
l4 Ovelcurent protective device, if requiled
l5 Overcul-rer)t pr-otective device
l6a RCD having the characteristics specified in Regulation 4l5.l.l lor protectior by autornatic discomection
ofsupply for circuits of equipntel.rt for use outside the unit
I 6b RC D tbr protection by automatic disconnection of supply for circuits of equipnent for use iruide the unit:
see Regulations 41 1 .4.4 and 41 I .5.3. Wherc an interual IT systen'r is installed. see also Regulation 4l 1.6.4
l8 Main eaflhing lernlinal or bar
l1 Transtbrrler u,ith at least sinple sepamtion, e.g. 230 V current-usiug equiprrlerrt
l5a lnsulation rronitoting device providing disconnection on the first fault, see Figure 717.5
l5b Insulation tnonitoring device or insulation fault location system including monitoring ofthe N conductor
ifdistlibuted (disconnectior ooly in the event ofsecond fault), see Figule 717.7

6iFRro'\
"e
9-
"t"*od

=-**
 SECTION 721
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN
CARAVANS AND MOTOR CARAVANS

NOTE: ln order nol rc mix reqnirements oll different subjects, such as those for electrical installations ofcaravan parks with
thosc fbr el!'ct lcal instaiiatio0s inside caravans. refer to:
- Scction 703. which corccrns electrical installations in caravan parks, camping pa*s and similar locations and
- Section 7l1. \lhich concems clcctrical installations in caravans and motor caravans.
721.',| Scope
The parlicular requirenents of this section apply to the electdcal installations of caravans and motor caravans at
nourinal voltages not exceeding 230/400 V AC or 48 V DC.

They do apply to those electrical circuits and equipment intended for the use ofthe caravan lor habitation purposes.

They do lot apply to those electrical circuits and equipment for automotive purposes, nor to installations covered
by BS EN 1648-i and BS EN 1648-2.

They do not apply to the electrical installatiors of mobile homes, residential park homes or transportable units.
NOTE l: Fol rnobile hoLlcs and residential park homes the general requirements apply.
NOTE 2: Fol transportable units see Section 717.

Fol the purposes of this section, caravans and motor caravans are referred to as 'carayans'.

Tltc particular requircn'rents of some other sections of Part 7 may also apply to such installations in caravans, e.g.
Section 701.

721.31 Purposes, supplies and structure

721.313 Supplies
721.3't3.1 .2 l-he noninal supply system voltage shail be chosen from BS EN 60038.

The nominal AC supply voltage of the installation of the caravan shall not exceed 230 V single-phase or 400 V
thrce-pl'rase.

The nominal DC supply voltage ofthe installation ofthe caravan shall not exceed 48 V
721 .4 Protection for safety
721.4',1 Protection against electric shock

721.410.3 General requirements

721.410.3.5 Thc protective measures ofobstacles and placing out ofreach (Section 417) shall not be used.

721.410.3.6 Ti're protcctive measures ol non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and earth-free local
equipotential bonding (Rcgulation 418.2) shall not be used.

7z',t.41',1 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

721.411.3.1 Protective earthing and protective equipotential bonding

721.4'11.3.1.2 Protective equipotential bonding

Structural mctallic parts which are accessible from within the caravan shall be connected through main protective
bonding condLrctors to thc ntain earthing tenninal within the carayan.

306
 721.413 Protectivemeasure: Electricalseparation
The plotective measure ofelectrical separation shall not be used, except for a shaver socket-outlet.

721.414 Protective measure: Extra-low voltage provided by SELV and PELV

Any pafi ofa carava[ installation opemting at extra-low voltage shall comply with the requirements ofSection -l l-1

For extralow voltage DC power sources, a maximum of 48 V is allowed. In exceptional cases, when AC extra-lo\
voltage is required, the voltage (rms) is not allowed to exceed 48 V
NOTE: The requirements of Section 721 ale also app]icable to extra low-voltage DC installations. See Annex A72l for
recommendations that may be applied in addition.

: .tt 721.415.1 Additional protection: RCDs

Where protection by automatic discounection of supply is used, a residual current device with a rated residual
::S.
operating cuffent not exceedirg 30 mA, complying with BS EN 60947-2 (Annex B), BS EN 61008-1,
3:id gS fN OtOOq-t or BS EN 62423 breaking all live conductors, shall be provided having the characteristics specified
in 415.1.1.

Each supply inlet shall be directly connected to its associated RCD.

NOTE: This irnplies that there may not be any taps orjunctions in this connection.

721.43 Protectionagainstovercurrent

72'1.43.1 Finalcircuits
Each final circuit shall be protected by an overcurreflt protective device which disconnects all live conductors ol
that circuit.

721.5 Selection and erection of equipment

721.5'l Gommon rules
-:L_10 V 721.5'10 lntroduction
721.5'10.3 General
Where there is more than one electrically independent installation, each independent installation shall be supplied by
a separate connecting device and shall be segregated in accordance with the relevant requirements ofthe Regulations

72'1.514 ldentificationandnotices
721.514,1 General
lnstrLlctions fo[ use shall be provided with the caravan so that the caravan can be used safely.

t: local The instructions sha)l comprise:

(i) a descriptiol ofthe installation
(ii) a dcscliption ofthe furction ofthe RCD(S) and the use ofthe test button(s)
(iii) a descliption ofthe function ofthe main isolating switch
(iv) the tcxt ofthe instmctions ofFigure 721.
If it is necessary to take precautiots during user maintenance, appropdate details shall be given.

307
 Fig 72't - lnstructions for electricity supply
INSTRUCTIONS FOR ELECTRICITY SUPPLY

TO CONNECT

l. Ber'ore cornectinglhe cardlrn irsollation to thc mains supply. check rharl

(a) th. suppll n\dilable rt thc cara\m pitch supply point is sritable for the caravan electrical installation and
appliances. and
(bl lhc \ollagc. ticqucnc) aid curenr ratings are $itable. aM
,.i rl,J,.'Ir,,,.,i {'' I'F.n'hrOll pui'ron.
Also. prior to us.. cx!mine th. supply flexiblc cablc to cnsurc rhere is no visible damage or delerioration.

2. Open th. co\ cr to d1c aftliance irlel pro\ided al lhc caravan ppty poinl. ifaDy. and inscrl the connector of
the ppl! flerit,lc coblc.
l. Raisc rhc coler ofnre clecxicil) outlc( pro!ided on rhe pitch supply poiDt and insert the plug oflhe supply cable.

THE CARAVAN SUPPLY FLEXIBLE CABLE MUST BE FULLY UNCOILED TO AVOID DAMAGE
BY OVERHEATING

4. Ssirch on.I lle carxvaD mai! isolalirg $rltclr.

5 Che.k Ihe op.r.tion of rcsidual cutrent dc\.iccs (RtDs) lirlcd in lhe caravan by presstug lhc tesi bultonG)

IN CASE OF DOUBT OR, IF AFTER CARRYING OUT THE ABOVE PROCEDURE THE SUPPLY
DOES NOT BECOI\TE AVAILABLE. OR IF THE SUPPLY FAILS, CONSULT THE CARAVAN PARK
OPERATOR OR THE OPERATOR'S AGENT ORA OUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN.

TO DISCONNECT
6. Srvitcfi offar tfic com\an main isolaling s$irch. uiplug dle cable ii6l from thc caravar pitch srpply point
and then ftonlllc c.raran in]ctconnector

PERIODIC INSPECTION

Prcferably nor less than oncc clcrf thrcc yeas and anDuaLly ifthc caravar is used frequenlLy, thc camvan electrical
insrallation and pflI {ble shouklbc nrpcclcd and rested and repon on theircondition obtained as prescribed nr
^
BS 7671 Rcquircnlcnrs tbr Elecni.rl IrstdlldlioDs publishcd by the Inslitution of Engineering and Teclnolos/ & BSL

721.521 Types of wiring system

721.521.2 The wiring systems shall be installed using one or more ofthe following:
(i) Insulated single-core cables. with flexible class 5 corductots, in non-metallic conduit
(ii) Insulated single-core cablcs. with stranded class 2 conducto$ (minimum of 7 strands), in non-metallic
conduit
(iii) Sheathed flexible cables.

All cables shall, as a minimutr, meet the requircments ofBS EN 60332-1-2.

Non-metallic conduits shall cornply with BS EN 61386-21.

Cable management systems shall comply with BS EN 61386.

72'1.522 Selection and erection of wiring systems in relation to external influences

721.522.7 Vibration (AH)

721.522.7 .1 As the u,iring will be subjected to vibration, all wiring shall be protected against mechanical damage
either by location or by edranced mechanical plotection. Wiring passing through metalwork shall be protected by
means of suitable bushes or gromnrcts. securely fixed in position. Precautions shall be taken to avoid mechanical
damage due to sharp edges or abrasive parts.

721.522.8 Other mechanical stresses (AJ)

72'1.522.8.'1.3 All cables. urless enclosed in rigid conduit, and all flexible conduit shall be suppofied at intervals
not exceeding 0.4 m for vertical runs and 0.25 m for horizontal runs.

308
 72'1.524 Cross-sectional areas of conductors

721-524.1 The closs-sectional area of every conductor shall be not less than 1.5 mn:.

72'l .528 Proximity of wiring systems to other services

721.528.1 Proximity to electrical services

Cables of low voltage systerns shall be ruIl sepamtely from the cables of extra-low voltage systems, in such a way,
so f'ar as is reasonably practicable, that there is no risk ofphysical contact between the two wiring systems.

721.528.2 Proximityto non-electrical services

721.528.2.1 No electrical equipmert, including wiring systems, except ELV equipment for gas supply control,
shall be installed in any gas cylinder storage compartment.

ELV cables and electrical equipment may only be installed within the LPC cylinder compartment if the installation
seryes the operation ofthe gas cylinder (e.g. indication of empty gas cylinder) or is for use within the compafiment.
Such electrical installations and componenis shall be constructed and installed so that they are not a potential source
of iglition.

where cables have to ru[ t]rrough such a compartment, they shall pass thlough the compaltment at a height of not
Iess than 500 mq above the base ofthe cylinders and shall be protected against mechanical damage by installaiion
withir a colduit system complying with the appropriate paft ofthe BS EN 61386 selies or within a ducting systenl
complying with the appropr iate paft of the BS EN 50085 series.

Where installed, this colduit or ductirg system shall be able to withstand ar impact equivalent to AG3 $'ithout
visible physical datnage.

721.53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

721.537 lsolation and switching

72'1.537.2 Devices for lsolation

721.537.2.1.1 Each installatiorl shall be providecl with a main disconnector which shall discorurect all live
conductors and which shall be suitably placed for ready operation within the caravan. I[ an installation consisting
retaliic isolating switch may be the overcurrent protective device fullilling the requirements for
of only one 1inal circuit, the
isolation.

721.537 .2.1.1.1 A nolice of such durable llaterial as to be likely to remain easily legible throughout the life ofthe
installation, shall be permanently fixed near the main isolati[g switch inside the caravan. bearing the text shown in
Figure 721 in the approp ate language(s) in indelible and easily legible characters.
721.543 Protectiveconductors

721.543.2 Types of protective conductor

721 .543.2.1 Circuit protective concluctors shall be incolporated in a multicore cable or in a conduit togethet
with
the live conductoIs.

I damage 721,544.1 Protective bonding conductors I

tected bY
Bchanical 721,544.1.1 The tenninations of protective bon<ling conductors connecting the corductive structurc ofthe unit
shall be accessible and protected agairst coffosio11.

721.55 Other equipment

, :-.teLl als 721.55.1 ln lets

72'1.55.1.1 Any AC electrical inlet on the caravan shall be an appliance inlet complying with BS EN 60309-1.
ll interchangeability is required the inlet shall comply with BS EN 60309-2

srrs
t
 721.55.1.2 The inict shall be installed:
(i) not lnore thal l.ll nr above ground level, and
(ii) in a readily acccssiblc position. and
(iii) suchthatit5hall haie a minimtun degree ofprotection oflP44 with or without a connector engaged, and
(i\) suchthalitshall not proflude significantly beyond the body olthe caravan.

721.55,2 Accessories
721.55.2.1 Not u.sed

721 .55.2.2 E\ cry sock{-outlet supplied at extra-low voltage shall have its voltage visibly marked.

721.55.2.3 Where an accessoly is located in a position in which it is exposed to the effects of moisture it shall
be constructed or cllclos.d so as to provide a degree ofprotection not less than 1P44.

721.55.2.4 Each luurinaire in a caravan shall prelerably be flxed directly to the skucture or lining ofthe caravan.
Where a pendant lulri]raire is installed in a caravan, provision shall be made for securing the luminaire to prevent
damage when tlre caravan is in rlotion.

Accessories fbr thc suspcnsion of pendant luminaires shall be suitable for the mass suspended and the forces
associated with vehicle movelnent.

721.55.2.5 A luminaire intended for dual voltage operation shall con.rply with the appropriate standard.

721.55-2.6 The rneans of connection to the caravan pitch socket-outlet shall be supplied with the caravan and
shall corrprise the ibllou ilg (see Figur-e 708):
(i) A plug conplying witlr BS EN 60309-2. and
(ii) a flexiblc cable ofcontinuous length 25 rn (+2 m), haying a harmonized code designation of H05RN-F or
H07RN-F (BS EN 50525-2-21) or equivalent, incolporating a protective conductor, with conducton to be
iclentificd accolding to Tabll: 5l and ofa cross-sectional area in accordance with Table 721. and
(iii) a comector-. ifany. cornpatible with the appliance inlet inslalled under Regulation 721.55.1.

TABLE 721 - Minimum cross-sectional areas of flexible cables for caravan connection

Ratcd cLlrrcnt Minimum cross-sectional area

mml
l6 2.5
25 4
32 6
63 16

r00

llcrn'c5oJ
6+-
f; urenmv
E

310
 ANNEX A721 (lnformative)
GUIDANCE FOR EXTRA.LOW VOLTAGE DC INSTALLATIONS

In genctal. the requirements ofSection 721 are also applicable to an extra-low voltage DC installation. The following
requirenents should be applied in addition.

4721.31 Purposes, supplies and structure

4721.313 Supplies
4721.313,4 Sources of supply

The supply should be obtained from one or more ofthe following sources:
(i) The electrical irstallation ofthe towing vehicle
(ii) An auxiliary battery mounted in the caravar
(iii) A low voltage DC supply via a transformerhectifier unit complying with BS EN 60335-l and I

BS EN 61558-2-6
(iv) A DC genemtor that is driven by any form of energy I

{v) Solar photoyoltaic (PV) power supply systems.

4721.5'14 ldentificationand notices

a:::;
4721.514.1 General
11e lollowing infbnnation should be provided in the instructions for use and should be in the oficial language/s of
tte country in which the camvan is to be sold:
(i) A wauring worded as follows: 'Any replacement of an auxiliary battery should be of the same type and
specification as that origilally fitted'
(iD Instructions on the maintenance and recharging of an auxiliary battery where it is fitted. Where a battery
charger is provided, instructions on its safe use should be included
(iii) Instructions on selecting and installing an auxiliary battery in a compafiment, ifthe caravar installation is
designed for the installation ofan auxiliary battery
Details of the waming notice specified in A721.55.3.7 and its impofiance for safety
ln order to provide for sale operation of the electrical installation, a simplified diagram of the wiring of
the ELV and LV ilstallation. with details ofthe cable colours and/or markins and the nominai values ofthe
overcurent protectiye devices
(vi) Type ofappliances that can be used and from what source ofsupply
(vii) lnstructions for the corect operation and maintenance of fitted appliances, as supplied by the appliance
manufacturer
iriii) Awarning worded as follows: 'Always disconnect the elect cal connector between the towing vehicle and
the calavan before connecting an LV supply to the caravan and before charging the caravan battery by any
other mears.'

4721.515 Prevention of mutual detrimental influence

4721.515,2 The ELV instatlation should be so installed that the protective measures of the LV installation for
rasic protection or for fault protectiol are not impaired.
Ii should be verified that the protective conductors ofthe LV installation are not loaded by the operating curents
.,lrhe ELV installarion.

A.72'1.52'l Types of wiring system

472'1.521.2 Cables should be ofstranded construction and should comply with B S 6004, BS 721 I or an appropriate
rart ofBS EN 50525.

472'1.523 Current-carrying capacities of cables

472'1.523,'l The cross-sectional areas ofthe fixed wiring should be such that the pennissible voltage drop is not
erceeded.

*-
 472'1.525 Voltage drop in consumers' installations
Under normal service conditions the voltage at the teminals ofany fixed current-using equipment should be greater
than the lower Iirnit conesponding to the British or Harmonized Standard relevant to the equipment. Where the
equipmert is not the subject of a Blitish or Hannonized Standard, the voltage at the terminals should be such as
not to impair the safc functioning ofthat equiprrent. In the absence ofprecise data a voltage drop of 0.8 V from the
powef supply to the equiprlent may be allowed.

The voltage drop betrveen the plug of the corulector to the towing vehicle or LV battery charger and the auxiliary
battery should not exceed 0.3 V

The charging current Ic (A) to detelnine the voltage drop is established by the following formula:

, c,0.1
rr--J-
where:
I. is the charying current in A
c is the battery capacity in Ah
t is the charging period in h.
NOTE: Some batiery rnanufactur-crs now rate batterics in Watt/hours (Wh).

4721.528 Proximity of wiring systems to other services

A7 21.528.2 Proxim ity to non -electrica I services
A.721.528.2.5 Cable runs and LPG installations

Cables including those used for automotive purposes should not be nrn through a compartment or housing intended
for liquefied petroleum gas storage cylinders. Where cables have to run through such a comparlment or housing,
they should be run at a height of not less than 500 mm above the base ofthe cylinders, and such cables should be
protected against mechanjcal damage by installation within a continuous gas tight conduit or duct passing through
the compartment.

Where installed, this conduit or duct should be able to withstand an impact equivalent to AG3 without yisible
physical dan.rage.

ELV cables and electrical equipment are only to be installed within the LPG cylinder compartment or housing if
the installation serves thc operation of the gas cylinders (e.g. indication of empty gas cylinders) or is for use within
the compartrnent or housing. Such clcctlical installations and components should be constructed and installed so
that they are not a source of ignition and are jn accordance with the releyant standards for any hazardous area
classifi cation of the conpartnlcnt or housitlg.

4721,53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring

472'1.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent
A7 2'1.533.1 General requirements

4721.533.1.5 The overcurrent protective device for the power supply from the towing vehicle should be fitted as
near as possible to the auxiliary battery, but in no case more than I 000 mm away. The overcurrent protective device
for the auxiliaty battery should be fitted at the end of the battery cable and before the fixed installation. The ELV
output of the transfonner/ rectifier unit and of the DC generator should be provided with an overcu[ent protective
device installed as near as possible to the urit or generatol and, in all cases, upstream ofthe distribution circuits.

472'|,.533.1.6 Overcunent protective devices should be either fuse links according to lSO8820 or suitable
cilcuit-breakers complying with BS EN60898-2.

4721 .533.1.7 Fuses should be protected to prevent accidental danlage.

4721.533.1.8 Overcu 'ent protective devices should not be fitted in a fuel storage compaftment or fuel storage
housing intended for the stolage of liquelied petroleum gas (LPG) cylinders or in the compartment for housing an
auxiliary battery.

312
 A721.55 Otherequipment
4721.55.1 lnlets
The inlet, when the plug is discomected, should be protected against the ingress of water, foreign bodies and
accidental damage.

A721 .55.2 Accessories

A721.55.2.6 The means olconnection to the towing vehicle should be supplied with the caravan and comprise the
following:
(i) Aplug complying with BS AUl49a and BS AU177a or BS EN 1SO11446. and
(ii) a flexible cable with the number ofcores with the minimum cross-sectional area and the allocation according
to Table A72l and a length not exceeding 5 m, and
(iii) a connector complying with BS AU149a and BS AU l77a or BS EN ISOI1446.

TABLE A721 - Functional allocation and cross-sectional areas of cores for caravan connectors

Core Function Contact numbers Minimum-

No. BS EN ISO BS AU 149a cross-sectional
1't446 area mm2

I Lefi-hand directjon indicator light I I t.5

2 Real lbg light 2 2 1.5

3 Courmorr retutrl fbr core Nos. 1.2 and 4 to 8 3* 3* 2.5

4 Right-hand directioD indicator light 4 4 I,5

5 Right-hand rear positior ard marker liglrts, 5 5 1.5
and rear registration-plate illumination device
6 Stop lights 6 6 1.5

I Left-hand rear position and marker lights, and '7

1 t.5
rear registmtioll-plate illulrination device
BS AU 177a
8 Reversirg 1igh1 8 1 1.5

9 Conti[uous power supply 9 4 2.5

i0 Power srpply coDtrolled by ignition switch 10 6 2.5

lt Return for core No. l0 nx 2.5

12 Coding for coupled trailer' t2 2

I] Return fbr core No. 9 13x 3* 2.5

t1 No allocation 5 1.5
* These rcturn circuits should not be connected electricallv in the trailer

A721.55.3 Auxiliary batteries

A721.55.3.'l Type of battery

::::d l. -{n auxiliary battery should be ofthe rechargeable type.

der ice
NOTE: Non-rechargeable baticrics arc not auxiliary batteries. Thcy Dray be used in caravans, provided that thcy are used in
EL\'
circuits separatcd froln other sou!ces ofelectrical sripply.

A721.55.3.2 Capacity

suitable
\n auxiliarl battely should have a minimum capacity of40 Ah at 20 h disclralge mte.
NOTE: lt is recon'unended to use a battery designed to be discharged over long pe ods at a relatively low culTent.

:::arASi A72'1.55.3.3 Terminals

'- .t:ug atl
.\uxiliary battery terminals should be clearly and durably marked '+' and '-'. Connectiols to auxiliary
battery tenninals should be securely clamped or bolted to provide continuous colrtact and should be jnsulated unless
d1e auxiliary battely is provided with an insulating device.
 A721.55.3.4 Location

An auxiiiary battery shor"rld be placed in a separate compafiment, with easy access for maintenance or removal, and
sccurcd to prcvcnt rnovcmcnt ofthc battery, e.g. when the caravan is in motion.

A721.55.3.5 Auxiliary battery compartment

A tlay should be installed under an auxiliary battery ifthe electrolyte of this battery is liquid.

The tray should be sullicient to hold 20 % ofthe volume ofthe electrolyte.

The intcrior of an auxiliary battery compaftment should be ventilated and protected against the corrosive effect of
acid-laden gases. either by:
(i) irlstalling a scalcd auxiliarl battery that incorporates an extemal ventilating kit that is taken to the extedor
ofthe caravan. or
(ii) installing an auxiliary battery in an enclosed battery compafiment that is protected intemally against
corosion and is ventilated to the exterior of the caravan by means of a suitable hrbe with a minimum
inside dianreter of l0 mm at the top of the auxiliary battery conpartment, in accordance with the battery
lraflulirctuler's iustructions or as supplied by the manufacturer ofthe auxiliary battery or
( iii) ventilating the con'lpartrreflt at low level and high level to the exterior ofthe caravan and constructil]g the
itrterior ol the conlpaftment, including the sides of the ve[tilator openings, ol acid-resistant matedal or
providing it with an anticorrosive finish. If the compartment opens into the int€rior of the caravan, the lid
should provide an air seal. The n.fnin.rum fi'ee area ofventilation should be not less than 80 mm: at low level
and llot less t]ran 80 mmr at high level.

If an auxiliary battery is not provided, then the position and instructions for the installation of the battery and
conrpartmerlt. i11 accordance with (i), (ii) or (iii). should be included in the instructions for use and a notice should be
lixed in or near thc proposcd location stating: 'For instructions on auxiliary battery installation, see the instructions
for use'.

Thc lequircnents conccmillg tlle protection against corrosion and ventilation are not applicable if batteries with
bound electrolytes are used.

Where the maDlllilcturer rrakes no provision for the installation of an auxiliary battery the following statement
should bc made in thc instnrctions for use: 'This caravan has not becn designr.d to accommodale an auxiliary battery.
Do tlot lit otre.'

A721.55.3.6 Auxiliary battery cables

Cables fr onr an ar.Lxiliary battery should be protected by additional sheathing or taping from the battery teminal up
to ihe overcu ent plotective device.

A721.55.3.7 Warning notice

A r.vanring notice should be llxcd in a prominent position near the auxiliary battery or displayed on the lid ol the
auxiliary batterl cornpaftrnert. This waming should be in the official language(s) ofthe country in which the caravan
is to be sold and should state: 'Switch offall appliances and lamps before disconnecting the auxiliary battery.'

The auriliary battery con'rpaftrrent should be additionally marked 'Smoking prohibited' in accordance with
BS 5499 aud ir the larguage(s) ofthe country in which the caravan is to be sold.

A721.55.4 Other sources of supply

A7 21.55.4.1 Generators and transformer/rectifier unit

If a suppll, is obtained tiom a generator or frorn a low voltage supply via a transformer/rectifier unit, the extralow
voltage at tire outpnt termirals of the supply unit should be maintained between l1 V minimum and 14 V maximurr
with applied loads varying tiom 0.5 A minirnum up to the maximum rcted load of the supply unit. Over the same
load range. altemating voltage ripple should not exceed 1.2 V peak-to-peak.
A721.55.4.2 Regenerative sources

Regenerative enel€y sources. such as wind energy, solar energy etc., should be installed onty for charging batteries.

Regenerative cner€y sources should only be operated with a device which prevents overcharging ofthe battery(ies).

314
 SECTION 722

ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARG!NG INSTALLATIONS

NOTE: Definitions relating to Section 722 can be found in Part 2 under electric vehicle (EV), {7221 .

722-1 Scope
The particular requirements ofthis section apply to circuits intended to supply electric vehicles for charging purposes.

The rcquirements olthis section do not apply to elect c vehicle charging points that:
(i) enploy inductive charging
(ii) charge mobility scooters and similal vehicles of l0 A and less.
NOTE: Requirements 1br protection for safcty uhen feeding back electricity from an electric vehicle into a private or public
supply network arc undel considemtion.

722.3 Assessment of general characteristics

722"31 Purposes, supplies and structure
722.3'11 Maximum demand and diversity

A dedicated final circuit shall be provided for the connection to electric vehicles. It shall be considered that in
normal use each single charging point is used at its mted current. Where the final circuit supplies more than one
charging point no diversity shall bc allowed.

Diversity may be allowed for a dcdicated distribution circuit supplying multiple electric vehicle charging points if
load control is available.
722.312 Conductor arrangement and system earthing

7 22.3'12.2.'l TN systems
For a TN system, the final circuit supplyirg a charging point for electric vehicles shall not include a PEN corductor

722.4 Protection for safety

722.41 Protection against electric shock
722.410.3 General requirements

722.410,3,5 The protective measurcs ofobstaclcs and placing out ofreach (Section 417) shall not be used.

722,4110,3,6 The protective measures of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and eatlh-free local
equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

722.4'l'1.4 TN system

722.411.4.1 A PME earthing l'acility shall rot be used as the means of earthing for the protective conductor
contact of a charging point located outdoors or that might reasonably be expected to be used to charge a yehicle
Iocated outdoors unless onc of thc lbllowing rnethods is used:

(i) The charging point fom]s part ola three-phase irstallation that also supplies loads other than for electric
vehicle charging and. because of the characteristics ofthe load of the installation, the maximum voltage
between the main earthing tenninal ofthe installation and Earth in the event ofan open-circuit lault in the
PEN conductor ofthe low voltage nefwoft supplying the installation does not exceed 70 V ITns.
NOTE 1: Amrex 722. iterr A722.2 gives sorre infbrmation lelating to (i).
NOTE 2: See also Regulatioo 641.5 Nhen undenaking alterations and additions.
(ii) The main earrhing terminal ofthe installation is connected to an installation eatlh electrode by a protective
conductor complying with Regulation 544.1. i . The resistance of the earth elecftode to Earth shall be such
that the maximum voltage between the main eafthing terminal ofthe installation and Ea h in the event of
an open-circuit fault in the PEN conductor of the low voltage network supplying the installation does not
exceed 70 V nrs.
NOTE: Anner 7ll. iterr A722.3 gives guidance on detennining the maximum resistance required for the earth
(]lectrode in ( ii).

316
 (iii) Protection against elccttic shock is providcd by a der,ice rvhich disconnects rhe charging point lrom the live
corlductor-s of the supply and fi'om protective eartl] ill accordancc with Regulation 543.3.3.10l(ii) within
5 s in the event ofthe voltage between the circuit protective conductor and Earth exceeding 70 V rms. The
device shall not operate ifthe voltage exceeds 70 V rms for less than 4 s. The tlevice shall provide isolation.
Closing or rcsetting ofthe device shall be by manual means only. Equivalent functionality could be included
withil tlre chalging eqriiprnelt.
''r'
::ert bruied in thc ground, a protective conductor connecting to an earth electrode tbt the purposes of(ii) or (iii)
-. i::r e a cross-sectional area [ot less thal] that stated in Table 5,+.1.
'22.413 Protectivemeasure:Electricalseparation
"n413 1.2 This protective tneasulc shall be limited to the supply of one electric vehicle supplied frorr.r
'- -:i'i hcd source. The circLrit shall be supplied through a fixed isolating tralslbru complying with
:' rl5-;8-l-4.
"
Selection and erection of equipment
Common rules
-, t q1,1
Compliance with standards
'22 511.1 Wherc an EV charying poilt is built into a low voltage switchgear or controlgear assembly the
-- .-.:l1ler1ts ofthe relcvalt part ofBS EN 61439 ser.ies shall apply.
-22.511.101 EV charging equipment shall comply with
the appropriate parts of the Bs EN 61gsi
s e ries.

'22.512 Operational conditions and external influences

722.512.2 Externalinfluences

722.512.2.201 Presence of water (AD)

t -.alor. Whcrc installed outdoors, thc cquipment shall be selcclcd with a degree ofprotection ofat least IPX4 in accor.dancc
[N 60529 in order to protect against water splashes (AD4).
\\'ith BS

722.512.2.202 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)

Where installed outdoors. the equipment shall be selected with a degree ofprotection ofat least lP4X in accordalce
\\,ith BS EN 60529 to protect against the ingress of very small objects (AE3).

L
722.5't2.2.203 lmpact (AG)
e local Equipment instailed in public areas and car park sites shall be proteqted against mechanical damage (impact of
medium severity AG2). Protection ofthe equipment shall be afforded by one or morr ofthe following:
- the positiol or location shall be selected to avoid damage by atry reasonably foreseeable impact
- local or gereral mechanical protection shall be prcvided
: irtctor - equipment shall be i[stalled that couplies with a minimum degree ofprotection against external mechanical
. ihicle impact of1K07 in accordance with the requireuents ofBS EN 62262.

:."-ctric
722.531 Devices for fault protection by automatic disconnection of supply
i,llage
.
722.531.2 RCDs
-. i1'r the
722.531.2.101 Except for circuits using the protective measure ofelectrical separation, each charging point shall
be protected by its own RCD
ofat least Type A, having a mted residual operating cuffent not exceeding 30 nA.
Each charging point incorporating a socket-outlet or vehicle connector complying with the BS EN 62196 series.
::ecilve protective measures against DC fault cunent shall be taken, except where provided by the EV charging equipl'l'tent.
:; sucll The appropriate measures, for each connection point, shall be as follows:
:-. et'tt of - RCD Type B: or
::'is nol
- RCD Type A and appropriate equipnrent that provides disconnection of the sLrpply in case of DC fault
current above 6 rrA.
: :.i .'artil

F*-
i
 RCDs shall comply lith one ofthe following standards: BS EN 61008-1. BS EN 61009-1. BS E\ 60947-2 or
BS EN 62423,
NOTE: Rcquircments 1'ol lhe selection and erection of RCDs in the case ofsupplies using DC vehicle connectors according to
the BS EN 62196 sclics are under considcration.

722.531.2.1.1 RCDs shall disconnect all live conductors.

722.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent

722.533.10'l Each charging point shall be supplied individually by a final circuit protected by an overcunent
protective device coflplyillg rvith BS EN 60947-2, BS EN 60947-6-2 or BS EN 61009-1 or with the relevant parts
olthe BS EN 60898 series or the BS EN 60269 series.
NOTE: The electlic vehicLe charling equipment rnay have multiple charging points.
722.537 lsolation and switching

722.537.4 Emergency switching off

722.537.4-101 Where en'iergency switching offis required, such devices shall be capable ofbreaking the full load
cunent ofthc reler,ant parts ofthe installation and disconnect all live conductorc, including the neutral conductor

722.55 Other equipment

722.55.'101 Socket-outlets and conneclors

722.55.10'1.0.201.1 Each AC chargitg point shall incolporate:

(i) onc sockct-outlet cornplying with B S i 363-2 marked 'EV' on its rear and, except where there is no possibility
of confusiolr. a labei shall be provided on the front face or adjacent to the socket-outlet or its enclosure
staling: 'suitable fbr electric vehicle charging'. or
(ji) ore socket-outlet or comector complying with BS EN 60309-2 which is interlocked and classified to clause
6. L5 of BS EN 60309- I to prevent the socket contacts being live when accessible, or
( iii) one socket-outlct or corrr'rector complying with BS EN 60309-2 which is part ofan interlocked self-contained
product complying with BS EN 603 09-4 and classified to clauses 6. 1 .l0l and 6.1. 102 to prevent the socket
contacts being lir'e uhen accessible, or
( iv) one Type i vehicle connector complying with BS EN 62196-2 for use with mode 3 charging only, or l
(v) one Type 2 sockct-outlet or vehicle connector complying with BS EN 62196-2 for use with mode 3 charging I
only. or
(vi) one Type 3 sockclolrtlet or vehicle connector complying with BS EN 62196-2 for use with mode 3 charging
only.
NOTE: Vthicle manuf'aclurers' instructions should bc followed when delerminjng the t)?e ofsocket outlet to be installed.

722.55.101.0.201.2 Each socket-outlet shall be installed in a distribution board in accordance with

Regulation 722.51 or in its appropdate enclosure (e.g. flush or surface mounted socket-outlet box) and mounted in
a fixed position.

Poftable socket-or.rtlets shall not be used but tethered vehicle connectors are allowed.

722.55.101 .3 One socket-outlet or vehicle connector shall supply only one electric vehicle.

722.55.101.4ln EV charging modes 3 and 4, an electrical or mechanical system shall be provided to prevent the
plugging/unplugging of the plug un)ess the socket-outlet or the vehicle connector has been switched off fron.r the
supply.

722.55.1 01 .5 The lowest paft of any socketoutlet shall be placed at a height of 0.5 to I .5 m from the ground.
NOTE: The rcquirements of the relevarlt National Building Regulations should be adhered to in respect of socket-outlet
heights.

722.55.101.6 Precautions on supply of the fixed installation by the EV

\:.
NOTE: ReqLrilements f'or precautions on supply ofthe fixed jnstallation by the Ev are under consideration.
\:.

318
 ANNEX A722 (lnformative)

GUIDANCE FOR TN SYSTEMS WHERE PME CONDITIONS APPLY

NOTE: A list ofdre symbols used in this Annex is given in item A722.4.

A.722.1 Neutral current of a three-phase installation

Where the power factors ofthe currents in all three phases are similar and triple harmonics can be neglected, it may
be assumed that the neutal cunent ofa three-phase installation is given by:

NOTE: The rnaxirrum nelrtml current (Im) occurs under conditions of maximum irnbalance, not necessarily maximum overall
demaod.

4722.2 Load balance

Where t ple harnronics can be neglected, condition (i) of Regulatron 722.411.4.l may be assumed to apply where
the following condition is met.

I ^II^
-rL -U
Ilrl;rl;' /u

4722.3 Earth electrode resistance

For the purposes ofcondition (ii) of Regdal;1on722.411.4.1, the sum olthe resistances ofthe eafih electrode and the
protective conductor connecting it to the main eafihing teminal must meet the following condition, as applicable.

For a single phase installation:

70 t 1.,
D - ----------------
'' \., ' 1,,,,, (Ur 7())

For a thrce-phase installation:

10
:: l'r{ R.q 1
"u I,,,- fi x (ILl + ILz + ILr)

::::lg
NOTE: The above tJrree-phase forrnula tbr RA ev is valid only where I," > ua I (ILl + IL2 + IL3) . Where this is not the case.
this indicates that condition (i) of Regulation'722.411.4.1 applies and that an earth electode is not required for the
purposes of condition (ii) of tlrat regulation.
ltir
-::i" iu A.722.4 Symbols used in this Annex
I,,," is the rms maximum demand curent ola single-phase installation (in amperes), including
that ofthe electric vehicle charging load and any other loads, determined in accordance
with Regulation 3l 1.1.
I,,, is the 1.1r1s maximum neutral current ofa three-phase installation (in amperes), including
that ofthe electric vehicle charging load and any other loads, determined in accordance
,::.: the with Regulation 311.1.
: ::' ihe
Il, are the rms values ofcurent (in amperes) in lines 1,2 and 3, respectively, that were
Ir r and Ir r used
when detemining the value of 1,,,

RA", is the sum ofthe resistances ofthe earth electrode and the prolective colductor connecting
!::-- 'lili: it to the main earthing teflninal of the installation (in oh[]s), in iter.i, A722.3.
u{r is the nominal AC rms line voltage to Earth.

NOTE 1: The above curents and voltage are magnltudes onlyi they are not phasors.
NOTE 2: In detennining I,,,. Ir L. Irr and 11;, allowance must be nrade for single-phase vehicles being charged from three-phase
charging points.
 SEGTION 729

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE GANGWAYS

729.1 Scope
the operation or
The particular requirements of this section apply
to basic protection and other aspects relating to
gangways, whire access is restricted to skilled
areas including
maintenance of switchgear and controlgear within
or instructed Person(s).

Assessment of general characteristics

For restricted access areas the following apply:
(i) They shall be clearty and visibly marked by appropriate signs
(ii) They shall not provide access to unauthorised persons
(iii)Doorsprovidedlbrclosedlestrictedaccessareasshallalloweasyevacuationbyopeningwithouttheuseof
'"-' t"v, i"or - any other device not being pafi of the opening mechanism'
"
729.513 Accessibility
gangways
72g.513.2 Requirements for operating and maintenance
for work' opemtional access' emergency access'
The width of gangways and access ateas shall be adequate
emergency evacuation and for tlansport ofequipment'

Gaugwaysshallpermitatleastag0degreeopeningofequipmentdoorsorhingedpanels(seealsoAn-rrex4729).
 729.513.2.1 Restricted access areas where basic protection is provided by barriers or
enclosures

\\here basic protection is proi ided bv baniers or enclosures in accordance with Chapter 41. the following minimLurr
dintelsions apply (sce Figure 719.1 ):

(i) Gangway width including between: 700 mn.r

balriers or enclosures and switch handles or circuit-breakers in the most

onerous position, and

baniers or enclosules or switch handles or circuiGbreakers in the most

onerous position and the wall
(ii) Cangway width between barriers or enclosures or othel barriers or 700 urn.r
enclosures and the wall
(iii) Hcight ofgangway to ban ier or enclosure above floor 2000 um
(iv ) Live parts placed out olreach. see Regulation 417.3 2500 nnr

I
NOTE: Where additional workspace is needed e.g. for special switchgear and controlgear assemblies. larger dimensions nay
be required.

Fig 729,'l - Gangways in installations with protection by barriers or enclosures

Barrier or
enclosure

' Barriers or

-t -r-- 1
t/
enclosures

\ ---1
I I I
I
I
I (\ I
I
I I I
I lCircuilbreaker
I
I rl lin the position I
I (iv) Reg 417.3

I l";soiation" I
(iil) 2000 mml It r
I
I
I
I
I
I

(ii) 700 mrn (ii) 700 mm (i) 700 mm (i) 700 mm

I{OTE: The above dlntensions apply atier bao-iers and enclosurcs have been fixed and with circuit-breakers and switch handles
in the most onerous position, including "isolation".

321
-.*r*_-
729.513.2.2 Restricted access areas where the protective measure of obstacles is applied

Wherc the protecti!e l'neasulc of obstacles is used, the requiren.rents of Section 417, Obstacles and placing out of
reach, apply. The meastLre is tbt applicatio[ ir] those pa s ofinstallations controlled or supervisedby skilledpersons.

The following miniruurr ditnetrsious apply (see Figute 729.2):

(D Cangrvay rvidth including between: 700 InnI

obstacles and switch handles or cilcuit-breaken in the nost onerous

position, and

obstacles or switch handles or circuit-breakers in the most onerous position

and the wall.
(ii ) Cangway width betweel obstacles ol other obstacles and the wall 700 trm
(iii) Height ofgangway to obstacles above floot' 2000 mm
(iv ) Live parts placcd out ofrcach, see Regulation 417.3 2500 mrn

Fig 729.2 - Gangways in installations with protection by obstacles

Obstac es parts

I
I
I
I
-1- -'i -
I
i- 'l/\f
t /
II
\r\t
---1
t
t
i
I

I I (iv)Reg 417
I I

I I

(il) 2000 mml

I

I
I
I
I
I

NOTE: The above clinensions apply after all obstacles have been fixed and with circuit-breakers afld switch hand]es in
most onerous position, including'isolation".
 729.513.2.3 Access to gangways

Gangways lolger tltan l0 rn shall be accessible from both ends.

NOTEl:ThisrnaybeaccomplishedbyplacementoftheequipmentamininrurnofT00mrnfromallwalls(seeFi;::.---::
by providing an access door, ifneeded. on the r.all against which fte equipment is positioned.

Closed rest cted access ateas with a length exceeding 20 rn shall be accessible by doors from both enci.
NOTE 2: For closed restrictcd access areas wilh a length cxceeding 6 m, acccssibility from both ends is recommer;.:

Fig 729.3 - Examples of positioning of doors in closed restricted access areas

> 700 mm

Gangway length does not exceed

10 m within the closed
restricted access area

Gangway length exceeds

10 m within the closed
restricted access area,
whose length
does not exceed 20 m

Gangway length exceeds

10 m within the closed
restricted access area,
whose length
exceeds 20 m

Doors giving access to gaugways shall open outwards (see Figure 729.3) and they shall have the following minimum
Jimens ions:
(i) width 700 mm
(ii) height 2000 nrl.r.
 ANNEX A729
(Normative)
ADDIT]ONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLOSED RESTRICTED
ACCESS AREAS

A729.1 Evacuation
For reason of easy evacuation the doors of any equipment inside the location shall close in the direction of the
evacuation route (see Figure 4729.1). Gangways shall pemit at least a 90 degree opening of equipment doors or
hinged panels (see Ftgure A729.2).

Fig 4729.1- Minimum passing width in case of evacuation - Case 1

/////t//t///////////////////////
Evacuation route direction
-------->

I Circuir-brcakcr in the isolaled posilion

2 Handles (e.g. for contrcls or eqlripment)

In the case of doors which can be fixed in the open position and circuit-breakers which are withdmwn fully for
maintenance (completely extracted) a ninimunr distance of500 nrrn shall be complied with between the door edge
or circuit-breaker/ equipment edge and the opposite limitation ofthe gangway (see Figure A729.2).

Fig 4729.2 - Minimum passing width in case of evacuation - Case 2

.////////////////////t////t///f//ffi
,^
mrnrmum passrnq I

width 5OO mm' II Evacuation route di.ection

_________>

----f,-

Circuitbreakcr ir thc positiou _colnpletely extracted"

Fixing device of a door
The ninimunl u.idth gaDgway of500 nnn shall be taken into
consideratioD bctwccn the wall and the circuilbreaker in the
position "complelely exlracted'and equipmcDt door iD thc
90 degree position.

324
 SEGTION 730

ONSHORE UNITS OF ELECTRICAL SHORE CONNECTIONS FOR

INLAND NAVIGATION VESSELS
730.1 Scope
na\ igation
The par-ticuiar requirements ofthis sectio11 apply to onshole installations dedicated to the supply of inland
.,"rril, fo, .on r"tcial and administrative putposes, berthed in ports and berhs
NOTE 1: For supplies to pleasure craft or houseboats in marinas and sirnilar locatiolrs. see sectio[ 709.

This section applies to installations with nominal supply vo)tages not exceeding 230 v AC single-phase and '100 V
AC three-phase.
NOTE 2: Additional r.eclLLiremenrs that do not relate to electrical installatioi are given in BS EN 15369-l aud BS EN 15869-2'

The particular requirements do not apply to the onboard installations of inla1ld navigation vessels
including their
connection cables. Additional requircn.rerlts on the onboard installation ale giver in BS EN
15869-3'

730.31 Purposes, supplies and structure

730.312 Conductor arrangement and system earthing

730.313 Supplies
730.313.1.101 The nominal supply voltage shall be 400 V three-phase AC' 50 Hz.
and an overvicu diagran of
NOTE: An alrangement diagraD ofan elect cal shore connectio[ is shown in BS EN I5869-1.
an electrical power-supply statiol with two connector units is shown in BS EN 15869-2'

730.313.1.102 Galvanic separation

the hull olthe
Where a fixed onshore isolating transfomer is used to prevent galvanic currents circulating betweel]
ressel and metallic parts on the shore sidc. equipment complying with BS EN 61558-2-4 shall be used.

'' lr to the eadh tenrinal

The protective conductor (PE) ofthe supply to the isolating transfonner shall not be connected
in the socket-outlet supplying the inland navigation vessel.

730.4 Protection for safety

730.41 Protection against electric shock
730.410.3.5 The protective measurcs ofobstacles and placing out ofreach (section 417) shall not be used.
730.410.3.6 Tire protective measures of norl-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and earth-frce local
cquipotential bording (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

730.411.4 TN system
The Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity Regulations (ESQCR) prohibit the connectiorl of a PME
earthing
iacility to any metalwork in a boat.
puryoses, such as to the
This does not preclude the use ofa PME earthing facility as the means ofealthing for othel
installat ions of perntanenl buildirlgc.
NOTE: Thc requirenlenis ofother sections ofPart 7 may also apply.

730.5 Selection and erection of equipment

730.512 Operational conditions and external influences
730.512.2 External influences

730.512.2.101 Degree of protection

Equipmert shall be selected with a minimum degree ofprotection oflP44'
 730.521 Types of wiring system

730.521.10'l Wiring systems of berths, ports and floating landing stages

730.521.101.1 Berths and ports

The following wi|ing systems and cables are suitable for distributiorl circuits in berths and ports;
(i) uuderground cables
(ii) overhead cables
(iii) cables with copper conductors and thelmoplastic or elastomeric insulation and installed within an appropt iate
cable Inanagement system taking into account external inflLrences such as movement, ilnpact, corlosion and
ambie[t tenlPerature
(iv) mineral-iusulated cables with thennoplastic protective covedng
(v) am]oured cabtes with a thetmoplastic or elastomeric covering.

Other cables and rlaterials that are at least as suitable as those listed above may be used.

730.521.10'1.2 Floating landing stages

Widng systelns and cables shall be suitable tbr the movement of floating landing stages. The lbllowing wiring
systems and cables are suitable for distribution circuits on floating landilg stages:
(i) cables with copper conductors and theunoplastic or elastomeric insulation and installed within an appropriate
cable management system taking into account extemal influences such as movement, ilrpact, conosion and
ambient tempel.ature
(ii) ar[rouled cables witl] a thermoplastic or elastomeric cove ng.

Other cables and materials that are at least as suitable as those listed in (i) or (ii) may be used

730.521.'101.3 Cables and cable management systems

730.521.101 .3.1 General

Cables antl cable management systcnrs :llall be selected and installcd so that Ileciranical damage clue to tidal and
olher movement ol floating slructltres is prevented.

Cable management systcns shall be illstalled to allorv thc dlainage of water/condcltsate. e.g. by sloping au'ay and/
ol drainagc holcs.

730.521.101 .3.2 Underground cables

Undergrounrl distribution circuits shall, unless provided with additional mechanical protection, be buried at a
sutEcient depth to avoid being damaged, e.g. by movement ofvehicles.
NOTE 'l: A depth of 0.6 m is geDerally considercd as a rninimum dcpth to f'ul1il this requirement.
NOTE 2: For corldlrit systems buried underground, see BS EN 61386-24.

730.521.101.3.3 Overhead cables

Ovelhead cables shall not be used over waterways.

poles and other supports for overhead wiring shall be located or protected so that they are unlikely to be damaged
by any tbr-eseeable movement ofvehicles.
I
Overhead cables shall be at a height above ground ofnot less than 6 m in all areas subjected to movement ofvehicles
and 3.5 m in all other areas.

Ary ovcrhead conductols shall bc insulated.

730.53 Protection, isolation, switching, control and monitoring
730.531 Devices for protection against electric shock by automatic disconnection of supply

730.531.3 Residual current protective devices (RCDS)

Sockeloutlets wirlr a rated curent not exceeding 63 A shallbe individually protected by an RCD providing additional
protection in accordance $ irh Regulation 415.I having a rated residual opelating cut rent llot excecding 30 mA.

326
--
 Thc RCD selected shall discouuect all li\ e conductols, i e' line and neutrel'

Sockeloutletswitharaledcuflerltexceeding63Ashallbeindividualllptotec::;:'::-]-'::' -:'::''--
opelatingu rerllnotcrceedinuluorllA.ThcRtDsclecrc'l'hclldi'cotlne'lrll"'J::---'--'-:'-:-'
NOTE:ThepurloseoftheseRCDSisiopr-otecttheshoresupplyandtheflexible"hleli'::---':'-':-::i:r:r'
1br onboard cilcuits, which are oLttside the scope ofthis sectior'

730.533 Devices for protection against overcurrent

prolective device'
Socket-outlets shall be individLrally prolected by crl o!ercurrcnt

730.537 lsolation and switching

730.537,2 Devices for isolation

730,537,2,1 At least one means of isolation slrall be installed for each

distbution boald, ThiS derice shall
disconnect al1 live corductors.

730.55 Other equipment

730.55.1 Socket-outlets
730.55.1.1Socket-outletsslrallcorrrplywithBSEN6030g-1andBSEN60309-4andSocket-outletswitha
curaent ruting not exceeding 125 A sha1l comply u'ith BS EN 60309-2
EN 60309-1 and BS EN 60309-4 and
\vhere irlterchaDgeability is not required. socket-outlets shall cornply with BS
need not con.tply u'ith BS EN 60309-2.
to be supplied
730.55.1.2 Socket-outlets shall be located as close as practicable to the befih

730.55.1.3 No more than four sockct-outlets shall be grouped togethcr in any one enclosure

730.55.1.4 Each sockcroutlet shall supply only one vesscl'

Sockeroutlcts shall bc placed in an enclosurc iu accordance with BS EN

l51169-2
730.55.1.6
730.553,13Socket-outlctsshallbcplacedataheightofnotlessthanlmabovethehighestwaterlevel.Inthe
to 0 3 m above the highest water level
-:.e of floating pontoons or talkways oniy, this height may be rcduced
the ef1'ects of splashing'
. :.,r ided that a]rpropriate aclditional mcasures are laker to protcct against

s-pp,

f,--
l
 ANNEX A73O
(lnformative)
Examples of methods of obtaining supply

ln Figures A730.I to A730..1, fullctional switches are not shown.

Fig A730.1 - Direct connection to a single-phase mains supply

Overcurrent Shore Vessel

protective
device RCD

N o_'
PE

To metallic parts in contact with

water surrounding the vessel

There is a risk ofelectrolytic corrosion resulting frofir circulating galvanic currents in the protective conductor to
shore.

Fig A730.2 - Direct connection to a single-phase mains supply with an isolating transformer on
the vessel

Overcurrent Shore Vessel

protective
device RCD
r o-1- --fl-----<
Il
N*Hl-
PE o ,-<

To metallic parts in contact with

water surrounding the vessel

No connection shall be n.rade between the PE conductor of the vessel and the PE conductor of the shore supply
(see Regulation 730.313.1. 102). This is ro prevent galvaric cunents circulating between the hull ofthe vessel and
metallic parts on the shore side.
 Fig 4730.3 - Direct connection to a three-phase mains supply

Overcurrent Shore
protective
device RCD
L1 L1

L2 Flexible cable L2
five cores
L3 L3

N N

PE

To metallic parts in contact with

water surrounding the vessel

There is a risk olelectrolytic corosion resulting fiom circulating galvanic currents in the prctective conductor to
shore.

Fig A730.4 - Direct connection to a three-phase mains supply with an isolating transformer on
the vessel

Overcurrent S hore
' :!1 protective
device
RCD RCD
1,1
on
L2

L3

To metallic parts in contact with

water surrounding the vessel

No connection shall be made between the PE conductor of the vessel and the PE conductor of the shore supply
(see Regulation 730.313.1.102). This is to prevent galvanic currents circulatirg between the hull ofthe vessel and
metallic pafts on the shore side.
:: Jith

...rPl.v
... .itld
 SECTION 740
TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR STRUCTURES,

AMUSEMENT DEVICES AND BOOTHS AT FAIRGROUNDS,

AMUSEMENT PARKS AND CIRCUSES
740.1 Scope, object and fundamental principles
740.1.'l Scope
This section speciies the nrinimul1r elcctrical installation requirements to f'acilitate the safe design, installation
and operatiou of temporarily erected mobile or transportable electrical machines and stuctures which incorpomte
electrical equipmelt. The nachines and structures ale intended to be installed lepeatedly, without loss of safety,
temporalily, at l'airgrounds, al'[usement parks, circuses or similar places.

The object ofthis section is to define the clectrical installation requiLements for such structures and machines, being
either integml parts or constituting the total amusement device.

This section does not apply to the intenral electrical wiring ofmachines (see BS EN 60204-l).
NOTE 1: Guidance on temporary electical systems lbr entertainment and related pluposes is givcn in BS 7909.
NOTE 2: The permancnt electrical installation is excluded from the scope.

740.3 Assessment of general characteristics

740.3'l Purposes, supplies and structure
740.313 Supplies

740.313.1 .'1 Voltage

The non.rinal supply voltage of temporary elect cal installations in booths, stands and amusement devices shall not
exceed 230/400 V AC ot 440 V DC.

740.313.3 Supply from the public network

Irespective oftlte number of sources of supply, the line and neutral conductols tiom dift'erent sources shall not be
interconnected downstream ofthe origin ofthe temporary electrical installation. The instmctions ofthe opemtor for
the supply ofthe systen to the public shall be followed.

740.4 Protection for safety

740.41 Protection against electric shock
740.410.3 General requirements

Automatic disconncction of supply to the temporary clectrical installation shall be provided at the origin of
the ilstallation by one 01 more RCDS with a rated residual operating current not exceeding 300 [rA. The
RCD shalf incotpolate a time delay in accordance with BS EN 6094'7 -2 or be of the type S ir accordance with
BS EN 61008-l or BS EN 61009-l where necessary to provide selectivity with RCDs protecting final circuits.

740.410.3.5 The protective rneasure ofobstacles (Regulation 417.2) shall not be used.

Placing out of arn's reach is acceptable for elect c dodgerrs (see Regulation 740.55.9).

740.410.3.6 The protective measures of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and earth-free local
equipotential bolding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used.

740.4'11 Protective measure: Automatic disconnection of supply

NOTE; For supplies to AC motors. RCDS. where used, should be of the time-delayed type in accordaDce with
BS EN 60947-2 or bc ofthe type S ir accordance with BS EN 61008-1 or BS EN 61009-1 where necessary to prevert
urt$dnlcJ lripll ,y.

330
 740.41'1.4 TN system
740.411.4.1 A PME eallhing facility shali not be used as the means of earthing for an installation falling s ithin
oflhis section.
the scope
NOTE: The Electricity Safety, Quality arld Continuity Regulations (ESQCR) prohibit the use ofa PME earthing facilir] as the
means ofealthing for thc iistallation ofa calavan or silnilar coustruction-

740.411.4.3 Where the type of systerr earthilg is TN, a PEN conductor shall not be used downstream of the
origin of the temporary electrical installation.

740.411.6 IT system

Where an altemative system is available, ar 1T system shall not be used. IT systems, howeveq may be used for DC
applicatiols where continuity of service is needed.
740.415 Additionalprotection
740.415.1 Additional protection: RCDS

All final circuits for:

(i) lighting,
(ii) socket-outlets rated up to 32 A, and
(iii) mobile equiprnent connected by means ofa flexible cable with a cunent-canying capacity up to 32 A

shall be protected by RCDs having the characteristics specified in Regulation 415.1.1.

NOTE: The requirement fbr additional protectior't relates to the increased risk of damage to cables.

The supply to a battery-operated emergency lighting circuit shall be connected to the same RCD protecting the
lighting circuit.

This requirement does not apply to:

(iv) circuits protected by SELV or PELV, or
(v) circuits protected by electuical separation, or
(vi) lighting circuits placed out of alm's reach, provided they are not supplied by socket-outlets for household or
similar purposes or socket-outlets accordirg to BS EN 60309- l .

740,415,2 Additional protection: Supplementary protective equipotential bonding

740,415,2,1 In locations intended for livestock, supplementary bonding shall connect all exposed-conductive-
parts and extraneous-conductive-par1s that can be touched by livestock. Where a metal gdd is laid in the floor, it
shall be included within the supplementary bonding ofthe location (seeFigure 705).

E\traleous-conductive-parts in, or on, the floor, e.g. concrete reinforcement in general or reinforcement of cellars
lbr liquid [ranure, shall be connected to the supplen]entary protective equipotential bonding.

It is recommended that spaced floors made ofprefabricated concrete elements be part ofthe equipotential bonding
, see Figure 705). The supplementary protective equipotential bonding and the metal grid, if any, shall be erected so
-hat it is durably protected against mechanical stresses and corrosion.

740,42 Protection against thermal effects

740.422.3 Nature of processed or stored materials

740.422.3.7 A motor which is automatically or remotely controlled and which is not continuously supervised
ihall be fitted witll a manually reset plotective device against excess tempemture.

740.5 Selection and erection of equipment

740.51 Common rules
S;ritchgear and controlgear shall be placed in cabinets which can be opened only by the use of a key or a tool,
=a.ept
for those parts designed and intended to be operated by ordinary persons (BAl) as defined in Part 2 (see also
{ppendix 5).

--*-r

i
 740.5'12 Operational conditions and external influences

740.512.2 External influences

Electrical equipment shall have a degree ofprotcction ofat least IP44.

740.52 Wiring systems

740.521 Types of wiring system

740.521.1 Cables and cable management systems

Conduit systems shall comply with the relevant part ofthe BS EN 61386 series, cable trunkirg systems and cable
ducting systems shall comply widr the relevant part 2 of BS EN 50085, and tray and ladder systems shall comply
wittr BS EN 61537.

All cables shall meet the requirements ofBS EN 60332-l-2.

Cables shall have a minimum rated vo)tage of 450/750 V except that, within amusement devices, cables having a
minimum rated voltage of300/500 V may be used.

The routes of cables buried in the ground shall be maked at suitable intervals. Buded cables shall be protected
against mechanical damage.
NOTE 1: Conduit classifled as 450 N regarding protection against compressiol and classified as nonnal regardilg protectio]1
against impact. accordilg to BS EN 61386-24. is corsidered to fuIfl] the above requirement.

Armoured cables or cables protected against mechanical damage shall be used wherever there is a risk ofmechanical
damage due to extemal influence, e.g. > AG2. Mechanical protection shall be used in public areas and in areas where
wiring systems are crossing roads or walkways.

The following frethods are consider-ed to meel the above requiren]ents:

(i) conduit systems conplying with B S EN 613 86-2 1 with a classiflcation of heavy regarding protection against
compression, a classificatior ofheavy regarding protection against impact, and, for metallic and composite
colduit systems, class 3 protectiol against corosion (i.e. mediun protection iuside and high protection
outside)
(ii) cable trunking systems and cable ducting systems con'rplying with BS EN 50085 series with a classification
5 J regarding proteclion against irnpact.

Where subjected to nrovement, wiring systems shall be offlexible construction. Where flexible conduit systems are
provided they shall comply with BS EN 61386-23.
NOTE 2: Cables oftype H07RN-F oI H078N.l-F (BS EN 50525-2-21) together with conduit complying with BS EN 61386-23
are deerned lu sctisfy this requirelncnt.

740.526 Electricalconnections

Joints shal1 not be made in cables except whele neccssary as a connection into a circuit. Where joints are nrade, these
shall either use connectors in accordance with the relevant British or Harmonized Standard or the connection shall
be made in an enclosure with a degree ofprotection ofat least IPXXD or IP4X.

Where strain can be traNmitted to te rinals the connection shall incorporate cable anchorage(s).
740.53 Switchgear and controlgear
740.537 lsolation and switching

740.537.1 General
Every electrical installation ofa booth, stand or amuscment device shall have its own means ofisolation, switching
and overcufient protection. which shall be rcadily accessible.

740.537.2.1.1 Every separate temporary electrical installation for amusement devices and cach dist bution
circuit supplying outdoor installations shall be provided with its own readily accessible and properly identified
means ofisolation.

332
 7 40.537.2.2 Devices for isolation

A device tbr isolation shall discotrnect all live conductors (line and neutral conductors).

740.55 Other equipment

740.55.1 Lightinginstallation

" Luminaires
-irr: decorative lighting chain shall be installed so as not to impail its ingress ptotection'
,1nd
ald be
llot canied by the supply cable'
-- :i to the stlucture o[ supPoft intended to camy it' lts weight shall be
- .::-. .;lected atld erected lbr this putpose.

-: j3.-!)r'atile lighting cltains mounted less than 2.5 m (artn's reach) above flool level or otherrvise
. - , c:nral contaJt. shall bc firmly fixed ald so sited or guardcd as to
prevent t isk of injury to persons or

-: i .:. !. \ccess to the fi xed light source shall

only be possible after removing a ban ier or an enclosure
re,luire the use ofa tool.
-...,ll Lrse H05RN-F oI HOTRN-F (BS EN 50525-2-21) cable or equivalent
....:''ln.nral'betlsedilla0ylengthprovidedthcovelcu[cntprotecti\ede\iceinthecircuitisplopcrlyr.ated.

La m pholders
.-- = rmpholders shall not be used unless the cables and lanlpltolders ale compatible and the
'- :: r:nrovable ol1ce lltled to the cable.
Lamps in shooting galleries
. : ::: galleries and other sideshows wherc projectiles are used shall be suitably protected against

= ood lights

',,.rtllights are uscd. thcy shall be mounted so that tlle luniilairc is inaccessible Supply
cables
j r:.,\. adequate prolcction against mechanical danage'

; re risks from luminaires and floodlights

alrd flooiJliglrts shall bc so tlxed and protected that a focusing ol. collcentlatio)l
of hcat is not likcly to
---.r ignition olanY material.

740.55.3 Electricdischargelampinstallations
-tstallations of any lurinous tube. sign or lamp on a booth,
stald oI amusement device witi'l an opelating voltage
:igher than 230/4ti0 V AC shall colrply with Regulations 740 55 3 1 and 740 55 3 2' I

740.55.3.1 Location
..--:. tfiest
adequately protected to reduce the risk
-:.-,1 shall The luminous tube. sign ol lamp shalt be installed out of arm's teach ot be
.)l injury to Persors.

740.55.3.2 Emergency switching device

which shall bc controlled by all emelgel]c)
-\ separate circuit shall be used to supply luminous tubes, signs or lamps,
srvitch. The switch shall be easily visiblc, accessible and marked in accordance
with the requiremetlts of the locai
audrotity.
740-55.5 Safety isolating transformers and electronic convertors

-. . r itching Safcty isolating transformer s shall comply with BS EN 61 558-2-6 or

provide an equivalent degree of safety'

oI electrol'lic conveftol'
A nlanually reset pl.otective dcvice shall protect the secondary circuit of eacl] transfbnler
:.:ir ibution
Saletyisolatirrgtransfonrrersandelectro],licconveltorsslrallbetlountedoutofanll.steachorbenrountedil,ia
l. :dentified
to.ution thnt piviacs equal protcctiol1. e.g. in a panel or room with adequate \ entilatioD
that can only be acccssed
testing and maintenarlce
fry ,tiff.J o, i,.,u,.,,.t.d p"..onr. Such acceis shali be provided only to facilitate inspection.

Electlol'ric col'tvetlors shall confonn to BS EN 61347-2-2'

 Enclosules containing rectiliers and tansformers shall be adequately ventilated and the vents shall not be obstructed
when in use.
740,55.7 Plugs and socket-outlets

Al adequate number of socket-outlets shall be installed to a)low the user requirements to be met safely.
NOTE 1 : 1n booths, stands and for fixed installations, onc socket outlet fol cach square metre or lincar rnetre of wall is gencrally
considered adcquate.

Socket-outlets dedicated to lighting circuits placed out of arm's reach (in accordance with Regulation 140.415.1)
shall be encoded or rnalked according to their purpose.

When used outdoors, plugs, socket-ontlets and couplers shall comply with:
(0 BS EN 60309-2, or
(ii) whele interchar, geability is not required, BS EN 60309-1.

However, sockeloutlets according to the relevant National Standard may also be installed if they have suitable
mechanical protection (equivalert to the reqlrirements ofBS EN 60309-l) and a mted current not exceeding 16 A.
NOTE 2: Suitable meohanical protection may be provided by the socket-outlet or by an enclosure.

740.55.8 Electricalsupply
At each amusetnent device, there shall be a corxrectiou point r-eadily accessible and permanently marked to indicate
the following essentiai chamoteristics:
(i) Rated voltage
(ii) Rated cuncnt
(iii) Rated li'equency.

740.55.9 Electricdodgems
Electlic dodgems shall otrly be operated at voltages not exceeding 50 V AC or' 120 V DC. The circuit shall be
electrically separated from the supply mains by rneans ofa transfoflner in accordance with BS EN 61558-2-4 or a
motor-generator set.

740.551 Low voltage generating sets

740.551.8 cenerators
A1l generators shall be so located or protected as to prevent danger and iljuly to people through inadverlent contact
with hot surfaces and dalgerous pafts.

Electrical equipment associated with the generator shall be mounted securely and, if necessay, on anti-vibrution
nountings.

Where a gel]erator supplies a temporary installation, forming paft of a TN, TT or lT system, care shall be takel to
velify that the ealthing arrangeurelts are in accordance with Regulation 542.1 and, where eafth electlodes are used.
with Regulation 542.2.

The neutral couductor olthe star-point ofthe generctor shall, except for an IT system, be connected to the exposed-
conductive-parts of the genemtor.

7 40.6 lnspection and testing

'l'he electdcal installatjoo between its
origin and auy electrical equipment shall be inspected and tested in accordance
with the requitements of Part 6 afier each assembly on site.
NOTE 'l : Intelnal elecl cal wiring of roller coasters. electric dodgerrs and similar equipment are not considered as part of the
verificalion
NOTE 2: In special cases the rurrbcr ofthe tests may be modified according to the type oftemporary clectrical installatron.

I
 SECTION 753

HEATING CABLES AND EMBEDDED HEATING SYSTEMS

753.1 Siope
. This section applies to ernbedded electric heating systems for surface heating. It also applies to electric heating
systems for de-icir'rg, frost preyention and siniilar applications. Both indoor and outdoor systems are covered.

.l Heating systerns for indust al and cornmercial applications complying with relevant parts olBS EN 60519, BS EN
62395 and BS EN 60079 are not covered.
NOTE: Examples ofheating systems covered by thjs Standard are heating systems forwalls, ceilings, floors, roofs, drainpipes, I

gutters. pipes, stairs, roadways. and non-hardened compacted arcas (e.g. football fields, lawns).

753.4 Protection for safety

753.41 Protection against electric shock
753.410.3 Generalrequirements

753.410.3.5 The protective measures ofobstacles and placing out ofreach (Section 417) shall not be used. I

753,410.3.6 The protective measures of non-conducting location (Regulation 418.1) and eafih-free local
-...te equipotential bonding (Regulation 418.2) shall not be used. I

753,411 Protectivemeasure:Automaticdisconnectionofsupply
753.411.3.2 RCDs having the characteristics specifled in Regulation 415.l.l shall be used as disaonnecting
devices. In the case ofheating units which are delivered flom the manufacturer without exposed-conductiye-parts,
a suitable conductive covering, for example, a metal grid with a spacing ofnot more than 30 mm, shall be provided
on site as an cxposed-conductive-pat above the floor heating elements or under the ceiling heating elements, and
connected to the protective conductor ofthe electrical installatiofl.
rll be NOTE 1: Whcre Class II floor or ceiling heating units complying with the requilenrents of Regulations 412.1.1 afi,412.2.1.1
loru are uscd. the mesh metal grid detailed in Regxlation 753.411.3.2 is not required. I

NOTE 2: Lirnitation of the ratcd hcating power to 7.5kW2l0Vor I3 kW400 V downstream of a30n RCD may avoid
unwanted tripping due to leakagc cu[ent. I

753.412 Protective measure: Double or reinforced insulation

753.412.1.201 Where this protective measure is used as the sole protective measure for floor or ceiling heating
units, complying with the requirements of Regulation 412.2. L I . the heating-ftee areas shall be readily identifiable.

!:.rtiott The mesh metal grid detailed in Regulation 753.41 1.3.2 is not required.

The use ofthis protective measure as the sole protective measure for a wall heating system is not permitted.
:.i._r1 to
:: rsed. 753,413 Protective measure: Electrical separation

Electrical separation shall not be used for wall heating systems (Section 413).
r:.rsec1-
753.415 Additionalprotection:RCDS
7 53.415.1 Cilcuits srrpplying heating units shall llave additioral protection by the use of RCDs having the
: :.l.]licc iharactedstics specified in Regulation 415.1 .l. Time delayed type RCDs shall not be used.

'-- ': tltc

753.42 Protection against thermal effects

7 53.423 Protection against burns

:: floor areas where contact rvith skin or footrvear is possible. the surface terrpelaturc r.i the floor shall be limited. I

NOTE: FoI exarnplc. to no molc than 35 oC for flool hcating systcms. FoI additional it'.a::::::a:: a3i':rence can be made to
Cl i\l IlCtirrideln. I
753.424 Protectionagainstoverheating

753,424"101To meet the requirements ofChapter 42, special care shall be taken to prevent the heating elements
creating high temperatures to adjacent material. This may be achieved by using heatirg units with ternperature
self-limiting functions or by scparation with healresistant materials. The latter may be accomplished by placing
on a metal sheet, in metal conduit or at a distance ofat least l0 mm in air froln the ignitable structure.
NOTE: Dependent on adjacent material it may be prudeni to consider a larget separation distance.

753.424.201 For floor or ceiling heating systerns in buildings, one or more of the following measures shal1 be
applied within the zone where heating units are installed to limit the temperature to a maximum of 80 'C:
(i) appropriate design ofthe heating system
(ii) appropriate installation ofthe heating system
(iii) use ofprotective devices.

Heating units shall be connected to the electrical installation via cold tails or suitable teminals.

Heating units shall be inseparably connected to cold tai1s, fol example, by a crimped connection.

753-424,102 For wall heating systems, the heatiog units shall be provided with a metal sheath or metal enclosure
or flne mesh metallic g d. The metal sheath or nretal enclosure or fine mesh metallic grid shall be connected to the
protecrir e conduclor of rhe supply circuir.
NOTE: This requirement is irrtended to protect against the effects of overheating caused by a short-circuit between live
conducto$ dre to penetratiol ofan en]bedded hcating unit.

753.5 Selection and erection of electrical equipment

753.51 Common rules
753.511 Compliance with standards

Flexible sheet heating eletnents shall courply \vith the requircments of BS EN 60335-2-96. Heating cables shall
comply with IEC 60800.

753.514 ldentification
753,514.1 General
The designer of the installation/heating systern or installer shall provide documentation for each heating system,
containing the following details:
(i) Manufacturer and type of heating units
(ii) Number ofheating udts installed
(iii) Length/area ofheating units
(iv) Rated power
(v) Suface power density
(vi) Layout ofthe heating units in the form ofa sketch, drawing or picture
(r ii) Position/depth of heatirrg trnits
(viii) Position ofjunction boxes
(ix) Cables, eathed conductive shields and the like
(x) Raled voltage
(ri) Rated resistance (cold) olhearing units
(xii) Rated current ofovercurrent protective device
(xiii) Rated residual operating current of RCD
(xiv) The insulation resistance of the heating jnstallation and the test voltage used
(xv) Product infomatiot containing provisions about approved materials in contact with the heating units, with
necessary instructions lor installation.

This documentation shall be fixed to, or adjacent to, the distribution board ofthe heating system.

Furlhermore, the requirerrerts of Figure 753 apply.

718.515 Preve.lti(xl d irrnd dcltimental i[nuence
753.515.,tEle.ln.h.-ating.).IstrtjshallbeselectedanderectedSoastoavoidanyharnfuiinfluencebetweeD
rhe hearine s) slem and anf elelm.al or non_electrical installations envisaged-

Itmaterials other than lhose recommended are used in the sunoundirys ofthe heating units the manufacturcr shall

NOTE: Forexanple, an electric hearing system can aiTect other parts ofthe elecrricalinstallation such as reducing tlie cutenr
car.ying capacity ofcables ofother circuils.he 10 high localambient lmperatuie cansedbvthe heating svstem'

753.515.101 Heating units shall noi cross expansion.joints ofthe building or structure'

7 53.52 Wiring systems

753.520 lntroduotion

753.520.4 Heating-free areas

For ihe neces$q, atachment of room ittings, heattug'free arcas shall be prolided in such I wav that the heat
emissioD is not lreventedby suclr Iittings.

753.522 Selection and ereclion of wiring systems in relation to external influence

753.522.1 Ambient temperature (AA)

753.522.1.3Forco]d]eads(circuilwiring)andcontrolleadsnrstaliedjnthezoneofhealedsurfaces,thehcrease
ofambient tempenhue shail be laken iDto account.

753.522.4 Presence of solid foreign bodies (AE)

753.522.4.3 Where hcahrg uritsrre insttlled there shallbe hcating-free areas whcre drilLing and fixingbv screws
aDd rhe like lnay be caded out without sk ofdamage to the units.

f'"\
fto ureerev E I

337
 Fig 753 - lnformation for the user of the installation

A description of thc 'heating system shall be providcd to the person ordering the work

Thc description shall contaiu at least the following information:

a) Description ol tbe constnrction of the heating system, especially the installation
depth of the hcati[g units;
b, I o(rliol, diJIr:rrn witlt,nlormalion conceming
Ihe distdbulion olthe healing circuits and their rated power;
thc position olthe hcating units in each loom;
particularities which have been iaken into account when installing the heating units, for
example, hcating-flee areas. complementary heating zones, heating free areas for fixing means
penctruting inlo the coveriug materiall
c) Data on the control cquipnrent used, with rclevant circujt diagmms and the dinensioned position
ofUoor telnpcmture and weather conditions sensors. ifany:
d) Data on the type of heating units and their lraximun operadng temperature.
The installer shalI irrfonn the owner that the descdption ofthe hcaling system includes all necessary
iuformalion. for .xanrple lbr r-epair work.
Instructions for use shall be provided to the peEon orde ng the work upon completion. one copy ofthe
instructions tbr use shall be pcmlanently fixed in or near each relevant distribution board

The instructions fbr use shall include at least the lollowing data:
a) Description ofthe heating systcm and its function;
b) Opcmtion of the heating installation in the first heating period in the case ofa new building, for example,
regarding drying outi
c) opeHtio!1 of thc control cquipment for the heating syslem in the dwelling area and the complementary
lT eating zone's. ilanyr
d) Infornation on restlictiols on placing olfumiture or similar
. additional floor colerings for exampLe. carpcts wilh a tllickness of>10 mm may
lead to higi)cr floor tempeEtrires Nhich can adveNely affect the peformance ofthe heating system
. pieces of lumiture solidly covering the floor and/or brilt-in cupboards shall only be placed
on heating-{iee arcas
. lllitLrrc. sltch as calpets. seating and rest fllmiture with pelmets, which in pafi do not solidly
cover the tlool. may not be placed in complcmentary healing zones. ifany;
c) In the case of ccilin.q hcating systems. restricliolls rcgarding the height of fumiture Cupboards of
roon height may be placed only below the area ofceiling where no heating elements are instalied;
1) Dimensioncd position ofcomplementary heating zones and p1aci11g areas;
g) Statement that. in the case ofthermalfloo.. wall and ceiling heating systems, no fixingshallbe made into
the tloor. wall ol cciling rcspcctively. Excluded from this requircment are heating-free areas.
Altemativcs shallbe gi!en. where applicable-
 APPENDICES

Appendix page
I British standards to which reference is made in this standard 340
2 Statutory regulations and associated memoranda 359
3 Time/current characteristics of overcurrent proteciive devices and RCDs 362
4 Current-carrying capacity and voltage drop for cables 374
5 Classification of external influences 445
6 Model forms for certification and reporting 461
7 Harmonized cable core colours 484
I Current-carrying capacity and voltage drop for busbar trunking and powertrack syslems 487
9 Definitions - multiple source, DC and other systems 489
10 Protection of conductors in parallel against overcurrent 497
11 Not Used 501
12 Not Used 501
'13 Methods for measuring the insulation resistance/impedance of floors and walls
to Earth or to the protective conductor system 502
14 Determination of Prospective Fault Current 504
15 Ring and radial final circuil arrangements, Regulation 433.1 505
to Devices for protection against overvoltage 507
17 Energy Efficiency 513

Appendix I is nolmative, and is thlrs a requiremenr.

All other appendices are intbnnative, and are p(ovided as guidance.

r+
 APPENDICES

Appendix pa9e
1 British standards to which reference is made in this standard 340

2 Statutory regulations and associated memoranda 359

Time/current characteristics of overcurrent protective devices and RCDs 362
4 Current-carrying capacity and voltage drop for cables 374
Classification of external influences 445
r) Model forms for certiflcation and reporting 461

7 Harmonized cable core colours 484

I Current-carrying capacity and voltage drop for busbar trunking and powertrack systems 487
o Definitions - multiple source, DC and other systems 489
10 Proteclion of conductors in parallel against overcurrent 497
11 /Vof Used 501

12 Not Used 501

'13 Methods for measuring the insulation resistance/impedance of floors and walls
to Earth or to the protective conductor system
14 Determination of Prospective Fault Current 504

Ring and radial final circuit arrangements, Regulation 433.1 505

16 Devices for protection against overvoltage 507
17 Energy Efficiency c tJ

NOTE: Appendix 1 is normative. and is thus a requirement.

All other appcndices are infomaiive. and are provided as guidance.

333
 APPENDIX 1 (Normative)

BRITISH STANDARDS TO WhIICH REFERENGE IS MADE IN THIS STANDARD

NOTE: Certain British Standards have been withdrawn since the issue ofthe previor]s Edition. From the date ofwithdrawal.
certif,cates and ma*s already au'alded may continue to apply to production until a date specified in the superseding
standard. During the period between these dates. the withdmwn standard may be specilied in contracts. However. it
should be noted that this appendix may not list such standards, as only current British Standatds are listed with some
references to supcrseded standards. where standards are not dated they are a multiple standard-

BS or EN Number Title References

BS 67:1987 1999)
( Specification for ceiling roses 416.2.4 note
559.5.1

BS 88 The term "BS 88 series" . u hen u.ed rn these Regulations. rneans 132.4
BS 88-1. -2 and -3. 433.1.204
53 3.1
Table 537.4
Appx 4 sec 4
Appl 8 sec 4
BS 88-l:2007 Low-voltage fuses - Pafi I : Ceneral requirements
BS 88-2:2013 Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplementary requirements for fuses for Part 2 gC
use by autho zed persons (fuses mainly for jndustrial application) gG
Examples ofstandardized systems offuses A to K. Table 41.2
BS 88-2:2010 replaced BS 88-2.2:1988 and BS 88-6:1988 which have Table 41.4
been withdrawn. Table 41.6
433.1.20 r
Appx 3 Figs 3A3(a)-(c)
BS 88-2.2r19E8 Specification for fuses for use by authorized persons (mainly for
industrial application). Additional requirements for fuses with fuse-lints
for bolted connections
Replaced by BS 88-2:2010 and withdrawn I/3/2010. Table 41.2

BS 1tE-3i2010 Low-voltage fuses - Part 3: Supplementary requirements for fuses for Tablc 41.4
use by unskilled persons (fuses mainly for household and similar ,133.1.201

applications) 533.1.2.2
Examples of standardized systems offuses A to F Appx 3 Fi-s 3Al
BS 88-3 :201 0 replaced BS ! l6l : 1971 which has been withdrawn.
BS 88-6:1988 Specification of sLLpplementary reqLrirements for fuses of compact
dimensions lbr use in 2401415 V AC iDdustrial and commercial
electrical installations
Replaced by BS 88-2:2010 and withdrawn 1/3/2010.
BS 196:1961 Speciflcation for plotected-type not,I-leversible plugs, socket-outlets
Withdmwn cable-couplers and appliance-couplers with eafihing contacts for single-
phase AC circuits up to 250 volts
This standard has been withdrawn as the products have almost been
replaced by those manufactured to BS EN 60309-1:1999 and
BS EN 60309-2:1999.
BS 476 Fire tests on building matedals and structures 526.5 (iii)
BS 476-4:1970 Non-conrhustible test tbr materials 554.4.1

8S,176-12:1991 Method oftest lor jgnitability ofproducts by direct flame impingement

BS 546:1950 (1988) Speciflcation. Two-pole and earrhing-pin plugs, socket outlets and Table 5 5. I
socket-outlet adaptors 55i.1 .5
5 59.5.1(v)

105.512.2
70s.s53. r(iii)

BS 559:2009 Specification fot the desigo and construction ofsjgns for publicity, 1 10.1 .3(i)
decorative and general purposes 559.1 note 2

BS 646:1958 Specification. Cartridge fuselirks (rated up to 5 amperes) forAC and 533.1.1

+A2:2011 DC scrvice Table 55.1
BS 646 remains culacl1t but thc requiremelts for type B fuse-lin]G have 553.1.5(i)
been replaced by BS 2950:1958.
BS 951:2009 Electrical eartling. Clarnps tbr earlhing and bonding. Specification 514. t 3. r

I '1!0 ___
_
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS 1361:1971 (1986) Specification for cartridge fuses forAC circuits in domestic and similar
premises
Replaced by BS 88-3:2010 and withdmwn 30/3/20t0.
BS Ll62:1973 (1991) Specification lbr purpose fuse links for domestic and similar Table -ll.l
-eeneral
pulposes (primarily for use i11 plugs) Table -11.4
533. r. r

Table 537.4
Table 55.1
553. r.5(i)
BS 1363 l3 A plugs. socket-outlets. adaptors and connection units 433. r.10,1
Tablc 55.1
553. r.201
553.1.5
705.553.1(iio
722.55.101.0.201.1(i)
Appx 15
BS i363-l:2016 Specif,cation for rewirable and non-rewirable l3 A fused piugs Table 537.4
-A1:201 8

1363-2:2016 Specification for l3 A switched and unswitched socket-outlets Table 537.4

+Al:2018 559.5. l( v)
705.5 t2.2
722.55.101.0.201.1(i)
1363-3:2016 Specifi cation 1br adaptors
al -A I :2018

BS 1363-4:2016 Specification for l3A fused comection units switched and unswitched Table 5-17.,1
+A1:2018 559.5.1(vii)
Appx l5 Figs 15A
l5u
BS 3036:1958 ( 1991) Specificalion- Semi-enclosed electric fuses (ratings up to 100 amperes Paft 2 Cr
and 240 volts to ealth) Table 41.2
thble,lt.4
432.4
zl3l.l.1nole I
:113. L202
,113.1.204
513.1 .1
53 3.1 .2.2
Appx 3 Fig 3A2(a)
3A2(b)
Afpx 4 sec 3
scc 4
sec 5.I
sec 5.1.l(iii)
scc 6.1
BS 3535 Replaced by BS EN 61558-2-5:2010 Sality of rmDsfomers, reactors. Appx 6 Cond. Repoft
power supply units and combinations thereof. Pafticular requiremeDts iten 6.3
and tests for hansfonner for shavers, power supply units for shavers and
shaver supply rLnits.
BS 3676 Switches for household and sirnilar fixed clectdcal installations.
Speciflcation for general requirements. Replaced by
BS EN 60669- I : 1999+A2:2008
BS 3858:1992 (2014) Specification fot binding and identification sleeves for use on electric 514.3.2
cables and wires
BS 4177:1992 (2015) Specification for cooket control units Table 537.4
BS 44421:1989 (199s) Cuide to electlical eafth monitoring and protective conductor pt.oving 543.3.1
543.7.1.202(iiD
543.7.1.203(iv)
BS 4573:1970+A5:20l6 Specification for 2-pin reversible plugs and shaver socket outtcts 553. r.5(ii) I

BS 4662:2006 Boxes for llush mounting of electrical accessorics. Requilcmcnts. lest 530.4.2 I

'A1:2009 methods and dinensions 559.5.1(viii)

34',t
 BS or EN Number Title References
tss 412'7 Clossan of e lectrotechnica I power, telecolmunication, electronics, Paft 2 first para
lightrne and colour tenns
BS 5266 Emergency liglrti:rg r 10. 1.3(ii)
528.1 note 2
560.8.1 note I
560.9
BS 5266-l:2016 Emergency lighting. Code ofpractice for the emeryency lighting of See BS 5266
premises
BS 5467:2016 Eicctric cables. Thermosetting insuiated, annoured cables of rated s22.6.204(i)
\ oltages of600i 1000 V and 1900/3300 V for fixed installations. Appx 4 Table 4A3
Appx 7 Table 7C
BS 5.199 Gmphical symbols and sigru. Safety signs, including fire safety signs. 4721.55.3.7
Withdrawn and replaced by BS ISO 3864 l:2011
BS 5655 Litis and service lifts 110.2(x)
BS 5655-l:1986 Safety rules for the construction and installation ofelectric lifts
(Applicable only to the modemization ofexisting lift insrallatioN)
BS EN 8l-l:1998+A3:2009 available but still current.
BS 5655 2r1988 Salety rulcs for the constmction and iNtallation ofhydraulic lifts
(Applicable only to the modemization ofexisting li{i installations)
BS EN 8l-2:1998+A3:2009 available but still curent.
BS 5655-l l:2005 Code ofpractice for the undeftaking ofmodifications to existing eiechic
lifrs
(Applicable only to the modernization ofexisting lift installations.)
BS 5655-12:2005 Code ofpracticc lor the undefiaking ofmodifications to existing
hydraulic lifts
(Applicable only 10 thc modcmizarion ofexisting lift installations.)
BS 5733:2010 Spccification for genelal requirements for electrical accessories 411.3.3
+A I r20 t4 s26.3(vi)
530.4.2
Table 537.4
559.5.I (vi)
559.5.4(v)
BS 5803 5r1985 Thcrrnal insulation fol.use in pitched roofspaces in dwellings Appx 4 Table 4A2 items
Specification fbl installation ofman-rnade rnineml fibre themal 100 to 103
insulation mats. Replaced by BS EN 13 t62.2012+At:2015 Table 4D5
Ils 5339 Firc dctection and fire alalm systems for buildings r 10.1.3
528.1 note 2
560.8.1 note I
560.10
BS 5839-l:2013 Code olpmcticc lor design. installation, colnmissioning and
rrsrntenancc of \y\rents ir non-domestic premises 643.3.2 note I
BS 600,1:1012 Electric cables. PVC irsulated aild PVC sheathed cables for voltages up 7 04.522.8.t1
to and including 300/500 !', for elect c power and lighting A'72t.52t.2
Appx 4 Table 4A3
Appx 7 Table 78
Appx l5 Figs l5A &
l5B note
BS 6007:2006 Electric cablcs. Single core unsheathed heat resisting cables for voltages
supe$eded. up to and including 450/750 V for intemal wiring see BS EN 50525.
withdrawr
BS 6217 Withdrawrr Guide to graphical symbols - see note at end ofthis table Appx I note
BS 6220:1983 (1999) Dcleted by BS 7671:2008, Corigendurn (July 2008)
BS 6231:2006 Deletcd by BS 7671:2018
BS 63,16:1997 (2005) Electric cables. PVC insulated. a noured cables for voltages of Appx 4 Table 4A3
600/ 1000 V and 1900/3300V Appx 7 Table 7C
NOTE: nris has been wirhdra*n but is rctained within BS 7671 for historical purposes.

BS 6151 Deletcd by BS 7671:2018

BS 6500r200{) Electlic cables. Flexible cords rated up to 300/500 Y for use with Appx 7 Table 7D
appliances and equiplnent intended for domestic. ofncc and similar
er\ ironnlents. Withdrawn and replaced by BS EN 50525.

342
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS 6701:2016 Telecommunicalions equipn'ient and telecol11rruni,:;::::. ::: t:: I10.1.3(vi)
Specification fbr installatiot'l, operation and rrrainleni ::ar .144.1(iii) 528.2 note 2
BS 6724:2016 Electlic cables- Thennosefting insulated. arnoured cablej ib. \ollases of i22.6.204(i)
600/1000 V and 1900/3300 Y for fixed installariors- ha\ ins to\ -{ppx zl Table 4A3
emission ofsmoke alld corrosive gases when affecled b\ fire. Appx 7 Table 7C
Specification.
BS 6891:2015 Speciflcation for the installation and maintenance oflo$.pressure eas 528.i.4 note
installation pipework ofup to 35 1Ilm (Rl 1/4) on premises
BS 6907 Electrical installations for open-cast mines and quarries I10.1.3(viii)
BS 6972:i988 (2012) Specification for general requirements for luminaire supponing couplers Table 537.4
fol dornestic, light industrial and commercial use 559.5.1(ii)
559.5.4(iv)
BS 6991r1990 (2012) Specification for 6/10 A, two-pole lveathel.-resistant couplers for 553.2.l
household, commercial and light industrial equipment
BS 7001r1988 Specification for interchangeability and safety of a standardized 5s9.5.1(ii)
lunlinaire supporting couplel ss9.5.4(iv)
BS 7211:2012 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated and thennoplastic sheathed A'72t.521.2
cables for voltages up to and including 450/750 V for electric Appx 4 Table 4A3
power and lighting and having low elnissior ofsmoke and App 7 Table 78
coffosive gases when affected by llre
BS 7375:2010 Code ofpractice for dist bution of electricity on construction and 704 note
building sites 704.411.3.1 note
BS 7410:201l+Al:2015 Code ofpractice for protective earthing ofelectrical installations 542.2.2 note
542.3.1 note
BS 7454:1991 Method for calculation ofthermally permissible short circuit curents, Table 43.1 note 2
+Al:2008 (2010) takjng into account non-adiabatic heating eflects 543.1.3
BS 75,10 Elecflic cables. Guide to use ofcables with a rated voltage not
exceeding 450/750 V
BS 7629-l:2015 Electric cables. Specification for 300/500 V fire resistant, screened, fixed 422.6(til
installation cables having low emission ofsDoke and corrosive gasos 560.8.I note I
&-hen affected bv fre. Multicore cahles Appx 4 Table 4A3
BS 7697:1993 (2010) Nominal voltages for low voltage public electricity supply systems Appx 2 sec 15
Withdrawn and replaced by BS EN 60038:2011.
BS 7698-12:1998 Reciprocating intemal combustion engine driven altemating current 560.6.13
gererating sets. Emergency powet supply to safety devices
BS 7769:2008 Electric cables. Calculation ofthe curent rating. 523.3
(Some pafts ofthe BS 7769 series are now numbered BS IEC 60287 Appx 4 sec I
series. eventually all parts will be tenumbered.) sec 2.1
sec 2.2
Table 483 note 2
Table 4C2 notes 1 & 2
Table 4C3 notes I & 2
Appx 10 sec I note,
sec 2 para 7
BS 7769-1.1:1997 Has been superseded/withdmwn and replaced by
BS IEC 60287- I- l:2006+A l:2014
BS 1769-1.2:1994 Cunent rating equations (100% Ioad factor) and calculation oflosses.
(2005) Sheath eddy cllrrent loss factors for two circuits in flat fonnation
BS 1769-2.2:1997 Thennal resistance. A method for calculating reducdon factors for
(2005) groups ofcables in free ait protected from solar radiation
BS 7169-2-2.111991 Thermal resistance. Calculation of themal resistance. Section 2.1:
(2006) Calculation of thennal resistance
BS 7769-3.I :1997 Sections on operating conditions. Reference operating conditions and
(2005) selection ofcable type
BS 7846:2015 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured, fire-resista[t cables 4)2.6(11)
ofrated voltage 600/1000 V for flxed installations, having lorv emission 522 .6.204(t)
olsmoke rnd corrosire ga5es when dmected by Iire. Specrhcarion 560.8.1 note I
Appx 4 Table.l-\l
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS 7889:2012 Electric cables. Thermosetting iNulated, ullannoured cables with a Appx 4 Table 4A3
\olrage of600 1000 V lbr fi\ed insrallarrons
BS 7909:2011 Code ofpmctice for temporary electrical systems for entefiainment and 110.J.3(ix)
related purposes 706.1
7 t1.1
717.I note
740.1.1 note I
BS 7919:2001 (2006) Electdc cables. Flexible cables rated up to 450/750V for use with
appliances and equipment interded for industdal alld similar
environments
Replaced by BS EN 50525.
BS 8434 Methods oftest for assessment ofthe fire integrity ofelectric cables 560.8. r(iii)
BS 8436:2011 Electric cables. Speciflcation for 300/500 V screened electric cables 522.6.201ti)
having low emission ofsnoke and corrosivc gases rlhen affected by Appx 4 Table 4A3
fire, for use in walls, pafiitions and building voids. Multicore cables
BS 8450:2006 Code ofpractice for installation ofelectical and electronic equipment I10.2(iv)
in ships
BS 8488:2009 Specification for prefabricated wiring systems intended for permanent 52t.20 )

+Al:2010 connection in fixed installriions

RS 8491:2008 Method for assessment offire integrity oflarge diameter power cables 560.8.1(iii)
for use as components for smokc and heat control systems and certain
other active fire safety systems
BS 8519:2010 Selection and installation offire-resistant power and control cable 110.1.3(x)
systerns for life safcty and fire-fighting applications. Code ofpractice 528.1 note 2
560.8.1 note l
560.1I
BS 8573:2012 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, non-armoured cables with a 422.6tii)
l,oltage 0f600/1000V. for fixed installations, having low emission of Appx 4 Table 4A3
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire
BS 9999:2017 Code ofpractice for lire safety in thc dcsign. rnanagcmcnt and use of I I0 Ll(x)
buildings
tsS AU 1:l9a:1980 Specification for electrical connections between towing vehicles and A72l.55.2.6(i)
(1e87) trailers with 6 V or 12 V electrical equipment: type 12 N (nomal) A72l .s5.2.6(iii)
Withdrawn Table A72l
BS AU 177a:1980 Specification for electrical conneclions between towing vehicles and A72t.55.2.6(D
(r987) tlailers with 6 V or 12 V electrical equipment: type 12 S A72 r .55.2.6(iii)
(supplementary) withdrawn Table A72l
BS EN 8I Safety rules for the constrLlction and installation ofli{1s 110.2(x)
528.3.5
BS EN 8l-1:1998 Electric iifts (also known as BS 5655-1:1986 Lifts and service lifts ...
+A3:2009 etc) which is still cunent but has been superseded.

BS EN 1648 Leisur-e accommodation vehicles

BS EN 1648-l:2012 12 V direct cunent extra low voltage electrical installations. CaravaN 708. I note I
721.t
BS EN 1648-2:2012 12 V direct current extra low voltage electrical installations. Motor 708.I note I
calavalls 721.1

BS EN 1838:2013 Lighting applications - Emergency lighting r10.1.3(ii)

560.9
BS EN I2954:2001 Cathodic protectior ofburied or immersed metallic shxctures. Geneml I10.2(xiii)
principles ald application for pipelines
BS EN 13636:2004 Catbodic protection ofburicd metallic tanks and related piping 110.2(xiii)
712.3)2.2 rore
BS EN 14505:2005 Cathodic protection of complex structures 110.2(xiii)
BS EN 15112:2006 Extemal cathodic protection ofwell casing 712.312.2 note
RS 7361-l was withdrawn and has heen reolaced bv this.

BS EN 15869 Inland navisation vessels

BS EN 15869-1:2010 Electrical shore connection, three phase cunent 400 V, up to 63 A, 730.1
50 Hz. General requirements 730.313.1.101 note

344
 BS or EN Number Title References

BS EN 15869-2:2010 Electdcal shore connection. three phase current JOo \- up io 6l '\. 730.t
50 Hz. Onshole unit..alety requirernents 730.313.1.101 note

BS EN 15869 3:2010 Elect cal shore cornectioll, three phase curenl -100 \ . up io 6-1 A- 730.I
50 Hz. On-board unit, safety requiremerts

BS EN 50085 Cable tr1lnking and cable dllctirg systems for electrical insullarions 412.2.4. r (ii)(b)
422.2.1(11)
422.3.4
521.6
52.1 .t.5
527.t.6
5i0.4.3
7l r.521(ii)
7 r5.52 r.1(0
l
't t7
.52.2(t)
1t1.528.3.4
7 2.1 .528 .2.l
740.521.1
740.52r.1(i0

BS EN 50085 General requircments. 422.4.204

l:2005+A1;2013
BS EN 50085-2-l:2006 Cable trunking systems and cable ductil'Ig systcms intended for 522.6.204(iii)
+Al:2011 mounting on walls and ceilings 705.522.16(iD

BS EN 50085-2-3:2010 Particular requirements for slotted cable tmnking systems intended fol
installation in cabinets. Section 3: Slotted il1 cabinets
BS EN 50085-2-,1:2009 Particular rcquirements for service poles and selvice posts
BS EN 50086 Spccillcation for condnil systems ior cablc rranagenlent withdra\\:ll and
rcplaced by BS EN 61386.

Signs and luminous-discharge-trbe installations operating ftoln a I 10. r .l (i)

BS EN 50107
no-load iated outpul vo)tage exceeding I kV but not exceeding 10 kV 559. l( ii)
559.1 note 2

BS EN 50107 I :2002 General requirernents

BS EN 50107-2i2005 Requirements for eathJeakage and open-circuit protective devices

l
Table 4444.1(v)
BS EN 50117 4-l:2008 Coaxial cables- sectional specification for cables for BCT cabling iD
+A I :2011 accordance with EN 50173 Indoor drop cables lbr systems opemtiig at
5 MHz 3 000 MHz

BS EN 50171:2001 Central power supply systems

replaced by BS EN 60623:2001 and BS EN 60896-11:2003
lnlbrmation technology Cablirg installatioll 443.1.1
BS EN 50I74
444.1(v)
444.4.lnote
A444.4
A444.5
528.2 note 2

BS EN 50174-1i2009 Installation spccification and quality assurancc 444.4.10(0

+A2:2014
,144.4.10(iD
BS EN 50174-2:2009 hstallation planning and practices inside buildings
+!\212014 A444.4

BS EN 50174-3:2011 Ifformation teclmology. Cabling installation. Installation plaDning and A444.4

J'raclicei our.idc buildings
BS EN 50200:2015 Method of test for tesistance lo fue ofunprotected small cables 1br use s6o.8. r (iii)
in emergency c ircr ril.
BS EN 50266 Co$r11on test methods for cables uider fire conditions.
Test for verlical flalne spread of vefiically-mounted bunched wires or
cables.
Standard (all parts) withdrawn and replaccd by BS EN 60331
:, 110.1.3(iv)
BS EN 5028I Electrical apparatus for use in the prescnce ofcombustible dLlst
BS EN 50281-l-1:1999 l-lecnical appardru. f,IoLeclcd by enclo.ures. Cunslruclion dnd lcsling
withdra\\,n and replaced by BS EN 60079-0+All:2013 ard
BS EN 60079-31:2014.
I0l note I
 Title References
Bs or EN Number
BS EN 50281-l-2:i999 Electrical apparatus protected by enclosures. Selection. installation atrd
l)lairltenance
withdrawn and replaced by BS EN 60079-14:2014 and
BS EN 60079-17r2014.

BS EN 50281-2-l:1999 T.st nethods. Methods ofdetermining minimun ignition temperatures

Table A444.1(iv)
BS EN 50288 Mult!elernent rnetallic cables used in analogue and digital
conllllunicatio and control
444.1(iv)
BS EN 50310:2016 TelecornmunicatioDs bonding networks for buildings and other
444.4.10(iii)
strLlctuies
A444.1 note
A444.1.3

BS EN 50162:.2001 Method oftest for resistance to lire of latger unprotected power and
ionrrol e.rbler lbr u.e in ctnerpel'c) ctrcuit.
Table 537.4
BS EN 50428i2005 Switchcs for household and sinilar fixed installations Collateral
+A2:2009 stantlard
Switchcs and related accesso es for use in home and building electonic
sr stems THBES)

Requirements for nicro-generating plants to be connected in parallel 551.1 note

BS EN 50438:2013
with public 1ow-voltage distribution netwol*s 551.7.4
551.7.5 note
551.'7.6

kV AC 142.2
BS EN 50522:2010 Eadhing ofpowet installations excceding 1
,142.2 note 3
442.2.1note 1

Electric cables - Low voltage energy cables of rated voltages up to and 559.s.3.2(iii)
BS EN 50525
A721.521.2
including 4501750 V
AppxT Table 7D
422.3.201 note 2
BS EN 50s25-l- I l. Electric cables. Lou, voltage energy cables ofratccl voltages up to and
) rr a-.r ) )l 151 including 4501750 V (U"lU).
'7
02.s22.23til)
2-82. i-ll. j,ll (llexible cables) 704.522.8.11
705.422.8 notc
Fig 708 note 2
7 t1.52.1
'7t7.52.2(i)
'7
11 .52.2(tt)
72 r .55.2.6(i0
7,10.521.1 note 2
740.5 5. 1 .1
Appx ,l Table 4A3
717.41 1.3. i.2 note
BS EN 50525-2-31. Electric cables. Low voltage energy cables ofrated voltages up to and
including ,150/750 V (Uoru). Cables for general applications Single core Appx 4 Table 4A3
3-41
non-sheathed cables with lhelmoplastic PVC insulation
422.3.201 note
Elcctric cables. Guide to use for cables with a rated voltage not
I
BS EN 50565-1:20i4
521.9.1 note
exceeding 450./750 V (Ugru). Gcneral guidance
'712.522.8.1
BS EN 50618:2014 Electric cables for photo!oltaic systems
Rotatirg electrical machines. Efliciency classes ofline operated AC App I7 sec 17.12
BS EN 60034-30-
ltoror. (ll- coJet App 17 sec 17.12 note I
lr20l4
CENELEC staDdard voltases Table 443.2
BS EN 60038i201 I
55 7.3.5.3
557.3.5.4.2
't2t.313.1.)

Appx AF2
Environmental testing. Test methods. Tests. Test KA' Salt mist
5
BS EN 60068-2-
I I :1999
514.1.1
BS EN 60073:2002 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
idcitification. Coding principles for indicators and acluators
Electrical appamtus for explosive gas atnospheres 1r0.1.3(iii)
BS EN 60079
753.1
App 5 BE3
1t0.1.3(iv)
BS EN 60079- Explosive atmospheres. Equipment. General requirements
0i2012+A I l:2013
 BS or EN Number Titte References
BS EN 60079-10- Explosive atmospheres. Classification of areas. Explosive gas
l:2015 atmospheres
(split into l0-l and
r0-2)
BS EN 60079-1.1:2014 Explosive atmospheres. Electrical installations design, selection and 422.3
erectio 560. r

BS EN 60079-17:2014 Expiosive atmospheres. Electrical installations inspection and 613.t

maintenance
BS EN 60092 507:2015 Electdcal imtallations in ships small vessels 110.2(iv)
709.1 note 2
BS F.N 601,16-2:2000 Semiconductor convertors. General req rements and line commutated 414.2 note 2
convertors. Self-commutated semiconductor conveters including direct
DC converters
BS EN 60204 Salety ofmachinery. Elect cal equipn)ent ofmachines 110.2(xi)
460 Scope
464.1 note 3
537.2.3 note
537.3.2.1 note
BS EN 6020.1-1:2006 711.55.4.1
+Al:2009 7 t'7 .t.(\)
740.t.t
BS EN 60228r2005 Conductols of insulated cables Appx 4 sec I
BS EN 60238:2004 Edison screw lampholders 416.2.4 note
+A2:201 I 559 5 1.206

BS EN 6025s 26:2013 Measuring relays and protection equiprnent. clectromagnetic Appx 5 AM-24-2
cornpatibility reqLlirernents
BS EN 60269 Low-voltage fuses
BS EN 60269-l:2(X)7 General requirements withdrawn l/3/2010
BS EN 60269-l:2007 General requiremcnts
+Al:2009
BS HD 60269-2:2010, Low-voltage fuses. Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by
BS 88 2:2010 authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application). Exan,ples of
standardized systems offuses A to J
BS HD 60269-2i2013 Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplernentary requirements for fuses for
use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)
Examples ofstandardized systems offuses A to K'(also numbered
BS 88-2:2010).
BS EN 60269-3:1995 Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by unskilled persons
(fuses rnainly for household and similar applications)
RepJaced by BS 88-l:2007 and BS EN 60269-1:2007 and withdrawn
)/3/2010.
: : lD 602tt9--i.j0l0 Iow roltage,fitses Pat -?.' SrppJerneDtar:r re.vrneDeDt' lbt tu'ee
fttr use by wtskr//edpetsotts (fi6es malh/t rtr fiouseholdanclslizl;/ar
applicarions) Examples ofsrandardized systelns offuses A to F (also (
nLrmbered BS 88-3:201 0).

Plugs. socket-outiets and couplers for irdustrial purposes Table 537 .4

551.4.4 note
7t7.55t.6
(equ eme[ts ?05.553.I
=-rl Ge(\elat
108.55.1.i
109.553.1.8
72t.55.t.l
722.55.101.0.201.1 t
730.55.1.1 I

740.415.1(vi)
740.s5.7(ii) I

--=-.ti+
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 60309-2:1999 DjrnensioDal interchangeability requirements for pin and contact-tube 543.7 .1 .201
+A212012 accesso es 543.7.1.202(ii)
Table 55.1
5 53.1 .5
553.2.1
559.5.1(v)
70,1.511.1
705.553.1
708.55.1.1
708.553.1.8
Fig 708 note 2
709.55i.1.8
Fig 709.3
7t1.55.t
721.55.2.6
722.55. 101.0.201.1(i0,
(iii)
730.55. L I
740.5s.7(i)
BS EN 60309-4:2007 Switched socket-outlets and connectors. with or without interlock 708.55.1.1
+Al:2012 722.55.101.0.201.1(iii)
730.55.1.1
BS EN 60320-1:2015 Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes. General 553.2. r

requirements
BS EN 60332-1- Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions. Test for 422.3.4
2:2004+A 1l :2016 vertical flame propagation for a single insulated rvire or cable. Procedure 422.1.203
for I kW pre mixed flame 527.t.3
560.8.1(iXii) & (iii)
7l r.521(D
717 .52.)
7)t .52t.2
740.521.1
BS EN 60332-3:2009 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables u11der fire conditions. Test for 422.2.1
vertical flame spread of veftically-mounted bunched wires or cables 422.3.4
422.5
521.t.3
7ll.52l
BS EN 60335-1:2012 Household and similar electrical appliances. Safety. General A721.311.4(iii)
+Al3 r2017 rcquirements
BS EN 60335-2- Particular requirefients for battery chargers A721.55.9
29:2004
+1.2:20lO
BS EN 60335-2- Particular requireme[ts for pumps 702.55.i
41:2003
+A2r2010
BS EN 60335-2- Particular lequiremeDts for sauna heating appliances and infrared cabins 703.55
53:201i
BS EN 60335-2- Particular requirements for elect cal heating appliances for breeding 105.4).2.6
7l:2003 and rcaring animals
BS EN 60335-2- Panicular requirement. for electric fence energizers I 10.2(xii)
76:2005 705.1 note
+42:2015
BS EN 60335-2- Pafiicular requirements for flexible sheet heating elements for room I 10. Ll(vii)
96:2002 heating 753.5 r I
+42:2009
BS EN 60417 craphical symbols for use on equipment. Now withdrawn. See Note at 412.2.1.1 note
end ofthis Table. Table 55.3

BS EN 60439(61439) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies 710.511.1

BS EN 60439-l:1999 Type{ested and partially type-tested assemblies. Withdrawn and 712,s . r

replaced by BS EN 61439- L BS EN 61439-2 may also be

appJicable.
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 604,15:2010 Basic and safety principles for man-rnachine inrert-ace- marLing and Appx 7 sec I
ideDtiflcation. Identification of equipment terminals. condu.ior
terminations and conductors
BS EN 60,146:2007 Basic and safety principles for manrnachine interface. markins and Appx 7 sec I
identification. ldentification ofconductors by colours or numerals
Withdrawn ard replaced by BS EN 60445:2010
BS EN 60447:200,1 Basic alld safet], principles for man-machine irterface. markiig and r I,l.l.l
identifi cation. Actuating principles
BS EN 60529:1992 Specilication for degrees ofprotcction provided by erclosures (lP .ode) 522.3.1
+,\2:2013 522.4.1
527.2.3(i) & (ii)
702.5 t2.2
708.553.1.8
I
,\72t.55.6
A721.55.10
722.5 t2.2.202
'722.512.2.203

BS EN 60570:2003 Electrical supply track systems for luminaires 527 .t.5

Replaces BS EN 60570:1997 and BS EN 60570-2- 1:1995 which have 559.3.4
both been withdrawn. 715.521.1(v)
BS EN 60598 Luminaires 559.5.r(iii)
559.5.1(iv)
559.5.3.2(i) & (ii)
102.55.2
BS EN 60598 l:2014 Luminaires. Gefleral requilen]ents and tests Table 55.3 and note
Replaced BS fN h05q8- I :2U08 but rcmains currell.
BS EN 60598-l:2008 Lurninaires. General requirements and tests Table 55.3 and note
BS EN 60598 2 Luminaires 559.10
l3:2006 ParticLrlar requircments. Ground recessed luminaires
+A2:2016
BS LN 60598-2 Lun'inaies. 102.55.2.
I 8r1994 Pafiicular requirements. Luminaires for swimming pools and si ilar 702.55.3
+A I :2012 applications
BS EN 60598-2 Particular requirements. ExtraJow voltage lighting systems for filament 7 |.559.4.2.
llr 1997 lamps 7 t5.422.t01 .t (iii)
715.521.1(ir)
BS LN (r059ll'2 Pa icular requiremellts. Luminaires with limited sudace temperatures 422.3.2 note
24:2013 ,122.3.8(iii)
Table 55.3
BS EN 6060 I Medical electrical equipment. General requirements lbr basic sat'ety and 710.1 note 4
essential perfbrmance 710.512.2.1note
Fig 710.1
BS EN 60617 Graphical syrrrbols for diagrams. Now withdrawn. See Note at end of Table 537.4 note 1

this table. Appx 1 note

BS EN 60623:2001 Secondary cells and battelies contai ng alkaline or other non-acid 560.6.10
clectrolytes. Ventcd nickel-cadmiu111 prismatic rechargeablc singlc cells 560.6.11
BS EN 60664-l:2007 Insulation coordination for eqrLipnrent withil low-voltage systems Table 44.2 note L

Principlcs, requirernents and tests 443.6.1

534.1
BS EN 60669 Switches fol household and sirnilar fixed electtical installations
BS EN 60669 l:1999 General requirements. This replaces BS 3676. 416.2.4 rote
+A2:2008 Table 537.4
BS EN 60669-2-l:2004 Particula requirements. Electronic switches Table 537.4
+A 12:2010
BS EN 60669-2-2:2006 Particular requiements. Elecffomag[etic l-cmote-control s\\,itches (RCS) 536.4.2.3
536.4.3.2
Table 537.4
Table A53.1
BS EN 60669-2-l:2006 Panic!Ll![ requiremcnts. Time de]ay s\yilches (TDS ) Table 537.4
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 60669 2 4:2005 Partlcular requirements. Isolating switches 536.4.2.3
536.4.3.2
Table 537.4
Table A53.I
BS EN 60670 Boxcs and enclosures for electlical accessories for household and 530.4.2
sirrilar' fi xed electrical iNtallations 559.5.1(viii)
BS EN 60670-l:2005 Cencral requircments ,122.5 note 3
+Al:2013
BS EN 60670-22:2006 Pa icular requirements for connecting boxes and enclosures 521.8.3
Appx 15 Figs l5A &
15B
BS EN 60684 Flexible insulating sleeving 543.3.201
BS EN 60702. Mineral insulated cables and their tenrinations with a mted voltage not 422.6(1)
I :2002+A1:201 5 crcc'erting 750 V Cahles 433.1.204
s22.6.20411)
Table 52.1
543.4.8
s60.8. r(i)
560.8.1 note I
Appx 4 Table 4A3
BS EN 60702- Mineral insulated cables and their tenninations with a rated voltage not 560.8.1(i)
2:2002+A I :2015 exceeding 750 V
BS EN 6(]7] I Classifi cation of environmental conditions
BS EN 60721 i l:1995 Classifi cation of gloups of environmental parameters and their Appx 5 AN ...
(100s) se\erities. Stationary use at we&ther protected locations
BS EN 60721-j-4:l9r)5 Classillcation of groups of environmental parameters and their Appx 5 AN ...
(2005) sevelities. Stationary use at non-weather protected locations
BS EN 60896 I l:2001 Stationary lead acid batteries. General requirements and methods oftest. 560.6.10
Vcnted typcs. General requirements and methods oftest 560.6.11
BS EN 60898 Specifioatiol] for circuit-brcakcN for overcuraent prolectiol for Table 41.3
hoLlschoid and sinlilar installations Table 4l.6
432.4
433.1.20t
433.t.204
533. l.l
Table 537.4
Table A53.1
'722.533.t0t
Appx 3 Fig 3A4

Fig 3A6
Appx 4 sec 4
Appx 8 sec 4
BS EN 60898-1:2003 CircLrif breakers lbr AC operation 434.5.2
+A 13:1012 s36.4.2.1
Table A53.I
Appx 4 sec 5.5.2
BS EN 60898-12006 Citcuit-breakers lor AC and DC operation 434.5.2
BS EN 60898-2:2001 remained curent up nntil I June 2010. 533. 1.1
Table A53.1
A721.533.1.6
BS EN 60904-3:201 6 Photovoltaic devices. Measurernent principles for terrestrial photovoltaic Part 2 STC
(PV) solar devjces with reference spectral irradiance data
BS EN 60947 1 on -r ollarc .s itchgcar a.rd control tear 533.1.1
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 60947 2:2006 Cir'cuit-bleakers 411.4.4 note 2
+A2:2013 432.4
433.t.201
433.t.204
531.1.1
531.3.2(iv)
53t.3.4.2
533.1.1
533.1.3
536.4.1.4 note 3
536.4.2.t
s36.4.3.1
Table 53'7 .4
Table A53.I
'7tt.4t0.3.4
721.4t5.t
722.531.2.101
722.533.101
740.4t0.3
740.411 note
Appx 4 sec 4
Appx 8 sec 4
BS 1:N 60947-3:2009 Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination 536.4.2.3
-A2r20l 5 units 536.4.2.3 note I

536.4.3.2
Table 537.4 I

537.4.\
Table A53.1
I

BS EN 60947-4- Contactors and motor starteN Electromecha cal contactor and motor 43s.2
l:2010+Al:2012 starters. s36.4.2.2
s36.4.3.1
Table 537.4
BS EN 60947 5,1:2004 Control circuit devices and switching elefreots Electromechanical Table 537.4 I

+A1:2009 control circuit devices

BS EN 609,17-6- Multiple fllnction equipment Transfer switching equipment 536.4.3.2
I r2005+Al:2014 Table 537.4
Table A53.1 I

7t0.53',1.t
BS EN 60947-6-2:2003 Multiple function equipment Cootrol and protective switching devices Table 537.4
(or equipment) (CPS) Table A53.1
122.533.t01 I

BS EN 60947-7 Speciflcation for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear 526.2 note I

BS EN 60947-7-l:2009
BS EN 60947-7-2:2009
Ancillary equipment. Temlinal blocks for copper conductors
Ancillary cquipment. Protective conductor terminal blocks fbr copper
ti
I

conductors
BS EN 60950-l:2006 lnfolmation teclurology equiprnent. Safety. General rcquirements 444.4.9
+A2r2013
BS EN 60974-9:2010 Arc welding eqtLipment. Installation and use 106.1
BS EN 60998 Connecting devices for low-voltagc circuits for household and similar 526.2 note I
pu1poses 55e.5.4(D
BS EN 60998-2-l:2004 Particular requirements for connecting devices as separate entities wiih 7 t5.52t .l07
screw-type clamping units
BS EN 60998-2-2:2004 Particular requirements for connecting devices as separate entities with '7t5.52t.tO1
screwless-rype clamping units
BS EN 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 515.2
BS EN 61000 is a multiple part standard Appx 4 sec 5.5.1
BS EN 61000-2 Elechomagnetic compatibility (EMC). Environmellt Appx 5 AM
BS EN 61000-4 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Testing and measurement Appx 5 AM
techniques
BS EN 61000-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Generic standards. Table A444.1(i) & (ii)

i
BS EN 61008-l:2012 Residual curent operated circuit-breakers without integral overcurrent 4lI.4.204
+A11:2015 protection for househokl and similar uscs (RCCBS) Table 4l .5
Geneml rules 534.4.7 note I
Table 537.4
1 10.4 t | .3 .2.1
11t .410.3.4
12t.4ts.t
722.53t.2.t01
740.410.3
740.41 I note
Appx 3 Table 34
BS EN 61009- l:2012 Electrical accessories. Residuai curent operated cjrcuit-breakers with Table 41.3
+A l2:2016 integral overcurrent protection for household and similar uses (RCBOs) 4lL.4.204
General rules Table 41.5
Superceeds BS EN 61001:2004+Al4:2012 but remains current Table 4l .6
432.4
433.1.201
433.t.204
131.5.2
534.4.7 note 1
Table 537.4
710.411.3.2.1
7tr.4t0.3.4
72r.4r5.1
722.531.2.t01
722.533.101
740.4t0.3
740.411 note
Appx 3 Table 3A
Fig 3A4
Fig 3A5
Fig 3A6

BS EN 6103:1-2:2005 Measurernent olslnoke densily olcrbles buning under delined

I A1 :2013 conditions
7 r.s2t(i)
Auxiliaries for Jalrrps. Capacitors for use in tubular ffuorescent and other
discharge lamp circuits. Ceneral and safety requircments
BS EN 61095:2009 Specification for electromechanical contactors for household and similar 536.4.2.2
purposes 536.4.3.l
Table 537.4
Table ,A53.1
BS EN 61140:2016 Protection against electric shock. Common aspects for installatioll and Part2ClassI...
equipment Class IL..
Class III ...
410
412.2.4.1note 1

BS EN 61184:2008 Bayonet lampholders 416.2.4 note

+A1:2011 559.5.1.205
BS EN 61215:2005 Crystalline silicon tenestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules. Design 712.511.1
quali{ication and type
BS EN 61241-10:2004 Replaced by BS EN 60079-10-2:2015.
BS EN 61241-14:2004 Selection and installation
Replaced by BS EN 60079-14:2014.
BS EN 61347 Lamp controlgear
BS EN 613,17-l:2015 General and safety requirernents. Replaced BS EN 601347- Table 55.3
I r2008+A2:2013 but still curent. 71t.55.6
BS EN 613,17-2-2:2012 Pafiicular requirements for DC orAC supplied electronic 7 t5.1t4
step-do$n convertoE for lllament lanps 715.414 notc 2
740.55.5
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 6[47-2- Lamp controlgear. Particular requirements for DC or AC supplied 7 t5.414
I l:2014 elcctronic contolgcar for LED modules 715.414 note 2
BS FN 6r 386 Conduit systens fol cable management 412.2.4.1(iiXb)

A444.1.4
52 t.6
527. t.5
521.t.6
7r1.521(ii)
7r5.521.1(i)
717.52.2(t)
717.528.3.4
721 .52t.2
"7)t.528.2.t
740.521. r
BS EN 6i386-1:2008 General requ irerneuts. Replaced by BS EN 6I 3 86- I7 r2008 bllt refiains 422.3.4
4)2.1.204
BS EN 61386-21:2004 Particular requirernents. Rigid conduit systcms 522.6.204(ii)
+All:2010 705.522.l6
705.522.16(i)
717.52.2
721 .521.2
740.521. r(i)
BS EN 61386-22:2004 Particular requirenrents. Pliable corldujt systems 1t1 .52.2
+A1l:2010
BS EN 61186-23:2004 Padiclrlar requirements. Flexibl(- conduit systems 1t1 .52.2
+A11r2010 710.52t.1
740.521.1 note 2
BS EN 61386-24:2010 Pafiicular requirements. Conduit systems buried underground 522.8.10 note
708.521.7.2 note 2
710.521. l0l ..1.2 note 2
740.521.1 note l
Appx ,l Table 483
BS EN 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies General rules (see 1t2.2.t.1
also BS EN 60439) ,122.5 note l
5i0.4.2
5l6..1.5
5l6..1.20 r
536.4.202
516.4.20i
543.2.2(ii)
557.1
710.51l.l
1)2.5lL.1
BS EN 61,139-l General lules Paft 2 LV switchge...
(see also BS EN 60419)

BS EN 6lzl39-3:2012 Low-voltage switcl1gearand conlrolgear assemblies. Distributiolr boalds

intended to be opcratcd by ordinary persons (DBO) 42 r. r.20r
5.16.4.20 r

Appx l,+

BS EN61,139,1:2013 Pafiicular requirements tbr assemblies for constrxction sites (ACS) 70zl.5l L I
3S EN 61.+19-6i2012 Pa icular rcquirements for busbar trunking systems (busways) .114.5.1
521.4
527 . L5
521 L6.

Appx ,3 scc I
Appx 8 sec l
Appx l0 sec I note
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 6]534 Poweftl?ck systelDs 422.2.1(i\)
422.3.4
434.5.3
521.4
52',7.t.5
527.1.6
Appx 8 scc I
Appx 8 sec 2
Appx 10 scc 2 ote
BS EN 6I534- Ceneral requirements ApDx 8 sec I
1r201 l+A I :2014 sec 2

BS EN 6153,1-21:2006 Particular requirements for powetrack systems intended lbr wall and
ceiling mourltil1g
BS EN 61515:2009 lnstallatiorl couplers intcnded for perma[ent connection to fixed Parr 2: Prcfab uiring
+A l:2013 imtallations system
521.201
526.2 note I
553.2.I

5s9.s.4(iii)
BS EN 61537:2007 Cable 1lay systems aDd cable laddcr systenrs for cable ]LaDagenelt 422.2 . 1(tii)
122.3.4
521.6
527.1.5
527.1.6
'710.5)l.t

BS EN 6I557 Elecln(a1 saiity ir1 lo\\'\,oltagc disllibuliorl systcrns uP to 1000 VAC

and 1500 V DC. EqLripnlcnt tbr tcsting. nreasuring or Dr()nitoring ol
protective measurcs. General r-equirements
BS FN 61557 2:1007 Insulation resistancc Appx l.l Sect 1(2)
uS LN 615-s7-6:2007 Eft'ectivcncss ol residuai cLtnent devices (RCD) in TT, TN and IT 643.7.1(a)
systcms. 643.7. r(b)
643.8

BS I-N 6l5il-ll:2015 lnsulation monitoriog deviccs for IT systems 538.1.1

557.3.4.3
7r0.411.6.3.1
IIS F.N 61557 9:2015 Equipmerlt for insulatio[ fault ]ocation in lT systerns 4t t.6.4
538.2
557.5.1.1
710.41I .6.3.3

BS EN 61557-12:2008 Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1000 V AC App 17 sec I7.9
and 1500 V DC Equipment foI tcstirg, measuing 01 monitoring of
protective measurcs. Perfomance measu ng and mo toring deviccs
(PMD)
BS EN 61558-l:2005 Safely ofpower transforrners. power supplies, reactors and similar 4l r.8.4.1(i)
+A1:2009 products. 1 11 .41 I .6.2(ti)
Gc[eral requilements and tests 7t7.4t3
BS EN 61558-2-l:2007 Parlicular rcquireDents and tests lbr separating transtbmers and power 444.4.9
supplies incorporating separating transfomers for genetal applications
BS EN 6155IJ-2-4:2009 Particular requirenents and tests for isolating transfomrers alld power 414.4.9
supply units incorporating isolating transfomrers 722.413.1.2
730.313. L 102
740.55.9

BS EN 6l55li-2-5:2010 Pafiicular requiremcnts and tests for hansfotmer for shavets. powcr 553.1.5(ii)
sr.rpply units lor shavers and shavel supply units Sec 701
101.512.2
701.s 12.1(ii)
Appx 6 Cond. Repofi
itein 6.3

3e
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 61558 2 6:2009 Particular requirements and test for safety isolatins t"nslbrmeE and 4r4.3(i) I

porver supply units incorpomtirg safety isolarins r.anstbrmers 141.4.9 I

Table 55.3 I

A721.113.4(iii)
715.4t4 I

740.55.5
BS EN 61558 2-8;2010 Particular requirements and tests for transfonners and po\\ er supph 4r4.3(i)
units for bells aDd chimes
BS EN 6I558 2 Pafticular requiremerlts and tests tbr isolatil1g transfomrers for the 411.4.9
I5:2012 supply of medical locations 7r0.5r2.1.1
BS EN 61558-2- Particular requirements and tests for' transfonners for construction sites. .111.8.4.1(i)
23:2010
BS EN 6I643 Low-voltage surge protective devices 5 3,1.1

BS EN 61641-l l:2012 Surge protective devices connected to Iow voltage power systems. 534.4.4.1
Requirements a1ld iest methods 534.4.4.6note1&2
Appx 16 Table l6A note
1.2 &3
BS EN 61643-21:2001 Surge protective dcviccs connected to telecommunications and
+A2:2013 signalling networks. Perfonnance requiremerts and testing methods
BS EN 61851- 1:201 I Electric vchicle condr]ctive charying systen. Geneml requirements Part 2 EV Mode I
Current but partially replaced with BS EN 62752:2016 722.511.101
BS EN 6I936- Power instaliations exceeding I kV AC - Part l: Common mles 412.2.3
I r2010+Al:201,1

BS EN 61995-l:2008 Devices for thc connection ofluminaires for household and sinrilar Table 537.4
purposcs. Ccneral requiremerts 559.5.4(ii)
BS EN 62020:1999 Electrical accesso es. Resid al cuncnt monitors for household and 532.l
similar uses (RCMS) 518.4.1
BS EN 6204{l I :2008 Unintcnuptible power systelrs (UPS). General and sa1'ety for UPS 560.6.12(iv)
-Al:2013
BS EN 620210 3:2011 L,nintermptible fower systenrs (LIPS). N,lcthod ofspccifying the 560.6.12(iv)
perfonrance and tcsl r-equilemenls
BS EN 62196- Plugs. socket-outlets. \'ehicle connecturs aDd vehicle inlets. Conductive 722.55.201.1 (i\.). (v).
l:1012+A12r201,1 charging of electric vehicles. Dimeusional compatibility and (vi)
interchangeability reqUiremeuts for AC pin and contact-tube 722.53 1.2. r 01
accessoies 722.531.2.101 note
722.55. 101.0.201. I (i\).
(v) & (\'i)

JS EN 62208:201 I Empty enclosures lbr low-voltage srvitchgear and controlgear 530.4.2

assenblics. Gc[eral requirements
3S FN 62262:2002 Degrees ofprotection provided by enclosures for electlical equiprrent 108.512.2.1.3
against extemal mechanical iolpacts (lK code) 709.512.2.1 .4l1ii)
-t
22.512.2.203
35 EN 62305 Protection against Iightning 110.2(ix)
131.6.2 note
41t.3.t.2
421.1.1 note 2
444.5.2(iv)
528.1 note I
534.1
541.3
Appx 16 Table l6A
BS EN 62305-1:2011 General principles 542.2.3
Appx 5 AQ3
BS EN 62305-2:2012 Risk managemerlt 443.1.I
534.4.,1.4.2(i) & (i0
BS EN 62305-3:2011 Physicaldamage to structures and life hazard

-.*
- --l,
 BS or EN Number Title References
BS EN 62305 ,1:201 1 Electrical and electrorlic systenls !rithin struclures 514.1 I

514 4 note
1 () I

534.1.4 4) I

Appr lo Table 16,4. I

Fig IbA5 rrote 4 I

BS EN 62353:201.1 MedicaI clectlica) ecluiplrer]t. Rccu[-cnl test and alter repair ofmedical 710.6
electrical equipment
Replaced BS EN 62353:2008 but still curent
BS EN 62368-l:2014 Audio/video. infonnation and conniltnicatioD technology equipttrelrt 4.14.4.9
Sai'ety requirements
BS EN 62395 l:2013 Elcctrical resistarlce tr'ace hcating systclrs lbr i[dust al and connnercial
applications. Gcneral tnd tcstirg r!'quilctnents
BS EN 62423:2012 '[ype f ard typc B tesidual cun-cDl operatcd circuir-l]reakers with and 411 .4.4 ]oote 2
without iotegral overcLrnerlt proieclion 1bt housellold and similar tlses 53r.3.4.1
531.3.4.2
5t 1.3.6
533.t.1
Table A53.1
710.411.3.2.1
1t2.4t1.3.2.1.2
722.531.2.101

BS EN ISO 11,146:2012
BS EN ISO 12696:2016
BS FN ISO 1317.1:2011
Road vehicles. Conneclors lbr the electtical coDnectioD ofto]ving and A72r.55.2.6(i) & (iii)
towed vclicles. I 3-pole connectors for vehiclc's rvith l2 V nom inal Table A721
supply voltage not inlerded to cross watet fords
Cathodic protection oi stcel ur concretc ll0.l(xiji)
Cathodic protectioo ofharboL[ ilrsiallati ls 110.2(xiii)

NOTE or graphical symbols IEC 60617 is thc central standrrcls database tbr electlotechnicirl syrnbols. They used io be coveleil
b,v BS 6217, BS EN 60417 and BS El'\ 60617. ID 2002 IIIC l.runched all br1 lins datirbasc lormat iirr the s;-r1rboi liblirr'1, available
on subscr iptio. llonr the IEC n ebsite. Follo},ing thi5 de.lsion, 1r1 2004 CENELEC dccidc'd Lo cease Publi.aiiur oi EN 60417 irr
'paPer'lbrrn, to $'ithdrrw the then existing standards irnd li)rmall)r to adopt the IEC database 1{ithoui any changes lbr usc in
Europc. Consequently, thr- Blitish StandArd rersiotts have norr'iriso been lvithdrl\\'n.

Number Title References

BS IEC 60287 Elcctlic cables. Calculation oldr!' rutcrlt raling 523. i
(Somc palls ol'rhe US 7769 reries c trow ntrrllbcred BS IEC 60187 scries. Appx 4 sec I
c\entually all pafls \\'ill be rcn nlllerecl. )
Lr scs 2.1
scc 2.2
Table 4Bl note 2
lable 4C2 note I & 2
Tablo 4C3 note I & 2
Appr l0 sec 1 note.
scc 2 para 9

BS tEC 60287-l- Cable rating equations (l00o% load factor) iud calculatior oflosses (gerleral) Appx 4 sec 5.6
l:2006+Al:2014
BS IEC 6IO()O 5. Electromagretic conlpatibilily (EM(.). lnstallalioD and l11itigatiolr guidoliles 444.1(vi)
2.:1997 Earthing antl cabling
BS tEC 6r995-l Dcvices lor thc conncction of lumillail es fbr: household trttd sintilar puryoses. table 537.4
Generalrequirements s59.5.1(ix)

HD 108:2001 Identification ofcores ir cables and flexiblc colds Pretace

-fablc 5I basical]y ilnplcrnents thc Iequircrncrts of HD 308. Appx 7 Sec
Please [ote, I

HD 184.5.51rt Now lvithdrarvr. Appx 7 scc I

HD 38,1.7.711 SIi2003 Exhibitiors. shows and stands Preface

356
 HD 472 SI BS -rr9- Ie.rlr: , Jr \orrinalvoltagcs for lo\\ \ oltage public elecn icity | 708 iIl
suppl\ s\slenr. IAPPx 2 scc 15

Low-\,oltage electrical installations Notes or1 thc plan ...

HD 60164
Funalarnental prillciples. assesslrellt ofgeneral characteristics.... definitions Preface
HD 60364- L:2008
Protection for sal'et!- Prolection against eleclric shock Prcface
HD 60164-4-41:2007
Appx 5 BC

Protectior fbr safety - Protection against thennal effects Preface

HD 60364-4-42:201l
Appx 5 BE2
Appx 5 CA2
Appx 5 CB2

Protection against overcunent Prcface

HD 60364-4-43:2010
Plotection lor sallty. Protection of low voltage irlstallations agaillst Preface
HD 60364-4 442t201)
tempomry oveNoltagcs due to earth faL ts in the high-voltage system and due
to faults in the lo$' voltage system
HD 60364-4-443:20I 6 Protection against transiel1t overvo]tages ofahllospheric origin or due to Prcface
swjtching
Selection and erection ofelectrical equipment Common rules Preface
HD 60364-5-51 r2009
Appx 5
Appx 5 BE2

I Preface
HD bolb4-5-51:20 L I Selection and erection ofelectrical equipment wiring systenN
Chap 52
Appx 5 CB2
Appx 5 CB3
Appx 5 CB4

Devices for protectioll against transient ove Preface

:rD 6036,1-5-534:2016 'oltages I

protectivc conductors Prcface

:D (10164 5 5,1:201 I Eafthing a[angeo]eots ar1d I

Lo$, voltage gcnemting scts Prel'ace

::D(r0i64-5-55I:20l0
:D ti(1164 5-559r1{)ll Selection ancl erection ofelectrical equipment Lunrinaires and lighting Prefacc
installations
I
:: 60i6,1-(r:2016 lnitial Verification Pr-e face I

Prelace
-l 6036.1-7 Locations containing a bath or shower
:1007-A I l:201 I I

rf t{16:l-7-701:2005 Rooms and cabins corltaining sauna heaters Pret'ace I

', I 6036.1-7-70,1:2007 Construction and demolitiorl site installations Preface

- l(lS r

I rt)-l(r.l-7 705:2007 Agricultulal arld lrorticultural prcmises Preface

Conducting locations with restricted nlovement Preface

I6r)16'1-7-706:2007
.ol6-1-7 708i1009 Caravan parks- can'lping pa1*s and similar locatjons Preface

.rll6.+-7-709:2009 Madnas and similar locations Preface

.Lrl6-l-7-710:2012 Medical locatiolls Preface

I

Pref'ace
''r6-1 7-712:201f) Photovoltaic (PV) s),stenlS I

',i6-1-7-71,1:2012 Pret'ace
ExterllaI lighting installatiors I

- 161-7-715r1012 Extra-1o\r" voltage lighting installations Pr-efacc

and motor calavans Pref'ace

-r6l-7-72 l:2009 Elect cal installatiolls in caravans
r(.-.1-7-722:20l6 fol electric vehicles Prefa.]c
Supplies I

(Jpelatlns or,lrJrntenance gangwa) lPret)ce

161-7-729:2009 s
I
I

I6-{'7-7:10:2006 fernporar) elcctt'1.'al in.rcllation. lbrtnrctures. dlntlselnclll de\ ices ar lPrelace I

I fairgrounds. alnusenlent parks and circuses

I

,---.-
 FprHD 6036,1-4-444: Measures against electronlagnetic disturbances
2010(2012)
IrprHD 60364'5-53i Protection, isolatioll. switching, cortrol and ]nonito ng
2014
Fprl{D 60-364-5-557: Auxlliary circuits
2012
FprHD 60164-7-702i Srvirlming pools and other basins
20r0
FprHD 6036,1-7-717: Mobile or trarlspo(able u ts
2010

rECr 60038-Ed 7.0

IEC 6033l Tests for electric cables under fire conditiolls , Circuit ilrregrity. Tcst mcthod
for lire with shock at a temperaturc ofat least 830'C fbr cables ofrated
voltage up to and ircluding 0.6/1,0 kV.
IEC 60131-l:2009 and with an ovemll dianeter exceeding 20 mn 560.8.l(ii)
IEC 60131-2:2009 and with a[ overal] diametcr not exceeditg 20 mm s60.8.1(ii)
IEC 60311-3:2009 tested ir a netal enclosurc 560.8. r (ii)
IEC 60164-4- Protection agaiDst voltage disturbanccs and elecftomagnetic disturbances
44:2007+At:2015
tEC 60164-5- Selection alld erection ofwirirg systen]s
52::009(201I)
IEC 60502- Powcl cabies with extruded insulatiol and their accessories for rated voltages Tablc 52.1
1i2004+A,l:2009 :
from I kV (U,,, 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (U- : 36 kV) - PaIt l: Cables for rared Appx 4 sec l
voltages of I kV (U," = 1,2 kV) and 3 kV (U,,, : 3,6 kV)
IEC 60617:2012 Centml standards database ol graphical symbols fbt use in electrotechnical 5 I,1.9. I

lleating cables with a rated voltage of300/500 V for comtbrt healing and
prevention of icc fomratioll
IEC (rl1,1(l:2016 Protection against electric shock - (lomnron aspects 1br installalion and 414. t .l

IEC 61201:1992 [xlra-low vohagc (ELV). Lil11it values. Also known as PD 6536. 414.2 note 3

4.721.533.l

PD 6516:1992 Extralow voltage (ELV). Lin'lit values. Also knorrn as IEC 6120l. 414.2 note 3

PD CLC,]lR 50,180:201 i 'fechnical Repolt - Detennination of cross- sectional area ofconductors and 5.13.3 note
selection of protective dcvices Appx 4 sec 2.5
PD IEC/TR 62350:2006 Cuidarce lor the corrcct use ot residual cu ent operated protective devices 531.1.3 note ,1

(RCDs) lb| household and sirnilar use

DD CLC/TS 6I643. Low vollace sulge protective dcvices. Sulge protoctive devices connectcd to 534.I
l2:2009 lou volrage porver distribution systems. Selection and applicatioD principLes 514.1 lote 2534.1
Dote 2
514.4.1.6
531.4.2
534.4.4.4.2 note I
&l
Fig 534.9
Fig 16,{5 notc I

CLCi rS 6164i-22:2016 Low-voltage sr;rge proteclive devices. Surge protective devices coluected
to telecoinlrlu cations arld siguallilg nctworks. Selectio ard applicarioD
principles

358
 APPENDIX 1 7 (lnformative)
ENERGY EFFIGIENCY
17 .'l Scope
This appendix provides recommendations for the design and erection ofelectrical installations, including installations
having local production and storage of energy, for optimizing the overall etEcient use ofelectdcity.
NOTE: On-site renewable energy sources and other local production sources do not ofthemselves increase the effrcie[cy of
an electrical installation. However, they do reduce the overall public electrjcity network losses as the consumpdon of
the installaiion from the public supply is reduced. This may be considered an indirect energy efficiency measure. For
instailation ofsolar photovoltaic (PV) power supply systems, see Section 712 ofthis Standard.

The recommendations withir the scope of this appendix apply for new eleclrical installations and modification of
existing installations. Much ofthis appendix will not apply to domestic and similar installations.

lt is intended that this appendix will be developed into PaIt 8 ofBS 7671 in a luture amendment.

17.2 Availability of electrical energy and user decision

Energy efficiency management should be so designed that it does not reduqe electrical supply availability and/or
services or operation below the level desired by the user The user ofthe electrical installation must be able to take
the flnal decision over whether or not to operate a ser.,/ice at nominal value, or optimized value or not to operate it
for a certain time.
NOTE: Examples are uhen sonteone is ill, the user may decide to heat the rcom at a higher temperature, even during peak
consumption; when a company receives an urgent delivery ordet the workshop may need to work at an unexpected
hour.

17 .3 Design requirements and recommendations

The desigrer should take into account the follou,ing without losing the quality of ser-vice and the performance of
the elect cal installation:
(i) Load encryy prolile (active and passivc)
(ii) Availability oflocal generation (solar, wind, generator, etc.)
(iii) Reduction ol energy losses in thc clcctrical installation
(i\) Thc tariff structure ofi-ered by the supplier olelectrical energy.

17 .4 Design requirements and recommendations

Determination of load profile
The main load demands within the installation have to be determined. The loads, together with their durations
of operation, and/or an estirnate of the annual load consumption of the main load demands (in kWh) should be
identified.

Voltage drop
Consideration should be given to limiting the voltage drop within an installation to a level below that required by
Regulation 525.202, to reduce the energy losses in the wiring systems.

Cross-sectional areas of eonductors

Increasing the cross-sectional area of conductors will reduce the energy losses but will increase initial installation
costs. The decision as to whether to do this should be made by assessing both the savings within a time scale and
the additional cost due to the increased size. Practical constraints. such as size of terminations. will also affect the
sizing ofconductors.
NOTE: In some applications (particularly industrial), the most economical cross-sectional area of conductor may be seveml
sizes larger than that required for thennal reasons.

Power factor correction

Consideration should be given to irrproving the ioad power factol to reduce themal losses in the wiring and tariff
penalties.

Power factol correct;on can be rrade at the load level or centrall),. depending on the tvpe of application. The
complexity ofthe issue leads to carelirl consideration ofeach individual applicarion.
 17 .5 Determination of zones
The installation should be dir ided into zones for the purpose of energy efficiency analysis. A zone represents a floor
area in square metres (r.nr) or a location where the electdcity is used.
NOTE: Zones may corespond. fbr example, tol
- an industrial \\,orkshop
- a floor it building
- a space neaL *'indows or a space far from windows
- a room in a duelling
- irighrvay road lighting
- a hotel kitchen.

17.6 Determining the usages within the identified zones

The use of a particular circuit or zone should be clearly identified to enable accumte measurement and analysis of
its energy consumption.
NOTE: Exanples ofdifferent usages are:
hot water production
- HVAC (cooling and heating)
- lighting
- rnotors
- appliances.

17 .7 Energy efficiency and load management system

Requirements from the user

Requirements lrom the user are the first input to take into consideration. These requirements will be the key input to
design the energy efficiency management system.

Requirements on the loads

The designer and installer must take into account the user decisions on selection ofenergy eficient appliances.

The user may give priority to the usage ofthe different loads as an input ofthe load optimization process (e.9. load
shedding).

17 .8 lnputs from loads, sensors and forecasts

Requirements on accuracy and measuring range
Provision must be made to allow the measurement and recording ofenergy consumption throughout the major pafis
of the installation, to provide for the management of that consumption. Accumcy of measurement should at least
comply with the following:
- the meter at the origin ofthe loads must be accumte for billing purposes and can be used for the measurement
ofthe efficiency ofthe whole installation
- at a lower level it may be necessary to provide measurement with an accumcy allowing sub-billing within
the same entity. For example, a company such as a hotel lray wish to charge the departrnent for catering
separately lrom the depafiment in charge ofenteftainment
- at the lowest level of the final circuit directly powering loads it can be enough to provide information for
following trends without precise needs for cuirent to power conversion.

Meas[ement is a key parameter to detennine the efficiency ofthe installation giving the user an awareness of his
or her consumption. Consequently, device accuracy and measuring range must be adapted to the intended use, as
close as possible to the loads.

17 .9 Loads
Loads should be classified legarding their use/s acceptance of load shedding. Some loads, such as infomation
technology equip[.rent systems, computers and TV sets, are not suitable for load shedding. Others, such as heaters,
reliigeratols and electric vehicles, can accept a load shedding for up to a certain length of time without any impact
on their service.

For each type of load, an acceptable duation ofshedding in normal conditions should be determined.
NOTE 1: Examples ofacceptable durations ofshedding are 50 ms for a lamp and l5 minutes for a refrigerator or heate.

_ 51!
 NoTE 2: Infomation on the ability ofloads to accept. ol nor. load shed.lins
and rhe coresponding duration(s) is usetul.
Energy sensors
Energy-sensing devices should be ol at least the same class
as the energy perfbnnance and monitoring devices
defined in Amex D of BS EN 61557- l2

Forecasts

.", be used as inputs to the energy efliciency management system,

such as weather and occuparcy
11..".""1.r::

Data logging
Historical data, where available, can be an input lbr making energy
demand fotecasts.
To achieve a design capable of delivering a high level of
energy efficiency, all available erergy consumption data
should be taken il]to account.

17 .'10 lnputs from the supplies: energy availability and pricing, smart
metering
The user should consider infornation conceming the energy
avairabirity and pricing which rnay vary with time.
where the supply is a local source. the user should consider
the minimum and/or the maximum available power and
define the price ofthe corresponding energy based on the total
cost ofownership including fixed and variable costs.
17.11 lnformation for the user: monitoring the electrical installation
The installation should be designed to enable the measurement
of its total consumption in kwh for. every hour of
each day This data, and the related cost of e[ergyinfolrlation, shoukl be logged and stored for a minimum ofone
year and be accessible to the user.
NOTE: MuJtiple years ofdata can bc usefLrl foI eflecrivc treid analysis.

In addition. by thc use ofsub-netcri[g fol examp]e, the installation

should be clesigned to enable rhe recording and
saving of data for the consumptior of individuar or grouped
roads totaling 97 % ofthe total load.
An energy efliciency rnanagenlellt system comprises monitors for the whole
electrical installation, including
loads, local production and storage. It can [ranuaily (easiest cases) or automatica]iy (most
situations) monitor the
electrical installation so as to allou optirrization oithe overall
cormumption ofthe systern, taring inio account tr,e
user requirements and the irrput parameters coming fiom the public
electricity .uppiy ,et*o.tl local eiectricity
production and storage, the loads. sensors, and forecasts
etc.
17.'t2 Efficiency measures for equipment
Motors and controls
An AC induction motor will consume mo[e energy than it actually
needs when operated at less than full-load
conditions. This excess consurnption of energy is dissipated by
the motor in the form of heat. A better choice of
motor and motor control will improve the global energy efficiency
ofthe electric motor system.
Motors with a rated output of0.75 kw 375 kw must ineet either
the IE3 efficiency level or the IE2 level and be
equipped with a variable speed drive. The energy efficiency
classes are as lbllows:
- IE2 (High eflciency)
- [E3 (Premium etliciency)
- IE4 (Super premium etlciency).
NoTE 'l: Commission Regulation (EC) No 640/2009, as amended, implementing
Directi ve 2005132/EC of the Europcan
Parliamert a1ld ofthe cotncil with regard to ecodesign requireneots
for elect c motols. Reference may also be
made to BS EN 60034-30-l Rotating electlical machines: Efficiency
classes of linc operated AC rnotors
(IE code).

As about 95 % of the operating cost of a motot' cornes from its electrical

energy consumption, adopting a higher
energy elliciency class according to BS EN 6003,r-30-1, especialry
for high-Juty applications, .url., ,'igrrin*r,
energy.

consideratiol should be given to the use of motor starters, or other motor

contuol devices such as variable speed
drives, to achieYe higher energv eiliclencr. panicularlv for eflicient
management ofenergy for intensive consumption
applicarion. {e p. qou cootrol ot l,rn..
nJrllp.. air corlpres.ors.;.
 Exarnples of aspects to be considered are:
- reducing electrical energy consumption
- optimizing the rated power
- reducing the inrush curaent
- reducing roise and vibration, in this way avoiding mecharical damage and failurcs within the air conditioning
or heating systent
- better contol and better accuracy in achieving required flow and pressure.
NOTE 2: h industry, it is understood that 60 0/o of consumed electricity is used to tum motors and 63 % of this energy is
used for applications such as pumps and fans.

Lighting
Lighting can represelrt a large amount ofelergy consumption in an electrical installation, depending upon the type
of lamps and luminaires selected for each application. Liglrting control is one ofthe easiest ways to improve energy
efficiency. Therefore, careful consideration should be given to lighting control. The type oflamp, ballast switchgear
and controlgear should be taken irto consideration when applying lighting control. Building regulations have
speciflc requiren.rents on the selection of luminaire types for locations, the minimum required energy performance
of luminaires and energy consumption per square metre (mr) ofthe installatio[.
NOTE: Solutions fol lighting control can irnprove the energy emciency by more than 50 o%. These systems should be flexible
ald designed for the comfort of thc users. The solutions can range from very small and local, such as with timer
and occupancy sensors, up to sophisticated customized and centralized solutions that are palt of complete building
automatioll systems.

To operate lighting only when and where needed, permanent control oflighting may be implen.rented by using, for
example:
- movement detectors
- dimming controls
- timed switches
- light-sensitiveswitches
- constanl brightness conlrol".

Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)

Considemtion should be given to:
- the choice ofHVAC equiprnent depending on the installatior stlxcture and usage
- the approp ate control system to optimize environment control (e.g. temperature, humidity, etc.) depending
on the usage and occupancy of individual spaces.
NOTE: An example is a heatirlg system controllcd by a timer and thermoslat monito ng the temperature threshold according
to tbe expected occupa[cy.

17 .13 Distribution system

Wiring systems
The cross-sectional areas ofconductors may be optimized to reduce losses.

The electrical infrasrrucrure may be oprirnized b1 locating tlre power soulce at an appropriate position to minimize
circuit lengths.

Tbe impact of thermal losses. offload consumption and on-load energy consumption of equipment connected in
the wiling system, e.g. switchgear and controlgear, power monitors and relays included in an electrical circuit, is
negligible compared to the energy used in the load and in the energy transportation.

Power factor correction

Reduction of reactive current improves electrical energy efliciency by, for example, reducing thermal losses in
wi ng systems.

Where a reduction ofreactive cuuent is l equired, the optimized level ofreactive curent should be determined. This
Jevel generally depends on t)re public electricity supply contract.

s'6
ln order to reduce reactive curent, the following may be implemented:
- selection of curent-usilg equipment with low reactive current component
- systerns for compensation of reactive energy by using capacitors.
NOTE: Harmonic distortion rate ardvoltage inpulse are important considerations for selecting capacitor banks. The provisio[
ofharmoiic filters may need to be considered.

Energy
It is of prime importance, in terms ofelectrical energy e{frciency, to ascertain by either calculation or measgrement,
the energy consumption oleach item ofcurrent-using equipment.

Load profile
Measurement ofthe energy used is necessary to give a load profile. This should be over a period of a minirnum of
24 h to give a reasonable estimate of load pr.ofile.
NOTE: The time period ofrneasurement is typically from every l0 mins to I hour The time period varies depending on the
Lrsage. zone and the sector ofactivity, and also the season (especially for lighting and HVAC).

Voltage drop
Voltage drop reduces energy efficiency ofthe electrical installation.

Where the voltage drop measuremert is required, voltage measurements should be made on the curent-using
equipment ard at the origin ofthe circuit seNing the curent-using equipment.

517
 STATU TO RY -= JT; :IT;J[:::':]I,=' MEMO RAN DA
1. In the United Kingdom the following classes ofelectrical installations are required to comply with dre Statutory
Regulations indicated below. The regulations listed represent the principal legal requirements. Infomation
conceming these regulations may be obtained ftom the approp ate authority also indicated below.

Provisions relating to electdcal installations are also to be found in other legislation relating to parlicular activities.

(i) Distributors' installations
gcncrally- subject to certain
exemptions
(ii) Buildings generally subiect to
certain exemPtiorls
Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity
RegulatioDs 2002 as amended
Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity
Regulations (Northern Ireiand) 2012
The Building Regulations 2010
(as amended) (1br Englald and Wales)
The Building (Scotland) Regulations 2004
(as amended)
Health and Safety Executive
Secretary of State for Scotland
Secretar,v of State for Business, Energy
and Industrial Strategy
DepartmeDt of Enterprise, Trade and
Investmeflt
Ministry of Housing, Communities
and local Government
The Scottish Goveinment

Brlilding Regulations (Northern Ireland) Department of Finance and

2012 Personnel
(iii) \\rork a.tivitl Places ofwork. The Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 Health and Safety Executive
Non donestic installations as amended

The Electricity at Work Regulatioos Health and Safety Executive for

(Northern lrelal1d) 1991 Northern Ireland I

(iv) Cinematograph installations Cinematograph (Safety) Regulations 1955, The Secretary or State for the Home
I
as arnend-.d mad-. under the Oflice, and The Government
"cottish
Cinematograph Act, 1909, and/or
Cinematograph Act, I952
(v) Machinery The Supply ofMachinery (Safety) Department for Business, Energy and
Regulations 2008 Industrial Strategy
h-i) Theatres and other places Conditions of licence under:
licensed for public (a) in England and Wales, The Local
entertaioment, music, (a) Department for Culture, Media a1ld
Covemment Ljcensing Act 2003
dancing, etc. Spoft
(b) in Scotland, The Civic Government (b) The Scottish Government
(Scotland) Act 1982
(\ii) High voltage luminous tube As (a) and (b) above As (a) and (b) above
signs

:. Failure to comply in a consumer's installation in the United Kingdom with the requirements of Chapter 13 of
3S 7671:2018. Requirements for Electrical Installations (the IET Wiring Regulations) places the distributor in the
:.rsition of not being compelled to commence or, i1r cellain circumstances. to continue to give, a supply of energy
:-r that iDstallatior.
--
nder Regulation 26 ofthe Electricity Safety, Quality alrd Continuity Regulations (ESQCR)" any dispute which [ray
.:ise between a consumer and the distributor having rel'erence to the consurer's installation shall be detemined by
. rerson norninated by the Secretary of Statc (or the Scottish Govemuent in relatioo to disputes arising in Scotland)
. the applicatiol'r ofthe consumer or collsumer's authorized age]rt or the distlibutor.
,:der Regulation 26 ofthe Electdcity Safety. Quality and Contirruity Regulatiors (Nofihem Ireland) 2012 (ESQCR
\1r 2012)" any dispute which may arise benveen a consumel and the distributor having reference to the consumeL's
:iailation shall be determined by a pcrson nolninatcd by the DepafiuleDt of Entelprise, Trade and Investment on
:.= application ofthe consumer or consumer's authorized agent or the dist butor.

-5_
i
 RegrLlatiorl28 olthe ESQCR 2002 (or ESQCR(Nl)2012) requires distributols ro provide thc fbllowilg infonnatiol
to relevant persons free olcharge:
1'he maximun prospective short-circuit cuncnt at the supply tert'lrinals
The rnaxirrul eafih loop impedancc olthe earh tault path ourside the irlstallation (Ze)
The type and rating ofthe distributor's protective device or deyices lcarest to tbe supply tenlinals
The type of eafthing systcut applicable to the colluectior
The nrulrber ofphases ofthe supply
TJre fi'equencyofthe supply and the extent ol tlte pet.trritted variatior.rs
The voltage olthe supply and the extent olthe pe nitted variatiors.

3. Where it is irtended to use protective multiplc eathing the distributor and the colrsurrer must comply with the
ESQCR 2002 (or ESQCR(NI)2012).

4. Fol further guidance on the applicatiorl of the Electricity at Work Regulations (iuclucling the Nonhem Ireland
version), referelce rnay be rnade to the following publication:
(i) Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 Cuidance ou Regulatiorls (HSM5).

5. For installations in potentially explosive atmospheres tet'erence shoulcl be ntacle to:

(i) the Electr-icity at Work Regulations 1989
(ii) the Dangerous Substances and Explosive Atrrospheres RegulatiorN (DSEAR) 2002
(iii) the Petroleum (Consolidatior) Regulations 2014
(iv) tbe Equipment and Protcqtive Systems Iflterded lor Us!' in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Regulatiorrs
2016
(v) relevant British or Haunonized Standards.

Under the Petroleuln (Consolidation) Regulations 2012 Petroleulr Enfotcing Authorities are empowerecl to grzlr
licences in respect of premises where petroleum spirit is srored and the autho ties Inay attach stich conditions a:
they think fit, the requirelncnts may vary liom orrc local authority to arother. Guidance lnay be obtailed fiont the
Energy Instilute (APEA/IP) publication Design, Constluction- Modificatiol, Maintenancc antl Decommissioning of
Filling Stations.
6. For installations on caravan parks, the lequirements ol the licensing authority should be ascertained. Model
Staldards were issued by the Depan[ent of the Elvilonn]ent in 1977 ulder the Caravan Sites ancl Coutrol of
DevelopmeDt Act 1960 as guidance 1br local aLrthorities.

7. For ilstallations in thcatres and other placcs ol entertainme[t the requircmeuts ofthe licensing authority should
be asceftained. Guidance o[ the recomr]reldiltions lbr places of entefiair]mert are available in ltchnical Standar.ds
for Places ol Entertainrnent issued by 'l'hc Association of British Theatre Teclxicians. The Chartcreci llrstitute ol
Enviromnental Health, The District Surveyors Association and The Institute o1'Licensing.

8. The Electrical Equipmcnt (Sat'ety) Regulations 2016. adnrinistered by the Depafiment lbr tsusiness, Energr
and Indust al Stmtegy (BEIS), contain requirements lor saI'ety ot equiprnent designed or suitable for general use.
Infomratior 01r the application ofthe Regulations is given il guidance issued by BEIS.

9 The Plugs and Sockets etc. (Sat-ety) Regulations 1994 rrade Lmder thc Consltnler Safety Act 1978- adrninisteretl
by the Department fbr Business, Energy and Industrial Stmtegy, contains requirements for the saf'ety of plugs.
sockets, adaptol's and luse links etc. designed lbr use at a voltage ofnot less than 200 volts.

10. The Health and Salety (Saf'ety Signs and Signals) llegulations 1996 r'equire ernployers to plovicle sat'ety srgrls.
Guidance frorn the Health and Saf'ety Execulive L64. Sat'ety Sigls and Signals. specilies signs includiug emergerrcr
esc!pe. first aid and fir'c saletl sien..

ll. Tl]e Mallagement of Health atd Safety at Work Regulations 1999 require ernployers and se'lt-ernployed persons
to assess risks to workers and othe$ who rnay be allectc'd by their work ot br"rsiness. 'fhis is intelcled to euable thenl
to identify rneasurcs they need to take to comply with the lar,v. Guidance liorn the Health and Safety Executr\ I
INDGl63 gives advice on tltese regulations. For the pulposes of BS 7(r7l a risk assessmerlr sbould involve an
appropriare clecn icrlll sLillc.l pelson.

12. The Ptovision and Use olWork EqLripment Regulations i 99tl require curployers to cnsute that all wcuk equipneni
is suitable for the puqtose tbr rvhich it is LLsed, is propelly maintaincd ancl that applopriate training is given. The
Health and Strf'ety Execuli\ e has publishcd an Apprlved Code ol Plactice L22. Saie use ofu,ork ecluipmcnt, which
gives advice that has special legal statr.rs.

360
 I3 ' Thc E Iectromagn.tic crrnlpatibilit\ Regu lations 201 6 pr ovide requirerre:--:. :;: :. ei:rical an6 electronic products
lor electlomagnetic cornparibi lin.

Other Reguiations televant to electrical installation include:

The Personal Protective Equipnlert at Work Regulations 2002

(Eulopean Directive 89/656/EEC. HSE publication L25)

The Wo*piace (Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulations 1992

(European Directive 89/654/EEC, HSE publication L24)

The Manual Handling Operations Regulations 1992

(Europear Directive 90/269IEEC. HSE publication L23)

The Wort at Height Regulations 2005

The Corstruction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015

I
(European Directive 92157lEEC, HSE publication L153).
I

15' In Novembcr 1988 the European electrical standards body CENELEC agreed
on hamonizatiol of low voltage
electricity supplies within Europe (CENELEC document HD 472 sl), implemented I

by BS 7697 Nominal vottages

fol low voltage public electdcity supply systems. The measure is intended to harmonize nrains
electricity s,pplies
at 230 v wjthin EuIope. CENELEC has proposed three stages ofharmonization.
Tu,o stages ofharnronization have
taketr place, these being shown below.

Effective date Nominal voltage Permitted tolerance Permitted voltage range

Pre-1995 240 v +6%t 6% 225 .6 - 254.4 V
I January 1995 230 V +10%t 6yo 2t6.2-253.0y
Distribution Code fofIicensed Distribution Operators ofCreat B tain]
The Electricity Act 1989 (as amended by the Utilities Act 2000 and the Energy
Act 2004) requires the DNos under
rhe telms of their licences to produce and cornply with the Distribution
Code.
The Distribution Code has to be complied with by the DNO and by potential
and existing Generato$. Suppliers ancl
CLlstomers connected to or seeking connectiou to the DNO's distr-ibution
systcm.
ll' Thc Construction Products Regulatiol1. adn]inistered by the Ministry of Housing. Cornmrurities and Local
(;ovemn'lent, lays down requirements relating
to obligatioirs of manufacturers in .elpect of tcstjllg. ..r,itying
':nd placing upon the malket, products intended for permanent installation in buildilg.s and conshultion
ruorks.
The electlical proclucts covered are 'Power. control and comnulication
cables' in respect of their reacrjon to nre
:erforntance The Regulation empowers Member States to deten ne levels olperfolnance
reqr.rired for parlicular
:nstallations ln the UK- MHCLG has lot exercised these powers in respect
ofreaction to flre for cables. Guidance
:lay be given elsewhere, inclr"rdilg in Eutopean and British Standards. For example, guidance 1br te1ecornmunication
: rbling is in BS 6701 Telecomnunic.ttion.t e(lttipment an(l telecommlolicatiotls cdbliig-
Spetification li)r instctlldtion.
', t',ttiott ttttJ tnoitrtenttttt c.

i:r; _eenericreactiolt to fire requir.ernents lol all cables are given in EN 50575 potter. <,onhvl Lud
contn?unicctliotl
. - (./r/, , /,,/ q,,trtl tffli, ,tri,ttt. ifi constructiotl ttor.ks subject to req(.tio]t
l.
'. - lrtrerncIt: elcctrical. nreclrarrical.
lo.fire rcquiretltctlts. (AII other
constructional, transmission rernain in existing ptoduct standards.)

d'""\
e**" ;

fr= 361
 APPENDIX 3 (tnformative)
TIME/CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS OF OVERCURRENT

PROTECTTVE DEVICES AND RCDs

FUSES:

This appendix gives the time/current characteristics ofthe following overcurent protective devices:
Figure 3,A I Fuses to BS 88-3 - fuse system C
Figures 3,A2(a)
& 3A2(b) Serni-enclosed fuses to BS 3036
Figues 3A3(a)
& 3A3(b) Fuses to BS 88-2 flise systems E (bolted) and G (cJip-in)
Figure 3A.3(c) Fuses to BS 88-2 luse system E (bolted)

CIRCUIT.BREAKERS:
Figure 3,A4 Type B to BS EN 60898 and the overcurrent chamcter.istics ofRCBOs to BS EN 61009-l
Figure 3A5 Type C to tsS EN 60898 and the overcurent characteristics of RCBOS to BS EN 6l 009- l
Figure 34.6 Type D to BS EN 60898 and the overcunent chamcte stics ofRCBOs to BS EN 61009-l

In all ofthese cases time/cunert characteristics are based on the slowest opcratiflg timcs 1br compliance with the
Regulatiols and have been used as the basis fot detenninilg the liuriting values of earth 1'ault loop impedalce
prescribed in C hapter 41 .

Maximum earth fault loop impedance

Regulatiol 4l L3.2 specilies maxiurum disco[reclion times for circuits.

The nlaximrtm valtLes of eaflh fault loop irnpedancc to achieve the disconnectiolr time vary with the differelt
rypes
of protective devices and also betwecn manuf'acturers. Whelever possible clesignei.s should use the ntalrufacture/s
spccific data.

Altematively, thc impedance values give[ in 1ables 4l.3 and 41.6 can be used for BS EN 60898 circuitbreakers.
These values arc far tnote onerous ancl in sonre cases may be difficult to achieve without illstalling larger sized cpcs.

Regulations 41 1.4.4 to 411.4.204 state that the maximun eafth fault loop impedance tbr a pr.otective device is:

Uo C'n.
- '
I,
where:
UO is the nominal AC nns liDe voltage to Earth.

l. is the current in arnperes (A) causirg operation ofthe protective device within the specilied titne.
C,,,,,, is thc minimLLln voliage f'aoto. ro take account ofvoltage variations depcnding oD tirne and plaoe" changing of
lIilD\lblnrcr Iaps rIJ orhr'r' ioD.iJcratrUns
NorE: For a low voltage supply givcn in accorclancc with the Electricity safcty. euality antl continuity
Regulations (ESQCR) as amerded, C,,,,, is given the value 0.95.

The tabulated values are applicable lbr supplies from distribution retwork opemtors. For other supplies the desiguer
will need to determine the norninal voltage and calculate Z, accordingly.

I able 3A gives the tirne/cLrrreut perfbnnance criteria for RCDs to BS EN 61008- I and BS EN 61009- l.
 When impedance measurenents are nrade at ambient ternperature the procedure hereinafter described may be
followed to take into accouut tl'te ificrease ol resistance of the conductors \\ ith the jncrease of temperature due to
load current. For TN aud TT systel1]s in u,hich protection by automatic disconnection is provided by overcunent
protective devices, such measurements are made to verify the maximu|n impedance value stated by the device
manufacturer is not exceeded. hr the absence of manufacturerc' data, the values stated in Chapter 41 tables may be
used.

The requirements of Regulation 411.4.4 or 411.5.4. as appropriate, are considered to bc met when the measured
value ofearth fault loop impedance satisfies the following equatior:

z,(",)<0i9t'@
where:
Zdn, is the measurecl impedance ofthe carlh fault cunent loop np to the most distant poini ofthe relcvant circuit from
the origin ofthe installation (O)
U0 is the notrinal AC nr, s line voltage to Eanh (V)
[" is the curent in amperes causing operation of the pl otective device within the time statcd in Table 41. I or within
5 s according to the conditions stated in Regulation 4l L3.2.3
C.r" is the minirnum voJtage factor to take account ofvoltage variations depending on time and place, changing of
transfomler taps and other considerations.
NOTE: For a low voltage supply given in accordance with the Electricity Safety, Quality and Continuity
Regulations (ESQCR) as amended. C,",,, is given the value 0.95.

NOTE: The above is one method ofconecting fbr thc effects of ten'rperatur-e difference: other methods are not precluded.

TABLE 3A - Time/current performance criteria for RCDS to BS EN 61008-1 and BS EN 61009-1

Rated residual Residual 'l rip time Residual Residtal Trip

Trip time
RCD type opemtillg current current m-A cureut mA cLlrrent lrA time
Dts lns
Ir,, rnA ms

l0 10 20 50

l0 i0 60 150
General 200 150 max. 500 40 max.
100 100 100 nrax.
Non-delay
100 100 600 1500

500 s00 r 000 2500

100 100 200 500 40 min.

130 min. 60 mir.
Dclay'S' 100 300 600 1500 150
500 lnax. 200 max.
max,
500 500 t000 2500

'.-'

i
 .f

,:
,.i
!c; E
-a?
a?" 2 e

c*
!h
+ =. :
I ?, ::l
!l
il .J
>l
e! gl ilil
E!

:
II a
tll
I tr
I,IJ
rL
ir
o
E
F
z
^ut
E.
l f
o
uJ

F
"l O
IJJ
(I
;l (D

tr
o-
o
E
o

o
d)
o
()
o
€
U)
a0
o
o
o
o
l!
I

.9 soNocss'f t^ilr
II

364
 2 Yr

',!
: f
ar.

a!
'.)
5! -!

.E

=
o p!)
EE *luF
tl

o
tu
t
ITJ
o-
=
o
E
t-
F
o
z
llJ
?t t
f
o
IJJ

F
t
C)
IIJ
o-
o
o
u
o

SONOCSS'l1,1llI

-.---
 -42
,?

a
UI
d
IJJ
o-
=
o
E
F
z
IJJ
t
'
l
o
IJJ

F
o
UI
o-
o
o
(0 u
o-
o
o
o
o
o

o
tl
o
(.)

o
.I
E
o
U)
I

a
(\

.9 soNocss'=hilI
lI-

Jbo
 'i \J

trE
an
.ES

+-

o
UJ
IJ
tuJ
! t!
I

2 =
Q
E

iz lj
z
IJJ
! 3tr
-/
(-)
uJ
J.l
F
O .J
UJ
0-
o
o
u
(L
!

(o
.9 soNoc3s'llNlr
lI-

_:{
 .2 t\
I
a

.P
i* .t el
.,1
.c

=il
ET \, ;l.l
:' oo

i ,=
!.,1-
-t<
--t-
7a
,.1

;t
-i
cl_
ilil
e! ili
trg

I
?
u ;

ll Ll
a
JI ul I r / tlfl
uJ
t
H r i
IJJ

) m 0.
E
L

lI
_-[ ffi E

L ) r-t
IJJ

--l t
tr
x n]H
=vt l
o
UJ

--1ttn - m F
o
o L Iu
a
---a- uJ

G
ail th
IJJ
o
E
o
-tl
t)
AD
il
o
o =
$
--lffi
=
@
@ m
at,
m II
o
o
o
o
II
l!
I

c,c

.9
lr soNocfs'fntr

368
 :

.J:

=
ll I
E
2

'1 ! 2
::
T
7
t- I B
ad
3uJ
o
u,l

o-
2
=
o
E
ts
z zt!
t
l I

t
f
o
uJ

F
=
o
uJ
o-
-a
=o
-E o-

=
soNoSSs '31ilr
 ,.. ; .:

; ozL,l

:-: ov
'-,

: =:
o
l,u
gaY!! d,
IJJ
r 3e E-E o-

o) =
o
o E -E -:' -i! ; o
E
(9 v qzt
v 00t = 2z i = F
ul
to v08
z
o
o V€9
ee.
- IJJ

*e! f
tl v09 e I =E
E; e o
o
o v0t o9 r d i
llJ
() vzt
E,
v9z F
(.)
tr
N v0z IJJ
@ o-
o) v9t o
@
o o
(o t0-
v0t
uJ
o
o v9
o

o
.!
o

=o
.!o
c0

F
I

d)
.9)
lJ- soNoc=s'31ilr

370
 Q,*
d6?
-- Ar .:
F9!;-

:l,
.=a !-
2, 1
-u'2a

t+ yc
!; ?9
: o!
F

l.i! o
.9 t +s uI
&
?ieaots uJ
)e AE
o:;.:
+Z o.
.==ivG
i A -9. c. =
o
!E !:: E
io vszr = 2t Z = tj
zlU
o ,00I
5 vos 3tr
u veg oi9 uo
:)
fl vos o
I vot :*E F J uJ

fi vzc F
(J
3 vsz uJ
I voz o-
U)
E vgr. o
a
o d
a o-
3 v 0!
zEI
q v9

SoNOC:IS'3l,IlI
 01€

TIME, SECONDS ll
(o
(,
5
I
-.t
o
tr
9.

=i
o
!,
o
a
6A o
TE
an
m
! 10A z
o)
7 o
o
a '16 A
@
@
@
! 204 !l
m
o 254
-{ n
32A o
m 40A @
o o
t 50A
C g o
n = =:: 63A
F tE
(,
7 m 80A
z 't 00 A
m
z
,+ i.i a=- o)
'125 A
=
o
: . q 1= o
o
(o

!= l! d;,
m
n
m
a =?1-
;4r

.^)

E;7;

r,!13 a

=; t 2

= c..
 a-
ae n-.
-> o\ .=
F9!Z-
Ezl?
.? "a !2.
-u'la
!r:l-;
i*?t
E€ YF
!- .= e v
3 qd
=

@
uJ
t
IJJ
o o:;.: o-
=
o
IE E
:!E:
fo vszr
'i.ZE) F
z
o V 00tr
(o vo8 a.:: 9- -ul
at
zur veg il;.e: f
S vos o
ljJ
.9 vot o+t 5 E

$ vze F
o
$ vsz UJ

) I voz o-
@
o
J E vgr.
I @ d
o O)
a0
o.
3 vol.
Z
z
JJ
T V9

SGNOCAS'StrllI

__-L
 'l * ,:-.

{'2 i -,
La e=
E,r\a
.?6EZ
i o rr:)

ia?2
Ei
L.=
vH
9 \J

^E

.: ! =s o
IJJ
iir9! Pt d.
?ii +a IIJ
o-
=
o)
o
o
o v 9zl
r0 v 00t lj
zut z
v08 ^1trlrJ
o
dl ve9 't
o * o: ! f
v09 i ;: =aE o
to VO' UJ
o
@ vz€ F
o o
t v9z lrJ
v0z o-
(E o
@
O)
v 9t o
d.
@
o
(0
o.
v 0t
zuJ
tt,
r0
o
I
J
o
q,
.cI

=fa
o
o
o
o
P
(0
I
: ci!
(t
.9 soNocss'fl,\llr
lJ-
 APPENDIX 4 (tnformative)

CURRENT,CARRYING CAPACITY AND VOLTAGE DROP

FOR CABLES

CONTENTS
Tables:
1A1 Schedulc of Installation Methods iu relation to conductors and cables
142 Schedule ollnstallation Methods o1'cables (ilcluding Rel'ereuce Merhods) fbr deterrrrining cun-ent-carryrn!
-calryrng
capacity
1A3 Schedule ofcable specificatiors and culent rating tablcs
181 Rating hctols (C'a) fol anbient ai| ternperatures other than 30 "u
182 Ratjng fhctors (Ca) 1br ambienl glound tenrpelatures othel than 20 'Cl
183 Rating factors (Cs) for soil resistivity, tbr cables buried dilect or in underground conduit
184 Rating 1'auors (Cd) 1br depihs of iaying otl'rer than 0.7 rn lbr dilect buric'd cables aud cables in bulied ducts
185 Rating lirctors 1br cables haviug ruote thal4loaded cores
1C1 Ratirtg lirctols (Clg) lbl ole circuit or one multicore cable or 1br a group ofcircuits or multicore cables
1C2 Rating thctors (Cg) lbl nrole than onc cilquit, cables buried directJy in the grourd
1C3 Ratilg l'actors (Cg) 1br urole tltan oue circuit. calrles in ducts buricd il1 thc grourrd
1C4 Ratirlg 1'actors (Cg) lbr groups ol nore than ouc nulticore cable oo trays or cable laddels
1C5 Rating thcturs ((lg) 1br groups ofole ot nrore circuits ofsiugle-core cables on trays or cable ladders
1C6 Ratirg lactors (Cg) fbl cables elclosed iu infloor colrcrete toughs

a1 Sirtgle-core DoD arlrrouretl, with or rvilhoLrl shcath

4D2 Mr.rllicore rron-armourccl
70 'Ci thennoplasLic
1D3 Silgle-core aluoured (non nragrrclic arlrour)
insulatecl cables
1D4 M r"rll icorr"' ar niorn cd
1D5 I'-lat cabl!' wjth protecii!c co[ductol
4E1 Single-cole not-alrnoured, u'ith or without sheath
ttE2 Mullicore lou-annoured
90 'C themlosettirlg
lE3 Singlc-colc armorrred (non-mirgnctic anlour')
Copper conductors
E4 Multicole aurour-cd
60 oC thelnroscttiDg irsulated flexible cables
90 "C and 180 'Cl thelmosetting insulated flexible cables Flexibie cables
Hexiblc cables
Bale and exposed to tolrch, or having an ovelall
thel.]uoplastic covering Mineral
Bare ald neitlrer exposed to touch uor in contact with insulated cables
conbustible rnaterials
Single-corc lol-arruoured, uith oI willrout sheath
Multicore non-armolred 70 "C themoplastic
--3 Single-core arnroured (nolr-flagltetic an]our) insulated cables
Multicore annouled
Siugle-core nol-annoLued, with or without sheath
-.2 MrLlticote non-anlouletl 90 'C thennoplastic
Single-cole aunouled (r'ron-magllctic annour) insLrlatetl cables

M u lliuor',.' alnouretl
i

__4=_
 r

APPENDIX 4 (tnformative)
CURRENT.CARRYING CAPACITY AND VOLTAGE DROP FOR

CABLES
INTRODUCTION

The recoutttrendations ol thrs appendix are iDtended to provide for a satisfactory life of conductors and insulation
subjected to llie thelmal eUects oi carrying curent tbl plolonged periods of time in normal service. Other
collsideratiolls ill'l'ccl thc cltoice of c|oss-sectional arca of conductors" such as the requirements for protection
agaitrst electtic shock (( hrptcr 4l ). prolection against thcflral effects (Chapter 42), overcurrent protection (Chapter
43). roltage dlop (Seetion i25 ). aDd lioriting tenlpcr.atures fbr tenrinals ofequipment to which the conductors are
curnected (Section 526).

This appel-Idix applies to oon sl]eatlled arrd sheathed cables having a nolrinal voltage rating not exceeding I kV AC or
I ,5 KV DC',

The i'alues in-Iables 4DlA to ,lJ4A have been derired jn accordance uith the methods given in BS 7769 (BS IEC
602ti7) usi[s sttch dttttetrsions as specified in the i]rtemational standard tEC 60502-l and conductor resistances
given in BS EN 60228. Knorvl practical vatiations iu cable conshuction (e.g. form of conductor) and
rlrarlutacturillg toicliitrces result in a splead of possible dilnensions and hcnce current-carying capacities for each
cotldttctor sizc. Tabuiated currcut-canying capacities lrave been selected in such a way as to take account of tl']is
spread of virlues ll ith salety and to lit- ou a srrooth cun e when plotted against conductor cross-sectional area.

Fot tliulticorc cables baring conductots with a cross-sectioual area of25 nrmr or largel either circular or shaped
condLrctols are penllissible. Tabulated r,alues have becn dcr-ived from dimensions appropriate to shaped conductors.

All the ctr[etrt-ciurying capacities giveu ale based on the ambient teflperature and conductor/sheath operating
lcr'Ipcrature stated ir1 Tables 4D1A to 4F2A and 4CIA to 4J4A.

2 CIRCUIT PARAMETERS

2.1 Ambient Temperature

Thc cttrrent-carrying capacities iD tiris appendix aIc based upon the lbllou,ing reference ambient temperatures:
(i) For lon-shcrLthetl aud shcathcd cables in air. iu.espective ofthe Installation Method: 30.C
(ii) Fol bulicd crblcs. either dilectly in thc soil or in ducts in the ground: 20 oC.

Whcte the atlbicul tetnpt'rature in the intendcd location of the non-sheathed or sheathecl cables differs from the
tc'f'crcncc atnbieut tenrpel'atLrrc. thc appropl iate rating thctors given in Tables 4B I and 4B2 are to be applied to the
valttes of ctLretrt-carrying capacity set otn in Tables 4DlA to 4J4A. For buried cables. fuither corection is not
Irceded if thc soil tctnpetatute exccr'ds the sclected ambient tempemture by an amouflt up to 5 oC for only a few
u'ecks a year.
.lable
Thc' mting f'actors r n s 48 1 and 4ts2 do no1 take accoLrnt of the increase. if any, due to solar or other infrared
Iadiatiou. Whelc rton shcittllcd or shealhed cables are subiect to such radiation. the cuuent-carrying capacity may be
clerived by thc uredrods spcciliecl iu BS 7769 1BS IEC 60287).

2.2 Soil Thermal Resistivity

I'hc cutIeut-canling capacities tabulated in this appcndix tbr cables il the ground are based upon a soil thermal
lcsistivit), o1 2.5 K urtW antl arc inteuded to be applied to cables laid in and around buildings. For other
installatiolls. $helc in\estigalions cstablish lllorc acculate values of soil thermal lesistivity approp ate for the
load to be catliecl. the \alues of cunent-carrying capacity may be derived by the methods of calculation given in
BS 7769 (tsS lE( 60287) ol obrained fionr rhe cable manLLfacturer.

In locations rvltere ti'ie cfiecli\,e soil tllemral resistivity is higher than 2.5 K.rnlW, an appropriate reduction tn
culcllt-cartJing capacity shoLrld be rnade or tlrc soil irmnediately around the cables should be replaced by a rnore
suitable ,lraterial. Such cases can usually be recognized by vely dry ground conditions. Rating factors for soil
thenal resistivities odrcr dran 2.5 K.nrw ale given in Table 4Bi.

374
 2.3 Groups of cables containing more than one circuit
2.3.1 Methods of lnstallation A to D in Table 4A2
Cunent-caryiDg capacities giveu in Tables 4DlA to 4J4A appll'to:ingle circuits consisting of:
(i) two rorl-sheathed cables or trvo single-core cables. oL one t\ o-core cable
(ii) thlee lou-sheathed cables o[ tlxee singlc-cote cables, ot onc'three-cor" cable'
in the
Where more tron-sheatlted cables. other than bare mineral insulated cables not exposed to touch, are installed
same group, the group rating f'actors specified in Tables 4C1 to'+Cl need to be applied'

NOTE: The group rating l'actors have bccn calcL ated o[ the basis ofprolongcd stead,v-stale operation at a 100 7o ]oad factor for
all live conducror.s. Wherc the loading is less than 100 '% as t result of lhe .onditions of opetatior of the irstallation,
the glotip rating t'actors may be higher'

2,3.2 Methods of lnstallation E and F in Table 4A2

The culrent-carryi|g capacities ofTables 4DlA to 4J4A apply to these Reference Methods
For installations on perforated trays, cleats al1d sifirilar, current-canying capacities for both single circuits and
groups ate obtairred by multiplying the capacities give[ fbr the relevant arlangernents ofnon-sheathed or sheathed
iables in fiee air, as indicatetl il1 Tables 4D lA to 4J4A, by the applicable group ratirg facto$ given in Tables 4C4
4G I A
and 4c5. No group rating factors ale required {br barc mineral insulated cables not exposed to touch, Tables
and 4G2A refer.
NOTE 1: GroLp r.atilrg factors have been calcu]atcd as avclages lor thc Iange of conductor sizes. cable rypes and installation
condition considered. Attention is drawn to the notcs Lmder each table. In sotne instances, a more precise cal(:ulation
lray be requiled.
NOTE 2: Croup rating factors have been calculatecl on the basis llrat the group collsists ofsimilal, equally loaded non sheathcd
or shcathed cables. Whcr.c a group contains various sizes of lor-she:therl or sheathcd cablcs. ca[tion shorrld
be

exercised over thc curent loading of the smaller cables (see 2'3 3 below)'

NOTE 3: A gr.oup ofsirnilar cables is takcn to be a gr-oup whelc the cument-catryrllg capacity ofall the cables is based
o11 the

whcre the mnge of conductol- sizes iu the group spans not

same maxinrurn pcnnissible conductor tcopcrature and
nrore than thrcc adjaccnl sta[da1d sizes.

2.3.3 Groups of cables containing different sizes

.,ibulated group mtillg filctors are applicable to groups uonsisting ol suDilal equally loaded cables. Thc calculation
: r.ating lactors firr groups containing dillereln sizes ol equally loaded sheathed or non-sheatbed cables is
f'actols cantlot be tabulated but []tlsl be
-:leudc]nt ol the total numbcl in the glonp ancl lhe nix o1'sizes. SLrch
,.iculateii 1br each gr.otLl'r. Tlrc trrethod ol'calculatiol ofsucll t)ictors is outsidc the scope olthis appelldix. Two
.::cilic cxanrples ofrvhere suclt calculations nray b.'advisable arc gircn belorv'
2 .3.3.1 Groups in conduit systems, cable trunking systems or cable ducting systems
For a group contailing differeut sizes of non-sheathed oI sheathed cables in conduit systems, cable tnrnking
lstemi or iable clucting systems, a simple fonnula for calculation ofthe group rating thctor is:

..=+
-{n
rhere
is thc group ratilg factor

is the number ofcircuits in the group.

: groLtp raring ihctor obtained by this cquation \\,ill reclucc the dangc'r of o\ elloldinc dle srllallel sizes but may
u1tler-LLrilization ofthe larger sizes. Such uniler-utilizatiolr can be aroided illarge tnd small sizes of
ttort-
.,:io
:..ihed or slteatlted cable arc not mixed in the sal11e gloup.

: sc oi a nlethod of calculation specifically intended tbr gror.tps cot]taiuina dli'rer:rtt sizes ol uon-sheathed ot
-'.:hcd cablc iLr conduit will pt'oduce a tnore precisc gloup lalillg l'actor

: 3,3.2 Groups of cables on trays

a group contains dittlient sizes of non-shcathecl ot sheathed crrhl: l-,-.: :: lllil>I be exelcised olef
the
:ri
rnl lo;dilg ol the srraller sizcs. lt i: prcf'erable to Lise { rnethod of rriiu.::: : .::-rtrcalll ilrtended 1br glotLps
-:-:iuing ditll'rent sizes olnou-sheathcd or sheathcd cablcs.

_-r-_
 The group rating t'actor obtaincd in accordance s itir the lbmula in 2.3.3.1 will provide a value which rnay be safely
applicd. but which ruay Icsult u Lrnder- uiilr saii(rn

2.4 Conductors
Thc cunent-canying capacities and i, oitaga drop: rabulated in this appeldix are based on cables having solid conductols
(Ciass l). or sflandcd corrdLrciors (Class 2). cxccpr tbf Tabl('s 4F lA to 4F38. To obtai[ the correct cullel1t-calrying
capac ity or voltage drop tbl cable t1,pes s iir ilar to those coveled by Tables 4D l, 4D2,4E1 ar,d 4E2 but with flexible
conductol-s (Class 5), the tabulatcd values atc ntuitipiied by the lbllo\\'ing l'actols:

Cable size Cur reDt ralrying capacity Voltage drop

< i6 rrnll 0.95 1. 10

0.97 1.06

2.5 Other calculations

In addition to calculatioos rclarcd to crLflclll-calryillg capacity, overload protection and voltagc drop described
iD this appendix, otlter calcLllati(nrs ale also |equired 1oI the design of an electrical installatioll. These include
calcLrlatigps of fault cuffent undcr variolrs conditions. Thc equations given in Technical Repon PD CLC/TR 50480
are leconulelded for calculating cilcuit inrpc'dalces, tiu]t cu[ents and other parameters. National Annex NA of
PD ( LC/TR 50480 provides cietails of additional ancl altelnativc calculation methods that are intendsd fbr Lrse in
the UK.

The UK Natioual Annex includcs calculatiou Dtethods 1br the lbllowing:

(i) 1\ao non-shealhcd cables or tlvo singJc cote cablcs. ot one two-core cable
(ii) three non-sheathed cables or threc singlc-core cilbles. or one tltree-core cable
(a) Cablcs in stcel cottdLrit
(b) ln steel trunking
(c) Stcel wire annoutcd cablcs
(d) Exterral cpc in parallcl uirh iutuout
1c) Aluminiul s ire rmourcd single cotc cables.

3 RELATIONSHIP OF CURRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY TO OTHER CIRGUIT PARAMETERS

The relcvant symbols used il tlre R.gulatiorls !uc as tbllows:

I, the cu 'etrt-carrying capacity ofa cable tbl continuous service. under the particular installation conditions
coflcemed.
l, tbe value ofcunent tabLriilted iI this appcndix tbl the type ofcable and installation metllod concerned, for
il single circuit i11 thc arrbient Ierrpcrature stated in the curerGcanl,ing capacity tables.

I,. the dcsigr cunent ofthc circuit, i.e. thc culrcni illtended to be carried by the circuit in nomal service.
the lated culrcnt or cL lcnt seltirl-9 of lilc ptotectiVe device.

I. ihe opclating cul'rcltt (i.c. the t'usiirg culr!'ut oI trippirrg curreut fol tl]e conventional operating lime) ofthe
device plolecting the ci|crLit rgainst orctloatl.

a mtillg f'actor to bc applred rvhcrc inslailation coDditions difler frorn those fol which values ofcunenLcanying
thc'
capacity are tabulated in this appcnciix. The various ratilg tactors are identified as follows:
Cr fo| ambie nt tcnlpeLatul-c
Cc fbr circuits but ied itr the gtound
Ca fol depth of bulial
Cf tbr seuri-cuclosed tirsc tr-r BS 30-16
C,: for glouPing
Ci tbr tlicnrrai insulation
Cs tbl therrnal |esistivity of soil.
l'he rated cur'lcnt or sctling ol thc plotcctirc dcl ice (ln) r]1ust not be less than the design cun'ent (lb) o:
crLr'r'crlt
the circuit. at'ld thc ratcd clrrrL'ltt or cLtnent settiDg of thc protccti\e dcvice (In) Illust not exceed the lowest ofth.
cLlnent-ca[ying capaciti.-' {1,.) ol any uflltc coDcluctors ofthe citcttit.

376
 Where the overcLment device is irtended to a1'ford protection again l: n]ust lrot cxceed 1.45 lz and ln
nust not exceed lz (see paragraph 4 below).

Where the ovelcurrent device is irtended to al'ford fault current proteclion onl]. In can be greater thal] Iz and I] can
-I'he
be greater than I .45 Iz. protective dcvice musi be selected for compliance \\ lih Regulation 434.5.2.

4 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Where overloaci protectiou is requirerl, tl'te type of plotection does noi ailtrl the cunelt-carrying capacity ol a
cable tbr cortinuous service (Iz) but ir may all'ect thc choice olconductor sizc. The opclating conditions ofa cahle
are ilfltLcncecl not ollly by the limititrg conductor ter]lperatule tbr contitiuous 5en ice. but also by the condoctor
telrperature which lllight bc attailed during the corventional operating tit'De of the or erloarl protective device. in the
event ofan overload-

This rneans that the operalilrg cul.lent ol the ploteclive delice Dust r]ot excced 1.45 Iz. Where dre protectiYc device
is a lusc ro BS 8ll ser-ies. a circuit-bleakel ro BS EN 60E98 oI BS EN 60947-2 or a tesiclual current circuit-breaker
with irltegral overclur.ent protection ro tls EN 6l 009'1 (RCIBO). this requir emeut is satisficd by selecting a value of
L not less than llr.

h praetice. bccausc ol the standard steps in ratings of tises aud circuit-breakers, it is often necessary to select a
valire of t,, exceecling lb. l[ thar case. beeause i1 is also uccessaly for lz itt tuttt to be not less tlla[ the selected value
of ;r. thc choice of conductol closs-sectional alea n ay be die'tated by the ovelload conditions and the
cuuent-cauying ca1)acity (tz) oi'thc cottductors will l]ot always be til]]y rlilised.

lhe size leeded lbr a colducror protectecl against overload by a irs 3036 semi-ertclosed fise cal1 be obtained by the
use of a rating lacror. 1.45/2.= 0.725. which resuits ir the sarue degree ol protcctiorr as that atlbrded by other
gvcrloacl proteutive cleviccs. This tlclor is to be applied to the noninal rating ofthe filse as a divisor, thus indicating
the rriniDrunr value of I requir cd ofrhc colductor to be protected. In this case also, the choice ofconcluctot size is
dictated by the overloacl conditions and thc cun-ent-canyiug capacity (lz) oflhe conductols callrot be fully utilised.

Thc tabulated retlt-cal-ryillg capacilies tbr cablcs d ect rn ground ol in ducts i[ the grcund, given in this
cul
oC. Tire 1'actor- o I' L45 that is applied irr Regulation 43 3. I . 1 when
appendix, are based au iulbient terupcrattLle of 20
colsidering ovr-rload piotcction assulles that the tabulated cuffcnt-caffying capaoities rue based on an ambient
tenrpetature of 30 u(l. fo achieve the san re rlcglce of ovcllold pr-otcctiou where a cable is "in a duct in the ground"
or "turicrl di1ect" as coutpaled rvith other installation methods a rating l'actor of 0.9 is applied as a multipliel to the
tabulatecl curent-callyitrg capacity.

DETERMINATION OF THE SIZE OF CABLE TO BE USED

Haviug establishc,cl the desigl curreut 1Ib) ol the cilcuit undel considcmtion, thc appropriate ptocedure descrihed in
paragraphs 5.1 at1d 5.2 below wiil enable the desigrler to deter]uirle the size ofthe cable it will be Decessary to use.

-A.s it is uscluLl to idenrity the lengtlr ol'the cable lurr and thc pennissible voltage drop fol the
a preliprinary step
,::.rt' being supplied, as this nlay be an ovetricling cousideratiol'r lsee Secriott 525 and paraglaph 6 of this
"c1uipit.1t
appeltlixl. Thc pcrlnissiblc volrage drop in mV divided by lu aLrd by thr' leDgth of run, will give the value of
, oitage 4r.op jn nrVtA/m whicir can be toleratcd. A voltage drop rtot cxceeding that value is identified in the
appr.opliatc tablc and the co espondirrg ctoss-sectional arca ol cortductot needed on this accoutrt can be read otT
dilcctly beftrre auy othcr calculatiolls are lllade.

The conductor size lcccssuly fitrm cotrsicierariou ofthe couditious oflomral load atd ovcrload is then determined
\ll rati[g lactors at]'ectirrg Iz (i.c. Ibr lactots fbr arnbient terrperature, gloLtpillg and thenllal insLrlation) ca[, if
desircd, be applied to the values 01'Ir as tnulripiie[s. This involves a process o1'trial and elror uDtil a cross-sectional
area is r.eached so t|ar ; is not less rhan Ib and not lcss than In ofdny protective device it is illtended to select. ln any
- '-n ing
er cnt. if a r.ating lactor lor plotectio[ by a seuri-elqlosed Iirsc is rlecessary, this has to be appliecl to ln as a dilisor.
lt is therctbre'rrotc coll\,er)icllt to apply dll the iatirlg 1'actors to lu as divisors.

I his urethorl is used in itenrs 5.1 and 5.2 antl produces a value of cL[Te]rt and that value (or the next larger value)
;aD bc reailily located in the appropriatd tabLe of cLu-r'ent carrying capacity and the couesponditrg cross-sectional
rr!'a of conductot can be identilied dilectly. lt shoultl be noted that the value of Ir appearing against the chosen
;ross-sectional alca rs not Iz. It is rot oecessaly to kLrow Iz where thc size ofcouductot is choscu by this method.

5.1 Where overload protection is afforded by a device listed in Regulation 433'1'201 or

a semi-enclosed fuse to BS 3036

5.1.1 For single circu its

--,: . , l',.1 .':
(i) Dir iclc thc [ltedcLLr.raltt ol l]le prot..1i\ c dc\ icc ( lu) b1 lnl applii.r:]i. r.:.:rl! iiL.IoIs t'OI anlbiert
,': of dr'
tenlperiltlre ((.r) . soll thclnt.rl lc:rili\rl\ ((')rnddepthof btrri.tl (- : :: r: T'lbLes 48 I to 484'
 For cables installed aboie gtottrrd C. and C1
: I'
(ii) Ther tlrlhcr dLr iclc [ry ilny applical]le rating t'actor tbr thermal irsulatiou (Ci)'
or
(iii) Therl tir hcr divicle' by the applicable rating factor for the type ofprotective device
installation conditiol (C 1.. C.):

''
t C. c. ('a C, Ct C. Equation 1

(n) Whc[e the plotce ttr dcvice is a setDi-etrclosed fuse to BS 3036' Cr': 0 725 Other-wise Cr: 1

']
(b) Wheletirecatrleirlstallatiollrllethodis'ittaductintheglounrl'or'burieddirect''Cc:0'9Forcables
installed abovc gt'ound C. : l.

Thesizeofcablclob.usedi5lobcsuchlilatitsta]]ulatedcun.ent.calryingcapacity(I)iSnotleSSthanthevalueof
lated cufietlt ol thc proiccti\ e dc!icc adiusted as above'

5.'1.2 For grouPs

(i) In adclition ro rhe i'actols grven in 5. L I. clivide lhe rated curent
oftl]e pfotective device (In) by the applicabte
rating lilctor lbr stoLrping (( q) givcn in Tables 4Cl to 4C6:

''' c, c., c, c,r ci cr c,. Equation 2

that the cilcuits ofthe group are not liable

Ahemari\ely. t1 may bc obtainecl lforl1 thc tbilowing lbtmulae. provided
to sirnultaneorts ovetload:

', 'c" t.,C,CuC,Cr C. Equation 3

Equation 4

ThesizcofcablctoberLscilistobcSuchlhlllitstabulatedsingle.circuitcurlent.carryingcapacity(lt)isnotless
thanthevillueofllcalculateclttlaccordancewithcquatio],l2aboveol.wlreleequations3ald4areused,notless
thar] thc larger 01'lhc tesultittg t*o values of lt

5.2 Where overload protection is not required

WlrcrcRegulation.i3.i3lappltcs.andtlrccableulldelconsideratiolliSnotlequiredtobeplotectedagainst
or,erloacl. rhe clesign cun.cnt ol thc circuil (lb) is to be clividcd
by any applicable rating.factom, and the size ofthe
method colcemed is
cable 10 be uscd is to []c tr]"r lt' iut'ur"t"d tut'"nt-tu'-tf ing capacity ii; ior the installation
"'tr'
not less than the valuc of Ib adjLrslcd as above i'e';

,- lo
'' t L. f ,, L, cd c, c.
Equation 5

NOTE: Wherc ovcrioad prole.iion is not r equired C. -' l'

5.3 Other frequencies

T)re current-carrying capacity ofcables canJlng'
Currerlt latings statetl in the tables are lbt DC anci 50/60 Hz AC
capacity at 50 Hz' may be no more than
tbr c\ample. balancccl '100 Hz AL'coupaletl with thc ctll rcl]t-carry.ing
50%.Folsrrlallcablc's(c'g.".',',uyt,,.'.,',"atosupplyindividrralloads).thediffer.enceinthe50Hzandthe400Hz
and voltage drop vary with fi'equency Suitable mtings
cunent-cauying capacrties llray be negiigit'1" - C un:"'t toti'.tg
should be obtaincd Jiorll tilt nlanufaclurer'
5.4 Effective current-carrying capacity
cruent that can be carried in specifled
The curt ent-cat rf itrg capacity of il cable conesponds to tlle lraximum
lirrit of steady-state tempemture for the type of
conditiolls withour the corldlrclors "-.""oirg ,ira permissible
insulatiot't cotlccmed.
rcpf(\(llt llrc ell'citi\c 'ttrlettt-canying capaciq only rrhele no rating lactor
i'
I Ire rrrlir<. t,l Jt.lr.l,r l.r'].'1.,1(u
the approp ate
applicable Other$i'"' ttl" t ut' i't-n tnp"i'y tot"'ponds to the tabulated value multipliedby
"nt-t""]'
 l'actor or t'actols lbr arubrerlt tcrnpcratute'
groupirg antl tllerlllitL rn:- ''::r':- '": " tll T::-fl']-"f"O"Tl T:,t:::tl::i*
may need to be
Where hamontc cLIllallI: arc present lurther facto$
resistivity, for buried cables, as applicable
applied. See section 5 5 ofthis appendix
irssociatctl $ ith the conductors concemed,
the ambient
Irrespective of the type of ovelcurent ])rot"tl*: 9:'lt-:
'; ;:;; ;*l.t*Oq capacitv (as opposed to trrose used wher
ffil]:|# :ffi,ii"s);Iffi ::+nrcarvirls
are those given h Tables 4Bl and 4B2'
,.f.iti,rg ."frf"
Rating factors for triple harmonic currents in
four-core and five-core cables
5.5
with four cores carrying current

5.5,1 Rating factors

without a conesponding reduction
Reeulatiun 52J.6.1 that. rT het'e the ttcutt'al conduitor can-ies cur-reDt
:lrlc:
be taken into account in ascertaining the cu1.re11t-
i" i".J the linc conductor"' the neutral conductor shall
",t
canying capacitY of the circuit

Thissecriorrisinterldedtocoverthesituationwheretherei5ctlllgnlflowin!,llrtlreneutralofabalancedrht.ee-plrasenot uantel in the

svstem. Suclt ll\'tllral ctlffents u" o* ,o
i1" line cut'tents llar irrg a halrnoiic eontent r'r hiclt does
neutral.Therlostsigniticantftu'tooit*l'itf''doesnotcancelintheneutlalisusuallythetliirdharmonic'The line
n'ay exceed the magnitude of the power frequency
magnitude of the ue.,trul .o,t"'.'t tlt't tJ tt't-it'i'Jt]unrlo'it capacity ofthe cables of
culTent. h such a case the leutLal cur-ieit *iril1""."
,ig"in.a[t effect on the currellt-carrying
the circuit.

Thelatingl.actolsgiveninthisappenclixapplytobalancedthlee-phasecircuits;itisrecognizedthattl]esituationis
lnrhissitrratton.tltenettltalconductorwillcarrythcharrnonic
nroreoncrou5ito,l)tu1.,ol.rhethrccp}as.l'.r;f""a.O to o\'erloading ofthe neutral conductor-'
currents iD additio]l to the unbal^rra"i *.*ri. S,"i] a situatiun car lcad
motor drives'
cunetrts includes' lbr exatnple' variable-speed
Equipnent likely to cause signiticaut hannonic
fluorescent liglrtilg b"nf, u,a uc po*e' ''uppi'"'
t"tt ut tftose tbund in computers Further inlbnr.ration on hamrontc
disturbanccs can be fourd in BS EN 61000
is within a four-core
The rating t'actors given in the lbllowing table
only apply to cables where the neutral conductor
:- or five_core cable and is of th. ,un,. n)'ut"riul
onil .rorr-r".tionul aea as the line contluctors.
These rating factors
to the fundamental ficquency of
have been calculated on the basis ,rrirJ rrurr*i" ."nErts measurcd with respect
"t
theli1recurert.Wherethetotufl'u'''.t.'*itdistofiiolislroletl]an15%'duetothethirdharmonicorrlultiples phases of
rhereof, e.g. 9'r', 15'r', ctc. tfr., fo*.,
f"t1o"-a'" upptitaUt". Where there is an imbalance between
:.:ss '"G
,r.ro." ,frriSO V" ,tr"r krwer rating thctors may be applicable'
three loaded corductors'
the current-carryirlg l-apacitv ol a cable with
The tabulated rating t'actol's, when apptied to where the current in the fourth
rvill sive the current-canJug *p"i", "f " cable with foui loaded conductors hanr.ronic current ir the line
,il;t,u a*,, rr,","r. rhe heatirs effect of the
::.illlSt ":::::;,"iil;;';;;;i;"..
conducto$ illto account.
: --; tile than the line cuffent then the cable size should
be selected on the
:-: e.l is Where the leutral current is expected to be higher
hasis ofthe neutral current.

Wheretlrecablesizeselectiorrisbasedonaneutralcur.etttwltichisnotsigrificantlyhighelthanthelinecurlentit
;; reduce the tabulatect cutent-carying capacity lbr three loaded
conductoLs.
;;;il
t -'u -i
lftheneutrtrlcLrnentismolethanl35%ofttrelirrecurlentaldthecablesizeisselectedonthebasisofthe the line
neutml cu
.erl the, the three line ;";";;; *iri not be turly loaded. Ihe reduction in heat generated by any
to apply
condtLctors of'tsets the rl.u' g"""l.niij by* t;
I"t't*l *'d''tcto' to the extent that it is rot necessaryoffour Ioaded
to take account ofthe effect
rati g factor to the c*r.nu.u.rying-.ip;iiy ro, tt,r." rouo.a "orducrors,
:.::r it'tg- conductots.
: :; than in four-core and five'core cables
-: ilr0 l{z TABLE 4Aa - Rating factors for triple harmonic currents
: . :lltil1gs 'fhird harmonic factor
content of Size selection is based Size selection is based
line current* 70 on line current on neutral current

0 15 1.0
:.:ecified
:, :r pe of - il
>15 0. s6
0.lt6
>33 45
I,O
>45
: --ctor is
= disto(ion'
..::.:..rpriate * NOTE: Thc third hamronrc content expressed as total hanDonic
 5.5.2 Example of the application of rating factor for third harmonic currents
Considel a three-phasc' circuil with a dc'sign ]oad (furdanrental culrent) ol58 A is to be installed using a four-core
90'( tltemosettirg insulatcd cablc. The cable n ill be instalied in a group with 3 other circuits on a pedbrated cable
tray (nrclhod E or F) in an cxpccted rnaxiururn anrbicnt tempelature ol35 'C. The cable will be protectcd at its origin
using a cilcuit-bleaker to BS EN 60898- i.

Case 1: Load does not produce third harmonic currents

The desigll curent. [b. o1'rlrc tluee-phasc load is 5i3 A.

To satisfy Regulation 433.1.1. In: Ib. 5() lhc ralcd clr.rcDt ofthe circuit-brcakef, ln, is selected to be 63 A. The
recluircd tabulilted cirrr!)1t-car'rying citpaciry. Ir. undcr the abovc operational conditions is to satisly:

I, i ,i {$ here cir cuits ot thc glorrp arc assullrcd to bc liable to siurultaneous overload)

Flonr Table 48 l. Ca 0.96 and fionr Tablc 4( l. (lg . 0.77

't :---_6L:a<
|
l\ 96 () 11
) ^
From Tablc 4E4A, a l6 mrnr cable rvith copper conductors and steel wire allout has a tabulated current-carrying
capacity of 99 A and hcncc it is suitable il thild lrarrnonic cuffents ale not prese]rt in the circuit.

Case 2: Load produces an additional third harmonic content - THD-i = 20 %

For the sccond case it is assLmlcd thal tllc abovc' load is cxpcctcd to produce third hamonic distoltion of20 % in addition
to the tindamental line current.

The titndanental line cuuel11 of the abovc ioad is 58 A. Sincc the third lrannonic content is betweer I5-33 %. the
cable sizil1g is based upon the lire culrcDt. Bccausc thc load has 20 % third hannonic the design curent used for the
sclection olthe protectivc device is givcn b1:

,__:_______'__'_=
Ir,r = 58 V 1'+ 0.2' = 59. I A

where: Ibtr : design curtert il]cluclil-q the cl]cct ot tiiird hanDollic cufients

To satisty Regulation 4ll.t.l. Iu a Ib. so th. raled cLulcut o1'thc circuit-breaker, In, is selected to be 63 A. In
addition. to comply u,ith the Regulation 13 1.2 j. ovL'rcLrflcr]t dctectiol must be provided for the neutral conductor.
Thereibrc. a,l-pole protectire devlce uith o\!'lcuucnl llrotcclion of the neutral should be provided. The required
tabulated cufient-carrying capacity- It, rurdcr thc abovc opcrational co[ditions is to satisfy:
--
lItat I,,
t (t i(, {ulljl'C(rr'\tlrl.ul ln(!lut,p.,r(:rs5trrl)(rltuDclraDietOSllnUltaneousO\erloaol
fhc facto, of O.8O is takcn l'r'om thc abo\ c l blc
Applying the rbove grouliing arld tc.llipelature raling tirclors. the required tabulated current-carrying capacity is found
tobc99 IA.
Fronr Table 4E4A. a l6 umr cable has a tabulatcLl cu[ent-carying capacity of 99 A, thus a rule-based syste]r may select
a 25 mrn: cable whe'rcas a dcsigner nray excrc ise .iudg.)Dent afld select a l6 mllrr cable.

Case 3: Load produces third harmonic content - THD-i = 42 %

Thc load is expected to producc tlrrrd hanlrolric clistoftjon of42 % of tirc fundamental line current.

The frLndarrc'ntal line cul.] ent ol'thc above load is 58 A. Sirlce thc third hamlonic content is between 33-45 %, the cable
sizing is bascd upon tlrc ncutl al cL[rc]rt \\' ith a lating firctol of0.86 applied to the current-carrying capacity ofthe cable.
In addition. to conply with Rcgulation 4i i.2..i. olercunent cletection must be provided for the neutral conductor.
Tbcrcforc. a 4-pole protcctir, c dcvicc ivith o\ c,!ru l cut protectjou of the neutral should be provided.

Th!'ncutral currcrt arising ionr thild hilruonics is givcn by

. lh, l,,r
lu, f ou-
where: I5,, = neutLal curr'.'nt dLlc to thild hxrrllollic cLLlr-.llts
I,, : flnd.ur.nlxl line cLLrrcnt
h - third hurnrr,nie rs il |cl-c.ntilsc ol'lhc tirlidanrcntal linc currcnt.

380
 Ilence. the rleutlal cufer]t of tl're cilcuil is ltu - .] r 0.42 r 58 - -l \.
T)reletb|e. the design cunent ofthe circurl dLLe to third harnonics is --l,\.
To satisfy Regulation ,133.1.1. li 2 lt. so the rated cu]Terlt of the circuit-breaker. In, is selected to be 80 A. The
reqtiired tabrLlated cLrr ert-carrying capacity. lr- undel the abo\ e operational conclitions is to satisly:

I,: CC11'\- (wbere circuits of the group are assutued to be liable to sirnultancou: orcrload)

Applyi[g the above grouping and tenrpetatule ratiDg lactors. the requiled tabulated currert-cauying capacity is
tbuucl to be 125.8 A.

I F rolrl I able 4E4A. u 25 rnrnr cable is lecessary to con)pensate for the additional thenual eflect due to third hamronic
c uu ent.

All dre above cable seiectious are based on the current-canying capacity ofthe cable: r,oltage dlop and other aspects of
design lrave not been considcred.

5.6 Harmonic currents in line conductors

Section 5.5 covers the etlect ol additivc hamrorlic cunents flowing in the neutral conductor'. The rating factors given
in section 5.5 take account ofthe heati[g etlect ofthe third hanronic irr the ueutral as well as the heating effect ol
the third harrnonic ir each ofthe Urc coutluctors.

Wher e other haruorics arc prese[t, e.g. 5'r', 7'r' etc, thc hcating effect olthese harmonics in the line conductors has to
be taherr into account. For smaller sizes, less tl'ran 50 n'ulr, the e1I'ect of hamrouiq cuuelrts can be taken into account
by applying the tbllowirrg tactor. Ct, to the lundamental design currert.

cr,:

rvhercr I ,.50 llz cLrlletrr

- n'i' harrr-rorric currert
11,,,

For'lalger conductu' sizcs the itcrease in cotduclol resistance. duc to skin aud proxinrity effccts, at highcr
ilclllrcncies has to bc takel irto accorrrt. '1he resistance at halnronic liequencics can be calculated using thc
r'quatiorls gi\cn in BS IEC 60287-1-1.

TABLES OF VOLTAGE DROP

ln the tables, values ol voltage drop are given 1br a currenl ot onr'anlpele lbr a metre ru)r, i.e. for a distance of 1 m
along thc route taken by the cables. aud represent dre result ofthe voltage drops in all rlte circuit conductols. The
r aiues o1'voltage drop assulne that the conductor-s are at their lnaxilnurn pennitled [ormal operating temperature.

Ihe values in tlre tables. 1br AC operation. apply to li-equencies ir1 the ralge 49 to 61 Hz and for single-cote I

lrnoLucd cables the labulated values apply where the armour is bonded to earth at both ends. The values ofvoltage
drop fbr cables operating at higher liequencies rnay bc substartially grl:ater.

For.a given ruo. to calculate tlre voltage tlrop (in rnv) the tabulated value olvoltage drop pel aDrpere per meh€ for
:he cable conccrned has to be urLrltiplied by the lergth of the run in rlrctles and by the cument the cable is intended
:o caruy, nanrely, tire design current of the circuit (lu) in arnperes. For threelhase circuits the tabulated mV/A/m
. alues relate to the line roltage and balauced conditions have bec-n assunred.
cable
cable. itrl cables having conductors ol-16 urmr or less closs-sectional area, theil inductances can be ignored and
erVrAlnr)r valucs only are tabulated. For cables having conducrors greatel than l6 rmDr cross-sectional al'ea the
:rrpedance values are given as (D1V,'A/rr)2, together with the resistive componert (rnv/A/m)r and tbe reactive
.!rnrporl!'l'rt (ruV/A/tn)x.

. he dilect use ol the tabulated (mV,,Anrr)r or (rrv/'A/rn)z values, as appropriate, utay lead to pessimistically high

-:lculated values ofvoltage drop 01, i1r other words. to r.rnuc'cessarily lor,v valncs of pemitted circuit lengths. For
:raurple, where tlre design crLrrent ofa cilr:uit is signilicantly less thar the etlective current-canyilg capacity ofthe
-roscn cabls. the actual voltage chop rvould be less thal1 tl]e cillculated value bccause d]e corlductof temperature
.:nd hencc their- resisrance) will be less than that on u hich the tabulated nrV A nt had been based.
 As rcgards porvcr I'actol iD A( circLrits. the use ofthe tabulated mV/A/Dt values (for the larger cable sizes, the
tabulated (m!iAirrl)r \aluc\) lradi to a calculatcd value ofthc voltage drop higher than the actlal value. In some
cascs it may bc advant.rgcoLrs fu tlrkc itccount ofthe load power factol when calculating voltage drop.

Wherc a molc aceurat. ai:.iirncnt of the volragc drop is desirable the foliowing methods may be used.

6.1 Correction for operating temperature

For cables har ing condLrctors of cross-sectional area l6 mmr or less. the design value of mV/A/m is obtained by
rlr.rltiplyrng thc tabr.rlatd r alue by a tactor Cr. given by:

230+t,,,(c^2cg'c"'co' $)1to :o)

c,= 230 + tp
Equation 6

uhere 1p is the la\iD'lLllr pcrnitted llorrrrill operatiug teurperaturc ("C).

This equation applics ortly where the o\cr.clrnent protective device is other than a BS 3036 fuse and where the
actual al]rbient teurpcralufc is eqlral to or grcat!-[ thau J0 'C.
NOTE: FoI conr cnicrlcc. th. rbo\. equation is brseLl or the approxinrate Iesistance-temperature coefficient of0.004 pcr "C at
l0'C tbr both.opl)cl' irnd alLrnriniLrm eonducto|s.

For cablc's having conductols oi ctoss-sectional ?uea greater than 16 nurr. only the resistive component of the
voltage drop is all'ecled b1, the tetupetatute and the t'actor Cr is therelbre applied only to the tabulated value of
(DrviA/rn)r and the dcsign r alue of lnrVtAh.r)r is given by thc vector sum of Ci (mV/A/m)1 and (rnV/A/m)x.

l-ol vcry Iargc conductor sizc). rr,here the resistive conrponent ofvoltage drop is much less than the corresponding
rcactive part ( i c ii,hen .ru r : 3 ). this ralillg factor nced not be cousidercd.

6.2 Correction for load power factor

For cab les hav ilg corldlrctols of closs-sectjoral area 16 mmr or less. tlre design value of mV/A/m is obtained
approximatcly by nrLrltiplling the tabuiated value by the power factor ofthe load, cos O.

Fol cablcs having conductors of cross-sectionai alea greater than i6 mmr, the design value of mV/A/m is given
approxinlately by:

cos O (tabulatcd([rVrAlm.;.1 + 51n g llsbulated(mV/A/m).)

For single-core cables in flat 1'ormation dre tabr.rlated values apply to the outer cables and may underestimate for
the !oltage drop bet\\'ecu an oulcr cablc and thc ccntrc cable for cross-sectional areas above 240 mm2, and power
tilctors greater than 0.8.

6.3 Correction for both operating temperature and load power factor
Fot patagraphs 6.I and 6.2 abore. where it is consideled approp ate to con'ect the tabulated mV/A/m values for
bodl operatirg tempetature ard load pou er t'actor. the desigrl figure for urV/A/m is given by:

(i) tbl cables having conductols of ctoss-sectional area 16 rlnt: or less

Cr cos O (tabulatcd l'nV/A/m)

1ii) tbr cablcs ha!i[g conducto]'s ofcross-scctional area greater thao l6 mml

Cr cos O (tabulated (nrv/Aim)r) + sin O (tabulated (mv/A/rn)x).

_ 39L
6.4 Voltage drop in consumers' installations
The voltage dlop between the origin ofan installation and any load poinr should nor be greater than the values in the
table below expressed with respect to the value ofthe nominal voltaee olthe installation.

The calculated voltage drop should include any eff'ects due to hannonic currents.

TABLE 4Ab - Voltage drop

Other uses
(i) Low voltage installations supplied directl_v- flom
a public low distribLLtion systelr]
(ii) Low voltage instalJation supplied liom private
LV supply (*)
(+) l he voltagc drop within each f,[al circuit should not exceed the valucs given in (i).
Whcre the wiring systems ofthc installation are longer than 100 In. the voltage drops ildicated
above may be increascd by 0.005 9/o per nietre ol'the wiling systeu beyond I00 m, $,ithout this
i[c]ease being greater than 0.5 o%.
I he vohage drop is detemlined ftoln the denrand ofdre cunent-using equipment. applying
divcrsity factors whele applicable, or from thc vahLe ollhe design cunent ofthc cilcuit.
NOTE 1: A grcater voltage dnrp may bc acceptable fol a motor circuit during starting and lbr other equipment with a high
imush curent. plovided that iD both cases the voltage variations remaiD within the limits specified in the relevant
equiprnent stardard.
-l
NOTE 2; he following temporary co[ditiols arc cxcluded:
, voltage transicnts
- voltage variatiorls due to abnonnal operatioll.

METHODS OF INSTALLATION

Table 4A2 lists 1hc methods of irstallalion lol ulrich this appendix pl'ovides guidar'rce for the selection of the
rpptopriatc cablc sizc. lable :tA3 lists the appropriate tables for selection of cui-rcnt ratings firl specific cable
-fhe
lo1'lstluctiol)s. Reference Melhods arc those rretllods ol illstallatiol lbl which the curreDt-cauJillg capacities
cn in Tablcs 4D I A to 4J4,\ ita\,e becll deternirled (see 7. I bclow ).
-:ir
The usc ol'other rnclhods is lrot plecludcd ancl ir that casc'thc cvalLration of cu[cnt-carrying capacity may [eed to
:e basecl on expclilrcntal rvorli.

7.1 Reference Methods

The Ref'elence Methods arc those methods of installation for which the cun'ent-canying capacity has bcen detennined
-a\ test 01 c?rlculation.
NOTE 'l: It is ilnpractical calculate and publish cuneilt ratings tbr cvcry installation rnethod, sirce many would result in the
10
sanle clrnent mti[g. Thclelore
a suitable (liIl']ited) oun1ber ofcurrent mtings have been calculated which cover all of
the installalion nrethods stated m Table 4A2 a1ld ha!e beei called Relereuce Metbods.

Reference Method A, lbt exarrple, lnstallation Methods I and 2 of Table 4A2 (nou-sheathed cables and
:ulticore cables iu conduit in a thermally insulated wall).
fhe wall consists of a[ outer weatherproof skin, tl]emral insulation and an inner skin of wood or wood-like
:atelial having a thermal conductalce of at least t0 Wlm]K. The conduit is fixed such that it is close to, but not
::cessalily touchiDg. tlle inner skin. Heat fi'om the cables is assumcd to escape througi] the innel skin only. The
:-.nduit can be metal or plastic.

Reference Method B, tbr exantple, Irrstallation Method 4 of Table 4,A2 (non-sheathed cables ir conduit n'rounted
: a \\'ooden or nrasonry wal]) and lnstallation Method 5 ofTable 4A2 (mLLlticore cable in condujt on a woodet or'
:sonry wal1),

:ie conduit is nlounted on a wooden wall such that the gap betr.een the colduit aud the surface is less than
-1 times the conduit diameter. The conduit catr be metal or piastic. Where dre conduit is fixed to a masonry u,all the

--rrent-canying capacity ofthe non-sheathed or sheathed cable rray be higher.

Rclcrcncc Method C (clippccl dilcct). ibr cxanrplc. lnstallation Method 20 of Table 4A2 (single-core or
rlulticore cables on a uooclcn or nrasonly u alll

Cablc mouricd on a $ oodcn $ all so that thc gap betrvccn the cabie and the surface is less than 0.3 times the cable
diarretcr. Where the cable is fixetl to or enrbcclded in a masonry wall the current-carrying capacity n.ray be higher.
NOTE 2: 'thc term'u sonrr' i5 trk('n to include brirl$ork. concrctc. plaster and simiiar (but excludirg thcrnlaily insolating
nlatcrials).

Rcfurcnce N{ethod D, tbl cxample. lnstallation Mcdrod 70 ofTabte 4A2 (rnulticore armoured cable in conduit or
il cable ducting in tlre grourld).
The cable is drawrl into a 100 n'lnr diametcr plastrc. ciirthenwalc or rretallic duct laid in direct contact with soil
Ilaving a tllcnral lesistivity of 2.5 K.nr/W and at a dcprh of 0.7 m. The values given fol this method are those stated
in this appeldix and are based oD conscrvatiVe iustallation paranretels. llthe speciflc installatiol pammeters are
known (thcrn]al resistance ofthc glouud. grouncl aurbient tcmpclatu[e. cable depth). reference can be made to the
cable manulhcturer or the ERA 69-30 seri!,s ol publications. which r.nay result in a smaller cable size being selected.
NOTE 3: l hc cunort-carryin-s cilpaeity tbr cables lilid ir) dir ecl contact \rith soil havirg a thernaL resisti\ ity of 2.5 Knr/W ard
at a.lepth ol'(l T nr is apploxinratcll l0'l, hrsherthal1 thc ralucs tabulated tbr Refcrcrce Method D

Relerence Nlethods E, F and G. tbl exarrplc. Lrstallation Methods 3l to 15 of Table 4A (singlc-core or

nrulticorc cables in llce air).

Thc cablc is srippo ed such that thc total hext dissipation is not irnpcded. Heating due to solar radiation and other
sourccs is to be takeD iuto accourlt. Carr-' is to be takcn that ratural air convection is not impeded. In plactice, a
clearancc bctu,cen a cablc ald any ailjacent surlac!' of ill least 0.-l times the cable extemal diameter tbr multicore
cablcs or 1.0 tiurcs thc cablc dianretcr lbr singlc-corc cables is sulicient to pemit thl] use of cuffent-carrying
capacitics appropriate 1o llee air conclitions

7.2 Other Methods

Cablc on a floor': Ret'elence Method C applies tbl cLn]cnt,.ating purposes.

Cable under a ceiling: This ilstallatioll rnay appc.u sirnilar to Retirencc Method C but bccause ofthe teductjon
in natural air convection. Rel'crcnce Mefiod ts is to lla used lbr the current rating.

Cablc trat systems: A pe bratcd cablc tray hils a regular pattem ofholes that occupy at least 30 % ofthe area of
the base of the tray. Thc culrent-calrying capaciry lbl cables attached to pertbrated cable trays should be taken as
Retircncc Mcthod E or F. Thc cuncnt-carrying capacity l'or cablcs attached to unperforated cable tmys (no holes or
holes that occupy less tlrlD 30 'r; ofthe arex ofthc base ofthe tmy) is to be taken as Reference Mcthod C.

Cable laddcr s)stem; This is u construelion uhich ottels a minin.trm of impedance to the air flow atound the
cables. i.e. supporting mctal\&otk unclcr thc cables occupies less than l0 % of the plan area. The cunelt-calJing
capacity 1br cables o[ ladder systcnls should be'taken as Rcttrcuce Method E or F.

Cable cleats, cable ties and cablc hnngers: Cablc suppolts hold t[']e cable at intervals along its length and
permit substantially courpletc ticc uir'flor around thc cable. The cunent-canying capacity fol cabie cleats. cable
ties and cable hangers should be taken as Retercnce Method E or F.

Cable installed in a cciling: This is sinrilar to Rcl'crcnce Method A. [t may be r]ecessary to apply the rating
t'actoi s due to highel ambient tcrrperatLiles that rliay nrise ir Jrnction boxes and similar mounted in tlrc ceiling.
NOTE: Where a junction box in thr, ceiling is us.d lor lhc supply to a luminarle. $e heat dissipation liom the )uminaire rnay
fro\idc higher urrbielll tenp!'[ttur.s lirdn pcr0']itted rl1 Tables 4DlA to,1J4A (see aiso Regulalion 522.2.1). Ihe
tenlperatlrre ll]ay bc bcl\\een 40'C ir1d50'1.rnditrltinglactoraccordingtoTable4Bl must be applied.

General notes to all tables in this appendix

NOTE 1: ( ulrent carrying capleitics arc tabulutcd lor nlcthods ol installation which arc comnotly used lbr fixcd clcctrical
installations. The tabLrlatcd capacilieJ arc l-or contrnuous steady-state operation ( I00 % load factor) tbr DC or AC of
nominal licqucDay 50 z and trkc no accoLrDt ofhufiionic content.
NOTE 2: Table,lA2 itelnizes tlrc r!i.rcncc rrcrhod\ ol lrstalliition Io which thc tabuiated cunent-canJiDg capacities refcr.
 TABLE 4Al - Schedule of lnstallation Methods in relation to conduclors and cables
Installation \l.rhod
Conductols Cable Cable Cable ladder.
wrthorit ('lippcd CondLrit On Support
and crbhs trunking ducting cable lray.
fixings dxeat slstclrs irrsulators wire
systems* systems cable brackets

Barc condLLctors llp np np nP luP ruP P 11p

Non-shea!hed cablc lup np P Pl P np np

Shcnthcd Nlulticorc P P P P P N,A P

cablcs
(rncluding
afmoLlred
Siuglc-.orc NiA P P P P P NA P
ilnd l]lil]arul
insulai.d)
P Pcr-rrittccl.

np Not pcnuitt.d.
\rA Nol Npplicable. or nol ornially Lrscd in pructrce.
+ includiug skiling tluuking and flush flool nlnkins

or duct5
: Non shcathed cabics a|e acccptablc if tirc t|urking systern providcs at ieast th!'degrcc ol proiection IPXXD o[ IP4X and il
tha cover cau onl! bc relno\ed by rnea s ol'it lool or a delibelate action.

lr

".-f.*
 TABLE 4A2 - schedule of lnstallation methods of cables
(including Reference Methods)
for determining current-carrying capacity
installatiorl plactices but are indicative of the nlethod
NOTE 1: I he illustralions are nor rntended to depict actual product o1
dcscribed.

NoTE2:Thei[staliatjona11drelelenccnlcthodsstatedalejn]inewitlrIEC.flofievcl.notalllnethodshaveaco[esponding
tating lbt a1i cirble tYPes

lnstallntior Method Reference Method to be

used to determine
Number Examples Dcscription capacitl"

Norl-sheathed cables in conduil

ir a thelmally insulated wall with an inncr skin

lml.-- having a themral conductancc ofnot less than

10 WlmrK'

Multicore cable in cordnit

in a thermally insulated wall with al ilrner skin
, having a thennal corductance ofnot lcss than

IE61^..- L0 w1nrK "

Multicore cable direct

iD a thennally insulated wall witll an inne[ skin
3
lBdl-""- havi11g a thctmal colductance
I0 W/mrK'
ofnot less than

ir /'--\
u
Non-sheathed cables
B
4 in conduit on a wooden or rltasoft) wal] or
1r spaccd lcss than 0.3 x conduit dianeter fiom it "

Multicore cable
i[ conduit on a wooden or ]nasorry tlall or B
5
spaced lcss than 0.3 x conduit diametel flom it'

C-..- Nor-sheathed cables

lllll 1
ir1 cable ffurlking on a u'ooden ot masouly wall
6 - r.tLn horizoDtally
7 - rr.rn vcrtically
h'
h
B

'r ffir
ll2j
Multicorc cable
in cable trunking on a wooden or nlasollry wa]l
8 - run horizontally
9 - run verlicallyt"
b

ll 9

e=i!!==ji,r ::'ir;E:i Non-sheathed cables B

t0 in suspencled cable tmnking
6

1t
Multicore cable
b
ir suspeflded cable trunking

NoD-sheathed cables run

l2 in lrlouldirgs "'

ba*ier or par.Lon
;il,;;ii;; il.:;:;r" ir"r,l..+i i i, ,,ppri*L,,te. i,respecri\e or'irre f rcsence of an i,1!cr1,rr

can be nruclr higher.

ro be p'-ror becr''t: ol lll( mllcrial ul colrslrucllu'r'rC r':"_rb'e
air -laL('' \\ h'-
L'he rnenrr.. re.r.riutl .'l l.l.'.lrJ. '',,r( ." a"r,rncJ -' used'
,f," it *","ralll .qui\ alenl to lnst llirtior Mcrhoils o or R(feren!e Mclhod B may be
""r.*1.r,
under cdlsidcftlifil:: l,:i -
 TABLE 4A2 (continued)

Installation Method Reference Method to be

used to determine
Number Examples I
Description rurrent-carrving caPacity

11

: Non-sheathed cables
...'.:
t5 .: i in conduit or single_aore or nlulticore cahle
- Gij. @[ -
r
in architmve '

No]1-sheathcd cables
in couduil or singlc_core or ]t'lulticore cable
l6 ',.@ @l
in wiudou lianlcs '

Single-core or rnulticore cablcsl

- lixed on (clipped direct). or spaced less C
20
ihan 0.i cablc dianletcr lioln a lvooden or
'
) masorry wall '

C
Silgle-core or multicore cabics:
llxed directiy LlDder a wooden or masonry rHighrr lrn {rrdird dN6l.nl l.nrnerxtEs
2l
N\ o..ur \ilh 1[is i]shlhlr.i m.tlt.d)
cciling

E, l- or G*
Si[glc-core or ]nulticore cablesi
,7 ( Hr!h.r thrn isalrd aNbi.n(.n1f ctrrluir\
- spaced liom a ceilirg nrtrr rrcur \ trh $r\ trrftlLiin$ nr'lhod)

23

Sirgle cole ol nlulticore cables:

C with item 2 ofTable 4C I
30 on unperlbrated ttay
run horizontally or vefiicallY " '

Single-core or multicore cables:

EorF
3l - on perlorated tray
r'
run ho zorltally or vefticallY'

Silglc-core or lnulticore cables:

EorF
32 - on brackcts or oD a wire mesh traY
rulI horizontally or vefticallY "r'

icted,Tlreambicnltenpel?irrcatthetopoltheverticalscctioncall
higher
be much
the Datelial ofconslruction and possible air spaces
wherc thc
-. The ihcmal resislr\ it_v olthe cnclosurc is assumed 10 bc poorbecause ol
6 7 3 or g Refirence VIe1hod B ma! be Lrsed'
constrxction is thelnally equivalcnt to lnstallation Methods
i D. = lhc extemrl diamcler ofa multicore cablcl
in trctbil or
- 2.2 x the table diamelc| $hen rhtcc'singlc_corc cabl's are bound
I
- x ihc cable diameicr when lhrec:ingle cor' cables are laid ir flrll-onnation

' Still undcf crnrsidemlion in ll C

 TABLE 4A2 (continued)
lnstallation I\'Iethod
Relerence Method to be
used to determine
\umber E\amplcs Description
current-carrying capacity

Single-sore or rnLrlticore cables:

33 - spaced lnore dran 0.i tinres thc cable }]. l, or Ge
dianrerer ftonr a wall

Single-core or multicore cables: E or- 1

3,1
- on a laddef

,,,.\ lq Single-core or ullicore cablc nrspelrdcd fiom EoIF'

35
(w)@ ot incor-porating a suppod wire or harness

36 Bare or Don-shealhcd cables on insulalors (;

I
Single-corc or nrulticore cable whcte 1.5 Dc < V < 20 De
10 in a building void "r' '
o! use B

Non-shealhed cables
in conduit Where 1.5 De: V
4l De
irl a buildiug void
irr masonry ha!ing a thernal resislivity rlot use B
grcalcr dran 2 K.r]I/W''r

Sirrgle core or multicorc cablc

12
i' rur a builcliug void
WhercljDcl\i
De in .lasonry hr!,ing a ihcrnal resistilit), nol scB
l-_ grearor llran I K l1r,w '

Non-sheathcd eablcs

t.
in clrble ductiDg Where 1.5 De < V
43 inlr buildirlg void
I
in nrasonry hari|g a themral tesistivity not use B
gr.atcr lhan 2 K.nrW ' '

SiDgle-core or nNlticore cabLc

rr cablc ducting Wlrcrc 1.5 De: V
41 h a bLrililing void
D use B
in masonry Iaving a thclnial resisiivity Dot
I
grcater draD 2 K.nr/W '

NoD-sheaLhed cables
ir cable ductirlg Wherc 1.5 Dc 1V < 50 Dc
45 ir nasonry h:rvi g a lhernulrcsisliviiy nol use B
greatcr than 2 K.Dr/W'r'

Single-core or nllrlticorc cable

ir cable ductillg Where 1.5 De < V < 50 De
46 iDmasony haviug a thcrDral resisli\,ity nol usc B
sr?rlcr rhan 2 K.rn/W ' r' '

Sirgle-corc or nrulticore cablci Where l5 De<V<50 De

41 - in a ceilirg void
- iD a suslrendcd lloor '' use B

bc nruch hish,Jr:

The thctors in Table 4C I mat rllo be used.

h D. - the e\tcrnal diarrclcr ol x nnrllicore cablel

- l.l r fi. cable dixfr.l.r \r h.n lhree singlc core cabLes arc botrnd in lrelail. or
- ,1 : the cablc di.rnrcr.r s hcn rlrr'cr :ingle-core cablcs arc laid in fidl lorrn.rlidl

D. = external dianicrer olconduir or \ertical deprh ofcable duclilrg.

 TABLE 4A2 (continu ec

lDst:rllatior ]Iethod Refereoce Nlcthod to be

used to determinc
\nmblrr Erilorplcs Dcsrription currrnFcrrr)'ing capacitl

Non shcathcd cables

50 R
in flu\lr cabl,- irunking in the floor

Nftrllrcorc !rblc
5t B
Lr) llush cable trunkiig irr lh. fio,,I

Non-shcadrcd cables
52 B
in llu5h rnnrking'

Mulricole cable
5-l B
in tlurh t *ing'

Nor-sheathed cables or single-corc cables

Nhcre 1.5 DcaV
5{ in eonduit irr aD unvcnlilaled cable channel
D; B
l run horizonially or retically''r "' use

Non sh.alhed cables

55 in conduit in an open or \entilatcd cable channel B
in thc floor "'

Sheathed single-corc or rnulticore cable

56 in an open or ventilated cable channel B
rLrn horizontilly or r€rti.ally "

57
ffi
F-ffi
t..Ht
Slr-qlc-corc or mullicorc cablc Llircct
in mrionry hxVing a thcrmNl resisti\,ity not
gr.ller rhan 2 K. ,W
C

ffi
Itff
- \\ rrlrout added mech.rnical prct!'cliol1 " "

Srnglc core or multicore cablc dirc!t

in nlasonry having a rhelnl l rcsisti\iIy nol
5iJ grcalcr fian 2 K.Dr/W C
- \!rttr add('d mcchaDical prcteclion "'
te g. enpDing)

r."or cables or single-core cables

'heathed
in.ondlLit B
59
rn isonry having a thermal resistivit,v not
8rc.rt!r than 2 K.m/lv "

Nlulti.ore cables

60 B
iD masorry having a dlerlllal resistnit) not
gr.ateI than 2 K.n/W

nru.h highcr

D! exrcIlLl di,rnrct.r ol.orduil.

I h. depth olrhc (hrnnel is rnorc irrporlant th,rn lh. \,,idth.

I For nlullilorr .nblr lustLrll.d xs Mcthflt jj. us!'.ulTenl-calll-irg capacity fbr Rcfcrcnce !1cdrod ts

rc(lucrion in .ulTclll-..r1yLng cflpicil! nd rhr Lfic hrz.r!lduc tu tlie.1L.ur11tLLLrron L,l Ll(brr\cxnbepr.\cnttd

forcrblcs hx\rns !ondu.(nr noI Srrealer lhtur l(, nnnr. lh. rurTent_canling capaciI m.r\ b. h]gh.l

(excludes th.rnrnLL\ rns!Lhling nnle xltr

T
 TABLE 4A2 (continued)

Install:rtion N'lcthod Reference Method to bc used

to determine
r-\rmples Description cur rent-carrying capacity

Mukicorc a nourcd cablc in conduit or irl cable FoI multicore armoured

1t)
duciing in the ground rablc only

71

Shcathed. annourcd or muliicore cables difecl rn

72 the gromd: D
- wiihoul added mcchanical prctcction (sec lrote)

Sheathed. annoured or ulticore cables direc! in

$e groundr
T)
13 - rvith added mechanical protection (e.g. cable

NOTE; The nrelusron ol dirccllv buried cables is satisirclory rvhele the soil rherlral rcsistilily ls of the odcr o1 2.5 K.n W For lo$er

soil rcsistilities. ihe curlcrrt-carrying capacity ibl directly buried cables is appreciably higher thalr lbr cablcs in ducts.

TABLE 4A2 (continued '

lnstallation methods for flat twin and earth cables in thermal insulation)
lnstallation Nlethod Reference Method to be
used to determine
ExrDrples Description
current-cartYing caPacitY
Installatiorl lnethods tb.llat t$ir and earth cable

100
y_ $=
clippcd dircct to ll \\ooden.ioist, or touchillg the
plasterboard ceiling sulface, abovc a plaslerboard
ceiling $ith thcrmal insulation not exceeding
Table 4D5

100 nnn in thickness ha\:i[g a n']irlimLrm U valLle of

0.1 WimrK
lNtallation methods tbr flat twin and earth cable
clipped direct to a woodenjoist, or touching the
plastoboard ceiling surface. above a plasielboald
t0l Tablc 4D5
ie.llng \\ ith rlrcrral insrrlalion cxcecLlirrg 100 rtlm
irl thickness having a minimum U value ol'
0.1 WhnrK
lnstallaiior methods lbr flat twi[ a]rd !'ar1h cable in
a stud \\all\\ith drertnal insulatiorr \'itlt a tninttl)lltn
U value of0.l W/m:K with the cable touchirg the
102 ]'able 4D5
inner rvall sufhce, or touching thc plasteftoard
ccilillg surfhcc, ard the inner skin lrtvirtg 1r
minimum U value of l0 Wn'trK

llNtallation nethods lbl flat twin and earth cable ir

a.tud w,rll $illr lhcrrnal rn(ulaliott \\tlh i lniDinlulll
103 Table 4D5
U value of0.I W/mrK with the eabL: not touchins
the inner wall surface

whcrever praclicable. a cablc is to be fixcd iD a posirion such that it will nol be covcred with therrnal insulation.

Regu laiion 5 2I 9, BS 5 803 5: Appcnd ix C I Avoldarcc of overhealing o f electric cables, B ui ld ing Regulations Approved Docunlent B and
Thennal insulalionr avor.ling risks. llR 162. tsRE.2001 refer'
 TABLE 4A2 (continued -
lnstallation methods for cables enclosed in infloor cancrete troughs)
lnstallation Nlethod Refer€nce M€thod
to be uscd to dcterminc
\umber Erianlplcs t)rscliDri0n current-carrying capacitl

Cables supportcd on the \\ all ofan opcn r)r

rcntilalcd infloor co|crele foLrgh \\ rrh spacin! x!
tollo$ s:
Shcathcd siDslc corc cables lll t'rec air (an\
suppo{ing metrl\!ork under $e c.lbles
occupying lcss thar l0 9n olplan rrca).
tt1 EorF
- Two or three cables vcrtically ore abo\e rhe
other. Inininru distirnce bel$een ccble surtirces
equal to fie o'eralL cable diametels. distance
lionr ihe \\ill not lcss than l'r the cable diameter.
' Two orihrcc cablcs horizontally rith spacing as

J Cablcs in cncloscd rcnch 450 rrrrr *.idc by

300 nnn deep lnrininrufi dimensions) incllrding
100 ntttt cor eL

- l"u ro.r\.r !-lc :or. r.ro <s r tlrsrr l:ces

scparatcd by a minimuIl1 ofonc c.rblc diamctcr

EorF
ll8 using rating factors in
One or tso sroups ofthrce single core cables ln
trefbiltbnnation Table 4C6

= Ore lo ,bur I aorc cable5 or orre to three cables

of .l or.l corc. \\ rlh all cablcs scprralcd by a
rrilrinrulr 0i 50 |rnr

Cables enclosed h an infloor concrete trough.l50

mm u idc by 600 nnn deep (minnnum dimensions)
ircludrrg i00 llnn cover
Sir to t!\elre 5insle-core cables arranged in flat
groups oltr o or thrcc on ihc \ cfiical trcnch wall
u ith cables separated by one cable dianreter and a
nlirnnulr olS0 m r between groups.

EorF
119 using rating factors in
two to foltl groups oltlxee sh-qle-core cablcs Table 4C6
in trefoil forrnation with a mirinum of50 nnn
b$\i'cen trefoil lbnnatiors.

tbur to cighi 2-core cables or tl'lree to six cablcs of

I or 4 cores wilh cables separated by a minimum
oi75 mn.
All cables spaced at leasr l5 nnn fiom trcnch wall.

r--
-
 TABLE 4A2 (continued -
lnstallation methods fot cables enclosed in floor concrete troughs)
lnstallation )Iethod
R!,lerence )Iethod
to be uscd to dctermine
Number E\iDrpl!! Description curIcDt-cnrr'ling capacity

Cables encloscd in an infioor concrelc trough

600 nnn widc by 760 n
l dcep lnriDimum
oo oo oo dincnsions) including I 00 mln covcr.
-['wclve
lo t\!cniy"1'o!$ single-core cablcs arranged
oo oo oo iu either
oo oo oo flar tomation oftro or thrce cables iD a group \Lilh

oo oo oo cables scpanted by one cable diameter and each

cable group scparated by a ,ri11inum of50 nnn
eirlrcr horizontally or v,rrricully

&& EorF
121)
cd cd single-corc cablcs iu lreflil f'onnation
\viih cach group or trelbil tbrnlation separatcd by a using rating factors ill

&&
nrinimLrm ol50 mnl either horizontally or Iable 4C6
vetically

ooo eiglt
cables
to sixiccD I'core cables or six to t$,elve
oll or,l cores with cables separated by a
ooo nrirrirnulll oI TS mm eilher horizonlally or

ooo vcrtically

ooo A11 cables spaccd at leasl25 mln from trench $all.

 TABLE 4A3 - Schedule of cable specifications and current rating tables

Specification Specitication title .\pplicable Conductor

lrumber current Iating operating
Trbles temperature
BS 5467 Ellcctr'ic cables Th!mrosctting insulated.annourcdcablas 90,c
1b| volta.ges ol 600r l00u V and 190013300 V.

BS 600.+ I-leetric cabies PVC irsulated. non-arrnour-ed cables 1bt 4Dr..lDl.1D5 70 'c
voltages up lo and iDcluding.l50i 750 V, for electric power.
Iighling aDd internirl $ iring (fixccl installation).
Low ternpelature PVC irlsuhted and sheathed flcxible 4F3 60 'c
cable (flerible cablcs).
tss 61,16 Electric cables PVC insulaled. armoured cables for 4D3.4D,1.4H1. 70'c
(wirhdra\n) voltages o1600/1000 V aud I900i i300 V 4H4.4J3.4J.1
Retained hcrc
lbr lislorical
pLlryoses

BS 6724 Flectlic cables Themrosetling irsulated. amoured cables 4Ei.4E4 90'c

tbr voLtages o1600/ i 000 V and I900i 3300 V having low
cmlssion ofsnroke and conosive gascs when atTcctL'd by
1'lre.

BSilll hlcctric callles Thernlosetling insulatcd. nott_armoured 4El.4E2 90 "c

lxblc\ Lr !oltagcs up to and including 450,'750 \'. tbr
clccn ic por c'r. lightiog arld irllemal wiring. aDd liaving low
cnrrssi,on o1 smoke ancl eon!sive gases \ len atltcted by
tirc.
BS 7619 l trlccnic eablcs Spcciticutron lbr 300r500 V fire-rcsistant 4D2 70'c
clcct|ic cables having lorv cnission ofsmoke and collosive
eases u,hen aflccte-d by lirc - Pa l: Multicore cables.
4El.4E4 g0
BS 73.16 tlectric cablcs Thcrnosetlius ins lated. armourcd. firc- "a'
rcsislanl cables ol rated \ oltxge 600/ I000 \r having low
cDrission olsmokc aDd cor-tosire gases \!hen affected by
Jlrc. Specilicntion
tss 7E39 Elcctlic cablcs - Ihe rosetting insulatcd. !VC sheathed. 4E1.4E2 90 "c
unarDoLLrcd cablcs far u vollage of60011000 V
BS 1{4t6 Llcctric cables 300/500 \ screeled elcctrjc cablcs having 1D2 i0'c'
loir emission oIsnroke ar]d con-osi!e gases [ten affecled
by- firc. t'or Lrsc in *alls. prrtilions arld building voids -
nlulticore cables.
BS 8571 Elactric cables Thclnrosctaing irsulated. non_aflroLucd ;1E l. 4E2 90'('
cablcs \\ itli a voitage ot-600/ 1000 V for llxed itstallations.
lralinr: low emission ofsnroke and corosive gases when
allccted by lire.
BS iJJ9: Electric Cables Thelinosctllng iusulaled. non-annoured. 4El 90 "c
lire-resistant. sirclc corc non-sheathed cables ofratcd
\oltagc 450/750 \'- haviug low enlissioo ofsmokc and
cor-r-osive gases whcn altccled by fire.

BS EN 50525- Elcclr'ic cables Lo$ voltage energy cables oftated 4F l. 4F2. 4F3 60 "c.90 "c
)-rI t_ t) )-)l volragcs up to and includil)g ,150i750 V (flexible cables). lr0.c. 180 "c
2-51. 2-82. .l- l r.

j-2 r

BS EN 50525-2- Elcct.ic cablcs Lorv \ oltage energy cables ofrated

- .4U1. 4E I 70'c.90'c
lr.34l voltages up to and including 450/750 V (1lxed installation)
BS EN 60702-1 Mineral insulated cables and their temlinations with a rated ,lC I. .tcl
\olrage not exceedrng 750 V Part l: cables. 105 "cxx
* x Shcatll operaiing t.DrllcratLlre
 TABLE 4B1 - Rating factors (Ca) for ambient air temperatures other than 30 'C
lnsulation
Mineral"
Thermoplastic
Ambient
.c .c covered or bare Bare and
temperature'
.C
60 'c 70 90
and not exposed to
thermosetting thermoplastic thermosetting
exposed to touch
touch 105 "c
70 0c
1.04 r.03 i.02 1.07 1.04
25
1.00 l.0t) 1.00 1.00
3i) 1.00

l5 0.91 0.9,1 0.96 0.9i 0.96

0.87 0.91 0.85 0.92

40 0.112

45 0.1l o.19 087 0.78 0.8r1

0.58 0.71 0.82 0.67 0.84

50
0.41 0.61 0.76 0.5 7 0.80
55

60 0.50 0.71 0.45 0.7 5

0.6s 0.70
65
0 58 0.65
1t)
0.50 0.60
75
0 4l 0.54
rJ0
t).41
85
040
90
0.3 2
95

TABLE 482 - Rating factors (Ca) for ambient ground temperatures other than 20 'C

Ground lnsulation
temperature 70 .c 90 "c
.C thermoplastic
l0 t.10 1.07

t5 1.05 1.04

20 1.00 1.00

t5 0.95 0.96

l0 0.89 0.93

35 0. r34 0.89
,10 0.17 0lt5
45 0.7l 0.E0

50 0.63 0.7(r

55 0.5 5 0.71

60 0.45 0.65

65 060
10 0.53
.75
0..16

rJ0 0.18

t
 TABLE 483 - Rating factors (Cs) for cables buried direct in the ground
or in an underground conduit system to BS EN 50086-24
for soil thermal resistivities other than 2.5 K.m/W
to be applied to the current-carrying capacities for Reference Method D
Thermal resislivity. K.m/W 0.5 0.s I ll 2.5

Rating factor ior cables in buricd ducts 1.13 l.:n 1 tE Lll I r.os 0.96

Rarin!' frclor rin dircct brried cables 1.83 t.6l I,5 1.10 1.ll 090

NOTE 1: Thc rat;ng f'actors givcn have been arcragcd o\,er the rangc of conducl(rr iizes and types of instrllitron
0,.
includcd in the relevant tables in this appendix. The overall acculacl of ratiDg l-aclors is s ilhin = 5
NOTE 2: Where more precise values are rcquircd ihey nra], be calculated by nlethods gi\ en in BS I r691BS IEC 60187).

NOTE 3: The mting factors are appLicablc lo dlrcts buried al dcpths ofup to 0.8 r11.

TABLE 4B4 - Rating factors (Ca) for depths of laying other than 0.7 m
for direct buried cables and cables in buried ducts

Depth of laying, Buried direct In buried ducts

m
0.5 1.03 1.02

0.'l 1.00 1.00

0.97 0.913

1.25 {)95 0.96

1.5 0.9,1 0.95

1.75 0.91 0.94
0.92 0.91

2.5 0.90 0.92

0.89 0.91

TABLE 485 - Rating factors for cables having more than 4loaded cores

NLrDlber ol loaded cores 5 6 1 l0 I2 t1 19

Ratins factor 0.1) 0.67 0.61 0.56 0.53 0.5l 0.45

Nulnber of loaded corcs 21 )1 30 37 44 46 .lit

l'actor 0.42 0.40 0.3 9 0.36 0.34 0.33 0.jj

NOTE 1: The curlent-carrying capacity for a cable in the size r-ange 1.5 to 4 mmr. having more than 4 loaded coles. rs
obtained try multiplying the cu ent-carrying capacity of a 2-corc. having the same insulation type. by dre
i'actor selected flom this table. The cuffent-canJing capaciry lbr thc 2-core cable is that for the insta]iation conditioli
to be used for the multicore cable.

o/o of its current-canJing

NOTE 2: If. due to known operatitlg conditions. a cole is expectcd to carry not mole than 30
capacity in the multicore cable it may be ignored for-dre purpose of detemining the number ofcor-es in the cable.
NOTE 3: Il duc ro known operating colditions. a core is expected to carry not more than 30 9/o of its rating, after applyirg the
raring factor for the total number- of curenFcanling cores. it may be ignored fot the purposc ofobtajning the mting
t'actor 1'or thc number ofloadcd corcs.

For example" the cuncnt-canying capacity of a cnble ha\ ing N loaded cores would nornally be obtained by
lnultiplyitg the cunent-carrying capacity of a 2-corc. haviug the same iisulation typc. by the factor selected fiom
this tablc fbr N co1es. That is I.l. : Irt. x C!\
rvhere:
I,lc is the cu cnr-carr)ing capacity ofthe mulricorc cable atter applying the ratil1g factor for the total nulnber of
curent-canl ing cor'es
I,1" is the tabulated crurent-cartying capacity ola 2-core cable. having the same insulation type as the fiulti-core
cable
C!\ is the rating 1'actor tionr Tablc.lB5 fbr the total ntttnber of curent-canl ing cores
Howcr er. if NI cot-cs in ihe cablc cart! loads \.vhich are not greater than 0.3 x It:c x Cg t. the curent-canJing
capacilv can bc obtairled b\ using thc raling t'actor co espondingto(N M)cotes.

The nor srearcr than 0 -i ' I,:. . C "r' calculation should be applicd betbre thc adjacert nulticore cable grouping
factor. il applicable. tronr Tablc lc-l . The .10 7o rulc should not be lirrthcI applied to any adjacent cable grouping
faclor calculations

l,tc should *L greater ihan or equal to I. or 16 as appropriate. d1\ ided b) lhe rele\ ant rating factor(s) C, that is
l-," > l^ or l- C
I
 TABLE 4C1 - Rating factors for one circuit or one multicore cable
or for a group of circuits, or a group of multicore cables,
to be used with current-carrying capacities of Tables 4D1A to 4J4A
Number of circuits or multicore cables 'lb be used rvith
culrent-carryirrg
Arrangement
Item capacities,
(cables touching) I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 t2 t6 20
Relerence
Method
I Brurched in air'. on a 1.00 0.Et) 0.70 0.65 0.6t) 0.5 7 0.5,1 0. i2 0.50 0.,15 0.,1r 0._i 8 AtoF
surface. embedded or
enclosed

2. Singlc layer on tvall 1.00 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.12 0.71 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.-lt) ('
or'floor
Single layer 1.00 0.88 0.82 0.71 0.75 0.13 0.71 t).72 0.12 0.12 0.7 2 0.72
nLLlticore or1 a
pedbrated
hofizontal
or vertical cable
t[ay systcm
4. Single layer' L00 0.37 0.82 0.E0 0.80 0.19 o.1t) 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78
rnulticore on cable
Iaddel systen or-
cleats etc.
NOTE 1: l'hese t'actoN are applicablc to urliforr groups of!ables. eqtlally loaded.

NOTE 2: Whcre horizontal clearances betwcen adjacenl cablcs excccd twice their overall diameter. no lating firctor need be applied.
NOTE 3: I-he same factols are applied tol
- groups of two ol drree single-cor'e cables;
multicore cables.
NOTE 4: If a group corsists of both two- and thrce-core cables. the total nurrber o[ cables js taketl as thc nlrnbcr of circuits. and thc
cofespondirg factor is applied lo the lables for two ]oadcd conductors for the tro cor-e cables. and to the Tables 1br three
Ioaded conductors fol thc thlce-core cables.
NOTE 5: Ifa gloup consisls ol/? single-corE cables it nray eirhel bc considercd as ,/2 circr.Lits oftwo loaded conducto|s or,/3 cilcuits ol
ihree loaded conductors.

NOTE 6: The ratil1g factot-s givcn have been avcraged o\'er the rangc of condlrctoI sizes ard typcs of installatioll ilrcludetl in Tables
4D1A to 4J4A LLnd the ovcrall accutacy oftabulatcd values is within 5 o/o.
NOTE 7: For sorrc installations a1)d lbr othcr rnethods Dot provided fbr in the above tablc. it rlay be appropriate to Lrse lactor.s calculatcd
for specilic cases. see fbr example Tables,lc,l aud 4C5.

NOTE 8: Where cables having dille ng corlductor opel.rtirlg tenlperature are grorped tosether. the cLrrrent ratiog is ro be based uporr the
lowcst operating teirperature ofany cable in the gtoup.
NOTE9: If, due to known operating conditiolt. a cable is expected k) calry not more than 30 o/o
ofits gr r.,rpzzl r'ating. it may be
ignorcd for the puryose ofobtailling the ratirg factor fbr the rcst ofthe group.

For-example, a gr-o[p ofN loaded cables would norrally require a groLrp rating factor ofC" applied to the rabLrlated 1,.

However'. ifM cables in the group car'ry loads which are not greater thar 0.3 C,l, arnperes the othet cables catl be sized by
usilg the gloup rating l'actor conespordi,lg to (N-M) cables.

396
--
 TABLE 4C2 - Rating factors for more than one circuit, cables burjed direcfly in the ground -
Reference Method D in Tables 4D4A to 4J4A
multicore cables

\\ ith Cable-to-cable clearirncr r,r r

Number of
T\ ing Nil (cables One cable
e!.
circu ifs
touching) diameter
0.125 m l).li rn 0.5 m
ae
0.7 5 0.30 0.s5 0.90
d
0 4,5 0.70 0.71 0.85
.l 0.6t) 0.60 0.7n 0.75 0t0
) 0 55 0.5 5 0.65 0 7(l 0.80
6 050 0.55 0.60 0.10 0.80
Multicore cal
cablcs

6) 11\ /';ll
-rl r_, e?
c[ 0,

NOTE l: Values gi\en apply to rn installalioll depth o10.7 m and a soil themral resisri\i1y of 2.5 K.rr,rW. These ar.e
alelagc valtrcs tbt thc r-ange ol calrle sizcs and types quoted lor Tablcs 4D4A to.1J4A. The proccss ofaveraging.
to-gcther \\ i1h rounding otl'. can r'csltlt in sonre cases in en ors of up to +10 9;. (Where morc precise valucs ale
requircd rh.'y nray bc calculated by nrethods gii'cn in BS 7769 (BS IEC 60287).)
NOTE 2: Irr casc ofa tllcmral rcsislivity lo*cl than 2.5 K.rr/W th. rating factors can. in gcncral. bc incr-cascd and cal be
calclrirted by thc methods givcn iD BS 7769 (BS IEC 60287).

_l'lirl

. and the
TABLE 4C3 - Rating factors for more than one circuit, single cables In ducts buried in the ground -
i'or firee
Reference Method D in Tables 4D4A to 4J4A (Mutticore cabtes in singte-way ducts)

\umbel of ducts Duct-to-duct clearance (0)

Nil (ducts touching) 0.25 m 0.5 m 1.0 m
) 0l{5 0.90 0.95 0.95
0.7 i 0. E5 0.90 0.95
.l 0.70 0. ir0 0.35 0.90
j 065 0.80 0.IJ5 0.90
(l 0.6n 0.1J0 0.li0 0.90
M ulli!orc crbles

@ A
jla

,,J.1 I, \r/
- .rred b)
NOTE 1 : \'alues eirtll appl\ to an installation depth of 0.7 m ancl a soil thermal resisririty ol1.5 K.nl\\i. They are average
valucs lbr tlte rangc of cable sizes and types quoted fbr Tnbles 4D4A to 4J4A. The process ol averasing. togethcr
with rouuditlg o1]- can r-csult in sontt' cases in en ors of up to + l0 7.. (Where mor-c pr-ecise \ alucs arc required they
may be cnlculatod by rrethods gir eI in BS 7769 (BS IEC 60287).)
NOTE 2: In casc of a thcrmal resistivity lo\\,er than 2.5 K.n/W the rating f'actors ciu. iu seneral. be increased and can be
calculated by thc mcthods giren in IIS 7769 (BS IEC 60287).

L'-
h
 TABLE 4C4 - Rating factors for groups of more than one multicore cable, to be applied to
reference current-carrying capacities for multicore cables in free air
Reference Method E in Tables 4DzAto 4J4A
-
Installation ]Iethod ir Table 4A2 Number of Number ofcables per tray or ladder
trays 1 2 3 4 6 9
or ladders

I See itcm i ofTable 4C1

1.00 0.87 0.80 0.77
lg: -1l,\lJt 2 0.73 0.6u

3 l.0t) 0.86 o.19 0 76 0.71 0.66

Perfbtated r\:A=441J- 6 1.00 0.84 0.7'7 0.71 0.68 0.6.1
cable tray '_ >20nrm :300mm
systenls l1
(Notc 3)

I 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.91

2 1.00 0.99 0.96 0.92 0.87

l
3 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.91 0. u5
'' :20 mm

I See item .l o Table 4C I

Vefiical 2 1.00 0.88 0 81 0.16 0.71 0.70
perlbrated
cable tray
l1
syslenN

(Notc,l) l 1.00 0.91 0.89 0.88 0.87

2 1.00 0.91 0.813 0.87 0.85

I 0.97 0.84 0.78 0.75 0.71 0.68

Unpeftbrated
(dtj.-( r, 2 0.97 0.8l 0.16 0.12 0.68 0.63
t0
cable tray
systerns
r! t.\ ;l.U 3 0.97 0.82 0.75 0.71 0.66 0.6l
.- u 20 n >3o0mm 6 0.97 0.81 0.73 0.69 0.61 0.58

,',.\,:-i.\,,:.\
1 Scc iteln 4 of'lable 4C1
!/r'/rrLl ] 2 r.00 0.86 0.80 0.78 0.7 6 0.71
Cable ladder
32
/:':,1\:.\r;
r i\::.\ '\1,\ '/
r.00 0.85 0.19 0.76 0.73 0.70
systeDN, l

cleats, wire " > 20 mnr :30a mm 6 1.00 0.84 0.'7 7 0.7 3 0 6lt 0.64
33
mesh tray,
34
etc.

(Note 3) I 1.00 1.00 r.00 1.00 1.00

2 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.91 0.96

3 1.00 0.98 0.9-7 (r.96 0.91
' -' :20 mm

NOTE l: Values given are average's t'or the cable types and range of cotductor sizes coDsidered in Tables 4D2A to 4J4A. The
spread olvalucs is generally lcss than 5 9,o.
NOTE 2: Faclors apply to single layer groups of cables as shorvl above and do not apply when cables are installed in more
than one ltryer touehiug each other. Values lbl such installatious may be sig[ificanrly lower and must be detemtined
by an appr-opriare nretirod.
NOTE 3: Values are giver lor verlical spacirg betwcerl cable trays of300 mrr and at ieast 20 nnn betweeD cable tr-ays and uaL1.
For closer spacing the factols sirouid be reduced.
NOTE 4: Values are gi\ cn lor horizonlal spaciog between cablc trays of 225 min with catrle tr-ays ntounted back-to-back. For
closer spacing th.'litctors should be reduced.

398
 TABLE 4C5 - Rating factors for groups of one or more circuits of single-core cables to be
applied to reference current-carrying capacity for one circuit of single-core cables in free air -
Reference Method F in Tables 4DlA to zu3A

Number \unlber of three-phase

of trays circuits per tril\ or ladder Use as a multiplier
Installation Method in Table 4.4.2
or to rating for
ladders I -l

Tottching
Perforated I 0.98 0.9 1 0.8 7
cable tmy : r-:--i:--:--:-:-i:--:-l Three cables in
lt tl 2 0.96 0.8 7 0.81 horizontai
systerns
: >300mm formation
(Notc 3)
!
3 0.95 0.8 5 0.78
: .:: r_i--_:--:1-::--::r I

20 mm
->
Touching
Vefiical
perfbmted
I 0.96 0.IJ6 Three cables in
cable tray ll vertical
svstems 2 0.95 0.84 formation
(Notc 4)

Touching
Cablc ladclcr
systcms. 32 I I.0t) 0.97 0.96
Three cables in
clcats. \\ irc 0.98 0.93 0.89 horizontal
33 2
nresh tlay. etc fornlatioD
.14 l 0.97 0.90 0.86
(Note l)

Perforated I r.00 0s8 0.96

systenls 0.89
31 2 0.97 0.93
(Note 3) 0.86
0.96 0.92

VcItical Spaced
pcrforaled
r-=.19--^^ I 1.00 0.91 0.89
cable tlay 3t i , i :zue
Three cables iIr
systc1lls --ni225 rr|mia. t- 2 1.00 0.90 0.86 trefoil
(Note 4)
"EJ L!_* I

De
fonnation

2 2D^ ,,
Cable ladder " Ue

syslems. 32 I i .00 1.00 1.00

cleats. wir-e 0.93

33 > 300 mm 2 0.97 0.9s
mesh tray. etc.
34 0.96 0.94 0.90
(Nore 3)
>20mm

NOTE 1: Valucs given are averages fbr the cable lypes and rangc olconductol sizes considered in Tables,lD lA to 4J3A. Tlre
spread ofvalues is generally less than 5 9'u.
NOTE 2; Factors appiy to single layer groups oI cables (or h etbil groups) as shown abovc al1d do not apply whcn cables are
installed in more than orlc layer-touchirg each other. Valucs tbr such installations may be significaltly lowet and
must be dctcrmircd by ar appropriate nrelhod
NOTE 3: \alues are giver tbr vedical spacing betrveen cable trays ol .i00 nnn and at leasl 20 mm between cable trays and
wall. For closel spacing thc fictor_s should be teduced.
NOTE 4: Values are given fbr l'lorizontal spacing betu,ccn cabl,.' Iays ot ]li nrnr \ ith cable tral r floLurted back{o-hack. Eor
closer spacing tllc l'actors should be rcdlrccd.

NOTE 5: For circuils ha\ ing nlorc than ouc cable in parallel perphas!.cachrhrcepha.csetofcondLlctorsistobcconsidered
as a circr.rit tbr-the pur.pose ollhi. 1rble.

t
 TABLE 4C6 - Rating factors for cables enclosed in infloor concrete troughs
(lnstallation Methods 118 to 120 of Tabte 4A2)
The ratin,c thctors tabulatcd b.'lo\\ relate to the disposition ot cables iliustrated in itcnrs I I tl to I 20 of lab le 4A2
and are applicable to tlte cln rellt-caffying capacities lbr Rel'erencc Methods E and F as given in tl]e relc\ ant tables
ofthis appendix.

Rating factor
Installation method ll8 lnstallation nethod 119 Installation method 120
-3single- ,l single- 6 single- 6 sirgle- 8 single- t2 t2 l8 single- 24 sirgle-
single- corc core cote core core single- single- core core
Conductor core cables, cables, or cables,4 cables,4 cables, core core cablcs, l2 cables, 16
cross- cables, or2 2 three- or t$o-core t$o-core or4 cables, S cables, S t\to-core t$o-core
sectional orl two-core four-core cablcs, or cables, three- or ttvo-core ttro-core cables, cables,
area three- cables cables 3 three- or or3 lbur- cablcs, cables, or9 or 12
or four- lbur-core three- or core or6 or6 three- or three- or
core cablcs fou r- cables three- or' three- or fbur-core lbur-core
cables core four- fou r- cables cables
cables core core
cables crbles
I 2 4 5 6
,7
8 9 l0 l1
(rnirr)
4 0.93 0.90 0.8 7 0.82 0.86 0.83 0.16 0.lJ l 0.'/ 4 0.69
6 0.92 0.89 0.86 0.81 0.86 0.82 0.75 0.It0 0.13 0.613
-10 0.91 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.85 0.80 4
0.7 0.78 0.72 0.66
l6 0.91 0.87 0.8,1 0.78 0.83 0.78 0.71 0.76 0.70 0.(t4

25 0.90 0.86 0.82 0.7 6 0.8l 0.76 0.69 0.14 0.61 t).62
35 0.89 0 li5 0.ti l 0.7 5 0.80 0.14 0.68 0.1). 0.66 0.60
50 0.8u 0.84 l).79 0.14 0.78 0.73 0.66 0.7 t 064 0.59
70 0.8 7 0.82 0.78 0.12 0.77 0.72 0.64 0.70 0.62 0.57
95 0.86 0.81 0.7 6 0.70 0.75 0.70 0.63 0.68 0.60 0.55

120 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.69 0.73 0.68 0.61 0.66 0.58 0.51
150 0.84 0.78 0.7 4 0.61 0.12 0.61 0.59 0.64 0.57 0.51
185 0.83 0.17 0.13 0.65 0.70 0.65 0.58 0.61 0.55 0.49
240 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.6i 0.69 0.(t3 0.56 0.61 0.51 0.48
300 0.81 0.'7 4 0.69 0.62. 0.68 o.62 0.54 0.59 0.52 0.216

.100 0.80 0.71 0.61 0.59 0.66 0.60 0.52 0 57 0.50 0.44
500 0.7u 0.'72 0.66 0.5 rJ 0.6,1 0.58 0.51 0.56 0.4it 0.41
630 0.77 0.71 0.65 056 0.63 0.57 049 0.54 0.1"1 0.41
NOTES:
I . The faclors in Table 4C6 arc applicable to groups ot' cables all of one size. The value of cuuent der-ivecl ll'onr application of
the appropiate faclols is thcntaxinl D current to be ca[ied by any ofthe cables in the gro[p.
2. If, duc to known opelating coltditiotrs. a cable is expccted to cnn) not nrorc than 30 %, of its g/r;r4rdrl t-atj1tg. it may be
ignored lbr thc pLlpose ofobtainillg thc rating lactor for the rcsl ol the group.
3. Where cablcs having difl'crent conductor operating tenrpe.atures are grouped togelher the currert mting should be llased on
the lowest operating lenlperature ofany cable in the group.
1. When thc numbet ofcables used differs liom thosc stated ir the table. the rating factor fof the rlext highcl' stiilcd number of
cables should be used.

{fecrntc;t
/o+ g\
*?ioueunv 3
400

I
 q
u a;'-

FP
.o
,J ..-a

rQ
o
z trlF:Z;.,
6;iEZ
o zLLni>

<3 ,! 600oac-
e-z .E-x\cL4 o\NFoo.a
6sf+60

r,r3<t!
.t e.
;aE
.r.r.ar)c
'c2 {.a-icai' 6<_6\OF- :. c. - ..] sl
:E
-,?=
L: ' = 'or-r-.o+ oa\CO.o- \ro,6-5
oqo€\o n+64-r
:)-=' -o\.l-\o
- - - al ..l -o:l_.ih 'Cts-..o.C

i- -i <1- ri 6 55r]Cf.
o..r<_6h =a=t!'+
F
t:1

aLc6f.oof^
<^o-a] -l-6ro\.)
r,.\ro--
.i=i>! --t__d__j.tvi.c rcaoc..]

+;
O- a)=
\a==-
=a -dd+6

L<e l a
.>-d --\orlsf
.aoo.i-o,
o.i-:t66

?s: -K33€ a=iEF RRH:S

2.i= pt

3:= --<roF_c.lho'a
c-h-.lc] o,o-o-
.l .?1 .. .+ <'

?== €-i_-ar\a
-d.airl
6o.-\o:J.
r-".=!: -\o6\o.a
co-<...r
-d...r.r6

<=::, NN-<fcxa-68 --oo-^.1 "j.

-N.Id-.r'
F, a.l \c

.i +'ca: !:;F3 ..r6-i'3

;oa
 \6_..\oh
-)
E
t-- r,vtn09"t NN6l-*
! -6,\Oo..l

(.)
E

v"t .: 09 vt !t 6r c-:9
ooodd
o-o6+
3€\c6+ u,
dr: r)O!tOF-
Nrlioaton O.TU J
E
[.
g. h"1 1oq n hin_<'.a
U 3.o
Zc
8€
N..tN.i6t
-o\o-N
! E E

qSFEE
;1!
U h+-rr$
ooodd
r)\O6JON
O0oa-\cr
o
o
OOOOC
A
€ oc.li--o OO\Oa.t? r)0c6c
N6_cah* F\or)!tr-!r
a ooood -i-i-l-t^
r, vt 09 !: nor)oh
F- l_- \C \O rl oor)ho chrloc
hr)<-$+
-o.\o-N"t
do...i-
.-l -l -i ^r : OOOOC
E
oocr)*
v)-caort ^,.6_oo ?*\9
;
coc<i -
606roa
Nrr+-\o-i. -,.crnc-
st.a.add
.i;;,.r,-i
a
!/€:E r)!.ic!=q
*o,\r..rN oa\crilr
Nn-rdN N al .\l ..r ..1
codid oic
e z"
d:a OO-\O..1
r)-eh<, .i
.1 a-
.lcl
.-l F- J
-: -:
cooco

Noao6l\ao i6.io.l Crl_-\ahh

...1 .rdd
-i;;^
E
o.-.i1n o, oa - r- t-- \o\c\a6rlh<--++
q: 2 --F-+.\ oddid -i;--r
(): U 6
x,
;nAc(h
occdd *F
o
i >3 Xo
x,*: t6
Yz
EO
E
v,a--v,t) c660c
Fo
CIY
--.i$oo
**F-i.N ^r)oho
.,xooeo. r..r\:€ \ohr)r)r.
3:::^
9
LLIJJ
E ooooc:
0-
U o
i=-'.x(, ..lq9!9 I
i3 Nca-oF-h cj c..t ...l

=^ 9L €-.1 1< .a o ..l ar \C\o\oh,

--F-+.1 ..1

oohho\
ca60\\o$ l.-;i..
d
- 6rh.a-c
a.-o<_c. r.:o.9!t
--c-+.i

6q)co6
"!i_6aoa:

.-+-
 .l
q
.v
,rot P* E o

$E -i .2 9
a,
o
(, E_o

ZtL i.+ >

JU
!^:-,
?)J.ac3
c!6J\a-
> i7' ii
at.a '! ,.
Ncoo$<4
+ = 2= .i{rlro\ .r.-,_ih6

(,
-t ar - r-tc
.-r-n-hI-
2i
2.i
,:3 c-\o\o-h
!o. ..lo$\coa ar.r-o'i_6
a :1 .r) \_)
- =<.

z aa62< or-<\oN ,cr)6ro

.l('r6i\o -i{-+r-cNr)o-

EZZ v 2 r.,
3a= 9d .iCca.lO, i--.ra-6ov7 -N)o<ls$
at
- E<
g a
a i"Ai< vlaoc,c.r
esalE r \o
...r o, .i..r
*\o ca
(l o\
.r
- - al
J
3-

z ; 1. f ! a
€.roih
d, vt
/. - .=<

9.=
Z z[,2*, t r; i:' :
=L a7
--7,::
:.1
cl
a ' .lJ-

=..1-
\)
 I
t
L4

O
o
F-

o-
E
t<
9o E
i9 rlr)oohhc>ooo
50 hvt=toqn -sfitY..
ooooOOoo5oci
av,
o.
o
c
'c !h+co6$ qx"rE!
oooSd
c
O

h6!i_ho
j-.+5$*
.1 .t ..j .l
o
ot
OOCOC
o
+
lrJ ci(J
J
a0 o4606hrloco
F
€*nRoq
++F!i.l
r<cc
E

EFarO\\O+
oon9!1
9-

o
F
E
E
o. c. -l* r)r)..-\o .oo'o95
+*a,.+.!
-.1 \.tq9a ooodd
o
d
o
q.l

E
5
o ^oi

404
 q
uro'Po'

$s
Jz
o
o OU
<><> a.t \c - cr 'a
;!:1
] n hcv).ra- \c\oa-a--
id ii "U
3<
d:1 .,r -!fJr)6

!i
oq Y? vl\CO\C\C .+--.f.1
=F oc-o.\o-
oj.i-rr\a \C a- l_- :a -
-
E
tl ,! U -50.€o Fr-\c6r-
3F6-e
_9 -.rc.\.n
-.1-i'^\t
o(! 2
'n ,:
'.-
o
o
4=
o
g U r---x
-tt ,a r,ar=

'; :E

s
>1 \cca6No.
56.1 .'.r - ;t-9:r
U
.'rJ4\OF- xo__:
o o
E
(,
^o l?
o(J
,.R.
Y--,6-sca
o (!f
=(, i-.+h\ar ;o^19
o
l'-
oo E
t(, 90
Bo t:..
f
o
EE = . drdoo
F--O\\Cr)
h-ooo<_
E
ETU
lo- =zc9P -onh6 \or-€coo.
;(L
G
(, EO
o
o = z n L'a z -. arF..to.$
6-.t<_o -a-6rr-o
\o\crF-ca
Io) i!
6 o"
E
.: l)
L ;, 4 . o.io,oi c=
I
9 \o+\ch...r
.a$-f6\O
-6-
No6,l..:.
r@.ao,:

o
t U
=
uJ
o1 66 6 ...r 61 c r-
J
o U
?a z+ p.69 3 - 5.r
orlo,\o-
6--$r)
r-- \c \c
h a\l \c -t_- ..1
l--

F U
Z
t".t u ...r .a F- n
jo.-ti\3. st F---o.h * t--
c4
-c inivl.J !
^ -.i.fr)h \c \o
cc r- <_
ca o\ o,
(,
+
zEI 9=
.r6r.i-a: $r\Cca=
:l
,-)
 U
$No€\o$
o
F-
! n: n:.r dl a.l .l n.j
I
E
oooo.i.6+d!P 6i N^i e'-
q ---N-
t ========-:
c
l:
!..icr6r.r :lorrc
oooci
o.
o
a
U 6oa$ooa \o6.ial-
n .'t ..1 .'t ..j ..j n .l ...1 .l
COCAO
q
o
(J
E
x .j ...1 .1
s+....cr-o!99
E

.oo-rof ohr1hrr
\oi..)Na..l

F-(i.tF-.'.)- v1ooov)
O\octs-\On
€d
E>'
-::-o6
<]€r t_-\C\C\ch.iJsft-
z: > -.i; oo=cooo=ci
o
() Z'8
o .ir e
uJ -*.,p= .roo\6r
J ocodd ddooo
o
F
o.:t6r)..l Cc.ts-6.J
vt n: .1 .1 "? n .l .t n n

!r r i c =t-.
x .1 ..1 ..t -E
U
c.rso..rF oho6c
ca\or,$n_
'
ooocd E

E!
.i .'')
n F- .r.: .lr-- tn l.i]Eo@@
ooidd

E
hoooc6ooo6
€". x .l n .j -F-F-\C\Orr
E
3
q '5
o'-'oo9 OOhh-
-tarOC\o.\
o-
tr
e
o. h\o0ao..l rir,i
F
;xl ;-i-+ c-\o6+ o
0- ooodd iodco 2
o
d E
L.J
!!
()
E clq)co$o
E sf6\o€:
o
=

406

t
 U)

*0, Po'

$s
)z
o
o
(rQU
oc)o
09 o *
?= <.oro$
d--64 a5:rb 6rxf,;
drd,o!

9.1 6q
Ego
EEE
.,.t
!
o,F-\oaca
-g 3s ^6+cr
o
oo =,!
i"
,;1
g
o O
.; =v
_-.i
:,J
a2.,,- <a ....r - -:t \a ec
: ; . -- -ladho
/,
d ..r --,..i_F s
o -
6
o -;:
o
oo 2 =Z
EE
:o
Yj- {iu
=o
rr f
;o
1 t,
* - .a ..r X;;+ona--o -cooad
el--v ) -.t t_-
oz
F.O
:d -<f6I_-o. __:-.iNd.-srhn

E(J
9t
iuJ
Yo-
EO-
ho
".o
tv 49,- ^ <= .r ..r -t h a-
o O
o
=
E
I gE dL)
tt z:
o
{ tU a z, r66.!co9'!-of'
uJ
J
3- =+F^c-r)Or+
-l-iid--<$6
o (,
F o
Z
d
t) Y ) i
I

lr,.t
:- 6-^O\O
+
zl! a'4--l I

d.
f
9
 9
o
t-- OO*I\6
v_r.-: 09 r)0\h-!1
a n t
3
9o
o-
E Ue E
J-; U)vtn?n r)hoo
1 $vsrv- --;;;
-o\o.ial
'5 E -i -i /-i ,.l __cooo
E
o.
o
I
F
oooh- qfr"PI
ooodd
!
()o
hv)dho-s6?_
r.^loon.tr;ri,o
___JO
o
JU
o
$
uJ
ca*.4-f6 or)h-hhh-oh
J EE ,rco.or)hr),l:rqs
o riooca
9Tn E
F F.;

t c .., ? !)
I ooodi
E
o.
E
o.
E
co-o!t@
**F-+6i -ilil=f
E -co^^.
o.

o
o
!l]
o K33R3 R3s33
:.J'-
o

408

t
 U) UU
co cE2 --n9-
--F-J.r
9C

,ot Po' EE
6.1
$s
)z o
, ^ -.9
;<: ! C \a.l .+ F-
...l .r -/ !j_ h

o )
o (,o
o-

s:x a-a-ts,<-r)
.r-$\occ
g .d -:
.o
!s
o
G

E
o
-q
G
(, E,)
.g l, -
=
<c.: ri tr,)":]oi
E 2
:*t:dou) , r 1t 1,

E = ,-\
g;E
s tro c=zt
l, o.i 7
c ot- I
oE\,,, F L'

*9e. i _t6
o q+ a z.-|::-.,4 <_t:
c -tl c arar.a$\o
o Z a = \^a .c
=()
-C >-

F-.z
lo
v) L!
O
rt: r'i
uJt t_ ae 9t9
du <da \c \o
ts' ..1 ... 6<_
F= n > .::: -Na.l
>
= Y ln
F
I
o-
e o
I E!1
iI i: =!
E

a- -ait--l=l- a.A
/l Ft {) o
U ; o o- a ;l cl ? '' -r-<-hF,
.r.r-.+6
U
> .: > =Yl i
oaa-
I
Z

r',
U
Z E-,n
L:l
I ^i-"--
I
tr
I
 THIS PAGE HAS BEEN INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

ua
t
 o I
u
r.r0' P
$o
$5
o L'
F
o
C) Z

(,O :=:=;6i!o-".
:Xd.rei, *o crrc
2L l-d
UiJ ! 9 12
2?42
l: oE E€ 1; Yl
EE 9=

*c
o I
2^ =_.'?
"a
a a! -i<
U
;.

i a =,- €,2

=
i/
--=
+;:-.4
:2-.-F
,--1n
Zi
t-
- <-x.l ; ; ; ;" z 11 = :' :-, i ii i';- -,+!!

=<
tz
;3?-",t
c-- -@6+-
= i= .^
33 R + .i- 6 \a i--

l-'.E<

z*V"i2
6 L
.^ A:R
il!
>.:= !!
t i, <l) ^6+,-o co r)c
?-
6.no! e=31 -.]<_hxi-i
=---a!-

F
U : Y o-U a-- --o<_-
^i
.-r + r]r
N--C 66.i_oh
Nd--$

U
o
Z 'i.UL <e \Ohh=:: :-r.d --ar!fc
I
,EL a Z 5nca =- -.) .l -dl-<r?
&
\.)
+
Z
EI
/,
'1 =o9:7,:.??"= ia!x=
:l
U
 v,-j6.i
\ 9.r lq:-1:

E
?o x ...I ...1 c.j ...1 .j

o6\oo,- .f,,crP9 IJ
(, -9-:?vl=t oocdd
ohF-6r\ooaalca<_* .1 .1 .j
tr
N9-.49n n..1
a-
a q ,--
--oooooocc
>-
c E r)hr)r|0
\o \o \o \o \o
_o,e€FF
.!
.a.l --\o$..1 ooooo
E
or)00\6 <.ocNP9
>€ O
-9-ccr)a ..1 ..1 ^t :_ -l
ooodd
Or)c--h r-.od!
Nq":d.qn
I
F
E rrrlrlo6
!oocqqvl ohh6+ t++ni
z'- *+\o$N
E
o6\oo..a s....rP9 :;iU
e !\o*oor)t
-:;odd
O
r)6060 Ni_-do,a- .i .l
e;' s1_
- ..r ar ar ..1

o ,.,t 4 t; x I.-h6f-
...1 .l .l .l ..1 (.]..1..1.]cr
IJJ
--.o<-.]
t E
,^ ri.
IJJ c6F-o+ ^.
J JA -9-:099n
o dcd5o
F
660-\O o\ts'tchr
Nedlqi!:

9 E
.a F- i-- ro \c
o...'q\q
__r_l.N x ct cl ...1 .j n
OOOOC
E

U od6!9
z,: >.
660..€6.
- oq.1 q9-t ccodd
O
c.r6\oo6al
+.a'_,^lN
2E ---coooSoo
66r)00
o\Nq\q \o \o \o \o \o
9s *-r_-+al
OOOCO
4 r)v)o,ro, 6\d\oo9
U !o9rq9a ..1 .!
^t ..1 :
ocooCj
or)r)hoa
Nq-)q\!'l
E

o- z< i= E

i{.9.2 o\.rq\q
*-r--+cr x ..1 .t .t ..t
-O,O,oOa- ...1

c.
E E

>t 66OO*
!ceclq\vl -.oc-.-i!
ocood
a-
cd 6,.rq\q r)60,c4o, \c
0a .i o. <'
o..rn?il
*+t.,=tN ",]ri^]:-
oooid
o :<
:l
o
r)600r)
EE 3 E E 9 _ N6r)l_-o. Nh;a<-oo.a=
=

412
 U) ;i9.4 6€
.r ^l .,t
:,:a --Pai,'tu!
= 7.&. ?,..E'1
,qPq -r 1a=:
,a-i!i--J

-a92
-a -=
!,=a = -i ,,
a .)
=, 7.7!
,--. ';
:9 L >.
a
- Z
- i F 9.-
$E .7- -nq-
= AE.
-!;a=ErlE"=
..iE! Et
,^.E .9 e
t E.o;
s E:'
o Eab
o Y a L=
.ie;ca;?
t_>===oE
q .!

Ei>
! ar a--.t
;'$,PEYEn::F
5-1 col!d
t1 :F
u

z-

OO
ca - .r ...r -i_ o orccar\a-
o.thc.J5 -f5h-6r<t
! n ,- <t -
.- ni !tN
i -.r.?)it6F- .a .a .:t 6 \c F-

o ::==
!o i;i
o o. o.
EE a = -- " 9.
Ea--- -q9 6f.6n5.1 _ts-stJ.i-\c
=r;)) arar-st\c€
-\O\O6.o\C -il'-..r€6 .l. .f r, \a r_ .a

a
.!E =i:
I 4)
- .=<
.oI <P
-, (,
at L
at
a; '! 7i lA * r.rac.r- X-.ir.lr
...r-.io\or
r.lts-.lCt-.c

..1 ^l .l
EE
o5
-d-JnF --nh6\.

EO
a
E
o
!3 o.=toh-c c6rc.-..l
-.r-Jhca -.i6o\c-
u
o
;()
to
Yz '.) . ?
i!.c,'1"
L'J - :[3s+3 ::cN66-,
.l----.
=o
To
ctf
9tr >!:
so_
o- I 9a
o r)r+!5.rr.
O;- E i7. -.1 -n_n\t o.i
o-o+r,\.
c6 h -,.1
e.- a i; at) t)
q
IE d9 4
< ,_
c= |:
F
(, v lz la -, .r!c.r=.- sa9EgE r5r,€c
....r 6 5 <- a

A-

U
Q i?z La
Z ^^-60c oCO,.C.l
:xd+*d 6 o., 6l .. l,
&
e.ii a i: 'a'J
..1 .] .. .,.t :t
&
U
d
Z \a66Cco 6
El .ro.o+cc
^--:. d,
-.r.i r o\
-* -.1 -$
)(,

5_- 413

t
 U
o O
h6FO6a-O\O_€
- q-.!c..t '''l -: "l ^1 -.
g

E
o.
E
E oh60=orlhho
<"-----.j.rN'\
15
+^:=€+^i toooeooooao
E
I
o
a
c6\c6,-r ca a.r r_- i
f.i..i.l-+
.o-6h+
't oooco
o
U F

cac6.l dr)o.'<.-
.1 .t .j
q.1 q9vl a ...1

cl
6t
u.l
t
IJJ
J 9
E ohvh-c
d ';6
Zv,q.a,-r<st=+
!l---r-J..1
F

I n-.4(\ar-
a ".-.i.iooo
E

q
E \c-c,Nq\q hh0aF-o\
.r"_rq91 c.-rlc.h
d] .1 ...1 -: -
!toi-F-$.t oocoo
E

0.
o
o
rI']
o 6hooh :r9==
E
F
o U
 '.== t r = =:
= =
cr)
==.-=:.,;'==,.
t'?..=aZ.)-'-=
a'. ) -J.- ''' -=''-
=
*0, P* a- / a

l,-=-=./.!/-t--

$s
1'--)=,7i<',=
e _!_! .2!:

)z
o
, = .
- ;i.2.4='-a=:)
;9 +.= a i'/,.
.tt'7"riii9Ez
ja=ct=>!aaaYa
_ *-
Lrl
o --! --
= - =:,
o= L'-

o Z

^ c q c:t 9I !;; ro
I :X;n -4 +hh ar ro.c =
UI
a9
O 41'J]?
:rx-.e +Y.;F; *d5 g=
EE
!! tga,ii.=
go
E
a
.o
(! I 2
(, \i
'e<
o a
g 2
2
o 'a
.; a
., I
+!sr.Jc
E -rc*- =.r+.1
OC 6
t
(J
o
+6aro.
Of a2
FO o 2'
qi F
o il
!r! fo :czq-;-:N:c) f+/-cc
e.e
-d) z R* :----cr
Oc o o
o) ol
Eq
crE uJ'
3: 0- -"o=1=
96 o
FC ,o
r laK: ?sa?R
N."]o,6o

(!
o
o G-
o ".9
Ian .=
6 :O
i,),i,<J-
I
1 7c.:q:l ?:5SS
+q6oFo.=---
({)
uJ F
<f (,,
(") - :5E$e
IJJ
J
6
o-
;=x: :5SS?
::ijli;n<-+..rr@oo
U
F (,
Z
>x
ll!

1to;A 6€F_<r, -.-!;Fo

<tnaaNccr.rr!' <_ + r,. r-
2 .: .J r.l -
I
+
Z
u.l ;.=-.F-..';==:==:=
=i.tJ----:-=-t:t=
!

415
 U
o q.:r$1.1 <--cc$ .'l
o, 1.1 n^]
tj iooooooooo
e :l
+ t> ooo6r ra11Sg
- rl:-
E clN^N:-;-
doddo odo^5
tr 1
r<_O.i.O ...I .1 :o,Fr-\o
o-
cdo
41.1
o
o
.o U f- v) -l .a -
+O.dO0o .1 .t .j .l ..1 cj
o a1.1 ...I
U

E
c +6.ic].]
9 .c, ,..t l :] =:o\ooF-
E

€-\o*9 orlhOra)
\o .i- ..) - c.r
a.r.t..jI .r.i;-i;

; o-@sf- 60006
o-F-€6
doddd
n=
-a--o
,-rr t,oa'.oo-hc.
15466(.ns$-
--x---
> ddd
E ==aa=3:==a
o
C) o 6..l .cc
uJ i! -,o.'i -95
.1 .t :: : d.
t ocodd :: -r -l .-l
e
uJ
J
o
f, rho6a.l
6ifs-6
co,F-a-r)
s!

E
F. t.. \o \o h ++..rfr+
x c.l .l .l a.l cl cr c.l al
E
U a
.i\oo$R or)060
-\or)st<
E

.60c
i-_i:6ooo

8s[3[ eR€33 E0
s
E
p '5
h6()o6l
Eq9v-l -.oc--P
=t "1 ..j ^l -
+Ncoc
p coood
E
r-,1

a. 6--ch F
6*V)!f
A z
o :< ooodd

o
El
o a=l
2ri" cor)00
Nrrcaso

o
= (,a' .!- l-
 .22499 22tE
co =-_=z=! :-:!

cZ -',,2.,
!
=-2 =!=.o !5 tr
*0, Po' z/:,=1il' ua
2'a?.
.=,
=
-,i- = =:: i_ sIt;
+
2 4.., !i E Z +; B. io

$s
Jz ","F?;",;aElr,
d E ELg-n t9 c
=YY.;-.=---:=;7= 3
E:_PE = 3;:Et_g|
o 6Yd-utc9_
:-E)oE=.2-9E?^
C) zi.i
!7=:q=ie!,'-'-
q a E 6 E E
d-n I d.5
ee'!=) =il:a vt
b-
z
UijO
ooo ir:l
:, ;- *q,- |

I -_: o.o+coh\g;-ic].
o f < rl< - ^i6€.ro
izv
, t' C- l- ^,
I

EEE zi;. I

tl(,
o roio$
o
o) ='r
c 3s -lo-o'f

s
o
.: (,
E h o. < 'll
o
o^
ou)
3s -,+rr6 - i.6, c

Fd 2,pt: Z F- ,,'

oE
=.1
5tr
;.6 a 9L)
oZ
oo a=i o ..1 o, \o al
o^.co' Af K;* <r+h!cF_
!O :d
9c
?uJ
90-
EO-
:o i.-
;sl *9
o --a6 ": ++rco: h\c-CC.
o 6r+..ro.
=
d
E
U 3s -al--<.i'6r6ca 6...+r'r)
E
I

tt U
=
ul
:' z 9a
lu ,oc.".r-9 :=:;-;r6-oc
J
c0
O
o 3F .in-\Dr- l:^,;{a-i-..i_6cc
F Z
d
O =l
=F
+ I

v(..? r, x;L<=
zEI - t ti
-1 i = -lE',:
l. -
4_^O5

d
d
tr
(,
-l

.
,
t
 U
66F-Co
9-:cq91 -r .1 .t
id occoi ^! -= d
!

9<
g 33. E
c6hooonr]r)c<)
dr- .cocqq!1 <.i.a.a.a .i -l .t n.l n
6+ ioioooiioio
,! E

a
c F on\c6,oo9 -t z .r I i
9': "1 1 c-cd-

d)i
uJ 5 v, : C 7a v C _
$ q.l q9!: ^r
n.l .t icl ...1

uJ
J
o j)
4
F z<
o9 ch6coh66oe h+<i.i.T:J-
:t o'dq\q
Zl --(--.+.\ iiii: o=oo-
.7
E

rl6clF-coN\oo\o
I
E

o-
09.iq9n: o-n!!1
o- --F-J(...t oooid
o
L!
o
;j;;iFa' h 99999
:-".x3
5
o
 ct,
^.€
,o'Po' >6 -
- o;

is
,z
r,: oo

o o od
o
(E
o
o

=;
o
-9 a';
.ct
(5 4a,9"
o !9 ;i
I
qrF Z
do ul-+!
F
o
E

=5
6rh
E o r.J
z_: -i

.= Eo
rll!(J
.= ctl
o=PF
E (JL)
EO oo
io iLi ii
aa 9-. n
o oq
EbU
.=< 39
o
(o EE
I

tr
lf =g'
uJ
J ,;Y. -^ N <_ o( a.l
o o i< :.o!ir-
:!d-+ o ;9^93
9
F ge
ii -
.o

t
_.!
F E!
U ,oo
a..6hF- -.r
5nU
U
o
z
d.
&
U r)v)och
d cl-r)Fo, dhcavo
Z
trl
&
)O I

419

I
 O

6r-a--
ii ,.rro\c6+6-Nd
__ -i ..l
Nx=
-i

---!a\ooc60600
-^,^,Xoo(rFF
E ===ioiood==o
E
o
o

oc-n!l!
coodd
a
U

E
U
Or) oc--ia
oocdd
a

h6!i-.as
(i vl-:.!rla
ccocd
t'i
I,i
SO6C6hCCCh
o <c\qvl ._.-61*r..

lJ- E
t
uJ
J
6
f, r\:j8!
ccojd

O
t
'4

En t
j-- <N<9q 12
n

=
t,
?
l
t
o-

2
= 29 E
<.jca\qo)
o E
?
L!
,.SOhOCCCO t!
^
'' v. 4 Y c c.1 c65 *,
F
o
= z

120
 o -a .= =
'a) !
==

=i= !-:!:l-uF
,.+i ii-
=t' ==
,1 -2t ai
,or Po' z:. :.;; 9-
{ =_= 77
=lA . ' lL+ = =-=
$s
Jz
=.t7
=..2 it
-= ="
='== acB
! Et^
,a; -
2?-
''d6

o -i;!
P.,,"E..p
r=,

.r;?=es
===

o EI
.-=c.tA-zL=d-i=-j

a-a.4.a---a--oi-
o: E_
;E?9
=
!-
> -6
a 6 - 9I
d .J

y_"+!Ziy Y-"= o t.oe'.')aY

E!;++:;
;;!:kE=
€E ".'3". ? 1=a-??"a
Y ?=d: -lt zt
E a4'L. ! E E E i z a t
E=9 z,"Li: Z
y9
u q' '" Y !-c-;=r=_??-t!a=
P ni :|': - t 4 6 = d
iel+x"E:EtzE{.E;2
.: t 0+.E " i'= n. E y i.E.r'
^

v 9z 9*=d;
a,ahnt,4i1?=. 1"=.
tsi:_Zi
3

:;
='yo&=i1=-aap.-i,z
{) v.? E'i- ,
2.2: . E::-.'= E *9
;: :. if 5
a FE s a
(
€<3 ; i = i: z vz -o =
7 7zz J.'. +;
= =
,in
UJ
F_
o
z
n ;. -,

!r y-

UL)
I r': :,2
2a i = ;i =
ii ii o .E
'Oh-\,
..1 N o .-r +<'6cr
E!U
.E<
t,a 3. ..
o.a
tE

(r^ -
o-$a-o
"
c- L) ;ro..6, 6.Ci--11-,
o Ls,iia a-$\occ .o6<'+h
tr6<, \J- 9.
;2 F
Il,]

l
"-1 -,\
F
bU
c-
E

Lll !6
F
=
U
LA ",=a
!1lQ
?snsB F
zE]
.=<
v) E Z: c0 ;
U
o -2
z c
d
o
F
Q U
+ 6hooh .rr-=a
zE] o
Z
(,.).
d
f ? :-2 =-
U
 a
a)
l{
<> a.
ii a'
O
dc
o
tr
.^,^xJCqcxq- -oorlchoo
:: =d didi5 ddc 6=
E ;>
q tz

o d.+r-:.
.tr
ooood ooo
c
U .6 ,"

.ao-$3\ aldr-!
c-..1o\\o-i.
ooocd

r;<
E
<-:"t1r- o!i

o
N
lr r- ..1 c. ,o +
IIJ
-l-i-5i
J .E -c
o
F (
L

;
F

o, <'l r, - d
-.-t;,;
-i
:!l

E
q,

E 4ieE
i-t
i -vl ----i -i
o.j'5F-ii {;Aira€,Ncr -:_:-9
o- 6i -i;d o caoo
o
E
,""e4;
EI
o tr E E*-
hhcco?=!qQ , q, . v o
^ ' Lrl
=
C F
z

,dFCTR'\
so
,o b\
* r-remnv 3
,\ L,
 co
O ?- (r^
n't
*o,g =O

O- O_ P.
$s
)z Q
:o

o
(, 9- P ".,

o; UF.
J 9.c U. P^
t! r=('l!6s
"-.1

F U U
r e6 !l' U
o
A
=-E &.

)a
Q .c tj
F
'do; ?-.3 9RR ,=
o')
:".-Fxo Z
F
a u2
aEa
a
Ja
2

d
,!
Bo 2 i:
a.94 :.!'!,
2

4
=o
-; P(J a (, l<.2 C)</
E(
LL 9 LlJ
:-=
a *
sl LO- F t a
,, o- - 3-.o=-:xl
:on
SCOo-
(, e
9
rl

i(J a I U* Ur-
,5
U ?
Z
c!
a,t Ur-
99
-E
U T no 3ci
I + EnR-K
z
E,]
& (J_ Uo
9z U
D
(, ii

Sri -

>E a6

.9=
F-:0
<Ee.
z'r-_n
>=^2i 3id

,_.-.
t
 "-o ,

aa (J
E
E:'
9b
;o-
g s-n+ F-\OO

.! l)

U =u
a,
o
=
5e
uJ9 -9 c.l
E
{
::
cr ct ro
o, \c -f
r- ..1 o' .j ;
JT
tr! 'a .l
<9 c
U
o
a.
E -z E.e
..
a. 'cL
-j:

a- E ;ii 3=2
o ,2 !,
*.
o
q:- n 'EnP-K":"r* ,-!,]..o
gl =o -o6
o
|-
J IJJ
F
o o
z
 COPPER
t o u a rt
,su,ated *,,r= .,t-
thermoplastic covered or bare and exposed to touch
3 n a
(boppen coNDUcroRs AND SHEATH)
oC
Ambieflt temperature: 30
:.CARRYING CAPACITY (amPeres): oC
Sheath operating telnperarure: 70

Reference Methods E. F and G

Refelence Method C
etc, horizontal (]1
(clipped direct) (in free air or on a perforated cable

Single-phase Single-phase Three-phase AC

Three-phase AC
AC or DC AC or DC
3 single- 3 single-core 3 single-core cables flat and
2 single- 3 single-core 3 single-core 2 single-core
.:ctlonal cables flat and by one cable diameter
cables in trefoil cables flat cables touching core cables
core cables
and touching, or two_core in trefoil or touching
touching or I or I three-core 1

or tbllr-core horizontal or cable 1 three-core

t\,vo-core cable veltical horizontal
cable veftical or four-core
cable
6 1 8
2 4 5
(A) (A) (A)
(A) (A) (A) (A)

!10 v
16.5 l8 20 23
I i 8.5 15 t1 19.5
2l 23 16 29
23 19 21 25
t.5
28 31 3,1 39
31 26 29 33
1.5
44 31 4t 45 5l
-l 40 35 38

1 dutv
rV 25
2l 17.5 20 22
I 19.5 16 18
22 26 32
25 2t 23 26
1.5

34 37 43
28 31 36 30
1.5 34
40 45 49 56
.l 45 3"/ 4t 47
5l 51 62 11
48 52 60
6 5',7
69 '77 84 95
65 70 82
l0 1'7
92 t02 110 125
86 92 109
l6 102

142 120 132 142 t62

-: r33 l12 120
t47 l6l 1'/3 t97
163 t37 111 t'74
215 182 198 2t3
:r 202. 169 181
294
241 259
-t 247 20'/ 221 264 223
289 309 351
296 249 264 3t7 26'7

308 331 353 402

340 286 303 364
lr)
352 3',77 400 454
388 321 346 416
rl)
399 426 446 50'7
.5 440 3"1I 392
466 496 49'7 565
514 434 451 5s2
_11.1

NOTES:
to be connected together at both ends'
l. For single-core cables. the sheatlls olthe circLit are assumed
tabulated values should be multiplied b) 0'9'
2. For bari cables exposed to touch. the

:25
 o
l- oor--h-
h-€\46
?U
=
U iE E

o. $-q911
E
E
5l)
'ni r)r)d.a<
<_cco6<' ..1 .1 ...1 .t
-=
a-
o
.c hO-CF-
j-:?91 .tan.'l
-otr
sa
r-:q9.1 rl+-t.i..r
c1 c..t ..! ...1
_o\\o-.1
cocoo n
U
rlq)o.r)-
. 1q\!.f .!.j.jn
a.
.= 6rro!a-
F iq09"ln
t:=
O4O6O
n-:c9.1
a, \c .i
c-!c\ch6
- c.r
E c.
e
r.a O6.oJC
.D 1q \vl =t
o
t
IJJ
J o jio
(Il
F E

;,.', -o..\c-N c
E

=a

E
r o^..1 .o
O
o a
o t
;. U ': !
.:
tr g
ho-.+o.,
c. 9.rq9n 1.1 .t .l
a. .o
Eo
a rc N.l Jar 9
ch606 IJJ
F
diid o
z
r)co.ar\o F.or)?
9q*9n
o
t!
(,
(l .,1 h ts- o.

,l
o

426
 TABLE 4G2A - Mineral insulated cables
.ofS,?iFS*.
bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact wi'h combustible materials
lCOeeen coruoucToRS AND SHEATH)

oC
Ambient tempemture: 30
. RRENT-CARRYING CAPACITY (amperes): oC
Sheath operating temperature: 105

Reference Methods E, F and G

Reference Method C
(clipped direct) (in free air or on apedorated cable hay etc, horizontal or vertical)

Single-phase Single-phase AC Thrce-phase AC

Three-phaseAC
AC OI DC or DC
3 single-core 3 single-core J single-core cables flal and
2 single-core 3 single-core 3 single-core 2 single core
rll alea
cables in lrefoil or cables flal and cables touching cables ill trefoi] or cables flat and spaced by one cable diameter
cables touching
touching" I three-core touching
or I two-core I three-corc
horizoDtal or cable or four-core veftical horizontal
cable or four-core
cable vertical cable

5 7 8
2
(A) (A) (A) (A)
(A) (A) (A)

. Juty

2t 23 26 29
22 l9 21 24
:

l 28 24 27 ll 26 29 33 31

39 43 49
38 33 l6 4l 35

46 51 56 64
51 44 47 54

22 25 28 32
24 20 24 26
28 32 35 40
26 30 33
31

38 43 4',7 54
42 35 11 45
60 50 56 6l 10
55 47 53
't6 64
'7t 78 89
70 59 61
87 96 105 120
96 8l 91 104
115 t27 t37 r57
127 107 119 137

150 164 178 204

r40 154 119
166
187 220 184 200 2t6 248
203 171
228 266 304
251 2t2 230 2/2 24',7

279 300 323 370

307 260 280 331
33s 3s9 385 441
369 312 334 400

385 411 441 505

424 359 383 460
441 469 498 565
485 4t0 415 526
500 530 55',7 629
550 465 452 s96
624 '704
69',l 584 617
643 544 5'/2

NOTES:
connected together at both ends'
l. For single-core cables, the sheaths ofthe circuit are assumed to be
2. No mtiog factor for gro4ing need be applied-
be ascertained that the equipment connected to the conductor
3. Where a conductor operut"s at a temp.rature exceeding 70 "c it should
(see Regulation 512 1 '5 )'
is suitable for the conductor opemting temperature

'..-
I
 U .or-oo
a
s= \ €nc t!1 1a-,-l I
?)
- aaz E
-co\o.-
.i "'l .t cl
e3E - j= c<.^i
..1

a E
E occ..r0c
oN5C!t
5n --Oco
-
ho-60
\oc.io\co
o. 350 -i-loco

ie c .l .j .! n .'l d ..1 .t:

(n --\o!t6l

U Caoc_\o
!\t-.a\o'i_

6cc..il.- .i .1 ..1
I \o.!@\o$ .1
F 27- --OOC
E oho60
.ohq)stn
__\,.t..1
<i

-ht-o6
.cCd?
- 9-:n9=t
dl
ol j
o
{
ul
J
o __\c_i..l
f,

E
-i

:
E --=<
<F - o..r.q\q f
--Fn_o
O
A
U -;
,E
E 6ho-<_
cc ..r o r- v) 1-..t.l
3 -i-i-idd
a
2 ,n o6cr)0
<F-- o..r*\q
__F-.+..
E
E IU
r)hOa.i- F
a. @-o\oh 1 "1 ...t .l o
-l ,l -j dci z
c-
o
d,
a
t!
(, 64O-h
d-,r,ro.
_., l-
o
=

r
EP
PP
sg
)Q
.JO
-a
E !;,s ..] r,- \o r,'
.o(la-<'-
..r-o+h
o, +or--a9
&eoaev
h .oro\=
i_u(r
to= o" o- o
c
C) o 3 .rX€
N ;d:i c s o csol
c- c.r(- c --stvhorxo=
a

=9 ; l,t
-9 o r$ov)$a-ocoF-
(,c 9U 3:3I
.rE
6l .r--f -Oo,caFo
h6\cro\
:!l
i ,..
A)<U :
.f--56C@\C.C- V,
o, ^ .i rr r, ,.o r- ca
= a
F
AE

:EG
i- -.=-^Ya
.o rn-,
- ' .a\o.ici--o6.]co
ar .-i .a + c. .+ -f N cr c.r v)
r] \a F- aa o.
-t =
-:OE
-- >o (-) -+it.llcc
v ,_i -= 1) ! rr cr--lca.--
4 t_' {_ .-.1 c .l
= .iJr]\rria
J!o
-\ ---j3=J ---
'r 32 ; ') - '-tt
f rs !tL'-aala

,:<
:zos5:ir
.r,=---d=
.r <-;
o NC(,()C-Ct--a-=
-l .l .ro.+ r)6\oa-5 i
='Ig
!) o
g U
: ! c^ \o<_CO\
s -o..r\o
U o o; -alalai.a.i$!t
E .!= oo o
J
J ;?
o o:! 5-anB r
o
E ..r <
di- U
U
= 5;9I t{' F o\ cl \o

(, >,:.:9cu
lE t
o ,; l)
Z
d.
!aI3 +6,o..ro,
\C€-h@

U
+
z
El .tv-t-+oo.c.cr+.
d
)Q i

l
i,
 o\o<_ +d-oo,
O
" -c1: !crl$i- :::.1 .i
a
t-- tr
! :..r-*
3o. < x d1 .!.1
o,a,ooo,
-,::.1 -i

a. ! 6-a- 6d+\o-
E E ..rq9 6 + -
::.:.i-l
d al
ddcoo
!o
r)<._ -d \o + .7) ..1
.r .l a.l ar
]:..].1 ;
:^-:-l-i
t)=
a-
o dNdcrd
€! -:$$-
4 * -.! ^l .'1 --6cl.l
A d ...r ..1 .t
c >a ::-r-i-i doioo

tr -.ti\c-
6.+-c.]d
c ::-r-i-i ^:;-lA
U dL
66r-o€ -6cr)6
l]o-.ch
e
6.+.a.a^r
dooio _'_ -. - -.
I
F
iE " hoo h600h
9s: ::.1 .i;
+$d--
:;;;-
>!!v
=F-
E
I rs-1,-a
e ::^-l-i
U

Ot_-{
; .)'
* a1! --JF-...l
o6-+-.?:
^:-l,r-
6+d<f-,
x ':l cl .l ^,Addd
o
E !!
sl a\ 6.J-ar.'l
ul
J
o rccr
r: -:o9 €r:11n ^]...t-\c
-d.r d^l
N
F r!
l! a t
V, \.1 V) |r- .:t
t" ^'ln -'::-:.1

lir: vt?\
- :^-i-l-i :!-r-i-l
t9 a
li "
+d-rlc
66+--
.--;9
..rdN:::
111 i. -:-lo ]::.:.i

-r)604
660cr)
\o\r\o\o6
P,

> ddd :^,:..].i coddo

3
!l;l (i r)6t-
h6060
orr6oE E
il ]::.:;
6+<f-al
:::.i.i
NI
c0 oo,oalF_
r66S-
;3 --O
diddS

a. 5.a€Fa-
9a= ) x nn'j n .t .1 ...1 r.j
>-6
0)
o. i9= dc.?
<r-c.raro
€. vl <t .1 .1
a
o,

o
U
o a
R;R3tr
-i-ic ti
F
a 5
E,l z

J
Ei=t = ll 3
 E&
fo
UU aio

Fg
)Q ss I P-E o, 3; E; =:=
dhoor
:- + o( r,t
dcr.lo-
oa

€ EE 2na6
\.JA .i()
/ r9 d.= 9;
!/€ o 3R ^-h-o
oo--l-d
*o Ag
o,
t ;:o "
o
o
o !
-c
to
o U U Fr:-o\f)*
3?=-s* --^co-
5H i-;=== a,..t60h

E >.h
E
i- 7' ! tt
G ? ^ 3€ -6ho6
ii9r oo'
tr t =<-
G o
F
()
r9
EX
=o
,: P6 i'l -.2.., crr--r!9 -\o6,.!rl
E r,> oEJ
: <;i
3+ \cF-o,-\o

= E=
: o=
cZ
E
E .:1 a, ':
J q ..,o - 3f, :-Y-6n

9
F ,. l)
o q
E 6 v) \o
= IE 3+ h\cro= 601_-o-
l_- t-_

E .,,€
iQ
a\
.L

J]
U
J o
a0 Z 6ro(=_l
,99 :s
d
iic
Q
+
zr!
&
th=F hhco6
.j6rlt\6 R3p?3
p ao a
U

r -e .- -
r
 Q
O
t_- ,^o6dz4+For)
_:€.ao.ohv.a..]^r
id

= =
o. 9<
t q
,l-
50
c
'E

a.
F
o
'c=
o
U

o ^_6v)c,
(\
-t-
:f
uJ
J
-.u
o -46
F <h_rrrcs
-i ,-t .-{
; - -i

o. r:-_:6-r

o.
=
o-
".-:6or
o
o
El
:l :'Y:X Nhx.i-c
F.:

30
'4"1ecrnt\
fr r-remnv 5

l:12
 J

Eff
50
)o
==g
JZ
UU
co .U
.-rar$r6
d-6+<_
{c{ca9-q
6r)\O\Ol_-

(o li ii
!u
co.
:i.r; o-,F-$o -<l\or--c
h\c\oF-l.-
EE
E
o
o : E
(, 6,O,\OOal
()\C\OF-aC
=o
G 2C- I
q,
-68
€=o
g -o d! 6+
-@h..ro\o Cl \O
a o .i .r-.an_6
.= O
!E
o
o
g -6{..:
CL .tt 9'o U \cF-xio:
o e. o
E EO
o ?F 3
E :o
o Ff -c.o..l 6 €dto:
eo
,.2 .,)-t<_6 -.+h€l
orel_
o
F- Eo
o (.)
o cD>
qf €6r,do
o
E
tz nr--L- L a.r.r-6i
:=
IE
o Ef
YJ
,E \o .-.r 6, <l r-
o
o
z Y q',= .irN--<
r-€sto
$6h\oF-
IE') I
F

tn * co.i.i<
E 5=-8,"c +-o\cc
6\E.r.€
I
3 Ef Y! N-6tj_st
c) F
!
<t O U
IJJ ;a-6o
.r-o\o*
60r,o.r)
J A c.ral--.+ -i-66r)\O
c0
4 O '.E
F o
z rlst+.i.1 oa\cca€o.
d.
i -:a €,- tp N 33Es 60.-ror'
Nd6r.)st -rr)c.l-
hr)\oFoa

O
F
zEl iq,EE a!h-<_o
& o<\or--o.
d
D
()

4FcrR'c/
\
oo
-, _--., !
d r-renmv 3
 O
aa..--fo€h.]ct.-
!1"1 -t
o 9v1 .! n.l ncj
cr :a-cccooao
i,
E
I .! n.1 .l .l \oh+d!
p. oocod
E
o
o0
oo..r6oa F-+-49
9!n1n dd^::iv'
ooodd
0)
o.
o
U h\oq) arNrrca+6lO\F\on_
o NT q\ \o h .i- .a .a ..r al a..l cl a.l

.E -!--!o
o
O I -<F-\O6 h$s.i..)
6t .t n dN-o! Q
<x.tn..l
:-ooc ':.1
..1
ooood d
E

r).io F\Ooao-i- :-l o r_- \o h

! .''l q\ r' !t .i .o .l

l_- a- o\
n .,1 6r F- +^=9tr
i: "t
ooooo "1 .l ocooo
U';
-:6Cr) o660hoo
c€ts-F\c\cr)r)r)n+.+
za o5o:oo5co:o
E
dl
(., F9
.t- ++r'c.6r r)rlO6O<_
t 'b, vtn.i.j.l - !1 .a-c o\
IJJ
---_':-:.:q
J
o
F -o^$
\9'tn1 .1 -t .1 .j .l
o

g!
a
oo(@a-<q)uasf.a-
3s ..t .t .l n ...t ...t ...t .1 .j n
E
(,
rr .i !t :i .. .^^.()or)
9"rnnn x;iox\o
cooco

\o .j- 6 r-- ooaoa

9 \o rl :t ..r .l.a ..1 "t ...t ..1 x
ooood €
;.
E
_^ho66o6oo
€- x n q .l ^,=oooa€@l--i--o
o ==oooooiodd
a go
9)
0)
o. No-al\o l.iiooh--
E
I "t n .'.1 ..1
ooooo 9

a
>- vl q\ c*iiEdl
IJJ
F
a 3Lr g< oooooo o
z
o
t!
dnca+oca.acr+\o
.a .a _j- !t
F-l a- c,
o

434
Eff
:p
sg
)Q
/o=
o

QQQ
ooc
;i id ii -..<
oa ? r + N-.1 CO.O0aa'
^:= x;r^-- ^l 6\oo.-n_

o .iu
-g 6 a .E
(!
o a.=: i4: ssQ!E
o
<<+
s
tt
.; 2 .i i,
U t- -z<
)i:?
o \c c a- ..1 c'
-g^
cLo 3,G Z!=2! -rlca.+c\
.l ...r .l - -
ot
EO
dr;\ 2 --=
rr 6
;z
oO
FO
3=
:J =a

.:
4t)

j -:r
3s f---d
f'""\
!***o*t ?
oz -i
E=
l!l
..J
5s
.9
?
U g?, -] ..-.+
xx-+r ..r ..1 v) al c
O6\o-\a
o. .l ar a..r .a .,r
=
E
E
I E? ie'
I z;
U
= ; (,
E A io ;!o
tf
IJJ
J
o
U
o
3e ; o- oo1

F
z Y:tl
d -a
U
+
zL. nr|OOh
.i-6r5 dr,-.1 0

I
f
',
135
 O
F.- *:!-6,or]+.i.aal 00r)sF-Oh
ai

o e>
o.
?4 E
hr)sl$$
h6hoo
oo

:i:
a
o - F-N+.c-rl
o "l ca - ci .o sf .i N ^r
.o

O
ul-6or
tll
rf
-t-
t
uJ
J
o -:6
?6
F :i
ddddd
E

o. e.-:hol.-
I
a.

a vl_:I.)oF-
><.
E

o
t!
(, 9a!d rlr)oorl Nr)0C$O
N.ihFo\
F
t-l
o

436

I
Eff i Y c 9 ?: d c: F,,=
= o a. = t6 --

:p 9a
a.
"f
P:-vi=
- !:!
Yt1=12^:4'ts
Q
a=
*5 -c *ii€ i J
i =:i:o::1
E .e! i,EZG
E EE r: : E: E ! Ir
Fs
)Q = f ; EiEu=:e:
.22.1^-22_99s S

=+E:*Pa==::a
o*9Fa=Zu',1 :^Y
.J-.=-i:;:u0raJo-

/o= Lll
TEeiESgB"sEvL
F -l
o \JU
o
z
.i

o, r, o a!
.a<"!tr)\O +\co\:.,
rcco
Y^r

?? >e!o(/ =_
i: :: 3,t
,' l' 9
-6'
= -A c-
MNcacao
ai t! 0a-i_--c
EE -a aa .airr\oF- ;9:l =t

:E
6.=
: Eb
-o =^
!N
\cor1+.i-
6<'O\i_-$
.r--$h
o.-o6.:
\crno::
o '!,)
6;<

tr o
U
tr
,i
o
-;
-o
iJ L<.8 r o-Y] :
-caJ.a+ r--,-:,v.
oso
ar r:- o-.+h\o Yl
lEU)
=tf
d56 U
':qo +i,<tYclt
.= a; =1)
---;
'u'=E.
! y aii !
o--..1
$6(-r€t+
..r.r--sl_
o
6\CrC.:

x oo
55(J ;!!
i;E
O LJ
..-ra.ri..o
n !
- = ar J
Oi-O,co
cocrF-o<>
..1 6- s 6 \or-::
=
Eo2 d " --H I
oE= t)
' ;l -
*ts-o-at
r)\OOr)0
,,j=-i .r a..l - .i <.
-
o
q)

]2 1' 9-a
,= -or)+F
o o. .l .a- !t+
I
E

-) F U
O 6dr)oi. (l
,tJ
J =- z /': -.1 .a .a

O z ., -='-J'_a
l- (j)
z diaa-, t t7 ,.,
C-oaooF-
..r ...r .1 ..l ..r
',2
^
U
ilz
!! a t- .f o : : a a
= = adr-:a:
r', -.-.tata !
).,)
 .j

e
o, o. o\ o\ o'
n ..1 .l .j .l n
E
Frl\oo.6l -60r)0.4
rl$..rN6l
U :::^.:.i

"dd
tr- .a s=tqI \c6+-..1
:
-:.1
.l dddod
al

E
U x.tn.'r .!^.].].]..1
--,oala.J
^^Nd6l
a dddod
.tr z9) r6\oc...l 66..rooa
6 !r - c.l .'l r+r+o
o iodod
O 6!
r<:ll o,F-o^l_-
:.-r-i;-i !::::
E h-ooh r,OOr)h
--o
<C.56666+ st <f .i- .i o
>-.:^:-;;o
6$-ar.r 6h.rooa
::-r-l-i ^.:: ^l .i

isf6c.s
s;i
e
rst+<.-
(/ o6 -:
? <-a i g
o.,rcae6 X o4
o .lZ -nC: ,

-)
t do€ts.\c
o-5-\O rt -i_ .a 6 0 cl .l
uJ
F- 6 .'.1
::.:.ij ^..i,-ri-i
J ri
o
?
F r\o!o'o\c 6rl6h+
.r .l .l .l .i
x.lcln d d.r..]
::-l .l
.r
.i
E
6dd.:]\o >
=c--:!
-ooooo
U
,;-
!?; d
l-a
&.+
I> esa strsRF
c; io ooodi
hrrcoo
\o\o\o\o6
O
>

6 ..1 -al\o
!arl1.'te 'j
coh.l
::r+-o. + o
\ E
- -
4
i4a rq"1 n'1

2* 9 ! € 6,caoaFi-
N .! ..1 1 .'.1
e€9: io
E
€+6$@ ;n
ch+.a.1
L;
U l"
I
a E
6-..l
9vl 1.1
..r \c
.l R€B3E
J==:;
E lr,
lr-
__

A tb
= lz
E

E]

^:.?99-, ?;=+3
.,ar= = * -j::-i- -.< 3r o

I
=
Eff =';=)-i,.:=:rr
t", - --

a.=!42+-
= / = t
=i
E -c
v "
l:Z=
PP -
9L
?^. t=
a=Y^i+'44
o6.
=4 c *.

ai:C!r-^^.:l=;
.Z*!u9.=:i-V-:
E=g
)o
i'l i ?!! ==- d E = ^.i
r'=n6=X.r'u-<,,
Efl=92F1'. 1aEaE
JZ
(o .= ! i E I I i.= a'
,,eQi*=9u.4i.9 i -.!,

..2t.4"\?+;!iU
o azE
F
o-
z
a E= -9,4 F d u,

OU
o9 No\orr
ii ii o
3F
d i;o- i;o. iv
o
_o ii
gE
tE
a.!--
cohi-F
a) .= E <5 o-!c-h
(! ;f,
O -o
(a9
u9 a yZ -t
(, 6-6.1
!Ex
EL \J
!- .i f - r r ss f-__d .. ..r .a
i.r.16-f
O
-1'

o
ia
EM,
Po 9-!-a
EF 7 =.<! . ?s -\c+-*
c.l 60.f
ErS /.
s
s3 =o
Eo
to .iQ
.-E 9=
C-
EF.i 3 e-E <.L :i.o.\66
??=
==
O-!

9e
6-

Cv
na 5
,La
o
o^ > n.9" 3s -r)*ho
x-6.--

"E
OF
oL
E'E .-:

o\ ,,.E.E<
iY-.9- 3s =L-o-rl

to-
<.<
Nt.,/
9-!,a
'i-=<O e.o n !1 5'
LIJ
J>
i- -. <B ro
6d. =l::
I<
.U
zEl 6rlocr,
.l-oF-5 .rr,..i.o
& --i
D
U
 4
q
c
O U
O clcaa-O-\O
Ol ': o\ <. o r-- o S - - ^l
ai
-
a d
E oor)r]o OOOV)r,
o 3r x +$--6 .i .7r .a c..l at
oo I E
I
o €
o
*ooo
'i o + o\ F. 6 <f .a cl ol
o
.o F
o
O

o O ':r€IS
6l
a
tt
IJJ
J
o E
hoov)o
F
tri
E

p.
I
t .:'i o + c.

a -^,ooa.l
o
&
t--J
r!
O r)r)oor)
E\o c.l .a6F O, cir)oa.+o
+++4j..'
6()d
o
=
EP
)o -== =: - :!=.=

?t==='-'-.;=,
ez=!!==---,!-

Ef,
=5
fo =A
9
- --n i q +E .:i =,''
tr a r. _ ==..47':
Z: . a {! ! -y } ===
Jz
(o =:!na=.:-==7a;
^9at'A=aY'$aD&
=
.t 1 A *'i a ?, : a -: 'i =
=

n - -'a ' t 9 7 = A c o

o ,.i>-.
l-
a-
cE=25::;:-
.i
z
UI
(-) g.I95=
o '^l
5t t2 z4
-tf:.r
Sg+c7 b*- ,.:
ii ;il 2,e
=l
^,+r+c :91ER
E E
c- R_ F-dr-!1 ".X*i -o
th
I r,
., it
i! .l
o el U 6C O<I :i,A_
at rl -.t+6
o i,l 2l
g a
-t f!
to
';
EI d-, r3.3s; !ii ix3
.E
O
-.t -:l
.,1
'i
t
:c\ -<n6o'

o =;i 9l
o
o
CL
d.
o >2 E
9o F(.)
U
69 o
Ptr f .i1 i
9k o &i
I
o.9 o
o6 o
;i+*oo
;+o'cF
^^t?f
.ro=--:.
tc
E9 =2
otr o r,+=l.f
)=J
oE =, 3,:3*x 3;7&o
o
o
I 'a
6dod q:1c 9!9I:s=
::l';t
=6o
6 e
g
I
I Yiai^.o r a3o)(i
7-(.f -
--+6
-tt F
lrJ U |')
J
o al2i*E,1 :1eeaX
i[j';+ii
i$3gf
o'ne>z
F U .g
.: E E'^?
(,
Z q
-^*c
& .oy
99li o# ^, :=e3Z
a.i+'a_ E5ii3
U
+
Z oonQa ^S:,:,:i
l.:-
=
i .: 1" -6esg
cl "+tsi;
?
 ()
O oh-
Naqc9
o\ {
id
a

a- \o f) c.r .!'
) v'1<_or ^1 --^ti
E o,
a : '1 a oocoooooo: ri^i^is
E
4
oo
!.1 o6,\Cq\
.a.l$r10. c-+c.r-!1
N ^! ..! ..1 :
q
: \O()t-.1

a
o
o -f.+F-c,i a.to\F\od
(, Nn: q\ \q q1 n-).1 "1 ot .t .!
...1
ooooo
Ec
o -E
O a
!.c x .l c.l .1
<.+s--
d -.! ..t ..1 .: ^--33
1 "..] ...1 :_ :_

-^^6()0
\o.++ocl Nxr.oo
oococ ooooi

coosf Oo,-<_o\ .,cro?f

Nnq\ 9nnn.r
ooooo
.tct1::-
ooodd
Q!
E
{ nco cchco6r)06c
i_--r
.>l-*-
Fr-\c\c\c66qJr+
^---^c
o
(9
-tt a- \c @ c.. <- 6060h
A
?
uJ
J ,+ -nq\ vln.1 .1 .l .c6do

o
F
+arslho \osl-c.r-
r.c6+<f
diodc

o6h+^-d
;
8<- iddcio ^r ^l ^l ^.1 ^
Soocc g
E
U E

oor) o\\o\oc-c)
\orr+.a6 N ..1 .'1 : :-
-i-io COO;-i
E!
5t.-F-6- o\r)$.lO
N9-09 9!n: 1-l .!ctnn.i
ooooo
,^
e 6ohr)oo
E
€- x .1 ...1 .l :oa@
j
o =idodio5oo
a E
6
a \o.i6iI_- '-l € .o + .l
9"rlncl
OOOOC !oooo

a.
Lr.l
\c cl c.r \o F
\c N
h :1' .a .l =.o60@
z
d
o
E]
oorloo
N6oa.+o
oooco
oo0aci\9
F + + r al ..r ..r < \.) F- o\
F-.1
o
 EP :!.'! = 4.=z .=E!

PP :.;=i=
i!9zy=-t,.E,
a a ",=.Jqt
:e2:
_n
o-o';.o
i-ae=
=
a

""" ._
2 ! "_ E - I Eli I "
.r=

E-=g ^ o Ixfu,..-iii--6
J-
E: o ^ ;E= ^

)Q € EE ?:;
a€ 3 I i:
C 6 ! ? Acz C t : -
= -- Ll;
=,1 t..== i:.a
iloz ueAit:tosai.a
o i
t ::.-.:
u'a
;=Eo=E*i;*itg
F
X r,
- b l
i
a=
Yd
-u -<)

o-
'JUU li
coo --t !,'
ii ai iL.i :s "l - 3s 33EEE iro.i\o
a- O,.l 6oc
^ii-l
.'a --(\a.lar
o-tr o-
= igo
o
-g
G =
.12 .!) -du
€<
o i 1t=
z ct -=
o
G
=< s,- ^-:..c.o
;?!]!=
o
.; -.;
o
a U 3
€^
Eg
FO 3e :N:trd
<6C€-
.l .i-.:t $
qc)
,.6
Yz
oO
o(J
E5 s EX .r- Y]
.r€\o+-i-
*-\c+r)
6z ,1
i La ---c.t..l
F=
E]
Ei qi
.9
=
=I
I
o.
O 6! tt o 3; c.v€'o-
-i_ ca (..1 ,
..]..ro-<'
:1_

E
I
-)
\t
u F Li dU
J U
dl
oa.r6-.1
F (,
As e
3s o.irlo.i-
---c.ia.l
o
Z
c
4
(, 93
+
z
'l,l
66OC6 .r6-:iC
I
)(,cl i.,

-..l*
 O

-6hF-..1 @FO\F\O
,: 6 <r oi l_-
I N,i;do

G
E 9< € oooh6
-d<t<6-'4
-o*,..o
-.::.i;

-- 6 r) +
dl ;^i :_r:
1
t
uJ
J
c0
-l.h-o6o \Ocohh
zl 6
t- i'n idodo
ii E

-- 6 O al
E

I
9.
E
E

o
<a -,ooN
-:":\o-oa
.r ..r -l -j d
E
A
o
o
Ei
(J
-9fEE_
5
o

l-
 APPENDIX 5 (lnformative)
CLASSIFICATION OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES
This appendix gives the classilication and codification ofexternal infltiences.
NOTE 1: The appendix is an extmct frorrl HD 6036,1-5-51.

Each condition of extemal influence is designated by a code comprising a group of two capital letters and a numbel
as follows:

The first letter relates to the general category ofextemal influence:

A Environment
B Utilization
C Construction ofbuildings

The second letter relates to the nature ofthe extemal influence:

A
B
C

The number relates to the class within each extemal influence:

I
2
3

for erample. the code { {4 .ignifies:

A = Environment
AA = Environment - Ambient temperature
AA4 - Environment - Ambient temperature in the range of -5 'C to +40 'C .

NOTE 2: Tlrc codification given in this appendix is not inlended to be used for marking equipment.

The following key is for use when referencing the list ofextemal influences:
' May necessitate cefain supplementary precautions (e.g. special lubrication).
r' This meals that ordinary equipment will operate safely under the described extemal influences.
' This means that special affangements should be made, for example, between the
designer ofthe installation and the equipment manufacturer, e.g. for specially
designed equipment.

L.
 CONCISE LIST OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES

AM8 Radiated magnetic fi elds

-60.c +5 qc AEI Negligible AM9
,40 "c +5 'c AF2 Atmospheric AM2I High-frequency etc. . .

-25'C -5 'C Al3 Intermittent AM22 Conducted. . .nano.

-5 'C +,10'C AF4 Conlinuous AM23 Conducted...micro...

+5 0c +40 "c AM24 Conducled osclllatory

+5 "C +60'C AM25 Radiared HF

-25'C +55'C AGI Low AM3 L

-s0 "c +40 "c AG2 Medium AM4]

AG3 High

ANl
AHl Low AN2

:2000 metres AH2 Medium AN3 High

c AH3 High
@ AP
F
AJ
c AD Othel hecha ical Negligible

o
't ADI
AD2
Negligible
Drops AK rlora
AP2

AP]

LlJ AD3 SpEys AKl No hazard High

AD:l Splashes AK2 Hazai

AD5 Jets AQ Lightning
AQI Negllgible

AD7 Immersion ALL No hazard AQ2

,\D8 Sxbmersion AL2 Hazard AQ] D;ect

AE Forcign Bodies AM Electro agnetic,., AR

AEI Negligible AMI Level ARI
AE2 Small AM2 Signallingloltages AR2

AE3 Very enall AM3 Voltage amplitude AR3 Hig]r

AE4 Lighi dust AM4 Voltage unbalance

AE5 Modemte dust AM5 Power frcquency v i- AS

AE6 Hcav_a dust AM6 Induced lo* frequency ASl

AM7 DC curent l! AC AS2

vohage
AS3 HigI

BA Cdpabilitt BC Coata.l fith Earth BE

BAI Ordinary BCI None BEl No risk

BA2 Childreo BC2 Low BE2 Fnc risk

BA] BC3 Frequeni BE3 Explosion risk

.9 BA4 BC4 ContinuoN BE4

IE BA5 Skillcd
.N
BD Erocuolion
f BDI Nomal
BD2 Diffcult
BD3 Crowded

BD4 Difficuh and crowdcd

oc CA CB Studue
CAI CBI Negli-qible
t CA] CB2 Firepropagatio!
CB3 Structural movenent
o CB4 Flcxible
A ENVIRONMENT:
Code External influences Characteristics required for Reference for
selection and erection of information only
equipment
En|it otltrentoI onditio i
Atnbie t tenlperann-e

Tte ambient tempemture is that of the

ambient air wherc the equipment is to
be installed

It is assumed ihat the ambienr

tcmperatuc includes the cfi'ects ofother
equipment installed in the same location

The ambienl temperature to be

considered for the equipment is the
temperatul€ at the place where the
equipment is to be installcd resulring
from the influence of all other
equipment ill
the same location. \\'hen
opeEting. nol taking into accounr ihe
thcmlal contribution of the equipment
to be installed

Lo*,er and upper limits of ranges of

ambient temperaturc:

-60"c-5"c lncludes tempe ture range of

BS EN 60721-3-l- class lK8. with
high air temperature restricted to
+5 'C. Part oftemperature range of
BS EN 60721-3-4, c1ass,1K4. with
low af tempcnture
restricted 1() 60'C and hjgh air
temperature restricted to +5 'C
AAz 40 .c +5 .c Pan oftenrperature range of
BS EN 60721-3-3, class 3K7, \,r,i!h
Speciallv designed equipment or high air temperature restricled to
appropriate anangements" +5 'C. Includes pat ofremperature
range ofBS EN 60721 3-4. class
4K3. with high air tcmperaturc
reslricted to +5 'C
25 "C .C
-5 Part oftemperature range of
BS EN 60721-3-3, class 3K6, $,ith
high air lemperature rcsticted io
+5 'C. Includes temperature range of
BS EN 60721 3 4, class 4Kl. with
high air lcmperature restricted to
+5 .C
5 "C -40 .C Normal (in certain cases special Pa oftemperature range of
prccautions may be necessary) BS EN 60721-3-3. class 3K5, \\,ith
high air temperature restricted to
+40 "c
AA5 +5 .C +40 .C Normali Identical to temperature range of
BS EN 60721-3-3. class 3K3
A ENVIRONMENT (cont.)

Code Exlernal influences Characteristics required for Reference for

selection and erection of information only
equipment
AA6 +5 ,C +60 "C Specially designed equipment or Part of temperature range
appropriate arrangements' ofBS EN 60721-3-3, class
3K7. with low air
temperatue resfi icted to
+5 'C and high air
temperature restricted to
+60'C. Includes
tempemtule range of
BS EN 60721-3-4. class
4K4 with low air
temperature restricted lo
+5 .C

- Identical to temperature
-25 'C +s5 "C
range ofBS EN 60721-3-3,
class 3K6
Specially designed equipment or
appropdate arrangements" Idenlical to temperature
AA8 50 "c +40 'c -
ofBS EN 60721-3-4,
range
Ambient temperature classes are applicable only where ctass 4K3
humidity has no influence

The average temperature over a 24 h period must not

exceed 5 'C below the upper limits

Combination of two mnges to define some envircnments

may be recessary. lnstailations subject to tempemhfes
outside the ranges rcquire special consideration

AB Atmospheric humidiU
Air Relative Absolute
temperature humidity humidity
'c o/o g/m'
a) low c) low e) low
b) high d) hish f) hish
ABL 60 +5 r00 0.001 '7 Indoor and outdoor locations with Includes temperalwe range
exuemely low ambient temperatures ofBS EN 60721-3-3. class
3K8, with high air
Appropriate armngements should be temperatwe resEicted to
+5oC. Part of temperature
range ofBS EN 60721-3-4,
class 4K4. with low air
temperatue resticted to
60"C and high air
temperature restricted to
+5'C
,7
AB2 40 +5 10 r00 0.1 Indoor and ou(door locations with low Par of temperature range
ambient temperatures ofBS EN 60721-3-1. class
3K7, with high temperature
Appropiate arangements should be restricted to +5'C. Part of
temperature range of
BS EN 60721-3-4. class
4K4, with low air
temperature
restdcied to - 40oC and
high air temperature
restricted to +5oC

5f"'*Doo\
/o-*
f uananv I
 A ENVIRONMENT (cont.)

Code External influences Characteristics req uired for Reference for

selection and erection of information only
equipment
Air Relaiive Absolute
temperature humidity humidity
g/m'
a) low c) low e) low
b) hish d) high f) high
AB3 25 10 100 0.5 '7 Indoor and outdoor locations ritb Iow Part oftempemture range of
ambient temperatures BS EN 60721-3-3, class 3K6,
rYith high air temperature
Appropriate anangements should be resricted to +5'C. lncludes
made" temperature l.ange of
BS EN 60721-3-4, class 4Kl,
with high air temperature
range restricted to +5oc

AB4 ) -40 5 95 I 29 Weather protected locations haviflg Identical with temperatue

neither temperatue nor humidily
control. Heating may be used lo raise
low ambient tempemtues
Normalb
range ofBs EN 60721 3-3,
class 3K5. The high air
remperature restdcted to
+40.c

AB5 +5 +40 5 85 I 25 Wearher protected locations Identical with temperature

temperature control range ofBS EN 60721-3-3,
class 3K3
Nonnalb

AB6 +5 l0 100 I 35 Indoor and oLrtdoor locadons Part of temperatr,fe range

with extremely high ambient
temperatues, infl uence ol cold
ambient temperatures is prevented.
Occurence ofsolar and heat
radiation
Appropriate anangements should be
made'
ofBS EN 60721-3"3, class
3K7, with low air temperature
restricted to +5"C and high
air temperatue restrlcted to
+60'C. lncludes temperature
range ofBS EN 60721-3-4,
class 4K4, with low air
iemperature restricted to +5"C

AB7 ?5 t0 100 0.s )9 Indoor weather protected locations Identical to temperature range
having neither tempeEture nor ofBS EN 60721-3-3, class
hunidity conirol, the locations may 3K6
have openings directly to the open air
and be subjected to solar radiation

Appropriate arrangements must be

made"

AB8 -s0 -40 r5 100 0.04 36 Outdoor and non weather protected Idertical to temperatue range
locations, with low and high ofBS EN 60721 I 4. class
temperatures 4K3

Appropriate anangements sbould be

made'

--. .!9
 A ENVIRONMENT Gont.)

Code External influences Characteristics required for Reference

selection and for information only
erection of equipment
AC
AC1 s2 000 m Nonnal6
AC2 >2 000 m May necessitate special precautions such as
the application ofdcrutiry factors
NOTE: For' some equipment special
arrangemenls may be necessary at
altitudes of I 000 m and above
AD
ADI Negligible tPx0 BS EN 60529
Probabiliry of presence ofwaler is
negligibLe. Location in which the walls BS EN 60721-3-4, class 426
do not genelally show traccs ofwatcr but
may do so for shorr periods, ibr exanrple in
the fomr ofvapour which good ventilation
dries rapidly
AD2 Free-fallnrg drops IPXI or IPX2 BS EN 60529
Possibility of veft ically falling drops
Locatjon in which water vapour BS EN 60721-3-3, class 327
occasionally condcnses as drops or where
steam may occasionally be present
AD] Spmys tPx3 BS EN 60529
Possibility ofwater falliog as a spmy at an
angle up to 60" ftom the vefiical BS EN 60721 l-3. class l28
Locations in which sprayed water foms a
contiruous film on flools and/or salls BS EN 60721 l-4. class 427

AD,I Sflashes lPx4 BS EN 60529

Possibility ofsplashes froln any directiorl
Locations where equipment may be BS EN 6072I I 3, class 329
subjected to splashcd water; this applies,
tbr example.lo certair extenul lurniraircs. BS EN 6T172I 3-4. class 427
construclion sile equipment

AD5 IPX5 BS EN 60529

Possibility ofjets ofwater liom any
directioll BS EN 60721 l-.1. class lZl0
Localions where hose water is used
rcgularly (yards, car-washing bays) BS EN 6072I l-4. class 128
AD6 tPx6 BS EN 60529
Possibility olwater waves
Seashore locatiols such as pierc. beaches. BS EN 60721 l-1. class 429
quays, etc

AD7 hnrnelsion IPXT

Locarions which may be ffooded and,
or where the equipment is immcrscd as
follows:
' Equipment *,irh a heighi of less
than 850 mm is locaied in such
a \r.ay that its lowcsr point is not
nrore than I 000 Dnn helos, the
suface of the water
. Equipment \r,ith a heighl equal to
or greater than 850 nnn is locatcd
such a way that its highest
point is not more than 150 nrrn
below the surface ofibe water
AD8 Subnlersiorl tPx8
Possibility olpcnnanent and total covering
by water
Locations such as swimming pools where
electrical equipment is peflnanently and
totallv covercd with water

d5o
A ENVIRONMENT (cont.)

Characteristics required for

selection and erection of
equipment
IPXX see also Section 416
Prcsence o.ff.)reig solid bodies
IPl]X BS EN 60529 I
Negligible
The quantity or size ofdust or foreign
BS EN 60721-3-3. class 3S1 I
solid bodies is not significant
BS EN 60721-3-4. class 45I

tPSX BS EN 60529
Slnall objects (2.5 mm)
Presence of foreign solid bodies
BS EN 60721-3-3. class 352
where the smallest dimension is nol
less than 2-5 mm
BS EN 60721-3-4, class 4S2
Tools and small objects are examples
offoteign solid bodies ofwhich the
smallest dimension is at ieast 2-5 mm
tP4X BS EN 60529
Very small obiects (1 mm)
Presence of foreigr solid bodies
BS EN 60721-3-3. class 353
where the smallest dimension is not
less than I mm
BS EN 60721-3-4, class 4S3
Mres are examples of foreign
solid bodies ofwhich the smallesl
dimension is not less than I mm
IP5X BS EN 60529 I

Presence ofdust l52

I

BS EN 60721-l-1, class
ifalust penetration is not harmflll 10
ihe funclioning olthe equipment
BS EN 60721-l-'1. class 4S2 I

IP6X BS EN 60529 I

Presence of dust
BS EN 60721-3 4, class 3S3 I
if dust penetration is harmful to the
functioning of the equipment BS EN 60721-3 l. class 4Sl I

IP6X BS EN 60721 3-3. class 3S4

Presence of dust I

BS EN 60721 3-4. class:lS4 I

Dust must not penerale equipment

Prcsence of cottosive ol polltning sl.tbstafices

BS EN 60721-3 3. class lC1
AF,1 Neglisible
BS EN 60721-3 4. class 4Cl

The presence ofconosire ot BS EN 60721 3-3. class 3C2

AF2 Atmospheric
polluting substances ot ahnospheric
BS EN 60721-3-4, class 4C2
orisrn is srmificant lnstallations
si;red bv the sea or near rndtrskral
zones producing serioLls atmospheric
nollution" such as chemrcaL works.
cement uorks; this rYPe of Polluhon
arises especrally in ihe prodnctioD
ofabrasr\ e. insulating or conducfr\e
dusts

Accordins to the nature ofsubstances

(lor e\am;]e, satiqfaction oi saLt misr
rest accordre to BS EN 60068-2-l t)

Irtermittent or accidental subjection RS EN 60721-l-3. class 3C3

to corrosive or polluting chemical
RS EN 60721 3-4. class 4C3
substances being used or Produced
Locations x'herc some chemical
nroducts are handled in small
;rlanhties and $here these Products
;a] come onl) accLdentall) into
contact with electrical equipment;
such conditions are fouDd in factory
laboratories. other laboratories or in
locations x'herc hYdrocarbons are
used (boiler-rooms. sarages. etc )

Proteclion against conosion

to equipment sPecificalion
 Code External influences Characteristics required for Reference
selection and erection of for information only
equipment
Continuousli/ subject to conosive BS EN 60721-3-3. class 3C4
AF4 Continuous
or polluti g chemical substances in
substaniial quantity. c.g. chcmical BS EN 60721-3-4. class 4C4
\\'orks Equipment specially designed
according to the Daturc ol'substances

AG

Nomal. c.g. household and similar BS EN 60721-3-3, classes

AGl Low seveity
equipment lM1.i3M2i 3M3

BS EN 60721 3-4. classes

4Mt i4M2i4M3

MediuIn se\'erity Standard industr ia1 BS EN 60721-3-3. classes

AG2
equipnrent. $here applicable, or 3M4/3M5/3M6
reinforced protection
BS EN 60721-l-4. classes
,{M4i4M5i,+M6

High se\.erity Reinforccd proteclion BS EN 60721-3-3. classes

AG3
3M7iiM8

BS EN 60721-3-4. classes
4M7/4M8

fcrR,cDoJ
6+- ;
f; r-lenanv
A ENV|RONMENT (cont.)

Characteristics required for

selection and erection of
equiPment

Household and similar conditions BS EN 60721-3-3, cLasses

where ihe effects of vibralion are 3M113M/3M3

generally negligible
BS EN 60721-3-4, classes
Nonnal 4Ml/4M2/4Ml

Usual industrial conditions Spccially BS EN 60721 3-3, classes

designed equiPment or sPecial 3M,1/3M5/3M6
arrangements
BS EN 60721-3-4, classes
4M4/4M5/4M6

Industrial installations subjecl to BS EN 60721-3-3, classes

severe conditions Specially desi gned 3M7i3M8
equipment or special affangements
BS EN 60721-3-4, classes
,lM7i4M8

Ptesence ol /lora dnd/o|'nould gt'otth

BS EN 60721-3-3. class 38l
No hazad No harmfirl hazard from flora and/or
mould growth 4Bi
BS EN 60721-3 4. class
Nonnalb

Harmfui hazard fron flora and/or BS EN 60721-3-3, class 382

mould gro\\'th
BS EN 60721-3-4,
The hazard depends on local
class 4B2
conditions and the nature offfora.
Distinction should be made between
harmful grouth ofvegetation or
conalitions for promotion ofmould
gro\r th

Special protection, such as:

- incrcased de$ee of
protection (see AE)
snecial materials or
protective coating of

arangements to exclude
flora fiom location

No harmful hazard from fauna BS EN 60721-3-3, class 3B1

No hazard
BS EN 60721-3-4, class 48l
Nolmalb

453
 Code External influences Characteristics required for Reference
selection and erection of for information only
equipment
AL2 Ilazard Hannful hazard from fauna (insects, BS EN 60721-3-3, class 382
birds, small animals) The hazard
depends on the nature ol the fauna. BS EN 60721-3-4.
Distinction should be madc between:
class 4B2
prcscncc ofinsects in
hannfui quantity or ofan
aggressive nalurel

- pr,-sence ofsmall animals

or birds in hannful quantity
or of an aggllssive nature

Protection may includc:

- an appropriate degree
ofproteclion against
penctration of forcign solid
bodies (see AE)

- suficient mechanical
resistance (sccAG)

- Precautions to exclude
fauna from thc localion
(such as cleanliness. use of
Pesticides)
- special equipmeni or
protective coating of
enclosures

154
 A ENVIRONMENT (cont.)

Code External influences Characteristics required for Reference

selection and erection of for information only
equipment
AM Eleclroiidgnetic, electrostatic, at ionizing

Lowfrequenq, eletholfiag1elic phenonena

(conducted ar rudiated)

Hamonics, i lerharmanics

AM-1-1 Conuolled le1,el Care should be taken that the controlled Lower than table 1 of
siruation is not impaired BS EN 61000-2-2

AM I-2 Normal level Special measures in the design of the Complying with lable I of
installation, e.g. filters BS EN 61000 2 2

AM-1-3 High level Special measures in the design ofthe Locally higher than rable 1 of
installation, e.g. filterc BS EN 61000-2-2

Signalling |a ltages
AM-2-l Controlled level Possibly: blocking circuits Lower than specified below

AM-2-2 Medium level No additional requirement IEC/TR 61000-2-l and

BS EN 61000-2-2

AM-2-3 High level Appropriate measures

Yo|tage a 1pIiutde variations

AM-3-1 Controlled level e.g. controlled by UPS

AM-3-2 Nomal level Compliance with

BS 7671 Chapter 44

AM-4 Compliance with

BS EN 61000 2 2

AM.5 Pov,et [req enc! wriatia s +lHz according lo

BS EN 61000-l-2

AM.6 Ind ced tow-f-equenc! valtages

No classification Refer to BS 7671 Chapter 44 ITU-T (Intemational

Telecormu cation Union)
High wilhsland of signal ard control
systems of switchgear and controlgear

AM.7 Direcr cllnent in AC neb-orks (321.10.1.7)

No classincalion Measures to limit their presence iI level
and time in the
cunenfusing equipmcnt or their vicinity
Ra diated n o gn etic fe I ds

AM.8.I Mcdium level Nomralb Level2 of BS EN 61000-4 8

AM-8-2 High level Protection by appropriate measures e.g. Level4 ofBS EN 61000-4-8
I screening and/or separation

, ,4.
 A ENVIRONMENT (cont.)

External influences Characteristics required Reference for

for selection and erection information only

AM-9-l Negligible 1c\c1

AM-9-2 Medium lerel BS EN 61000-2-5

AM-9-3 High level BS EN 61000-2-5

AM-9-4 very high level BS EN 61000-2-5

High-litErcn() ele.trcDrug1eti phenonend ottdttcted, in.lLtLed ot radiotetl (tol1tit1ltous t)r t hri?ht)

Cond ded unidieclit,l.tI tftinsients ofthe BS EN 61000-4-,1

runosccon(l ti rc scule

AM,22-1 Negligible levcl Protective measures are lecessary Le\el I

AM-22-2 Mcdiurr level Protective lneasules arc necessary Level 2

AM-22-3 High level Nonnal equipment Lcvel 3

AM-22-4 Very high level High immunity equipnent Level ,l

Cand LleLl u ni Ll i retli ond I fi an s ie n t.\ ol tt1iLl ose( otkl

tuiillirecon,:l titne scale
Controlled le\cl t lrnpulse \rithstand of equipmcnt and BS 7671 Chaplcr,l4
oveFioliage protectivc means chosen
Me.l ,,,n le\el I taking into accounl the norninal BS 7671 Chapter 44
supply loltage and thc impulse with-
Hrsh le\el I stand category according to BS 7671
Chaptell4

Ca ttuhtc t !.1 osL i I I ator.t nltti s i c tt

AM-2,{ I MediuDl le\ cl Refer to BS EN 61000-4-12 BS EN 61000-,1-12

AM242 High lc\ cl Refer to BS EN 602s5-26 RS FN m255 16:2011

Radiared high fi'eqtrcntt phenontenct BS EN (, i000-1-l
AM-25-1 Ncgligiblc le\el Lc\cl I

AN1 l5 l Medium ler,el Nonnalb I c\ cl 2

AI\,1-15-3 High level Reinfbrced lcvel Lc\el 3

E I ec I rc.n a t i t Ll i sc h a rye s BS EN 6r000-4-2

AM-3t-t Srrall lel'el Normalb Lcvel I

AM-31-2 McdiLm Ievel Nomralb Level 2

AM-31-l High Ievel Noflnal" Levcl 3

AM-31 4 Very hlgh level Reinforced Level 4

Special prcteciioo such as:

Spaclngs from source
No classiflcation
Jntelposition of screens,
enclosure by special
mate als

456
A ENVIRONMENT (cont.)

Code Exiernal influences Characteristics required for Reference

selection and erection of for information only
equipment
AN
AN1 Low lntensity < 500 WimrNomralh BS EN 60721-3-3 class 3Kl
AN2 Medium 500 Wmr< intensity< 700Wm: BS EN 60721-l-3 Classes 3K2
Appropriate arrangements must be to 3K5

AN3 Hieh 700 w/m: < intensity < ll20wml BS EN 60721-3-3

Appropriate arangements must be
Higher than class 3K5

Such arangements could be: BS EN 60721-3-4

material resistant to
ultraviolet mdiation
special colour coating
interposition of screens
Seisni effects

AP1 Neglicible Acceleration < 30 Gal

(l Gal = lcrn/sr) Normalb
AP2 Low sevedty 30 Gal < acceleration S 300 Gal
Under consideration
AP3 Medium scverity 300 Gal < accelemtion < 600 Gal
Under considemtion
High severity 600 Gal < acceleration Under

Vibration whicb may cause rhe

destruction ofthe building is outside

Frequency is not taker into account

in the classification; however ifthe
seismic $,ave resonales with the
bullding, seismic cffects must be
specially considered. In general, the
frequency of seismic acceleration is
belwecn 0 Hz and l0 Hz
AQ Lighttling
AQI Negligible Nomalb
AQ2 lndjrect exposure In accordance wilh Section,143

AQ3 Direct exposure BS EN 62305-l

AR
AR] Low Speed< 1m/sNormalh
AR2 Medium 1n s < speed:i 5 m/s Appropriatc
anangements should be made"
AR3 High 5n s < speed < l0 nli s Appropriate
arangements should be made'
AS
AS1 Low Speed S 20 rl/s Nomalb
AS2 Medium 20 nr./s < speed < 30 m/s Appropriate
arangements should be made"
AS3 Hish 30 m/s < speed < 50 m/s Appropiate
arrangements should be made'
 B UTILIZATION:

Code External influences Characteristics required for selection Reference

and erection of equipment for information only
BA Capability ol persons
BA1 Ordinary Unirlslructed pcrsons Nonnalh
Inaccessibility of
BA2 Children Locations inlended for presence of children c.g. nrrsefies,
electrical equipment.
infant schools. etc.Equipmentofdegrees of protectioncqlral
Limitation of
to or greater than IP2XC. Imccessibility ofcqldpment $ith
lempcratue of accessible
e\rernal 'urlace re.nperarure e\ceedilg ho'C
sufaces
BA3 Handicapped Pcrsons not iD command of all their physical and/or
intellectual abiliiies (sick persons. old persons)Acco ingto
the naturc ofthe handicap

BA,l Insi[lcted Persons adequatelyadvised orsuper!isedby skilledpe$ons

toeDableLhernr"r'"rJdJ.ltsc-\$hicrr elecrri.ir) rn.r\ Lreale
toperatL.g and rnarntenance (rrm Llccnic"l operdlrng dreJ<
BA5 Skilled Equipmenl not havilg basic protection againsi direct
contact wilh live parts admifted solely in locations which
are accessiblc only to duly authorized persons u,ith technical
knowledge or sumcienl experience ro enable them to
avoid danger which elect city may creatc (engineers and
lcchnicians) Closed clcctrical operating areas
BR Electrical resistance ofthe human body Under consideration
BC Contact ofpersons rvith f,arth pot€ntial
Class ofequipment according to BS EN 61140

III
BC1 Nonc Persons in non-conductins \itrrations

BC] Occasional Persons \vho do not in usual conditions nrakc contact

with exlraneous-conductive-parts or stand on condrcting

BC] Frcquljnt Persons who are frequently in touch \\'j1h cxtraDeous

conduclr\e pans or .tardr on .onJrrcting .err rcer
Locations with cxtraoeousconductivc-pats. either
numcrous or ofa large area

Class ofequipmcnt according to BS EN 61140

O-OI I ]I III

A Eqripnrent pennincd

X EqLLipment prohibiled

Y Peunifted ifused as class 0

BC4 Continuous Pe6ons $ho are immersed in water or in long tenn Ihrder considemrion
pem1aDent coDtact u,ith metallic sunoundings and fbr
whom the possibllily of intenupring contact is limited
I\.4eta11ic sunoundings slrch as boilers and tanks
BD Conditions ofevacuation in an emergency
BDI Low deDsiiy / easy exit Nornlalh

Low density occupation, easy conditions ofevacuation

Buildings ofnormal or low hcight used for habitation

BD2 Low dcEity,/ dimcult exil Low density occupaiion, difncull conditions of evacuation

High-rise buildings
BD3 High dcnsrty / easy exit High der-'ry occupation. ca,y conditron. oleracr,at orr

Locations open to the public (theatrcs. cinemas. deparhents

BD,l High denslty./ difficuh ex( High density occupation, difncult conditions of evacuation

High- se buildings opcn to thc public (ho!els, hospitals,

elc-)

458
 Code External influences Characteristics required for selection Reference
and erection of equipment for information only
BE Nature ofprocessed or stored materials
BEi No signi6cani risk Nomalb
BE2 Fire risks Manufacture, processing or storage of flarimable malerials Chapter42
including presence of dust
Chapter 52
Bams, wood-working shops, paper f'aclories

Equipment made ofmaterial retarding the spread offlame

Arrangements such that a signilicant temperature rise or a

spark within electsical equipment cannot initiate an extemal

RF,3 Explosion risks Prccesslng or storage of explosive or low-flash-point Under consideration

materials including presence of explosive dusts

Oil refineries, hydrocarbon stores

Requirements for elect cal apparatrN for explosive

atmospheres (see BS EN 60079),

BE4 Contaminalion risks Presence of unprotected foodsruffs. pharmaceutics, and Under consideration
similar products without Fotection

Foodstuff industries. kitchens:

Certain precautions may be necessary in the event offault,

to prevett prccessed materials being conlaminated by
electrical equipment. e.g. by broken lamps

Appropriate arrangemcnts, such as:

protection against falling debris from broken lamps and
other fragile objects
screens against harmful radlation such as infrared or
ultraviolet
 C CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS:

Code External influences Characterislics required for selection and Reference

erection of equipment for information
only
CA Constrrction materials
CAI Non-conrbustible \ornral
CA] Combustiblc BLrildings mainly constructcd of combustiblc materials HD 60i64 4 ,12
Wooderr buildings

Under consideralion
Cts Building design
CBI Negligible risks Nolmal
CBz Propagation offire Bulldings ofwhich rhe shapc and dimensions facilitate the HD 60364-4-42
spread of fire (e.g. chimney effect) High-rise buildings.
Forced ventilation systems HD 60164-5-52

lqupnrcnr rnadc ol marcrial rcrJrdrng the propagdlioD

of fire including {ires not originating from the elechical
installalion.

Fne barriers
CB3 Mo\ement Risk due to sttuctural movemenr (e.9. displacenrent) Contmction or
expansion.joints (under
Buildings of considerable length or erected on unstable considcraiion)
gound
HD 60364-5-52
Conlra(lion ur erpdn'ion Jointr in eleLtricJl wir.ng
CB4 Flexiblc or rnrstablc Structures which are \r,eak or subject to movement Flerible wiring
(e.g. oscillation)

TeDts, air-support structures. l'a1se ceilirgs, rcmovable HD 60364-5-52

panil,ons. lnstdlldror. to besrru(lrrrall) .ellsupponint

Undcr considcration

,160
 APPENDIX 6 (lnformative)
MODEL FORMS FOR CERTIFICATION AND REPORTING
lntroduction
(i) The Electrical Installation Cefiificate required by Part 6 should be made out and signed or otherwise
autltenticated by a skilled person or persons in respect ofthe design. construction. inspection and testing of
the work.
(ii) The Minor Electrical Installation Works Certif,cate required by Parr 6 should be made out and signed or
otherwise authenticated by a skilled person ir respect ofthe design, constntction. inspection and testing of
the minor work.
(iii) The Electrical Installation Condition Repoft required by Part 6 should be made out and signed or otherwise
authenticated by a skilledperson orpersons in respect ofthe inspection and testing ofan existing installation.
(iv) Skilled persons will, as appropdate to their flrnction under (i) (ii) and (iii) above, have a sound knowledge
and experience relevant to the natue of the work undertaken and to the technical standards set down in
these Regulations, be fully versed in the inspection and testing procedures contained in these Regulations
and employ adequate testing equipment.
(v) Electrical Installation Certificates will indicate the responsibility for design, construction, inspection and
testing, whether in relation to new work or fufiher work on an existing installation.

Where the design, construction, inspection and testing are the responsibility ofone person a Certificate witl
a single-signature declaration in the form shown below may replace the multiple signatures section of the
model form.

FOR DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, INSPECTION & TESTING

I being the person responsible for the Design, Construction, Inspection & Testing of the electrical
installation (as indicated by my signature below), particulars of which are described above, having
exercised reasonable skill and care when carrying out the Design' Construction, Inspection &
Testing, hereby CERTIFY that the said work for which I have been responsible is to the best of my
knowledge and belief in accordance with BS 7671:2018, amended to ...........'.(date) except for the I

departures, if any, detailed as follows.

(vi) A Minor Elechical Installation Works Cerlificate will indicate the responsibility for design, construction, I

inspection and testing ofthe work described on the certificate.

(vii) An Electrical lnstallation Condition Report will indicate the responsibility for the inspection and testing of
an existing installation within the extent and limitations specified on the report.
(viii) Schedules ofinspection and schedules oftest results as required by Part 6 should be issued with the associated
Electrical Installation Certificate or Electrical lnstallation Condition Report.
(ix) When making out and signing a form on behalf of a company or other business entity, individuals should
state for whom they are acting.
(x) Additional forms may be required as clarification, ifneeded by ordinary persons, or in expansion, for larger
or more complex installations.
 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE
(REQUIREN,4ENTS FOR ELECTR CAL NSTALLAT ONS . BS 7671 [IETWLRING REGULAl ONS])
DETAILS OF THE CLIENT

INSTALLATION ADDRESS

SEscRtpTloN aND ExrEttr oF THE tNsraLLATloN

DescrjpUon of installatlont New installation tr
of instatation covered by this ceruficate:
Addition to an
L-'l
existinqrnstallation

Alleration to an
t_J
exrstrnq rnstalra0on
ltJse cont nuation sheet f necessarv) see conunuation sheet No:
-rxtent
FOR DESIGN
l/We being the person(s) responslble for lhe design of the electrical nsta lation (as indicated by my/our s gnalures below),.particulars
of which a-re described ;bove, havlng exercised r;asonable skill and care when carrying out the design and addiiiona ly where this
certificate app ies io an addltion or alteration, the safety of the exlsting installation is nol impaired, hereby CERTIFY that the
design work for whlch l/we have been responsible is 10 the best of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance with
BS 7671:2018, amended to ............. (date) except for the departures, if any, deiailed as follows:
Details of depa.tures from BS 7671 (Regulations 120.3, 133.1.3 and 133.5):

DetaiLs of perm ited exceptions (Regulation 411.3.3). wherelppli€be a Eb e nsk a$e$mentG)m!$ be arached r. rhis ce'1ir€!e

Risk assessmeni attached n

The ertent of Iabilfty of the sLgnatofy o, is lm ted io the work descr]bed above as the sublect of this Certficate
"ignatories
For the DESIGN of the instal auon: '*(Where there is mLrtual responsibility for the design)

SignarL-e Daie' .... Name (lN BLOCK LETTERS): .......... . ...... .......... ... Des gner No 1

S'g_ature: ............. ... .. Date: Narne (lN BLOCK LETTERS)r ......... ............... ...... .... ...... . Designer No 2'"

FOR CONSTRUCTION
I being the person responsible for the construct on of the electrica insla lation (as indicated by my signaiure below),
particulars of
which;re descr bed above, having exercised reasonable skill and care when carrying out the conskuction hereby CERTIFY thai the
construct on work for which I have been responslble stothelrestofmyknowedgeandbeielinaccordancewlthBST6Tlr20lS
amendedio...........(date)exceptforthedepartures,ifany,detailedasfollows:

Details of departures from BS 7671 (Regulations 120.3 and 133.5)i

-he extenl of lfabifrtyrcf the srgnaiory is lm ted lo the work described above as the subject ofthis Certificate.
For CONSTRUCTIoN of the installation:

Daier............... Name (lN BLOCK LETTERS): . ... . .................................. Constructor

Sionaturer.............................-...
FOR INSPECTION & TESTING
I being the person responsibte for the inspectlon & test ng oflhe electrlcal installation (as indicated by my signature below),
p,articulars
of which are descr bed above, having exercised reasonable skill and care when carrying out the inspection & testing hereby CERTIFY
that the work for which have been responsible is lo the best of my know edge and belief n accordance with BS 7671 :2018,
amended to .............(date) except for the depa(ures, if any, detailed as follows:

Details of departures from BS 7671 (Regulatiofs 120.3 and 133.5):

lie subject of this Certificate'

For INSPECTIoN AND TESTING ofthe installation:

Sionature: ....-..........-................- Date: -........-..... Name (lN BLOCK LETTERS): ............ .

. ...... .......... .""' lnspector
NEXT INSPECTION
lr\/Ve lhe designe(s), recommend that this installation is further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than .. . ..
vears/months.

r
 Address:........... .......... ... . -" " ;::;^^;:l " i;iN;, .. ...... :

Address:............... .. .. " " ;::;::;:. . r"ri.t.,..........g-

Address:.......... ............ .. " . ;^-i^^;:: " i;iil, .......... :

,ottag", u I uolr) '- "" " V BS (EN) .....................

No-rin"t
Nominal frequency. fl' ... ,,' " ' H'
Type.......
Prosoecuve lault current. lp/'' ",' kA . A
Rated current ...... ..
Erternal loop imPedance Z"12) o
(Note:(1) bY ehquitY
'aiy - ov
",q,,iy ^***,*a
Gs o"taitea on atta"f,"d "ct'"out")

Delete asaPPropdaie
kVA / AmPs
Distribuiols facility !
Type (e.g. rod(s), tape etc) "" " "'
lnstallation earth
electrode D

" ",'"" """ mm Connecuon / continuity veriiied I

I\,'laterial .........-.....-......... "' csa

(.urrent Iannq (lr^)

Rated residualoperating current """" mA
Fuse / device rating or setting "-"" "A
Voltage rating . . .. ' "'V Rated lime delay
l\,4easured operating time ""' "' """""" "'- frS
of 0o1es .. ...... .... .... .,

ro it.
is va,io o..ry when rhey are atached
?il5n"?h5o"a"n"or"s are part o, rhrs doc,rrrenr and rhis cerrilcate
o'resl are atlached
l :l: :'::;ffiJ,i;;;i ;:pections and "" ""
schedures Resurts

463
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE
Notes for the person producing the Certificate: I

1 The Electrical Installation Cefiificate is to be used only for the initial cefiiflcation of a new installation
or for an additioD or alteratiol to an existing installation where new circuits have been inuoduced, or the
replacement of a consumer unit/distribution board.

lt is not to be used for a Periodic lnspection, for which an Electrical Installation Condition Repofi form
should be used. For an addition or alteration which does not extend to the introduction of new circuits, a
Minor Electrical Installation Works Certiflcate may be used.

The 'original' Ceftificate is to be issued to the person ordering the wort (Regulation 644.4). A,
duplicate should be retained by the contmctor.
2 This Certificatc is only valid if accor.rpanied by the Schedule of Inspections and the Schedule(s) of Test
Results.
The signatures appended are those ofthe persons authorized by the companies executing the work ofdesign,
construction, inspection and testing respectively. A signatory autho zed to ceftify rnore than one category
ofwork should sign in each ofthe appropdate places.
The time inten/al recommended before the first pe odic inspection must be inserted.
The proposed date for tl]e next ir]spection should take into consideration the ftequency and quality of
maintenance that the installation can reasonably be expected to receive during its intended life, and the
period should be agreed between the designer, installer and other relevant parties.
The page numbers for each of the Schedule of Inspections and the Schedule(s) of Test Results should be
indicated, together with the total number ofsheets involved.
The maximum prospective value offault current (IpD recorded should be the greater ofeither the prospective
value ofshort-circuit current or the prospective value of eafth fault curretrt.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CERTIFICATE

GUIDANCE FOR RECIPIENTS (to be appended to the Certificate)

This safety Certificate has been issued to confinn that the electrical installation work to which it relates has been
designed. constructed, inspected and tested in accordance with Blitish Standard 7671 (he IET Wiring Regulations).

You should have received an 'original' Cefiiflcate and the cortractor should have retained a duplicate. Ifyou were
the person ordering the work, but not the owner ofthe installation, you should pass this Certificate, or a full copy of
it including the schedules, immediately to the owner

The "original" Certificate should be retained in a safe place and be shown to any person inspccting or undertaking
further work on the electrical installation in the futui'e. If you later vacate the property, this Certificate will
demonstrate to the rew owner that the electrical installation complied with the requirements of Bdtish Standard
7671 at the time the Certificate was issued. The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations require that,
for a project covered by those Regulations, a copy of this Certificate, together with schedules. is included in the
project health and safety docurnentation.

For salety reasons. the electrical installation will need to be inspected at appropdate intervals by a skilled person or
percons, competent in such work. The maximum time interual recommended before the next inspection is stated on
Page I under'NEXT INSPECTION'. I

This Cefiificate is intended to be issued only for a new electrical installation or for new work associated with an
addition oI alteration to an existing installation. It should not have been issued for the inspectior and testing of an I

existing electrical installation. An'Electrical Installation Condition Repoft' should be issued for such an inspection.

This Certificate is only valid ifaccompanied by the Schedule oflnspections and the Schedule(s) ofTest Results.

ficrR,c\od
/o+
-J
f; uremnv
_---
I
t

.',.-,-=
 cAL N w o RKS CE EI I I l-cflr E
srAL LAr o
BS76/1.[ E,l \^ 11-\:].4':r---- ' :
M r NO R ELECT R I I N I

,REouTREVENTS FOR EL EC lR CA. *sio-ioio*i', not ln"ruo" $te provisior o' a rew c rcurt
To be used only for mino|, *oit i't]i"rr ".
"t""tr,"u,

1. Syqtem eanhrng arrargeneni' TN"S

L-l TN-C-S L.l llLJ

BS(EN)... .. .... .. "' Tvpe """ """ " Ratinq " """ "" A

Live - Live . .. .. ... ' l\"lo Llve - Earth """ """' MO

p'rih falllt loop lrnpedance: Z' - '- " 'A

^'^"i_"- -"e'rrad

DisconnecUon tinre . """ ms

MINOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS CERTIFICATE

Notes for the person producing the Certificate:

The Minor Electlical Installation Works Certificate is intended to be used for additions and altemtions to an
installation that do not extend to the provision of a new cir-cuit. Examples include the addition of socket-outlets or
lighting points to an existing circuit. the relocation of a light switch etc. This Cetiflcate may also be used for the
replacement of equipment such as accesso es or luminaires, but not for the replacement ol distribution boards or
similar items. Appropriate inspection and testing, however, should always be caried out irespective ofthe extent
ofthe work undefiaken.

MINOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS CERTIFICATE

GUIDANCE FOR RECIPIENTS (to be appended to the Certificate)

This Certificate has been issued to corfinn that the electrical installatioll work to which it relates has been designed,
constructed, inspected and tested in accordance with Bdtish Standard 7671 (the IET Wiring Regulations).

You should have received an 'original' Certificate and the contractor should have retained a duplicate. Ifyou were
the person ordering the work, but not the owner of the installation, you should pass this Certificate, or a copy of it,
to the owner. A separate Cefiificate should have been received for each existing circuit on which minor works have
been canied out. This Cefiificate is not appropriate if you requested the contractor to undertake more extensive
installation work, for rvhich you should have rcceived an Electdcal Installation Cefiificate.

The Certiflcate should be retained in a sale place and be shown to any person inspecting or undeftaking futher work
on the electlical installation in the future. If you later vacate the propefty, this Certiflcate will demonstrate to the
new owner that the minor electrical installation work canied out complied with the requirements ofBdtish Standard
7671 at the time the Certificate was issued.
I

Examples of items requiring inspection during initial verification

A11 items inspected in orderio confiun, as approp ate. conpliance $ith the relevant clauses inBS 7671.

The Iist of jterrs is not exhaustive. Numbem itr bmckets are Regulation references.

EXTERNAL CONDITION OF INTAKE EOUIPMENT (VISUAL INSPECTION ONLY)

. Ser.rice cable
. Service head
. Eafihing auangement I

. Meter tails I

. Metering equipment
. Isolator (wllere presenl)

PARALLEL OR SWITCHED ALTERNATIVE SOURCES OF SUPPLY

. Presence oladequate arraDgements where genemtor to operate as a switched altemative (551 6)
t Dedicate<learlhing arrangement indeperdent of that ofthe public supply (551 '1.3.2.1)
. pr.esence of adequate arrangements where generator to operate in parallel with the public supply system
(ss r .7)
I Correct connectior ofgenelator in palallel (551.7.2)
2 Cornpatibility of characteristias ofmeans ofgeneration (551.7.3)
3 Means ro provide autonatic disconnection of genemtor in the event of loss of public supply system or
voltage or fiequency deviation beyond dec)ared values (551.7.4)
4 Means to prevent connection of generator in the event of loss of public supply system or voltage or
tiequelcy deviation beyond declared values (55I 7.5)
5 Means to isolate gererator tiom thc public supply system (551.7.6)

AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY

. Protcctive earthingr'protective bonding affangements (411.3; Chap 54)
. Prescnce and adequacy ol
I Distributor's earlhing arangement (542.1.2.1: 542.1.2.2), or irstallation eafih electode arrangernent
(s42.t.2.3)
2 Earthing corductor and connections (Section 526; 542.3;542.3.2:543.1.1)
3 Mair protective bonding cotrductots and connections (Section 526:544.1;544.1 2)
4 Ealthing/bonding Iabels at a1l appropriate locations (514.13)
. Accessibi)ity of
I Earthing conduclor contreerions
2 All protective bondirg connectiors (543.3.2)
. FELV requile[rerts satisfied (411.7; 2111.7.t)

OTHER METHODS OF PROTECTION

(Where any of the methods listed below are employecl details should be provided on sepamte pages)

BASIC AND FAULT PROTECTION where used. confiruation that the requirements are satislied:
' SELV (Section 4l'1)
. PELV (Section 414)
. Double insulation (Sectiol,112)
. Rcintbrced insulation (Seclion 412)

BASIC PROTECTION:
. Insulatiou of live pails (416.1 )

. Barriers oL enclosutes (416.2:416.2.\)

. Obstacles (Scction 411: 111.2.1..411 .2.2)
. Placirrg out of reach (Scction 417: '117.-l )
 FAU LT PROTECTION:
. Non-conducting location (418.1)
. Eafih-free local equipotential bonding (418.2)
. Electricai separation (Section4l3t 418.3)

ADDITIONAL PROTEGTION :

. RCDs not excecding 30 mA as specified (415.I )

. Supplementary bonding (Sectior 415; 415.2)

SPECIFIC INSPECTION EXAMPLES as appropriate to the installation

DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
. Sccurity offixing (11,1.1.I )
. lnsulation ollive pafis not damaged during erection (416.1)
. Adequacy/secrn ity ofbariers (416.2)
Suitability of enclosures for IP and fire ratjngs (rt 16.2; 421. L6; 421 .1 .201 526.5)
Enclosures not damaged during installation ( 134. l. l)
Presence and et'fectiveness of obstacles (4 I 7.2)
Coinponents are suitable according to nralufacturers' assembly instructioos or literature (536.4.203)
Presence of nain switch(es), linked where required (462.1.201)
Opemtion of main switch(es) (ftinctional check) (643.10)
Manual operation of circuit-breakers and RCDs to prove functionality (643.10)
Confinnation that integral test button/switch causes RCD(s) to trip when operated (functional check)
(643.10)
RCD(s) provided for fault protection, where specified (41 1.4.2041 411.5.2; 531.2)
RCD(s) provided for-additional protection, $,here specified (415.1)
Confirmation overvoltage protection (SPDs) provided where specified (534.4.1.1)
Presence of RCD six-monthly test notice at or near the origtn (514.12.2)
Presence ofdiagrams, charts or schedules at or near each dist bution board, where required (514.9.1)
Presetrce ofnon-standard (mixed) cable colour warning notice at or flear the appropriate distribution board,
where required (514. l,+)
Presencc ofalternative supply v'aming notice at or near (514.15)

I The origin
I The metel po'itiun- if remole flom origirr
3 The distributior board to which the altemative/additional sources are connected
.1 Al1points ofisolation ofALL soulces ofsuppl_v
Presence of tcxt inspectionrecommendation label (514.12.1)
Presence ofother required labelling (Section 514)
Selcction ol protectivc device(s) and base(s); corect type and rating (411.3.2; 411.4, .5, .6; Sections 432,
431. 43,+)
Single-pole protectivc devices in line conductors only ( 132.14.1; 530.3.3; 643.6)
Protectior against mechanical damage where cables enter equipment (522.8.1; 522.8.5; 522.8.1 1)
Protection against elcctlolnagnetic effects where cables enter ferro[ragnetic enclosures (521.5.1)
Cotrfirmation that ALL conductol connections, including connections to busba$, are correctly located in
tenninals and are tight and secure (526. l)

CIRCUITS
. Idertilication of conductors (514.3.1)
. Cables cor:rectly suppofted throughout (522.8.5: 521.10.202)
. Exanriration olcables for signs ofmechanical damagc during installation (5 22.6.1; 522.8.1:522.8.1)
. Exarrrination olinsuiation of live parts, not damaged during erection (522.6.1; 522.8.1)
. Non-sheathed cables protected by enclosure in conduit, ducting or trunking (521.10.1)
. Suitability olcontainrrent systems (including flexible conduit) (Section 522)

ra8
 Correct terl]perature raling olcable insulation (522.1 l: Table 5l'1)
and nature ofinstallation (Section
Adcquacy of cables tbr culTent-ca[yillg capacity \\ ith regard lbr the n pe
521)
Adecluacy ofptotective clevices: type and fault current lating tbr l'ault
prolectiotr (434 5)

Presence and adequacy of c il cuit prctective conductors (4ll i 1i 5'li' l)

Coorclinationbetweenconductolsandoverloadprotectivcde\ices('1331:5332'l)
of installation
wirirlg systems and cable installation methods/pmctices with Iegard to the B/pe and nature
arld extenlal influences (Section 522)
protected against damage
Cables cotcealed under floors. above ceilings, in walls/partitions, adequately
(522.6.201. 522.6.202. 522.6.203. 522.6.204\ I

ptovisioll ofadditional protection by RCDs having rated residual operating curent (lln) not exceeding 30 mA

I For all socket-outlets ollating (32 A) or less. unless erempt (41l 3'3) I

(411 3 3)
2 SuppLies tbr mobile equipment not exceedirg 32 A rating for use outdoors
I

3 F'or cables concealed in walls at a depth ofless than 50 mm (522 6'202' '203)
(522.6.202; 203)
4 For cabtes concealed in walls/partitions coutaining metal parts regardless ofdepth

5 Circuits supplying luminaites within clomestic (household) pren.rises (411 3 4)

Pr.ovision of lire baniers. sealing arrangements so as to minimize the spread
offire (Section 527)
I
I Band tl cables segregated/separated from Band I cables (528 1)
I CabJes seglegated/scpar ated tiom non-electrical services (528 3)

I Termination of cables at enclosures (Section 526)

I Connectiolrs under no undue strain (522.8.5; 526 6)
I
2 No basic insulation ofa conductor visible outside enclosure (526'8)
I
3 Conncctions of livc condttctors adequately enclosed (526 5)
I etc.) (522.8.5)
,+ Adequatcly connected at point of entry to enqlosure (glands, bushes
I
. Suitability of circuit accessories for extemal influences (512 2)
I
. Circuit acccssories not damaged during erection (134 1 1)

. (132 14'1' 530 3 3; 6436)

single-pole tlevices lbr switching or protection inline conductors only
. Adequacy of connections, ilcludilg cpcs, within accessories and at ljxed and
stationary equipment
(Section 526)

ISOLATION AND SWITCHING

. Isolators (462; 537 2)
I

I Presence and location of appropriate devices (Section 462l. 531 2 7)

2 Capable of beirg secured ir the OFF position (537 2 4)

3 Corect operatior vcrified (functional check) (643 10) I

The lnstallatiol, cilcuit or palt theleofthat will be isolated cleally identified

by location and/or duable
4
marking (537.2.7)
5warlli[g]loticepostedinsituationwhereliveparlscalnotbeiSolatedbytheoperationofasingledevice
(5t4.l1.1; 537 t.2) I

. Switchirg off tbr mechanical mailtenance (Section 464; 53732) I

1 Presence ofapproprjate devices (464.1; 537 3 2) I

2 Acceptable location - state iflocal or remote from equipmert in question (537 3 2 4)

3 Capable ofbeing secured in the OFF position (464 2)

I

4 Conect oPeratior verilied (l'Lrnctional check) (643'10)

I

durable marking
5 The circuir or paft thcreof to be disconnectetl clearly identified by locatiot and/or
( 537.3 2.3; 537 3.2.4)
. Emetgency su'itching/stopping (Section 4651 537'3 3: 537 4)
I

I Presence ofappropdatq dcviccs (465'Ll 517'3 3:537 4)

I

2 Rcadily accessible tbl operation iillele danger might occtlr

(53: -l'l'61 I
 3 Corect operation verified (functional check) (643.10)
4 The insiallation. circuit or paft thereofto be disconnected clearly idenlified by location and,/or durable
markinir (537.3.3.6)
. Functional s\ irching (,+63.1;537.3.1)
1 Presence of appropriate devices (537.3.1.1;537.3.1.2)

2 Corrccr operation verified (functional check) (53 7.3.1.1 ; 53j .3.1 .2; 643.10)

CURRENT-USING EQUIPMENT (PERMANENTLY CONNECTED)

. Suitability of equipment in remrs of IP and fire ratings (416.2;421.1;421.1.201; 526.5)
. Enclosure not danaged/deteriorated during installation so as to impair safety (134.1.1)
. Suitability for the environrnert and extemal influences (512.2)
. Security offixing (13,1.1.1)
' Cable entry holes in ceilings above luminaires, sized or sealed so as to restrict the spread offire (527.2)
. Provision ofundenoltage protection, where specified (Section 445)
. Provision ofovelload protection. where specified (Section 433; 552.1)
. Recessed luminaires (downlighters)

1 Coffect type ofla[rps fitted (559.3.1)

2 lnstalled to minimize build-up ofheat (421.1.2; 559.4.1)
. Adequacy of working space/accessibility to equiprnent ( I 32. 12; 5 1 3. I )

PART 7 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS OR LOCATIONS

Particular requirements for special locations are fulfilled.

470
SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS (for new installation work only) for

DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR PREMISES WITH UP TO 1OO A SUPPLY

NOTE 1; This tbtnr is suitable lol marv tvpes ol smaller iDstallarion. nor erclusi\'el\' donlesric.

All items inspected in order to confirnr. as appropriate, compliance u ith the relevant clauses in BS 7671. The list of
items and associated examples rvhere given are not exhaustive.
NOTE 2: Insen 10 indicatc aD inspection has been canicd out and the resulr is satisfafiort. or N/A to indicatc that thc
'/
inspection is not applioable to a pafiicular item.
Item Outcome
DESCRIPTION
No See Note 2

l.{t I'\T}:RNAL CONDITIO} OI' I\TAKE EQt]IPIIE-\-T

(\'ISLAL I\SPECTIO)I OILY)
IL
l.:
ri
!..1

t5
16 lsolaror 0vhcr. !rcscn0

1.0 PARAl,l,trI,OR S\}ITCHED ALTERNATIYE SOURCfS OF SUPPLY

tt Adcq u le an an-senrents $h.r i . scncratiDs sct operares ds r sNitehed altem.dle ro llic public sulrp lv (5 5 1 .6)
22 Adcquale arangenrents Nhere a gcncrlins set opemres in parallel {lth the nnblic supDl! (551.?)

3.0 AL'IO\TATIC DISCOT\"r-IC IIO]I OF SUPPL]'

:.r Presence and ndcquart of carthing and protec6 e br)nding .rrangemcn ts:
. Distributols carthing amrrgement (5:tl.1.l.l j 542.1.2.1)
. IbulhtioD cltr1h clcclulc (\ huc rpf l jcabl.) (5 11. I I l)
. Eadil1g conduclor and courections. inclxdin-q a.ccssibllity (5,12.:lr 5.1:.1.2)

Main prorccllyc bonding coDductors and conneclions. inchrdnrg acccssibilir) (11 l.l.l.:r 543.3.2. 544.1)
.P( is,on olsatirv cLccrricaL cxrthirs bondiirg labcls at aLla1)frofrar.lo.dtnntr (51,1.11)
. RCD(s)pro!idcd lbr laullprolcction(411.+.204:.11 I 5.3)

.1.0 R \Sla Plla)I I( t I()\

.l.l Prcs.n..and.deqr.c\oInrenn'rerropro!idcbaticprotedion(pR\enrn,nrncont..rwthlivcpar()Nithinrhc

.lnsul0rioD olltrc l)ars..-q. cofdl. kIS .oDplerelr .olckd uilh dunbl. in{llling nul.rirl (116 l)
. Aaders or enclosures e.g corcctIPrating(416.2)

5.0 \DDt l.l()\\t. PRO .]( ItO\

i.L hr\, rdrn,l rlli(ri\en$r ol rdrliliun!lprotLition mrthod\:
. RCI)G)nol crcccding 30 nrAoper.tirg curent (4l5.lt Pat 7). scc ltcn 8.14 ofthis schedule
. SuDplclncntnry bondins (.115 2r P.fi 7)

6.U oTHf R Nlf'IH()DS OI PROTT]C', O)J

6.1 Presence and effectiycoess olmethodswhich givc both basi( and f{ull protection:
. SILVsvste . inclrdnrrJrhcsourccandassociatedcircuits (Section 414)
PEIV s!sre1n. n'.ludin! nre softce and rssoc rcd circuits (Section 4l:l)
' I)oublc or reinforced inNlation i e. Clas II orcquiral.nr equipment and
!rsociated circ{its (Section,+l l)
. Eleerical seprration tbr one irem ofcqldpmcnt e.g. shaler $pDlv unit (Section.+13)

7.0 CO\SLTMER U\IT(S) i DIS]RTtsUTION BOARD(S):

7.1 Adcquacy ofucces and rorkl.g rpacc lbr ilrnN ofelectrical equipment iicluding slitchgcar ( 132.12)

1.1 Conrpon.nrs.rc $Li ble ac.ordarg to a\senrblr manulactlrcr's iistruotioDs or literature (536.4.103)

7.3 Presence of lirked nra$ s$rch(es) (.+02. 1.201 )

7.1 l aIoG fo' evcry cl,nuil or gro!'p olcncuits aDd dll iteDrs ofequiunent (462.:)

7i Suitahilirr ofenclosurc(s) tbr IP and firc ralniss (:ll6.2r:121.1.6i,+21.1.201r j26.j)

471
 CO\St:\lr R L \lTrS) DISTRtttLTIO\ BO.\RD(Si cotrtinucd
Protecrion rsiinn nlecliuical damagc $herc cabtcs cnter cqui[ncDr (522.8.1: 522.8.5: 522.8 n
,1''1 ConlinnalioD rhar lLL con(lucro, connecLions are on..Lirt,,-. located in teminah and n.e tigt,t r,lrecrrc 1S:O.t;
7.3 A\oidaDce olherring ctleds $here.ables cnter ieromagneti. enclo$res e.g. stccl (521.5)

Sclection of rcr!.ct Npc and rarjnss ofcircuit prorectj\."

1.6: Sections.l3l. +lli 537.1.1.1)
.11
a""i"". ro. ou"."u."rt
"nJEut[-rc"t[n 1,tr r-I3I
7.]l) Presencc ofappropriate circuit chArts, warning atrd otler notices:
.P( isio. ol circuit chans schcdule\ or equilalcDt tarns ofirtormadon(5 t4 9)
. Waariig notice oJ nrethod of isolation whcre Iirc pajls not
clfabic ofbejng isotatcd by a single dflie (514.1l)
. Periodic inspeciion and tesring noticc (514 lt.l
)
. RCD si\rnontH) rest noti.er whcrc reqxircd (51.1.11.1)
. AFDD sir-montlly rcsr nodcci \vherc requned

'\hming notice ofnon-srandard (miredl colours ofconducror prescnt (51.1.14)

7.1 l Presercc oflabcls to ildiqle thc puTosc ot$\irdrse.f aDd prorechc devices (5 r4.iirsl4f)

8.0 CIRCUITS
rl.1
^dcquac},ofcoId!cnFbl..,.",.t-".;
3.: Cnble i,rstallatn r Derhods snltable for tlre tocation(s) and erteruat influeiccs
tSecG 5,2)
8.i Scgregriiofu'sep.mrion olBand I (EL! ) and BaDd 1l (LV)circtrils. and clectrical and
t"" 6:s,
li .l
""""b.6""L*"
Cxbles.orecrly eLe.tcd und m||lrted tlnoughoul. \rnh prolc.tion agaiNt ebrasior (S".rio,,, S: r. -.Zr
85 Pu ision of1lr. hririe,s. ierhig rm.g.henrs \here ncccss.rt (:17.2)
t.6 Nor sherllrcd crbl.s cncl6.d rlronghonr nj corduir. d,rcrtDs oL rl1nrkirrq (5t 1. t0. t: 516 8)
8.1 Crbles conccal.d undcr lllor. aLx e ccit,ngs or in \.a s tadilitnls. adcquarelr
frorcctcd isarr\l danige 1j:l6.10t. jtt.6.t0t. j::6:01jtt 6.20t)
C(nnlucnn's corccth nlenriil.d b!.olou. Ictdnlg ornumb.ing (S.crnnr 5l,t)

Prclencc. adequacy.nd corred tcmrjnation of pr otecrile .onductoF (.+ll.3.l. tr 543.1)

li l0 ( rblcs 0d conductos ..n.ccll! &!mc(.d. cnrkDcd rnd Nilh no ur(tne nrecb.njcrt s*i,, tS."i*;:Or
s.l I No basi. insularion ofa coDdu.ror risible onBide enclos le (5:6.8)
lJ ll Slngle lrolc dc\ i..\ nr $\ndrirg or prol..rjon iD lrre condu.td\ ontv ( tt:.1.1. t:5lL l,1i6t
3ll A.c.s$i e\ nor d.rnagcd. s.. ure rr rrred. corrcctr! .on,kcred. {irablc for e{rcnral inttrenccs rt :r r ,]: r r : :: secr o, :: e r

8.ll Irro\ inor oladdilnDrl prcre.rlon icquir.Denls trv R( D not c\.eednrg ltmA:
. So.kel-oullets rarcd n ll A.r lc\. urless c\crrpr Ll.t)
t.tr
. S!pfllcs for nx,bile cquifln.rr \ jth . cu,Enl fur1ns
rlot crc.edjfg -ll.A tor usc onldo.r\ (4llX)
. Cables co0cellcd in walls ar a dcpth oflcss rhan 50 mm (522.6.202: 521.6.20j)
. (ablcs conc.rlcdii \xris prllitjons .o j jnirg njctll po,r, ,.gu.at",, nr acptr,l-- r- ol---6: o: r-

.Fnralcircuitssupplyinslmnlaircswlrliidomestic(househotd)prcmises(al1.3.4)
8.5 Prcsencc olappropriatc dcriccs for holxtion and witching correcth toc;ted
including:
. NlcoDs ofswilchirg off iir Dreclmnical maintenance (Section.16.lj 5l?.3.2)

' EDrer gcncr'. s\l.itcltnrg (.165. I : 5 l7.1.I )

. Funcrioml *litcfiing. tar conrrol ol pais ot rle ijrstrlt.rion

and curenr_usiig equiprr.,,t t+O]. r, ftt:.t t
. fireiiehrer s s\iitdres (5:i +)

9.0 CURRENT-USING EQUIP]\{ENT (PER\,IA}ENTLY CO\NECTED)

9l Equipmcrl nor damaged. securety fixed and snimble for e.t.,"nt inft,cn""s ( t:+.ir I +tO:: S t::l
9l Pror ror ol o!erload and or undcr\ottiec protecrion e g. r'o..nraring n,n"r,ines. tr,"qunals;ti*, ,aa:. ss:t
9..1 Irsnllcd to nrirnnize fic btrild{p olhear and resrricL ile spLearl oi fire t421.1.4:s:C, )
Ad..lurc] of workingsface.Acccssibitity to equjpmenl (lj2.l1 jt3.l)

r0.0 LOC-{TION(S) CO,\"I{t\I\c A BATH OR SHO\IER (SICTION 701r

r0l l0 m--\ RCD prcteclio! for all L\i circuits. cquipnlent s!itabte for tbc zones. supplem"ou.y t"ra,"g (r"i,"* *quir"AE;

11.0 OTHER PART 7 SPECIAI,I]\STALLATIONS OR I,OCATIONS

I l.l Lirt eli other speci.l lnslollatior5 or locatiors prcsent. il arr {Rec.rd scparret! rhe..r,,l,;;i.;ri"@

Name (Capitats) Signature Date ..................

472
 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CONDITION REPORT

SECTION A. DETAILS OF THE PERSON ORDERING THE REPORT

SEcTroN c. DETAILs oF THE INSTALLATIoN wHlcH ls rHE suBJEcr 0F THls REPoRT

n.. L^er

oi.lrrpii". .rp".i."t
Estimated age of wLing system .. ... ....... .years
Evidence of;dd tions ialterations YesD NoE Not apparent E lfyes, estmate age """ years

lnslalaton records available? (Regulation 651 1) YesE NoE . - Date of last inspection "" "" " """"" "' (date)

secrrbu o, exrrrr IHD LtMtTATloNs oF lNSPEcrloN AND TESTING

Extent ofthe eleclrical installation covered by th s report

Ope aliola l-tal,o'" n(lLd lg ll^e 'easors (see paqe 10 ... . . . . ) ........ ............

ir, i..p""tl. r.Jt.irrg;.,;i;Ji;ilir;;il.;;;;;;til;;;i;; n.," o".n rr',[a *tr,,

"ccordance
with BS 7671i2018 (rET
Wlring Regu atons)as amended t0 ... ... . ... .
It should be noted that cabtes conceateo wttrtn irunflrg rn; ir, ul]d" i"ors, in roof spaces and generallywth n the fabrlc ofthe blrildlng or
"l;or
underground have not been inspected !nless specic;ly agreed between the clienl and nspeclo r
prior to the inspecuon An nspection should be
made within an accessible Ioof space housing other elect cal equipment.
SECTIOi'I E. STJMIVTARY OF THE CONDITION OF THE INSTALLATION

Overallassessment ofthe nstallation in te.ms of its suitability for continued use

SATISFACTORY / UNSAT SFACToRY" (Delete as approprate)
*An
unsatisfactory assessment indicates that danqerous (code C1)andior potenlially dangerous (code C2)conditons have been dentified.
SECTION F, RECOIMI\4ENDATIONS
Where the overa lassessmeni of the suitabiity ofthe installation for continued use above ls stated as UNSATISFACToRY,
l/ we recommend thai
any obse rvations c assiled as Dargel present' (co de C1) ot Potentially dangerous' (code C2) are acted up on as a mattel of u lge ncy.

(code Fl)
tn;esggation w thout detay ts recom me nded for observations ide ntified as 'F ulher investgation rcquied'
observ;tlons classified as lnpravenent recomnended' (code C3)should begven due considelation

sL hle.t to the necessarv remedlal action beinq taken, I / we recommend that the installation|s further inspected an
SECTION G, DECLARATION
(as indicated by my/our signatures
ttWe, oeing ttre personls) responsible for the inspection and testing of the electrical installation
I carrying out the inspection and
i.i"iri, p.itiirrl"ririich ire described above, having exercised reasonable skilland care when
I "r that the information in this report, including the observations and the attached schedules, provides an accurate
testin;, hereby declare
asses-#ent oithe condition ofthe etectrical installaiion taking in6 account the stated extent and limitalions in section
D ofthis report.
I
lnspected and tested by: Report authorised for issue bY:
I
Nare (Capitars)

Siglalure ......... Signalure ..................... .

For,on behalfof
Postion ...........
Address . ..................
Date Dale ............ .

sEcTloN H, ScHEDULE(S)
.... ... . .schedlle(s)ol nspecuon and .. .....sched ule(s) of test resulls are attached
The attached sched; e(s) are part of lhls document and lhls Ieport is va d only when they are atlached to t

473
SECTION I, SUPPLY CHAMCTERISTICS AND EARTHING ARMNGEMENTS
Eadhing Number and Type of Live NaturE of Supply Parameters Supply Protective Device
arranqements Conductors
TN,C N ACn DCE Nominalvolage, U/Uolr).......................V
TN.S tr 1-phase 2-w re ! 2-wire E Nominal frequency, fll . .................. ........ Hz Type
TN.C.S E 2-phase.3w re n 3-wire n Prospective fau t currcnt, lp/a ........... ...... kA
TT tr 3'phase 3-wlre tr other E Externalloop impedance, Z" l2l - ' Q Rated currenl ....................A
]T tr 3-phase 4-wire tr
Confirmation ofsuppy po aritv ! 12) by enquiry at by neasurcnent)

other sources ofsuppy (as delailed on attached schedule) E

SECTION J, PARTICULARS OF INSTALLATION REFERRED TO IN THE REPORT
ll4eans of Earthinq Details of lnstallation Eafth Electode (where applicable)
Disiributols facility tr
lnstallation earlh
eectrode tr Resistance to Earlh o
Main Prolective Conductors
Eanh'rg coldLclor lli,4atenat ........ ... ... csa ......................mm/ Conneclion / cootinuity verified E
Ivain orotective bondho condu.lors | ..
I'/ate'iar
ii;;;,:;;:;;;;;t'i,;:,a-;;-'" I rr2 Connection / continuity verilied n
To waler installation pipes n To gas instalation pipes f lTooil nstallation pipes E To structurclsteel E
To lighlninq protection E To other l Specfy
Main Switch / Switch-Fuse i Circuit.Breaker / RCD
Loaation CLrpnl rriinn A lf RCD main switch
Fuse/devceratingorsettng ...........A Rated res dual operating currenl (l^,) .....................mA
BSTFN] Voltaoe €iino . V Raled ilme delav ........... .. ms
No of po es l,'leasured operating t me
SECTION K. OBSERVATIONS
Reler ng to the attached sched ules ol ifspection and test results. and subiect lo the limitalions specifled at the Extent and limitations af inspection
ard lestlrg seclion
No remedial action s required E The fo low ng observalions are made E {see below):
OBSERVATI0N(S) rncrud'sch'dure GI{ence,as
CLASSIFICATION
CODE

one ofthe followifg codes, as appropiate, has been allocated to each ofthe observations made above to ndicate tothe pe rson(s) respo nsib e for
the insta lat on the deqree of uroency for remed alaction.
C1 - Daiger prcsent. Risk of injury. lmmediate remedial action required
C2 Polenlally dangerous - urgent remedialaction required
C3 - lmprovement recommended
F - Furlher nvestiaatiof req! red wthout delay
CONDITION REPORT

Notes for the person producing the Report:

1 This Report should only be used 1bt reporting on the condition of an existing electrical installation. and
[ottbr the replacenent of a consumeL unit disttibution board. An instaliation which was desi.gned to an
earlier edition ofthe Regulations and *,hich does not full-r,corrply rvith the current edition is not necessarily
unsat'e for continued use, or requires upgrading. Onll dal.rage. deterioration. defects, dangerous corditions
and non-compliance with the requiremenls of the Regulations, rvhich may give rise to danger, should be
recoldecl.
The Report, normally comprising at least five pages, should include schedules ofboth the inspection and the
test results. Addjtionai pages may be necessaly for other than a simple installatiol and for the'Guidance for
recipients'. The numbcr ofeach page should be indicated, together witl'r the total number ofpages involved.
The reason fbr ptoducing this Repofi, such as change of occupancy or landlord's periodic maintenance,
should be identified in Section B.
Those elements ofthe installation that are covered by the Repofi and those that are not should be identified
in Section D (Extent and limitations). These aspects should l'rave been agreed with the person oldering the
repofi and other ir]terested pafties before the inspectio[ and testing commenced. Any operational limitations,
such as inability to gain access to parts ofthe installation or au item ofequiplnent, should also be recorded
in Section D.
5 The naxiururlr plospective value olfault currelt (Ipl) recorded should be the greater ofeither the prospective
value of short-circuit current or the prospective value ol eafih fault cufient.
6 Where au installation has an alteruative source of supply a lufther schedule of supply charactedstics and
eafihirg alrangerrents based upon Section I ofthis Report shou)d be provided.
7 A sumrrary ol the condition of tjre installation in teflns of safety should be clearly stated in Section E.
Observations, if a[y, should be categorised i[ Section K using the coding Cl to C3 as appropdate. Any
observation given a code C I or C2 classification should result in the overall condition of the ilstallation
being reported as unsatisfactoly.
Wherever pmcticable. items classified as 'Danger present'(C1) should be made sale on discovery.
Where this is not possible the owncr or user should be given w tlen notification as a matter of urgency.
Where an obseNation requires further investigation (FI) because the inspection has revealed an apparent
dclicicncy which could not, owing to the extent or limitations of the inspection, be fully identified and
fufther investigatior may reveal a code Cl or C2 item, this should be recorded within Section K, given the
codc Fl and nrarked as unsatisfactory in Section E.
l0 If tlre space available for observations in Section K is jnsufficient, additional pages should be provided as
necessary.
1l The date by which the next Electrical Iustallation Condition Repofi is recommended should be given in
Section F. The i[terval between inspections should take into account the type and usage of the installation
and its overall condition.
t2 Any deficiencies with intake equipment should be reported to the person ordering the work.
CONDITION REPORT

GUIDANCE FOR RECIPIENTS

(to be appended to the Report)
This Report is an important and valuable document which should be retained for future reference'
I The purpose of this Repofi is to coninn, so far as reasonably practicable, whethel or not the electrical
installation is in a satisfactory condition for continued service (see Section E). The Report should identify
any damage, deterioration, delects and/or conditions which may give rise to danger (see Section K).
2 The person or.dering the Report should have received the'original' Repofi and the inspector should have I

retained a duplicate.
3 The 'original' Report sbor.rld be retained in a safe place and be made available to any pe$on inspecting I

or undertaking work on the electrical installatiofl in the future. If the property is vacated, this Report will
provide the niw orvner/occtLpier with details of the condition of the electrical installation at the time the
Report was issued.
4 Where the instatlation incorporates a residual cunent device (RCD) there should be a notice at or near the
dcvice statirg that it should be tested six-monthly. For safety reasons it is important that this instruction
is followed.
5 Secrion D (Extent and Limitations) should identify fully the extent ofthe installation covered by this Report
and any limitations on the inspection afld testing. The inspector should have agreed these aspects with
tlte person ordering the Report and with other ilterested parties (licensing authodty, insurance company,
mortgage provider and the like) before the inspection was caffied out.
6 Some operatioral limitations such as inability to gain access to pafts of the installation or an item of
equiplrent may have been encountercd during the inspection. The inspector should have noted these in
Section D.
7 For items classified in Section K as Cl ('Danger present'), the safety of those using the installation is
at risk, and it is recommended that a skilled pe$on or persons competent in electrical installation work
undeftakes the necessary remedial work immediately.
8 For-items classified in Section K as C2 ('Potentially dangerous'), the safety ofthose using the installation
may be at risk and it is recommended that a skilled person or persons competent in electrical installation
work undeftakes the necessary remedial work as a matter of urgency.
9 Where it has been stated in Section K that an obsen'ation requires fufiher investigation (code Fl) the
inspection has reveale{ an appareot deficiency which n.ray result in a code Cl or C2, and could not, due
to the extert or limitations of the inspection. be fully identified. Such observations should be investigated
rvithout delay. A fufiher examination ofthe installation will be necessary, to determine the nature and extent
ofthe apparent deficiency (see Section F).
l0 For safety rcasors, the elect cal irstallation should be re-irspected at apprcpriate intewals by a skilled
perso[ ol persons, competent i[ such work . The recommended date by which the next inspection is due is
stated in Section F of the Report under 'Recommendations' and on a label at or near to the consumer unit/
distribution board.

CONDITION REPORT INSPECTION SGHEDULE

GUIDANCE FOR THE INSPECTOR

I Section 1.0. Where inadequacies in the intake equipment are encountered the inspector should advise the
person ordering the work to inform the appropdate authority.
2 Older jnstallations designed prior to BS 7671:2018 may not have been provided with RCDs lor additional
protection. The absence of such protection shorild as a minimum be given a code C3 classification (item

3 The schedule is rtot exllaLrstive.

4 Numbers in brackets arc regulatjo[ references to specifled requirements
 EXAMPLES OF ITEMS REQUIRING INSPECTION

FOR AN ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CONDITION REPORT

A visual inspection should first be made ofthe exterual cordition olall electrical ecluipn.rent which is not concealed.

Futher delailed inspcction. inch"rcling patial dismantlil1g ofequipmert as required. should be caried out as agreed
with the person oldcri[g the lvor-k. (651.2)

These examples are not exhaustive. Numbers in brackets are Regulation ref'ercnces.

EXTERNAL CONDITION OF INTAKE EQUIPMENT (VISUAL INSPECTION ONLY)

. Service cable
. Sclvice heacl
. Earthing auatgerlents
. Meter tails
. Meterirg equipment
. Isolator (where present)

Where inadequacies in intake equipment are encountered. it is recommended that the pemon orde ng the fepoft
infolms the appropliate authority.

PRESENCE OF ADEQUATE ARRANGEMENTS FOR PARALLEL

OR SWITCHED ALTERNATIVE SOURCES

. Adequate affangen.]el'lts where a generating set opelates as a switched altemative to the public supply (551.6)
. Adequate arangenents where a generating set operates in parallel rvith the public supply (551.7)

AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY

. Main earthinglbonding arrangements (411.3: Chap 54)
I Prcscncc ol distributor's carlhing arrangcmcnt (542. I .2. l: 512.1.2.2), or
presencc of installation cafth clectrodc arrangcnent (542.I .2.3)

2 Adequacy of earthing conductor size (542.3: 5,13. L I )

3 AdeqrLacy ofearthir'rg conductorconnections (542.1.2)

4 Accessibility of eafihing conductol'connections (543.3.2)

5 Adcquacy of maiu plotective bonding conductor sizes (544.l)
6 Adequacy and location of main protective bonding conductor connections ( 543.3.2; 544.1.2)

7 Accessibility ofall protective bonding connections (543.3.2)

8 Ptovisior of earth ing/bonding labels at all app;opriate locations (514.13)
. FELV - recluiren.rcDts satisfied (41 1.7; 4l 1.7.1)

OTHER METHODS OF PROTECTION

(Where any of the methods listed below are employed details should be provided on separate
sheets)
. Non-condr.rcting location (,118.1)
. Earth-fiee local equipotential bonding (418.2)
. Electrical separatior (Section 413;418.3)
. Double insulation (Section 412)
. Reinforced insulation (Section 412)

DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
. Acleqr"racy o1' working spacctacccssibility to equipnlent ( 1 32. l 2; 5 1 3. 1 )
. Security ofllxirg (134.1.1)
. Condition of insulation of lir c pans (,116. I)
. Aclequacl, seculitv ofbariers (-116.1)
. Condition ofcnclosure(s) in terrrs of lP rating etc (416.2)

r.
 Condition of enclosure(s) in terms offire rating etc (421.1.6; 421.1.201' 526.5)
Enclosure not damagedtdeteriorated so as to impail safety (65 1.2) I

Presence and effectiveness of obstacles (417.2)

Presence of main switch(es), linked where lequired (462.1; 462.1.201, 462.2) I

Operation of main switch(es) (functional check) (643.l0) I

Manual operation of circuit-breakers and RCDs to prove discorrection (643.10) I

Confirmation that integral test buttol/switch causes RCD(S) to ldp when operated (functional check)
(643.l0)
RCD(s) provided for thult protection - includes RCBOs (41 1 .4.204;411.5.2; 531.2) I

RCD(s) provided for additional protection/requireurents, where required includes RCBOs (411.3.3;415.1) I

Presence of RCD six-monthly test notice at or near equipment, where required (514.12.2) I

Presence ofdiagrams, charts ol schedules at or near equipment, where required (514.9.1)

Presence ofnon-standard (mixed) cable colour waming notice at or near equipment, where required (514.14)
. Presence of altemative supply waming lotice at or near equipment, where required (514.15)
. Plesence ofnext inspection recommendation label (514.12.1)
. Presence of other lequiled labelling (please specify) (Section 514)
. Compatibility of prctective devices, bases and other components; corect type and rating (no I

signs of unacceptable thermal damage. arcing or overheating) (411.3.2; 411.4; 411.5; 411.6; I

Sections 432, 433)

. Single-pole srvitching or protective devices in line conductors only (132.14.1;530.3.3) I

. Protection against mechanical damage where cables enter equipment (522.8.1;522.8.5; 522.8.11) I

. Protection against electromagnetic effects where cables e[ter fefiomagnetic enclosures (521.5.1)

DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS
. Identification of conductors (514.3.1)
. Cables correctly supported throughout lheir mn (521.10.202; 522.8.5)
. Condition of insulation of live pafis (416.1)
. Non-sheathed cables protected by enclosure in conduit, ducting or trunking (521.10.1)
. Suitability of cortainment systens for continued use (including flexible conduit) (Section 522)
. Cables correctly tenninated in enclosures (Section 526)
. Confirmation that ALL colductor connections, including connections to busbars, are corectly located in
temlinals and are tight and secure (526.1)
Examination ofcables for signs of unacceptable themal or mechanical damage/deterioration (421.1; 522.6)
Adequacy ofcables for currenlcarrying capacity with regard for the type and nature ofinstallation (Section
523)
Adequacy ofprotective devices: type and ruted cunent for fault protection (411.3)
Presence and adequacy of circuit protective conductors (411.3.1.1; 543.1)
Coordination between conducton and overload protective devices (433.1; 533.2.1)
Cable installation methods/practices with regard to the type and nature ofinstallation and extemal influences
(Section 522)
Where exposed to direct sunlight, cable ofa suitable tlpe (522.11.1)
Cables concealed under floors, above ceilings, in walls/partitions less than 50 mm from a surface, and in
partitions containing metal pafts
1 installed in prescribed zones (see Section D. Enlent and limitations) (522.6.202) or
2 incorporating earthed aflnour or sheath, or run within earthed wiring system, or otherwise protected
against mechanical damage by nails, screws and the like (see Section D. Extent and limitqtions)
(522.6.204)
Provision offire barriers, sealing arrangernents and protection against thermal effects (Section 527)
Band II cables segregated/separated from Band I cables (528.1)
Cables segregated/separated from non-electrical seryices (528.3)
Condition of circuit accessories (65 1.2)
Suitability ofcircuit accesso es for extemal influences (512.2)

478
 . Single-pole s$.itching or protective devices in linc conductors onl1 ( I32.1.1.1: 530.3.3)
. Adequacy of connections. including cpcs, within accessories and to fixed and stationary equipment -
identifyilecord nulbers and locations of items inspected (Section 526)
. Presence, operation and corect location of appropriate devices fol isolation and switching (Chapter 46;
Section 537)
. General condition of wiring systems (651.2)
. TenpeBture rating of cable insulation (522.l. t; Table 52.1)

FINAL CIRCUITS
. Identification of conductors (5 14.3. l)
. Cables conectly suppoted tluoughout their run (521.10.202:522.8.5)
. Condition of insulation of live pats (416.I )
. Non-sheathed cables protected by enclosure in conduit, ducting or trunking (521 . 10.1)
. Suitability ofcontainment systens tbr contirued use (including flexible conduit) (Section 522)
. Adequacy of cables for cuuent-carrying capacity with regard for the type and nature of installation (Section
523 )
. Adecluacy ofprotective devices: type and rated cuffent for fault protection (411.3)
. Ptesence and adequacy of circuit protective corductors (41 1.3.1.1: 543.1)
. Co-oldination between condLrctors and ovelload protective devices (433.1;533.2.1)
. Wi ng system(s) appropriate for the type and nature of the installation and external influences (Section 522)
. Cables concealed under floors, above ceilings, in walls/partitions, adequately protected against damage
r 5 22.6.20 I ; 522.6 )02:. 522.6.203; 522.6.204)

1 installed in prescribed zones (see Section D. Exlent (.tnd limitdtiotls) (522.6.202)

2 illcol'poratitg eafthed an'nour or sheath, or run within ealthed wiring system, or otherwise prolected
against mechalical damagc by nails, scrervs and the like (see Section D. Extent and lintitations)
\ 522.6.20 I ; 522.6.20 4\
. Plovision ofadditional protection by 30 rnA RCD
I *lbr all socket-outlets ofmting 32 A or iess unless exempt (411.3.3)
2 *for the supply of mobi)e equipment not exceeding 32 A mting for use outdoors (4 I I .3.3)
3 *1ir cablcs concealed in walls at a depth of less than 50 mn (522.6.202, 522.6.203)
,1 *fbr cables concealed in walls/partitions containing metal pafis regardless ofdepth (522.6.203)
5 *for'final circuits suppll,ing lurrinaires within domestic (household) prernises (411.3.4)
. Provision offire barjers, sealing arrargemerts and protection against themal effects (Section 527)
. Band II cables segregated/separated from Band t cables (528.1)
. Cables segregated/separated from non-electrical services (528.3)
. TenninatioD ol cables at enclosures identify/record numbers and locatiots of jterns inspected (Section
526\
1 Connections under no undue strain (526.6)
2 No basic insulation ofa corductor visible outside enclosure (526.8)
3 Connections oflive conductors adequately enclosed (526.5)
4 Adequately connected at point of entry to enclosure (glands, bushes etc.) (522.8.5)
. Condjtion ofaccessories including socket-outlets, switches andjoint boxes (651.2) I

. SuitaLrility ofaccesso es tbr cxtemal influences (512.2)

. Single-pole srvitching or protective devices in line conductors only ( 132.14.1, 530.3.3) I

*Note: Older installations designed prior to BS 7671:2018 may not have been plovided with RCDs for additional
protection.
ISOLATION AND SWITCHING
. lsolators (Sections 460;537)
1 Presence and condition ofappropriate devices (Section 4621537.2.7)

2 Acceptable location - state if tocal or remote from equipment in question (Section 462; 537.2.7)
3 Capable ofbeing secured in the OFF position (462.3)
4 Corect operation verified (643.10)
5 Clearly identified by position atd/or durable marking (537.2.6)
6 Waming label posted ir situations where live parts cannot be isolated by the operation ofa single device
(514.11.1;537.1.2)
. Switching offfor mechanical maintenance (Section 464; 537.3.2)
I Presence and condition ofappropliate devices (464.1; 537.3 2)

2 Acceptable location state if local or remote fi'om equipment in questio[ (531 .3.2 4)

3 Capable olbeing secured iu the OFF position (462.3)

4 Conect opemtion verified (643.10)
5 Clearly identified by position and/or durable marking (537.3.2.4))
. Emergency switching/stopping (Section 465: 537.3.3)
1 Presence and condition ofappropriate devices (Section 465;,537.3.3; 53'7.4)

2 Readily accessible for operation where danger might occur (537.3.3.6)

3 Correct operation verified (643.10)
4 Clearly identified by position and/or durable marking (531 .3.3.6)
. Functional switching (Section 463; 537.3.1)
I Presence and conditiou of appropriate devices (53 7.3. l. l; 537 .3 .1 .2)

2 Coffect opemtion verified (537.3. 1. I ; 53'7.3.1.2)

CURRENT-USING EQUIPMENT (PERMANENTLY CONNECTED)

. Condition of equipment in tenns of IP raling etc (416.2)
. Equipraent does rot constitute a fire hazard (Sectiol 421 )
. Enclosure not damaged/dcteriorated so as to impair safety (134.1.1; 416.2; 512.2)
. Suitability for the envirorment and extemal influences (512.2)
. Security offixing ( 134.1.1)
. Cable entry holes in ceiling above luminaires, sized or sealed so as to rest ct the spread offire: List number
and location ofluminaires inspected (sepamte page) (527.2)
. Recessed luminaires (downlighters)

I Corect type of lamps fitted (559.3.1)

2 lnstalled to minimise build-up of heat by use of "fire rated" fittings, insulation displacement box or
similar (421.1.2)
3 No signs oloverlteating to surrounding building fabric (559.4.1)
4 No signs ofovedreating to conductors/temrinations (526.1)

PART 7 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS OR LOCATIONS

. If alry special installations or locations are present, list the particular inspections applied.

r"'-'\
f; ;r-renenv
 CONDITION REPORT INSPECTION SCHEDULE FOR
DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR PREMISES WITH UP TO 1OO A SUPPLY
NOTE: This /ornt is suituble for nnn_t tpes oJ sntaller itlstallLnidl. nat e\Lltl'hel| Llonlestic-
ot Ta()\tFs tl LI\I
Cl or C2 C3

OIJTCO}'IE
tL'\e L.des dbore. P'b\il? addiiordl
tTE\l \() DESCITIP-IIO\
.orr .rt {here apphr,'ide C1. C2 C} dnd FI.oded
trcnts D be r?.orcled n] Sectot K o/ the Condniah Repotl)

t.0 IXTDR\AI- CO\DITIO\ OF I\T.\KE EQLIP]IE\T (\:lSUAT- I]SPECTIO\ O)L\ )

tl
ll
t.3 Eartbirg arrang.Drcnt
l..t
l.-i

l$lxlor (shc1r preseDr)

20 PRESE\CE OFADEQUATE ARR{:{GE]IE\TS FOROTHER SOURCIS SUCH AS

IUICROCtINf ILdTORS (551.61 551.7)

1.0 EARTIIING / BONDI\G ARRAIGENIENTS (:lIl.3i Chap 54)

I l Prcsencc and conditiof ofdistribulori eaihing amngemeni (542.1.:.li 5,12 1.2.1)

i.: PreseDce drd conditiotr olcanh clccrrodc con,rccrion \hcrt apllicable (j:12.1.2.1)
t.l Pro\isidr ol c.nf fg Lrondlrg lahcls nl rLlrtp,op,inle lo.rLilnN (51-l ll 1)

l.t Conianation ofe lliirs conductor rizc (5.11.1:511.1.I )

1.5 Ac.essibiliil and condllion olelnhlng conduclor ar MET (5,1i :.1)

l.(i Corli narion olmain frol.(i\c bondirg co.ductor (5,1.1 I)
'izcs
ll ConditioD ind !cccssibiliry oinraln protectl\e bonding conducror connections (543.1.2i 5:14.1.2)

Acccssibiliti xrd conditioD ofotil.r prorcctn c bondnlg cornccriors (5ll 3.1: 5:ll.l :)

.1.0 CONSU]ITf,R UNIT(S) / DISTRIBLiTION BOARD(S)

.11 Adcquac! ol $orknrs spacc,accc$ibi1iry to cofsnincr nnitidistribrtion board ( 132.12: 513.1)

l.l SccuritY oIfixms ( 131.1.1)

Condirol olerclosnre(s) in tems oflP ntiDg etc (.116 2)

+.{ (i,rdirion ol ercl{xr,e(i) i11 renD! o1_nr kring erc (.111.l.l0li 516.5)

Lllr.l6urc nol danragcd dctcriomtcd so as to imfairsal_e! (6j l.l) I

Prescncc ofnaii linkcd s$itch (as rcqnncd by.16l.l.20l) I

' 'remr! o r..' , {".! .

'r.'.IuiJl.t.r(
,o,.t. 0, I

l!funuiloperalioi ol.i rn-bredkea and RCD\ to pro\e disconDedion (6:ll.l0) I

Coa'e.r dcrtilicirion ol circnit details ard protectile de\ ices (5l:l 8.1: 51.1.9.11

r t0 Prcscnce oiRCl) si\inonlhly resr notice aI or near consnmer nnit/dislribuliN bo. (5l:l.l1.2)
.t.l t PreseDce oInoD-stllnd:rrd hnixcd) cablc colourwaarhq riolice at ornear consumer u.il/dutribution

.{.ll Presence ofllternative $rpp\ \,xlrlhg noticc at or nc consuncr unil,dinribuion board (514 15)

1.ri Prcscncc olorher rcqnired labellin{ (r,lexse spe.ifv) (Secrion 51,+)

Conrpatibility offrotectire delices. bases and other cornponcnts: concct tpc and rating (No si-qns I

ofunNcceptable lliellllal dxnugc. arclfg or o\$hcating) ( ,111.3.2::lll.:li :lll.ir.ll1.6r SectioDs 4ll. I

.11-l ) I

.1.15 Sinslerole sitchin-q or proleclive dericcs nl Lnre cordlcror oDly (131.11.1: 530.3 i) I

I t( Prolection agrilrsl mechdnical daDig. $ hcrc clblcs .n tcr cof nnner unit'd istr ibur ion boald
(l::.1,1 l:52:.3.1r51:.3.5: 5l:.8 ll)
:l l7 Protection agai$t clectronlagneli. eftecN shere.it,les eDter consuDrcr unit/diStrlbulion board/

l.ls RCD(s) proideil ior fault frot..t(n ' nltluJes RCiIO\ {.ll1..1204;411 5.2i 531.2)

RCD(S) pro',ded f{)r ad.trtional prote.tio!/requiremeDts - nrludes RC IIOS (4 l l .l l: 415.1 )

.t.20 a.nlirn,ti.n ofind!.ation that SPD n iun.non.l l6:l -+l

l.l1 CoDlirnlation thar-{Ll conductor coD ne.tions. in.luding .oDnections tobusbais, are.otre.th
located in terminah and dre tishrand secure (il6.l)
+12 Adequate atingen.nrs s,here a generatiog set operates!sa switched alternative !o rhe publi. supplr
(jsr.6)
.l ll Adequate arangements where a gen.rating !.r of'rnret in parallel with the llblic supplr i j i I
 -

OUTCO}IE
luse.alles dbav. Ptotnlc Lnl.litu, .or" qtt $hth
appto?tntk ( l (:, cJ o LlFI.otlel ite 6 to be k.atLl\;
S.dk t KaJ lP Gn\lition Rcpnl
5.0 FI\,{L CIRCUITS
-il lddn'ti.rtron of.ondu.o ! (5l+ I L)

5.2 (?bLe! comctl) suploned rlmu-qhout fteir rur (521.10.202: 521.8.5)

il Condition ofii\rldrio,iol li!eta s (-116.1)

5l Non slrcathcd c.blcs prorect.d by e..losure nr.ondun. ducrirlg or rLlrnkirs (511.10.1)

'i'o irlcLude the inlegrity ofcondurr and truflkirg sysrcDs (mctallic and plastic)

55 Adeqnaly ofcables for .ufl'cnl'car) irlg c.paclty t!ith.egad for the rype and natun ofiNtallation (Scction 5li)
(i)ordinarion be$leen conducrors arld ovcrload protectire delices (:ll3.i: 5j3.1.1)

Adcquacy ol protc.li\. dc!i.es: lypc and rated curent litr innll prolcclio. (41 1.3)

53 Prcscncc.Dd adcqudc) of.!!uir prcleclive .odnciors (41 1.3.1i Scction 513)

59 Widng sysleDr(, rppropriale tor rhe ry])e and nalLtrc oithe irstallation and extemal influences (Seclion 522)

i t0 ton.ealed.ablei lrslrlied in prescrib!'d zorcs (s('e SecriorD- [. c tonJlr itutb,s)(52].6.102)

5ll ( ables conceal.d und{ flooN. dbo\ e.eituSs or !r N.llslranilions- adcquately prolecled !-sainst damige (see Section D. tri.,r/
d d Iit itotia t\ (522-6-204)
5ll Punnrn oladdirlonalrcquiLclncrrs lor frorectior by RCD not cxcc.diDg l0 nA:

. lor a I $ckcl outlcrs ol rxlnrg l2 A or less. urless an exccp(ion is pcxnittcd (lll.i il

lor thi !,|ply olnrcbile equiunenl Dot cxcccdirg l2 A rNring ibr use onrdoos (.111 I l)
1orcablei corcerleLlin $!l1i drr deplh ofless than 50 (511.6.201: ill.6.20l)
li,r eabies conccalcd nr \all\ pallliors .on(iining Dieul prrs resrrdles ofdepth ( 52:.6.103)
.Inrdl circurts nrpplr,n- lrmn[jres wiftnr donlenic (houschold) prcDriscs (411.i.1)

i Ll Pro\isio! ofJire ba'r1e$. seahlq amrgcnrcn6 aod prolcctioD ag!insl thenDal efie.ts (Scctiofl 527)

5 l1 l ,rl il cxLrLc\ \cgrecdLed icpnrllcd liom U.Dd I .rbles (518 1)

( rb .s scgr.g .d ..f.fur.d Llorn (nnniu,,icrllon\ crh iDg l5l8 l)

aiLjlcs regr.gat.d scpararc,l liofr fon clccui.ali.h cc\ rilS l)
5ll remination of.rbles rt e.closulrs - indic|tc c\tcnt ofsamplir-q in Scction D ol thc r.pol,1 (Se.t1otr j16)
.Connecrions soudly nradc ind under no undue stanr (526.6)

. No b.sic insularnm ol r (indurlur \ isibLe oul\ide enclosui. l5l6 E)

. Cnnrecli!tr)s olli\c $xlLLno\ rdcqxrr.l) .r.llr{'d (i:6 i)

. Adequrtely conne.red ar poinr ofcnx'! lo cnclosluc (gltuxls. bushes etc.) (521.8.5)

5.13 Condilion ol acccs$rics iDcludiDg socket-outlels. surehcs xnd loinl box.s (651.2h.))

Strnabillt) ola..essoher li)r crre,ml nnnence! ( jl l.l)

510 Adequrcl of\vorkifg space'acccsibility 1o cquipDenl (112.lli jl l.l )

i.ll Sirgle-pole slnchilg or proreclire devic.s in Linc condrclob only ( 131.1,1.1, 510 1.3)

LOCdIIO\(S) CONT.\I)I\C A tsATH OR SHO\\ER

Additional protcclion lbr nlllo$ \oltage tLV) circnits by RCD not cxcccdnig l0 (701.:lll.l.l)
Where uscd as a prorcelivc Deasure. reqnirenrenN lor SELV or PELV met (701.414.:l 5)

Shaver sockcrs ionrtry $irh BS !^_ 61558-l-5 lonne.lr- BS l515 (701.512 l)

Prescn.e ofqlleDrcntary bond rg condu.roN. untess not reqnired by BS 7671:2018 (701..115.2)

Los \oLtage (e.g Iio roh) sockct outlcts silcd al lcasr r Dr nu 2one I (701.51 2 ll
Suitlbilil) ofcquiunent fo, erten)al influences for iNtallcd localion nr tcrDs oflP rarnrg (l0l 511.:)
SuinbllilJ- ol acccssori!\ md corr'olgear ctc. ftn n parricular zon. (701 5ll.l)
Suirxbiliry ol qmenr usins equiflnerr tbr pirticxlar posirio] \ llhin Lh. locxliN (r0l i5 r

OTIIER PART 7 SPf,CIAL INSTAI-I,ATIO]IS OR LOCATIONS

List all otfier special irNtallations or locations prcsclrt. ilan). (Record separately the results of pdicular illspeclions applied )

\ame (Capila l\) Signature Date..... . .........

___!82 ___. -)..,

r
 E: *^
E:
e9fr.
E:H
E6c
t 9=

uo lErodo uollnq x
lsal colv enuelll

!olEradox
o uounq lselocE
d
E:
P:
(sur) eurur
u0l}cauuocsl0

petnspour n
unuJXenl
F Arelod
.e=
'E=
6() b P^ quel - 0^r'l
TEC 8
a^tl - e^rl

;: a6elo^lsaf
!t:
6! i6 zu

-s2 ; (,U * ,U)

(!dc)a
6=

--9 c (tertneu),r
cta'-
o (autt) rl-
!DI
I (.uru)cdc

I (pu) er11 =

por.llou,l
o 0ruaralal

L-d)sz poulurrod
urnurxe|/\
99
6q
(vur)
^ ocu

o (w)IIcPdec' I
F o 6u )lBerq I
J tr
l (V)6uter
th g
UJ
d odll
8

t-
o o
UJ
F tr (Nr)sE
l! a
o
uJ E E
J
f E
o
IJJ
-o 6 o 3

o ! e
I
tlJ,l 9c eg
9
dt dl
zUJ Ei oo gE
o ol l.g
-E
o- t-z l0qu.rnu lrn,rc

-,..
-
 APPENDIX 7 (tnformative)
HARMONIZED CABLE CORE COLOURS
1 Introduction
The requirements of BS 7671 were hatmonized with the technical intent
of GENELEC Standanl HD 3g4.5.514:
Identificqtion,
inclLtdiirLg 514.3: ldenti/ication oJ.couthtctors, now withdrawn.

Amendment No 2: 2004 (AMD 14905) to BS j6j

t:2001 implemente<l the following:
- the harmonized cable core colours and the arphanumeric marki,g
ofthe folowing stanirards:
HD 308 52: 2001 ldentification oJ cores in t,ttbles antl.ftexible cords
BS EN 60445:2000 Basic and sa/bn principles.fbr man-mcrchine inrerface, nctrking
.lnd iclentifi..ation of
eqLtipment terminals ard of tenninations

BS EN 60446:2000 Basic and salbht principles

fbr the ntctn-machine intet'face, marking and itlentification.
Identification oJ'conductors by c,ctlow.s or ntnteruls.
NorE: S,bseq.entry. BS EN 60445 and BS EN 604,16 havc becn combined into BS EN
60445:2010.
This appendix provides guidance on marking at the interface between old and
hamonized colours and marking and
general guidance on the colours to be used fbr.condr.rctors.

In the British Standalds for fixed and flexible cables the colours have been
harmonized. BS 7671 has been rnodilied
to align with these cables. but also allows other suitable l'nethods of marking
connections by colour (tapes, sleeves
ot discs), or by alphanumerics (letters and/or numbers). Methods may be mixed
withir an installation.
2 Addition or alteration to an existing installation
2.1 Single-phase installation
An addition or an alteration made to a single-phase installation need not be marked
at the interface provided that:
1 the old cables are correctry identified by the corours recl for line ancl
brack for neutral, aud
2 the new cables are co.'ectly identified by the corours brown for rine
and blue for neutral.
2.2 Two- or three-phase insta ation

Where an addition or an alteration is made to a two- or a three-phase installation

wired in the old core colours with
cable to the new core colours, unambiguous ideltification is recluired
at the intedace. Cores shoulcl be marked as
follows;

Neutal cotductors
Old and new conductors:

Line condttclors
Old and new conductol.s: Lt,L2,L3.

TABLE 7A - Example of conductor marking at the interface for additions and alterations
to an
AC installation identified with the old cable colours
Function Old conductor New conductor
Colour Marking Marking Colour
Line I ofAC Red LI LI Brorvnllr
Line 2 ofAC Yellow L2 L2 Blackrr)
Line 3 ofAC Blue L3 L3 Crcy l

Neutral ofAC Black N N tslue

Protective coDductol. Green-and yellow
Creen-alld-
rrr Tht
ee single-core cables with insulation of the same colour tray be used if identified at the telmjnations.

484
3 Switch wires in a new installation or an addition or alteration to an existing installation
Where a tt'o-core cable with cores coloured brown and blue is used as su,itch wires. both conductoN beins line
conductors. the blue conductor should be marked brown or L at its teuninarions.

4 lntermediate and two-way switch wires in a new installation or an addition or

alteration to an existing installation
Where a thtee-core cable with cores coloured brown, black and grey is used as srvitch wires, all three conductors
being line conductors. thc black and grey conductors should be marked brown or L at thet teflrinations.

5 Line conductors in a new installation or an addition or alteration to an existing

installation
Power circuit line conductors should bc coloured as in Table 51. Other line conductors may be brown, black, red,
orange" yellow, violet, grey, white, pink or tulquoise.

In a two- or thtee-phasc power circLrit the line conductors u'lay all be olone ofthe pemitted colours, either identifled
Ll, L2, L3 or marked btown, black, grey at their teminations to show the phases.

6 Changes to cable core colour identification

TABLE 78 - Cable to BS 6004 or BS 7211 (ftat cabte with bare cpc)

New core colours

SingLc-core + bare Brown or Blue
Trvo core + bare cpc Bro$n, Blue
Alt. rw-o-core- barc cpc Brorvl. Broun
Thrce-cole + bare Rcd. Yeilow. Blue Brown, Black,

TABLE 7C - Standard 600/1000V armoured cable BS 6346, BS 5467 or BS 6724

Cable type Old core colours Nerv core colours
Singlc-core Red or Black Brown ol Blue
Tlvo-core lted, Black Brown. Blue
Three-core Red. Yellou. Blue Brown, Black. Crey
Four-cole Red. Yellow. Blue. Black Brcwn, Black. Grey. Blue
Five-core Red, Yellorv. Blue. tslack, Green-and- Blorvn. B1ack, Crey, Blue, Green-and-
veilou, yellow

TABLE 7D - Flexible cable to BS EN 50525 series (supersedes BS 6500)

Cable tvpe Old core colours New core colours
I$o-core Bloun. Blue No change
Three-core Btou'n. Blue. Creen-and-vellorv No change
Four-coLe Black. Blue. Brorvn, Gr-ccn-and-yellotv Brown. Black. Grev. Green-and-vellow
Five-core Black. Blue. Btown. Black. Grcen- Brown. Black, Gtey. Blue, Green-and-
and-yellou yellow
 Addition or alteration to a DC installation
Where an addition or all alteration is made to a DC ilstallation wired in the old core colours with cable to the
new core coloLrrs, unarrbiguorLs identification is required at the interface. Cores should be rnarked as follows:

Neulra I an d m i dpoitlt cotld Ltclors

OId and new conductors: N{

Litte cotttltrttots
OId and new conductols: Brown or Grey. or
L,L+orL

TABLE 7E - Example of conductor marking at the interface for additions and alterations to a
DC installation identified with the old cable colours

Function Ne\r conductor

Trvo-wire unearthed DC power circuit

Positive of two-wire circLril
Nepative of two-wire circuit

Two-wire earthed DC power circuit

Positive (of ncgatjvc cafi hed) circuit
Negative (of negative eafthed) circuit
Positive (of positive ealthed) cilcuit
(of positivc carthed) circLril

Three-lvire DC Dorter circuit

Outer positivc of t$o-$irc cilcuit deli\ed lionl
thrcc \\ irc systcnl
Outer negative oftrvo-wire circrLit derived from
three-wire systenl
Positivc of thrcc-wire cir-cuit
Mid-wire of three-wire cilcuit
Necative of threc-rvie circuit

r"*\
fi uenanv 3
 APPENDTX 8 (tnformative)

CURRENT.CARRYING CAPACITY AND VOLTAGE DROP FOR

BUSBAR TRUNKING AND POWERTRACK SYSTEMS
1 Basis of current-carrying capacity
The curent-carying capacity (I,o) of a busbar trunking or powertack system relates to continuous loading and
I
is declared by the manufacturer based on tests to BS EN 61439-6 (busbar trunking) or BS EN 61534 series of
standards (Powertrack). The curentcarrying capacity is designed to provide for sitisfactory life of the sysrem,
subject to the thermal effects ofcanJing curent for sustaiued perioils in normal service.

Considerations affecting the choice of size ofa busbal tnnking or powertrack system include the requirements for
protection against electric shock (see Chapter 4l), protection against thermal effects (see Chapter 42l, overcunent
protection (see Chapter 43 and sec 4 below) and voltage drop (see sec 5 below).

2 Rating factors for current-carrying capacity

The curent-carying capacity (I..) can be aflected by the ambient temperature and the mounting conditions (for
example the orientation ofthe conducton).

Ine for Powertrack according to BS EN 61534 is defined as'The rated cu[ent value assigned to a Powefirack svsrem
by the manufacturer and to which operation and pefonnance characteristics are referred.,

InA for a busbar trunking system according to BS EN 61439-6 is defined as'The rated curenr value decJared by
the manufaaturer which can be carried without the ten'rperature rise of various parts ofthe busbar trunking system
exceeding specified limits under specified conditions.,

InC for a busbar trunking systern according to BS EN 61,+39-6 is the value of the curent that can be carried by
a circuit loaded alole, undcmonnal service conditions rvithout the temperature rise of the various parts of the
ASSEMBLY excceding the lirnits spccified.

lnstallation ambient temperature

For a busbar trunking system, ifthe a[rbient tempemture exceeds 35 'C the rating factor krA to be applied is obtained
from the manufacturer ofthe busbar trunking system (k,^ : 1 for 35 "C).
I

The effective curent-carying capacity (I"A) at the new temperature is kr^ x InA.
I

Mounting attitude
For a busbar trunki[g system the moullting factor k:c to be applied is obtained from the manufacturer ofthe busbar
huking system.

The effective currenlcarrying capacity ([,,,6) under the new mounting conditions is k26 x 1.6.

In a typical installation, both facto$ may have to be taken into account and the effective current-canying capacity
(I'"q) then becomes krc x hc x Inc

where:
k,. is a temperature factor, equal to I at an ambient air tempemture of35 oC

k,. is a mounting factor, equal to I in the reference mounting conditions.

NOTE: For a powerhack system the effective cunent-canJing capacity is the rated curent I,,A declared by the
maoufacturer in accordance with BS EN 61534 series undcr all normal conditiorrs.

3 Effective current-carrying capacity

I. must be not less than Ib, such that: I, > Ih

where:
L is the effective cunent-carrying capacity olthe busbar trunking (l'.. ) or po\\,ertrack system (1" \) tbr
continuous serr,/ice under the paticular installation conditions. and
I is the design currenr ofrhe crrcuit.
 4 Protection against overload current
The minimur operating current ofthe protective device should l]ot exceed 1.45 I,. Where the protective der ice is
a fuse to BS 88 series or a circuit-breaker to either BS EN 6094?-2 or BS EN 60898, this requirement is satisfied
by selecting a value of[. not Less tl]an 1,,, where I,, is the mted curent or current setting ofthe device protecting the
circuit against overcurrent.

5 Voltage drop
The voltage drop (V) for the busbar trunking or powefirack system is obtained from the manufacturer It is
usually expressed as mv/ampere/metre, tabulated according to the value of the load-circuit power factor. The
voltage drop given is calculated orr the basis ol a single load at the end of the run and, in this case, the total
voltage drop : V6 x lr x L / 1000 volts, where L is the length olrun in mctres.

lu the case of an evenly distributed load (tapped off at intervals along the busbar trunkirg or powertrack system)
then the voltage drop at the furthest tap-offpoint may be taken as 0.5 V6, and is calculated by the above method.

In the case ofan unevenly distributed load it will be necessaly to calculate the voltage dlop for each section between
tap-offpoints and add them together to flnd the voltage drop at the fufihest tap-offpoint.

488
 APPENDIX 9 (lnformative)
DEFINITIONS - MULTIPLE SOURCE, DC AND OTHER SYSTEMS
Fig 9 - Explanation of symbols used within Appendix 9

,
T Neutral conductor (N)t m dpoint conductor (M)

r
7 Protective conductor (PE)

7
7 Cornbined protective and neutral conductor (PEN)

NOTE 1: The dotted lioes iDdicate the pa s ofthc systen that ale not covered by the scope ofthe Standald. whereas the solid
lines indicatc the pall that is covercd by the Standard
NOTE 2: Forp vate systeins. the source and/or the distribution system maybe considered as pafi of tl'te installation within the
meaning oftlris Standard. For this case. the figures may be completely shorvn in solid lines.

Fig 9A - TN-C-S multiple source system with separate protective conductor and neutral
conductor to current.using equipment

.,ffr
.' ,oir- j so*." or
. I enerqy 2
,' ,o-m i- a
I

L1

Source of L2

rf J Y A \-<' ..
L3

'rru'.' N

a)-)r '- lva-'"

|
-----* .(
\

489

-4=
I
 Fig 98 - TN multiple source system with protective conductor and
no neutral
conductor throughout the system for 2- or 3-phase load

L1

L2

L3

-+ rYr,,-t,' ,'
N

") I
PE

t",
I
b) I
I
I
Exposed'conductive-parts
- Equipment n nstalation

NOTES to Figures gA and gB

(l) No dircct cor[cction tiom cither tlle transtbmrer ncutml point

or thc gencrator star point to Earth is permittccl.
(2) The interco.nection c.,rductol' bctween either tlre neutral poirlls
olthe transtbnners or the generator srar.
points is to be insulated. 'l-hc lunction of this concluctol
is sirnilar to a pEN: horv.u".. ir,r*rinoit. .o,rn..,"a
ro crrr.rertr-using equil,rncnr.
(3) only one conncctioll belween the intcrcoDlected neutra] points ofthc sources anci the pE is to be pr.or,,idccl.
This connectioD is to be localed inside thc nraiu switchgear asscmbly.
(4) Additional earrhing ofthc pE in the installation may be provided.

(fcrR'br,r\
,f=

,oo
r,r**r 'd

490

T
 Fig 9C - lT system with ex c cs ec'co n ductive-parts earthed in groJss cr ndividually

Source ' lnstallalion

l#r(---}r< >

l- rrrr --
la
rrrr o-
I
f-----o N')
I
I
,r l
lmpedance ' I
t- ti

J- in instaliation
Source earth -.....\--.--,/
\ Eadh electrode-/

NOTES

Additional earthing ofthe PE in the installation may be provided.

(1) The system may be connected to Eafih via a sufRciently high impedance.
(2) The neutral conductor may or may not be distributed.

Fig 9D - TN-S DC system with earthed line conductor L- separated from the protective
conductor throughout the installation

lnstallation
#
L+

PEL
L-

Opuonal
application of a
battery

in installation
Earthing of system

491
 Fig 9E - TN-S DC system with earthed midpoint conductor M separated from the
protective conductor throughout the installation

Souace
#

PEM ]

--t i

?1--i---:

Optional
application of a
battery

Equipment in installation
Earthing of system

NOTE to Figures 9D and 9E

Additional earthing ofthe PE in the installation may be provided.

Fig 9F - TN-C DC system with earthed line conductor L- and protective conductor
combined in one single conductor PEL throughout the installation

Z -r--i----
L+

(PEL)
Combined protective and
Ine conductor

upflonal
application of a i i
battery i --r--
Exposed-conductive-parts
in installation
Earthing of system

492
 Fig 9G - TN-C DC system with earthed midpoint conductor M and protective conductor
combined in one single conductor PEM throughout the installation

aour"" lnstallation
!< >t< >
L+

(PEM)
Combined protective and
midpoint conductor

Optlonal
application of a ,--_-t
battery __.1__

in nstallation

Earth ng of system

NOTE to Figures 9F and 9G

Additional earthing ofthe PEL or PEM in the installation may be provided.

Fig 9H - TN-C-S DC system with earthed line conductor L - and protective conductor combined
in one single conductor PEL in a part of the installation

A
I

--{--- L+

,--i-- (PE)
Protective conductor

I I I

!
Optional I

applicauon ! I

of a battery I I

I
!

I
I

I
I

I
Earthing of system !

I !
I
I I
I

TN-C system i TN-S system i

493
 Fig 9l - TN-C-S DC system with earthed midpoint conductor M and protective conductor
combined in one single conductor PEM in a part ofthe installation

Optional
I
applicalion
of a battery !

Earthing of syslem

TN-C-S DC system

NOTES to Figures 9H and 9l

Additional earthilg ofthe PE in the installation may be provided.

Regulation 8(4) ofthe Electricity Saf'ety, Qualjty and Continuity Regulations (ESQCR) states that a consumer shall
not combine the neutral and prctective functions in a single conductor in his consumer's installation.

Fig 9J - TT DC system

source lnstallattor

i
L+

-+-1- L-

(PE)
Protective conductor

application i I
of a betlerv

Equipment in installat on
-:\
Earthlng Earthlng of exposed-
of system conduclive-pafts

494
 Fig 9K - TT DC system

; Source lnstallation

--1
ir--1---
i

---+----t-
(PE)
Protective conductor

application f ---.,
of a battery - -.1_ _

ri
grpo""o-"onou"tiu"-purt"
{\
Equipment in installation
): =\
Earthing Earthing of exposed-
of system conductive-pa(s

NOTE to Figures 9J and 9K

Additional earthing ofthe PE in the installation may be provided.

Fig 9L - lT DG system with earthed line conductor L- and protective conductor

-t- - - - -

-i-{--
I

t\ Protective conductor
I l1)
\'

iL-) ----Ji
I Exposed-conductive-parts
Equipment in installation
eartrr]ng Earthing of exposed-
of system conductive-parts

495
--\-
 Fig 9M - lT DC system with earthed midpoint conductor M and protective conductor

lnstallation

i PEM
-,- - a

Protective conductor

it
it
+
Earthing
:
Earthing of exposed-
Equipment in installation

of system conductive parts

NOTES to Figures 9L and 9M

Additional eafihing olthe PE iD the installation tnay be plovided.

(l) The system lnay be conncctcd to Earth via a stlt'1]ciently high inpeclance
 APPENDIX 1 0 (lnformative)
PROTECTION OF GONDUCTORS IN PARALLELAGAINST
OVERCURRENT
,I INTRODUCTION

Overcurrent protection provided for conductors connected inparallel shouldprovide

adequate protection forall ofthe
pamllel conductors. For two conducto$ ofthe same cross-seitional area,
conductor matlrial, length and disposition
aranged to carry substantially equal currents the requirements for overcurrent protection
are stiaightforward. For
more complex conductor arrangements, detailed consideration should be given
to unequal current siraring between
conductors and multiple fault cu[ent paths. This appendix gives guidance on the
necessary considerations.
NOTE: A more detailed method for calculating the curent between parallel conductors is given
in BS 7769 (BS IEC 60287).
2 OVERLOAD PROTECTION OF CONDUCTORS IN PARALLEL
When an overload occurs in a circuit containing parallel conductors ofmulticore
cables, the curent in each conductor
willincrease by the same propofiion. Provided that the curent is shared equally between
the parallet .orJu.torr. u
single protective device can be used to protect all the conductorc. The
cunent-carrying capacity 1Iz) olthe parallel
conductors is the sum of the current-caIrying capacity of each conductor, with
the-apfropiiate-grouping and other
factors applied.

The current sharing between parallel_cables is a function ofthe impedance

ofthe cables. For large single-core cables
the reactive component of the impedance is greater than the resistive component
and will have a significant effect
on the curent sha ng. The reactive component is influenced by the relative physical
position ofeacil caute. lq tor
example, a circuit consists of two large cables per phase, having the same lengih,
construction and cross-sectional
area and arranged in parallel with unfavourable relative position (i.e. cables ofthe
same phase bunched together) the
current sharing may be more like 70130 rather than 50/50.

Where the difference in impedance between parallel conductors causes unequal

current sharing, for example greater
than l0 % difference, the design cun ent and requirements for overload piotection for each"conductor
should be
considered individually.

The design current for each conductor can be calculated from the total load
and the impedance ofeach conductor
For a total ofm conductors in parallel, the design current Ibk for conductor k is given
by:

.I"
"^ (i 2, '+ ? ,+. ,+)
where:
Ib is the current for which the circuit is designed
Ioo is rhe design current lor conductor k
zk is the impedance ofconductor k

21, 22 and.2* are the impedances ofconductors 1, 2 and m respectively.

For parallel conductors up to atrd including 120 mm: cross-sectional area (csa)
the design current Ibk for conductor
k is given by:
sk
tbk - rbS;fSFl:l+S;

.L 497
 where:
S,, ... S- is the csa ofthe conductors and
51 is the csa of conductor k.

In the case of single-core cables, the impedance is a function of the relative positions olthe cables as well as the
design ofthe cable, for example, armoured or unarmoured. Methods for calculating the impedance are given in BS
7769 (BS IEC 60287). It is recommended that curent sharing between parallel cables is verified by measurement.

The design cunent [tt replaces Ib in Regulation 433.1 .1 as follows:

Ibk<In<I,k

The value used for Iz in Regulation 433.1.1 is either:

(i) the continuous cuffent-carying capacity of each conductor, Izk, if an oyerload protective device is provided
for each conductor (see Figure l0A), hence:

T,-,,<I_-,.<I_,.
OI

(ii) the sum of the current-carying capacities of all the conductors, ,Izk, if a single overload protective device
is provided for the conducton in parallel (see Figure 10B), hence:
Ib<In< >I,k
where
I". is the rated curent ofthe protective device for conductor k
t,t is the continuous aurrent-carrying capacity ofconductor k
I. is the rated cu-rent ofthe protective device
!I't is the sum ofthe continuous curent-carrying capacities ofthe m conductors in parallel.

NOTE: For busbar systems, infomation should be obtained either from the manufacturer or from
BS EN 61439-6.

For powertrack systems, inlotmation should be obtained either from the manulacturcr or from BS EN 61534.

Fig 10A - Circuit in which an overload protective device is provided for

each of the m conductors in parallel

Supply end

*
,.:j
,,a$
,l

498
 Fig - Circuit in which a single overload protective device is provided for
- 10B the m conductors in Parallel

SuPPIY end

I,,

Io, l" I"l In,,

I
> l,- I.( ) I,;

1 2 3 k m

< I" <

.l 'l,k
+1..+ .... +
Il,u

SHORT.CIRCUIT PROTECTION OF CONDUCTORS IN PARALLEL

within the parallel section should be
where conductors are cornected rn parallel, the possibility of a short-circuit
considered.
protective device may not be effective. then
If two conductors arc connected in parallel and the operation ofa single
each conductor should have individual protection'
curent paths can occur and it ma1
where tkee or more conductors are connected in paraltel then multiple fault
load ends of each parallel conductor. This
b" ,l"cerra,1 to provide short_circuit protection at ioth the supply and
situation is illusttated in Figures 10C and l0D'

rr1l1 Fig 10C - Gurrent flow at the beginning of the fault

,*
 Fig 10D - Current flow after operation of the protective device cs

Figure l0C shows that, if a fault occurs in parallel conductor c at point x, the fault curent will flow in conductors
1, 2 and 3. The magnitude ofthe fault current and the propofiion ofthe fault curent which flows through protecti\e
devices cs and ct will depend on the location of the fault. In this example it has been assumed that the highest
proportion ofthe fault curent willflow through protective device cs. Figure 10D shows that, once cs has operated,
iurrent will still flow to the fault at x via conductors I and 2. Because conductors 1 and 2 arc in paallel, the current
through protective devices as and bs may not be sufficient lor them to operate in the required time. lf this is the
case, the protective device cl is necessary lt should be noted that the current flowing through ct will be less than the
curent which caused cs to operate. Ifthe fault was close enough to cl then cl would operate fiIst. The same situation
would exist ifa fault occurred in conducto$ 1 or 2, hence the protective devices al and bl will be required.

The method ofproviding protective devices at both ends has two disadvantages. Firstly, ifa fault at x is cleared by
the operation of cs and cl then the circuit will continue to operate with the load being caried by conductors 1 and 2.
Flence the fault and subsequent overloading of I and 2 may not be detected. Secondly, the fault at x may bum open-
circuit at the ct side leaving one side ofthe fault live and undetected.

An altemative method to providing protective devices at both ends would be to provide linked protective devices
at the supply end (Figure l0E). This would prevent the continued operation ofthe circuit under fault conditions.

Fig 1OE - Linked protective devices installed at the supply end ofthe parallel conductors

r"*\;
f; r-lemnv
APPENDIX 11: NOT USED

APPENDIX 12:NOT USED

t
 AppENDIX 13 (tnformative)
METHODS FOR MEASURING THE INSULATION
RESISTANCE / IMPEDENCE OF FLOORS AND WALLS TO EARTH
OR TO THE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
GENERAL
Measurement of impedance or rcsistance of insulating floors and walls
should be carried out with the system
voltage to Earth and nominal frequency, or with a lower voltage of the same
rominal frequency combined with a
measurement ofinsulation resistance. This may be done, for example, in
accordance with the foliowing methods of
measurement:
1 AC system

- by measurement with the nominal AC voltage, or

- by measurement with lower AC voltages (minimum 25 V) and, additionally,

by an insulation resistance
test using a minimum test voltage of500 V DC for nominal system voltages
not exceeding 500 V and a
minimum test voltage of 1000 V DC for nominal sysrem voltages above 500
V
The following optional voltage sources may be used:
(a) The earthed system voltage (voltage to Eaflh) that exists
at the measurjng point
(b) The secondary voltage ofa double_wound transformer

(c) An independent voltage source at the nominal frequency

ofthe system.
In options b) and c), the measuring voltage source is to be eafihed for the measurement.

For safety reasons, when measuring voltages above 50 V, the maximum

output current should be limrted
to 3.5 mA.
2 DC systen

- insulation resistance test by using a minimum test voltage of 500 v DC for nominal system voltages not
exceeding 500 V
insulation resistance test by using a minimum test voltage of 1000 V DC
lor nominal system voltages
above 500 V
The insulation resistance test shourd be made using measuring equipment in accordance with
BS EN 61557-2.

TEST METHOD FOR MEASURING THE IMPEDANCE

OF FLOORS AND WALLS WITH AC VOLTAGE
curent, I, is fed through an ammet to the test electrode from the output of the voltage
source or from the line
conductor L. The voltage (U.) at the electode to Earth or to the proteciive
conductor ii measured by neans of a
voltmeter with an intemal resistance ofat least I Mf).

The impedance of rhe ffoor insularion willthen be; Z.:+

The measurement for ascellaining the i[.rpedance is to be carried out at
as many points as deemed necessary selected
at mndom, with a minimum ofthree. The test electrodes may be either
ofthe ioilowing types. In ca.. oiai.f*., ,rr"
use oltest electrode 1 is the reference nethod.

TEST ELECTRODE 1

The electrode comprises a metallic t pod.ofwhich the parts resting on the

floor fonn the poirts ofan equilateral
triangle Each suppofting poirlt is plovided with a ffexibL base giviig, when loaded,
close contact with the surface
being tested over an area ofapproximatery 900 mmr and preseniing a-resistance
ofless than 5000 o.
Belore measurements are made, the surlace being tested is cleaned with a
cleaning fluid. while measurements are
being made, a force ofapproximately 750 N for floors or 250 N for wa[s is
applied to the tdpod.

502
 Fig 134 - Test electrode 't

fl+
al'min ium ]l
erare--l

flt
prohle view
R:20
view from above
section of a contact
stud in conductive rubber

Din?e sions i nliIIimetl.es

view from below

4 TEST ELECTRODE 2
The electrode conlprises a square metallic plate with sides that measure 250 mm, and a square ofdampened, water-
absorbent paper, or cloth, from which surylus water has been removed, with sides that measure approximately
270 mm. The paper is placed between the metal plate and the surlace being tested.

Dudng measurement a force ofapproximately 750 N for floors or 250 N for walls is applied on the plate.

Fig 138 - Test electrode 2

750 N

wooden plate
I
uetal plate
damp cloth
floor covering
subnoor --- )r.21,\i.!)
-,/, VAI_V
;:(<'-(r)ri
\"/\'\ _\ )
-\\.\_)
^7.
PE
 APPENDIX 14 (lnformative)
DETERMINATION OF PROSPECTIVE FAULT CURRENT
Regulation 434.1 requires the prospective fault current to be determined at evely relevant point of an installation.
Relevant points are switchgear and protective devices that may have to operate and possibly disconnect a lault
curent. The devices have to be able to withstand the fault currents safely and protect downstearn equipment from
damage in the event of a fau1t.

Fault curents can occur in the event ofinsulation failure between live conductors and between line conductors and
Earth. Regulation 643.7.3.201 requires the prospective fault current to be measured, calculated or determined by
another method, at the odgin and at other relevart points in the installation.

In a three-phase installation the highest prospective fault current occws with a sinrultaneous fault between all line
conductors.

An approximation of the prospective fault culTent between line conductors can be determined by a measurement
between a line conductor and neutrul multiplied by !3.
An approximation ofthe prospective fault curent due to a siurultaneous shorl-circuit faultbetween all line conducto$
is determined by measurement between line and neutral multiplied by 2.

In a single-phase system the prospective fault curent is the greater of either the fault current between the line
conductor and neutral or the fault current between line conductor and Eafih.

Othel methods of determining prospective lault curent are not precluded.

For installations with multiple sources ol supply, measures should be taken to detemine prospective fault curent
for all combinations of supply arangernerts, so that tl're contribution made by any privately controlled embedded
generation or uninterrupted supply arrangements is included.

In domestic (household) or similar premises, where a consumer unit to BS EN 61439-3 is used and the maximum
prospective fault current declared by the dist butor is I 6 kA, it is not necessary to measure or calculate prospecti\ e
fault current at the origin ofthe supply.

When measuring prospective fault cunent, the person carrying out the testing should be aware ofthe danger present
when connecting test instruments to live parts, and take suitable precautions as required by the Electricity at Work
Regulations 1989 (EAWR). The HSE publication HSR25 provides guidance on this.

The measurement should always be made on the output terminals of a suitably rated protective device. lf such a
device is not present then a temporary one should be fitted. Measurement should never be made where overcuffent
protection is not present between the point ofco[nection and the supply transformer. Fused test leads alone do not
meet this requirement.

504
 APPENDIX 1 5 (lnformative)
RING AND RADIAL FINAL CIRCUITARRANGEMENTS,
REGULATION 433.1
This appendix sets out options for the design ofring and radial final circuits for household and similar premises in
accordance with Regulation 433.1, using socket-outlets and fused connection units. It does not cover other aspects
ofthe design ola circuit such as:

- Protection against electdc shock, Chapter 41

Protection against thermal effects, Chapter 42
Protection against overcurrent, Chapter 43
Selection and erection of equipment, Part 5.

Fig 15A- Ring final circuit arrangements, Regulation 433.1.204

The load current in auy part ofthe circuit should be unlikely to exceed for long periods the curent-canying capacity
ofthe cable (Regulation 433.1.204 refers). This can generally be achieved by;

(i) locating socket-outlets to provide reasonable sharing ofthe load around the ring
(ii) not supplying immersion heaters, comprehensive electric space heating or loads ofa similar profile fron the
ring circuit
(iii) connecting cookers, ovens and hobs with a rated power exceeding 2 kW on their own dedicated radial circuit
(iv) taking account of the total floor area being serued. (Historically, a limit of I 00 m] has been adopted.)

stans and In shes at

the d slrbLtion board,
where it s connecled

overcunenl proleci ve

NOTE: Corsideraiion

protection by an RCD

Regulaiion 411 3.3

An unlused spur shou d feed one
single or one twin sockel-oullet 522 6 242 and 2Q3.

An unfused spur may be

connecl€d io the o.igin of ihe
c rcuil n lhe dislribulion board.

Spur using an FCU not connected directly to the ring Spur using an FcU con.ected directly to the ring
The number ofsockeroutets supp ed Jrom a fused The number ofsocket-out els supplied from a fused
conneclion unit s dependenl upon th€ load conneclion unit s dependenl upor the oad
character stcs, having iaken diversly nto account characterislics having iaken diversity into accounl

Cables should, wherever practica ble beixed in a position such lhaitheywittnoi

be covered by thermal nsulation. Wherc a cable is partiatty orcomptetety
covered byrhemra insuraion, rcference should be made ro Regutation 523 9.

Fused conneclion unlt (FCU)supplying fixod equipment

Fused connection unit (FCU)to BS 1363.4 NOTE: Conductor size re ates to BS 6004
Maximum fuse 13 A 'flattwin &earth" cable andth€ minimum
cross-sectional area for the live
aJunction box to BS EN 60670-22. conductors on y i.e. L & N.
Junction boxes wilh screw terminals must be Reduced circuit protective conduclor srze
accessible for inspeclion, test ng & ma ntenance is perm tted .e.:
or allernatively use mainienance-free term nals/ Live = 2.5 mm2, CPC = 1.5 rnm2
connections (Regu ation 526.3). Live = 1.5 rnm2, CPC = .1.0 mm2

IL
 Fig 158 - Radial flnal circuit arrangements, Regulation 433'1

A rad aLfina circuit starts at the distribution board,

where lt is connecled to an overcurrent protecive device'

NOTE: Consideralion must be g ven to the need for

add uonal prolection by an RCD in accordance with
ReguLatlon 411.3.3 and Regulaiions 522.6.202 and 203'

204 30Aor 32A

overcurreni proteciive overcurrent proiective

All live conductors 2 5 mm2 Live conductors 4.0

Unfussd spur
An unlused spur run n 2.5 mmz
cable should feed one single orone
twin socket-outletonly.
An unfused spur may be connected
io the origin ofthe circuil in the

Spur using an FCU

The number of socket oui ets
supp|ed from 3 fused connection
unti is dependent uPon the load
characterisiics havlng taken divers ty

1.5 mm2

Cables should. wherever practicable, be fixed in a poslt on such thatihey will

y
be covered by thermallnsu ation. Where a cable is partra ly orcompleie
covereo Oy rtrirmat insuratior, reference should be made io Regulation 523" 9'
"

Fused connection unit (FCU) to BS 1363-4 NoTE: Conductor size relaies to BS 6004
Maximum fuse 13 A
"flaftwln & earth" cable and the minimum
cross-sectional area for lhe live
lDJunction box lo BS EN 60670-22. conductors only i.e. L & N.
J-nctior bores with screw lermlnals must oe Reduced circuit protective conductor size
accessible for inspection, testing & maintenance is permiited i.e:
or, alternatively, use maintenance-free terminals/ Lrve = 4.0 mm2, CPC = 1.5 mmz
connections (Regulat on 526.3). Live = 2.5 mm2, CPC = 1.5 mm2
Live = 1.5 mm2, CPC = 1.0 mm2
 APPENDIX 1 6 (lnformative)
Devices for protection against overvoltage
l
Typical installation of a surge protective device (SPD) in a power distribution board
for a TN-S system.

Fig 16A1 - SPD connected to the first overcurrent protective device (OCPD)
to the incoming supply

:
5
:
I
I

=
SPD I
I
I
= I

I
:= [-
It
H zl
lL_
-.=-T.rrnrr1

Protective
conductor L1 L2L3 N

Key :

1 Distribution board
2 Main switch
3 Earthing bar
4 Neutral bar
5 Enclosure for SPD
6 FiISt OCPD
7 Altemative first OCPD
NOTE: The OCPD provides a convenient means to protect the SPD and a means of isolation. As there is insufficient room
within the distribution board the SPD is mounted in a separate enclosure for electrical safety. This enclosure is
mounted directly alongside the distribution board so that the connecting leads are kept shod. An additional local
bonding connection is made to further miiimize voltage dtop on the connecting leads.

L 507
 lnstallation of surge protective devices in TT systems, Connection Type 1 (CT 1)

Fig 16A2 - SPDs on the load side ofan RCD [according to Regulation 534.4.6(a)l

Key
I Distribution board OCPD I Overcurent protective devices at the odgir
ofthe installation
2 Main earthing terminal or bar
OCPD 2 Overcunent protecti\ e de\ ices
Surge protective devices ensuring a
protection level itr accordance with
oveffoltage Category II

4a, 4b Eafihing connection of surge protective

devices, either 4a or 4b, whichever is the
shorter roufe

5 Current-using equipment

6 Residual curent protective device

(RCD)

508
 \

lnstallation of surge protective devices in TT systems, Connection Type 2 (CT 2)

Fig 1643 - SPDs on the supply side of an RCD [according to Regutation 534.4.6(b)l

: , 3a r-j---iJ : I
L _ :-: --: --- --- :_ :-: -_ _

Key
I Distribution board OCPD 1 Overcurrent protective devices at the
origin of the installation
2 Main eafthing terminal or bar
OCPD 2 Or ercunenl pro(eclive devices
3 Surge protective devices

3a Surge protective device

(SPDs 3 and 3a in series ensuring a
protection level in accordance
with oveNoltage Category II)

4a,4b Earthing connection of surge protective

devices, either 4a or 4b. whichever is the
shofter route

Current-using equipment

6 Residual curent protective deyice

(RCD) installed downstream ofthe
surge protectiYe devices

SPD assembly

509
 lnstallation of surge protective devices in lT systems

Fig 16A4 - SPDS on the load side of an RCD

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Open or high I
I
impedance I

7l_- _l

=
Key
I Distdbution board OCPD I Overcurrent protective dcvices at the I

origil of the installation

2
2 Main earthing terminal or bar
OCPD 2 Overcunenl protectire dcr ices I

3
3 Surge protective de\ ices ensuring a
protection level in accordance with
overvoltage Category II

4a,4b Eanhing connecljon ofsurge prolective

devices, either 4a or 4b, whichever is the
shorter route

5 Cuffent-usil]g equipment

6 Residual curent protective device

(RCD) installed upstream ofthe surge
protective devices

7 SPD assembly

f"'""\
f urenmv E
,o
, ."a
lnstallation of Types 1 , 2 and 3 SPDs, for example in TN-C-S systems

Fig 16A5 - lnstallation example of Types 1, 2 and 3 coordinated SPDs

SoLrrce lnslallation

oc"o + 9
L1

L2

L3

OCPD 2 OCPD 3

Key
1 Distributiol board 7 Surge protective device, Tlpe 2

Distribution outlet 8 Surge protective device, Type 2 or Tlpe 3

Main earthing terminal or bar 9 Decoupling element or line length

NOTE: If the cable length between the SPD types is shofi
(refer to manufacturers' data), a decoupling element
Surge protective device, Type I
is employed to provide inductance for corect SPD
co-ordination.
Earthing connection (earthing conductor)
of surge protective device

Fixed equipment to be protected OCPD 1,2, 3,4 Overcunent protective devices

NOTE 1: For further infomation reference should be made to DD CLC/TS 61643-12.

NOTE 2: SPDs 4 and 7 (or 7 and 8) can be combined in a single SPD.
NOTE 3: SPDs may require additional modes ofprotection for serNitive equipment.
NOTE 4: BS EN 62305-,1 covers the protection ofelectrical and electonic systems within structures against lightning.
NOTE 5: Section 4,13 of BS 7671 deals \1ith the protection ofelectrical installations against transient overvoltages of
atmospheric oligin. transmitted b) the suppll distribution system, and against switching overvoltages generated by
the equipment \\'ithii the installation.
Typically, TypeI SPDs are used at the origir ofthe installation, Type 2 SPDs are used at distdbution boards and
Type 3 SPDs are used near terminal equipment. Combined Type SPDs are classified with more than one Type, e.g.
Type l+2, Type 2+3. Ty2e 1 SPDs are only used where there is a risk ofdirect lightning curent.

The most impofiant aspect ir selecting an SPD is its limiting voltage performance (protection levet Up) during the
expected surge event, and not the energy withstand (e.g. I;,,,,) which it can handle. An SPD with a low protection
level will provide adequate protection olthe equipmelt, while an SPD with a high energy withstand may only result
in a longer operating life.

TABLE 16A - lnformation on SPD classification

SPD SPD
according to BS EN 62305 according to BS EN 61643-11
SPD tested with Ir.n Type I
SPD tested with I" Type 2
SPD tested with a combination u ar e Type 3

SPD tested with Iimp (BS EN 62305-4)

SPDs which withstand the partial lightning cun ent (with a typical waveform 10/350 pLs) require a coresponding
impulse test cu[ent Iimp.
NOTE 1: For power lines, a suitable test cunent Iinp is defined in the Class I test procedure of BS EN 61643- I l.

SPD tested with In (BS EN 62305-4)

SPDs which withstand induced surge currerts with a typical waveform 8/20 pLs require a coresponding impulse test
curent Jnspd.

NOTE 2: .For power lines a suitable test cunent Inspd is deflned in the Class ll test procedure ofBS EN 61643-1 1.

SPD tested with a combination wave (BS EN 62305-4)

SPDS that withstand induced surge curents with a typical waveform 8/20 ps and require a coresponding itnpulse
test curent T,c.
NOTE 3: Forpower'lines a suitable combination wave test is defined in the Class III test procedure ofBS EN 61643 ll, defining
the open-circuit voltage Uoc 1.2/50 gs and the short-circuit current Isc 8/20 gs ofa 2 Q combination wave generator.
 Table of figures

Fig 2.1 - lllustration of earthing and protective conductor terms (see Chapter 54) 39
Fig 3.1 - Single-phase 2-wire 45
Fig 3.2 - Single-phase 3-wire 46
Fig 3.3 - Two-phase 3-wire 46
Fig 3.4 - Three-phase 3-wire 46
Fig 3.5 - Three-phase 4-wire 46
Fig 3.6 - 2-wire 47
Fig 3.7 - 3-wire 47
Fig 3.8 - TN-S system 48
Fig 3.9 - TN-C-S (PIVE) system 48
Fig 3.'10 -system
TT 49
Fig 417 -Arm's reach 76
Fig 44.1 - Representative diagram for connections to Earth in the substation and the LV installation
and the overvoltages occurring in case of faults 98
Figure 44.2 - Flash density map of UK 102
Figure 44.3 - lllustration showing the lengths to consider for the calculation of Lp 103
Fig 44.4 - Bypass conductor for screen reinforcement to provide a common equipotential
bonding system '108

Fig 44.5 - Avoidance of neutral conductor currents in a bonded slructure by using an installation
forming part of a TN-C-S system from the origin of the public supply up to and including the
final circult within a building 109
Fig 44.6 - Avoidance of neutral conductor currents in a bonded structure by using an installation
forming part of a TN-S system downstream of a consumer's private supply transformer 110
Fig 44.7 - lnstallation forming part of a TT system within a building installation 111

Fig 44.8 - Example of a substitute or bypass bonding conductor in an installation forming part of
a TT system 112

Fig 44.9 - TN multiple-source power supply with single connection between PEN and earth 112
Fig 44.10 - TN multiple-source power supply with unsuitable multiple connection between
PEN and earth 113
Fig 4444.1 - Example of protective conduclors in star network 116
Fig 4444.2 - Example of multiple meshed bonding star network 116
Fig 4444.3 - Exanrple of a common meshed bonding star network 117
Fig 4444.4 - Example of equipotential bonding neh,'r'orks in a structure without a lightning
protection syslem 1'18
Fig 4444.5 - Example of cable separation distance 120
Figure 46.1 - Lamp control circuit with switching in the neutral conductor 122
Fig 534.1 - Lightning Protection Zones (LPZ) concept '160

FiT534.2- Example of installation of Type 1,IypeZ and Type 3 SPDS 162

Fig 534.3 - Connection Type CT1 (4+0-configuration) for a three-phase system with neutral toJ
Fig 534.4 - Connection Type CT2 (e.9. 3+1-configuration) for a three-phase system with neutral toJ
Fig 534.5 - Connection points of an SPD assembly 166
Fig 534.6 - Example of overcurrent protection in the SPD branch by using a
dedicated external overcurrent protective device to/
'169
Fig 534.8 - Connection of the SPD
Fig 534.9 - Example of installation of an SPD in order to decrease lead length
of SPD supply conductors 170
Fig 536.1 - Selectivity between OCPDs 172
Fig 536.2 - Selectivity between RCDS in case of residual current 173
 174
Fig 536.3 - Selectivity between OCPD and RCD using RCBOs 174
Fig 536.4 - Selectivity between OCPD and RCD using RCCBS
175
Fig 536.5 - Selectivity between upstream RCCB and RCBos
Fig 536.6 - Typical configuration for combined short-circuit protection of OCPDs
176
Fig 536.7 - Co-ordination between OCPD and contactor in case of short-circuit
177
Fig 536.9 - Co-ordination between OCPD and switch
178
Fig 536.10 - Co-ordination between OCPD and RCCB
179
Fig 536.11 - Selectivity with oCPD and undervoltage relays
214
Fig 55.1 - Auxiliary circuit supplied directly from the main circuit 214
Fig 55.2 - Auxiliary circuit supplied from the main circuit via a rectifier
214
Fig 55.3 -Auxiliary circuit supplied from the main circuit via a transformer
218
Fig 55.4 - Configuration of an auxiliary circuit
243
Fig 701.1 - Examples of zone dimensions (plan)
244
Fig 701 .2 - Examples of zone dimensions (elevation)
250
Fig702.1- zone dimensions for swimming pools and paddling pools
251
Fig 702.2 - zone dimensions for basin above ground level
25m zcz
Fig702.3- Example of zone dimensions (plan) with fixed partitions of height at least
253
Fig702.4 - Example of determination of the zones of a fountain
255
Fig 703 - zone dimensions for a sauna
262
Fig 705 - Example of supplementary equipotential bonding within a cattle shed
the caravan pitch
Fig 708 - Example of a 2-pole and protective conductor supply system between
or motor caravan 268
supply equipment and the caravan
273
Figs 709.1 & 2 - Examples of methods of obtaining supply in marinas
273
Fig 709.1 - Connection to a single-phase mains supply with RCD
Fig 709.2 - Connection to a three-phase mains supply with RCD
273
Fig 709.3 Example of an instruction notice to be placed in marinas
- 282
Fig710.1- Example of patient environment (BS EN 60601)
zoJ
F tg 710 .2 - fypical theatre layout
zoJ
Fig 710.3 - Typical medical lT system arrangement ao1
Fig 712.1 - PV installation - General schematic - One array
292
PV lnstallation - Example with two or more arrays
=ig712.2- generating set located inside the unit,
=ig 717 .1- An example of a connection to a low voltage 301
,r th or without an earth electrode
302
= .717 .2 - Reserved for future use
==-'-3AnexampleofaconnectiontoaiowVoltageelectricalsupplyexternal'totheUnltinwhich
installation or a
, : : _:=:i ,,e measu res are effective, the supply derivld from either a fixed electrical
-

:---'=-.')set with or without an er.tn electiode at the unit

3o2

. . .- : - -- :xample of a connection to a low voltage electrical supply externat to the unit, derived
: - : - :- : ' , = I 3 ectrical jnstallation or a generating set with any type of earthing arrangement
-;: :: :-:.'.'.:' aqd an internal lTsyitem, with an earth electrode
302

*a;q* of a @nnection to a low voltage electncal supp/y externa/ to the unit using
r' . .- -'= '^. - svstem with an insulation monitoring device and automatic
,9lg trt the occunence of a first fault, with earth electrode 303

' --: ''.- .: :' a connection to a low voltage electrical supply external to the unit, with any
:': -- ' . )=*:eni using an internal TN system with simple separation 303
=" =-
- : . .-. e of a connection to a low voltage electrical supply external to the unit, with
'. ..-- -a arrangement using simple separation with an internal lT system with automatic.
in m ttre occuirence of a second fault 304
'- : - :: :-s for electrlcity supply 308

- : - : a. s n installations
--
.'. with protection by barriers or enclosures 32'l
'
- - - . -' ,. :- s in installations with protection by obstacles

r:_
 Fig 729.3 Examples of positioning of doors in closed restricted access
-
areas 323

Fig A72g.1- Minimum passing width in case of evacuation -

Case 1 324

Fig 4729.2 - Minimum passing width in case of evacuation -

Case 2 324

Fig A730.'1 - Direct connection to a single-phase mains

supply 328
supply with an isolating transformer on
-
Fig A730.2 - Direct Gonnection to a singte-phase mains 328
the vessel
Fig 4730.3 - Direct connection to a three-phase mains
supply 329
supply with an isolating transformer on
f ig RZaO.+ - Oirect connection to a three-phase mains 32g
the vessel
338
Fig 753 lnformation for the user of the
- installation
364
Fig 3A1 - Fuses to BS 88-3 fuse system C
365
Fig 3A2(a) - Semi-enclosed fuses to BS 3036
366
Fig 3A2(b) - Semi-enclosed fuses to BS 3036
Fig 3A3(a) - Fuses to BS 88-2 fuse systems E and G
367

Fig 3A3(b) - Fuses to BS 88-2 fuse systems E and G

368
369
Fig 3A3(c) - Fuses to BS 88-2 fuse system E
to BS EN 60898 and RCBOs to BS EN 61009-1 370
Fig 3A4 - Type B circuifbreakers
Fig 3A5 - Type C circuit-breakers to BS EN 60898 and RCBOs to BS EN 61009-1 371

Fig 3AO - Type D circuit-breakers to BS EN 60898 and RCBOs to BS EN 61009-1 372

Fig 9 - Explanation of symbols used within Appendix 9 489

protective conductor and neutral conductor to

Fig 9A-TN-C-S multiple source system with separate 489
current-using equiPment
and no neutral
Fig 98 -TN multiple source system with protective conductor 490
co"nductor tnroughout the system for 2- or 3-phase load
in groups or indlvidually 491
Fig 9C - lT system with exposed-conductive-parts earthed
Fig 9D - TN-S DC system with earthed line conductor
L- separated from the protective conductor
491
throughout the installation
M separated from the
Fig 9E - TN-S DC system with earthed midpoint conductor
pr6te"tiu" conductor throughout the installation
protective conductor
Fig 9F - TN-C DC system with earthed line conductor L- and 492
in one sinile conductor PEL throughout the installation
"o"rOin"O M and protective conductor combined in
Fig 9G - TN-C DC system with earthed midpoint conductor 493
one single conductor PEM throughout the installation
FiogH-TN-C-SDCsystemwithearthedlineconductorL-andprotectiveconductorcombinedinone
:;X##:;;;;nji",tn,jitr." instarration 4e3

Figgl-TN-C-sDcsystemwithearthedmidpointconductorMandprotectiveconductorcombinedin494
one single conductor PEM in a part of the installation
494
Fig 9J-TT DC system 495
Fig gK-TT DC system
conductor 495
- lT DC system with eafthed line conductor L- and
protective
Fig 9L
M and protective conductor 496
Fig 9M - lT DC system with earthed midpoint conductor
is provided for
Fig 10A - Circuit in which an overload protective device 498
each ofthe m conductors in parallel
is provided for
Fig 10B - Circuit in which a single overload protective device 499
the m conductors in Parallel
499
Fig 1OC - Current flow at the beginning of the fault
protective device c' 500
Fig 10D - Current flow after operation of the
Fig 10E Linked protective devices installed at the supply
end of the parallel conductors 500
- 503
Fig 13A - Test electrode 1 503
Fig 13B - Test electrode 2 505
Ring final circuit arrangements, Regulation 433 1'204
Fig 1 5A -

L- ir'l
Fig 158 - Radial final circuit arrangements, Regulation 433.1 5Ub

Fig 1641 - SPD connected to the first overcurrent protective device (oCPD)
to the incoming supply 507
Fig 1642 - SPDs on the load side of an RCD [according to Regulation 53a.a.6(a)l 508
Fig 1643 - SPDS on the supply side of an RCD [according to Regulation 534.4.6(b)] 509
Fig 1644 - SPDS on the load side of an RCD 510
Fig 16A5 - lnstallation example of Types 1, 2 and 3 coordinated SPDS 511
 Table of tables
TABLE 41.1 - l\4aximum disconnection times 59
TABLE 41 .2 - lvlaximum earth fault loop impedance (Zs) for fuses, for 0.4 s disconnection
time with Ugof 230 V (see Regulation 411.4.201) 61
TABLE 41 .3 - Maximum earth fault loop impedance (Zs) for circuit-breakers with U0 of 230 V, for
operation giving compliance with the 0.4 s disconnection time of Regulation 411.3.2.2 and 5 s
disconnection time of Regulation 411 .3.2.3 (for RCBOs see also Regulation 411.4-204) 62
TABLE 41 ,4 - Maximum earth fault loop impedance (2") for fuses, for 5 s disconnection time with
Uoof 230 V (see Regulation 411.4.203\ 63
TABLE 41.5 - lvlaximum earth fault loop impedance (Zs) for non-delayed and time delayed 'S' Type
RCDS to BS EN 61008-1 and BS EN 61009-1 for Uoof 230 V (see Regulation 411.5.3) 64
TABLE 41 ,6 - Maximum earth fault loop impedance (Zs) for 5 s disconnection time and U0 of 55 V
(single-phase) and 63.5 V (three-phasexsee Regulations 411 .8.1 .2 and 411 .8.3) 68
TABLE 42. 1 - Temperature limit under normal load conditions for an accessible part of equipment
within arm's reach 85
TABLE 43.1 - Values of k for common materials, for calculation of the effects of fault current
for disconnection times up to 5 seconds 93
*
TABLE 44.1 Power frequency stress voltages and power frequency fault voltage in the low
voltage system 98
IABLE 44.2 oo
- Permissible power frequency stress voltage
TABLE 443.1 - Calculation of fen, 103
'f ABLE 443.2 - Required rated impulse voltage of equipment (Uw) 105
TABLE A444.1 - Summary of minimum separation distances where the specification and/or the
intended application of the information technology cable is not available 119
TABLE 4444.2 - Minimum separation between power and signal cables (m) 119
TABLE 51 - ldentification of conductors 131
TABLE 52.1 - Maximum operating temperatures for types of cable insulation 142
TABLE 52.2 - Cable surrounded by thermal insulation 144
TABLE 52.3 - l\,'linimum cross-sectional area of conductors 144
TABLE 53.1 - Correlation between the maximum value of earth resistance RAand the maximum
rated residual operating current lxnofthe RCD 156
TABLE 533.'l - Sizes of tinned copper wire for use in semi-enclosed fuses 159
TABLE 534.2 - lvlinimum required U"ofthe SPD dependent on the supply system configuration 164
Table 534.3 - Nominal discharge current (lnspd) depending on supply system
and connection Type 165
TABLE 534.4 - Selection of impulse discharge current (l;.0) where the building is protected
against direct Iightning strike '165

TABLE 534.5 - Connection of the SPD dependent on supply system 168

TABLE 537.4 - Guidance on the selection of protective, isolation and switching devices 181
TABLE A53.1 - Devices and associated functions 188
TABLE A53.2 - Device co-ordination in a LV electrical installation 190
TABLE 54.1 - Minimum cross-sectional arca of a buried earthing conductor 195
TABLE 54.2 - Values of k for insulated protective conductor not incorporated in a cable and not
bunched with cables, or for seperate bare protective conductor in contact with cable covering
but not bunched with cables, where the assumed initial temperature is 30'C 197
TABLE 54.3 - Values of k for protective conductor incorporated in a cable or bunched with cables,
where the assumed initial temperature is 70 'C or greater 197
TABLE 54.4 - Values of k for the sheath or armour of a cable as the protective conductor 197
TABLE 54.5 - Values of k for steel conduit, ducting and trunking as the protective conductor 197

t"""
| .:.
--,
I
TABLE 54.6 * Values of k for bare conductor where there is no risk of damage to any
neighbouring material by the temperature indicated 198
TABLE 54.7 - Minimum cross-sectional area of protective conductor in relation to the
cross-sectional area of associated line conductor 198
TABLE 54.8 - Minimum cross-sectional area of the main protective bonding conductor in relation
to the PEN conductor of the supply 203
TABLE 55.1 - Plugs and socketoutlets for low voltage circuits 211
TABLE 55.2 - l\4inimum cross-sectional area of copper conductors in mm2 216
TABLE 64 - Minimum values of insulation resistance 232
TABLE A710 - List of examples 284
TABLE 721 - Minimum cross-seclional areas of flexible cables for caravan connection 310
TABLE A721 - Functional allocation and cross-sectional areas of cores for caravan
con nectors 313
TABLE 3A - Time/current performance criteria for RCDS to BS EN 61008-'l and
BS EN 61009-1 363
TABLE 4Aa - Rating factors for triple harmonic currents in four-core and flve-core cables 379
TABLE 4Ab - Voltage drop oo.)
TABLE 4A1 - Schedule of lnstallation lvlethods in relation to conductors and cables cot
TABLE 4A2 - Schedule of lnstallation methods of cables (including Reference N4ethods)
for determining current-carrying capacity 386
TABLE 4A3 - Schedule of cable specifications and current rating tables 5v5
TABLE 4B2 - Rating factors (C") for ambient ground temperatures other than 20 'C 394
TABLE 483 - Rating factors (C") for cables buried direct in the ground or in an underground conduit
system to BS EN 50086-2-4 for soil thermal resistivities other than 2.5 K.miW to be applied to the
current-carrying capacities for Reference Method D 395
TABLE 484 - Rating factors (Cd) for depths of laying other than 0.7 m for direct buried cables and
cables in buried ducts 395
TABLE 485 - Rating factors for cables having more than 4 loaded cores 395
TABLE 4C1 - Rating factors for one circuit or one multicore cable or for a group of circuits,
or a
group of multicore cables,to be used with current-carrying capacities of Tables 4D'lA to 4J4A 396
TABLE 4C2 - Rating factors for more than one circuit, cables buried directly in the ground
Reference lVlethod D in Tables 4D4A to 4J4A multicore cables
-
397
TABLE 4C3 - Rating factors for more than one circuit, single cables in ducts buried in the ground
Reference N,4ethod D in Tables 4D4A to 4J4A (lVulticore cables in single-way ducts)
-
TABLE 4C4 - Rating factors for groups of more than one multicore cable, to be applied to reference
current-carrying capacities for multicore cables in free air- Reference Method E in
Tables 4D2A to 4J4A
TABLE 4C5 - Rating factors for groups of one or more circuits of single-core cables to be applied to
reference current-carrying capacity for one circuit of single-core cables in free air - Reference
Method F in Tables 4D1A to 4J3A 399
TABLE 4CO - Rating factors for cables enclosed in infloor concrete troughs
(lnstallation Methods 118 to 120 of Table 4A2) 400
TABLE 4D1A - Single-core 70 'C thermoplastic insulated cables, non-armoured,
with or without sheath (COPPER CONDUCTORS) 401
TABLE 4D1B - VOLTAGE DROP (perampere per metre) 402
TABLE 4D24- Multicore 70'C thermoplastic nsulated and thermoplastic sheathed cables,
non-armoured (COPPER CONDUCTORS) 403
TABLE 4D2B - VOLTAGE DROP (per ampere per metre) 404
TABLE 4D3A- Single-core armoured 70 'C ihermoplastic insulated cables (non-magnetic armour) 405
TABLE 4D4A- Multicore armoured 7C 'C ihermoplastic insulated cables (copper conductors) 407
TABLE 4D5 - 70 'C therrnop asr c -s- a:3d and sheathed flat cable with protective conductor
(COPPER CONDUCTORS 409

523
 TABLE 4E1A - Single-core 90 "C thermosetting insulated cables. non-armoured,
with or without she5tn lcoeeen CoNDUCTORS) 411

TABLE 4E24- Multicore 90 "c thermosetting insulated and thermoplastic sheathed cables,
-
non-ir.out"O (COPPER CONDUCTORS) 413

TABLE 4E3A- Single-core armoured 90 "C thermosetting insulated cables (non-magnetic armour) 415
TABLE 4E4A- Mutticore armoured 90 "C thermosetting insulated cables
tcoFFen Conoucrons) 417

TABLE 4F1A- 60'C thermosetting insulated flexible cables with sheath,

non-i*orreo (CoPPER CoNDU6ToRS) 419

TABLE 4F1 B - VOLTAGE DROP (per ampere per metre):

Conduclor operating temperature: 60 'C +tu

-
TABLE4F2A_g0.Candls0.Cthermosettinginsulatedflexib|ecablesWithSheath,
421
non-irmoured (COPPER CoNDUCTORS)
TABLE 4F3A - Flexible cables, non-armoured (COPPER CONDUCTORS) 423

TABLE 4G1A- Mineral insulated cables thermoptastic covered or bare and exposed to touch
rcoFFen ConoucroRsnND sHEATH) 425

TABLE 4G2A- Mineral insulated cables bare and neither exposed to touch nor in contact with
combustible materials (COPPER CONDUCTORS AND SHEATH) 427

TABLE 4H1A - Single-core 70 "c thermoplaStic insulated cables, non-armoured, with orwithout
.r,""tn lAruvrr.rruM cououcrons; 429

TABLE 4H24- l\4ulticore 70'c thermoplastic insulated and thermoplastic sheathed cables,
non-armoureo (ALUlVllNlUl\4 CONDUCioRS) 431

TABLE 4H3A- Single-core armoured 70 'c thermoplastic insulated cables (non-magnetic armour)
CoN"DUCToRS)
tn[wrnrurr,l
4s3

TABLE 4H44 - Multicore armoured 70 'C thermoplastic insulated cables

inlwrnruM coNDUCToRS)
435

TABLE 4J1A- Single-core 90 "c thermosetting insulated cables, non-armoured, with or without
CONDUCTORS) 43t
sheath (ALUN4INIU-M
TABLE 4J2A- Multicore 90 'c thermosetting insulated and thermoplastic sheathed cables,
non-armoured (ALUMINIUM CONDUCTORS) 439

TABLE 4J34- Single-core armoured 90 'c thermosetting insulated cables (non-magnetic armour)
441
ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR
CONCISE LIST OF EXTERNAL INFLUENCES 446

A ENVIRONMENT: 447

B UTILIZATION: 458

C CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS:
460

TABLE 7A- Example of conductor marking at the interface for additions and alterations to an AC
installation identified with the old cable colours 4U
485
TABLE 78 - Cable to BS 6004 or BS 72'11 (flat cable with bare cpc)
485
TABLE 7C - Standard 600/1000V armoured cable BS 6346, BS 5467 or BS 6724
485
TABLE 7D - Flexible cable to BS EN 50525 series (supersedes BS 6500)
TABLE 7E - Example of conductor marking at the interface for additions and alterations to a
486
DC installation identified with the old cable colours
l6A- lnformation on SPD classification 512
TABLE

524
 INDEX
Aerial cables Table 4A2 (No 35)
A Agricultural Premises - Sec 705
wiing '705.513.2
Abmsjon, damage to systems - accessibilitY bY livestock
due to 522'61
'/t'7 52.2(il) - automaticdisconnection 705.411
buried cables 705.522
721.522..1 1
'705.512.2
cattle sheds
Abbreviations used in the Standard Pafi 2 Fig 705
AC, types ofcable not suitable for
521 5'2
dairies 105.512.2
Accessibiliq/ - dwellings 705.1
connections and joints 526.3
emergency switching, siting of
enrelgency srvitching off 537 .3.3.6
devices for 705.53',7 .2
equipment t32.t2 105.512.2
equipment protection
513.1
heating appliances, fixing of 705.422.6
protective conductor con11ectiol1s 543.3.2 '7
isolation. devices for 05.537 .2
Accessible conducti\e Parts. for705 560 6
Sec 410 life support oflivestock, systems
fundamental rnl"' ol 705'415'2
- in floor", bondin!
metallii erids 1

Accessories - Frq'05
- concealed cables io 522.6.202(t)
- overhead lines and cables 105.522
- selection and erection of Sec 553
- plotection againsi fire 105.422
Accessory. delinition Pan2
Additional protection -
- protection bY SELV or PELV 705.414.4

as addition to basic and 01 fault - residual curent devices in 705.411.1

705.422.7
Drorectior
'
410.1 2
- socket-outlet qircuits to be protected
Sec 415
by RCD 705.411.1(i), (ii)
bathroons -
RCDs tbl all circuits 70 i.411.3.3 - socket-outlets. selection 705.553.1
- statutory regulations Appx 2 ltem l(v)
- suPPlernentan equlPotential '701.115.2 - supplemenlary bondirg conductors,
hondrns. alld omi!sioll of 705.544.2
protection of
exception f;r cefiain socket-outlets 4r 1.3.3
RCD. protectiotl b) -
- supplementary bonding for
niotecton of livestock 705.415.2.1
- bathrooms. all circuits 701.411.3.3
- *iiing systems 105.522
- domestlc lighting circuits 4l 1.3.4
Air conditioning systems, mam
- exceptioll for certain socket- bonding of 4| .3.1 .2
outlets 41 1.3.3
711.411.3.3 Aircraft, electrical equipment ol the
exhibitions. shol s and stands Regulations not applicable to 110.2(vi)
heating cables and embedded Alarm -
heating svstenls 753.415.1
mobile and transpoftable u ts 7 i7.415.1 - firc see Firc alartfi sysIe}f,l.s
not as sole means 4t5.t.2 - installations .t€e fo lnge Band 1,

definition Pafi 2 I

rcsidLral oPerating culaent 415.1.I

Alterations to installations 132.16
531.3.6 I
641.5
satlnas 703.411.3.3 644.1 .2 I

socket-outlets. mobile equipment Aitemative supplies, warning notice 514. 15.1

,111.3.3
outdoors
7t4.41!,.3.3 Aluminium conductors -
streel fumittue
swimning pools Sec 702
- as PEN conductor 543.4.201
in cofltact with oiher metals 522.5
socket-oLil1ets. mobile equipl1lent
411 .3.3 minimum cross-sectional area of
outdoors 524.1
neutral
swimming pools -
Ambient temperature -
suoDlement3r! equiPotential
d.i"ai," 702.415.2 - cables and conductors 522.1

use ofRaDs Sec 702 - cables, rating factors Appx 4 sec 2.1

temporary installations at - definition Pafi 2

fairgrounds. etc. Amendments to lhe Regulations Preface
RCDs on llnal circuits 740 415 1 Amusement device, deflnition PaA2
- sUoDlemellIall' equipotelltiaL Amusernent parks see Faitgrowtds
rrhireiire.tock -40.415 2 Patt 2
bonding Appliance, definition
verifi catior of effectiveness ol Appliances -
neasures 643 8 flre hazard frorn Sec 421
where specified as part ofprotective - flexible cables for 521.9
[leasure 410.3.2 553.1.7
Additional protectior (lrechanical) -
<l) ) )
- in bathrooms 701.55
- equipment in genelal - mobile. connection of 553.1.7
- wiling ofcam\ans T2t.522.'7.1 - oorlable see l'lobile eqttiptnent
Additior'ls to instilllations t32.16 - sledm 424'l
producing hol u ater or
641 .5
- suitchinp lor 463'l i
641.t.2
Arc fault ditection devices (AFDD) -
Adr,erse condilions precautions in 5t2.)
Sec 52: - coordiration with overcunent
Parl 7
protective devices 512 6
 recommendation for use 42t.1.'/ - conductor crcss-sectional area for 551.4.1
Table 55.2
Alcing -
control 557 .3.201
- injury from l3 t. t(vii)
- ofswitchgear 421.1.3 - for measuelnent 557.5
12t.t.3 functional considerations 557.6
Arc resistant material. Llse of
Arm's reach
- general 55 7.3.1

- application 4t7 1
requiremenls fot 557.3

- definition Paft 2 - scope 557.1

F is 411 B
- electric dodgems 740.410.3.5
Back-up protection -
Armoured single-core cables 521 .5.2
523.201 - deflnition Pafi 2

Assemblies ofequiPment, to comPlY - requirements for 536.4.2.21o 4

with approp ate standards 113.1
Part Band I circuits fsee dlso Voltage
Assessment of general characteristics 3
Part 2
defi i|ial1) -
Atmospheric origin -
protcction against over,,oltage due
- segregation of, from othel circuits 528.1

to Sec 443 Band II circuits /see also Voltage

definition)' Part 2
Authorized peBons -
- access to switchgear, limited to 422.2.2 - segregation of. flom other circuits 528.1

Table 4A2 (see m Bare conductors -

- installation methods under) - as overhead lines 4l'7.3
Automatic disconnectioo of supply - Sec 411 - cables connected to 526.4

- application of 4 r0.3.3(i) - eiecffomechanicalstresses 521.5.201

basic protection, requitements for 411 .2 - identification 514.4.2

514.4.6
circuit protective conductor to each
point 4l 1.3.1 .1 Bare live parts -
Class ll
equipment allowed 411. I - placing out of reacl) 4l'7.3.1

description of prctective measure 411.1 - SELV and PELV circuits 414.4.5

Barrier, definition Part 2
devices for Sec 531
disconnection times - Barriers
- dist bution circuits 4t1.3.2.3 & 4 - fire 521 .2

- final circuits 411.3.2.2 to 4 - protection bY - 416.2

Table 41.1 - degrces ofprotection 416.2.)
416.2.2
hlghway porver supplies 7t4.4tt.202
reduced low vollage systems 411.8.3 - inspection of 642.3(viiiXb)
where cannot bc achievcd 41 1.3.2.5 - intermediate" il1 enclosures 416.2.1(111)
Sec 419
4t)..2.2.3
1 14/| .2 .201
exposed-conductive-parts. earthing
of 411.3.1.1 - openings in 4t6.2.1
extmneous-conductive-Paft s, main
- removal or opening of 4t6.2.4
1 14.411 .2.201
bonding to 411.3.1.2
fault protection. requireme[ts for 41t.3 - securing of 416.2.3

generating sets 551.4.3 Rasic insulalion. defi nitiol] Part 2

highway powcr supplies '7 t4.41L202 Basic protection -

in case of fault 4t1.3.2 - and ar:tomatic disconnection of
supply Sec 411
in FELV systems 4|.7
inspection of methods of protection 642.3(viii)
- and double or reinforced insulation Sec 412
mobile equipment outdoors, RCD
- and electrical separation Sec 413
418.3.I
protection required 411.3.3(ii)
most commonly used measure 410.3.3 Note
- and SELV or PELV Sec 414

protective -
- baniers or enclosur-es, Iequirements
for 416.2
- earthing 4 ]l.3.1.1
- basic insulation -
- equipotentialbonding 411 .3.1.2
- oflive parts 416.I
rcduced low voltage systems 41 1 .8.3
- paint, vamish or lacquer, l1ot
socket-outlets, additional protection suitable as 4l6.1Note
by RCD -
- 411.3.3
- deflnition Part 2
exceptions permitted
- fundamentalprinciple t3 t.2.1
not exceeding 32 A 4r 1.3.3(i)
- genelal requircments 410.1
special locations, particular
requirements for Paft 7 - iD FELV systems 41t.7.2

street fumiture 114.41r - in rcduced low voltage systems 4t 1.8.2

testing 643.'7
- live pafis, basic insulation of 416.1

Automatic sources, safety seNices

- methods of. checking 642.3(viii)
supplies 560.4.1 - non-conductinglocation 4t8.1.1

Auto-reclosing devices 5 31.1.1

- obstacles for, only where controlled
or supervised 417.1 &2
Autotransfonners -
- FELV source, not for 41t.7.4
- placing out ofreach. brre lire psns
not io be $ ithin arrn ' rcdch 4 l7. r
use of 555.1
- provisions for Sec 416
Auxilialy battoies fot caravans Sec 721 Aunex A
Basic protection and fal t protection -
Auxiliary circuit. def nition Part 2
- cables, wiring systems ptoviding 412.2.4.1
Auxiliary circuits - Sec 557
 - enhanced protective provisioll - single-core metal-sheathed or
pro!iding 4 r0.3.2(ii) armoured cables 523.201
- protective measures pro\ idtng both. - supplenentary see Additional
for geltet al appltcatroD 410.3.3 prolection ; SupplenentaD)
BathoolDs- installatiors i11 - Sec 701 ecl ipotet1tiaI bondij1g
- additional protection - - swimming pools 702.4t5.2
- by RCD fol all low voltage 702.55.t
circuits 701.411.3.3 - telecomn)unication cable, metallic
- suppiemeDtary equipotelltial sheath 41t.3.1.2
bonding 70t.415.2 Boxes -
- controls 701.512.3 - for connection ofluminaires 559.s.l(viii)
- current-usingequipment 701.55 - for use in hollow walls 422.5 Note 3
- elect cal separation 701.413 - junction. circuits terminated in 521.8.3
- floor heating 10t.7 53 Bleaking capacity -
- heating appliances, water 701.55(x) - overload protective devices
- IP requiements 701.5t2.2
- lumi1laires 701.55(xi) - fault current protective devices
pull-cord switches 701.512.3 434.5.t
- SELV or PELV used in 70t.414 533.3
- SELV socket-oLrtlets 701.512.3
536.4.2
- British Standards
shaver supply unit 701.5t2.2 &3 - additional requirements ofother 110.1.3
- socket-outlets 70t.512.3
- conpliance with Sec 511
- supplementary equipotential - exclusions from Scope 110.2
bonding 70t.4 | 5.2 - refe.cnce in this Standard, list Appx I
- switches 701.512.3 B lding materials, fire hazard from
- towel rails 701.55(ix) equipment Sec 420
- zones 701.32 Sec 421
Fig 701.1 Sec 422
Building, nenciration of, load bearins
Fie 701.2
integrrty to bc assured ' 522.8.14
Battedes -
- auxiliary, fol caravans Building site.iee Corsttltction site
Sec 721AnnexA
- for safety sen ices 560.6.10
Bunched, definitior Par,t 2
560.6.1 I
Buried cables s€e Cables, btried,
- stationary installations Undetgrtund cables
incorpoiating 551.8 Bums, plotection agaimt Sec 423
Bcll circuits see Lbltage Band I, Busbars and b sbar connections -
definitkrt Patt 2 - cables connected to b sbars 526.4
Bends in wiring systems 522.8.3 colour identilication of protective
Body resistance, reduced - conductor 514.4.2
- marinas 7 09 .512.2(ii) - of
selection 52L4
- swimming pools '702.11 Busbar trunkilg system, definition Part 2
Bonding /see a/so E4tipotentiol Busbar trunl<ing systems -
bondingl - - oinent-carying capacity Appx 8
- additional protection 415.2 - e1tclosure as protective conductor 543.2.2
- agriculturalpremises 705.1152.1 - rating under fault conditions 43,1.5.3
705.541.2 - standard for 521.1
- as measure against EMI 441.4.2 - voltage drop Appx 8
444.5 Bypass bonding conductor, definition Pa\12
- batfuoorns 701.4t5.2
C
- caravans 121 .41 I .3 .1 .2
- conductor'.dellnition Part 2 Cable -
- conductors - - channel, definition Pafi 2
- main 4t L3.t.2 - cleat, definitiorl Part 2
544.t - concertric, installation of 543.4.7
- protective Sec 544 - coupler, definition Part 2
- selection and erection of Sec 544 - couplers - 553.2
- supplemeDtary sizing 544.2 - FELV system 4tt.7.5
- connections, wanling notice at 514.13.1(ii) - reduced low voltage circuits 411.8.5
- eanh-free local 418.2 - selection 553.2.1
- equipment in electrically sepalated - covers 522.8.10
clrcutts 418.3.4 - ducting -
- instafltaneous watel heaters - bends 522.8.3
- lighhing protection systems 4l 1.3. 1 .2 - definition Part 2
542.4.1(iv) - erection of 52242
- local supplementary 4t5.2 - insulating, for electrical
mair1. to extraneous-conducti!e separation 413.3.5
pads 4l 1.3.1.2 - prctective coflductols formed by 543.2.7
network. dcfinitioll Pan 2 - sealing at fire barriers 52'7.2
outdoor lighting insrallations. - selection of 521.6
nrefallic structures need not be ducts -
bond"-d 714.411.3.1.2
- bends 522.8.3
 - ingress ofwater
- underground
522..1.1 - lurniDaires
522.'1.2
s22.8.10
- enclosur-es - 559.5.2
- AC cir.clrits in steel
- nass supportable by pendant Table 4FiA
- arection
52L5.2 - segregatioD ofcircuits in 528.1
- prohibition as pEN conductor
522.8 - selection of 521.9
543.2.10
- fle\ible. delinirioo
Pan 2 - Appx 4
separated circuits
- lidder, deflnitiorl
Patt 2
113.3.4
, iuppofis 418.3.6
s2t.10.202 - use of 521.9.1
, 522.8.4 & 5 - floor-warming
irat,. delirition Pafi 2
554.4.4
- irLlnkitr! {er r7r,til7g n..vcrrr - for life safety systems
753.511
- runnei. de6nirror)
Part 2 - glouping
560.lr
aables - 523.5
- AC. types for 521 .5 - heating
Appx 4 sec 2.3
- agticultural installations 705.r2
554.4
- ambienl temperature Scc 753
5)2 t
- idertificationofcores Sec 514
I

Appx 4 scc 2. I - xt conduir aod ducting

- aI,]11our as protective condLlclol. 52t3.2.5 - tnlonnatioD technology. millimum
522.8 I

- attack by fauDa 5)2.10 separation distances

- bends 4441.4
522.8.3 Table A44zt.l
- btLrred.rr.e rrli.r L,rrlergrouttLl - in ground 1.ree.rlv, Lhtdetgnuud
433.1.203 433. t.203
522.8.10 522.8.10
523.3 523.3
- caravan parks 708.s2t.7
- in saunas
703.52
- colour identificatioD Sec 514
- instllled rrnder.floors or abo! e
- co ceclcd t ualls or partitiorr\ 522.6.202 to 104
ccllrtrgs
522.6.201
- rOUdLlctOrs, crOsq-\ectiOnal ateC of - in walls or partitions
522.6.202 to 204
132.6. Sec 524
- connected to bare coltductors or - joints
Sec 526
bu\bars
526.4
lift welts 528.3.5
- conDections
l14.l.4 - Iow teDrperatures, in 522.t
Sec 526
- marinas 709.s21
- core idcntiflcation
51,1.3
- mechanical stresses 522.6 to
cOl'rosive Of pOljltttD-l.I SubstanCes
ln - lnetal coverings as earth electrodes 512.2.2(vr)
8

contact \t ith
522.5
- cu[ent-canyjng capacity
Sec 523
- metal co!eri,tgs as protective
542.2.5

Appx 4 uo ductors 543.2.1(v)

- damage by -
543.2.5
f'auna
s22.10
- rneral-shearhed, sinqle_core
bonding 523.201
irrpact
s22.6
- nethods ofinstallation
Sec 521
- Dechanical str-esses
522.8 Tabie 4Al
- solar radiation
s22.)1 Table 4A2
- \,ibration neutrals
523.6
- elech.onragnetic effects 52t.5.1
Sec 52,1
noD-metal-enclosed. as basic
- elect.omechanical stesses 52t.5.201 protection alld fault protection
- enler-qency lightjng 528.1 Note 2 Don-sheathed, to be enclosed
412.2.4.1
- enclosures! iD onerolls dust oD construction sites
521.10.1
conditions 704.s2
522.4 overhead between bLiildings. etc.
- extemal influences
Sec 522 parallel
417.3
- erh.a-tow voltage systems
434.4
^ alanr
- hre 414.4
Appx t 0
- nre bgrTter\ -;2 8. t \ore 2 523.7
_ nre-sc!rceatcd 52-. L
- ratiDg factors
Appx 4
cornparrrrr..nt. u irnrn 517. - reduced neutral
- n\rngs ree si/pp.r/./r
i
- road-walming
- flarnc propagarron 52 - i.5 554.4.2 & 3
Sec 753
521 1 6 - saf'ety services
- flexible - - sealing at fire baniers 528.1 Note 2
521.t
appliances. fbr s)lo - segregatiojl ]r.orn other electrical
atrd non-electrical services
Sec 528
553. i.7 - selcction and erection
Chap 52
ceiling r.oses
559.5.1.201
current-cal.rying capacity .ingle-corc rnerat-ihealhcd.
Appx 4 bonding rfujpl0l
Tables 4FiA to 4FiA - solr $arnlng 554.4.2 & J
equiplllcl1t, connections to
Sec 526 i
fixcd wiring. use fol
521.9.1 - solar radiarion. exposcd to s!:.]I*."
tbr nlobile or n.anspofiable unrts.
supPt) COnnection . supnorts. gcncral s22.ll
7t1.52.1 g2.s_4 & 5
identification ofcores
5lzl.3 - rctecon'IllLl11tcatlon .re.,
liil ecomm un i catIon c i-c u i ts
 tenllreratures fd .!cd Ien4teratut'e !olragc IirniiariL,rl 559.5.1.201
tenllinations Sea 526 ( cr1L|gs. cablcs abore. nechanical
521.9 clarnagc 522.6.201
- thernlal irsulation. io 'table 4A2 (Nos 100- ( eil1u95. lhrruully ilsulatcd. cables
103) abovc 521.9
- underground sae lli erground ( ENELLC \e! I:uft)peo (:ol)tttIitlcc
/o t l: I n1 to t eL hnia d I Si tt t tLlLt rLlt :tu icu t
- vibration 522.'7 ( entral heatins slste ls- nuin
121.522.1 boDdulg t(J 41 L3.1 .2
- voltdge drop Sec 525 Ce iticale reeI-LcJriull IttstuI/Ltlio
Appx 4 sec 6 ('ct'l ific Ltle ; Mlt tol El ec tricLl

- watel or nloisture in contact with 522.3 hts tul I tr iott ll/o t' k:i Cert ifi nte
Carnpiog palk Ce ilicates. alLtherticity ol' 644.4.202
- delinition Pafi 2 Celliticalion.iritial Scc 644
- installation Sec 708 Charlgeo!er time.ree Jifetv tervircs
Capacitive electrical cnergy, dischalgc general, ofinstallation Parl 3
Ch aracter islic s.
of 462.4 Charactel islics, 1ir)re/cu[en1,
559.7 ovcrcrulent deviccs 432.4
Capacitols, conrpcNation 559.7 Appx 3
Capacitor, wamirg label r'equiled 116.2.5 Char!ing installatiolN, electlic vehicle
Caravan. definition Part 2 tee Elechic |ehicle
Calavan installations Sec 721 Charts .rcc -l)i.E/zr,r.!
- accessoies 721.55.2 CireDratograph irstallatioDs Appx 2 lterr 1(iv)
- additional protectioD by RCD 721.415.1 Cilcuit, dcfiritiol Pait 2
- bonding 721.:t11.3.1 Cilcuit arrangelllcnts -
- cable suppor-ts 721.522.8.1.3 - division ofinstallation Sec 31,1

- conlrcctol.s 7)1.55.2.6 - household and siurilar plemiscs Appx l5

Fig 708 Clrcuit-brcaker'-
- extm-low voltage 721.414 - defiuiti,.rn Parl 2
Scc 721 Arlnex A - linked -
- inlets 721.55.I - dcfinitiol Pa2
- instluctiom lor use '/21.5).4.t - i eanhod neutl.al 132.11.2
F i,g'721 Crlcuit-breakels -
isolation 121.537.2 as laull protection 1|.4.202
- l-P(; compaftrrent 721 .528.2. r ,11
1 .8.3

A721.528.2.5 - brcakrng capacity Sec 432

- luminaires 72t.55.2.4 434.5.1
721.55.2.5 4.15.1
- proteclion against elcct c shock '121.11 - co-or-dinarion ofseries devices Sec 536
- scope olapplication '72t.t - elccuode $ater heateN and boilers,
- supplies tbr 554.1.2
- wiring 72).521.2 554.1.7
721.522 - emcrycrcy switching olf 537.3.1.4
Caravan park, deliritioll Pal1 2 - t'ault cul.lerlt plotcctiol by 432.1
Caravan/camping park installations - Sec 708 412.1
- additional protection by RCD 708.415.1 414.5
- exterlal inlluences 708.5r2.2 Sec 435
- isolation 108.537.2 - oletcunerrt scttinSs -
- overcLulelrt protection, devices for 708.533 - co oldiDaliolrselecrivity Scc 435

- protective nreasurcs, prohibited 70E.4r0.1.5 & 6

536.,1.1.2 & 3

- scope 708.1
-
plecatllions to be taken, where
or'dinoly pclson lnay operafe
- socket-outlets 7011.55.1
dcvice 533. r.i
- supplies 708.1r3 - ovcrload i)rotection by 432.1 & )
- $ilillg systerr, types oI 7013.521
- rated c$uclt to be indicatcd 533.1.t
Caravan pitch. definilion Part 2 CifcrLi! discoruection tincs .!ce
Calavarl pitch electical supply Di\con ectian lines
eeluipn1ent, de{inilion Pa2 Cilcuit inpedances, fo1 automalic
C arrlidge firse 1ink, dcfiuition PlIft 2 disconnection 411.4.4
f atenary wires lable 4A2 (No 35) 4l 1 .5.3
Cathodic protection syslems, Circuil protective conduct{rr, definjtionPalt 2
Rcgulatiolls not applicable to DC Circujt prorective coDductol, of ring
side I10.2(xiii) cilcuit 543.2.9
Cattle slreds see lgri.
trllt.i al prenises s43.7 .2.201(i)
Ceiling heatirg syste s f.iee.rA.) Circuits
Ett $edded hed tit g s'),s ten s ) Sec 751 - a 'argenrcnts, ho sehold aod
Ceiling roses - sill)i1ar prcinises Appx 15
- application of 559.5.l - arixiiiary Sec 557
- e\ernption fiorr Iequitenlents tbr - Bands T and ll.ree B.ittl I circuils:
enclosures 416.2.4 Note )l circuits
Bctud
- nlultiple pendants 559.s.1 202 - 'Class II', pr'olective collductors in 412.2.2.4
- pendant luminaires, suitability lbr' 412.2.3.2
mass of 559.5 l - contfol .\irc aorr?/ aiTarli/.r
 division of installatiorr rnto 3 14.1 - electrical separation. source to be
electrically separ rled. arrangetnent outside locarion 'i06.413
of ,lt 3.3 - fixed equipmenr. supply ro 706.410.3.1o(iii)
41 8.3 - functional earthing of equipment,
final see I ttdlcitrttits protective bonding to be provided 706.4t 1.1.2
- isolation 462.2 - hand+eld tools, supply ro 706.410.3.10(D
- rrrrnrber of - haridlanrps, supply to 706.410.3.lo(ii)
(

- r;ig \ee Finul (.it(lits ring

S".c 314 - protection against electric shock jo6.4l
- protective measures pemitted 706.41t.t.1
- sai'e!) services 560.7 - scope
(
706.1
- segregation bctwecu 51 5.2 - SELV and PELV -
528.1
(
- SELV and PELV anangelllent of
-
requirements for circuits 706.414.4 (
414.4
- separation of 3t 4.2
-
sources for. to be outside location 706.41.1.3
Conductivc pafts ree ,_yposed-
4t 4.4
cond ctire pdrts,- Exlra eous-
560.7.7
conduatia pdt.ts
- switching of 463. r. r
Conduclive parts in 'Class II'
Circuses see Frzl-qrulrrrls
enclostrles 4t2.2.2.4
Classillcation ofexrer.nal influences Appx 5 Conductors -
- saf'ety serviccs sourc!'s 560.4.1 - alun;,inium.\ee Aluminiu l
Class I eqLripmerlt. dellnirio,l paff 2
Class II equiptrent. delinition par12 - ambient temperatul.e 522.1.
Class II equipmcnt or equl\ xlent bare. cablcs connected to 526.4
instLlation r.,.'D,,rrl,/c ol h.itn,11 r,l - bends
insu lation 522.8.3
Class III equiptrenr -
- boflding connections see Bo ding i:
Sec 526
- delinition part 2 - colo!r idertilication of
l1
Sec 514 p
Clinics see Medicul locutiorts - conosive or polluting substances,
Clocks. plugs and sockerourlers fbl 553.1.5(i) exposue to
l€
522.5
CNE conductor.rc,e PEN (otiductor - current-canying capacity Sec 523
Codes of Practice - Appx 4
- aplll-oVcd r t4.l - electromcchanical stresses 52t.s.201
- British Staudard Appx I - extemal i[fluences Sec 522 - sa1
Colour - - heating 554.4 - sc(
- cmergcncy s$itchrng de,viccs 53 7.3.3.5 - identificatiorl Sec 514 -sE
- identi{ication olcables and - joints Sec 526
conduckrs Scc 5 i4 - mechanical stresses 522.6 to 8
Appx 7 - neutral. crOSS-sectional area 524.2 _ sup.
identifi cation of llexiblc cables Sec 514 , I'N.
Table 7D - o\erhead see O|erheod li es _ wili
Colnbincd protecti\ c ald t'unctional - parallel
pulposcs - 433.4 Corsu
- earthing arran{cntcnts fbr 512.1.1
434.4 - deiir
523.',l _ lbr
54r.5.1 Appx l0 d
Cornbined shon c ircu ll cun.eni - protective.r?e Ptutectiye conductors
capability. dcliniriorl Part 2 - selection and erection Chap 52
- rlrc
Cofi bired shr,rr-citcrtit pturection. - Contact
soldercd
defi rritiorr pilr 2
- suppod. general
526.2
C'oIl1iIU
Corrbustible dust. fresencc of'. 522.8.4 & 5 _ dciini
applicabiliry of Regul.lio s Condujt and conduit systems -
110.1.3(iv) Coutinu;
Compatibility. clcctlontagnetic Scc 332
- bends 522.8.3
ContinLrr
Conrpatibi liry ot cqLripnletlt 311.1
- cables in 522.8
Corrrr-ol :
5 12.1.5
- definition Pafi 2
Compliance rvith - - drainage of 522.3.2 (01)lrol.
- Elecl ioity at Wbrk Regulations - erection to be completed before ( oltfol. r
r

1989. Nolc by HSE Pretace (opp) drau ing in 522.8.2 ( onlr-ol cr

- Standards Sec5ll - lixing.iee &rppollr
Concealcd cablcs in u,alls or partitions 522.6.202 to 204 - flarne propagation r.equirements 527.t.5 (irtnol .i,
Conccntlic cablc. instaliariolt {)1'
543.4.7
- ffexib1e. prohibited as prorective
(orci(( I.sl ot'e\r<rn.1l l.t(ncc. Apl)\ 5
conductor 543.2.3 - collduct(
Coucrete- steel tel[forc!)nent.rc. S/c.,/ - insulating. lor clectrical sepamtion 413.3.5
Condensation in rviril]g syslerrs 522.3.1
- joints 543.3.6 - dc'sign. it
522.3.) - naterials. British Standards 521.6 of
Condition rcport ser flrt.rric a/ - rnetallic. accessor-ics in 513.2.7 - icientilica
( on,:l i t i ( ) n Rcpo ]. t
I ns tal I d tidl - more thaD one circuit in 521.6 - l110tof. dc
Conditional shoft-rircuit cu ent. - passing through floo.s and walls 527.2 - sr.l itchitrg
definition pafi 2 - protectivc coDductor fonned by 543.2 & 3 nlalllat
Conduclntg location \,u ith rcstl.i.ted - sealing 52'7.2 finrtlolgcar
tuovemeut. dehnition pa 2 - underground 522.8.10 Controls in l:
Conducting locatiolls \! i1h r.slricted - watcr in 57) 1) ( o-otdxta!tu
movement - Connections. electrical - - arc lault da
autoDatic disconneclion ol supPly 706.4ll - general - back-up
134.1.4 pl
Sec 526

530
 - heatjnE unit\. uold
tajl\ -53.424.)ut
- ut,",. pr",..rr, ..t',,i"." -
( urrrcutrr. urtrr,rror, " ' "'( 4:2.J 5rii) betu cen uunJuct,rr
protccttl L_ dq\ l(e
cDd or,erlo,,J
curu".t,,.i. I'aft 2 - 433.l
ot-uleuui(al cquipnrcrr, Jef rrion
"oruuu"o'
ar,,,,,".,r.*..r,.li-" ?21.i5.2 orrrr
r - urlvr:fload and fault Paft 2
('o.\(qLe,ce\olL,\rr1r)Jrnu/ )JJ.l.5rrl culre]lr
.,-r
a\ic\\rl ter)l -++j 4
- lnotor stalaterlj,,idt fault
cul.retrt
Seo zt.l5

('orr.rrur.rrr,n ''l4i. s
efsq11p61.111. 435.2
or rrri r(egrrrariorr. ro - selectiviry -
L.oJtsrluL r]on pt IrJ.i _
"..lll],:19,1,,: odu(r\
R({UlJtiL)rr betwc,(lt or crcuneDt prutective
('or.rrucrru, .,,. Alp\ l. rrcrn |7
,,,.,,r r;;;,.":'"" ue\ lccs nl scfies
- rsse,,bi) rb, .",,,;;;.;;,;]':,;-. see )04 NL,re 536.4.1.2
(A( Si - c(rr RCD{
ber!-\
536.4. t.3
704.511.1 C oLrr erlors. :,rafic \p1i7rr,. s36.4.1.4

- lil,YI,lllil,:::.,^,.,,",,
.-,,...,u uc prutected !gainsr
",
.,,.r,, ;jl ji;, CoId opcrrtcJ swit(h(s
lD bathroohe 701.512.i
nteulrllrre.ri darnugr.
-.ur."r"uring'"iii,i j,',i"nt,srft e R,L r i, tg p. 1").i
plyibrtr0lr^irr|i),r, :,;,,1:ii::i_*.-.,.
, 704.531.2
- cablcs, gen!,mi
exelJ]pl Iocatrons - eanh electrudes 522.5
- crteDlal iltllir!,nce\ 704. t. I 512.2.1
- LurrdJanrp:, pr_rtlu[rlr.
prcler.].srl
704.512.2
- earthing conductors 542.2.3
:l srclDs - heatiDg cabies
- i\olarion rrl nrcoltilt;
suDDJ!
704.410.i.I0 Notes
- q inrg systenrs 5s4.4.2(ii)
- rnalD (list|1bL]ttoI
as.enrltv ti,.
704.537.2
Coupler: (ablc.\irL, (-,
701.53 t,/1, tottoL,r
Plugr llnLl \!,rker-outlcrs u!ll,'); u,,,,,.,,,,
- reduec(llut{ !t,jr.r!( 704.511.t ' ;,"., u,s
\}.\trnts 701.110.3.10 ",,ppo,,
C)iteda, rclevant
- r.!'lated Blilish 704.522.8.11 641.1
- restduai cuteutStandard
der,ices
Sec 70zl Note
Clros$sectional arca 64t.l
701.410.3.10 of oonductors and
- salctr .rnd srarrJb;. 7 04.4 I 1 .3 .2.1 132.6
- \cofr ut al)phraLi)nsupplrcs "/04.537.2
('ul-reltt - Sec 5221
- SEL\, rnd lrF.tV cl(Llr\ 701.1.1 - cil.culalills, prccautions to
- srrclcl_uutl! t utefi1ts 704.411.4.s - IlatrtrtLln r]eltanrl Iilnil 551.5.2
701.410.3.10 - datur". uf Sec 31 I
- supplics 704.4|.3.2
- ,)rul(rii\. L,uIdLr(rr,r. htth 313.I (ii)
- fN-Cl-S Dor to bc used 701.313
- rirrr.d. oj hr.es anJ ur.uiuor..ol,"." 543.7
- wIll1g systenrs 701.111.3.1
-, strroorltty ol-equ4rt)]crt Sec 53i
Coosumer.unit 7t)4.52 tot. 512.1.2
t ln clt.Lrt.r.t iltg uJpaut\
- deliuirion r,nled r.ahl..
- 1,-rr dorrrestic plcrnrs(s.
elck,\rr"
Patt 2 433.t.203

_
t-equrrel)c t
121.1.201
- busbat trunkxtg \ystems Appx zl
Iyl)(- spc(r1lcr1toll - cablcs and uo,Idttetur.\ Appx 8
L-onucrurl. bar k up plutcctrun 536.4.201 Sec 523
( ott tutt) ui \et\ oi
lL.
536.4.2.2 - delioition Appx 4
- defilrriorr Chap 36 - eftlctive Pan 2
Contiruity tcsrs
Pa1"t 2
- lleutldl ot polyphas( cil.uutt
Appa 4 sec 5.4
Condtturtrs tnunrLut,xlc 643.2.l - ptt'allcl cr,nduct(rt.s s21.2.3(i)
( orrtrol anLl 652.2.
Il.(,lcchvc]s\\ irchiDu I
u(\ t(c. otrltntU()n 434.1
Conttol. rnoioa P,afi 2 523.7 I

Cr'Dlrul. ur .163.3 -. r aliatron Appx l0

cr.r ultrue alorrg route
143.4 L ul]erIl-uan) 523.8
c t u t r., ge ) I D1_. CuDdU(tot.\
' \:i:1,,:,':,',", " B,,, n t
luraugeorents of
I

Cuntrul (irL Palt 2 Cul.rellb, 3 12.1 I

r1rrs I \?t, ul \t).4 ]^ t t,,,,_
L,u.L-ttit.\) - - haruOnt.. ,tf Hdt.nbtti.
- L,t .t.L,,t\
cut)durtots. Itj,tru]L
I r1.oss
- stal1t g
seLltOIal nt.ea ,,f 331.1(v)
- d"irrg,r, ,rrnrrg.,,r"r.,t
and plotcction
Table 55.2 ( uu (nt traD\li,,.t)tcrs,
umjssior,,1
i
-552.1.
ova' L'aJ pJOtE('tturr
- identificatiol ol 557.3.201 ( urcnt-usltg
equiptrlent _
433.3.3(iii)
- JIut!)r. desiglcd r(, Table 5 t - Llet D[iu
Dl.e!ent.irnu_r
- su rtchirg uli lLr nriclani"rl 463.3.1
" - power demand Pan 2
DlaItlcna cc b) n)tdruDtion 133.2.4
(..L,nrr()lgcurJL,e Ji, /1( r!,?,,j
i,f s37.3.2.2 - selectiott antl erectton 512.1.4
tri.
L onruli io bathruurnr Lychc lc,a(ls. o\ rrloi(lprulect,on Sec 554
( u-L,ldltdtluo 7Cr l.j l2.3 for 533.2.1
r.r,r .rAu Sc_leetr rrr r _ D
- at'(. irUll dL.tcL ltotr
- back-up proteclioll 5i2.6 Dailcs rrs.1511.772a
a/ pr etnist:
536.4.1.2 to .l uantd-gc. t.Ecordtnc
ut.
653.2

I
DaDger. delinilion
Danser Ioticc,s \ee Lhu.iitjg Part 2
noti.es
Danger offire. particular risks Sec 422 Direct contact, protection against Jee
Dangcrous conditions. rccording of 653.2 Bctsic'pi-oleclion I

Data transfcr circuits. prevcntion of Discharge lighting, firefighter's switch I

electrical interference iu 528.2 Note I tbr 537.4.2 I

DC systerns. tlpes Appx 9 Discharge olenergy. for isolation 462.4 I

Defccts - Discollncction times -

- additions and alterations. in e\isting - distributioncilcuits 411.3.2.1
I

irstallation. recording of 644.t.2 4tr.3.2.4 I

- durirlg periodic- recordirg of 653.2 - lhult cunent clearance 434.5.2 I

Dcfccts or- omissions. dulirrg initial - llnal circuits 411.3.2.2 to 4 I

vcr-ification 644.1.t Table 41.1 I

Definitions Pafi 2 - highway supplies and equiprnent 1t4.4 t t.202

Deglee ofprotection (lP) - - reduced 1ow voltage systems 411.8.3
- ag cultural. hofiicr.lltural prcmises 705.5 t2.2 - where cannot be achieved 411.3.2.5
- barr'iers and elclosures - Sec 4i9
- general 4t6.2.t Disconnector -see Isolator -
416.2.2 - definition Part2
- inspection of 642.3(viii)(b) Discdminatior .rce Selectivity
- bathrooms. showers 701.414.4.5(ii) Disputes with distributors Appx 2 sec 2
70t.5t2.2. Distribution board. defi nition Part 2
- BS EN 60529 staodard tbr Appx I Distribution circuit -
- caravan parks 708.512 - definition Pafi )
708.553.1.8 - discon[ection time for -
insulating enclosure, barier in 4 t2.2.2.3 TN system 4l 1.3.2.3
intermediate barier in enclosure 416.2.4(ii) - TT systenl 4) t.3.2.4
location with lisk offlre - Distribution code Appx 2 sec 16
- ELV circLrit. live pafis of 422.3.r(i) Distributor. defi nition Part 2
- hrminaires 422.3.8(ii) Distributors -
- switchgear 422.3.3(1i) - cut-orLt, for isolation ofhighway
mariras 7 09 .5 12.2.1 .I powcr supply '7 t4 .53'7 .2 .l .202
709.553.1.8 - disputes with corsumers. procedure Appx 2 sec 2
flon-sheathed cables, tru[king equiprrent. suitability for additions
co1ltaining 521.10.I to installation r32.16
- obslacle. afln's reach tionl 417 .3.2 - f'alrlt curent device. protection by 434.3(iv)
- saulas 703.s t2.2 - not compelled to give supply in
- special locations, other Paft 7 certain circuI1lstances Appx 2 sec 2
- swirrming poo1s. fountains 102 .4 t4.4 .5(il) - overload device, protection by 433.3.1(iii)
702.5 t2.2 - to bc consulted 331.1
- wiling systen]s 521.10.1 Distributor's network -
522.3.1 isolation and switching
522.4.t an-angenelts lbr generatirg sets 551.6
527 .2.3 55r.7
Demand. t1laximrun. detemrit1ation - the Regulations not applicable to ]l0.2(i)
of Sec 3ll Diversity, may take account of 311.1
Demand. Lllaxinrunr. suitability of
Divisior of installation Sec 314
supply for' 313.1(v)
Documentation to bc provided for
Departulc. dcllnition Pa2 every installation 132. t3
Dcpartulcs froir thc RcgulatioDs I20.3
Donrestic.ree Horseloldor similar
133. r.3
133.5
Doors -
651 2 - in Class II enclosutes 4t2.2.2.3
653.2 - in stleet fumifurc '714.4t1.20\
Design. econonlic and reliable 3l 1.1 Double insulation
Design curlent. definition Palt 2 - definition Pafi 2
Dete omtion. recording oI 653.2 - ofcqriipment 4t2.2. I
Deterurination of prospective f'ault Double or reintbrced insulation -
culrent Appx 14 - application of 412.1
Device lbr connecting a lulninaire - coDductive pafis. connection to
(DCL). definition Pafi 2. protective conductor prohibited 412.2.2.4
Devices lbr connecting lunrinaires - - conductive parts not to traveNe
- fixed lighting point. usc at 559.5.1(ix) enclosure 112 .2.2.2\t)
- il1 FELV systenr 411 .7.5 - degree ofprorectior -
- in reduced low voltage system 411.8.5 - ban iers rvithin cnclosures 112.2.2.3
- not in circuit reJying on double - enclosures 1t2.).2.t
insLrlation 4t2.1.2 - description of protective rlleasur-e 4t2.t
Devices for protcction against - enclosurcs of equipment 1t2.2.)
ovcnoltage Sec 534 - equipment to be Class or
Appx 16 equivalent 412.2.t.t
Diaglaurs. provision of - 514.9.1 - exposed-conductive-pa s not to be
- for safcty services 560.7.9 conDcctcd to protective conductor 412.2.2.4
- medical locatiorls 710.514.9.1 - identilicatiolr olClass II cquiprnent 412.2.1.1 Note
Dielectric. llamrrable Iiquid 42t.t.5 inspeL.tion 642.3(\.iii)(a)
422.2.3 - lids or door-s in enclosures 412.2.).3
 not applicablc whcre cill.lLit Harthed concentlic wi|ing, de{iuition
iDcludes a socket-oLrtlet or sinilat ( see trlso PEN unchrtot) Pa2
devicc 1l).1.2 Eanhed equipoteutial bonding
protecti!e couduclors iu lclatiol1 to ,1i2.2.2.,1 and autolrutic disconrrection rge
r'eir1lbl..ed irrsulatioo duriDg clection zl12.2. L3 AttIott1LtIic Lliscot rc(Iion of ):fippII
- relnovable screws or lixings not E;rthing -
pennited 11) .).2 .2(ti) - iflalgenlcrts -
- solal photovoltaic powcr supplies, -assessnlent oftypc of Sec 312
Class ll plefered on DC side '7
t2.4t2 -scicctiolr and ercction Clhap 54
- supplerDerltarJ insulation during - suitabllity of 542.1.3.1
erection 4t2.2.t.2 - oonrbircd plotcclive aid functlorlal
- wiring systc[1s 412.2.4 pLLlposcs 542. r.l
Drainage of couduit systems 522.3.2 543.5.1
Drawings for safety installatio[s 560.7. r 0 - conductor', defillition Pa2
Duct. delinitiol Part 2 conductoN. electrode boilcrs 554.l
Drtcl see Cuble ducts - conductor's, selection and election 542..3
Drctr]i.g see Cable dLtLti g - cor1ncctiorN, wamillg roticc at 5 14. I 1.1
Dust, presence ol 522.4.2 - defirition Paft 2
exposed-conductive-palts -
E
- IF-LV systcns 411.'/.)
Ealth - - general reqllilemeits 4l t .3.I.l
- colnections to - Sec 5,12 - I'f syslems 4tt.6.2
- necessity lbr addilional 331.1(xi) - reduced low voltage systcm 4l r.rJ.l
- curents, high 543.1 - 'fN systenls 1t1.4.2
- delinition Part 2 - Tl syslenls 411.5.r
Earth electrcde - - high protcclive coDductor currents 541.7
- definition Pal.t 2 - iurpedance
foundation - I'[ syste ') figs 9C,9L,9M
- rrobile or transponable unirs 717.411.6 411.6.1
- [etwork, deli tion Part 2 -valuo o1 542.1.3.1
- resistance - - neutral point or nlidpoint ofreduced
- alLowance for corrosion 51).2.1 low voltage source 2111.8.4.2
- allowancc tbr soild[ ing and Deulral ofsLrppiy fiec./lro l'E-N
freczing 554.1.5 to 7
- arca, definilion re(, Resiltance - prohibitecl. iu earth-fiee local
area Parl 2 bonded location 41823
- de{inition Pa2 - prohibited, in llon-couducting
- TT and lT s,vstems in general 41 1.5 location 418.1.3
.111 6 - tesistance -
- test of 613.1.2 - ptulision lor mcasurelnent of 542.1.2
- where consists o1'pars- conneclion - varialions ilr 542.2.1
of 511.2.8 512.2.4
Eafih electrodcs. seloction ol - systelt)
Earth l'ault curent - global 142.2.1
- adequacy of eanhins aJransements ' types of
fot 542.1.3.1 to 3 tornrinal, marin -
definition Part 2 - connectiorl to Eanh 512.t.201
EartL fauh loop impedance - - clefinition PaIt 2
- definition Pan 2 - plovision of 542.4
- extemal to installatioL to be fillqe ]rl(r'c tha[ ore souce ()1'energy 5t?. i .5
deten'lined i I i.1(iv) Economic desigr ol installation 3tl.l
- for automatic discoamc-!-rio[ lbr Fltlicieircy ree Erergl ef'cieac1,
fault protection. -seri<ral ll1.4
-fl 1.5 Electric l'e ce ilstallations, the
Regulatio s not applicable to I10.2(xii)
- maxilnunr .\ppri i 705.1 Notc
6.ri.7.3
Electlic shock -
- r-educed lol i..:-.- . - Jl1.8.i
- ourent ree,.t o.t ct re t, delinition P^tt2
- tesling
-

6{i_7.3
- deliDilion Pad 2

Ea h-tiee lo.xl ;.:- :- , : - : e:nergency switchlug olf 465.2 I

protectiolr b\ -tl8_l in case oflaul1.tcs f. tll p|otcclion

Eafth-tice ltcil:, : irl nomral seNicc ree Bdric
-.
No]1-tt)lklttL:.:-
protcction against Chap 4l
Earth lcakagc' r-.::'-: :
cttt url,rr ,:. satety serviccs 560.7.6
Earth loof in-,f.,., .- : Electric sult'ace heating systems Sec 753
l.)q) itltl\.i... . - Llcctric tlactioll equipnlcnt rcd
Ea h rnonrtn: r::- Rl,ilrxirt lt Lt(Iion equipmettl
,-'- :-t:,tl Electric \ehicle (EV). delirlition Palt 2
Electdc lelicle chalgirlg irstir]iations Sec 722
- applicalioll, scope of 722.1
-122.512
chargirlg point ouldoors, IP rating .2.201
712.55. r0l
 - dedicated final circuil requircd 7 22.31t Electricity Safery, Quality ard
- definitions relatins to Part 2 EV Continuity Regulations - Appx 2 Item l(i)
- electrical scpararion. limiration on - failure ofconsuner's installation to
use of 7)2.413.t.2 comply with Appx 2 sec 2
- enlergenc) switching 722.537.4 - relatioNhip ofthe Regularions to 114.1
- external influences 722.512.2 Electrode boilers (and electrode water
- maxilllum dentand 122.3tt heaters) -
- ovclcurent protectiotl 722.533.101 - definition Part 2
- protective lreasures not perlnitted 722.410.3.5 & 6 sclection and erection of 554.1
- RCDs 722.53t.2 Electrodynatnic effects s"e
- selection and erection 122.5 E I ectronrccha n icct l ; EI ectrcmagfl etic
- sockeFoutlets tbr 722.55.101 Electrodynamic effects on protective
coDductols 543.3.I
- TN system 722.4t|.4
- PEN conductor pr-ohibited in llnal Electrolysis. prccautions against -
cll-cutt 722.3 t2.2.1
- earthing alaangefients 542.1.3.2
Electrical certificatior't. depa Llres - marinas. waming to users Fig 709.3
fiom Regulations to be recorded 120.3 - wiring system rnetalwork 522.s.2
Electromagnetic compatibility - Sec 332
ril.5 - equipment
Electrical conncctions ret, - immunity lcvels of equipment 515.2 I

Co n n( I irts. al &1 ]'i( u I Electromagnetic Compatibility

Electrical e.llipnlent. dcfi nitiorl Paft 2 Regulations 2016 Appx 2 sec 13
I
Electr-ical equipructrt.\r e Eq u ipttl e t I Electronagrctic distl'llbances,
Elecn ical EquipDtenl ( Safity) leasures against - Sec 444
RegulatioDs 2016 Appx 2 sec 8 Annex ,4444
ElectricaL installation. dehuition Pat 2 - bonding networks 4444.1 to 3
Elcctrical Installation Cefi iticarc, - cable segregation / sepamtion 4444.4
- authenticily of 644.4.202 - catlhing and equipotential bonding 444.5
- departures fiom Rcgulations.r?e - EMI. measurcs to reduce 444.1.2
E I ?(. I t it'u I krt ill('Ln irl - power supplies, multiple source TN
or Tl
earthiDg of 444.4.6
- fomr ol Appx 6 - scope 444.t
- issue of 644.t - segrcgation of circuits 444.6
- schcdules to acconlpany 644.3 - sources ofdisturbance 444.4.t
Electlical lnstallation CoDditron - TN system 444.4.3
Rcport -
- antherlticity ol' - TT system 444.4.4
644.5 Electromagnetic effects in cables 521.5
653.5
Electromagnct jc inteference,
- lbnn of Appx 6 [Ieasutes to reduce 332.2
- inspectiou scll!'dulc Appx 6 Electrornechanical stresses -
- recording ofdefects. ctc 653.2 - condLlctor and cables 521.5.201
- rcquirernent lb. 653. r
- eafihing arangements 542.1.3.1(ii)
, Electronic devices f.!ee a/so
schedules to accol]]pany 653.2 Semicotdudor det)ices) -
- skillcd persorl(s) to sigr 653.5 - as safety source for SELV or PELV
Electrical illtefelcncc 528.2 systems 414.3(iv)
Elect cal s.paration. prote.lior by Sec 413 Embedded heating systems - Sec 753
,118.3
- additional prctection by RCD 753.415.t
application of 4r3.1 - '753.t
application, scope of
basic protectiorl t3.2
botding olcqtLiprrent
4
- automatic disconnection by RCD '7
53.4t L3.2
418.3.4 - bums. plotection against 753.423
disconncction rvhcre two t'aults
occur ,l18.3.7 - documentation to be provided 753.514.1
exposed rnctalwork of circuit 413.3.6
- electrical separation. not for wall
heating systems 153.413
zl l 8.3.4
flexible cables tbr 413.3.4
- heating cables Sec 753
418.3.6
- heating-fiec areas, identification of '753.412
'7
fbl onc item ofcquipntcnt ,113.1.2 53.520.4
7 53.522.4.3
for several itelns olequiplnent 413. I.3
4l 8.3
- mesh metallic g d 7 53.41t.3.2
7 53.424.102
plotective conductols tbr 4 18.3.6
separ-ation of circLlit
- overheating. protection against 753.424
41,3.3.2
- prevertion of hamful influences '7
53.515.t
socket-oullets tbr 418.3.5
- protection by double insulation 753.4t2
supplies for 4t3.3.2
- protective measures not permitted 753.410.3
testing of 643.4.3
- user infomlation
Emergency control, fundamental
voltagc limitation 413.3.2 principle 132.9
wiring systcms for 4 t3.3.5
Emergency lighting - 110.1.3(ii)
Electricitv at Work Resulations lgSg -
applicable to places oflvork activity Appx 2 Itern l(iii)
- segregation fi-om otlrer circuits 528.I Note 2
- standards lot 560.9
conlpliarce of installatiotis with Note by HSE - supplics for Chap 35
lurthcr guidance on Appx 2 sec ,1 Chap 56

- 184--
Energcncy slopping - - iilpulse carcgory ol 443.6.2
Table 443.2
- deii itioil Pafi 2
- 416. l
ilsulation of
-f'unctional testirg of 643. r 0
Emcrgercy switchrng otT - - mobile -
- definition Pa2 - detirition Pafi 2
i11non conductiDg location 418.t.6
- Dachincs 537.3.3.1Note
- outdooN, Protectior bY RCD 4r r .1.3(ii)
I

- plug and sockct-otidel not to be

plovided for 53r.3.1.3 - oil-fillecl 421.1.5 I

- provisiotl ot' 465.1 - operaliollal conditions 5I2.I

- selectiorl ofdc!ir'cs fbr 537.3.3 - pottable see ntr;/rlle
E11closurc, deliniritll1 Part 2 - selectioi of Sec lll
Pafl 5
Elclosutcs - Pa2
- acccssibilitl to equiplllent withi[ i13 I - stationaly, dcfinition I

- 1br corlsurl)er rlnit ill doDlcstic

- suitability ibr power detlland/d[Lty t33.2.1
512.1.4
prenrises 42r.1.201
- surl'ace tc Pelalue of 42t.1.2
- tarjoiDts and tctnlinatiolls 526.5
423.1
- plotective coDduclor's lbrrned by
- sni:nming pools Sec 702
EnclosLLres, pl'otection bY -
- arc-resisunl. lor llxcd equiplnent 421.1 3(i) - testiDg of Part 6

- Class ll ot equiralefi 412.).2 - type-tested 412 2.1.)

& EqLlipoteDtial bond111g f-!c.'.r/so

- degleas ofProleclil)i 116 2 1 2
B ot tl i t tg; St4tplencn tu r.t'
- fire-r-csistant. lor tixed equipnrent '121.1.2(i) equipote lidl bo Llit|g) '
- ilspecdon ol 6a2.3(viii)(b) - additional proteclioll
- lids or cloorr iu 412 2 2 3
agricultural prcnliscs 705.415.2.1
'7
t4.4 .201 | - bathtoollls 701.415.2 I
- openings rrl 116')-l 721.111 .3.1.2
- removal ol operring of 416.2 4
- conductols _
I

of 416.2.3
- rnain 4l 1.3.1.2
sccuritlg
- sclection ar1d ereclitln of Sec 544 I

Energy. discharge ofsloled slgclljq6l '16? 4 ol 541.2

slippleme lrrary, sizirg
Encrgy dliciencl - APPX L7
- delinilioll Part 2
- tlelluitions and rclated tcmrs Paft 2
Appx 17, ltcurs 17.2 - earth-ftee locai 418.2

-delaiied reconnnendations Io 17.13 - Dlailr 4 r r.3.1.2

llghtr g rrlsllllatiollJ.
scope ofrecomnlLlrdations lor
oLrtduur
- Appx 17.ltenr 17 1
nrcrallic str'uctt[(s need not b(
Environutltal conditions. bonded 714.4113 1 2
funda ental PrinciPle /!?e a/so
Eternal inflienccst 132.5.1 - proteoti\c L2
41 1'3'

EquipneDl - sal'ety sepa|ated circuits. in 4l8 l-4

- swinrtrirg pools '7-O2-415 )
- accessibility l]2.12
Sec 5l l t02.55.i
- applicabilit) of the Regulalions to 1 11.1 - of
tcsring 643.2.1(i)
- Class ll 412.2.1.1 Lrectiot ofequiPnent P'fi 5

- compatibility of Escalators. exclusion I 10.2(x)

5 12.1.5 Fscapo r ol.rte (eMelgency) _

- containilg flamrnabl. liquid .121.1.5 -' cable malugclDelrt systenls in 4)2.2.1

- cul.rerlt-usirg. dcfinilion Part 2 - dellnition Paft 2
- cu1lc[t-using. rcquirenlenls Scc 554 switchgear and controlgear located
in 422.2.2
- electical, definition Paft 2
- elecfiomagnelic cornPalibilit] of Sec 312
wirirg systelns 422.2.1
515.2
521.10.202 Note I
- cnvironmental conditions- ixposed (lunmitec lbr
to ll:.5 EuroDcan
Electl'otetlrrrical Stirndlt'dizcti,rn
- erection ot' PaIl 5
- fixed -
- accessibility for mailrenance 513 1
""i..iii.r,'"
EY see Eleclric vehicla
ti|i'5,* ,'
- defirlirion Part 2
Exciter circuits of rnacltil1cs, omission
- disco tection tim6 ibt 411.3.2.1
ofoverload protection 431.3.3(j)
- earth faulr loop tmpedances tbr Tables4l.2to4 ExcitisioN lionr Rcgulalions 110.2
- Ructional testing of 6'13.10 Fxhibition. del'Luition Paft 2
- fundanrental requrrements Sec 133 F-xhibilions. slows and sta[ds - Sec 7l l
- guar-ding, agailsr bums 423.1 - accessiblc strLlcfuml parts. tnaiI
'7|.411.3.1.2
- lraving bare lire Pans 417.3.1 boMirg of
- heat dissipation '111.1.2(iii) - addilioral protcctior bY RCD 711.411.1.3
- incotporatrng motors 552 1'2 - emergency switching 7l L559.4.4.3
- inspectior ol 6112 - hcat, guarding ofequipmert
- isolatiol and ss itchrng of Chap 46 ptoducitg T |.422.4.2
Sec 5i7 rnsDec!loll ar'l turllllA- dlt(r (aell
,i'..nrhlr -ll.o
rncelrrn,...
Sec 464 - isolariorr. tbr each separate strLlctule
53 7.3.2 anddishib$tioucircuit 711.537'23
Soulaa.: ' 560.6.2

535
- lampholders. insulatiorl piercing. - sclection and erection ofeqtiprnent
onlv noD-remolable allo\\ ed 71 1.5 59.4.3 in relatiol'i to Sec 522
- lighting installations 711.559 ExtraJorv voltagc /see ulro L|-)lxlge.
- motols. isolation of 711.55.4.r crhi - I at : lt' u n c t i o nlt I et t ro - I atr
- scope of rcquirenlents 7l l.l P rcte cti'e er t n - I a\r. S?pdt'1 t ed
- SELV or PELV '711.4t4.4.5 exh d-lo\r \Dltage) -
- sho\\,. dcfinitiorl Part 2 - application 4|.7.1
- socket-outlets. ffoor ounted 111 .55.1
4t4.t
- stand- delinirion Parl2
- delinition Paft 2
- supplies 711.313
- provided by SELV or PELV Sec 414
Extr-a-low voltage lighting
- supplv. TN-C'S prohibited '71t.4tt.4
insiallatiors.\ee Zlgrrll€
- switchgear a1ld controlgeal, access i n s td I I o / i ons - extft !- lot\ \,o I ta ge
1rl only by key or tool 711.5t
Extra[eous-conductive-pafi, def,nition Pa.t 2
- tempomry installations.
ExtraneoLrs-conductivL'-pa s -
requirerrents applicablc to 7tl.l
- temporary structures, supply cablc - additional protection ,115.2

to. RCD protection requiled at - agricultuml premises 705.415.2.1

orlgrn 7 |.4t0.3.4 - autofiatic disconnection ofsupply Sec ,111
- wiring systems for 711.52 - bathr-oonrs 71l.4l5-2
Explosive atmospheres Po tent ia I h, - bonding ol 411.3.1.2
"^ee
exp los i \:e a I ntosp heres 415.2
Exposed conductive-pafi. defirition Part 2 camvans 121.4tt.3.t.2
Exposcd-conductive-parts - conducting locations with rcstricted
- additjonal pr otection 415.2 movernent- PELV circuits in 706..110.3.l0
agricLrltural and hor-ticultLn al earth-free local bonded location 418.2
ptemrses 705.415.2.1 electrical separation 418.3.4
automatic disconnectioll in case of ir non-conducting locations 418.1
laLrlt 4t t.3.2 outdoor lighting, metallic shrctures
conductillg locations with restricted need rot be bonded '714.411.3.1.).
lrorerllcllt 706.41 placiug out ofreach 417 .3. )
connection, for earthing and propagatillg potential outside non-
automatic discouDection - conducting Iocation 4t8.1.7
l l systcms 4t],.6.2 protective conductors fomled by 543.2.1(vii)
4t r.6.5 543.2.6
- prolecti\c caltl'iillg 41 1.3.1 . l - swinming pools 702.1ts.2.
- reduced lo\\, voluge systens 4 .8.3 F
- TN systcrrs 411.4.2
ll systems 4tI.5.I Fairglound. deflnition Paft 2
construction sites 7 04 .4 t L3 .2.r Failgrounds- amusement palks and
earth-t'r'ee local bonded location
circuses, telnporary installations for
4t8.2
structures. etc - Sec 740
elecl cal scparation 4t3.3.6
4l 8.3
- amusemenl device. deinition Part 2
embcddcd heating systerrs.
- automatic disconnection of supply 740.4r0.3
provision to bc made on site if 740.11I
r1eccssary 153.411 .3.2 - bonding wherc livestock 140.415.2.l
- exenlptions fiom fault protection 4 r0.3.g(iiD - booth. definition Paft 2
- flinctional extra-low voltage buried cables. protection and
systems 41t.7.3 ,rarking 740.521.1
- bigh protective conductor cu(ent - calavans. PME prohibited 140.4tt.4
equipmcnt 543.7.1.203(v) - dodgems. electric. voltage to be
- local boilding of 4t 5.2 ELV 740.55.9
- mobiic or transpo able units. - cquiprnent, IP protection 740.512.2
pt ecautions against energizing 717.52.1 - linal circuits. RCD protection of 740.415.I
- non-conducting location 418.1.2 - nle. protection against 740.55.1.5
418.1.4 - genemtoN 740.551.8
- ofequipl[cnt- not as protcctive - inspectioll and testing after each
conductor 543.3.5 asserrrbly 740.6
- placing out ofreach 417.3.1 - isolation required for cvcry
- protective conductorc fotmed by 543.3.5 installation '7
40.537
- SELV or PELV circuits 414.1.1 - IT system. not where altemative 740.1t1.6
414.4.4 - joints in cables 7 40.526
- slatic couvertors, on load side of 551.4.3.3.I - lampholders. irsulation piercing,
- swin'iming pools 702.4t5.2 oDly non-removable allowed 740.55. r.2
ExteNioDS .\ee Additions to - lighting installations 740.55.l
instaliations - lumiraires 740.55. L 1

- luninous tubes and sigDs 740.55.3

Extemal infl uence, definition Pan2 placing out ofreach. acceptable for
Extemal influences - dodgems 740.410.3.5
- classification of Appx 5 public supply, diffetent sources not
- ea hing alran,sen'lellts to be suitable lo be inlercollrlccti:d 740.1 l3.l
for 542.1.3. r(iii) scope o1'requirements 740.r.1
- eqlripment to bc suitable for 5t2.2 shooting galleries, laDrps to be
- outdoor lightiDg. street lirfllitutc '114.512.2 pr'otectcd 740.5i.1.3
 - socket-oLltlets 740.55.1 deiinilion Pari l
- supply to t.nrpomry irstallation. - ovelload proteclion ol +il.l.to.r
RC'D protcctiorl 740.410.3 - prolective conductor of 543.2.9
- switchgeiir und corrlrolgL'ar, access - to srpply elluiprrlrJnt pl'oduciltg
oDly by key or lool 740.51 high proteclive condlrctor
- wil'ing svstenrs 740.5) cu1'rent 543.7 .2.2011t)
Fault. dclinitiou Part 2 - scpar-atc contr'ol ol 314.2
IarLlt cuffent frd? .r1vt Shott tircuit - scpar-ation of 314.4
Fire alaul syslelns - l10.1.3(v)
dL'lilii1ion Pafi 2 - cables 1br exhibitions whete no
prospective /rcr a/lro P7o\'P(r( tll. systeir'l 7 |.52)
lAu I I (: ui't t,]t I )'. ( ! t:c .l so P t'o spe c I i |e - segregation lioln olher cilcuits 528.1Note 2
,iIr)t'I1 it't itit a1tt tc]1tl 434.1 - standarcl tbr 560.10
- protection agairtst - Sec 410 - supplies fbr Chap 56
Scc 434
- ronLluctors in palallcl 4)4.4 Fire a[thority, locdl. sitir]g of
- dcvieos lir 432.1 llrclighter's switcll 53't .4.2.2
432.3 Firc baniers 52'7.1
Sec 415 642.1(vii)
-omission ofde!iccs lor Fle corrdititlns, saf'cty selvices lbt 560.5.1
-position olrlevices for 434.2 560.5.2
Fault protection /re. .t I to,4 utotnu Ii t 560.8.1
di.tLlrtne(tit)tt r)/ tuppl-\') - Firc extinguishilg dcvices, orrission
- addilionalprotectiur 4l I.1.3 of orerload protectiorl in cirouits
Scc 415 supplying 433.3.3(iv)
- aLrtonratic disconrtectiol in case of Fire, protection againsl Sec 527
l'ault 4l r. r (ii) - agriculiural iDstallatiors 705.122
4l 1.3.2
- definition Part 2 - applicability ol Regulaiions to r3r.r(ii)
- doublc or r-eil1f-orced ilrsulation 4 t2.2 - circuits fbr sataty services 560.7.2
- elec1,'icalsepal.ation 4 t _l.l - consunrer units. dolnestic 421.1.201
linclional extra-lo\\ \ohagr' - dcliccs for Sec 532
4r 1.7.3 - ccluip rent coDtaining fliuntnablc
- plinciple
t'urdal11enlirl 131.2.2 liquid 42t.1.5
- gcncrating sL'ts. \!hcrc instalialjon - equiplneut enclosurc constrLlcted
includes 5s t ..1 duriug eleotiol 42t.1.6
- inspcction and testing Chap 64 - cquipnlcnr, li\ed 421.1.2 to 4
oniissioll oltbr ceflairr ilenls of - exhibitions 711.422
equiPrncnt 410.3.9 - fir'e hazatcl to ad.jacent matelials 42t. ). .t
- reduced lo\r rcltage s)stcnls 41 1.8.3 42t.1.2
scoPe of rcquiremcnls 410.1 - lirc hazard to lixed object or'
SELV oI PELV s)stenls 114.2 building clernent 42t.1.4
- single l'ault conditions, provided lbr Sec 410 - llre-resislart scrccning ot enclosure 42.t.t.2
special locations Pan 7 42t.t.3
- special neasrn'es Sec 418 421.l.201
421.1.6
Faulla, hazard Io wiring system 522. r0.1
fire-segregatedcorllpa meul.
Feedbaok. D(' 331. J(ix)
prccautiolrs within 52'7.1
FELY tee l-undiondl ertftrlorr
hcal dissipalioD of eqLLiplncnt 421.1.2(iiD
heating coDductors and cables 554.4
Ferronugnetic cnclosures 521.5. I

Filters. prescnce of 5 5 1 .4..t .1 .2 sLl ace telnpcrfl lure of equipnrcllt 42).1.2

Final circuit, detiri(ior1 Part : - thelnlal ladiation 420.1(i)
Firul circuits ' - \\ hcre particular-risks Sec 422

- Firefighler's slvitch -
allallgc1lrerlt ot, gcnera] Sec 314
- connection to sepamtc \!ays 314.4 - provision ol 537.4.2

- corltlol of 31,1.1
- rcquirernents 531 .4

- discolrnection tjrnes. for car'thing Firelightrng systetus. cables fbr 560.

aod autonalic discomection .\de F'irc-l'csisunt'
Disconue(Iid1 titttcs serccns or cllclosures fo1 cqurlnent 421.1.2
earth fault loop impedances see 42t .t.3
Eart lt JLur I t kxtp itnpeda nt e 421.t.201
421.1.6
Durnber of poil'Its supplied by 31,1.3
structurll elelncnts, cablcs passil1g
number requircd 31,1.3
tlllouglr, sealirg alound 527.2
radial -
Iixed equiprrsrt /rec dlso Equiplllent,
- a[angenents lbr household and
/txetll -
siIr1ilar prenrises Appx l5
- to supply ccluiprrrent producing
- tlclilitrort Part 2

iigh prutcctive conductor - hcat di!sipation 421.1.2(iii)

current 541.7.2.201(ii) Firlng ol luninaircs 559.5.2
ring - 4.11.r.204 Flamurable licprrd, in eqtriptrent 421.1.5
- auargements fbr household and f lexiblc cable. cletinitiol Pan2
siurilar premises Appx 15
- contilluil) t.sl 643.2.I

4- 537
Flexible cables sc'c' Cutbles. llerible Fused plugs 553.1.3
Flexible conduits. ptohibitcd as Ftses (see also Oven:mtcl1t proleclive
nr-oteclive collductolS 543.2.3
Iloor heating systenrs fsee d/so - accessible to ordinary Persons 533.1.2.2
Embeddcd heatirg systems./ Sec 753 - cartridge typc, prefered 533.1.2.3
Floor-wannirg cable 554.4.4 - fault protcction by 432.3
FlooN - 533.3
- cables passittg thtor.rgh 527.2.t - functional switching. not for Table 537.4
- cables under 522.6.201 - in plugs 553.1.3
- conducti\c. in eafihJiec bonded - marking of 533.1.2.2(i)
location 4t8.2.4 - non-irterchangeability of links s33.1.2.2(ii)
- irsulating. r'esistance ol 4l 8.1.5 - overload and fault protection bY 432.t
- $irirg systefi btlricd in 522.8.1 - overload protection bY
Flora. hazard to wiring sYstenr 522.9 533.)
Fluct ating loads J.c a).ttlit louds - prohibited in ealthed neutral t32.14.2
Forced air heating systelns 424.1 - rated currcnt to be indicated 533.1 .l
Foreign Standalds 5 .l - selection of 533.1to 3

Foundation cafih elcctfodes 542.2.3 - semi-enclosed -

Fountains i/tee d1s.r Srtinnning pools) -Scc 102 - elements for 533.1.2.3
- equipment. mechanical protectiorl - overload protection bY 433.t.202
of 702.55.3 - shock ptotection by 41t.4.20t
- luminaires in zones 702.55.3 4t1.4.203
- protective measures 70).4 10 .3 .4.2 single-pole. in line only t32.14.1
- scope ofleqlire ents relatillg to 102.1| Fusing factor 533.1.2.2(ii)
'702.522.23
- wiring. additional rcquire]nents G
- zones 702.32
Fig 702.4 Gangways see Opercting a d
t11oi tenalnce ga guaYs
- zone 2 not applicable 702.32(iii)
Gas installation pipe, definition Pa2
FleqLlcrcy - 544.1.2
Gas meters
- etTect o[ culTclt-canling capacity
ofconductors Appx 4 sec 5.3 Gas pipes -
main bonding ofserice 4 t| .3.t.2
- high. oscillations 331.1(x)
544.t.2
- ofperiodic inspeclion and testing Sec 652
prohibited as earth electrode 542.2.6
- sLritability ofeqLripl11ent lbr
5l2.l.l - prohibited as protective conductor 543.2.3
- supply. assessolenl of 313.r(ii) General chamcteristics of installation,
assess1nent of Part 3
FLinctional bondlDg conductol.
deinition Paft 2 Generating sets f.!ee 4lso Standby
sltpplies) - Sec 551
FunclioDal cafthitg -
- definition Part 2 - altemative to distributor's network,
additional requirements 551.6
- equipment with high protectivc
- disconnection to prevent danger or
conductor cuLrents 5,13.7
damage 551.2.3
- protectivc earthing in relation to 542.1.1
- eafthing arangements for 551.4.3.2.1
s43.5.l
Funciional extra-low voltage FELV.
- extra-low voltage -
definition Pafi 2 - self-contained equipment, section
not applicable to 551.1
Functional cxtra-lo\\ voitage systel1N -
- application ol 4|.7.l - systelns 551.3

- basic protection i'or 4lL.7.2 - fault plotection 551.4

general requirements 551.2
- exposed-condtlctive-Pafis ol 4tt.7.3
- harmonjc curents. circulating,
- plugs. socket-oLltlets. etc. of 411.7.5
effects to be lir1lited 551 .5.2
- p mary circLlit of 4|.'7 .3
- isolation of 551.7.6
4l L7.4 Note
- RCD not required 411.3.3 - overcuncnt protectioll 551.5

soulces for 4tt.'7 .4 - parallei operation -

- iestiDg 643.3.2 - Precautions to Ptevent 551.6.1

Fr.mctional srvitching -
- with distributor's network 551.7

- definition Paft 2 - \!ith other generator(s) 5 51.5.2

- plovision of 463. r - ponab]e or movable 551.4.4

- sclectiot] ofdcvices tbr 53 7.3. I

- poweL sources lor 551.1.1
Table 537.4 - scope 551.1

Fundarncntal ptirciples Chap 13 - static conveftorc" installations

incorporating 551.4.3.3
Fuse. dellnitiol] Part 2
Fuse calrier. deinitioll Part 2 - stationary batteries, installations
incorporating 551.8
Fuse element. dcfi nition Pafi 2
Global earthing system 442.2.1
Fuse elements. fbr selri-el1closcd Part 2
533.1.2.3 Glossdry s ee Defi t1i t io n s
fuscs
Pafi 2 Good workmanship, fundamental
Fuse lirk. dellnition l34.l.l
princiPle
Fuse links - 559. t 0
Cround-recessed luminaires
- marking ofintendcd type 531.1.2.2(i)
Guarding of equipment. against bums 123.1
- non-intelchangcabilrtl ol 533 1.2.2(ii)
- r'cplaccable bl oldinan person 5l l. L2.2
H - swltcli lb.
1r]afu 462.1.20t
Harrnonic eurrents - - socket-o tlets lb1, seleclion 553 r 20r
cornf atibilll), ol c!]rLjpulcnt Chap 33 I
due to gcur'r-atirtr set 551.5.2
etl'cc! of. iI billanccd three phase ldentificarion (\ee LtIso Noticcs) -
Appx 4 secs 5.5, 5.6 - colour see (i)/oul'
neutralcorrductors 43).2.3 - protective devices 514.8
523.6.1 IEC see htterndtitrlall ElectrcteL'ltnic.'l
523.6.3
524.2.2 lrrrrleNiorr healers re? llater ltettters
- overload dc|ices. s..lection to take lrnpacl. darnage to wir-iirg systenrs
accoun101' 333.2.2 due tr.r 52).6
- plecaulionr 1() limit 551.5.2 Llpedauce -
- 1 plen. sjzc ol'neulml tbr - cilcuit. for autonlatic drsconnection 4 ). t .4.4
Hannonic distor-riorr l l3.l (, - eardl tault loop rse Earth liult lrxtp
551.7.3
HanironiratriJn IJoctLlIe,tts Prefacc -. eaftlring.r.e tarlilng i n t pedtu tc e
Flanlolization. r oltagc Appx 2 sec l5 Impulse voitage, rating Table 443.2
Hamronized cablc eore colouls Appx 7 l dicators -
Hanronizcd Srandald. delinition Parl 2 - cir'crLit-blcakcr ovcrcur'l-er1t sdtir]gs 533.1.3
Hazardous lrr e pan. dcfinJtion Patr2 - lirelighter's switcll 537 .1).2
llazardous-live'pafls not 10 be - fuse link, type of 533. r .2.2(i)
accessiblc. turdaurmtal r-uie Sec 4I0 - isolatiol devices, operation oI 1 L I
5 1,1.
Healrh and Salely aI \!brk ctc. Act 537.2.1
197 4 Il4.t ' rrechanical rrainterrance switclring 517.3.2.1
Appx 2 - restricted areas, wara.ing notices 418.2.5
Hcaldrcarc ccntlcs :ee L\leditttl 418.3
- switehgeal, oper'artion of renlote 5l4.l.l
Heat dissipatron oi equiprleut 421.1.2(iii) IndirccI contacr. prolcction agaiust ree
Heatcrs t-or $atcr- elc. 554.i to 3 l-uult proletlio])
Heating :rppliauccs ' hductance, ellecl on cable voltage
- agricultural prcrrises 105.422.6 dlop Appx 4(6)
bathlooms, for water 701.55(x) lndLLctive electrical e11etgy. discharye
whcrc ir)rr-cns.d lilc r isk. to bc fixcd 422.1.203 of 462.4
Hcaiing ooridLlclors and cables s54.4 lndustr'ial plugs irnd socket-outlets 553. 1.3
Sec 751 Inllucncc. Dlutual detlinental.
High pioleclive conduclor cLlneDts - pr-cvcntiorr of 132.
- ear'!lling requircnrcnts 543.7 Sec 515
- inlonnation to be plor ided 543.7. 1.205 I[lbrmation technology. circuits for t32.3
High flequency oscillations 311.1(x) Ingress ploteclrol -!cc Dagr?e .,/
LIigh voltago kc li)ltLE(. tit)tninol
Pa2 lliland na\ igatiol vcssels. onshore
]l 0. r .2(ii )
supply t-or I10.1.1(xxvii)
Higll voltdge rlecuode \rater heatels Seo 730
lnlet, caravan '72t.55.1
and boilels 554.1.,1
High r'oltagc ltuninours tubc signs. lnspeclion l.!ed ah.) fe r itic ct tb n.
liccrNilg eorditions Appx 2 ltem l(vii)
Highway. clelinitiun Part 2 - accessibility tbr 132.12(ii)
Highway distribution board. dcfinition Pat.t 2 Sec 513
Ilighway distr:ibruion circuit. - detinition Pafi 2
deliDitior ['a( 2 - cxhibitions 711.6
tliglrway porier supply. definiliorl Pa 2 - 1'airgr oulds 710.6
Higlllvay po$,cr sr.Lpplics /sce alro - iritial, checklist 612.3 I

Sttaet floltiutc ) - illitial, requircmenl ti)r 131.2.t

ilppli!'atiou of secrior) 1t4.r 6,11. I

discolucctiolr time 114.41t .202 - periodic - Chap 65

rsolation and switching 1r4.531 altemative ar]'angeulelts
isolatiolr bv distribulor"s cut-ou1. - asscssmeni tbr maintainability 341.r
approval lccdcd 111.531.2.t.202 - calavalls Fig 721
notices- exernplioD lionr 111.514.t2.20t conditio[ teport Sec 651
protection against electric sllock 1t4.4tt Appx 6
-tcmporary supplies 114.5t4.t2.202 examples, hst of iNpectiol items Appx 6
Hoist t\,c11. oabl,is irr 528.3.5 lieque cy ol' Sec 652
Hor-ticnltural plemises rc,e, inspcction schedule lbr donestic
A gr ic I r ra I pret t r ; e:;
t r t t t
etc plerDises Appx 6
Hospitalt ke lvlc.l ic-d I I a( Ltt i ol/s notice on 5t1.t2.t
Ho[seboar ri]c rtrl./ri,,.rr dcilnition Part 2 1econnlreodatiolr 1or, t'undamental I

t{ousehold r.rr simial installations - principle 135.1

circuit arrangel)rellts App\ l5 - requircltent lbl 65r.1
consunter' ulil, elclosur-e skilled pcrson(s), by 65 t.J
r-cquirclnent ,11l.1.201 Inspection aDd testiDg Part 6
lunlinail'es !o bc R('D protected I I I .3.,1
Appx 6

53S
lnslallatio[ - Isolatiou - ChaP 46
Sec 537
- circuit afangements 132.3
Sec 314 - agricultural prenlises 705.517.2
- ea ling anangcments 542.t.3 at o gin ofjnstallation 462.1.201
- elecr cal, delinitior Part 2 - deflnition Pafi2
- erection. good worklnanship 134.t.1 - de\ices for- selection and erection 537.2
Table 537.4
lnstantaleous waier h eale$ see W/aler
- discharge of storcd encrgy 462'4
IDStlucted perso11 (electicallY), - findamental principle 132.15.201
deflnition Pafi 2 - serreral requitemenl. fot Sec 461
(l7 l
Instructed petso[s -
- fuses for operation bY 533.1.2.2 - generatjng sets !sr.l.o
- good workrnanshiP bY 134.1.1 - group ofcircuits 462.2

- measures penlissible where - idertillcation oldevices for 537.2.7

supcrvised by 410.3.6 - main. at origin ofinstallation 462.1.201
Sec 418 - nrultipole devices 531 2'6
- safety seNices 560.6.3 - neutral conductol 46l -2
560.7.5 ;3 7.2.8

Insulatiorl - - of'f-load. secuting against unwanted

- applied during erection 412.2.1.2 or unintelltional opcning 537.2.5
4t2.2.1.3 PEN conductor not to be isolated 46t.2
- basic, definition Part 2 543.4.1
- basic protection 416.1 - plugs and socket-outlets for Tablc 517.4
- cablc. at connection to barc - prevention of unintentional closure 537 .2.4 I

conductot or busbar 526.1 - semicoDductor dcvices not to be

- co-ordination. deflnitioll Pafi 2 used fof 537.2.2
- definitiou Part 2 - single-pole dcvices for 537 .2.6

- double. definition Pafi 2 - static convertors 551.,1.3.3.3

- double, protective tncasurc Sec 412 - lvlrere orc thal] one suPPlY,
ll wan]ing notice tequired 5l4. . l
- equivalent to Class Il see Class
53'7.1.2

- functional extraJow voltage circuits 41 L7.2 Isolator -

Pa2
- joints. tirndamenial principle I34.1.4 - definition
- Iile parls 416. I - distibutor's cut-out used as 7 1 4 .53'7 .2.l .202
- morliloring. in IT systems 411.6.3 - identificalion ofputpose 531 .2.7
4tl.6.4 - off-load, securing against unwanted
532.4 or uniDtentional opening 531.2.5
538.1 - selcction ofdevicc as Tablc 537.4
560.s.3 - sclniconduclor deviccs nol to be
- non-conducling locations 418.1 used as 531') 2
- PEN conducto$ 543.4.8 IT syslem -
- protection by insulation of live palts 416.1 - autot.ansfonler'. step-up prohibited 555 1.2
- protective conductors 543.3.20 i - connection ofinstallation to Eafih 5'12.1 2.3
4t2.2.2.4 - definition Part 2
- reinforced - distribution of neutral in 41 1.6.1 Note I
- applied during erectiol'l 112.2.1.3 4l L6.5
- cleliritio[ Pa2 eanhing ol live parts irl 411.6.1
,111.6.1
- prctective measure Sec 412 earlhing impedance
- resistance of floors/walls. methods
542.r.1.1(i)
lbr mcasuing Appx 13 - exDlanatory tlote\ otl AC and DC
- 643.3 on'cnqe,ir"n,. APP\ q
resistance" testil1g
643.5
- t ils qC'eL ql\4 I

- exposed-conductive-parts i11 4l l 6' l to 5 I

- SELV and PELV circuits 414.4 - fairgrounds, not u'here altemative 740411-6
- supplenrcntary- applied during - lirst tault in 411.6.1 to 4 I

.ie.t,on 412 2.1 .2

- definition
supplementary, Pafi 2 - insulation ofequiprnent in 5l2.l.l
- in
thermal. cables 523.9 - insulation monitoting devices for 411.6.1(i)
,111.6.4
lrterference. elcctrical 528.2
532 4
Interlocking -
Sec 518
- between generating set and 560'5 3
distlibutor''s network 551.6.1
- 416.2.4(ii) - nrohile or uansDor_table units.
enclosure oPenings
pro\ i.lorr ol 7l - 41 I o
- isolation. where equipment supplied
- trcutrai distributiorl in i
41 6.1 Note I
by rnore than one circuit 5:17-1.2
41 1.6.5
- sources. to prevent paralleling of 55161 overload protection 433.3.2
International Electrotechnical
shock protective devices in
Comrrissiol (lEC) Notes on Plar 41 1.6.5
511 1 531.2.4
APPX 4 sec I signals. audible and visual 411 .6.4

IP codes scc Degree ol'Prale(lion

 J I -ife crf installlltion assessn]ent of
Jetties.ree,11Ll/'ilr./r uraintenance duri:rg 341.1
Joints - Lile salely systcrN 560.11
- cable. accessibiliq ol 526.3 Liit nclls, cables ir 52 8.3.5
- cable and conductor 134.1.4 s60.7.8
Sec 526 Lit'ting nlagrrets, olltission ol overload
- conduit s_!-sten1 543.3.6 Paotcclion 433.3.1(ii)
- earlhillg anrng!'1r1enls 542.4.2. Lighting installatiots /sec.r/sr.r
Sec 559
- enclosure of 526.5
- pNlecti! .tpplication, scope of 559.I
e conductor 5,11.1.2
541.3.3. l0t control of 559.5.1.207
541.1.6 domcstic, RCD protcction rcqLlired 4l 1.3.4
543.3.201 exhibitioru 71t.42.2.4.2
- whL'ro pafiicrLhr risk oflire 422.3.5(ii) 711.559
Joists. cables passing drrough 522.6.201 extralor,v voltage - Sec 715
Junction boxr's - bare corducto|s, requil enlents 715.52r.r06
- cilcuils telnliuaied 1n 521 .8.1 - conductor closs-scctional area,
'715.524
not pcrrnitlcd ilr zones 0 or I ol rnirimurn
swinmjn-c pool or' tountairl. - FELV plohibitcd 7 t5.4t1 .1 .20].
except fbr SELV in zone l 102.522.24 - lile lisk, precautions 7 t5.422.)06
7 t5.422.107
K
- protective devices. locatior of 715.530.3.104
k values - - SE[.V sources, irlstallation of 715.530.3.104
- in rclation to lirt'conductors Tablc 41.1 - susper'rded syste s 7 r5.521.107
- in telation to prorecrire conductors lables 5,1.2 to 6 - translblnieB, standard fbr 7t 5.414
Key l.\ee dl\t) Tu)l- li, ) - - \,oltage drop. lmited to 5?; 715.525
- fhirgrounds '7
40.5 ) - wi ng syslenls 71 5.52
- irsulating enclosures 412.2.2.3 t)ilgrounds. arnrrsc[rcnt parks aDd
- opening enelosur-cs bv 4t6.2.4(i\ cilcuscs 740.55.1
swimrning pools. equipnrent in zone fixcd llghtr11g pomt. colllrcclion to
I ()1' 702.55.4(ii) w inrrg systcrn 559.5.1
gcnclal rcqrLilcnrcnts 559.3
L high vollago signs ootsidc scopc 559.1
Labels (vec ulso llurking. llunting
rnedical locatirrns" sr.rpplics for 710.559
outdoor - Scc 714
- at ealth electlode 514.1i.1( i)
- iLcccssrbilily ol live pnrts '711.411 2.201

- bonding conduclor connectiolls 514. r 3.1(ii)

- addrtiorlal prorcctiolr by RCD 7l,1.4ll.l.l
- capacitor retailling ullarge 416.2.5
- bonding oi nctallie structlfes not
- nain carth tcrnrinal (shclc
Decessary 714.411.3.1.2
separatc) s1,l.ll.1(iii) - distribuiol's cLll-out, approval
require'd to use 114.537.2.t.202.
PVjunelion boxcs 712.531.2.).5.1
- srvitchgcal and control_ecal 5 t,t.1.1
- exteltal illfluenoes 114.512.2.t
tcmpolaly supply unit on high\\,ay 111.514.]l2.202
- isolatioir and swilching 114-537

Lacqucr', gcncr-ally not as insulatioD ,1i 6.I Note

- lloticcs, exelnptio11 liotl'r 7 r,1.5 r4.12.20r

Lamp coDlrol circLril. suilclred neutral 463.1.2

- prolection ol ecluipnrenl. lP rating 714.512.2.105
irr Fig 46.I
- slrope 7l,4.1 I

Lanrpholders -
- lcnlpomry supply uni1.label 714.514.1).202
- batleD, applicatiorl 559.5. r (iii) - poi t. fixed. connectio to wiring 559.5.1 I

- bayo|et 559.5. L205

- saLty, medical locations 710.560.9.1
'72.t.55.2.4 - tenlporary lestool1, excluded 559.l(iii)
- centre coDtact bayonet type 559.5. L206 wiring systenN 559.5
- Edisoll screw 559.5.1.206 Liglrtl)ing prutectiorl, the Rcgulatio11s
exerrptron tiour requirenrents lor not applicable to 110.2(ix)
cnclosures ,+16.2.4 Note LightninB protection systenl -
- insulation piercing. to be non- - botding of 41 t.3. t.2
rcurovablc typc 711.559.4.3 542.4.1(iv)
740.55.1.2 - retelcr)ce fu staDdaad 5,11 .3
- overcur-reot plotectiorl of 559.5.r.204 Light mg plotecdol zone -
- pendallt. sr.Litabiliry f'or nlass - corlcepl 534.1
suspcndcd 559.5.2 - delinition Part 2
- temper--alure rati[g 559.5.1.205 Lightnutg stlikes. direct 443. t.1
voltage lirrit 559.5.1.201 ,143.1.I Note I
Leakage cumcnt lr.d./ l so P t'ote.l i v Ltgl\ts .\ ce Lu t t I i I 1 u i re s
(onchkttr' ('urrcnI) - Lin tatiorl of ovel'c urrerlt, protcction
- assesslllcnt of 331.1(vii) by sou.ce Sec 436
- del'lnition Purl 2 Lirnitations, peliodic inspectio alrd
Leakage (plotc'ctivc couductor) testiug, recording of 633.2
cumelits and lesidual cu[cnt LiDe sonductor. delinition Pan 2
deviccs 53 r.3.2 Line conductoN -
Licensing. prcrniscs subject to ll5.l - cr-oss'sectional atea of 524.1
Lids in insulating crclosurcs 4r2.2.2.3 - idcmillcarior of 514.3
'lable 5l

,^ 541
 - number ofloadcd conductors 523.6 portable. collnection of 553.1.7
- overcunent dctection in 43t.t stroboscopic elfecl, avoidance of 559.9
- Protectivc conductol- sizcd in supported by flexible cables,
relatiot'l to 543.1.4 maximum mass of 559.5.2
Table 54.7 Appx 4
- singlc-pole deviccs 132.t4.1 Table 4F3A
Line. loss ol 431.1.1 suspelldcd cable connection 522.7.2
Live conductors. dclerntinatioD of - swinrrning pools 102.55.2
nuniber aDd typc Sec 312 '102.55.4
L1\e pafi. definirion Part 2 - switching for 559.5.1.207
Lir e-par1. Haza|dous-. detiuition Part 2 - synbols 559.3 Note
Li\e pal1s - Table 55.3
- baIe. in SELV and PELV circuits 1t4.1.5 - temperatule offlexible cable 522.2.20t
bare. placins out ofr-each 4t7.3.t - thennai effects. protection against 559.4. r
- basic insulation of 416. I - through rviring in 5 59.5.3

- ofSELV or PELV circriits. - track system fol 559.3.4

separalion of 414.1.1 - wiring to 559.5.2
4t 4.4.2 LV switchgear and controlgear
Livestock - asseDlbly -
- protectjvc lreasures l11 silLLations for Scc 705 - definition Part 2
740.4t5.2.t - enclosure used as protective
- wiring systenrs in locations lbr 705.5) conductor 543.2.2
Loads - - functional testing 643.10
- fluctuating.r?. a) ('/l( /o./.lt - having total insulation 412.2.1. r(iD
- rapidly l]uctualirlg 331.1(iv) M
- unbalanced l3 r .l(iii)
Local supplenrentaD, bordirg.rce Machines (see also Motors) -
BonLl i n g ; Eq u ipo trnt i t I bottcl i ng - emergency switching off 537.3.3.1Note
Locatio[s c'xposed to lirc r]sk. safeq/ 537.3.3.2
servlces n1 s60.7.2 - Regulations not applicable to 110.2(xi)
Locatio1ls. speclal Paft 7 - rotating, excitcl circuits of,
Low voltage f.tcc.rlr.) Litltuge lotr) ornission oloverload 433.3.3(i)
- range co!ered by RegLrlalions 0.r.2(i) - rotating, selection and erection of Sec 552
- systenr. redLrced ,111.8 Magnets, lifting, omission of overload
70,1.410.3.l0 protection 433.3.3(ii)
Low Vbltage Elcctrical Equipn]cl1t Main earthing temirral -
(Safet],) Regulations 20 I 6 Appx 2 sec 8 - connectior with Earth 542.1.201
Luminaire- delinition Pafi 2 - definition Paft 2
Luninaire suppotling corlPler ( t-SC). - selection and erection of 542.4
dcfinition Paft 2 Main protective bonding -
Luminair-e supporling couplcrs - conductors. selection and erection 544.1
- at llxed lighting poiots 5 59.5. 1( ii) -provision of 4r 1.3.1.2
- in FELV systeln 41t.1.5 Main linked switch for installation 462.t.20t
- in reduced low r,oltage systcnl .11 1.8.5 Maintainability. assessmellt of 341.1
- ir SELV or PELV slstcrlr 1t4.4.3 Maintenance. defi nition Pafi2
- not in circLrit relyiug on doLtble Maintenancc of equiplnent -
insulaiiol 1t2.t.3 - accessibility lbr L32.12
- purpose of 5 59.5.1.203 Sec 513
Lulninaire track svslctr l,-ee cleliltitiotl Malagcment of Health and Safety at
ol SoLke/-t)utlct iiPntt 2) 5 59.3.,1
Work Regulations 1999 Appx 2 sec 11 I

Lunrinaircs - Sec 559 Marina. definition Pafi 2

bathrooms 701.55(xi) Ma nas a11d similar locations - Sec 709 I

- caravalls 121.55.2.4 application. scope of 709.1 I

- ceiling rose fbr 559.5.1 to

equipnrent for 709.512
3
- colrpensation capacitors 559.7
709.55
- extemal influences 709.512.2
domestic. RCD protection rcquired 4 n.1.,1
houseboats, supply to -
- exlribilions 7rI.559.5
exclusion 709.1
- extla-lovv voltage 1t5.4t4
isolatior, provision for
- fairgrouncls 740.55.1.1
'7
09 .537 .2 .I . t
notice. instructions for connection
- fixing of 5 59.5.2
to shorc supply Fig 709.3
- fountains 702.55.3
overculaent protection 709.533
- genelal requilemenls 559.3
PEN conductor prohibited 709.411.4
- ground-lccessed 559.l0 socket-outlets -
- eroups having conltloll ncutral for
- height above high water level 709.553.1.13
polyphase inslallations 559.5.5
- in locations oiincreased fire risk 422.3. t
- overcunelrt protection 709.533
422.3.2 Note - RCD protection individually 109.53 t.2
122.3.8 - requirements for 709.553.1
122.4.2 supplies -
- mass susperded 559.5.2 - connections to mains. examples
- parts ofcable $ithio 522.2.201 of Figs 709.1 &2
559.5.3

q42
 nonljnill\ollagc fol 709.3 Ll. L2 - plotective measures l1ot pemritted
- wirins systcnls - 709.521.1 for use 710.410.3.5 & 6
- dis bulion circuits 109.52t.1.4 'RCDS 710.41 1.3.2. t
- not on ol abo\'ejetljes. etc. 709.521.1.5 7 t0.4t1.4
- ovcrhedd cables or condrLclors 709.521. L8 710.41-L5
710.53 r.3
- Lr[dergrouDd cables '7D9.52t.|.1
- lighting, availability of 710.560.9.1
saf'ety
Markrng lrcu a/i<r la1)el.\: lltu]'nini1
- salely sc ioes 710.56
Annex A7l0
- brLried cablts 522.8.10
- scope 710. I
- fuses 511.1.2.2(i)
- selectiolr al1d erection 710.5
- isolalillg de\1ces 531.2.1
- supple)nerltal'y bolding"
- lLrltlirtiulcs Table 55.1
recluircmcnts t'or 7 t0.4t5.2
- nreehanieal ruaintcnance su itchirg - supplies 710.313
d.\'iccs 531.3.2..4
Metals, pre!eDtio of eleclrolytic
Mass- rDa\iruLrln supportable by
actiorl 522.5.2
flexib]t'cablur i59.5.2
5.12. L3.2
Appx zl
llble 4F3A Metalwort- f.ree .1Ao t\pr)re./-
co Ll uctire1)fi1,\ ; ExI rd oct ) tts -
Materials
co duclirel)Ltrtt) -
133.5
- bonding ol 4 t I.3. L2
propcr'. usu ol 134.1.1
- ofothcr scl-\.iccs, prohibited as ear'th
Maxiulrn clemand. assessrnent of 3ll.r elec[otle 542.2.6
Marimlrur d.rrra d. \uirability ()1'
- wiling systeln, as prolective
suppl) 1i[ I13.1(v) conductor 543.2
Mc'asur'es aguirrst electr otrragnetic - wiring systerl, protection agairlst
disturbunces r,:r, l./ct t t't)nllt!:t t( t i. co1Tos1t)1l 522.5
Seo 4,14
Mines, installatiurs 1br -
Measrres of proteclron against - exclusion I 10.2(vii)
electl'ic shoek /r 10.3.3
Mechanical danagc rre .ller /rrarh d/
- open-cast 1 I0.1.3(viii)
Mrniatulc circuit-breake$ se? C i t t u i t-
breltkcr uDLl ('it'( it bt edkcrs
Mechanical nrainrrnancc. delinition Parl 2
MlDor Eleohical hrstallation Wbr-ks
Mechanical nrairrtcnancr' srr itchin-l: - Cefiificate -
- dclices tor 531.3.2 - fblrn of Appx 6
- reelutilenrtrrts Sec 46,1
-provision o1 644.1.201
Mechalical 1;r'otcctor -
Minor works. definition Parr 2
- cables bLLr ied irr r:r'otrnd 522.tt.10
Mobile eqriipDett -
- ealthillg irrritr]gcurcnts 542.1.3.1(iri) ' so lection ()1' 553.1.7
- ea hins colr(luato15 542.i - definition Pafi 2
protecti!c.onductrx\ 513.2.2 ro 6
ill non-colducting locatiorl 418.1 .6
543.3
llsed ouldoors, additional protection
5,:l,l.l
for 4 r 1.3.3(ii)
rvit-itrg systcnrs 511.6
Mobile home, deflnition Paft 2
McchaDicaL:[cs\cs -
Mobile soulce, SELV oI PELV circLlits
- cables ald conrluctols 522.6 to 8
supplied by 414.3
eafthilrg allangelncnls 5,12. i.3.1(ii) Mobile rurirs. installations of- Sec 717
' cafihirg conduel0r'\ 512.3
- application, scope ()1' '/17.t
external influenccs 132.7(vii) autonlatic discolnection of supply 7l1.4lt.l
- lault curre l l.]2 7(v) bonding. plotective equipotential '7t'7.4tL3.t.2
410.1
conneclioll to srLpply, exarnples of Figs 717.1,3 to 7
- heiiting condualor5 ard cables 5 5,1..1
exanples ofunils 1t'/.t
- plLrgs and sockcl-outl(-ts 553. L6
gerlerators, additiolul rcquirencnts
- protective corlduclols 513.2. '7
)'7.55
541.3.1
l'l' systen, provisiol of '71'7
.4|.6.2
-w iug syster1ls 522.6.l
I]oti0c, infornlation to bc displayed '7t'7.514
522.8
plugs and corurectors tbr supply
Medical location. clefirition Paft 2
cofilection 7r7.s5.1
Mcdical locatrons Sec 710
PME eaflhnlg, linritatio1ls on Lrse of 1t7.4|.4
- autonintrr disco llectlolr - socket-outlets -
- additionrl pr'otection. not in - additional protection by RCD 111.415.1
rnedical lT systenl 710.415.1
autundlic diseonlleclioll of lauh 7 t0.4|.3.). - located oulside rLnit. protection of 7l 7.55. I I

- FELV nor per-mittetl 110.41t.1

- supplies 7 t7.3t3 I

- IJ systcnr 7t0.41i.6 - wilirlg systelns - I

- _lN
s)slanr 1tn.4tr.4 - corncction to supply. llexillle
cable to be used 7t1.52.1
- TT sysrcll 710..111.5
- gas cylil1der compar'lment,
- definitioos lelarurg ro Pa2 lestictiolls
-1
I'7 .528 .3 .4
- diagrams and docrrluentalion 710.51.1.9 - internal tiriug ofunit '117.52.2
- inspectiern and testing 710.6 Monitoring devices Sec 538
- lightirg. to be supplicd b1 at le-ast
lu,o:otLraa: l l0.5 r9
- insularioi, 1or IT systenrs 538.1.1 to 3
 - safcty services 560.5.3 fuse prohibired in 132.t4.2
Monitoring. in lieu ofperiodic
rnspectjolt and lesting halmonic currents 52i.6.1 to 3
652.2
Monitor ing systerrrs. eairh 543.3.4 idcntification of 5 14.4. r
s 13 .7 .1 .20(iit) isolation of
461).
543.7.1.203(iv) 162.2
Monitor. residual current 538.4 53 7.2.8
Motor caravan. definition Pafi 2 over'cu ent dctection in 43 t.2
Motor caravan installations r.ee reduced size
Cdt'41 ctfi i .tt0I Idtions
single-phase two-wire circuit
52.4.2.3
s24.2.1(i)
MotoI contr-o1 463.3 single-pole devices prohibited in t32.14.2
Motor vehiclcs. elcctrical eclulpment
o1, Regulations applicable orlly ro switching of t32.t4
camvans aDd mobile units I10.2(iii) 46).2
I

Motors - 462.1.201
- autonlatic testarting. prevention of 463.3.1 463.t.2
552. L3 530.3.3
- control circuits 463.1.1 - distribution ot. in IT systems 4l1.6.1
- corrlrol cquiprnent 552.1.2 41r.6.5
directiorl ofrotation 463.3.3 131.2).
- excess tempcraturc protection 422.3.7
- earthing ofreduced low voltage I

- exhibitiorls. isolatiou 711.55..1.1

source 411.8.4.2
- frequent stafting 552.1.1
- link 537.2.8
I

- functional testing New nrater-ials ard inventions. use of 133.5

643.10
- line. disconnection of zl31.1.1 Nominal voltage /se., also Voltage, I

- nechanical lnai tenance. switchins

- catavans
offfbr 537.3.2. t Note 721.313.1.2
- overload protection 552.1.2 - caravan parks
- re\.e1se-cun-ent bmking 463.3.2 - delinition
708.313
I

- stc leJ. {apabrllt} ot ernclgenc)

-
Part 2
of'supply
'tt.telrirre orT lbr'
3 13.1( i)
5l -. J.J.2 I

- startc.s. co-ordination of ovcrload

- reduced low voltage circuits ,1tL8.1.2
aDd t'.ru1t proiectioll 135.2.
-SELV or PELV circuits 4l4.l.l
53 6.,1.2.2 -swirnming pools 702.4t0.3.4.t
I

- stn ing clLrtents 552. t. L

Non-compliance, defi nition Paft 2 I
- stafiing. voltagc drop 525.101 Non-condLrcting locarion. protectlon
Moulded casc circLlit-breakcr-s.ice o)- 418.1
Lit(ttit brc,:tker, (. ittuit lr.eokers - application of 410.3.6
Mouldings. equipurcnt fixed or or iu 530.,1.3 - basic requirentents 4l8.l.l to 7
Movirlg \\ alk installations. cxclusion I0.2(x)
I
- exposed-corductivc-pafis 418. 1 .2
Multiple sources. DC systerns Appx 9 - linited to special situations 4r8.1
Mutual dctdtnental influencc - - mobile equipfiellt in 4t8.t.6
- elcct(cal aud non-electrical - protective conductorsprohibited 41 8. 1.3
cquipment. prevelltion bctween 132.1 r
- resistance offloors and walls 418. 1 .5
515.1 - tesiillg 643.5
- materials. betwcel 522.5.3 Appx 13
- protective I11easures 410.3.8 Non-fl ane propagating, defi nition Pa11 2
- segreration bet[.cen circLtits 528.1 Non-sheathed cables. to be enclosed 521.r0.r
- segrcgation ofdifferent currents and Notices -
voltages, where grouped 515.2 - calavans 7)L537.2.1.1.1
- wiring systems and non electrical Fig 721
services 528.3 - firellghter's switch 531.4.4
- high protective conductor curent 543.7. t.205
- marinas Fig 709.3
Neutral - mobile or transportable units 717.5t4
-'bonowed'notallowed 314.4 - periodic inspection and testing 514.12.1
- condLlctor - - residual curent devices. periodic
- conrbined with protective testillg 5 t4.12.2
conductor see Pt\ . or.1rarol,1. 543.4 - warning -
- corrmo1l. lor groups ofluminaires altemative supplies 514. 15. I
on polyphase 559.5.5 - earth-free locations 418.2.5
- conuection to. TN-C-S system 542.t.2.2 514.11.2
- cross-sectional area ol 542.2 -
earthing and boDding connections 5l4.l3.l
- cunent-carying capacity in -
isolation of equipment 514. r l. t
polyphase cilcuit 524.2.3 -
non standard colourc 5 14. 14. l
- definition Pafi 2 plotectior by elcctrical separation4l 8.3
- disconnection, provision for 53'7.2.8 514.t3.2
- ..lechode $,ater heatets and - voltages nominal exceeding 230
boilers 554.1 V to carth 514.10. l
- emergency switching otf 465.2 NulDbcring system of Regulations,
- f'ullctional switching of 463.1.2 Notes on plalr Prefacc (opp)

544

I
 o - elechodc wat!'r heaters and boilers 554.1.2
Object ol the Regulations Chap 12 554.1.1
Obstacle. delinitior Pafi 2 ' fundanlertal principle t3 t.4
Obslaclcs. protcctiorl by - - generating set 55r.5
applicatiorl ol 4r 0.3.5 - hannonics 431.2.3
411.t 533.2.)
- basie requircments 417.2 - larnpholders 559.5.1.204
Oti\hore installatiors. Regulations not - lfue conductols 43 r.r
applicablc lo 110.2(!) - motors 431.1.I
oii - 552.1.2
- 1illed equiprrreut 42t.1 .5 - [elrlral collductor. IT systens 43 t .2.2
- pipes - - neutral conductor. TN or TT 431.2. r

- nuin bonding of serr,ice 41 1.3. L2 - pamllcl conductors 433.4

544.1 .2 431.4
-not as protective conductol' 543.2.3 - selecti\i1y 536.4.I
- serr ices. ploxirnity to 528.3 - settings ofadjustable circuit-
Oishorc supplies 1'or inland navigation brcakers 53t.1.3
Sec 730 - sor.rce. by Sec 436
- application. scope ol 730.1 - t|anst'cl switching equipmenl 536..1.3.2
- ilLrtonlatic disconnection by RCD 730.531.3 Ovcrcurrent pr'otective device
- (OCPD). definitioo Pafi 2
cables. cable nrar)ageDrent systems 710.521.101.3
- eqLripment. lP protectio[ 730.512.2.101 Overculrent plotective de! ices -
- gal',anic scpalation 7i0.3 ll. t.l02 - at oigin. assessment of 3 13.l(vi)

- isolation 730.i17.2.I - at oigin. r.rse ofdistributor"s device 433.3. r (ii0

2134.3(iv)
- PM[. ealthiug plohibited 730.,1u.4
- co-o|dination of charactcristics.
- protecti\ e rneasu-es uot pelnitted 730.410.3.5 & 6
lbr overload and t'ault cur'r-ent
- socket-outlels -
Protection Sec 435
individural protcction by RCD 730.531.3 - omissior ol
- oveLculrenl protection. individual 730.513 560.7.3
types. glouping. placing of 730.55. r - ovcrload and tault cunent
- supplics protection 432.t
Figs A730.i to 4 - overload proteclion only 432.)
- r.r'iring systcns 730.521 - safcty ser.\,ices 560.7.3 to 4
Operaling and lraintenance sangway, - selection and creclioD of Sec 533
definition Part 2 - selectivity 536.4. r
Operating and maintcnauce sang\vays Sec 729 - shock proleclion. as 4t 1.4.5(i)
- iiccessibiliq - 129.5 t3
4r 1.s.2(ii)
- gangwa)5. access lo 729.s t3.2.3 .111.6.3(iv)
- protection bv ba[icrs or 531 .2
clclosulcs 729.5t 3.2.1 - short-cir:cuit protcction only
- protection by obstacles '7
29 .5 t 3 .2.2 - tirnc/cr.ll'IeDt chal'acter'istics 1br 432.4
- closr-d rcstrictcd acccss areas A729 Appx 3
scope and asscssllrcllt 129.t Overcurrent settiugs of cir'cuit-
'729.3 breakers 513.1.3
Operating instructioos. salety Overhead lines
equipnent and seI!ices 560.7. l2 - insulator wall brackets. exemption
Opcratiorlal condiliolls. equipnrent 512. l f|om t)ult protectiorl 4 10..1.9(i)
Or-drnary per'son - - o\,el\,oltage conttol 413.4
- circuit brcakcrs. precautiolls 513.1.3 Annex 8443
- dcfinition Part 2 - placing out of reach 417.3
,l l 7.3.1
tises accessibl!'to. lype of 513.1.2.2
- maiu switch ,162. 1.201 Ovelheating. plotcclion against Sec 424

Origir of ai irlslallatiol - Overload -

- definition Part 2 - cunent. definition Part 2

- isolation at 462.1 .201 - protection against -

537.t.2 - application of
Oscillatiolls. lrigh ticcluency 33 1 .1(x)
- co-ordiration with l'aulf currert
protection Scc 435
Olher ser\ ices. bonding of 411.3.1.2
lnotoLs 552.1.2
Outdoor lighting installatiolN see
L igh t i I tg i t ts ttl I ati onsl) u tLlaot
- ornission of
Orcrcurrcnt. defi nition Parl 2 - onlission. fbr safety scl_vices 560.7.1
O\,ercul.1cnt deteclion
- parallel cooductols
- deinition Patt2 position oidevices 1br'
- line conductols 431.1 - protective devices -
- ncutral conducto-. IT systems 43 | .2.2
- lequirements lbr 430.3
Secs 432 & 433
neutral conductor. TN or TT
systenls 43 r.2.1 -selection of 533.1 & 2
Or ercr.rrrent. lirnitation by supply Ovenoltage. protcction against -
characlclislics Sec 436
. alrnosph{rrc oflgir, or duc Lr
OvercLurent- protectlon against - Chap 43 switching Sec.143
- basic requirelrenl 430.3 - categories ofequ\)menl 443.6
Table 443.2

lrF \
- deviccs (SPDs) - Sec 514 Periodic lnspectior Repon.ree
Appx I6 E le. tt'i(ol I ns tLl I L!t iafi Candit ia
oonneclion of 534.,1.8 Reporl
- rn eonjuncrion rvith RCiDs 534.1.7 Persons see Authori:ed, Skilled,
- overcul'rent proiection of 534.4.5 lnslIucted, Otdin0rl perso s
- selccrior cliteda 534.4.1 Petroleur) (Consolidaiioo)
- fundanrcltal principle 131.6.2 Regulatiors 2014 Appx 2 sec s(iii)
- Plrase couductor see I he conducttt
risk assessment l[cthod 443.5
Phase, loss ofsee lile, 1r.,.sl orl
- scope and objer'1 433.1
tcnDoraly, due to t'auh m HV or LV Phase sequence, vcrifi calion 6zt3 I
systenl Sec 442 Photovollaic r'ee sb/at phobtoltoiL-
- withstand values. eq pmcrlt "fable 4213.2 Pipes -
OveNoliages.tl'a1lsrcnt Sec 431 - eafth electrodes Ibmred by 542.2.2(i)
- 542.2.6
assessrtlenl of 33 r.1(i)
- couscqucncc of 443.4
- gas see Gaspipes
- couhol agaiDst 443.4
- oi1 see Oil pipes

- risk assessmel)! ltlethod - 443.5

- water see ll/ater pipes
- exanlplecalculaiiuls Arnex A443 Placing out ofreach. prolection by -
- applicatiotl ol 410.3.5
P 4t'/.1
Pailrt, geneftlly not as insulatjo ,116.I Note - arm's reach 411.3
Fig 417
Parallel calllcs, selection and clection
leqLlifcDents 523.1 - bare live parts 411.3.1

Parallel couductors -
- overhead liies 41-/.3

- tauLlt crulent protection of 434.4

- with obstacle present 41'7.3.2
PIan ofthc l8tll Edrtion. Notes Pretice (opp)
- ovelload protection of 433.4
o11

Plug, definition Pari 2

I'aralLel operatio ot gcncutil]g slj1 -
- Plugs -
ple!cotiou ol'!vith dislributor's
,retwolk, precautions 5 51 .6.1
121.55.2.6
- with distribLrlor's network. - clock 5s3. r .5(i)
requiremellls lbr 551.7 - corstILrctioi siles 704.511.1
Parallel opclation. sality scl\,iccs, - emergeucy switchilg otl by,
sourccs for 560.6.9 prohibitcd 53 7.3.3.3
Patk. r:atavan sr,c CZa,ral pra* - l'airgrounds. anuscllrclrt palks aDd
Palrial sLdcctivity, dciirlirion Pafi 2 clrcLlses 140 55.1
llaltitions, cables in 5)).6.202 & )
- f:rurctional extm-low voltage
systelus ,11 1.7.5
Pdrtitions lbr segregntion of circuils 528.1(iv) -lable
1'unctional swilching by 537.4
528.2(i)
PLLY sec Ptulccti'e etlru h^r
- fused. selection of 553.1.3
rtllcge, clelinitron P'dn 2
- high plotective coDdLrctor curaerlt
equiplnent 543.7.1.201
PEN conductor-, detiuitiol Pafi 2 s43.7.1.202(ii)
PEN couductors - - ilNlantaleous water heaters nol to
- oable enclosurc prohibited as 543.2.10 be supplied by 554.t.1
idcntillcation 5 t4.4.3 - isolators fablc 517.4
- isolarior or swltcliDg ol', prohibitcd 411.4.1 - rnccharical n1airterlarce, ibr
461.2 switchirg otl'lbr 537. t.i
- nol pennitted {,here tir-e r'isk 422.3.t2 - rnobile or tlansportable urits 7 t'|.55.1
rcsidual cufent dcvicc with. - rcduccd low voltage cir-cuits 4tL8.5
prohibitcd 411.4.5 - selection and erection of 5 53.1
543.4.20t
selec!ion arld erection of 543.4
- SELV or PELV circuits 414.4.3

I'endan! Iul1fluirc -
- shavers 553.1.5(i1)

- caravalls 721.55.2.4
- special cilcuits 553. L5(iii)
Plugs and Sockets etc. (Salety)
- flexible cable lirr'. rraxiruulr rDass
Regulations 1994 Appx 2 scc 9
supportable by Appx 4
'Iable 4F3A PME see Prctective ntultiple eu'thing
- tlrass sLLspendcd
Poirt (in wirirg), dclinitioD Part 2
559.5.2
Pcuetratior of buildiug, load beanlg
Pola t),. rest of 643.6
intcgrity to bc assurcd 522.8.14 Poles, rcinforced concrctc. cxerDption
from fault protcction 410.3.9(ii)
Pe rrdic ilspection and tcsting /ree
.tlio It$pection, pcrio.li() - Polluting substances, wiling systerns
exposed k) 522.5.l
341.1
- Pontoons see Mdl-irr.rs uncl sitnilur
by skillcd pclson(s) 651.5
Scc 709
- calavalls Fig72l Po(able equipDlent.ree MoDile
- tiequerrcy ol Sec 652 eqnip ie t
- limitatious 653.2 Portable g!-nerating scts 551.4.4
- l[oniloli1'lg 652.2 Potentially explosivc atmospheres.
- nolice on 514.12.1 installations irr -
- reconlrendation lbr r35.r - applicability ol the Regulations to I lo.1.l(iii)
- r'eqLrir'elnenls Sec 651 - eqlipmcit of t32.5.1
- statutoly regulations. etc. Appx 2 sec 5
 i

Potentiometer, not as FELV source 4t .1 .4 bonding, sclection and erection of Sec +1

Power demand. suitability of caaavan parks 708.i)-r.l - l-l
equipment for 133.2.4 car'aval1s 721.4 t I.3. t.l
512.t.4 'Class II'equipment in relation to 4t2.2.2.4
Power factor 3 3 1. l(xii) 412.2.3.2
Power sources lbr genemting sets 551.1.1 colour identification of 514.4.2
Powefirack, definitior Part 2 Table 5l
Powefirack system. def, nition Paft 2 collrbined \\,ith neutral conductors
Powefirack systcl]1s -
- curTeDt-carrying capacity Appx 8 continuity of 543.2.2(l)
543.2.5 to 9
- rating under lault conditions 434.5.3
543.3
- standard lbl 521.4
cross-sectional arcas 5,13.1
- voltage drop Appx 8 543.2.2,4 & 6
Prefabricated $iring syslem - 544.t &2
- defnition Pafi 2 - electrically scparated circuits 411.3.3
- in flxed ilsta]lation 521.201 418.3.4
Premises s bject to liceflsing I 15.1 exposed-conductive Parts used as 543.3.s
Prevention olmutual detrimental - gencrating sets, Potlable 551.4.4.1
influencc 1i2. 1 1
higlr cuuents in 513.1
Sec 515
- identification of 5t4.4.2
Projector. mininu:n distance of, fioin 5t4.5.2
combustible IrlateriaL 422.3.t
422.4.2
- inspection of 642.3(viij)(c)(iv)
of 134.1.1
- installation of 543.6.I
Proper materials. use
- insulation of 543.3.201
Prospectivc fault curent
- definition Pafi 2
- mobile urlits 1t7 .41t .3 .1 .2

- - non-conducti11g location. prohibited

detcmination of 434.1
in 418.1.3
643.1.3.201
- preseNation ofcontinLlity 543.3
- measurelDcni of 643.7 .3.20t
- PV installatiolls 712.54
-. suitability of protecti\ e derices
432.I to 3
- residual cu[ent device. to be
outside lnagnetic clrcuil of 531 3.1

Prospective shoft-circuit culTent at

434.5. r
- ring lirrar circuit 2X1rr.3.roU,
origin, dete dnation of 313.1(iii)
Protectiorl. additional .11 1.3.3
selcction and erection of Sec 543
Sec 544
Protection, against bums Sec 423
sepamtc 543.2.1
Protection agairst electlic shock - - street clcctrical fixtrte 714.411.203
- protectivenleasLLres Chap 41
- swiirring pools 102 415.2
- safety sen'ices s60.6.8.2
- switching prohibited iu 543 3.3.101
560.6.9
560.7.6 - l0nnn: ol less to be copper 543.2.4

Protection againsl ll re Sec,12l - testing of 643.2.1

Sec ,122 - typcs ol'. descdption 543.2
Sec 527 Protective devices.tee Ot et c ute n t
Sec 532 pt'a tect iv derices ; Res idu al
Protection agairst o\erculTent 13 1.,1 ( un?nl derices: Monik 'i|g
ChaP -t|stet16: Una[e] \'oltage, y oleclion
'13
Protection againsl o1'en oltaces Sec 443
Sec 534 Protcctive dcvices al1d switches -
Appx l6 - iderltification of 514.1.1
Protection against thennal efl!cts 1l I.3 514.8
Chap 42 - position ol 132 14
Protection against urlden oltage Scc 445 Protectivc earlhing.eee ELt t l h i n g.
Protection for safet! Pafi .1 definition Part 2
Protective bonding corductor. Protcctive equipotential bonding see
definition Paft 2 ELluipotential bo di11g, defiIrition Part 2
Protective bonding conductors Sec 544 Protectivc cxtla-low voltage (PELV).
Prctective conductor'- defi nition PaIt 2 definitiol Part 2
Paotective colductor curent - Protective exralow voltage systems -
- assessmeDt of etTects of e\cessi!e i31.1(viii) agricultural pretnises '705.414.1.5

- definitiofl Part 2 - application as protective measure 410.3 3(ir')

414.1
- equipment rtith high. requirements
for- 543.7 - bathroorDs '701.414.4.5

- 701.55(vii)
high, infomation lo be pro\ ided 5.i3.7.1.205 I

- HV electrode \ater heaters and - circuits. requirements for 414.4

boilers 55.1. L,l - conducting locations with restricted
- residual cu[ent de\ ices and 53I .i.2 l1]overre,1t 706.410 3.l0(iii)(e)
106.4t1
- suitability ol eanhing alTangements
for rll. L3.l(i0 - constructlon sites 704.410 3.10(iv) I
'7
01 .41 4.4.5
Protective conductors -
- acccssibilit-\ of connections 5-+1.3.1 - !:rhihitions- shows and stands '711.114 4.5

- ag culNral 05.5,1,1.2 - exposed-conductive-pa1ts. earthing

Prcmises ol 114 4.1
- bet\\,een separaie inslallations 5-ll. I.3.3
- live pafis of 411.4.t - RCD nol re.luiled 4l 1.i.3
- rnobile sources for 4t1.3 Reference Method 1br cable sizing Appx 4 sec 7.1
- no1ninal voltage 4t4.2(1) Regulaliot1s, Statutoly -
414.4.5 - list of
- plugs and socket-outlets for 4t4.4.3 relationship of the Regulations u,ith ll4.l
- protection by use of 4t1.2 Regulations. The -
- saLulas 703.4t4.4.5 - depattures fiom 120.l
- separation froDl other circuits 4t4.4.2 r3l. t.3
- sources tbr 4t 4.3 131.5
Protectivemeasures. shock - eftects of Chap 12

- eadh-free local equipotential - exclusions ti'onr scope of 110.2

bonding 4r0.3.6(ii) - object of Chap 12
- relationship Nith statutory
- elcctrical separation fol supply of regulatiorls I I4,I
more than one item ofcunent- - scope of Chap I I
using equipment 410.1.6(iii) - voltage ranges dealt with r 10. r.2(i), (ii)
4r8.3 Rcinlbrced concrete.\ee S1ee1
- for general application 410.3.3 Reinlbrced insulation. defi nition Part 2
- non-conducting location 410.3.6(i) Reirllblced insulation, of equipment 412.2.t
418.1
Rcliability of equipme|rt for intended
- obslacles 410.3.5
lit'e 341.1(iii)
4t7.2
Reliable dcsign 31 1.1 I
- placirg out ofreach 410.3.5
Remote switching fo| llrechanical
4t7.3
nlairtellance 164.2 I
Protective multiplc earthing (PME) - Repoft see Electriccrl /ti.ttdllation
- cornpliancc with statutory Cotklitiot Report
regulations Appx 2 sec 3
ReportiDg Sec 653
- construction sites 704.4t1.3.1
Repoting. def,nition Part 2
- definition Part 2
Rcsidertial park honcs 708.1
- elcctric vehicle chargjng Residual cunellt, definition Part 2
irNlallalions 722.4t t.4.t
Residual current device. dcfi nition Pnfi 2
Libitions '7 |.4|.4 Residual cu ellt dcviccs (RCDS) -
140.4) I .4
l,rctors lor 544.1.1
- additional protection by 41 1 .3.-l

109.111.4
- agriculturalprcnriscs 70s.41 l.l
I

105.422.1
111 .411.1
1t1/l - auto-reclosiog 53r. r.l I

- batlrooms 701.41I.3.3
- cablcs ir walls or pa itiols
PE, protection by 522.6.202
522.6.201(i)
PE\ c. '"ks 708.415.1
PE\ con
721.415.t I

706.,110.3.10(iiD(b)
- cablc an!
- 5l1.3.1 I
idcntillcatr '4t0.3.10(ii)
- isolatron or :
1.2.1 I

+1.5
- 'riJ,,rii..r- .-.J{
- S+ 3 eS
r'."iduol .urrenr.l.
:- 3 :r.:.ror
^ ;rr .u t.t
- <r<rrrur.u.
.ctr.:iiurr arrd { .415.1
^s :;r- t --' -o --S
,]. - - F'-sv:.Y6 -
L410.3.4
Perrrla r l,rnrirr.rrri- .I -:.,,
(a,'a\i,,\ i-i5: i '"-.S^Si triS"Y-f
I r .41
/40.410.3
1.3.3

- tlurrblr cablr l.rr. ttt.rrittrt.tl titoc-oq ': \^ '_' v *\

_E
'i o) 740.415.I
b)
.rrppun:rbt<
--9.$:-'^r-v i ,. .l ,S ! '-"sNS.d. -Y
532.2

- rrras\ \u.perrJcd ; 7 02.4t0 .3 .4.2(ll)

. .. ES
P..rrctrJtrUrtol,burldrrrg,loa.1b<anrr.-};,5-.S
,-t* :,
554.1.4
Iri(gr,l) lo b( a\\,rr!J 5-3 \a : -S !; -r-
Psliudrc irrsocetion arrJ t.*tt'r!r ,., , s- .i i S :
Table 537.4
al:,, lttyt, r,'tt. pc'nuJtt'' -
r
5 -r"' i .i
- a{\,,\{rr.'nr l-11 I
4t).3.1
6il 5 .".
-SE .\- i'.r:iq ;} 709.531.2
- by slillcd pers,,,It.t 9:-:
- c..a\i,r)\ l-rs -ll :-E55 i j-i ,ts 717.41Ll
7 17.,11 5. I
. trequer() srL 65i Y
-r :i < j--
"1
lirrrttatrun: 65j.2 = >" *S j
cssels 730.531.3

- rrunrrorirrg 6il.: o'

rl,riL(,rr 514.12.1 - irS*i5:i
ts, prohibited
- rcconmendation tbr 135.1 , " 4t t.4.5
Sec 651 543.4.201
lken, where
r nray op.'mte
5l L1.4.201
prclcrrcd. lbl shock prolection in Road-waflning. cables fbr 554.4.2 & 3
I l_ svsiem 4t | .5.2 Scc 753
- proteclion by. not recognized as sole Rotatirg machines /.!c., dk.)
n'reans 415.1.2 l4Llchincs. l4otot s) -
- protection against fault cunent, in - emergency switchirg off fbr 537.1.3.1 Note
senes 516.4.1.4 - exciter cir-cuits of 433.1.3(i) I

- protection against risk offire Sec 532 - selection and erectio[ of Sec 552
- protective conductor still required 41 l.i.1.1 I

415.1.) S
- reduced lorv roltage circuits with 411.8.3 Safctylightirg.medicallocations 710.560.9.l
required. lbr certain socket-outlets 4l1.3.3(i) Safety. object ofthe Regulations Chap 12
- r'equired. for mobile equipment Safety service" definition Part 2
ouldoors 4l r.3.3(ii) Saf'ety senices - Chap 35
- saunas 703.,1ri.3.3 Chap 56
- selection and erection of 531.3.I ro6 - application. scope ol 560.1
- selcctivit-v benr een 5i64I4 - automatic supply. availability o1' 560.4.1
- sirock protection b-v - - chamcte stics ofsources ofsupply I32.4(i)
3 r3.2
- eafih fault loop impedance Table 41.5
- in lT s-vstem ,111.6.3(v) - circr-rits - 560.7
- in TN system 4l1.4.4 & 5
- ol
deternination 112.4(ii)
4r .4201 fire-resistancc 560.7.2
- in TT s)'stem 4 u.5.2 & 3 - independcncc of 560.7.1
- solal photo\olraic (P\') supply 560.'7.6
systems 1t2.4t) .3.2.1.2 - lifts 560.7.8
- special locarions Part 7 - segrcgation. recommendations for528.l Note 2
- street fumiture 71,1.411.3.3 - classification ofsupplics lbr' 560.4.1
- swimming pools 702.4t0.3.4.t - contloigcal. location ol 560.7.5
702.4t0.3.4.3 - drawings of installations 560.7.10
702.53 equipment, fire protection 560.5.2(ii)
702.55 examples of 560.1 Note
-'testing 641.8 omission ofove oad protectioD 560.7.3
643.10 operatinginshuctionsfbr 560-'1.),2
- tripping. un$anted 314.1(iv) prefe ed plotective rncasurcs for 560.5.3
5l1.3.2
required to operate in fire conditions 560.5.2
- types 5i I .1.3 - sources - 560.6
Residuai operating curent -
-
accessible to skilled or inslrucled
- additional protection 41s. l .l pcrsons only 560.6.3
531 .1.6
-
as fixlrd equipment 560.6.2
- definition Paft 2
-
batteries 560.6.10 & 1l
- earth fauh loop impidaoce in
-
central pou,cr supply 560.6.10
relation to 4t l'4.4
Tablc ,11.5 -
characteristics 3 13.2
I

- selection of 5I1 ..1.2

-
classification of 560.4
I

Resistance area (ofao eanh electrode), gencrating sei frcd dA_o Getleratitlg
delinition Pafi 2
560.6.l3
irldcpcDdcnl 560.6.5
Resistance of irsularing floors and
walls ,118.1.5 - low po*.er sLrpply 560.6.I l
I

Appx 13 - nlonitoring 560.6.14 I

- not capabie ofoperatron in

Resricted accrss. oblaclas and .l10. L5 parallcl 560.6.8 I
placing out of reach - operation in parallcl 560.6.9
Residual currenl rFoiror (RC\I) - rccognized 15 r.1
applicalion 532.3 560.6.1
53 8.,1
- time. changeorer 560.4
-flot a Protecti\e deri!_a -.1I l.l Note - LmiDtcrruptiblc power supply
Rewirable fuses see frri.:. ;erzr (UPS) 560.6.12
- usc lbr other purloses 560.6.7
Ring final circuit - - ventilation ollocation 560.6.4
- arrangements f{x houiehold and
- switcllgear. localion of 560.7.5
similar premises Appx 15
- circrLit protecrir e .to:hrtor of 5,13.2.9
- wiring systenls 560.8
Salety signs r.,., IIo//.e.t - llurning
- defirition Part 2
Salety Signs Regulatiors 1996 Appx 2 sec 10
- lbr high prorecdr e .-.:odrror
Saf'ety sourccs tbr SELV ard PELV 4\4.3
culrent equiprDe 54i.7.r
Sauna. dellnition Part 2
- overload prorectioo oi lti. 1.204
Saunas - Sec 703
test oicontmurr] 6.+3.2.I
Ripple-tree \ oltage- deinfuioo l10.i.l - additionaL protection by RCDs 703.41 t.3.3

Risk assessmeDt -
- equiprrent. selection aod ereclion 703.51
- documented ui.re RCD FoaeLrtion - heating appliances 703.55
of socket-outlc nx prorrded ..111.3.3 - lighting controls '703.537.5

- method. relatrag r) - scope olapplication 703.1

protection 1.11.5 - SELV or PELV 103.414.1.5
shock protectioll rfi 703.41
 '102.410
switchgear. loaalion of 703.537.5 - swil1nrinS pools .3 .4
102.414.4
\\, iring syslctlls fin 703.52
702.51
103.32 7()2.55 I

Schr:dule rci: Di.rgrratt.r Sepalrtiun. (jle(trtca[. it\ Prute(tion

Scllcdule ol ilisPections 644.1
agairlst sho(L \L-L ElLLtl ttLll I
653.2
Appx 6
Separation, sin1pl..tc.r Si/rPle
Sclrcdulc ol'tcst rcJulls 644.1
653 2 (lhap
Appx 6 Sorvice. coltiluity ol 36
Services, Salety.!.'c Sit/ety se tt i t:es
ol lhe Rcgulati0ns Chap I l l
Shaver supply units itl balhrooms 701 512 2 &
Scope
Scr',"'cnirrg nritterlals. lbl lixed fbr
551'15(ii)
421.1.2(i' Shavers, plugs aod sockcr-oudels
cqulprnctll
421.l .3(ii) ShlDs. electric.tl equiplDellt on boarJ,
Il tire Rrgttlaliurrs rrut appri.abl< tU
llU'2rr\ I
Screus, irrsLLlating, irr Ciass
412.2 .2.2\i1) shock curent. dctirlilion Purt 2

Sca1s.suitablc, Prcsetlue o1 6a2.3(vii) Shock. electic, deflnitior Pa[ 2

Segl:gatrort lrce rrlv,, Matlal Shock. electlic, protectiul agairst Jee
Ll! fi nd I I d I i ] ilt I e t k'c ) B,lit ptt'rtLti,ttt; f.t lt P tc,ttott.
P1\'tr'r'tiott Ltgltltttt L'lct-n'r. J*'t A
I

cilauits 528.1
515.2 Shofi-circLrit cul]eoi /see also FLnll
ditlcrent cuncnts aod vohagcs delifition Pat't 2
52 ii.3
.'/rr?r/r,
non-electl'ical selvices
Shofi -cilcuit current, pr-ospective,
Sclection attd eretttoll of equipnlellt Pafi 5
detennination ar origin of
Sclectir'ity i\r'c rrlstr ( a4r'.linutkrt) Sec 536
installation 313.1(iii)
back-Lrp proteulroll 536.4.2.2 to 1
Shofi-circuit cunert rating- defi rlition Part 2
bet\\'eell dcvices irl scrics 536.4
Shoft -circuit prolcctive dcvice.
cooldi1litlion rcquirelncnts 1or 53 6.3 definition Pmt 2
cielirition Pafl 2 Show iee f,\'rlriliol?J, defi nition Part 2
dolurrcntxtion lor der' ite selcction 536.5 Shower rooms r.rc 8rrllr?or?.t
Iiri|grourrds, R(lD protcclion of Siqrmllirle ciretLrts r.. li'lnge B,LuJ I
cllcults lo frc\ida 740.410.3 i,,',,,i-.', Palt 2

tor ctttrtilluity oi sel'r ice 36 r.1(i0 Signs. electric rec /)rr.hatgc liglltirg
- livestocli ve tilation cir'ctliIs fo]' 705.s60.6(ii) Signs. waming rce Noli@-t lThrning
SELV ree 5c7-.,rr; raeil c\tt Lt lo.'\'\'olrLlgc Simple separalioll -
Parl 2
delinitioll - col1ducting looatjons. in 706.4r3.1.2
Senrictrnducttrt clovtces - - defilrition Pnfi 2
- i.{)latidl. rlot lo be usad 1or 531.2.2
- electrical separalioll. plotection by 413.l
- uot xs FLI V sourec 41t.1.4 4t3.3.2
- possibie lauh 0urrcnts Fig A5 3.1 - FELV source tbr 411.7.4
Scmi clulosed tlrscs r,:r /lrr,:.r' - mobrlc or transDortable units. IT
r.4l I b.ll
Scpa|ated cxtra-1o* \oltage (SLLV ). rvsrenr lbr 7l rr )

'712'3122
d.tinillon Part 2 - PV power systems
Sepalated cxtlalou !ohage systenls I 12.4t1 .3 .2 I .2
.4t Simultaneously accessible parts -
'7
ugricuilur-rl Pr-enlisc\ 05 4 .4 .5

- application as Prolecli\'a llleasure 410.3.3(iv) - additional protcclio[ by bolding 415.2.1 & 2

414.1
'70).414.4.5
- definitiort Part 2
batluc,otls - earth-flee local bondirlg locatiors 418.2.2
701.5 - in lT system. precaltions 4l1.6.1
0t.'7 53
1t4.4
T
- live, waming ofvoltage between 51,1. I 0.1
circuits. rcqlLirettlliDis lor - non-conducting locatjoDs 4l rJ.1.2
conductillg locations \1i l reslrictcd 41 8.1 .4
706.410.1.10
'7
06.414
- placirg out ol reach 411 .3 1

704.4r0.3.10
- suppleDlentary bonding between,
sonstruction sites
'7 protectior by ,115.2.1 & 2
04.414.4 .5 .l
- with automalic disco lectioil 41 1.3.1
equipl erlt, protcclive scparatioll of 414.4.1Note I
'7 1t .4 14 .4 .5 Single fault in IT system ser' 1I
crhibitiolls. shows and stands q sten, rtrst./Ltt!lt in
exposed-condLlclive+a s ol 414.4.4
Single insulatcd cables.sr:e Norr-
li-shtirg jnstallations. extl a-low sheullted ccfiles
\oitago 115.4t4
Siucle-ohase crrcttit. cros\-scctional
lile parls ol 4t 4.4. t
oiea of rreurrll in 524'2' I lil
mobiie sources t'ol' 414.3 Skilled person (clectrically). defiflitioll Part 2
DoDlinal voltagc 414.2(i) Skilled pelsons -
414.4.5
- and saf'ely seNices sotuces 5m 6 3
plugs and sooket-oullels lix' 4t4.4.3
- corltrol ofsaltty services by 560 7'5
553.1.1 & 2
I34.l l
good workmanshiP bY
plotection bY usc ol 414.2
- obstacles petmissible r'vhete access
'7
03 .414.4 .5
restricted to 410.3.5
fionl olhcr cilcLrits 414.4.2
scparation - Dlachu oul of rr'ach penl}issible
114.3 whe;c,l(ce..rc<lric.edtu 4lU'l'5
- to
stationarJ batteries, acccss 551'8 1
Socket-outlet, de{initioi Pafi 2
 Socket-outlets - 553.1 - cxtcnlal influerces. expected 7 t2.522.8.3
- additional protection for 4l 1 .3.3 - fault prorection. AC side 7 t2.434.1
- ag cultural and horticlrltural - isolation 712.537.2
prcmtscs 705.4r t.t - lightrling iDduccd voltages-
't05.512.2
ntinimization of 't 12.444 .1.4
705.553.I -
- bathrooms
maintenance. access fo. 7 t2.5t3.1
701.4t3 - overload piotection on DC side
701.512.3
712.433
- bonding to boxes, etc. 543.2.1
- protcctive bonding conductors 712.54
- caravan patk installations 708.553.1
- PV arrays, exirnples of Figs 712.1 & 2
- caravans. itt - '121.55.2.2 - r'equircments. scopc of 712.t
- circuits lbr - - saftty. ptotection for 712.4
- disconnection times 1t1.3.2..2
- selection and erection
- earth fauit Ioop impedances for Tables 41.2& 3
- equipmcnt '712.5
- \\'iring systenls 712.522
- clocks. for 5s3. r.s(i)
- waming iabel. live paffs 7 t 2 .537 .2.2.5 .l
- constructioli sites 704.41
Solar radiatioD -
704.5t - PV po*cr supplies 7t)5t))l
704.53 7 t2.522.8.3
- electric vehicle charging 722.55.t0t - rating f'afiors for cables. don't take
- emergenc], s\\.itchilg offby. account of Appx 4 sec 2.1
prohibired - \\ifing systen to be suitable for or
- exhibitions. shows
53 7.3.3.3
7l t.4t 1.3.3 Protected against
7t 1.55.7 il3.?,1,^"t"
- fairgrounds. etc. 740.2t I5.I Soldcred connections 526.2
740.55.7 SoLu'ce ofenerel. earthmg wher'e more
functional extra-low voltage lhil) onc <J".1.5
systems 4lL.7.5 Spacc heating appliances IZCJ
- functional switching, for Table 537.4 Special locations pa"]r l
- height of 553. r .6 Specifi cations see Stardar r/s
- high protectile conductor current Spotlight 42).3.1
equipment s43.7.t 4)2.1.2
543.1 .2 5s9.4.r(iii)
- household il1stallations. selection 553. t.201 71t.42).1.2
- isolation. lbr' Table 537.4 Spur'. definition Pafi 2
- lighting points. ar fixed 559.5.1(v) Stand see Exhibitiotls, definition I'aft 2
- marinas '109.531.2 Standards. British, rcfel.enced in tbe
709.533 Regulations. list Appx I
109.531 Stardards. compliance with Scc 5l l
709.553.1 Standby supplies 3 ll.2
- mechanical maintetlance. switchins Sec 551
offfbr 537.1.3 Startcrs. motor.rec Molol,J
- mobile or transportable units '/ t1 .1t 5 Staning cunents -
717.s5.1(ii) - assessment ofeffects of 331.1(v)
- onshore uDits to supply vessels 730.55.1 - suitabilit), ofequipmenr for 552.t.1
- outdoor equiprneltt. for. zli r.3.3(ii) Static conve|tors 551.4.3.3
- PELV systerns 4t4.4.3 Stationary equipnent, definition part 2
- prohibited - Statutor'y regnlations.t ee Re gt t / a ti ons,
- 'Class II'citcuits or installations 412.1.2
- emcrgency switching off 53 7.3.3.3 Steel -
- instantaneous water hcateN/ - reiDlorced concrcte poles,
boilers 554.3.3 exernption fi'om fault protection 410.3.9(ii)
- sauna heater locatiol 703.537.5 - reilltbtcement ofconcrete. use as
- provision of 553.1.7 earth elcctrode 542.2.21,t)
- reduced low loltage circuits 4 i 1.8.5 - structural netalwork" bonding of 41 1.3.1.2(v)
- selection and erection of 553.1 Storage balteries for safety senices 351.r(i)
- SELV sysrcms 4t4.4.3 Stored clectrical energy 462.4
553.1 .l & 2 Street i'umi1u.e /rec also Hightal,
- separated circuits 418.3.5 potrer slpplies) -
- shavers, for 553.1.5( ii) - definition Palt 2
- swilr'uning pools '702.4 I0.3 .1.t - doors in. barier or'enclosure to be
102..53 provided 7t4.11]..2.20t
- voltage dlop at 525 )n) - extraneous-conductive-parts need
Soil themtal resistivity Appx 4 sec 2.2 rot be bonded to 7t4.1tl.3.t.2
Table 483 - isolation and switching, devices for 7 t4.537.2.1
Soil warning. cables a1ld condLrctor-s - scope '714. t
for 554.4.2 & 3 Stroboscopic cfl'ect, avoidance of 559.9
Solat gai[ see Soltr]. rodiotion Structural elemcnts, peretration of by
Solar photovoltaic (PV) power supply wlllng system 522.8.t4
systems - StructLrml metalwork. bonding of 41 1.3. r.2(v)
- accessibility for $,ork on eqlripment 712.5 lj. I Substatioos Sec 442
- definitions associated uith Part 2 PV listing S:rnlight see Solcu radiatiott
earthing of DC live conductor 1D.312
 Super'\ ii.d insrallations. protective -
SELV circuits 102.4t4.4.5
nr.iiuras applicable only in 4 t 0.3.6 -
SELV supplles 102.410.3.4
Supplemeniarl bondirg conductors,
socket-outlcts 702.s3
.elcction and erection of 544.2
'705.544.2 - suppletncntary equipotential
bonding required '702.4t 5.2
Supplementary protectivc
equipotential bonding -
- switchgear and controlgear, locatioll
- additiol1al protcction by of 702.51
4t5.2 - underwatcr luminaires
- ag culturalarld ho icultura] 702.55.2
prclnlses '705.415.2.t - wiring systems 702.52
705.544.2
- zolles 702.32
- batlirooms and shower rooms 701.4t5.2
S!vitch, linked -
- conducting locations. resfficted 706.410.3.10(ii0
- dcfinition PaIt 2
- conductors. coltinuity of, testing 643.2.1(i)
- inserted in neutral 132.14.2
- conductors. selection a1ld sizing 544.2 - iustantaneous water heaters/boilers 554.3.3
- disconDection time not ntet 4r9.3
- rnain 462.1.20t
- extr'aDeous-conductive-parl used as
- selection oftype 530.1.2
conductol lor 543.2.6 - stcp-up transfonners 55 5.1 .3
- inspcctior 6,12.3(viii)(c)(iv) Switch. mairl. lbr installation 462.t.20t
- livestock, Iocations for 705.415.2.1 Switchboard. deliniriorl Pa112
710.4t5.2.t Switchboards -
- swimming pools 702.415.2 - condlLctols ol1 526.4
702.522.21 - segregation witllin 5r5.2
702.55.I Switches -
- where static convellor illstalled 551.4.1.3.1 - bathrcoltls 70 r .512.3
Supplerncniary insulatioD. appl ied - lirefighter's 537.4
cluIlD{I crectton 112.2.1.2 - lamp coltrol circuit 463.1.2
Suppiementary insulation, defi nition Part 2 - mote than one source 463.1.4
Supplier.rc., D/.ra7.irrtor - position of, liDdamental principle l_12.14
Supplies - - prohibited in PEN conductors 461 2
- alternative, waming notice 514.15.1 54i.4.1
- caravans 72t.3 t3.t.2 - prohibited in protective conductors 541.3.3.101
conducting IocatioDS, restl icled 706.410.3.10 - silgle-pole, prohibited in neutral t 32.14.2
- construction sites 704.313 530. L3
electrically separated 413.3.2 - step-up tEnsfb, Dlers- for 555. L3
I

- exhibitions. shows and stands 7ll.3l3 Switchgeat -

fairgrounds, etc. 740.113 - assemblies, functional test 643.10
- functional ex[alow voltagc - definition Palt 2
systelns 411.7.1 - diagmm lbr 514.9.1(iii)
- highlvay power Sec 714 - dillerent voltages. waming 514. 10.1
inland navigatiofi vessels. wllen - for isolatiot and switching Sec 537
befihed Sec 730 - for sa1'ety services 560.1 .5
- marilus 709.311.1.2 - labelling of 51,1.l.l
rcduced low voltage circLlits 41i.8.4 - nlarking of 531.2.7
- safcty se1-vices 531.3.2.4
Chap 56
- SELV and PELV 4t 4.3 - selection and erection of Chap 53
- standby. ass(]ssment 31i.2 Switclring - Chap 46
Supply arrangemenrs a11d installation Sec 537
earfting 542.1.2 - between earthing anangements 517.1.5
Supply, nature of, asscssnlenr 3lj.l - cuflent-usiltg equipment 463.1.3
Supply systcms, prblic - - devices. back-up protection required 516.4_2.3
effect of installation equiprnellt on 331.1 - devices, selection and erection of Sec537
- switching arrcltgcments fol safety - electrode water hcaters and boile$ 554.1.2
supplies 560.6 - e erge[cy switclring otf Sec 465
- the Regulatiors not applicable to l10.2(i) - functional Sec 461
Supports lol cablcs for fixed uir.ing 521.10.202 - tirndamental priDciples for 132.14 & 15
522.8.4 & 5 - generating set. standby 5 51.6. l
Surge curent. definition P^rt 2
Sulge protection, overvoitage
- highway power supplies '7I4.537.2.t.201
Sec 443
- instantaneous uatel heaters/boilers 554.3.3 & 4
Appx 16
Surge protective device (SPD),
main switch for installalion 462.1.201
definition lnechanical n'tainterlance. lbr Sec 464
Part 2
Swin]ming pools - Sec 702
ofcircuits 463. r .l
- elect c floor heating 702.55.1(i) (iii)
overvollagc due to. protection
- equipment enclosurcs, protectioll against Sec 441 1
affor ded by 702.512.2
prohibited irl PEN corductor 46ll.2
- equipment, cunent-using 702.55.1
543.4.',l
prohibited in prorcctive conductoE 543. j.1. l0 I
l
- fixed equipment in zone l 102.55.4
- rcmote, fbr mechanical maintenance 464:2
lighting in zone I 702.55.4
- protective measurcs, application of 702.410.3.1 single pole. prohibired in neutral 131.14.2
- 5t0.3.3
scope 702.I step-Llp translb tlers 55 s. I.3 tc

-_
 Syrnbols - Tents. cilcuits tbr 708.1
- lol. diagrirms 514.9.1 708.52 r.7.I
- lunrraircs Tablc 55.3 Tenninations of cables. conductors, I

- used rn the Standard Part 2 etc. Sec 526

I
Systcm - Tenns. eafihing and protectivc
- dcfinition Parl ) conductor. illustlation ol Fig 2.I
typcs of 312.2 Testing - Sec 6,13
Appx 9 - accessibiiity olequiprnenr tbl 132. r2(ii)

T - additions and alrerations to

installations 641.5
Iclcconrmunication cables. bonding of - assernblies 643. t0
rrlctal]ic shcalh ot' ,111.3.1.2 - automatic disconnectionolsupply 643.7
Telcconrnlunioation circuits - - coolpctcncy 134.2. I

- definitioll oi \blracc Baod I Part 2 64 t.6

applicabrlityofdleRegulationsto ll0.l.3(vi) 614.5
inlcrlerencc. pre\ention of electrical 528.2 Note I 651.5
sesrei:ntion fiom other ci|cuirs 528.2 Note 2 continuity ol protective conductors 643.2
continuity ofring final circuit
Tempcrature -
conductors 643.2
- ambient -
definition
I

Paft 2
-
buried cables 433.1.203
busbar trunkire svstems
earth elechode resislance 613.1 .)
Appx 8 sec 2 eafih thult loop impedarlce 643.7.3
cables aud collductors 522.t
elect cal separation 643.4.1
Appx 4 sec 2. I
cxhibitions. tempolary installations
- clelinition PatI2 for 7l t.6
linriting clcr iccs. licaters fot liquids 554 ).t fairgrounds 740.6
FELV 643.3.2
aonductor opelating 523.1
functional 641.l0
connaclions bet$ cen co[ducto]-s
insulation -
and !qLripment 512. L5
non-conducting lloors al1d walls 6.13.5.1
522.2.201
526.21v) rcsistance 643.3
526.4 - SELV and PELV 643.4
currenl can'r inv capacitv Scc 523 - peliodic - I hap 65
enelosuaes constr-ucled during - allel-llalivc arrangclnents 652.2
er!-ctrOrl 421 l6 - assessment lbl. nlairtainability 341.1
lault cur'r-cnl Drolection 431.s.2 Fig 721
lloor and ceilins hcating svstcms '7
53 .424 .201 - conlpetent person. by 6sl.s
lloor-rvanrrrng cables 5 5.1.4.,1 - licqucncy ol Scc 652
or efcurrenl prolcclion 430.3 - nolices oo 514.12
prccaulion5. \\ here pal.ticular risk - recommelldaiion lbr. f'undalnental
ol firc Sec 422 plinciple I 35.1
-plotection asnitist burns Sec 423 requilelnent tbr 651.1
-protecti! c conduclors 543.1.3 polarity 643.6
-r\ iring svstems 522.t Prospcctive fault curreot 6,13.7.3.201
marking. luninaircs 559.5.1.2 prctective conductors. contiDuity 643.2.1( i)
Table 55.3 repeat. at'ier rectifi raliotl ol fault 64i.1
tlating oflanpholders 559.5. r.205 residual cuffent devices 643.7.1
rise i0 circuit condnctors. effect on 643.8
resistallcc Appx 3 643.10
s0unas 103.5t2.2. - r'ing linal circuit continuity 643.2.1
suftircc. ofequipnlcnt 121 .t.2 - test ceftillcates Sec 6,14
422.1.2 Appr 6
,123.1 Tlreah-es. etc.. installations ill Appx 2 lten1 7
Ternporarv - ThLrrnal el}'ccts offault cu[ent 4i0.3
- lcstoon lighring. excluded 559. I( iii) 434.5.2
714. I( iv) Thennal effects. prote!^tion against - 1ll.l
o\ cr\'ollages- proteclioD oflow Chap 42
\oltagc irlslallations against Sec 442 - burns Sec 423
seaiing arilngenlents. fi re baniers 527 .2.t.t - file caused by equipment Sec 421
ilr.!lclurc. defi Ditiotl P.t1t 2 - fire. whcrc particular risks of- Sec 422
supply unit - - equipnlent rcquirelrents 422.1
- rlclirition Pan 2 - escaPc routes 422.2
labcl stating nlaxil]lun load - locations
culTent 714.514.12.202 constlucted of conlbustiblc
Tenipomry elccffical irstallation. materials 422.4
delinition Part 2 -
fire plopagating stllictlres 422.s
I emporalJ c,lectrical illstallations -
of particular significancc 422.6
- at t'airgroLulds. amusenlent palks, -
\a ith fire isks dLle to proccssed or
clrcuses Sec 740 stored malelials 422.3
- constrrlction sites Sec 704 fhemral insulation. cables in 523.9
lbr exhibitions. shows and stands S".c 7l I Themal rcsislance of soil 523.3
i. :nrporar'y olen oltaee. delinitiotr Paft 2
Tilerllal slrcsses trn ca hing Transient ovc-rvoltaocs 331.1(i)
aIIaDgemeDls i,12.1.3.1(ii) Sec 443
TlluDdel stol l)ls -rcd 0\ er\ oltaga- Transportable ullits ree Mt)bile uDits
plote0tio1r agail]st Tripler hanlronics. defi[itiofl free,rlro
Iil1le/current character'islic\. Hor nni( cuttv ts) Part 2
overcurlent dc\iccs 412.4 Tmnking (foi cables). delidtion Pan 2
Appx l TrLlnkil1g systcl11s -
'[imc dclay - - cables and coDduclors itl Sec 521
- elec!odc $,ater heater-oI boiler equiprrent fixcd on or in 510.4.1
ploteciorr 554.1.4 - exposed to water oL high hunidity 522.3
- lbl salety serrices srpplies 3r3.2 - lire bal iels il 52',t.2.2 & 3
560.,1 - flarnc propagation rcquirenrcnts 527.1.5
- tbr u clenoltago plotcctivc devices 145.1 .) - fre sealing at flooN, etc. 521.2.t
'l-ime\. disco nectiorl r,rc
- insulating, for'elect cal separation 4I 3.3.5
l) i \c on neL: I itrl I hl tc s
- pafiitions in 528.1
TN systenl - 312.2.1
- protective colductor's lblmed by 543.2.5.',l &9
- conrroctionofcxposcd'co ductive- - sclcction of 521.6
Pdrts in 4l t.1.2
- defirlitiorl Pafi2
- socket-outlets iD 530.4.1
54 3.2.7
dc\iccs lor f'ault protection 411.4.5
TT system - 31).2.2
- exhibitions 1t | .411 .4 - automatic discon[cction ir] 41 1.5
tairyroulds 110.4|.4 - connection olcxposed-conductive-
- isolatiou arrd switching olrlcuual 16t.2 parts in 4n.5.1
5l1.2.1
- connection ofinstallatiol to Earlh 542.t.2.3
l-N-(l syslem - - dcfinition Part 2
- detinition Part 2
- devices for fault protection 411.5.2
- PEN conduclors 543.4
- disconnection tilnes fbr 41t.3.2.)
- prohibited lbr aglcuitural ard 4) 1.3.2.4
ho(iculural pienrises 705.41 1.4
- eafihing resistance reqLrircnleots 41t.5.3
TN-C-S sysle l - 542.1.3.1(i)
- coDrlection of irNtallatiolr eanhing eafihing resistaice var jations 5422.) &4
tcrmilal to supply neutial 542.)..2.2
- explanatorJ notes oll Fig 3.10
- defillitiorl Pafi 2
- fa lt protectiolr 41 1.5
- cxplarutory Dotes on Fig 1.9 - RCDS 411 .5.3
- isolalioD aud switohing ofneuhal 16t.2 5l L3.5.3
TN S systcrr - Tlpcs of systern earthing 312.)
- conlrcction of installatioll to earth 542.t.2.1 Type{ested equipment. Class Il 4t2.2.t.1
- detinition Pafl 2
- explanatory notes on Fig 3.8 U
- iscrlatiol and swirching ofncutml 46t.2 Ultraviolet radi.rtion, wirilrg systeus
fool, lbr alee aki) -i(d,r,i - and 522.11.1
- adjustn)cnt ol'o\crcurrcul scxings 5l3.l.i Ulrder$ound cables -
- adjustrDcntol RCDS 511.3.4.201 - caravan/ter1t pitch supplies -
disconlcctiol ol main eathi]rg installalion 108.s21.1.2
corld ctor 542.4.2 - prefened 108.s2t.7.1
- lburrtains, nlechanical proteclioD, - curent-cafl ying capacity 433.1.203
lelnoval 0f 702.55.i 523.3
- insulating barrier', removal oi 4t2.2.2.3 Appx 4
- intcranediate barier. re[roval ()1' 416.2.,1(iii) lbblc 4D4A
- crpening enclosurcs 416.2.4(t) Tablc 4E4A
Table 4H,lA
- outdoor luminaircs '7 t4.4lt .2.20),
Table:U4A
siieel tumiture. access to live
prrls 714.1|.2.201 - depth, aglicuJtural installations 705.522
]bul inslLlation of cquiprDc t 412.2.1.1(ii) - depth, gereml 522.8. i0
Total selectivity, delinition Patl 2 - fairgrounds 740.521.1
Appx 4
Traction equipruert, r'ailway, thc
Regulalions not applicable to r 10.2(ii) - ilstallation methods Table 4A2 (Nos 70.
72.'.|3)
Transt'er switching equipneit -
- back-up plotectlo0 ol 536.4.2.3
- marinas, distribution circ[its tbr 709.521.1.7

- o'ielload proteclion of 536.4.3.2

- marking ol 522. iJ.10
740.521 .t
Tmnslor0]ors - - Appx 4
mting factors for
rDh not t(n F'ELV 4\ .',7 .4
- soil themal rcsistivity Appx 4 sec 2.2
- current. omission 0foverload - type, protection aDd idcntiiicatiorl 522.8.10
ptotection 433.3.3(iii)
UndeNoltage, assessDclt ol l3 r. r(ii)
- tor electr-ical scparatiol 413.1.1(i0
Undervoltage, protcctio11 agairlst Sec 445
- f'or FELV syslem 4ll.1.4 Sec 5.15
- reduced lorv voltagc circuJts 41 L8.4
Underwater lumillaires, swilxring
- safely isolalillg. to] SELV a d pools 702.55.2
PELV systclDs 414.3(i)
Urintenuptiblc po\\,er supplics (UPS) 560.6.12
- s.rl.r(:tion an(l erectiorr ol Sec 555
Unwanted tripping of RC Ds 3 14. 1(iv)
Transiomler substation Scc 442 531 .3.2
v - socket-outlets on. urou[ting height 553.].6
Values ofk Table 43.1 - tlrcnnally ilsulating, cables in 523.9
Tables 54.2 to 6 Waming notices see Notices - Wdnli]19
Variation of installation conditions Water -
along route 523.8 -appliances producing hot 424.1
Vamish. generall-u" not as insulation 416.1Note -heate$ -
Vehicle. electric. charging installations -
and boilels. electrode type 554.1
see Electric rehicle - ha\ing ilnmelsed heati[g
Yelticles ;ce ntotor vehicles clcmcnls 551.2 & 3
Ventilation - - inbathrooms 701.55(x)
- livestock. lile support of 705.560.6 - rrarinas.selectionofequipment 109-512.2.1.1
- systern. forced 4)2.5 - pipcs -
Verificatiorl. dellnitiorl Palt 2 - as bonding conductols 543.2.6
Verification. initial - t34.2 - bonded n-rctal. for instantancous
Chap 6,1 watcr heaters 554.3.2
- Drairl bondingofinstallation 411.3.1.2
- certification for Sec 6,14 544.t.2
- examples ol items requiring - public. prohibited as eafth
inspection. lists of Appx 6 electrodes 512.2.6
- phase sequence 643.9 - wjring system in proximity to 528.3
- schedule tbr dornestic and similar Appx 6 - seryice. main bonding to 514.t.2
Vermirl. \\ iring s!'stern exposed to 522.10 - wiring systerns exposed to 52).3
705.522.10 Weight.iee Mass
Vibration - wirirlg nuterials. selection and
- camvan wiring 721.522.1.t clcction of Sec 521
- wiring slstems subject to 5)2.7 Wiring systenr, definition Part 2
Voltage - Vy'iril'rg systems -
- bands. definitions Part 2 - agriculturalpremiscs 105.52.
- drop - Sec 525 ambient temperature fol 52.2_.t
-- busbar trunking systems Appx 8 - bu ed in floor 522.8.7
- extra-lo\\ \oltage lighting 7I 5.525 camvan parks 708.52t.7
- limits Sec 525 - calavans '721.5)1
Appx ,1 sec 6.4 12t.5)2
- porvenrack srstems Appx 8 - condensation in 522.3.)
- tabulated r alues. for cables Appx '1 - construciion sites '704.s2
- exceeding lor r oltage. applicability corrosive or polluting substances,
ofthe Regularions to I10. r .2(ii) exposed to 522.5
- extra-lo\\. de6nition Part 2 damage by launa 522.10
- for insulation resistance testillg damage by- flom or mould 5D.9
- harmonization Appx 2 sec l5 erectiou of 522.8
- high see High rolrage escape rourcs in buildi[gs
- limit - exhibitions 7t |.52
- ceiling roses and Iampholders 559.5.1.201 lairgrounds. etc. 710.52
- separated circuits 413.3.2 tbrultairls. additional reqLliremcnts 702.522.23
- low - installatioD methods 521.1 to 3
- deflnitlon Pafi 2 rnaintainability Sec 529
- reduced ,111.8 lnarinas 709.521.1
- nominal - rnechanical stresscs 522.6 to 8
- assessmenl ol 313.1(i) 522.15
- deflnition Pafi 2 mctalwork of. as protective
- exceeding lio \'to eafih. conductol' 543.2
'717.52
waming of 5 1,1. r0.l lrlobilc Lrnits
- ranges covcrcd b) lhe - pcnetration of load-bearing element 522.8.14
Regulations 1r0.1.2(i). (ii) - presencc ofdust
- rcduced lo$ \,ohage circrits 41 1.8. L2 - safcty seNices 560.Ii
- SELV and PELV 1) 1.2\i\ - saLrnas 703.52
111.4.5 - sealing of pcnetrations 527.2
- suitabilit) oieqLriprnent for 5r 2.l.l - sclcction and election Chap 52
- reduced, delinition Paft 2 - solar. etc. radiation. precautions
- ripple-free. definition 410.1.1 irgainst 522.11
- segregation ofdifferent voltages - suppon of 521.10.202
within assemblies 515.2 - suirrming pools '702.5)
-. tolerances sec./er,,ition oJ Lbltage, -\'ibratioo 522..7
nomital, nole Pafi 2 -water in 522.3
Voltage disturbances. proteciion Worknranship. erection by skillcd or
against ChaP,14 instructcd persons 134.1.1
w x
Walls - \-r'a1 equiprrrerrt. R( D pr'otcctic,n in
- cables concealed in 512.6.202 to 204 Crolrp 2 iledical locations 7l0.4ll.4lo 6
- fire resistant. cables passing through527.l
insnlatins. resistancc oi .1r E.1.5
 Y
No entries.
Z
Zones -
- bathrooms, showels 10t.32
Fig 701.1
Fig 701.2
cables in walls and partitions 522.6.202
- fountains 702.32
Fig 702.4
- saunas 703.32
Fig 703
- swimning pools 102.32
Figs 702.1-3

556
-